Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
96-140
THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BY-LAW NUMBER 96- 140 Being a By-law to authorize a contract between Acquicon Construction Co. Ltd., Brampton, Ontario, for the construction of the Courtice Community Complex THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HEREBY ENACTS AS FOLLOWS: THAT the Mayor and Clerk are hereby authorized to execute, on behalf of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, and seal with the Corporation Seal, a Contract between Acquicon Construction Co. Ltd., and said Corporation,which is attached hereto and marked Schedule "C". By-law read a first and second time this 8th day of July, 1996. By-law read a third time and finally passed this 8th day of July, 1996. Mayor Cler Standard construction document Stipulated price contract Project: t x4<4 8 p ..,. s 44 k f 7t. I�SX��.,YGr i r _ � _ r Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 TABLE OF CONTENTS AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR PART 4 ALLOWANCES A-[ The Work GC 4.1 Cash Allowances A-2 Agreements and Amendments GC 4.2 Contingency Allowance A-3 Contract Documents A-4 Contract Price PART 5 PAYMENT A-5 Payment GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner A-6 Receipt of and Addresses for Notices GC 5.2 Applications for Progress Payment A-7 Language of the Contract GC 5.3 Progress Payment A-8 Succession GC 5.4 Substantial Performance of the Work GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback upon Substantial Performance of the Work DEFINITIONS GC 5.6 Progressive Release of Holdback I. Contract GC 5.7 Final Payment 2. Contract Documents GC 5,8 Withholding of Payment 3. Owner GC 5.9 Non-conforming Work 4. Contractor 5. Subcontractor PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK 6. Supplier GC 6.1 Changes 7. Consultant GC 6.2 Change Order 8. Project GC 6.3 Change Directive 9. Work GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 10. Place of the Work GC 6.5 Delays 11. Product 12. Provide PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE 13. Contract Price GC 7.1 Owner's Right to Perform the Work.Stop the Work,or 14. Contract Time Terminate the Contract 15. Working Day GC 7.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work or Terminate the 16. Supplemental instruction Contract 17. Change Order 18. Change Directive PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 19. Substantial Performance of the Work GC 8.1 Authority of the Consultant 20. Value Added Taxes GC 8.2 Negotiation,Mediation,and Arbitration GC 8.3 Retention of Rights GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY PRICE CONTRACT GC 9.1 Protection of Work and Property GC 9.2 Damages and Mutual Responsibility PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 9.3 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Materials GC 1A Contract Documents GC 1.2 Law of the Contract PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 1.3 Rights and Remedies GC 10.1 Taxes and Duties GC 1.4 Assignment GC 10.2 laws,Notices.Permits,and Fees GC 10.3 Patent Fees PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 10.4 Workers' Compensation GC 2.1 Authority of the Consultant GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant PART 11 INSURANCE-BONDS GC 2.3 Review and Inspection of the Work GC 11.1 Insurance GC 2.4 Defective Work GC 11.2 Bonds PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION-WAIVER-WARRANTY GC 3.1 Control of the Work GC 12.1 Indemnification GC 3.2 Construction by Owner or Other Contractors GC 12.2 Waiver of Claims GC 3.3 Temporary Supports,Structures,and Facilities GC 12.3 Warranty GC 3.4 Document Review GC 3.5 Construction Schedule GC 3.6 Construction Safety GC 3.7 Supervisor GC 3.8 Subcontractors and Suppliers GC 3.9 Labour and Products GC 3.10 Documents at the Site GC 3.l i Shop Drawings GC 3.12 Use of the Work CCDC Copyright 1994 GC 3.13 Cutting and Remedial Work Must not be copied in whole or in pan without the written permission GC 3.14 Cleanup of the CCDC. Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR For use when a stipulated price is the basis of payment. This Agreement made on the day of July in the year . _-N-i ne t-ten---Hundred. --and Ninety-Six ---------------------------------------------------- by and between The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington hereinafter called the "Owner" and V Aquicon Construction Co . Ltd . —---------- ------------ hereinafter called the "Contractor" The Owner and the Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK The Contractor shall: 1.1 perform the Work required by the Contract Documents for Tender No. CL-96-4 (He-Tender) Courtice Community Complex Phase II ----------- —----- insert above the title of the Work located at Concession 2 , Part Lot 29 , NOW RP10R-2447 , Part 1 to 6 Township of Darlington insert above the Place of the Work which have been signed by the parties, and for which WGA Wong Gregersen Architects Incorporated i -- ----------------—----- nserl above the name of the Consultant is acting, as and is hereinafter called the "Consultant' and 1.2 do and fulfill everything indicated by this Agreement, and 1.3 commence the Work by the day of A ug_u s t in the year 19 9-6 and, subject to adjustment in Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents, attain Substantial Performance of the Work, by the day of May in the year 19 9 7 CCDC 19ya i 0502 0 ARTICLE A-2 AGREEMENTS AND AMENDMENTS 2.1 The Contract supersedes all prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral,relating in any manner to the Work, including the bidding documents that are not expressly listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2.2 The Contract may be amended only as provided in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE A-3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.1 The following are the Contract Documents referred to in Article A-1 of the Agreement - THE WORK: • Agreement Between Owner and Contractor • Definitions • The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract * - Post Tender Addenda Dated July 16, 1996. - Letter from Aquicon Construction Co. Ltd. to the Corporation •It. of the Municipality of Clarington dated Jytly 5, 1996 . (Total of Five pages) - Addenda No . 1 dated June 23 , 1996 - Volume 1 of 4 : Architectural Specifications - Volume 2 of 4 : Detail Book - Volume 3 Of 4 : Mechanical & Electrical Specifications - Volume 4 of 4 : Soils Report - Appendix "A" for List of Specifications and Drawings - Appendix "B" Tender Form (00300-1 , -2, -3) - Appendix "C" List of Sub-Contractors (00430-1 , -2, -3, -4 , -5 , -6) - Appendix "D" Unit Prices (00310-1 , -2, -3 , -4) - Appendix "E" Alternative Prices (00320-1 , -2) - OAA/OGCA Take over procedures (9 pages total ) - Construction Schedule ( 1 page) * (Insert here, attaching additional pages if required, a list identifying all other Contract Documents e.g. Supplementary Conditions: Specifications, giving a list of contents with section numbers and titles, number of pages, and date; Drawings, giving draiaing number, title, date, revision date or mark, Addenda, giving title, number, date) CCDC-1 1994 File 00502 ARTICLE A-4 CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 The Contract Price, which excludes Value Added Taxes, is: Five Million Two Hundred Eighty One Thousand One Hundred and Fifty-Two dollars and ___ Thirty-Four cents. $ 5, 281 , 152. 34 4.2 Value Added Taxes(of 7 %) payable by the Owner to the Contractor are: Three Hundred Sixty-Nine Thousand Six Hundred and Eighty dollars and_-_Six t v S i x _ cents. $ _36-9,9, 6 8 0 . 6 6 4.3 Total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the construction of the Work is: Five Million Six Hundred Fifty-Thousand Eight Hundred and Thirty Three dollars and Zero cents. $ 5,65-0,83-3-.-0-0 4.4 All amounts are in Canadian funds. 4.5 These amounts shall be subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 3 ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT 5.1 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, and in accordance with legislation and statutory regulations respecting holdback percentages and, where such legislation or regulations do not exist or apply, subject to a holdback of__ Ten _ _ percent ( 10 %), the Owner shall in Canadian funds: .1 make progress payments to the Contractor on account of the Contract Price when due in the amount certified by the Consultant together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment, and .2 upon Substantial Performance of the Work, pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the holdback amount when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment, and .3 upon the issuance of the final certificate for payment, pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the Contract Price when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment. 5.2 In the event of loss or damage occurring where payment becomes due under the property and boiler insurance policies, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. 5.3 Interest 1 Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or in an award by arbitration or court, interest at One &;__one half .percent (_L 1/2% per annum above the bank rate on such unpaid amounts shall also become due and payable until payment. Such interest shall be compounded on a monthly basis. The bank rate shall be the rate established by the Bank of Canada as the minimum rate at which the Bank of Canada makes short term advances to the chartered banks. .2 Interest shall apply at the rate and in the manner prescribed by paragraph 5.3.1 of this Article on the amount of any claim settled pursuant to Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION from the date the amount would have been due and payable under the Contract, had it not been in dispute, until the date it is paid. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 4 ARTICLE A-6 RECEIPT OF AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES 6.1 Notices in writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of delivery if delivered to the individual, or to a member of the firm, or to an officer of the corporation for whom they are intended by hand or by registered post; or if sent by regular post, to have been delivered within 5 Working Days of the date of mailing when addressed as follows: The Owner at 40 Tempprance Street street and number and postal box number if applicable Bomanville , Ontario L 1 C 3 A 6 post office or district,province,postal code The Contractor at 131 Delta Park Blvd. street and number and postal box number if applicable Brampton, Ontario L6T 5M8 post office or district,province,postal code The Consultant at 240 Richmond Street West , Suite 401 street and number and postal box number if applicable Toronto , Ontario post office or district,province,postal code M5V 1V6 ARTICLE A-7 LANGUAGE OF THE CONTRACT ��_��the�tstrce�tai3o€ta�eata��>reAared=i>x bc�EhP�>�isl>ra�►�I=���guagea�i�ia age�at=��e- �ent��m3�al�xut�c:3'�tmxa>rth�)�xglrish�x��retsrh�srsi��sus�aglisk'�la�$g� �l�l�x�rait)r * Complete this statement by striking out inapplicable term. 7.2 This Agreement is drawn in English at the request of the parties hereto. La pr6sente convention est r6dig6e en anglais A la demande des parties. ARTICLE A-8 SUCCESSION 8.1 The Contract Documents are to be read into and form part of this Agreement and the whole shall constitute the Contract between the parties, and subject to the law and the provisions of the Contract Documents shall enure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto, their respective heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 5 In witness whereof the parties hereto have executed this Agreement and by the hands of their duly authorized representatives. SIGNED AND DELIVERED in the presence of: OWNER The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington ------------------------ name of owner signature WITNESS a amre , M Dia ure ayor name title pers _ signature Patti Barie, Clerk name and title of person signing name and title of person signing CONTRACTOR Aqui.co_n Construct ' n Co. Ltd. name a ntractor signature — WITNESS Fr ank resident name and title of person signing ------------------------------------------ signature signature name and title of person signing name and title of person signing N.B. Where legal jurisdiction, local practice, or Owner or Contractor requirement calls for. (a) proof of authority to execute this document, attach such proof of authority in the form of a certified copy of a resolution naming the representative(s)authorized to sign the Agreement for and on behalf of the corporation or partnership; or (b) the affixing of a corporate seal, this Agreement should be properly sealed. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 6 i Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 DEFINITIONS The following Definitions shall apply to all Contract Documents. 1. Contract The Contract is the undertaking by the parties to perform their respective duties, responsibilities, and obligations as prescribed in the Contract Documents and represents the entire agreement between the parties. 2. Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of those documents listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and amendments agreed upon between the parties. 3. Owner The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner's authorized agent or representative as designated to the Contractor in writing, but does not include the Consultant. 4. Contractor The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Contractor means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative as designated to the Owner in writing. 5. Subcontractor A Subcontractor is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a part or parts of the Work, or to supply Products worked to a special design for the Work. 6. Supplier A Supplier is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to supply Products not worked to a special design for the Work. 7. Consultant The Consultant is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The Consultant is the Architect, the Engineer, or entity licensed to practice in the province or territory of the Place of the Work. The term Consultant means the Consultant or the Consultant's authorized representative. 8. Project The Project means the total construction contemplated of which the Work may be the whole or a part. 9. Work The Work means the total construction and related services required by the Contract Documents. 10. Place of the Work The Place of the Work is the designated site or location of the Work identified in Article A-1 of the Agreement - THE WORK. 11. Product Product or Products means material, machinery, equipment, and fixtures forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used to prepare, fabricate,convey, or erect the Work, which are referred to as construction machinery and equipment. 12. Provide Provide means to supply and install. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 7 13. Contract Price The Contract Price is the amount stipulated in Article A-4 of the Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 14. Contract Time The Contract Time is the time stipulated in paragraph 1.3 of Article A-] of the Agreement-THE WORK from commencement of the Work to Substantial Performance of the Work. 15. Working Day Working Day means a day other than a Saturday, Sunday, or a holiday which is observed by the construction industry in the area of the Place of the Work. 16. Supplemental Instruction A Supplemental Instruction is an instruction,not involving adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, in the form of specifications,drawings,schedules,samples,models or written instructions,consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. It is to be issued by the Consultant to supplement the Contract Documents as required for the performance of the Work. 17. Change Order A Change Order is a written amendment to the Contract prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner and the Contractor stating their agreement upon: - a change in the Work; - the method of adjustment or the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Price, if any; and - the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 18. Change Directive A Change Directive is a written instruction prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner directing a change in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents. 19. Substantial Performance of the Work Substantial Performance of the Work is as defined in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. If such legislation is not in force or does not contain such definition, Substantial Performance of the Work shall have been reached when the Work is ready for use or is being used for the purpose intended and is so certified by the Consultant. 20. Value Added Taxes Value Added Taxes means such sum as shall be levied upon the Contract Price by the Federal or any Provincial Government and is computed as a percentage of the Contract Price and includes the Goods and Services Tax, the Quebec Sales Tax and any similar tax, the payment or collection of which is by the legislation imposing such tax an obligation of the Contractor. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 8 Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include the labour, Products, and services necessary for the performance of the Work by the Contractor in accordance with these documents. It is not intended, however, that the Contractor shall supply products or perform work not consistent with,not covered by, or not properly inferable from the Contract Documents. 1.1.2 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between: .1 the Owner and a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. .2 the Consultant and the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. 1.1.3 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. 1.1.4 Words and abbreviations which have well known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.1.5 References in the Contract Documents to the singular shall be considered to include the plural as the context requires. 1.1.6 The specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, consisting of the written requirements and standards for Products, systems, workmanship, and the services necessary for the performance of the Work. 1.1.7 The drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. 1.1.8 Neither the organization of the specifications into divisions, sections, and parts nor the arrangement of drawings shall control the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors and Suppliers or in establishing the extent of the work to be performed by a trade. 1.1.9 If there is a conflict within Contract Documents: .1 the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be • the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, • the Definitions, • Supplementary Conditions, • the General Conditions, • Division 1 of the specifications, • Divisions 2 through 16 of the specifications, • material and finishing schedules, • drawings. CCDC 2 - 1994 File(x)712 9 .2 drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale of the same date. .3 dimensions shown on drawings shall govern over dimensions scaled from drawings. .4 later dated documents shall govern over earlier documents of the same type. 1.1.10 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, sufficient copies of the Contract Documents to perform the Work. 1.1.11 Specifications, drawings, models, and copies thereof furnished by the Consultant are and shall remain the Consultant's property, with the exception of the signed Contract sets, which shall belong to each party to the Contract. All specifications,drawings,and models furnished by the Consultant are to be used only with respect to the Work and are not to be used on other work. These specifications,drawings, and models are not to be copied or altered in any manner without the written authorization of the Consultant. 1.1.12 Models furnished by the Contractor at the Owner's expense are the property of the Owner. GC 1.2 LAW OF THE CONTRACT 1.2.1 The law of the Place of the Work shall govern the interpretation of the Contract. GC 1.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 1.3.1 Except as expressly provided in the Contract Documents,the duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 1.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Consultant, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. GC 1.4 ASSIGNMENT 1.4.1 Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or a portion thereof without the written consent of the other, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 2.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 2.1.1 The Consultant will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written agreement as provided in paragraph 2.1.2. 2.1.2 The duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Consultant as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be modified or extended only with the written consent of the Owner, the Contractor, and the Consultant. 2.1.3 If the Consultant's employment is terminated, the Owner shall immediately appoint or reappoint a Consultant against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Consultant. CCDC 2- 1994 File 0712 10 i GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT 2.2.1 The Consultant will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents during construction until issuance of the final certificate for payment, and subject to GC 2.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT and with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time until the completion of any correction of defects as provided in paragraph 12.3.3 of GC 12.3 - WARRANTY. 2.2.2 The Consultant will visit the Place of the Work at intervals appropriate to the progress of construction to become familiar with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in general conformity with the Contract Documents. 2.2.3 If the Owner and the Consultant agree, the Consultant will provide at the Place of the Work, one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Consultant's responsibilities. The duties,responsibilities, and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in writing to the Contractor. 2.2.4 Based on the Consultant's observations and evaluation of the Contractor's applications for payment, the Consultant will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor under the Contract and will issue certificates for payment as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement-PAYMENT,GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT, and GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT. 2.2.5 The Consultant will not be responsible for and will not have control,charge,or supervision of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs required in connection with the Work in accordance with the applicable construction safety legislation,other regulations, or general construction practice. The Consultant will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Consultant will not have control over, charge of,or be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers,or their agents, employees, or any other persons performing portions of the Work. 2.2.6 The Consultant will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of•the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall make findings as to the performance thereunder by both parties to the Contract, except with respect to GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER. Interpretations and findings of the Consultant shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. When making such interpretations and findings the Consultant will not show partiality to either the Owner or the Contractor. 2.2.7 Claims,disputes,and other matters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents, except for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER,shall be referred initially to the Consultant by notice in writing given to the Consultant and to the other party for the Consultant's interpretation and finding which will be given by notice in writing to the parties within a reasonable time. 2.2.8 The Consultant will have authority to reject work which in the Consultant's opinion does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Whenever the Consultant considers it necessary or advisable, the Consultant will have authority to require inspection or testing of work, whether or not such work is fabricated,installed,or completed. However, neither the authority of the Consultant to act nor any decision either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Consultant to the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or their agents, employees, or other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.9 During the progress of the Work the Consultant will furnish Supplemental Instructions to the Contractor with reasonable promptness or in accordance with a schedule for such instructions agreed to by the Consultant and the Contractor. 2.2.10 The Consultant will review and take appropriate action upon such Contractor's submittals as shop drawings, Product data, and samples, as provided in the Contract Documents. CCDC 2- 1,994 File!X)712 1 1 2.2.11 The Consultant will prepare Change Orders and Change Directives as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 2.2.12 The Consultant will conduct reviews of the Work to determine the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as provided in GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. 2.2.13 All certificates issued by the Consultant shall be to the best of the Consultant's knowledge,information,and belief. By issuing any certificate, the Consultant does not guarantee the Work is correct or complete. 2.2.14 The Consultant will receive and review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and provided by the Contractor and will forward such warranties and documents to the Owner for the Owner's acceptance. GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK 2.3.1 The Owner and the Consultant shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities at all times for the review of the Work by the Consultant and the inspection of the Work by authorized agencies. If parts of the Work are in preparation at locations other than the Place of the Work, the Owner and the Consultant shall be given access to such work whenever it is in progress. 2.3.2 If work is designated for tests, inspections,or approvals in the Contract Documents,or by the Consultant's instructions, or the laws or ordinances of the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of when the work will be ready for review and inspection. The Contractor shall arrange for and shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of the date and time of inspections by other authorities. 2.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish promptly to the Consultant two copies of certificates and inspection reports relating to the Work. 2.3.4 If the Contractor covers, or permits to be covered, work that has been designated for special tests, inspections,or approvals before such special tests, inspections, or approvals are made,given or completed, the Contractor shall,if so directed,uncover such work,have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed, and make good covering work at the Contractor's expense. 2.3.5 The Consultant may order any portion or portions of the Work to be examined to confirm that such work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the work is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct the work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If the work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of examination and restoration. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK 2.4.1 The Contractor shall promptly remove from the Place of the Work and replace or re-execute defective work that has been rejected by the Consultant as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether or not the defective work has been incorporated in the Work and whether or not the defect is the result of poor workmanship, use of defective products, or damage through carelessness or other act or omission of the Contractor. 2.4.2 The Contractor shall make good p omptly other contractors' work destroyed or damaged by such removals or replacements at the Contractors expense. 2.4.3 If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective work or work not performed as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the amount otherwise due to the Contractor the difference in valu between the work as performed and that called for by the Contract CCDC 2- 1994 File(X)712 12 Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the difference in value, they shall refer the matter to the Consultant for a determination. PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK 3.1.1 The Contractor shall have total control of the Work and shall effectively direct and supervise the Work so as to ensure conformity with the Contract Documents. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for co-ordinating the various parts of the Work under the Contract. GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS 3.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other parts of the Project to other contractors and to perform work with own forces. 3.2.2 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall: .l provide for the co-ordination of the activities and work of other contractors and Owner's own forces with the Work of the Contract; .2 assume overall responsibility for compliance with the applicable health and construction safety legislation at the Place of the Work; .3 enter into separate contracts with other contractors under conditions of contract which are compatible with the conditions of the Contract; .4 ensure that insurance coverage is provided to the same requirements as are called for in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE and co-ordinate such insurance with the insurance coverage of the Contractor as it affects the Work; and .5 take all reasonable precautions to avoid labour disputes or other disputes on the Project arising from the work of other contractors or the Owner's own forces. 3.2.3 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Contractor shall: .1 afford the Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity to introduce and store their products and use their construction machinery and equipment to execute their work; .2 co-ordinate and schedule the Work with the work of other contractors and Owner's own forces and connect as specified or shown in the Contract Documents; .3 participate with other contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so; and .4 where part of the Work is affected by or depends upon for its proper execution the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces,promptly report to the Consultant in writing and prior to proceeding with that part of the Work, any apparent deficiencies in such work. Failure by the Contractor to so CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 13 report shall invalidate any claims against the Owner by reason of the deficiencies in the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces except those deficiencies not then reasonably discoverable. 3.2.4 Where a change in the Work is required as a result of the co-ordination and connection of the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces with the Work, the changes shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.2.5 Claims,disputes, and other matters in question between the Contractor and other contractors shall be dealt with as provided in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION provided the other contractors have reciprocal obligations. The Contractor shall be deemed to have consented to arbitration of any dispute with any other contractor whose contract with the Owner contains a similar agreement to arbitrate. GC 3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS, STRUCTURES, AND FACILITIES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the design, erection, operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary supports, structures, and facilities and the design and execution of construction methods required in their use. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall engage and pay for registered professional engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform those functions referred to in paragraph 3.3.1 where required by law or by the Contract Documents and in all cases where such temporary supports, structures, and facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results. 3.3.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK, paragraph 3.3.1, and paragraph 3.3.2 or provisions to the contrary elsewhere in the Contract Documents where such Contract Documents include designs for temporary supports, structures, and facilities or specify a method of construction in whole or in part, such facilities and methods shall be considered to be part of the design of the Work and the Contractor shall not be held responsible for that part of the design or the specified method of construction. The Contractor shall, however, be responsible for the execution of such design or specified method of construction in the same manner as for the execution of the Work. GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant any error, inconsistency,or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall be to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information,and belief and in making such review the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or the Consultant for the accuracy of the review. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor did not discover. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant. GC 3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3.5.1 The Contractor shall: .1 prepare and submit to the Owner and the Consultant prior to the first application for payment, a construction schedule that indicates the timing of the major activities of the Work and provides sufficient detail of the critical events and their inter-relationship to demonstrate the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time; CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 1.4 may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and those arising from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. As used herein"substantial defects or deficiencies"means those defects or deficiencies in the Work which affect the Work to such an extent or in such a manner that a significant part or the whole of the Work is unfit for the purpose intended by the Contract Documents. In the Province of Quebec GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: .4 those arising under the provisions of Article 2118 of the Civil Code of Quebec. 12.2.2 Waiver of Claims by Contractor As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Contractor expressly waives and releases the Owner from all claims against the Owner including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner except: .1 those made in writing prior to the Contractor's application for final payment and still unsettled; and .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS or GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES. 12.2.3 GC 12.2-WAIVER OF CLAIMS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3-RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2- DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.3 WARRANTY 12.3.1 The warranty period with regard to the Contract is one year from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work or those periods specified in the Contract Documents for certain portions of the Work or Products. 12.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper performance of the Work to the extent that the design and Contract Documents permit such performance. 12.3.3 Except for the provisions of paragraph 12.3.6'and subject to paragraph 12.3.2, the Contractor shall correct promptly,at the Contractor's expense,defects or deficiencies in the Work which appear prior to and during the warranty periods specified in the Contract Documents. 12.3.4 The Owner,through the Consultant,shall promptly give the Contractor notice in writing of observed defects and deficiencies that occur during the warranty period. 12.3.5 The Contractor shall correct or pay for damage resulting from corrections made under the requirements of paragraph 12.3.3. 12.3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining Product warranties in excess of one year on behalf of the Owner from the manufacturer. These Product warranties shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 34 PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION — WAIVER— WARRANTY GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION 12.1.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings (hereinafter called "claims"), by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the Contractor's performance of the Contract provided such claims are: .1 attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, and .2 caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, and .3 made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work,or within such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work. The Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity for claims other than those stated above. 12.1.2 The obligation of the Contractor to indemnify hereunder shall be limited to$2,000,000 per occurrence from the commencement of the Work until Substantial Performance of the Work and thereafter to an aggregate limit of$2,000,000. 12.1.3 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,the Contractor's agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of the Work. 12.1.4 GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 12.2.1 Waiver of Claims by Owner As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives and releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor except one or more of the following: .1 those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and still unsettled; .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or GC 12.3 - WARRANTY; .3 those arising from the provisions of paragraph 9.3.5 of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS and those arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the Contractor commences the Work. In the Common Law provinces GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: .4 those made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter period as CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 33 7.1.6 The Contractor's obligation under the Contract as to quality, correction, and warranty of the work performed by the Contractor up to the time of termination shall continue in force .fter such termination. GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 7.2.1 If the Owner should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Owner's insolvency, or if a receiver is appointed because of the Owner's insolvency, the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, by giving the Owner or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.2.2 If the Work should be stopped or otherwise delayed for a period of 30 days or more under an order of a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone directly or indirectly employed or engaged by the Contractor,the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have,by giving the Owner notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.2.3 The Contractor may notify the Owner in writing,with a copy to the Consultant,that the Owner is in default of the Owner's contractual obligations if: 1 the Owner fails to furnish, when so requested by the Contractor, reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract, or .2 the Consultant fails to issue a certificate as provided in GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT, or .3 the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amounts certified by the Consultant or awarded by arbitration or court, or .4 the Owner violates the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and the Consultant,except for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER, confirms by written statement to the Contractor that sufficient cause exists. 7.2.4 The Contractor's notice in writing to the Owner provided under paragraph 7.2.3 shall advise that if the default is not corrected within 5 Working Days following the receipt of the notice in writing,the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, stop the Work or terminate the Contract. 7.2.5 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above,the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all work performed including reasonable profit, for loss sustained upon Products and construction machinery and equipment, and such other damages as the Contractor may have sustained as a result of the termination of the Contract. PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION GC 8.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 8.1.1 Differences between the parties to the Contract as to the interpretation,application or administration of the Contract or any failure to agree where agreement between the parties is called for,herein collectively called disputes, which are not resolved in the first instance by findings of the Consultant as provided in GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, shall be settled in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 8.1.2 If a dispute arises under the Contract in respect of a matter in which the Consultant has no authority under the Contract to make a finding, the procedures set out in paragraph 8.1.3 and paragraphs 8.2.3 to 8.2.8 of CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 25 GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION, and in GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF RIGHTS apply to that dispute with the necessary changes to detail as may be required. 8.1.3 If a dispute is not resolved promptly, the Consultant shall give such instructions as in the Consultant's opinion are necessary for the proper performance of the Work and to prevent delays pending settlement of the dispute. The parties shall act immediately according to such instructions, it being understood that by so doing neither party will jeopardize any claim the party may have. If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were in error or at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond what the Contract Documents correctly understood and interpreted would have required, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work. GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION 8.2.1 In accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes, the parties shall appoint a Project Mediator .l within 30 days after the Contract was awarded, or .2 if the parties neglected to make an appointment within the 30 day period, within 15 days after either party by notice in writing requests that the Project Mediator be appointed. 8.2.2 A party shall be conclusively deemed to have accepted a finding of the Consultant under GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT and to have expressly waived and released the other party from any claims in respect of the particular matter dealt with in that finding unless, within 15 Working Days after receipt of that finding, the party sends a notice in writing of dispute to the other party and to the Consultant, which contains the particulars of the matter in dispute and the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. The responding party shall send a notice in writing of reply to the dispute within 10 Working Days after receipt of the notice of dispute setting out particulars of this response and any relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. 8.2.3 The parties shall make all reasonable efforts to resolve their dispute by amicable negotiations and agree to provide,without prejudice,frank,candid and timely disclosure of relevant facts,information,and documents to facilitate these negotiations. 8.2.4 After a period of 10 Working Days following receipt of a responding party's notice in writing of reply under paragraph 8.2.2,the parties shall request the Project Mediator to assist the parties to reach agreement on any unresolved dispute. The mediated negotiations shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. 8.2.5 If the dispute has not been resolved within 10 Working Days after the Project Mediator was requested under paragraph 8.2.4 or within such further period agreed by the parties,the Project Mediator shall terminate the mediated negotiations by giving notice in writing to both parties. 8.2.6 By giving a notice in writing to the other party, not later than 10 Working Days after the date of termination of the mediated negotiations under paragraph 8.2.5,either party may refer the dispute to be finally resolved by arbitration under the latest edition of the Rules for Arbitration of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. The arbitration shall be conducted in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. 8.2.7 On expiration of the 10 Working Days, the arbitration agreement under paragraph 8.2.6 is not binding on the parties and, if a notice is not given under paragraph 8.2.6 within the required time,the parties may refer the unresolved dispute to the courts or to any other form of dispute resolution, including arbitration, which they have agreed to use. CCDC 2- 1994 File(1)�i? 26 8.2.8 If neither party requires by notice in writing given within 10 Working Days of the date of notice requesting arbitration in paragraph 8.2.6 that a dispute be arbitrated immediately,all disputes referred to arbitration as provided in paragraph 8.2.6 shall be .l held in abeyance until (1) Substantial Performance of the Work, (2) the Contract has been terminated, or (3) the Contractor has abandoned the Work, whichever is earlier, and .2 consolidated into a single arbitration under the rules governing the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6. GC 8.3 RETENTION OF RIGHTS 8.3.1 It is agreed that no act by either party shall be construed as a renunciation or waiver of any rights or recourses, provided the party has given the notices required under Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION and has carried out the instructions as provided in paragraph 8.1.3. 8.3.2 Nothing in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION shall be construed in any way to limit a party from asserting any statutory right to a lien under applicable lien legislation of the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work and the assertion of such right by initiating judicial proceedings is not to be construed as a waiver of any right that party may have under paragraph 8.2.6 to proceed by way of arbitration to adjudicate the merits of the claim upon which such a lien is based. PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 9.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work and the Owner's property and property adjacent to the Place of the Work from damage which may arise as the result of the Contractor's operations under the Contract, and shall be responsible for such damage, except damage which occurs as the result of: .1 errors in the Contract Documents; .2 acts or omissions by the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors, their agents and employees. 9.1.2 Should the Contractor in the performance of the Contract damage the Work, the Owner's property, or property adjacent to the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for the making good such damage at the Contractor's expense. 9.1.3 Should damage occur to the Work or Owner's property for which the Contractor is not responsible, as provided in paragraph 9.1.1, the Contractor shall make good such damage to the Work and, if the Owner so directs, to the Owner's property. The Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. GC 9.2 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 9.2.1 If either party to the Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any wrongful act or neglect of the other party or of anyone for whom the other party is responsible in law, then that party shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage. The reimbursing party shall be subrogated to the rights of the other party in respect of such wrongful act or neglect if it be that of a third party. CCDC 2 - 1994 File 00712 27 9.2.2 Claims for damage under paragraph 9.2.1 shall be made in writing to the party liable within reasonable time after the first observance of such damage and if undisputed shall be confirmed by Change Order. Disputed claims shall be resolved as set out in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 9.2.3 If the Contractor has caused damage to the work of another contractor on the Project,the Contractor agrees upon due notice to settle with the other contractor by negotiation or arbitration. If the other contractor makes a claim against the Owner on account of damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor and may require the Contractor to defend the action at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall satisfy a final order or judgment against the Owner and pay the costs incurred by the Owner arising from such action. 9.2.4 If the Contractor becomes liable to pay or satisfy a final order,judgment,or award against the Owner,then the Contractor, upon undertaking to indemnify the Owner against any and all liability for costs, shall have the right to appeal in the name of the Owner such final order or judgment to any and all courts of competent jurisdiction. GC 9.3 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS 9.3.1 For the purposes of applicable environmental legislation, the Owner shall be deemed to have control and management of the Place of the Work with respect to existing conditions. 9.3.2 Prior to the Contractor commencing the Work, the Owner shall I take all reasonable steps to determine whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials are present at the Place of the Work, and .2 provide the Consultant and the Contractor with a written list of any such substances and materials. 9.3.3 The Owner shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness,or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to, or the presence of, toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. 9.3.4 Unless the Contract expressly provides otherwise, the Owner shall be responsible for taking all necessary steps, in accordance with legal requirements, to dispose of, store or otherwise render harmless toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were present at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. 9.3.5 If the Contractor .1 encounters toxic or hazardous substances or materials at the Place of the Work, or .2 has reasonable grounds to believe that toxic or hazardous substances or materials are present at the Place of the Work, which were not disclosed by the Owner, as required under paragraph 9.3.2, or which were disclosed but have not been dealt with as required under paragraph 9.3.4, the Contractor shall .3 take all reasonable steps, including stopping the Work,to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness, or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to or the presence of the substances or materials, and .4 immediately report the circumstances to the Consultant and the Owner in writing. CCDC 2- 1994 File 0)712 28 9.3.6 If the Contractor is delayed in performing the Work or incurs additional costs as a result of taking steps required under paragraph 9.3.5.3, the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for reasonable costs incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps. 9.3.7 Notwithstanding paragraphs 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 of GC 2.2-ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT,or paragraph 8.1.1 of GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT, the Consultant may select and rely upon the advice of an independent expert in a dispute under paragraph 9.3.6 and, in that case, the expert shall be deemed to have been jointly retained by the Owner and the Contractor and shall be jointly paid by them. 9.3.8 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,the Consultant, their agents and employees, from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of or resulting from exposure to,or the presence of,toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. This obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity set out in GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or which otherwise exist respecting a person or party described in this paragraph. 9.3.9 GC 9.3-TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 10.1 TAXES AND DUTIES 10.1.1 The Contract Price shall include all taxes and customs duties in effect at the time of the bid closing except for Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor as stipulated in Article A-4 of the Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 10.1.2 Any increase or decrease in costs to the Contractor due to changes in such included taxes and duties after the time of the bid closing shall increase or decrease the Contract Price accordingly. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES 10.2.1 The laws of the Place of the Work shall govern the Work. 10.2.2 The Owner shall obtain and pay for the building permit,permanent easements,and rights of servitude. The Contractor shall be responsible for permits, licenses, or certificates necessary for the performance of the Work which were in force at the date of bid closing. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall give the required notices and comply with the laws,ordinances, rules, regulations,or codes which are or become in force during the performance of the Work and which relate to the Work, to the preservation of the public health, and to construction safety. 10.2.4 The Contractor shall not be responsible for verifying that the Contract Documents are in compliance with the applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,or codes relating to the Work. If the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, or if, subsequent to the date of bid closing, changes are made to the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes which require modification to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing requesting direction immediately upon such variance or change becoming known. The Consultant will make the changes required to the Contract Documents as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 29 10.2.5 If the Contractor fails to notify the Consultant in writing; and fails to obtain direction as required in paragraph 10.2.4; and performs work knowing it to be contrary to any laws, ordinances,rules,regulations, or codes; the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall correct the violations thereof; and shall bear the costs, expenses, and damages attributable to the failure to comply with the provisions of such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes. GC 10.3 PATENT FEES 10.3.1 The Contractor shall pay the royalties and patent licence fees required for the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless from and against claims, demands, losses,costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention by the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable. 10.3.2 The Owner shall hold the Contractor harmless against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention in executing anything for the purpose of the Contract, the model, plan, or design of which was supplied to the Contractor as part of the Contract Documents. GC 10.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION 10.4.1 Prior to commencing the Work,Substantial Performance of the Work,and the issuance of the final certificate for payment, the Contractor shall provide evidence of compliance with workers' compensation legislation at the Place of the Work, including payments due thereunder. 10.4.2 At any time during the term of the Contract, when requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide such evidence of compliance by the Contractor and Subcontractors. PART 11 INSURANCE — BONDS GC 11.1 INSURANCE 11.1.1 Without restricting the generality of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION, the Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages specified in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. Unless otherwise stipulated,the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of the final certificate for payment. Prior to commencement of the Work and upon the placement, renewal,amendment,or extension of all or any part of the insurance,the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements. .1 General Liability Insurance: General liability insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant, with limits of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence and with a property damage deductible not exceeding $2,500. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 2100, or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 2100 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella, or excess liability insurance may be used. All liability coverage shall be maintained for completed operations hazards from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work,on an ongoing basis for a period of 6 years following Substantial Performance of the Work. Where the Contractor maintains a single,blanket policy, the addition of the Owner and the Consultant is limited CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 30 PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE GC 7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK, OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 7.1.1 If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Contractor's insolvency,or if a receiver is appointed because of the Contractor's insolvency, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, by giving the Contractor or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.1.2 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or otherwise fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and if the Consultant has given a written statement to the Owner and Contractor that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, notify the Contractor in writing that the Contractor is in default of the Contractor's contractual obligations and instruct the Contractor to correct the default in the 5 Working Days immediately following the receipt of such notice. 7.1.3 If the default cannot be corrected in the 5 Working Days specified, the Contractor shall be in compliance with the Owner's instructions if the Contractor: .1 commences the correction of the default within the specified time, and .2 provides the Owner with an acceptable schedule for such correction, and .3 corrects the default in accordance with such schedule. 7.1.4 If the Contractor fails to correct the default in the time specified or subsequently agreed upon, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, the Owner may: .1 correct such default and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor provided the Consultant has certified such cost to the Owner and the Contractor, or .2 terminate the Contractor's right to continue with the Work in whole or in part or terminate the Contract. 7.1.5 If the Owner terminates the Contractor's right to continue with the Work as provided in paragraphs 7.1.1 and 7.1.4, the Owner shall be entitled to: .1 take possession of the Work and Products; utilize the construction machinery and equipment; subject to the rights of third parties, finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may consider expedient, but without undue delay or expense; and .2 withhold further payment to the Contractor until a final certificate for payment is issued; and .3 charge the Contractor the amount by which the full cost of finishing the Work as certified by the Consultant, including compensation to the Consultant for the Consultant's additional services and a reasonable allowance as determined' by the Consultant to cover the cost of corrections to work performed by the Contractor that may be required under GC 12.3 -WARRANTY, exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price; however, if such cost of finishing the Work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the difference; and .4 on expiry of the warranty period, charge the Contractor the amount by which the cost of corrections to the Contractor's work under GC 12.3 - WARRANTY exceeds the allowance provided for such corrections, or if the cost of such corrections is less than the allowance, pay the Contractor the difference. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 24 GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 6.4.1 If the Owner or the Contractor discover conditions at the Place of the Work which are: .1 subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which existed before the commencement of the Work which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents; or .2 physical conditions of a nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then the observing party shall notify the other party in writing before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 5 Working Days after first observance of the conditions. 6.4.2 The Consultant will promptly investigate such conditions and make a finding. If the finding is that the conditions differ materially and this would cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work, the Consultant, with the Owner's approval, shall issue appropriate instructions for a change in the Work as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER or GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 6.4.3 If the Consultant finds that the conditions at the Place of the Work are not materially different or that no change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report the reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor in writing. GC 6.5 DELAYS 6.5.1 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an action or omission of the Owner, Consultant,or anyone employed or engaged by them directly or indirectly,contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents,then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.2 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by a stop work order issued by a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault of the Contractor or any person employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by labour disputes,strikes,lock-outs(including lock-outs decreed or recommended for its members by a recognized contractors' association, of which the Contractor is a member or to which the Contractor is otherwise bound), fire, unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties, or without limit to any of the foregoing, by a cause beyond the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The extension of time shall not be less than the time lost as the result of the event causing the delay, unless the Contractor agrees to a shorter extension. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs incurred by such delays unless such delays result from actions by the Owner. 6.5.4 No extension shall be made for delay unless notice in writing of claim is given to the Consultant not later than 10 Working Days after the commencement of delay,providing however,that in the case of a continuing cause of delay only one notice of claim shall be necessary. 6.5.5 If no schedule is made under paragraph 2.2.9 of GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, no claim for delay shall be allowed because of failure of the Consultant to furnish instructions until 10 Working Days after demand for such instructions has been made and not then, unless the claim is reasonable. CCDC 2 - 1994 File 0)712 23 2 salaries, wages, and benefits of the Contractor's office personnel engaged in a technical capacity and other personnel at shops or on the road, engaged in expediting the production or transportation of materials or equipment; .3 contributions, assessments, or taxes incurred for such items as unemployment insurance, provincial health insurance,workers' compensation, and Canada or Quebec Pension Plan, insofar as such cost is based on wages, salaries, or other remuneration paid to employees of the Contractor and included in the cost of the work as provided in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; .4 travel and subsistence expenses of the Contractor's personnel described in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; .5 the cost of all Products including cost of transportation thereof; .6 the cost of materials,supplies,equipment, temporary services and facilities, and hand tools not owned by the workers, including transportation and maintenance thereof, which are consumed; and cost less salvage value on such items used but not consumed, which remain the property of the Contractor; .7 rental cost of all tools, machinery, and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from or provided by the Contractor or others, including installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling, removal, transportation and delivery cost thereof; .8 deposits lost; .9 the amounts of all subcontracts; .10 the cost of quality assurance such as independent inspection and testing services; .11 charges levied by authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work; .12 royalties, patent license fees, and damages for infringement of patents and cost of defending suits therefor subject always to the Contractor's obligations to indemnify the Owner as provided in paragraph 10.3.1 of GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES; .13 any adjustment in premiums for all bonds and insurance which the Contractor is required, by the Contract Documents, to purchase and maintain; .14 any adjustment in taxes and duties for which the Contractor is liable; .15 charges for long distance telephone and facsimile communications, courier services, expressage, and petty cash items incurred; .16 the cost of removal and disposal of waste products and debris; .17 cost incurred due to emergencies affecting the safety of persons or property; 6.3.5 Pending determination of the final amount of a Change Directive, the undisputed value of the work performed as the result of a Change Directive is eligible to be included in progress payments. 6.3.6 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree on the proposed adjustment in the Contract Time or the method of determining it, the adjustment shall be referred to the Consultant for determination. 6.3.7 If at any time after the start of the work directed by a Change Directive, the Owner and the Contractor reach agreement on the adjustment to the Contract Price and to the Contract Time, this agreement shall be recorded in a Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 22 i GC 5.9 NON-CONFORMING WORK 5.9.1 No payment by the Owner under the Contract nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any portion of the Work or Products which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK GC 6.1 CHANGES 6.1.1 The Owner, through the Consultant, without invalidating the Contract, may make changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions to the Work by Change Order or Change Directive. 6.1.2 The Contractor shall not perform a change in the Work without a Change Order or a Change Directive. GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER 6.2.1 When a change in the Work is proposed or required, the Consultant shall provide a notice describing the proposed change in the Work to the Contractor. The Contractor shall present, in a form acceptable to the Consultant, a method of adjustment or an amount of adjustment for the Contract Price, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, for the proposed change in the Work. 6.2.2 When the Owner and the Contractor agree to the adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Time or to the method to be used to determine the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded in a Change Order, signed by Owner and Contractor. The value of the work performed as the result of a Change Order shall be included in applications for progress payment. GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE 6.3.1 If the Owner requires the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work prior to the Owner and the Contractor agreeing upon the adjustment in Contract Price and Contract Time, the Owner, through the Consultant, shall issue a Change Directive. 6.3.2 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the change in the Work. The adjustment in the Contract Price for a change carried out by way of a Change Directive shall be determined on the basis of the cost of expenditures and savings to perform the work attributable to the change. If a change in the Work results in a net increase in the Contract Price, an allowance for overhead and profit shall be included. 6.3.3 If a change in the Work results in a net decrease in the Contract Price,the amount of the credit shall be the net cost,without deduction for overhead or profit. When both additions and deletions covering related work or substitutions are involved in a change in the Work, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be calculated on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change in the Work. 6.3.4 The Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Consultant may require,an itemized accounting of the cost of expenditures and savings referred to in paragraph 6.3.2 together with supporting data. The cost of performing the work attributable to the Change Directive shall be limited to the actual cost of all of the following: 1 wages and benefits paid for labour in the direct employ of the Contractor under applicable collective bargaining agreements, or under a salary or wage schedule agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor, CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 21 5.5.2 After the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor and the sworn statement as provided in paragraph 5.5.1, the Consultant will issue a certificate for payment of the holdback amount. 5.5.3 Where the holdback amount has not been placed in a separate holdback account, the Owner shall, 10 days prior to the expiry of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, place the holdback amount in a bank account in the joint names of the Owner and the Contractor. 5.5.4 The holdback amount authorized by the certificate for payment of the holdback amount is due and payable on the day following the expiration of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. Where lien legislation does not exist or apply, the holdback amount shall be due and payable in accordance with other legislation, industry practice, or provisions which may be agreed to between the parties. The Owner may retain out of the holdback amount any sums required by law to satisfy any liens against the Work or, if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work,other third party monetary claims against the Contractor which are enforceable against the Owner. GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK 5.6.1 Where legislation permits and where,upon application by the Contractor, the Consultant has certified that the work of a Subcontractor or Supplier has been performed prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the holdback amount retained for such subcontract work,or the Products supplied by such Supplier, on the day following the expiration of the holdback period for such work stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. 5.6.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, and notwithstanding the wording of such certificates, the Contractor shall ensure that such subcontract work or Products is protected pending the issuance of a final certificate for payment and be responsible for the correction of defects or work not performed regardless of whether or not such was apparent when such certificates were issued. GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT 5.7.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed, the Contractor shall submit an application for final payment. 5.7.2 The Consultant will, no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application from the Contractor for final payment,review the Work to verify the validity of the application. The Consultant will,no later than 7 days after reviewing the Work, notify the Contractor that the application is valid or give reasons why it is not valid. 5.7.3 When the Consultant finds the Contractor's application for final payment valid, the Consultant will issue a final certificate for payment. 5.7.4 Subject to the provision of paragraph 10.4.1 of GC 10.4 - WORKERS' COMPENSATION, and any lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, the Owner shall, no later than 5 days after the issuance of a final certificate for payment, pay the Contractor as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT. GC 5.8 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT 5.8.1 If because of climatic or other conditions reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor, there are items of work that cannot be performed, payment in full for that portion of the Work which has been performed as certified by the Consultant shall not be withheld or delayed by the Owner on account thereof, but the Owner may withhold, until the remaining portion of the Work is finished. only such an amount that the Consultant determines is sufficient and reasonable to cover the cost of performing such remaining work. CCDC 2 - 1994 File 00712 20 5.2.4 The schedule of values shall be made out in such form and supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably direct and when accepted by the Consultant, shall be used as the basis for applications for payment, unless it is found to be in error. 5.2.5 The Contractor shall include a statement based on the schedule of values with each application for payment. 5.2.6 Claims for Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall be supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably require to establish the value and delivery of the Products. GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT 5.3.1 The Consultant will issue to the Owner,no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor submitted in accordance with GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT, a certificate for payment in the amount applied for or in such other amount as the Consultant determines to be properly due. If the Consultant amends the application,the Consultant will promptly notify the Contractor in writing giving reasons for the amendment. 5.3.2 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement- PAYMENT no later than 5 days after the date of a certificate for payment issued by the Consultant. GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 5.4.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially performed, or if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work a designated portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply for a review by the Consultant to establish Substantial Performance of the Work or substantial performance of the designated portion of the Work. Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Contract. 5.4.2 No later than 10 days after the receipt of the Contractor's list and application, the Consultant will review the Work to verify the validity of the application, and no later than 7 days after completing the review,will notify the Contractor whether the Work or the designated portion of the Work is substantially performed. 5.4.3 The Consultant shall state the date of Substantial Performance of the Work or designated portion of the Work in a certificate. 5.4.4 Immediately following the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, will establish a reasonable date for finishing the Work. GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 5.5.1 After the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall: .1 submit an application for payment of the holdback amount, .2 submit a sworn statement that all accounts for labour, subcontracts,Products, construction machinery and equipment, and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the Substantial Performance of the Work and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full, except for amounts properly retained as a holdback or as an identified amount in dispute. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 19 i performing the work stipulated under the cash allowances but do not include any Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor. 4.1.3 The Contract Price, and not the cash allowances, includes the Contractor's overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowances. 4.1.4 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, the Contractor shall be compensated for any excess incurred and substantiated plus an amount for overhead and profit as set out in the Contract Documents. 4.1.5 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the actual cost and each cash allowance. 4.1.6 The value of the work performed under a cash allowance is eligible to be included in progress payments. 4.1.7 The Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule that shows when the Consultant and Owner must authorize ordering of items called for under cash allowances to avoid delaying the progress of the Work. GC 4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE 4.2.1 The Contract Price includes the contingency allowance, if any, stated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.2 Expenditures under the contingency allowance shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 4.2.3 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the expenditures authorized under paragraph 4.2.2 and the contingency allowance. PART 5 PAYMENT GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 5.1.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement, and/or promptly from time to time thereafter,furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. 5.1.2 The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of any material change in the Owner's financial arrangements during the performance of the Contract. GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 5.2.1 Applications for payment on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT may be made monthly as the Work progresses. 5.2.2 Applications for payment shall be dated the last day of the agreed monthly payment period and the amount claimed shall be for the value,proportionate to the amount of the Contract,of work performed and Products delivered to the Place of the Work at that date. 5.2.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, at least 14 days before the first application for payment, a schedule of values for the parts of the Work, aggregating the total amount of the Contract Price, so as to facilitate evaluation of applications for payment. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 18 i Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions to the resubmission other than those requested by the Consultant. GC 3.12 USE OF THE WORK 3.12.1 The Contractor shall confine construction machinery and equipment, storage of Products, and operations of employees to limits indicated by laws, ordinances, permits, or the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Work with Products. 3.12.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that will endanger the safety of the Work. GC 3.13 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 3.13.1 The Contractor shall do the cutting and remedial work required to make the several parts of the Work come together properly. 3.13.2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the Work to ensure that this requirement is kept to a minimum. 3.13.3 Should the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors or anyone employed by them be responsible for ill- timed work necessitating cutting or remedial work to be performed, the cost of such cutting or remedial work shall be valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.13.4 Cutting and remedial work shall be performed by specialists familiar with the Products affected and shall be performed in a manner to neither damage nor endanger the Work. GC 3.14 CLEANUP 3.14.1 The Contractor shall maintain the Work in a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other contractors or their employees. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall remove waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner, other contractors or their employees, and shall leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by the Owner before attainment of Substantial Performance of the Work. The Contractor shall remove products, tools, construction machinery, and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining work. 3.14.3 Prior to application for the final certificate for payment, the Contractor shall remove products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, and waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner, other contractors or their employees. PART 4 ALLOWANCES GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES 4.1.1 The Contract Price includes cash allowances stated in the Contract Documents, which allowances shall be expended as the Owner directs through the Consultant. 4.1.2 Cash allowances cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, Products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, unloading, handling, storage, installation, and other authorized expenses incurred in CCDC 2 - 1994 File 00712 17 3.8.6 The Owner, through the Consultant, may provide to a Subcontractor or Supplier information as to the percentage of the Subcontractor's or Supplier's work which has been certified for payment. GC 3.9 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS 3.9.1 The Contractor shall provide and pay for labour, Products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, water,heat, light, power, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract. 3.9.2 Products provided shall be new. Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and their use acceptable to the Consultant. 3.9.3 The Contractor shall maintain good order and discipline among the Contractor's employees engaged on the Work and shall not employ on the Work anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned. GC 3.10 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE 3.10.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of current Contract Documents, submittals, reports, and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the Owner and the Consultant. GC 3.11 SHOP DRAWINGS 3.11.1 Shop drawings are drawings,diagrams,illustrations,schedules,performance charts,brochures,Product,and other data which the Contractor provides to illustrate details of a portion of the Work. 3.11.2 The Contractor shall provide shop drawings as described in the Contract Documents or as the Consultant may reasonably request. 3.11.3 The Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submission to the Consultant. The Contractor represents by this review that: the Contractor has determined and verified all field measurements and field construction conditions, or will do so; Product requirements; catalogue numbers; and similar data and that the Contractor has checked and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall confirm this review of each shop drawing by stamp, date, and signature of the person responsible. At the time of submission the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.11.4 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Consultant to review in orderly sequence and sufficiently in advance so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of other contractors. Upon request of the Contractor or the Consultant, they jointly shall prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of shop drawings. Shop drawings which require approval of any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction shall be submitted to such authority by the Contractor for approval. 3.11.5 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in the form specified or as the Consultant may direct. The Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with the schedule agreed upon,or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Consultant's review is for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only. The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Consultant expressly notes the acceptance of a deviation on the shop drawings. 3.11.6 Upon the Consultant's request,the Contractor shall revise and resubmit shop drawings which the Consultant rejects as inconsistent with the Contract Documents unless otherwise directed by the Consultant. The CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 16 .2 monitor the progress of the Work relative to the construction schedule and update the schedule on a monthly basis or as stipulated by the Contract Documents; and .3 advise the Consultant of any revisions required to the schedule as the result of extensions of the Contract Time as provided in Part 6 of the General Conditions - CHANGES IN THE WORK. GC 3.6 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY 3.6.1 Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations, and practices required by the applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. GC 3.7 SUPERVISOR 3.7.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent supervisor and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work while work is being performed. The supervisor shall not be changed except for valid reason. 3.7.2 The supervisor shall represent the Contractor at the Place of the Work and notices and instructions given to the supervisor by the Consultant shall be held to have been received by the Contractor. GC 3.8 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall preserve and protect the rights of the parties under the Contract with respect to work to be performed under subcontract, and shall: .1 enter into contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers to require them to perform their work as provided in the Contract Documents; .2 incorporate the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents into all contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers; and .3 be as fully responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of Subcontractors,Suppliers,and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them as for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. 3.8.2 The Contractor shall indicate in writing, at the request of the Owner, those Subcontractors or Suppliers whose bids have been received by the Contractor which the Contractor would be prepared to accept for the performance of a portion of the Work. Should the Owner not object before signing the Contract, the Contractor shall employ those Subcontractors or Suppliers so identified by the Contractor in writing for the performance of that portion of the Work to which their bid applies. 3.8.3 The Owner may, for reasonable cause, at any time before the Owner has signed the Contract, object to the use of a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier and require the Contractor to employ one of the other subcontract bidders. 3.8.4 If the Owner requires the Contractor to change a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted by the differences occasioned by such required change. 3.8.5 The Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor or Supplier, a person or firm to whom the Contractor may reasonably object. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 15 to liability arising out of the Project and all operations necessary or incidental thereto. The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice in writing in advance of any cancellation, and of change or amendment restricting coverage. .2 Automobile Liability Insurance: Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall have limits of not less than$2,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury,death, and damage to property, covering all licensed vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor, and endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Where the policy has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor. .3 Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance: Aircraft and watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owned aircraft and watercraft if used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than$2,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury,death,and damage to property including loss of use thereof and limits of not less than $2,00,0)0 for aircraft passenger hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage. .4 Property and Boiler and Machinery Insurance: (1) "All risks" property insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant, insuring not less than the sum of the amount of the Contract Price and the full value,as stated in the Supplementary Conditions,of Products that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $2,500. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 4042 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. The coverage shall be maintained continuously until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (2) Boiler and machinery insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor,the Owner,and the Consultant for not less than the replacement value of the boilers, pressure vessels, and other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance provided shall not be less than the insurance provided by the "Comprehensive Boiler and Machinery Form"and shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured and until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (3) The policies shall allow for partial or total use or occupancy of the Work. If because of such use or occupancy the Contractor is unable to provide coverage,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. Prior to such use or occupancy the Owner shall provide,maintain,and pay for property and boiler insurance insuring the full value of the Work, as in sub-paragraphs(1) and (2), including coverage for such use or occupancy and shall provide the Contractor with proof of such insurance. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner the unearned premiums applicable to the Contractor's policies upon termination of coverage. (4) The policies shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage, payment shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 �� such reasonable extension of Contract Time relative to the extent of the loss or damage as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. (5) The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due under the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. In addition the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the payments made by the insurer the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work. (6) In the case of loss or damage to the Work arising from the work of another contractor, or Owner's own forces,the Owner, in accordance with the Owner's obligations under paragraph 3.2.2.4 of GC 3.2-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS,shall pay the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. .5 Contractors' Equipment Insurance: "All risks"contractors'equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by the Contractor for the performance of the Work,including boiler insurance on temporary boilers and pressure vessels,shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation,change,or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement. 11.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies except where such amounts maybe excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY and GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. 11.1.3 Where the full insurable value of the Work is substantially less than the Contract Price, the Owner may reduce the amount of insurance required or waive the course of construction insurance requirement. 11.1.4 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and give evidence to the Contractor and the Consultant. The Contractor shall pay the cost thereof to the Owner on demand or the Owner may deduct the amount which is due or may become due to the Contractor. 11.1.5 All required insurance policies shall be with insurers licensed to underwrite insurance in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. GC 11.2 BONDS 11.2.1 The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work or within the specified time, provide to the Owner any surety bonds required by the Contract. 11.2.2 Such bonds shall be issued by a duly licensed surety company authorized to transact a business of suretyship in the province or territory of the Place of the Work and shall be maintained in good standing until the fulfilment of the Contract. The form of such bonds shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the CCDC approved bond forms. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 12 AQUICON CONSTRUCTION CO. LTD. 131 DELTA PARK BLVD., BRAMPTON, ONTARIO L6T 5M8 TELEPHONE (905)458-1313 ■ FAX(905)458-6020 5 July 1996 The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperence Street =Z C 3A6 ATTENTION: FRED HORVATH, Property Manager Dear Sir; RE: COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX, PHASE 2 In reference to the above noted project,we are pleased to be able to extend the enclosed list of cost saving alternates. As there was no time to review the specifications in detail,we do guarantee that all the alternates will meet the performaance criteria as per the tender package. Therefore, our tender amount would be revised as follows: Original Tender Amount: $ 5,739,000.00 Less Cost Saving Alternates: $ 88,167.00 Revised Tender Amount: $ 5,650,833.00 G.S.T. included Please note that you have the option of adding back any of the items at the same costs quoted after award of the Contract provided that the decisions are made within the detailed construction schedule that will be submitted upon award of the Contract. This will enable us to ensure that the structure is able to receive the items. Subsequently, the extra cost to add back the Sauna and Steam Room is $46,100.00, G.S.T. Included. Also, please be advised that Aquicon will be supplying and installing the ' 8' x 1V Donors' Recognition" plaque at no charge. We trust you will find the above in order. Y61rs truly, AQUICON CONSTRUCTION CO. LTD, fV uino, P. Eng. President 1=A/ec Encl. cc Mr.Henry Wong-WGA Wong Gregersen Architects COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX ACCEPTED COST SAVING ALTERNATES 5 July 1996 ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 2.1 Change tile in tank to 5'x 104 $ 10,800.00 tile manufactured by Winkersire. Gutter and trim Tile to remain as Dal Tile 2.4 Delete Ozone $ 2,200.00 2.6 Change 3 Mechanaid Lift $ 2,000.00 Sockets to Spectrum 2.7 Delete 2 BIF Feeders (owner $ 6,267.00 could add manually) 2.8 Delete Chemical controllers (not $ 11,000.00 req'd by Code) 5.0 Provide asphalt walkway in lieu $ 5,200.00 of concrete (as per plans) along north property line 7.0 Landscaping - reduce quantity $ 10,000.00 of trees by one third (Total tree value carried in our tender was $30,000.00 - please adjust accordingly) 10.0 Provide aluminum windows and $ 6,200.00 window walls by Aeroloc Industries equivalent to specified product 11.0 Air Barrier $ Insulation: to use $ 3,500.00 blueskin in lieu of Perm-A- Barrier Membrane 12.0 Seamless floor to VCT in Snack $ 1,800.00 Bar 14.0 Delete lockers $ 14,200.00 16.0 Acoustic Treatment - Delete $ 15,000.00 Cash Allowance of $35,000.00 and replace with Cash Allowance of$20,000.00 Total Accepted Alternates................................................................... $88,167.00 t Courtice Community Complex Proposed Cost Savings - 04 July 1996 ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 1. Delete Library Skylight and $ 7,350.00 provide structural steel, deck& roofing as required 2. Modify swimming pools 2.1 Change the in tank to 5'x 10"tile manufactured by Winkersire. Gutter and trim Tile to remain as Dal Tile $ 10,800.00 2.2 Delete Laticrete 210 epoxy grout and provide $ 11,000.00 Laticrete 3701 and 544 filler c/w 5 yr. warranty. 2.3 SCH 40 pipe throughout (delete SCH 80) $ 3,500.00 2.4 Delete Ozone $ 2,200.00 2.5 Change gear Drive Mixer to LMI Direct Drive $ 1,400.00 2.6 Change 3 Mechanaid Lift Sockets to Spectrum $ 2,200.00 2.7 Delete 2 BIF Feeders (owner could add $ 6,267.00 manually) 2.8 Delete Chemical controllers (not req'd by $ 11,000.00 Code) 2.9 Delete 3 Back flow preventers (not req'd by $ 500.00 Code) 2.10 Delete 6 spare pump screens $ 400.00 2.11 Change floor inlets to wall inlets $ 4,300.00 2.12 (Delete tile Main Pool and provide Zemon $ 0.00 Epoxy paint: This savings is not recommended - $23,200) 3. Provide 50% Performance Bond & $ 4,500.00 50% Labour& Material Bond in lieu of 100% Bonds 4. Landscaping: Main Entrance walk- $ 5,250.00 way and nearby planter area as per Detail 9/L-2. 125mm concrete walkway only in lieu of specified concrete walk and brickpaver combination 5. Provide asphalt walkway in lieu of $ 5,200.00 concrete (as per plans) along north property line 6. Provide pod area structural steel & steel $ 23,400.00 joist with SSPC - SP6 or SSPC - SP10 and shop apply epoxy paint primer as speed Field applied finish epoxy paint as speed, steel deck as specified with field applied epoxy paint primer and epoxy paint as specified. Note: This eliminates touch up all damaged surfaces of shop painted steel except as required for structural steel and joist - epoxy paint primer. 7. Landscaping - reduce quantity of trees $ 10,000.00 by one third (Total tree value carried in our tender was $30,000.00 - please adjust accordingly) 8.1 Parking & Driveway except at perimeter $ 5,400.00 of Building provide precast concrete curbs with gaps between units as req'd 8.2 Note: Credit to be increased by$ 5.00 for $ 2,300.00 every foot of gap (assuming 2 feet gaps) provided between units. 9. Provide single ply PVC membrane roof over main $ 5,870.00 entrance canopy (similar to R-2 with no Insulation) and R-2 PVC membrane roof with Insulation above waterslide roof in lieu of painted curved metal roof 10. Provide aluminum windows and window walls by $ 6,200.00 Aeroloc Industries equivalent to specked product 11. Air Barrier & Insulation: to use blueskin $ 3,500.00 In lieu of Perm-A-Barrier Membrane 12. Seamless floor to VCT in Snack Bar $ 1,800.00 13. Ceramic Tile in Lobby to Sheet Vinyl Flooring & $ 8,500.00 surrounding areas not bound by doors (Rooms 118, 123, 124, 104, 103, 164, 148, 102 &viewing area) 14. Delete lockers $ 14,200.00 15. Masonry - Delete glass block and replace with $ 5,750.00 EISF and/or masonry as per adjacent surface with accent paint finish 16. Acoustic Treatment - Delete Cash Allowance of $ 15,000.00 $35,000.00 and replace with Cash Allowance of $20,000.00 17. Viewing Area - Delete recess in slab and seats and $ 5,600.00 provide reinforced masonry retaining wall 18. Reduce main entrance canopy from 5 bays to 3 $ 4,800.00 bays 19. Aluminum Windows and Window Walls - change $ 7,600.00 reflective green glass to regular green glass 20. Simplify structural steel column details (Base & $ 8,000.00 Capital) to standard connections to meet structural requirements and provide 4" base as per floor finish DRAWING LIST ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS COVER SHEET ' TS I TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY PLAN FOR SITE WORK A 1 SITE PLAN,NOTES AND LOCATIONS MAP A2 BASEMENT PLAN A3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN A4 GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A5 ROOF PLAN A6 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A7 BUILDING SECTIONS A8 STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A9 ENLARGE FLOOR PLANS A10 MAIN POOL&THERAPY POOL DETAIL PLANS All POOL ELEVATIONS Al2 FLOOR TILE PATTERN LAYOUT PLAN A13 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A14 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A15 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A16 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A17 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A18 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A19 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS STRUCTURAL S I FOUNDATION PLAN S2 SECTIONS S3 GROUND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S5 SECTIONS S6 SECTIONS S7 TRUSS DETAILS MECHANICAL M1 BASEMENT PLAN MECHANICAL M2 GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING&DRAINAGE M3 GROUND FLOOR H.V.A.C. M4 ROOF PLAN MECHANICAL M5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS,DETAILS MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL E1 SITE PLAN ELECTRICAL E2 BASEMENT LIGHTING& POWER LAYOUT E3 GROUND FLOOR POWER LAYOUT E4 GROUND FLOOR LIGHTING LAYOUT E5 ELECTRICAL DETAILS, RISER DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATIC E6 ELECTRICAL MISC. DETAILS LANDSCAPE LI LANDSCAPE PLAN/PLANTING PLAN L2 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS L3 LAYOUT DETAILS&,CONSTRUCTION DETAILS CIVIL SP-1 SITE SERVICING PLAN SP-2 SITE GRADING PLAN ES-1 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN TION OF THE MUMCRIALR Y OF CIAMGTON COURTICE CONRAUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE, ONTARIO VOLUME 1 OF 4 ARCl ll .L E Vl"L SPECIFICATIONS PHASE H TENDER NO. CL96-4 (RE-TENDED PROJECT NO.: 94027-24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION JULY 22, 1996 1'III III III 1" W G A I Wong Gnwersrnl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED VIII III I I t PROJECT NO. 94027-24 WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS 240 Richmond St. West, Ste. 401 JULY 16, 1996 Toronto , Ontario M5V 1V6 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE ONTARIO r POST TENDER ADDENDA PAGE: 1 � 1 GENERAL .1 This Post Tender Addenda shall be attached to the front of the Specification and shall form an integral part of the Contract Documents. The contents of this Addenda shall be brought to the attention of all concerned. .2 This Post Tender Addenda is as per discussion and agreement of July 5, 1996. .3 All Trades shall read the entire Addenda. 2 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION .1 SECTION 01020 - CASH ALLOWANCES ^' .1 ARTICLE .2 SPECIFIC PURPOSE CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Acoustic Treatment: Delete Cash Allowance of $ 35,000.00 and replace with Cash Allowance of $ 20,000.00. .2 SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 1 Provide asphalt walkway in lieu of concrete along North property line (as per Drawings). .3 SECTION 02490 - TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS .1 Reduce quantity of trees by one third (Refer to Landscape Drawings for details. .4 SECTION 07195 - AIR BARRIER SYSTEM .1 Add New Section as appendixed hereto. .5 SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION .1 Delete Section in it's entirety. PROJECT NO. 94027-24 WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS 240 Richmond St. West, Ste. 401 JULY 16, 1996 Toronto , Ontario M5V 1V6 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE ONTARIO POST TENDER ADDENDA PAGE: 2 .2 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION (cont'd.) .6 SECTION 07212 - CAVITY WALL INSULATION .1 Add New Section as appendixed hereto. .7 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALLS .1 ARTICLE 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1� .1 Change Paragraph .1 to read: y .1 Provide aluminum windows and window wall as manufactured by Aeroloc Industries Ltd., in accordance with CAN/CSA A440-M90 and A.S.H.R.A.E. Standard 90.1. .8 SECTION 09310 - TILE .1 ARTICLE 2.2 CERAMIC TILE 1 Change tile in pool tank to 125 mm x 250 mm (5" x 10") as manufactured by Klinkershire. Gutter and trim to remain as Dal Tile. .9 SECTION 09760 - SEAMLESS FLOORING .1 Delete Section in it's entirety. .2 Refer to Section 09650 for Resilient Flooring to Kitchen Area and Snack Bar Area to Consultant's later selection. .10 SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS .1 Delete Section in it's entirety. PROJECT NO. 94027-24 WGAWONG GREG ERSEN ARCHITECTS 240 Richmond St. West, Ste. 401 JULY 16, 1996 Toronto , Ontario M5V 1V6 +r COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE ONTARIO POST TENDER ADDENDA PAGE: 3 .2 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION (cont'd.) .11 SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOL .1 ARTICLE 1.11 WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY POOL SUB- CONTRACTOR. d .1 Change Paragraph .17 to read: �j .17 Delete Laticrete Waterproofing and apply to Deck Thin Set complete with mortar bed sloped to drains 1 % minimum as Specified under Section 09310. .2 ARTICLE 2.6 CLEANING EQUIPMENT 1 Delete Chemical Controllers. .3 ARTICLE 2.7 WATER TREATMENT rj 1 Delete Ozone .2 Change 3 Mechanaid Lift Sockets to Spectrum. .3 Delete 2 BIF feeders. F` END OF POST TENDER ADDENDA h AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER SECTION 07195 PROJECT NO. 95027-24 Page: 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE '+M1 .1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .2 Cavity Wall Insulation Section 07214 1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 The applicator shall be familiar with and fully equipped to apply air barrier membranes and shall be familiar with good construction practices. .2 The applicator shall be approved by Bakor and acceptable to Consultant for installation of air barrier membranes. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Materials shall be delivered to the Site in undamaged and original packaging indicating the name of manufacturer and product. .2 Store roll materials on end in original packaging. .3 Store adhesive at temperatures of 5 deg.0 and above to facilitate handling. Keep solvent away from open flame or excessive heat. .4 Protect rolls from direct sunlight until ready to use. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS I .1 No installation work shall be performed during rainy or inclement weather and on frost covered or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Transition Membrane: Adhesive grade membrane Blueskin AG by Bakor Corp., or approved alternate. .2 Transition Membrane Adhesive: Air-Bloc 21 by Bakor Corp., or approved alternate. .3 Air Barrier Membrane: Air-Bloc 21 as manufactured by Bakor Corp., or approved alternate. AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER SECTION 07195 PROJECT NO. 95027-24 Page: 2 2.1 MATERIALS (cont'd.) .4 Insulation Adhesive: Air-Bloc 21 by Bakor Corp., or approved alternate. .5 Air Barrier Sealant: Blueskin sealant by Bakor Corp., or approved alternate. .6 Thermoplastic Rubber Sealant: Bakor Pro-Seal Sealant, or approved alternate. :u i .7 Substrate Cleaner: Mineral spirits or Xylol. .8 Stick Clips: Perforated galvanized steel anchors. .9 Insulation: Refer to Section 07212. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION .1 Ensure all surfaces are clean, dry and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. .2 New concrete should be cured for a minimum of 14 days and must be dry before Air-Bloc 21 is applied. .3 Concrete surfaces should be free of large spelled areas and voids. Fill any large voids or spelled areas to provide an even plane. .4 Cracks in masonry and concrete should be sealed with a strip of Blueskin AG lapped a minimum of 75 mm (3") on both sides of crack. 3.2 TRANSITION MEMBRANE APPLICATION .1 Apply transition membrane to surfaces as indicated on Drawings. .2 Apply transition membrane to all connections of masonry block to steel or concrete; drywall or plywood to steel or concrete and all beams, columns, window and door frames, etc. using strips of Blueskin AG lapped a minimum of 75 mm (3") on both substrates and centred over joints. .3 Blueskin AG membrane shall be overlapped a minimum of 50 mm (2") on end and side laps. .4 Air-Bloc 21 shall be applied in full coat using a 3 mm (1/8") sawtooth notched trowel to the substrate, the area of overlap, at the rate of 1 .5 I/m2 (3 gal./100 sq.ft.) AIRNAPOUR BARRIER SECTION 07195 PROJECT NO. 95027-24 Page: 3 3.2 TRANSITION MEMBRANE APPLICATION (cont'd.) .5 Unroll sheet membrane into adhesive applying hand pressure. .6 Seal laps by pressing in place by hand pressure. .7 Membrane shall be mechanically fastened through a metal bar to all window and door sections, or a properly designed sealant joint shall be provided using Blueskin sealant for hidden joints or Bakor Pro-Seal sealant for exposed joints. 3.3 AIR BARRIER INSULATION ADHESIVE INSTALLATION 1 Apply Air-Bloc 21 to substrate in a continuous coat at the rate of 3 I/m2 (6 gal./100 sq.ft.) by flat trowel to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 3 mm (1/8"). .2 Overlap liquid membrane on to transition membrane at connections a minimum of 25 mm 0"). .3 Trowel Air-Bloc 21 around brick ties and other projections to ensure a complete seal. 3.4 APPLICATION OF INSULATION 1 Press insulation into Air-Bloc 21 immediately after air barrier membrane has been applied to ensure contact with substrate and positive adhesion of insulation cover. 3.5 PROTECTION .1 Air-Bloc 21 is designed to perform as an adhesive air barrier and cannot be left exposed. It must be covered immediately by the insulation cover to prevent blistering or surface crazing of membrane and provide a positive bond for the insulation. END OF SECTION CAVITY WALL INSULATION SECTION 07212 PROJECT NO. 94027-24 Page: 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .2 Air Barrier System Section 07195 1 .2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 All cavity wall and airlvapour barrier system work throughout the entire Project not specified under other Sections is included in the Work of this Section, to provide a complete thermal and vapour seal within the building. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATING AGENCIES .1 Where combustible insulation or air/vapour barrier materials are specified herein, comply with applicable code requirements including supply and installation of approved non-combustible backing and independently supported, non-combustible insulation covering, except where noted specifically as Work of other Sections. 1 .4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE .1 Store packaged materials in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store flammable materials outside the building and protect from all weather hazards and open flame. Abide by all fire protection regulations imposed by the authorities having jurisdiction, and take precautionary measures to avoid fire. .2 Do not store insulation in direct contact with the earth, road surface or floors. Place suitable forms or skids under the insulation upon delivery to protect the insulation from absorbing dampness from the surrounding terrain or floor. Cover material with approved tarpaulins and secure. .3 In cold weather, provide warm storage for adhesives such that their consistency is suitable for ease of application. 1.5 PROTECTION .1 Protect surfaces, and in particular the building cladding finish, from being marred or contaminated by the materials. 1.6 WARRANTY .1 The warranty period for this material shall be extended to two years. CAVITY WALL INSULATION SECTION 07212 i PROJECT NO. 94027-24 Page: 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Rigid Insulation: Glass fibre reinforced polyisocyanurate foam with reflective aluminum foil facers conforming to CAN/CGSS 51-26-M86, CON Sheathing manufactured by Celotex, 63 mm thickness RSI value 3.26. Barrier Board as manufactured by NRG is an approved alternate. .2 Primer for Adhesive - as recommended by adhesive manufacturer for the particular materials to be adhered. .3 Impaling Clips - galvanized as recommended by cavity wall insulation manufacturer. .4 Adhesive for Applying Clips-a high strength, resilient adhesive having a drying time of 0 to 30 minutes (rapid initial set), and 24 hours final set. Adhesive shall be compatible with insulation adhesive, insulation, vapour barrier and substrate and shall be non-corrosive to galvanized steel and polyvinyl chloride. Where used in conjunction with a vapour barrier insulation adhesive, its permeability shall not exceed that of the insulation adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 1 Ensure that surfaces to receive adhesive or insulation are dry, firm, straight, slightly textured for bond, and free from loose material, projections, ice, frost. slick, grease, oil or other matter detrimental to bond of the adhesive or uniform bedding of the insulation. .2 Maintain surface and ambient temperatures constantly between 38 deg.C. and 10 deg.0 during application and curing of adhesive except as permitted otherwise by the Consultant in writing. .3 Report surfaces left unacceptable by other trades to the Consultant. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL .1 Install insulation to thicknesses shown on the Drawings. .2 Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise specified herein. CAVITY WALL INSULATION SECTION 07212 PROJECT NO. 94027-24 Page: 3 3,2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL (cont'd.) .3 Ensure a uniform, continuous thermal and air/vapour barrier effect. Where air/vapour barriers are to be provided under other Sections, co-ordinate the work such that thermal and air/vapour barrier continuity is achieved. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL FASTENERS .1 Install clips to supplement all adhesive attachment of insulation and elsewhere, where specified. Apply clips to substrate using adhesive or where approved by Consultant and the concrete trade, using powder-activated or pneumatic fixings. .2 Support adhesive-applied clips in place until adhesive has set. Where insulation adhesive is to form a vapour barrier, extend clip adhesive over substrate a distance of 125 mm around clip so that it becomes integral with subsequently applied vapour barrier adhesive coating. .3 Where insulation adhesive is to form a air/vapour barrier, and clips are applied using powder-activated or pneumatic fixings, embed clips in adhesive and butter clip with adhesive after fixing such that vapour barrier continuity is ensured. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION .1 Apply air barrier to the entire surface of the substrate in accordance with Section 07195. .2 Press insulation boards firmly to substrate impaling them on clips without bending clips. Cut insulation as required and fit snugly to strapping, pipes, ducts, obstructions, openings and corners. Bevel board edges abutting sloping surfaces. Butt insulation boards tightly and stagger joints. Cut our back of board insulation as required to accommodate substrate irregularities and built up over cut out areas on the other side as required to ensure thermal barrier uniformity. END OF SECTION p Tender No. CL-96-4 (Re-Tender) WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. Courtice Community Complex 240 Richmond Street West, Suite 401 Project No. 94027 Toronto, Ontario M5V 1V6 Date Issued: 23 June 1996 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 1 of 5 The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE, ONTARIO I GENERAL .1 This addendum shall be attached to the front of the Specification and shall form an integral part of the Contract Documents. The contents of this Addendum shall be brought to the attention of all concerned. .2 Receipt of the Addendum shall be acknowledged in the Tender Form. .3 All Trades shall read the entire Addendum. II ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION .1 SECTION 00100 - DELIVERY OF TENDER 1 (Revised to read)" .....no later than 4-00 p.m. Wednesday June 26, 1996 in the sealed envelope ........ 3 (Revised to read) The Appendix Tender Forms sections 00310, 00320, 00430 and ALL Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Tender Forms shall be submitted to THE OFFICE OF THE CLERK, MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON, no later than 4-00 Rm. Thursday June 27, 1996. ALL forms shall be completed fully or Tender may be declared improper and immediately rejected. .4 (Revised to read) Tenders will be opened in public at 4:1 Thursday June 27, 1996. .2 SECTION 07350 -SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM 1 ARTICLE 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Paragraph .2, CHANGE to read: ".2 Roofing Membrane (exposed) Proseal MF 1.2 mm polyvinyl chloride (PVC) membrane, woven polyester reinforced. Tensile strength ASTM D-412; Elongation at Break ASTM D-412; Hardness (Shore A)ASTM 2204; Shrinkage ASTM D-1204; Standard colour to Consultants' later selection; Thickness 0.047'; Compliance CGSB 3254 M95 (Class B) (Type 4) " .2 Paragraph .3, CHANGE to read: ".3 Roofing Membrane (exposed): proseal FA 1.2 mm, polyvinyl chloride(PVC) membrane. woven 1 polyester reinforced. Tensile strength ASTM D412; Elongation at Break ASTM D-412; Hardness (Shore A) ASTM 2204; Shrinkage ASTM D-1204; Standard colour to Consultants' later selection; Thickness 0.047'; Compliance CGSB 51.34 M86 (Class B) (Type 4)." Tender No. CL-96-4 (Re-Tender) WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. Courtice Community Complex 240 Richmond Street West, Suite 401 Project No. 94027 Toronto, Ontario M5V 1V6 Date Issued: 23 June 1996 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 2 of 5 .3 Paragraph .7, CHANGE to read: ".7 Perimeter Fixing: provide 2-38 x 140 solid wood blocking securely fastened to roof deck all around perimeter of curved roof over swimming pool area". .4 ADD new paragraph: ".8 Vapour Barrier Provap 10, 10 mil thick, vapour barrier to CGSB 51.M86, "clay" colour." .5 ADD new paragraph: ".9 Vents, stacks, PVC compatible." .6 ARTICLE 3.1 EXECUTION .1 Paragraph .1, (ADD )to the end of the last sentence as follows: "Install vapour barrier over entire roof area and seal to air/vapour barrier in wall assembly to ensure continuity of building envelope." .2 Paragraph .2, CHANGE the word "PMA", to read "MF". 3 Paragraph .2, ( Delete sentence )with the words"progressively ... appropriate", to read "mechanically fasten per manufacturers' instructions". .4 Paragraph .3, CHANGE the word "LL", to read "FA". .3 SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL,05210-STEEL JOISTS, 05310-STEEL DECK ( CLARIFICATION ) All exposed steel elements including joists and deck in the Main Pool, Tots Pool, Therapy Pool, Filter Room, etc. are to be shop primed and finish painted with the specified Amercoat products with standard colours to be selected at a later date. All work are to be touched up on site after delivery and erection. All work are to conform to Chapter 7 of OPCA Manual, including related shop inspections, pursuant to the required 2 Year Warranty, details as specified in Section 09900. Coronada Products equal to the specified Amercoat will be accepted as an approved alternate. No other products will be approved as alternates. A SECTION 09900-PAINTING .1 Article 2.1 Materials- add the following paragraphs on Textured Wall Painting ".6 a) Textured Paint: Textured paint shall be Terpolymer formulation, consisting of a combination of separate and distinct pigment colour particles suspended in chemically treated aquenos solution known as Polomyx or Zolatone manufactured by Surface Protection Industries International distributed by Classic Architectural Coatings, Toronto. b) Finish shall match approved sample as selected by Consultant from standard list of colours. Tender No. CL-96-4(Re-Tender) WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. Courtice Community Complex 240 Richmond Street West, Suite 401 Project No. 94027 Toronto, Ontario M5V 1V6 Date Issued: 23 June 1996 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 3 of 5 c) Sealant: Sealant shall be polysulphide, two component type conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, or one component type conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87. To meet requirements of Section i 07920 Sealants and Caulking. d) Foundation Coat: Foundation coat shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer to suit surface conditions. 7 a) Mix foundation coat and surface coat in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as directed by manufacturer". 2 Article 3.4.4 SWIMMING POOL AREA ( Sentence revised to read ) The following areas shall receive epoxy paint: all exposed misc. metal including doors, frames, lintels, unfinished metallic swimming pool equipments, etc. in all swimming pool, tots pool, therapy pool, filter room and change room areas. Structural Steel (ADD), STEEL JOISTS, STEEL DECK-refer to Section 05120, 05210, 05310 for shop prime and finishing. Refer to this section for OPCA requirements for shop painting. (At the end of this Article ADD)Amercoat Products equal to the specified Coronada Products will be accepted as an approved alternate. No other products will be accepted as alternates. III ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS 1 Refer to Details AD3-1 .1 At note pointing to col. base revise to read "ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BASE SEE DETAIL AD3-3". .2 At note pointing to truss delete"65 x 150"and revise to read " PAINTED WELDED STEEL FRAMING. ALL WELDS CONT. AND GROUND SMOOTH. REFER ALSO TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS". .3 Complete note at top of page"SEE DETAIL AD3-2". .2 Refer to Detail AD3-2, delete third note from bottom pointing to bolt, add"BOLT AND CAP NUTS REFER ALSO TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS". 3 Detail AD3-3, hereby reissued, revised as indicated. .4 Refer to Detail AD3-5, delete incomplete detail reference 5 Refer to Detail AD3-6, revise note Pointing to col. base,"ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BASE- SEE DETAIL AD3-3. .6 Refer to Detail AD3-9, delete note"19 EXT. GRADE PLYWOOD."Add wall type note W6 and note to back-up material for exterior finish and insulation system as "13 CEMENT BOARD". l Tender No. CL-96-4 (Re-Tender) WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. Courtice Community Complex 240 Richmond Street West, Suite 401 Project No.94027 Toronto, Ontario M5V 1V6 Date Issued: 23 June 1996 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 4 of 5 IV ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS .1 DRAWING A2-BASEMENT PLAN .1 To Wall Legend, revise W3 to read Exterior Masonry Cavity Wall 90 Brick w190 Arch. Conc. Block base 25 Air Space 70 Rigid Insulation AirNapour Barrier 290 Concrete Block Back-up .2 DRAWING A3 -GROUND FLOOR PLAN .1 Drawing A3 -Ground Floor Plan is hereby reissued, revision No. 1 The drawing is issued in part drawing format, refer to ADD1-3 drawing legend of parts issued. NOTE: All door numbers are added to this drawing. .2 To demising wall between Rental Space 155 and Library 162, delete wall type W15 and revise to wall type W16. .3 At double door entries 145 and 145a to Main Pool, return conc. block sill with tile finish at the sides of the door opening. .4 At exterior wall along grid Bx from grid 1 to past grid 4, revise W2 wall type to W1 wall type. .5 At exterior wall along grid U from grid 6 to grid 13x revise wall type W1 to W2 wall type. .6 At exterior wall near grid S and grid T, forming the bay window, revise wall type W1 to W3. .3 DRAWING A4-GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN .1 Provide double drywall bulkhead in the Community Hall-109 along grid D, bottom of bulkhead to be approximate 2700 AFF. .4 DRAWING A5 -ROOF PLAN .1 Add wall section reference for masonry roof parapet along grid 10 and turning along grid E to join pool wall. .2 Parapet along grid Bx jogged to conform to floor plan. AJe.S'.f A�'j 3 Coordinate location of roof-top mechanical units, exhaust fans piping etc. to mechanical drawings- .5 DRAWING A6 -BUILDING ELEVATIONS 1 On West Elevation, revise window types WN5 to WNSC. .2 Exterior Window Schedule is hereby added to Drawing A6. Refer to sheet no. ADD1-6a, attached. Tender No. CL-96-4(Re-Tender) WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. Courtice Community Complex 240 Richmond Street West, Suite 401 Project No. 94027 Toronto, Ontario M5V 1V6 Date Issued: 23 June 1996 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 5 of 5 .6 DRAWING A7-BUILDING SECTIONS 1 Refer to D and revise title to"SECTION/ELEVATION". 2 Refer to B, second drawing from bottom, and revise title to read, "C SECTION THRU POOL". .3 Refer to A and B, Foyer Area, drywall bulkheads were revised to conform to reflected ceiling plan already in your possession. .7 DRAWING A9-ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS 1 Refer to detail 1, at Viewing Area plan revise note"S/S guardrails"to" painted steel guardrails" in 3 locations on the plan. .2 Refer to detail 3, delete note to right of grid B, P.Lam. Counter and add"SS PASS-THRU COUNTER & FRAMES" .8 DRAWING A10 -MAIN POOL,THERAPY POOL, DETAIL PLANS 1 Revise Tile Legend, as indicated on ADD 1-10a attached. 9 DRAWING All -POOL ELEVATIONS .1. Refer to Tile Legend and revise as noted in Drawing 10 above. 10 DRAWING Al2 -FLOOR TILE PATTERN LAYOUT PLAN .1 Refer to Tile Legend and revise as noted in Drawing 10 above. 11 DRAWING A16 -WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS 1 Refer to sheets ADD1-16a inclusive for revisions to wall sections and details, as indicated. V STRUCTURAL .1 Structural Consultant notes and sketches as appended hereto forming part of this Addendum. VI ELECTRICAL .1 Electrical Consultant notes as appended hereto forming part of this Addendum. - � PAINTED STEEL COLUMN -- SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 19 15 38 15 PAINTED STEEL GUSSET o. o PLATES (8) WELDED TO ° N COLUMN. ALL WELDS GROUND AND POLISHED SMOOTH ° r 75 0.20 ^Iv i � I i o i °o 1 EQUAL EQUAL I VAR __ _ ARCHITECTURAL CONCRET VARIES _ COLUMN BASE TO SUIT STRUCTURAL FOOTING CAST CONCRETE PIER AND FOOTING SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS J � 1 j 1PPn 111 III w "�N0 94027-24 # d�longt W. SUITEl0RCHITECTS NCORPORATED SCn[ 2W Richmond SI. W. SUITE G01 Tel IG161 595-9955 1'.5 _k Toronto, Conoda M5V 1V6 Fox W161 595-0827 DAM JUN 23/96 i PROJECT NAK SHETT NANE'. SHEET NO COUAnCE COMM MY Y COMM emAICE CANOPr CMXM BASE AD3-3 COURTICE, ONTARIO ,� � Addendum Nei it EXTERIOR WINDOW SCHEDULE WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW NUMBER SIZE TYPE WNI 1CN4A VERIFY DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN g Ni� SITE ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMES DIMENSIONS VERIFY DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN "v 5 SITE ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMES DIMENSIONS AND VENTED WINDOW FRAMES Nl � © VERIFY SITE DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN DIMENSIONS ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMES j VERIFY SITE TRIPLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN DIMENSIONS ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM WINDOW WALL FRAMING N5 VERIFY SITE DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN ANODIZED CLEAR r' DIMENSIONS ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAME ADJACENT TO STOREFRONT FRAMING VERIFY SITE TRIPLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN NS DIMENSIONS ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMES NI VERIFY SITE DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM SKYLIGHT 1 DIMENSIONS FRAMING. RIDGE TYPE SKYLIGHT. LOWER SECTIONS TO HAVE ALUMINUM INSULATED PANELS MIN. 25mm THICK, ENDS TO BE GLAZED NI VERIFY SITE DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNITS IN ANODIZED CLEAR ALUMINUM SKYLIGHT DIMENSIONS FRAMING. PYRAMID TYPE SELF-SUPPORTING SKYLIGHT ryryryry WGA IWong Gregersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED EkE NO 94027-24 240 R¢hmond Si W., SUITE 401 Tel 14 161 595-9955 SCA` AS NOTED Toronto, Canada Ia5V 1V6 Fa. 14161 595-0823 oau JUN /96 PRO.CCi NAME SHEET NAME: S EEI NO COURnCE COMMUNITY COMPLEX WINDOW TYPE SHCHEDULE ADD1-6a COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No. 1 TILE LEGEND Tl 200 by 200 OLYMPIA ARIOSTEA ANTI-SLIP TREAD T2 300 by 300 OLYMPIA SPECTRA-GEO PORCELAIN COLOR - P399 'AFRICA' T3 300 by 300 OLYMPIA SPECTRA-GEO PORCELAIN COLOR - P327 'AMERICA' 300 by 300 OLYMPIA SPECTRA-GEO PORCELAIN COLOR - P3110 'PANGEA' (STANDARD) TS 50 by 50 UNGLAZED CERAMIC STANDARD COLOR T6 25 by 25 UNGLAZED CERAMIC STANDARD COLOR T7 50 by 50 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR "� TS 25 by 25 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR T9 50 by 50 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR 25 by 25 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR 50 by 50 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR 25 by 25 UNGLAZED CERAMIC PREMIUM COLOR 25 by 25 UNGLAZED CERAMIC TRACTION TILE PREMIUM COLOR 300 by 300 OLYMPIA SPECTRATOTAL COLOR - P350 'GIADA' - � 300 by 300 OLYMPIA FLANKER DIAMANTEA ,,� COLOR - DA22 'DI PRO' 50 by 50 OR 100 by 100 NECEV TYPE 7 MR 2 1 1 GLAZED CERAMIC - BY OLYMPIA 11LE STANDARD COLOR wwCCC����pppp���p!IIII na N0. 94027-24 II„IIA,Ia IA WCA hn,ond I. W.. SUITE ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED wuE ' � Ilu'lllullllu' 2L0 NichmonU 51. W., SUITE c01 Tel 1x61 595-9955 AS NOTED I Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fax W61 595-0873 W¢ vrtwccrxwE JUN 23/96 S[Ei N4rE 9EE1 N0. WIC M Coffin 00 REX TAE LEAD ADD1-10a COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum N l j CL M Q 6 1 Y C? I Q i C C C C I I i CID CID C43 C C43 C - 1 I I I CV3 o 0 < I o o o f 41 ggqq nEE NO 94027-24 W G A ' Wong Gregor , ARCHITECTS I N C O R P O R A T E D sEnHt Ito Richmond SI W, SUITE A01 TO 14161 595-9955 AS NOTED Toromlo. Comodo M5V IV6 Fox I[I61 595-X813 DATE JUN 23/96 PRDSCT NNE SHEET NILE: SHEET NG COUME COMMMY CoMLEx DRAWING LEGEND ADD1-3 CWRTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No. 1 !� m U Z p a U �Z � Q � Z K U � U W Q O� O W O�+ N� �D6 ODFZ . 006 !' OSIZ 006 !i SBroI , . DLbf I \ C ° O O \ N N N � W o -0DZZ \ f. ° v 00 - - 04 � Q F I ¢ ,�I N A M pp a J �p u� ov cV CM) o, r I 0 d I / 8 o — �N _ - a , 5049 rjI � U ?� vi w J O An T DD m'. ���il I'I� �• '�. I w I n LJ � 'Z OM6 ail. j — O CC Nil Of Ito oll ix ■ a — 11 \ I� - 06 0009 J Ohl I - - 0969 ! OBb n. L1 5 iQ 3 f� , -� o o - CD n l Q o cn r -7 77� z . l ° N n' lil U R ( I m G,\ S ! � o ° -��— oozy pizi /-,(-09eiJ oazi oozy ecW ooaz ooaz 06ZZZ N �o 0 oQ I o a C U Q N O w 2 Q O Z Q w I w ' � v Q K Q r � w 1 Q � U Z Q J I OSZ9 SOb9 r I � 0 a i s VJ C9 I 3 j o I � ; a sHZ ssaf SZLZ SZS£ o9z9 o J W W i N m m I Q Q I U I U C) I W Z I W J AtlM3AIaU oo seas ro z ' 000s ri 2[£Z --� OOZI �- -_-@l£Z S N Y J r U Z �¢N •I I I. � Q p � III O w .f w 02 Q� tip W d m - O U I Q N CU d• U• 0 mw ERJI F (1 W ; III Q rni B < I O W w d' Z Z � Q CO N Q n �WJ O_ O Li.J U Q W S O LO Li zot N ¢ 3 w o ° 06 OP0 61 GOBI t 016 ;OOIZ o , p l D !l La �{ 2 p mi O W inviz< \ Obl l 2' e z Eo JI00 Z 006 X06 006 L� �=117��11= � N 00 Ibl_. BS9Z � 2 1 � 07 O f � I a v W D6Z I �^' ? LJ O o N 00 O I � � O D O N CLO Q 4 — / T - Z99Z K O p � % itzcla � I o � a 9961 f 4uS0!21 Oi - ¢� v ¢ O W ro I 7 C, lo'I m CD' + o � i 1 rl 00801 I � I l U a + �Jl w S08Z Z£9£ SA0018 SStll9 ZZ �\ C> z _ C) — — -i----- -i -- Z D `' 06l O 0009 06 CD t2 min 1' 0£S£ Dtrl o z 0£9£ l- Owl 0� OZLS o N u_a o po + LLJ a N sa3NDoi c— z x � n �o sa3Hadi HD:2 C � I' --- �ipz LLL111JJJ ° _� I_ �^ N __ gQ aosi �¢i = -T ' rygl oosl x lJ j U > n �fit_ O W CJ CD _ d' Q C�7 0 c� ! w'� 065441D86 10001 OfZI� 09H U O OZI:I 0 NM00 3dO15 006 O 0081 m SLM 0082 o0Z1 OOZI OOZI OOZI OOZ 099[1 -Dec J W. 2' N I 04 0SZ9 09Z9 OSZ9 ! I� 99669 O O O Q t SEE �pND K � gOEW pL CONC. SL£Z9 a S9b0 l 0695 i 066£ 9491 •09� CV Q m Q cD Fi l0£Z _ _ SS c� 006 . 3 Z09£ OOZ! - -- Z09f 00Z 1- '- I � co Q I^ \ o M Z � � C c _ I J_ N , b y N y w az w U , m � I U U W - - - - - - - - - - - jji F J O of ■ 061 ONG j ■ o 3 _ OBl Ld 0 ■ C r o W g I ■IXI Q �O ■� y Qi � d2 3 I ■ °moo a : ■ IJVHS H03W 0691 0 2 I ■ 9C/O6100Bi 1 006 ■ _ 00 I ,Z38 i 0 N ■ h 0fl I - I .- C x 096' Y w Ii 9f OOZI " OLZI 082 0426 j 061 - ��- � mZ ¢ o ? F -. °i o Q~ O O d d W Z N m m ( O C7 d O O N N Old Oj j w✓� w o 3 a N p CL ✓ __ _ lc II I � 1 ° I w °l' ', � , ' ° � \� � i \✓ JI I II rn I c _ /7: \ ill ��II114;l o o cc r �� ; lit im is CK 1 a I � III owe o i vv�L v✓ I �� III I p0 0� duo i O m o aJ < II I N � � ❑ ozLZ I� a 00 U� N N Q w In w U I w OLS of 3 0£S6 ° !� --SZ4S Jo Obi ❑ �_ _ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ z ❑ 1: ❑ I _ w 0 Ln O _. 61- J I � ■ •- r . °\ � N ao N I b Om l I OQ9 6t OoSf -06t■ j 06Z£ I Q I'I ° O ' ° ° o I r l oazi I 3" nw ■ U C "'. 60Z l moo OYZ I 066E I 3 a w z n i I E Lvil S-- } a N O OI m " 1 N � o 0 h! �II o ■ ° n �� i I 0 %Q N W N N J K I M - - N oO0,ZI Z t- —c v CJ Ooz ££ 0061 Of oz 094 o> ar OBIZ os o Obl 0641 6 50 ;fa J x 3 O — C> n (n v a o w. o a Qio 2� U� � �. of UO w0 �, o o Oli ^ a 0 w n vwi z U) M I Y OSL9 l I 0004 1 0042 1 OOSZ o_ U N ( MO 3dVOSONVI 33S) V32JV 3dVOSONVI N —6 /- 3 3 094 09ti01 o -_ - .. ,__-. . _ 0091 nu o � m °w 0 - - — s44t orsl SS�t �DZSi / —, - - lit. 064 DS Z — 059 OLSZ SLSZ SLBZ \ z , 0 -- -- -- N 000 Q W UW U NU V r— Q � U Z Q \ ` U w� � � W ' Z i < bot r 0044 , o ■ I ' avM3niao N o W a d 7i 8 , N .--- t ,_ ZCOI i IANDSCA it CDNG. S�DEwAIK SEE { - - ", m 0 OS9Z f ' z m ZOLf OOZI Z09 — OOZI CL u� o I y N i it Y b N l t� O I � NI I 0 b� O n O O l rorr7 N . �' 3 ,• f009�- j I O J it m 1 �U O I' II II II LJ I li II M N f 4 t DDII Oa- o° 3 009 n b � I 3 r ! k I N ' u7 n 3 of I I I • Lj r - SLSf OOZI 009E ODII OS9Z. Sb9S! ' 0 N (SOM0 3dVOSpNVI 33S) VhV 3dVOSONVI N I - -- n n na Ir- �rr 7 - - - - _ i l II II i � I I boa �I I III II II � sou of II IL II • , I i a Flo ml I I II II i � of �� al II ' III II ZF L IL _ u u U _ ¢ w w N a o 3 b m 1 Q Y N yy � m Z okl1 � n m\ r I - o i i w a U N � p Z p'. � U a p'I �IJ w v W v • N, U O n � ¢ 3 air J on T - W y X 2 0 0 O a w _ I Q O 3 J N O � Q W r O Q Z U N Z V1 r ¢ W n y 1 Y a v U N � � Z a 4 � O Z a i w off' 1 z 1 s 006Z 1 U � O — 1 • ' 3 S8Z SS6 f O�SZ 0 r qi i- • i 3 0 N O8E L SOS£ / 0001 ---- --- -: ('SOMO 3dVOSONVI'': AIVM301S -ONOO E 33S) i '1 020t N � O CP a s a Y ' I I I I I I to I o i I ! I I I ! I 1 a en W G A I WaW Cre;Qrisen I ARCHITECTS I N C O R P O R A T ED RN NQ 94027-24 NelAlllpllll III 0 AS NOTED 240 R¢nmontl 51. W. SUITE GOl Tel I4161 595-9955 Toronla, Canada MSV 1V6 Fox Id161 595-0873 DATE ,JUN 2396 MUCT NUE WET NN WET NO COMM Cow+mm COWLS DMWING LEGEND ADDl-16 COURTICE, ONTARIO n m No 7 � 1 CONTINUOUS CAULKING '. TOP OF MASONRY 139.90 SINGLE—PLY PVC MEMBRANE ON 6mm BENT STEEL PLATE SINGLE-PLY PVC MEMBRANE -- - �, ON 13mm CEMENT BOARD ON STEEL DECK 4 LOW POINT OF ROOF 139.32 - TOP OF STEEL �OIST EXTENSIONS - d � � f CAL TEEL ANGLES REFER TO SECTION 2/ I1B ` REFER TOAL DWGS FOR NOTES _ PRE—FINISHED ALUMINUM / LINEAR SOFFIT ` 1450 G SECTION THRU CANOPY 12 0 ° ° �I ADDi-16a ,N IM 1 AWI'1� 10 s�M O6 A16 3B0 t ' 190 190 R1 R4 slope_ I R5 MASONRY VENT -oil 11 I , Iiiiill �;l, lil „II hill I, O.W.S.J. REFE 0 STRUCTURAL WGS 90 10 190 21 1 WA LINTELS REFER TO _I - STRUCTURAL OWGS I 1450 WEEPHOLES ----- - -- -- - CONCRETE BLOCK LINTEL . FOR CEILING FINISH REFER °o TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE �o a HERMETICALLY SEALED WINDOWS IN THERMALLY BROKEN ANODIZED - ALUMINUM FRAMES --- o N' I ICI W - 5 R A16 I�` ANODIZED ALUMINUM SI L COLOUR TO MATCH FRA ES _ l—BULLNOSED SOLID BLOCK STOOL 0 STRUCTURAL DWGS I 1450 __ ' WEEPHOLES ----- - CONCRETE BLOCK LINTEL _I FOR CEILING FINISH REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE b V HERMETICALLY SEALED _ WINDOWS IN THERMALLY BROKEN ANODIZED k. ' ALUMINUM FRAMES -! N i 5 A16 ANODIZED ALUMINUM SI L `^ w COLOUR TO MATCH FR ES 1� _ BULLNOSED SOLID BLOCK STOOL W3 THRU WALL FLASHING CONCRETE RAMP zr I �ti. gc�,n� .aBrobwE; .�Z'"o '_. "`? �w,t;.3� - •� � z WEEPHOLES Emil POLYETHYLENE VAPOUR BARRIER x"���� ����� _ - 150 COMPACTED GRANULAR 'A' FILL l � COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL EXISTING FOUNDATION WALLS REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AMI-ft 1 WALL SECTION THRU LIBRARY WORKROOM & LIBRARY A16 SCALE 1: 20 10 Ax-169 I ' A16 - - - - - - 335 #--- — —! R1 I R4 slope 139.90 TOP OF MAS NRY R5 VENT 139.32 RO F DATUM LO POINT TQP OF STEEL — — — — I + 4020 A.F.F.. 0 0 — C _ LIGHT FIXTURES REFER TO l ELECTRICAL DRAWNGS - w3 - - o o o. LZ .n' i WEEPHOLES _I 600- _ _600 . _. 13mm GYPSUM BOARD ON 64mm METAL STUDS A7 o —'---I - LINEAR DIFFUSERS REFER 400mm O.C. TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS STEEL LINTEL REFER TO I STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS Al of DOUBLE GLAZED INSULATED UNIT IN ANODIZED �I ALUMINUM LIBRARY m WINDOW FRAMING - - - _ r � I 0 A16 r I I I WEEPHOLES - 600 600 - 13mm GYPSUM BOARD QN o - 64mm METAL STUDS AT �I 400mm O.C. J LINEAR DIFFUSERS REFER e TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 11 STEEL LINTEL REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS A16 — I I ooh DOUBLE GLAZED >! s2; INSULATED UNIT —� IN ANODIZED ALUMINUM LIBRARY Ni WINDOW FRAMING .4i it I III A1 �— 6 - I of � � 1 °! EPHOLES 135.30 FIN GROUND 'FLOOR of W4 ool Emil POLYETHYLENE VAPOUR BARRIER m1 150 COMPACTED GRANULAR 'A' FILL E COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL 0 N I n EXISTING FOUNDATION WALLS REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AMI-16f 3 WALL SECTION THRU SOUTH BAY WINDOW OF LIBRARY I A 16 sca l 20 L ADD1-16i 21 335 ;..., � 190 190 R4 145 139.90 TOP OF MASONRY S _ RS Rt VENTS = 139.32 Ri- RCOF DATUM LOW POINT n - TO OF STEEL �LL11 + 4020 A.F.F. W1 WEEPHOLES x - -- 13mm CEMENT BOARD ON 64mm GALV. META STUDS ® o C/W BATT INSUL AI$D Y.B. _ PAINTED STEEL CAdITAL PRE-FINISHED ALU7UM LINEAR SOFFIT 8 A16 ANODIZED ALUMINUM STORE-FRON a WINDOWS AND DOOR IPAINTED STEEL COLUMN RENTAL SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS - \I X I °o f 1100 PRE-CAST CONCRETE OASk III I I� II I � I II ` 64mm GALV. METAQ STUDS F= C/W BATT INSUL AID V.B. F- PAINTED STEEL CAIlITAL �. I PRE-FINISHED ALUMINUM LINEAR SOFFIT f � 1V 8 A16 o ANODIZED ALUMINUM STORE-FRON a WINDOWS AND DOOR ' PAINTED STEEL COLUMN RENTAL. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWNGS IV L d. u' J! 0 !' o n d 1100 PRE-CAST CONCRETE BASE i i w 135.30 FIJ. GROUND OU D FLOOR W4 - "ov v�vv��vvvvvp 6m71 POLYETHYLENE VAPOUR BARRIER o 150 COMPACTED GRANULAR 'A' FILL COMPACTED GRANULAR FILLv��ii����i r. FOUNDATION WALLSVv ', REFER TO _ STRUCTURAL DRAWINGSl � .. AM-16h W4 WALL SECTION THRU SOUTH EAST CORNER OF LIBRARY A16 SCALE 1: 20 C OADD1-3K R1 R5 R4 yy _ T.O. MASONRY +4600 -- - fl0 s0 — W3 - - - -- _ . _ I . _ ROOF DATUM +4020 F DATU +3600 0 o, mi i 1 h L � l La 11 11 LOBBY " 2223 I CORRIDOR 125 L-_j ii i j I I i I °o LOBBY CORRIDOR 123 125 I I - - \ -- T.O. GROUND FI ODR FIN. +O.O i i- 6 SECTION DETAIL A16 SCA[ F 10 JIII-24-1996 08:3E HANNENG P.02 ' HANNIGAN ENGINEERING LIMITED COURTICE COMMUNITY CENTRE ADDENDUM S1 PHASE II 95.06.21 COURTICE, ONTARIO PROJECT 9566 Page # I 1. GENERAL 1 The following additional instructions and amendments shall apply to and form part of the Contract Documents. The cost for this work shall he included in the tender price. .2 It is the responsibility of each bidder to bring this addendum to the attention of alT sub-contractors and material suppliers. .3 Each bidder shall acknowledge that this addendum has been incorporated in the tender by completing the space provided in the tender form. 2. DRAWING S-1 .1 Delete walls for Pool Filter Tank and sump pit at column lines 'L' - '2' , as shown an enclosed sketch 'SA-11 . .2 Add new concrete, pier to top of existing concrete pier at column lines 'L' - '2' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-1' . .3 Add new concrete pier to top of existing concrete pier at column lines 'B' '10' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-2' . .4 Add new concrete piers to top of existing concrete piers at column lines 'K' - '13', 'K' - 181 , 'M' - 113' , and 'M' - 181, as per enclosed sketch 'SA-3' . .5 Add new concrete piers to top of existing concrete piers at column lines 'Jx' - '19x",Jx, - '18' ,'N' - '19x', and 'N' - '18', as per enclosed sketch 'SA-41 . .6 Add new concrete pier to top of existing concrete pier at column lines 'B' - 120' and 'G' - '20' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-51 . (pier at 'G'-'20' not shown on sketch). .7 Add new concrete footing, 1220 x 430 x 300, on each side of extended pier at column line 'D' -1201 . Extend new concrete pier and remove part of existing foundation wall to one block course below the finished floor elevation. Typical on both sides of line 'D' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-5' . .8 Add new concrete pier to top of existing concrete pier at column lines 'Q' 121' and 'U' - '21' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-6' . (pier at 'Q'-121 ' not shown on sketch) . SUN-24-1996 08:37 HRNNENG P.03 HANNIGAN ENGINEERING LIMITED COURTICE COMMUNITY CENTRE ADDENDUM S1 PHASE II 96.06.21 COURTICE, ONTARIO PROJECT 9566 Page # 2 3. DRAWING S-3 .1 Delete outline of filter tank below floor slab on 'Ground Floor framing Plan', at column line 'L' - '2' . 4. DRAWING S-4 .1 Revise size of new column on line 'L' -'2' from "C-2" column to "C-8" column, as per enclosed sketch 'SA-7' . .2 Revise two beams on line '2' between lines 'H'-'L' and 'L'-'P', from sloping beams to horizontal beams and add "190x6 P1 .", as per enclosed sketch 'SA-7' . .3 Add "190x6 Pl ." to 'W20OX27' beam on line '10' at line 'D' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-8' . .4 Revise roof beam on line '10' between lines 'D'-'G' , from 'W460X61' to 'W460X67 + 190x6 Pl . ' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-8' . .5 Add new beam along line IF between lines '7'-'10' , 'W25OX33 + 190X6 P1 . ' , as per enclosed sketch 'SA-S' . .6 Extend masonry pier at column line 'D' -'20', on each side of line 'D' , reduce length of lintels 'L51, add lintel 'L3 CONT.' and two new 'CI00X8' roof members, as per enclosed sketch 'SA-9' . .7 Add two new lintels 'L4' below roof deck at recessed windows, at column lines 'Q'-'21' and 'U'-'21' , ;as well as new 'HSS 127X127X6.35 HANGERS" and new "C15OX12" roof members between roof joists. See enclosed sketch 'SA- 10' for typical condition at. lines .8 Add two new mechanical unit at line 'I9' and line '16', between lines 'Q' and 'S' , complete with 'C130XI0 frame". Weight of new units to be 9.0 kN. See enclosed sketch 'SA-10' for unit at line '19' . 19 Top of all roof steel , including roof slopes, are to be as noted on Architectural drawing 'A-5' . S. DRAWING S-7 .1 Add new roof section 'R1/S7' :through Skylight at line 'T' and line 'S' and all associated steel framing, as per enclosed sketch 'SA-11' . .2 Add new roof section 'R2/S7' through Skylight at line '19' and line '16' and all associated steel framing, as per enclosed sketch 'SA-12' . SUN-24-1996 08:37 HANNENG P.04 ii HANNIGAN ENGINEERING LIMITED COURTICE COMMUNITY CENTRE ADDENDUM S1 PHASE II 96.06.21 COURTICE, ONTARIO PROJECT 9566 Page k 3 6. SPECIFICATIONS .1 Page 05120-4 Clarification: All painting of structural steel as noted in clause 3.3.4 to be shop painted by the structural steel fabricator. '! -----------------END------------------------------------------ TOTAL P.04 JUN-22-1996 15:5? HRNNENG P.02 5 600'MA ! ATE PIER m/6-15M PERT. +101M TICS x • 300 TO •400w ASOvs F K 6LA15 ELEV. I-RaMP 6-mH DOWELS x 400 LC Wa OWLLED ( R=TE(MR=TEc WO TOP OP ---__, --------- EXISTMG PIER. 1 I I 4 — — ' ® [ I 2 41 BASE REMENT i ' � `♦ \♦� AA. i i ii. `�/.�♦\ \ i ��y♦'7 SUMP PIT(TTPICAL . 1000 1000 H L PART FOUNDATION PLAN. "Onvi ADDENDUM " HANNIGAN Jura 21ag ENGINEERING =RTIGE COMMUNITY ft" map LIMITED CZWIRE — PHASE II ' cpt4SU TM STRIAMP L SINIGNEEW 5,4- 1 WN�W(.OMAI110 rMOC �'JPEB�IE! G.IRh16TQ�ONTJVIIO. J. Japes SUN-22-1996 15:57 HRNNENG P.03 k I � J, F2b L � 52 12 ------ ----- ---------- ---= ----------- + I F1b F2b 10ht 3D0e/e I ti ? 52 L_ S2 1 � Bo�TaM. I • ''; I , - F5 Di NEW PWL '.. if/ ♦GGNo%-M PER qf' S2 W/B-FM V W. . 10M TIES u: 1 0 * 300 do TO .400w Ti ABOVE FFN.SLAB ELEV. 6� a PWMPE 0-BM 040UELS I d7 x 40C LCMG DRILLED e C4RZutEp INTO TOP OF I M EXISTNG PIER. I • I I 7 150mm CONCFMETE SLAB ` (3m MPS - CA 'A') 380 ON 50mm RIGIDiMSLB. .ON LOOOE BAGOcIL4- I I I I F1b S2 I PART FOUNLDATION PLAN. an>7uM • om HANNIGAN J 9566 ENGINEERING COURTICE COMMUNITY 0am LIMITED CENTRE - MWASE II ,M Dowses> srRUC> c Saar WA M PiWD .COMM=MOAD 5,4-2 wlGlrwM.drtJVOO 7YPu7�6M7D F g11)r77B1 C4. I TON,GWAPda J. Jone> JUN-22-1996 1557 HANNENG P.04 K IVI kk kb t I I Nm c4+"� P13 IR w1 6-151 VBRT. , 10h1 ""0" -- • 32200 c/c TO +400m AMOVF FITL SLAB ELEV. p. PROVIDE 6-I5P'1 DOMLS 1 ( x 400 LONG DRILLED 4 Cs1 DUTSD INTO TOP Or- EX PIER(IYP:<RE=.) r--------_— m F5 i i u' W 20omn F{fGFi =KCRETE -J i F I l u✓2-10M - - SEE ARrN'L f PRAW 4 PC K PROPILP- , �-� - .---� BASEMENT Amok PART FOUNDATION PLAN, f ,.�.a ADD!�QUM • VIM wuacrm� HANNIGAN JWM 212%S& 9566 ENGINEERING COURTICE COMMUNITY LIMITED ca�st,��aur3sn4uc u r�s CENTRE - PHmoW II + NkW ROAD Wb I oatPM wont _ ���� '� > � IX.Ip161b/LOMJR0. J.Jones tl { � t ,I 1 SUN-22-1996 1558 HANNENG P.05 i Jx L N "Mwm < pft-V PIER w/*-ISM YEM. + Kh'I TIEB • 300 GC O'• 400ne1 ABOVE PI 81;A@S ELEV. M")"DS 4 -16M DOMLS x A00 LON a OMLLED t GROUTED Q TOP OF 2 EX PIEm( . .4 RSQ D-) ,� Ra r I I I 19x L I I5OM corlcr� sLOS (30 i'1Pa - A') ON SOW RIGID ON LOOM ILL iom • MWIL GROUTED INTO BLOCK I� o vKa F11 s2 �, S2 L_ ` _-- ` s2 -tamm — __ -- i-----�-- — — --------- — — ---- ----- -- ----� — � i r- 133.90 PART FOUNDATION PLAN. nrueer, ADDEQUPI • o m t�nsTtn HANNIGAN fopmwwew Jum 21)"re W&b ENGINEERING COURTICE GoM" Nj-ry LIMITED CENTRE — PHO46E II , cx>hsrxrrNra S7Rf1C7iAiAL ENQ#wA 3 mm lawn r emmca I4ClCP 5A -4 �uuarHKwmtvv r C AR�INroKCM~. J.J«ie. . $ JUN-22-1996 m HANNENG m+ It A •_ � -� ek 2§§K2 MP 2 � oe ii O § ` LL 6. &L &! . q \ §§ / k� 10-114 \ U n on fit $ .0 Cq LL � : � IL $| z @ ' � < LLI �2 Q ' ' 2 _ . E� & ��§ ° k ' �/ @ ■§ 2� f / � . g z d + W .J� °°k��§ Age � $ � q � � . $ —e996 15:s HANNENG � me { @ $ \ $ IN � � WID _ ■ 2 § | ' Mg, � $ «\JL E $ U`« 2 » e_ $- � � a � ----- � | 2 � - �----: � w_ , 2 ■u�0 } ( 9 � § 2 a _t� � §§ � � , JUN-22-1996 1559 HANNENG a P.08 Lig 'laN==-a ONG twig r �4 U =ago Isis vm` U U m u 1 � k y d Z W co 2al.. Q Z ��+ I Z LLB J tJ 'rgmo -MCI WAIO rI JUN-22-1996 16 00 HANNENG P.09MM All � W W Jp 1 (110-7)?rvmo 01330 I II � 0. a •� LL LL ' o •r o d ,�m9r � -- Q LE J i i � zwg S W ...,I F. i I SW-22-1996 16 00 HRNNENG P.10 i � � 1 I 5 VJ ' r gqg I a i } k i LL uU 1 ! 1 O 1 0 QW W 0 ZZ � Z < Zm 2WJ r 00 0/ / %% , i 0� �1 f G' f SUN-22-1996 16:01 HANNENG P.12 i i T ScYuCd4T FRAMM (BY OTHER& c 1 \� J \ \ 1 Gt5mXl2 CONT. 1 1 98nptt STEEL. ROOF DEGC. I CF,SOX12 VERT. I' • 1200 o/c MAX j ROOF BWAM � j I 1 I -------—_- f -SEE PLAhL L-55x�5xA D1AG. 9 * 1208 We MAY- "I (SE£ PLAN FOR DEPTH) i i SEGT 1 0 N Ri LIM S� I i ADQENQU l • � HANNIGAN F+ June 2U"6 9"6 17 P ENGINEERING coultriGE COMMUNiTy LIMITED cENTOE - PHAgE 11 ooMSULnO MUM Dow" KvAFK%GvrAw i F.w MMOMPA Ci.NU14TOl a11bYU0. J. ,10nM ; ' JUN-22-1996 16:01 HANNENG P. 13 i i 19 ! 1 l' 16 51cr �'ICaIiT FR,4MMG lBr bTNERb. ■ c�xt2 ccNr. 39M STEEL ROOF DECK a V om ter. 2 Ge MAX 1 I i ROOF BEAM � -SEE F'LaL i i 4� TIE 9OTTOM GFI P BE OF EAGH JOIST TO UP 010,51).(SEE PLAN FOR DEPTH). I, I i I { S GTI N Rz 1:2® S� ADDENQUI HANNIGAN , J"21,111% 056b ENGINEERING cord ricE commuTY LIMITED GEN PHASE II raro srRtwcruRae ,�..,, Raw SA- 12 nabIMKO�+��7 TFY00 P77tl4 Q„ryppl dlTAAr'o. J.Jane 1 TOTAL P.13 06-21-1996 11=21AM FROM TO 5950823 P.02 LEIPCIGER KAMINKER ' MITELMAN And Partners Inc. CONSULTING ENGINEERS j235 Lesmtl Road, Don Miltl, Ontario L438 2V1/Tel: (416)445.82551 Fax: (41b)44 69885 ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM NO. E-1 Wong Gregersen, Architects i 240 Richmond St.W., #401 OUR PROJECT NO. 94258 Toronto, Ontario PATE: June 21, 1996 M5V 1 V6 Attn: Me. John Chu RE: COURTICE COMMUNITY CENTRE COURTICE, ONTARIO i I r DRAWING E'1 r1 • palate two.type AC fight standards complete with concrete work, excavation and backfill from south part of parking lot., DRAWING E-4 I ! 1 . Delete two type "H" luminaires in Staff Lounge 131. i 2. Delete one type "H" luminaires in Snack Bar 105, 3 Delete two type "H" luminaires in Storage 107. 4. Delete Cove lights type "G" in Corridor 124. j5 . Rotate the 6 type "H1 " luminaires in Storage 153 by 906. 16. Delete one type "He in Workroom 157 with one type "R" outside janitor room door. 7. Rotate the three type "H" luminaires in Office 159 bej90°. !8• Luminaire in soffit at south community hall 109 to beilabelled "ZG". 19• Wall mounted luminaire in pool area just outside monitor room to be labelled "U". 10. Relabel the cove light luminaire in Lobby 123 from "G" to "F". 11 . Relabel the cove light luminaire in Part of Library around column "U- 11 " from "D" to "F" r r r ! r X06-21-1996 11:22AM FROM 5950623 P.03 ' i - 2 - DRAWING E-5 1 1 . Change label of transformer in electrical room 112.5 KVA to 75 KVA. 2. Power factor correction capacitor bank to be 75 KVA�R. 3. LP "D" to be 42 circuit 600Y/347V complete with 2-60A-3P, and 12- 15-1 P circuit breakers. 4. Reduce the number of feeders to boilers in panel "RA" from five to three. 5. Relabel the feeder breaker in panel "B" serving the step-down transformer from 15A-3P to 40A-3P. The feeder on Iii a 'side of transformer to be 3#8RW90-19, Transformer to be 3;ph; 3 winding, 30 kVA 600 to 208Y1120 V, and low voltage side feeder to be 4#2RW90- ' 32. 6. Increase the number of 15A,3P breakers and branch feeders for boiler pumps from five to eight. 7. Deletethree breakers and branch feeders for the two sauna heaters and steam generator. DRAWING E-6 1 . Delete lumihaire types 'N', 'T', 'Z' and 'Zd' from the lfich!edule_ 2. 'Type 'Y' and 'Y1 ' luminaires to have catalogue numbers corrected to BL2A-40OMH-34-L-R and BL2A-400MH-34-L-R-250&& !respectively. I ' LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN , and Partn ers i I PER: Mitelman, P.Eng. c:lwp51\1994\94258ade.001 � r i I � I I I I TOTAL P.03 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION ' FOR PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE ONTARIO OWNERS: THE CORPORATION OF THE - � MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 40 TEMPERANCE STREET COURTICE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTANTS: WGA WONG GREGERSEN ARCHITECTS INC. 240 RICHMOND STREET WEST, SUITE 401 TORONTO , ONTARIO M5V 1V6 Tel: (416) 595-9955 STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT: HANNIGAN ENGINEERING LIMITED 40 WINGES ROAD, UNIT 8 WOODBRIDGE , ONTARIO L4L 6B2 Tel: (905) 850-4400 MECHANICAL AND LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITLEMAN & PARTNERS INC. ELECTRICAL CONSULTANTS: 235 LESMILL ROAD WILLOWDALE , ONTARIO M3B 2V1 Tel: (416) 445-8255 LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT: VEENHOVEN & ASSOCIATES 4 HUMBER RIDGE DRIVE ETOBICOKE , ONTARIO M8Y 2A1 Tel: (416) 231-1870 PROJECT NO. 94027-24 JUNE 12 , 1996. SPECIFICATION for PROJECT NO. 94027-24 PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE, ONTARIO INDEX PAGE: 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------- " � Each Section of the Specification is numbered to conform to CSC/CSI MASTERFORMAT, arranged in the Standard 16 Division Format.The Sections are written as parts of work and have been assigned permanent numbers. They are arranged in sequence for this particular Project. Any gaps in the order of numerical sequence do not indicate that a Specifications Section has been omitted but, rather, that a Section is not included in work required for this Project. SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS tSection 00099 - Pre-Tender Meeting Registration 1 Section 00100 - Instructions to Tenderers 7 Section 00300 - Tender Form 3 Section 00310 - Unit Prices 4 Section 00320 - Alternate Prices 2 Section 00330 - Itemized Prices 7 ' Section 00430 - List of Subcontractors 6 Section 00800 - Supplementary General Conditions 7 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01005 - General Instructions 5 Section 01020 - Cash Allowances 1 Section 01027 - Application for Payments 1 Section 01040 - Coordination 3 Section 01050 - Field Engineering 1 Section 01060 - Regulatory Requirements 1 Section 01150 - Valuation of Changes 3 Section 01200 - Project Meetings 1 Section 01301 - Submittals 3 Section 01311 - Construction Schedule 1 Section 01340 - Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples 4 Section 01400 - Quality Control 1 ' Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 2 Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities 3 Section 01550 - Safety Requirements 1 Section 01575 - Environmental Protection 1 Section 01700 - Project Close Out 2 Section 01710 - Cleaning 2 Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Data 2 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Section 02212 - Topsoil and Finish Grading 3 Section 02222 - Excavation 2 Section 02223 - Backfill 3 r� SPECIFICATION INDEX INDEX PAGE : 2 ' ----------------------------------------------------------------- SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK (cont'd. ) Section 02490 - Trees, Shrubs & Groundcover 18 Section 02500 - Paving, Curbs and Sidewalk 5 Section 02580 - Pavement Marking 2 Section 02515 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving 7 Section 02617 - Precast Concrete Wall 3 Section 02700 - Drainage 2 ' Section 02934 - Hydraulic Seeding 3 Section 02938 - Sodding 7 Section 02940 - Landscape Maintenance 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE r Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork 3 ' Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 4 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 6 Section 03345 - Concrete Finishing 3 Section 03410 - Precast Concrete Stair 4 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 9 , Section 04205 - Glass Block 2 Section 04210 - Brick Masonry 4 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05120 - Structural Steel 6 Section 05210 - Steel Joists 4 Section 05310 - Steel Deck 5 Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 4 Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 3 Section 06110 - Carpentry and Millwork 9 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07132 - Membrane Waterproofing 3 , Section 07196 - Air Barrier and Insulation 7 Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System 6 Section 07270 - Firestopping and Smoke Seal 4 Section 07350 - Single Ply Roofing System 6 Section 07460 - Preformed Metal Roofing 4 Section 07511 - 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System 5 Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal 4 Section 07820 - Aluminum Skylights 5 Section 07830 - Roof Hatches 2 Section 07900 - Sealants 6 SPECIFICATION INDEX INDEX PAGE: 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------- SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08100 - Hollow Metalwork 5 Section 08200 - Wood Doors 2 Section 08364 - Rolling Shutters 2 Section 08400 - Aluminum Entrances 5 Section 08425 - Automatic Entrance Door Operator 3 Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows and Window Wall 10 Section 08710 - Finish Hardware 2 Section 08800 - Glazing 2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES ' Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System 6 Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile 7 Section 09505 - Acoustic Ceilings 5 Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring 3 Section 09680 - Carpet 4 Section 09760 - Seamless Flooring 3 Section 09800 - Plastic Wall Paint 3 Section 09900 - Painting 11 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10161 - Metal Toilet Partitions 3 Section 10200 - Louvres 3 Section 10500 - Lockers 3 Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories 3 Section 10950 - Manufactured Specialties 2 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - Not Used This Specification DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - Not Used This Specification DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13000 - Swimming Pools 19 Section 13052 - Saunas 2 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING DEVICES Not Used This Specification r SPECIFICATION INDEX INDEX PAGE: 4 ' ----------------•------------------------------------------------- SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE , DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DOOR TYPE SCHEDULE DOOR TYPE DETAILS DETAILS END OF CONTENTS ' DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS------------- Page_00100_1 ----------------------------------------- ------- ' 1 GENERAL 1 The Consultants will not accept any calls from Bidders re ' inquiries on this within Project 24 hours prior to close of Tender. ' .2 FORM OF CONTRACT . 1 The Contract will be based on the use of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2 , 1994, for Stipulated Price Contract and Supplementary General Conditions. . 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' 1 General Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Sub-Contract Bidders only can obtain one free complete set of Drawings and Specifications. . 2 Additional complete sets may be purchased in the amount of $ 40. 00. . 3 Additional sets or sheets of Drawings and Specifications will not be available for Sub-Contractors. ' 4 Complete sets of Bid Documents will be placed with the Toronto Construction Association and the Durham Construction Association. .4 FAILURE TO COMPLY . 1 Failure to comply with any of these Instructions to Tenderers ' may cause a tender to be declared improper and immediately rejected. By tendering, the tenderer agrees to all conditions herein. . 5 PRE-TENDER MEETING . 1 A Pre-Tender Meeting will take place Thursday June 20, 1996 at 11:00 a.m. accompanied by the Architectural Consultant, at Council Chambers, 40 Temperance Street, Bowmanville, Ontario. 2 Before submitting a Bid, examine the site to fully ascertain existing conditions, circumstances and limitations affecting the Work. No allowances will be made for additional costs arising out of failure to investigate existing conditions. . 6 FAIR WAGES ' 1 The Contractor must pay and ensure that all sub-contractors pay every worker employed in the execution of this contract not less than the rate of wages for each class of work as set out in the ' schedule of wage rates of the local region. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS Page: 00100-2 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- .7 WORKER'S COMPENSATION . 1 Worker's Compensation coverage shall be provided by the Contractor for all employees who are employed under the Contract. . 2 Proof of this coverage shall be presented to the Owner by the ' successful Contractor prior to issuance of a Contract and the Contractor commencing any work on the Site. . 3 Proof of this coverage shall also be submitted to the Owner prior , to commencing the work and every 60 days thereafter, and prior to receiving payment on Substantial and Total Performance of the Work. 4 The Owner reserves the right to investigate fully the qualifications (including financial status) of any tenderer , wishing to tender. The Owners's decision as to the tenderer's suitability to tender shall be final. .8 DEFINITIONS . 1 The following definitions of terms will be strictly observed in the consideration of tenders: ' . 1 Tender Form: Standard form of Tender. .2 Tender Form Forms listing information required in ' Supplements: addition to that described on the Tender Form. . 3 Schedule of The unit prices for the basic elements of Prices: construction offered by the Tenderer on the Tender Form or supplement to be used for , calculation of the value of additions to or deductions from the Contract, in accordance with the General Conditions, arising out of ' variations to the work specified and/or shown on the working Drawings. .4 Price: ALL PRICES SHALL BE INCLUSIVE OF ALL MARKUP FOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT AND PROVINCIAL SALES TAXES. GOODS AND SERVICE TAX SHALL BE SHOWN SEPARATELY IN THE TENDER FORM, AND ' SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE TENDER PRICE. .5 Consultant: WGA Wong Gregersen Architects Inc. . 6 Tender/Bid: The total price of the Work of the Contract at closing time of Tender. .7 Tenderer/ The Company or person submitting a price ' Bidder: for the Work of the Contract. ' SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS Page: 00100-3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------- . 9 TENDER DOCUMENTS ' 1 The following Contract Documents form the basis of the Contract and should be consulted by Tenderers: ' . 1 Standard Form of Tender. .2 Instructions to Tenderers. (Section 00100) .3 Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 , 1994. ' . 4 Specification for all Trades. . 5 All addenda issued. . 6 Bid Form Appendices (Documents 00310, 00320, and 00430) ' . 10 SITE LOCATION . 1 Courtice Community Complex ' Courtice Road Courtice, Ontario . 11 OWNER . 1 The owner is The Corporation of The Municipality of Clarington. . 12 DELIVERY OF' TENDER . 1 Deliver Tender on Tender Forms supplied herewith to: ' OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICE DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO LIC 3A6 ' not later than 2 : 00 p.m. Wednesday June 26, 1996 in the sealed envelope provided and marked "Tender for Phase 2 - Courtice Community Complex". .2 No Tender will be received by the Owner after the time specified above. 07320 . 3 The Appendix Tender Forms Sections 00310Aand 00430 shall be submitted with the Tender and fully completed or Tender may be declared improper and immediately rejected. . 4 Tenders wi].:1 be opened in public at 2 : 15 p.m. Wednesday June 26, 1996. . 13 TENDER 1 only Tenders submitted on the Consultant's Standard Tender Form provided will be considered. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS Page:00100-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- . 13 TENDER (cont'd. ) .2 All parts of the Tender Form and supplements must be clearly ' legible. . 3 All blank spaces on the Tender Form and supplements must be ' completed. .4 The Tender must not be qualified by any conditions other than the , conditions stated herein. . 5 Failure to complete any of the blank spaces in the Tender Form or supplements may cause a Tender to be declared improper and immediately rejected. . 6 Ensure that all forms are signed by an authorized person or ' persons. Incorporated companies must affix their corporate seal under the signature of their proper officers. .7 Oral, telegraphed, telephoned or faxed bids and/or modifications to bids will not be considered. .8 The Owner shall have the right not to accept the lowest or any tender. 14 GENERAL CONTRACT BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY ' . 1 Each General Contractor shall provide a signed and sealed "Statement of Commitment" to provide to the Municipality of , Clarington a bid deposit in the amount of $ 150, 000. 00 (certified cheque, bank draft or money order) payable to the Municipality of Clarington. The intention of this deposit is to provide for both the bid deposit, as well as, a show of good faith of the ' contractors intention to submit a tender on this Structure Contract, Phase 2 of the Work, and to enter into a formal agreement with the Municipality should this tender be accepted. ' This bid deposit will be required by the Municipality at the time of issuance of the tender. No other deposit will be requested. All tender bid deposits will be returned to the respective ' bidders within ten (10) days after the tenders have been opened except those of the two (2) low responsible bidders, which shall be retained by the Municipality of Clarington until the successful bidder and Municipality have executed the Contract. In ' the event a Contractor chooses not to submit a tender, the deposit will be returned within 10 days of the tender closing. . 2 Each Bid shall be accompanied by an agreement to bond from a surety approved by the Owner, committing to provide a 100% Performance Bond and a 100% Labour and Materials Payment Bond required by these Bid Documents. , ' SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS------------------ Pagee00100_5 -- ---------------------•----------------- . 14 GENERAL CONTRACT BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY (cont'd. ) ' 3 Indicate in the Tender Form the amount included in the Tender Price for the cost for a 100% Performance Bond and a 100% Labour and Materials Payment Bond. 4 Subcontractors for Division 15 - Mechanical; and Division 16 - Electrical, are required to provide a Performance Bond to the ' General Contractor for 50% of their Tender amount. The cost of this bond is to be included in their Tender amount, and shown separately in their Tender Form. A copy of the performance bond and the labour and materials bond shall be provided to the Owner. . 15 QUESTIONS, DISCREPANCIES, ETC. . 1 The Tenderer shall report to the Consultant all discrepancies, omissions, errors, departures from the Building By-Laws or good practice and points considered to be of dubious intent, so that the Consultant may, if he considers it desirable, issue instructions by addenda at least five working days before Tender closing date. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be held responsible for oral instructions. ' . 2 Submission of Tenders shall constitute acceptance by the Tenderer and inclusion in his proposal of provisions for all conditions and limitations, particularly as regards working and storage space and access facilities, laws, ordinances and regulations, whether specifically mentioned or implied and as required to complete the Contract in every respect. . 3 Any errors and/or omissions and/or discrepancies not reported to the Consultant during Tender shall be rectified during the ' Work by the successful Tenderer at no extra cost. .4 All enquiries to the Consultant shall be made to Mr. John Chu at (416) 595-9955 Ext. 203. . 16 ALTERNATIVES AND EQUIVALENTS ' 1 Bidders must apply for approval from the Consultant 5 working days prior to close of Tender for any product or material they propose to use. 2 Upon approval from the Consultant an Addendum will be issued to all Bidders advising of approved product or material. 3 Any product: or material utilized without approval from the Consultant, will have to be removed from the Site and replaced with that specified at no extra cost to the Owner. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS Page: 00100-6 , ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- .17 VALUATION OF CHANGES . 1 Changes involving any increase in the Contract Sum shall be ' evaluated in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. . 18 TENDER ANALYSIS , .1 Within 3 working days of notification by the Consultant, and prior to award of Contract, the low qualified Bidder shall submit , a trade by trade breakdown of the Bid Price for analysis by Consultant. . 2 Submit additional information promptly if requested by ' Consultant. . 19 SALES TAX . 1 The Tender amount shall include Goods and Services Tax, and shall be shown separately on the Tender Form. .2 The Tender amount shall include Provincial Sales Tax. .20 COMPLETION ' . 1 Contractors shall achieve Substantial Performance of the Contract , no later than May 1, 1997. . 2 Once the Contract has been awarded construction shall be carried out in one continuing operation, unless agreed to and approved by the Owner and Consultant at the time of such request. . 21 GEOTECHNICAL and DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE REPORTS ' . 1 Any information supplied as to soil conditions or designated substance is merely for the information of the Tenderer The Owner and the Consultant are not responsible for any information ' or opinions expressed in these reports. All Work to be done in strict accordance with Ministry of Environment Standards. .2 Location of the soil test bearings is shown in the Geotechnical , Report. . 3 Geotechnical and Designated Substance Reports must be reviewed , by Tenderers as described. .22 UNIT PRICES , . 1 Complete the "Unit Price Section" which forms part of the Tender Form. The difference in price between " Add" and "Deduct" shall ' be no greater than twenty percent. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS------------------ Page_00100_7 -- ----------------------------------------- .23 BUILDING PERMIT ' 1 The Contractor shall apply for Building Permit including all subsequent permits as required. ' 24 TOTAL RESPONSIBILITY . 1 It is the General Contractor's total responsibility for the ' overall performance and completion of the Work. Breakdown of work by trades is for the convenience of the General Contractor only. All trades are required to examine all Sections of the Drawings and Specifications. The Consultants assume no responsibility for the division of Work or for any jurisdictional involvement as a result of such divisions. 25 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS . 1 It is the General Contractor's total responsibility for assuming As-Built Drawings from Phase 1 total Sitework and Foundation construction. .2 As-Built Drawings for Phase 1 will be available for reference ' purposes upon request. . 3 No extras to the Contract will be considered should the General ' Contractor not confirm lines, levels and dimensions. .26 CANADA ONTARIO INFRASTRUCTURE PROGRAM 1 This Project is funded under the Canada Ontario Infrastructure Program. ' 2 Bidders are required to submit at the time of Tendering the estimated number of man days of employment in their Bid. ' . 3 The successful Contractor will be required to submit actual man days of employment created by this Project when required by the Owner. ' 27 CHECK PAGES OF SPECIFICATION . 1 The Contractor is cautioned to check pages in the Specification against the number of pages listed in the Index to ensure that the Specification is complete. END OF SECTION 1 - ' DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS tSECTION 00300 - TENDER FORM--------------------------------- ------0300-1 ------------------------- -------- ' PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD ' COURTICE , ONTARIO ' PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 .' 1 From: Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: ' Telephone No. Dear Sir: ' Having carefully examined the: Instructions to Bidders The Form of Agreement ' Drawings and Specifications Addenda No. to inclusive for Phase 2 - Courtice Community Complex, Courtice, Ontario, and having I ' visited and investigated the Site and examined all conditions affecting the work, the undersigned offers, if notified in writing of the acceptance of this Tender within sixty (60) days of the time for the opening of Tenders, >> to furnish all plant, equipment, labour and material and perform all duties and services called for the Work, as described above, including all applicable Provincial Sales Tax and Excise Taxes, custom duties, freight and exchange and all other charges, including Goods and Service Tax for the total Tender price of: Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of Canada. SECTION 00300 - TENDER FORM Page: 00300-2 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Amount included in Total Tender Price for Goods and Service Tax: , ($ ) , Amount included in Total Tender Price for 1003 Performance Bond and 1003 Materials Payment Bond for the General Contractor. , Amount included in Total Tender Price for 503 Performance Bond and 503 ' Materials Payment Bond for the Mechanical Prime Contractor. ($ ) ' Amount included in Total Tender Price for 503 Performance Bond and 503 Materials Payment Bond for the Electrical Prime Contractor. In submitting this Tender we recognize your right not to accept the lowest ' or any Tender. 1 AGREEMENT To BOND ENCLOSED . 1 An Agreement to Bond issued by , is enclosed. . 2 EXECUTE CONTRACT . 1 The undersigned agrees that his Tender is valid and subject to acceptance by the Owner for a period of sixty (60) days from the date set for the receipt of Tenders and that if notified of award of Contract he will: ' 1 Execute a Contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms and conditions noted in the Tender Documents. .2 Furnish to the Owner within 48 hours of date of notification of award of Contract a detailed schedule of work. . 3 Schedule of values to be jointly agreed with the owner for ' billing purposes. . 2 The undersigned being a company duly incorporated under the ' laws of do hereby declare as follows: SECTION 00300 - TENDER FORM Page: 00300-3 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- ' .2 EXECUTE CONTRACT . 1 That the Shareholders or Partners of the Company submitting this Tender are the only persons interested in this Tender and no other person has any interest in this Tender. .2 That the Tender is made without any connection, knowledge, comparison of figures or arrangements with any other person ' or persons or firms making a Tender for the same work and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. . 3 If notified of the acceptance of this Tender, we undertake to ' commence work on Site on date stipulated by the Owner and substantial performance no later than May 1, 1997. 4 Estimated number of man days of employment . 3 SIGNATURES Signed and submitted for and on behalf 'of: Company: (Name) (Street Address or Postal Box Number) (City, Province and Postal Code) Signature: Name and Title: (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at this day of 1996. Seal: END OF SECTION a DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS SECTION 00310 - UNIT PRICES ---------------------------Page: 00310-1 ---------------------------- ------------- ' PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD ' COURTICE , ONTARIO ' PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 1. UNIT PRICES (, . 1 We, -- .2 Submit our Unit Prices in accordance with the following 'Units of Work' which will be used in cases where such unit:: of work are applicable. . 3 Unit Prices are indicated as either "DEDUCT" or "ADD" and include our expenses and profit, all removal costs as required, all Provincial Sales Tax and Good and Service Tax and represent the actual installed cost to the Owner. . 4 Adjustment to the contract price is based on the net quantity difference from the original quantity. I!� . 5 Our Unit Prices for the Units of Work are: . 6 The amount between "Deduct" and "Add" shall be no greater than twenty (20) percent. .7 No Contractor or Sub-Contractor mark-up on deleted or credit items. Unit of Work DEDUCT ADD . 1 Earth excavation by machine calculated in its natural bed, including disposal, per cu.m. . 2 Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal, per cu.m. SECTION 00310 - UNIT PRICES Page: 00310-2 ' ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 . 1 UNIT PRICES (cont'd. ) Unit of Work DEDUCT ADD ' . 3 Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cu.m. t . 4 Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per cu.m. , .5 Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cu.m. . 6 Supply, placing and compacting ' of granular material Class "A" as specified in Section 02222, ' calculated in place, per cu.m. .7 Supply, placing and compacting ' of granular material Class "B" as specified in Section 02222, calculated in place, per cu.m. .8 Supply, placing and compacting of granular material Class "C" as specified in Section 02222, ' calculated in place, per cu.m. .9 Supply, placing and compacting , of granular material Class "D" as specified in Section 02222, calculated in place, per cu.m. . 10 Fill, excavated material from 1 site, compacted, calculated in place, Class "E" , per cu.m. , . 11 Reinforcing steel for concrete floor beams and slabs, supply and setting, including detailing bending and cleaning, per ton . 12 Formwork, contact area, for concrete floor beams and slabs in place, including materials, bracing, shoring, incorporation ' of built-in items, release agent agent, stripping and removing, per sq.m. 1 ". 1 SECTION 00310 - UNIT PRICES Page: 00310-3 --------------------- --------------------------------------------------- 1 UNIT PRICER (cont'd. ) Unit of Work DEDUCT ADD . 13 Formwork, contact area for smooth finish walls, and piers in place including erection, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built- ' in items, release agent, stripping and removing, per sq.m. . 14 Formwork, contact area for smooth finish columns in place including erection, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built-in items, ' release agent, stripping and removing per sq.m. . 15 Concrete Below Grade: . 1 Concrete backfill for skim slabs, 15 MPa, placed, per cu.m. .2 Concrete foundations reinforced, 25 MPa, excluding .reinforcement and formwork, per cu.m. . 3 Reinforcing steel, supply and setting per ton. .4 Formwork, contact area per sq.m. . 16 Concrete Block: . 1 Hollow Concrete Block work, laid including reinforcement per sq.m. of surface area - 100 mm wall 150 mm wall 200 mm wall 250 mm wall 300 mm wall 430 mm wall r SECTION 00310 - UNIT PRICES Page: 00310-4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ .1 UNIT PRICES (cont'd. ) Unit of Work DEDUCT ADD , . 2 Solid Concrete Block work, laid including reinforcement ' per sq.m. of surface area - 1.00 mm wall ' 150 mm wall 200 mm wall 250 mm wall 300 mm wall , 480 mm wall 1 .2 SIGNATURES Signed and Submitted for and on behalf of: , Company: (Name) , (Street Address or Postal Box Number) (City, Province and Postal Code) ' Signature: Name and Title: (Please print or type) Witness: Dated at this day of 1996. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. SECTION 00320 - ALTERNATIVE PRICES---------------------Page_00320-1 ---------------------------------- ------ PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO ' L1C 3A6 1. ALTERNATIVE PRICES . 1 We, (Name of Company) . 2 Submit the following Alternative Prices, excluding G.S.T. DEDUCT ADD . 1 The net difference in cost of providing all labour and materials required to provide and install Solid Core Phoenolic Toilet Partitions Type 130-TS by Watrous Sales Inc. , or approved alternate, in lieu of Metal Toilet Partitions as specified in Section 10160. $ $ .2 The net difference in cost of ' providing all labour and materials required to provide and install Coin Operated Lockers compression to later instructions, in lieu of Lockers as specified in Section 10500. $ $ U� SECTION 00320 - ALTERNATIVE PRICES Page: 00320-2 ---------------------•--------------------------------------------------- 2. SIGNATURES Signed and submitted for and on behalf of: Company: (Name) (Street Address or Postal Number) ' (City, Province and Postal Code) Signature: Name and ' Title: (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at _ this day of 1996 . END OF SECTION ' DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS -----------------------------------------------------------------�00----1 PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 1• LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS . 1 We, 1 (Name of Company) . 2 Submit with our Tender the following list of Subcontractors and Suppliers of materials which are included in our Tender. . 3 We agree that changes to this list will not be allowed without the expressed written permission of the Consultant. 4 We submit that in proposing the undermentioned subcontractors and suppliers, we have consulted each and has ascertained to our complete satisfaction that those named are fully acquainted with the extent and nature of the Work and that they will execute their Work to conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Excavation and Backfill Sodding.and.Seeding • , . , • . • • . • • • . . . . . , . , . • • • • . • . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS---------------------Page_00430_2-- . 1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SUPLLIERS (cont'd. ) Cast-In-Place Concrete Concrete Floor Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precast Concrete Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Masonry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Block • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brick Masonry ' . • • • . . . . , . , • • . • . . • • . • • • • , . • . • . • . . . . , • • Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . �. Metal.Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Metal Fabrications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handrails and Railings • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane Waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rSECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS--------------------- Page_00430_3 -- ---------------------•----------------- . 1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SUPLLIERS (cont'd. ) Air Barrier System and Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r ` Acoustic Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firestop and Smokeseal Exterior Insulation and Finish System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single.Ply.Roof.System . • . • • . . • • , • . . . • , .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefinished Metal Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Ply Built.-Up Roofing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashing and Sheet Metal • , • • . • • • • • . • • . , . , • . • . , • • . • • . . • . Aluminum Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hollow Metalwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wood Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Page:00430-4 -------------•----------------------------------------------------- 1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SUPLLIERS (cont'd. ) Rolling Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum Entrance Doors and Screens ' Automatic Entrance Doors Aluminum Windows and Window Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass and.Glazing • • • . • • • . Gypsum Board System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceramic Tile Acoustic Ceilings Acoustic wall Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resilient Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless. Flooring Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Toilet Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS ------------ Pages00430_5- - ----------------------------------------------- . 1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SUPLLIERS (cont'd. ) ' Louvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockers , • . • • . . • • • • . • • • • . . . • • . • . Washroom Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flagpole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tFoot.Grilles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ■ Tackboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Room Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swimming Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saunas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 1 SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Page: 00430-6 2 . SIGNATURES ' Signed and submitted for and on behalf of: ' Company: (Name) (Street Address or Postal Box Number) (City, Province and Postal Code) Signature: Name and Title: (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at this day of 1996. END OF SECTION DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION-00800-_- - ----- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERALCONDITIONS-- Page_-00800_1------ The parties hereto hereby agree that the standard construction document CCDC 2 , 1994, 'Stipulated Price Contract" is hereby amended by the Supplementary Conditions contained herein, which by Article A-3 of the standard document form part of the Contract Documents and govern the Work and the Project provided for in this Contract. DEFINITIONS The definitions set out on page 7 of the standard construction document are rhereby amended by adding a new paragraph 21 thereto as follows: 1121. Office of the Clerk "Office of the Clerk" means the person holding the office of Clerk for The Corporation of The Municipality of Clarington. rPART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 1.4 ASSIGNMENT 1. Paragraph GC 1.4. 1 is hereby amended by deleting the words "which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld" from the second line of that paragraph. PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT iGC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK 1. Paragraph GC 2 . 3 . 3 is hereby amended by adding the word "all" between the words "of" and "certificates" . 2 . Paragraph GC 2. 3 .5 is hereby amended by adding the words "or the laws of the Place of Work" after the words "Contract Documents" in the second line of that paragraph and further by adding the words "or the laws of the Place of Work" between the words "Documents" and "the" in the third line of that paragraph and further by adding the words "the laws of the Place of Work" after the word "Documents" in the fourth line of that paragraph. PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK GC 3.8 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 1. Paragraph GC 3 .8. 1(3) is hereby amended by adding the words "the Contractor would" between the words "as" and "for" in the second line of that paragraph. L 2. Paragraph GC 3 .8. 2 is hereby amended by adding the words "as of the date of execution of this Contract or any time thereafter and" between the words "Contractor" and "which" in the second line of that paragraph. SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page: 00800-2 ----------------------------------------------------------- GC 3.12 USE OF THE WORK 1. Paragraph GC 3 . 12 is hereby amended by adding a new paragraph GC 3. 12. 3 immediately following paragraph GC 3 . 12 .2 which reads as follows: The Contractor shall undertake all Work in such a manner as to not interfere with or in any way damage or cause a nuisance to the Place of Work, properties adjacent to the Place of Work (and the inhabitants thereof) or any municipal property or services at or surrounding the Place of Work (including all roads and road allowances) . " 2 . Paragraph GC 3 . 12 is hereby amended by adding a new paragraph GC 3 . 12 .4 immediately following the new paragraph GC 3 . 12. 3 which reads as follows: "The Contractor shall undertake all Work in such a manner as to not interfere with vehicular traffic on public thoroughfares adjacent to the Place of Work without the prior written consent of the Owner. " PART 5 PAYMENT r GC5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS . 1 Paragraph 5. 3. 2 last line: change "no later than 5 days" to read "no later than 30 days". GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 1. Paragraph GC 5.4 is hereby amended by adding a new paragraph GC 5.4 . 5 immediately following paragraph GC 5.4 . 4 as follows: "Prior to applying for a certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work or the issuance thereof by the Consultant, the Contractor shall supply to the Owner all written records, drawings, specifications, maintenance and operating instructions and certificates, and warranty certificates related to the Work or any Product as may be required by the Owner. " GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UNPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 1. Paragraph 5. 5. 3 Delete in it's entirety. SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS----------- Page: 00800-3 GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK 1. Paragraph GC 5. 6. 1 is hereby amended by adding the words "provided that the Contractor has supplied to the Owner the statutory declaration of the subcontractor or Supplier referred to in paragraph GC 5.5. 1(2) " immediately after the word "Work" in the fifth line of that paragraph. 2. Paragraph GC 5. 6.2 is hereby amended by adding the words "the Contractor shall" between the words "and" and "be" in the third line of that paragraph. 3 . Add New Paragraph: The Owner shall hold back 1% of the total contract amount until all deficiences have been remedied, or such greater !; amount: as recommended to the Owner by the Consultant. PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE 1. Paragraph GC 6. 3 . 4 is hereby amended by adding the words "as they relate directly to the Change Directive: " after the word "following" in the fourth line of that paragraph. 2 . Paragraph GC 6.3.6 is hereby amended by adding the words "in accordance with paragraphs GC 2. 2 . 6, GC 2 .2. 7 , GC 8. 1. 1, GC 8. 1.2 and GC 8. 1. 3 of the General Conditions" after the word "determination" in the second line of that paragraph. GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 1. Paragraph GC 6.4.3 is hereby amended by adding the words "and the Contractor shall thereafter proceed to fulfil its obligations pursuant to this Contract" after the word "writing" in the third line of that paragraph. GC 6.5 DELAYS 1. Paragraph GC 6. 5. 3 is hereby amended by deleting the words "unless such delays result from actions by the Owner" in the eight and ninth lines of that paragraph. 2 . Paragraph GC 6.5.4 is hereby amended by adding the words "by the Owner" between the words "Consultant" and "not" in the first line of that paragraph. SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page: 00800-4 -------------------------------------------- ------------------ PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE GC 7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 1. Paragraph GC 7. 1.5 (3) is hereby amended by deleting the words "however, if such cost of finishing the Work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the difference: " after the words "Contract Price" in the fifth and sixth lines of that paragraph. 2 . Paragraph GC 7. 1 is hereby amended by adding a new paragraph GC 7. 1.7 immediately following paragraph GC 7 . 1. 6 as follows: "If the Contractor or any of its agents, subcontractors, r Suppliers or employees gives or offers to give any gratuity to, or attempts to bribe or influence by the payment or delivery or promise of payment or delivery of money or gifts to any member of the Council for the Owner or any officer, servant or employee of the owner, the Owner may, by giving the Contactor notice in writing, terminate the Contract, and thereafter, the provisions of paragraph GC 7. 1.5 shall apply. " GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 1. Paragraph GC 7.2 . 1 is deleted in its entirety and substituted therefore is the word "Deleted". 2 . Paragraph GC 7 . 2 . 3 (1) is deleted in its entirety and substituted therefore is the word "Deleted" and further, paragraph GC 7. 2 . 3 (2) is amended by substituting the words "when required by" for the words "as provided in" in that sentence and further paragraph GC 7. 2.3 (4) is amended by deleting the words "except for GC 5. 1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER" between the words "Consultant" and "confirms" in the second and third lines of that paragraph. PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION GC 8.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 1. Paragraph GC 8 . 1. 3 is amended by inserting the words "only the actual" between the words "Contractor" and "costs" in the sixth line of that paragraph and further by deleting the words "including costs resulting from interruption of the Work" in the eight line of that paragraph and substituting therefore the words "including only the actual costs incurred that resulted from the interruption of the Work" therefore. SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page: 00800-5 ----------------- PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY GC 9.2 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 1. Paragraph GC 9.2 .3 is amended by adding the words "retained directly by the Owner" between the words "contractor" and "on" in that paragraph, on line 1. GC 9.3 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS 1. Paragraph GC 9. 3 .8 is amended by adding the words "except to the extent that such claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings arise out of the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or any subcontractor, Supplier or those for whom at law they are responsible, in which case the Contactor shall be responsible for same and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner with respect to same in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph" after the words "commencing the Work" in the fourth line of that paragraph. PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES 1. Paragraph GC 10.2.5 is hereby amended by deleting the word "knowing" from the second line in that paragraph and substituting therefore the words "and knows or ought to know" therefore. GC 10.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION 1. Paragraph GC 10. 4 . 1 is hereby amended by adding the words "any progressive release of holdback pursuant to paragraph GC 5. 6, " between the words "performance of the Work" and "and" in the first line of that paragraph. 2 . Paragraph GC 10.4.2 is hereby amended by adding the words "referred to in paragraph GC 10.4. 1 above" between the words "compliance" and "by" in the second line of that paragraph. PART 11 INSURANCE - BONDS GC 11.1 INSURANCE 1. Paragraph GC 11. 1. 1 (1) is hereby amended by deleting the number and symbol "$ 2 ,000, 000" and substituting therefore the number and symbol "$ 7, 000, 000. 00" . 2 . Paragraph GC 11. 1. 1 (2) is hereby amended by adding the word "used" between the words "owned" and "or" in the third line of that paragraph. + r SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page: 00800-6 -°°°-°°°°--°°°-------------------------------------------------- GC 11. 1. 1(5) Contractors' Equipment Insurance 1. Paragraph GC 11. 1. 1(5) is hereby amended by adding the words "satisfactory to the Owner" between the words "proof" and "of" in the sixth line of that paragraph and further by adding the words "such waiver shall not be effective unless given in writing by the Owner to the Contractor" after the word "requirement" in the seventh line of that paragraph". .2 Add: Builder' s Risk Insurance shall be $ 6, 000, 000. 00. Add: Barry * Bryan Associates (1991) Ltd. to be included in the insured list. Add: The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington to be included in the insured list. GC 11.2 BONDS i. Paragraph GC 11.2. 1 is hereby amended by adding the words "time specified by the Owner" between the words "the" and "specified" in the first line of that paragraph and further by deleting the words "specified time" immediately following the new word "Owner" in that same line. 2 . Paragraph GC 11. 2.2 is hereby amended by adding the following words immediately after the words "bond forms" in the fourth line of that paragraph: "and said bonds shall apply to: a) the obligations of the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents throughout the Contract Time; b) the obligations of the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents during the warranty period as set out in paragraph GC 12 . 3 . 1; C) subject to paragraph GC 11. 2 . 3, any Product warranty periods in excess of 1 year, required or obtained pursuant to paragraph GC 12 . 3 . 6; and d) all commitments of the Contractor in law arising out of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: i) Unemployment Insurance premiums; ii) withholding taxes or moneys due or owing pursuant to the Income Tax Act (Canada) ; iii) workers Compensation payments or premiums; and iv) vacation pay entitlement. " SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page: 00800-7 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- GC 11.2 BONDS 3. Paragraph GC 11. 2 is hereby further amended by adding a new paragraph GC 11.2.3 immediately following paragraph GC 11.2.2 as follows: "The Contractor shall be permitted to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 11. 2 .2 (c) by obtaining a surety bond which complies with the provisions of this Contract from a subcontractor or Supplier provided such surety bonds are issued in the name of the Owner. " PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION - WAIVER - WARRANTY GC 12 .1 INDEMNIFICATION 1. Paragraph GC 12. 1. 1 is hereby amended by adding the words "in any way" between the words "that" and "arise" in the third line of that paragraph and further by adding the words "or the performance of those for whom the Contractor is at law responsible" after the word "Contract" in the said paragraph and further by deleting paragraphs GC 12 . 1. 1 (1) (2) and (3) in their entirety and further by deleting the words "the Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity for claims other than those stated above" at the end of that paragraph. 2. Paragraph GC 12 . 1. 2 is hereby amended by deleting the symbol and numbers "$ 2, 000, 000" and substituting therefore the symbol and numbers "$ 7, 000,000. 00" between the words "to" and "per" in the first line of that paragraph and further by deleting the symbol and numbers "$ 2, 000, 000" and substituting therefore the symbol and numbers"$7, 000, 000. 00" at the end of that paragraph. Add: Barry * Bryan Associates (1991) Ltd. to be included in the insured list. Add: The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington to be included in the insured list. END OF SECTION f DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01005 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page: 01005-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- . 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS . 1 Work will be performed under one Contract, based upon the CCDC-2-1994 Stipulated Price Contract, as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions. . 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS . 1 The General Conditions of the Contract and the Supplementary General Conditions form an integral part of the Specifications. 3 DIVISION 1 . 1 The provisions of all Sections of Division 1 shall apply to each Section of this Specification. . 4 SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS ' 1 Wherever in the Specification the word "Owner" is used in any form, it shall mean "The Corporation of The Municipality of Clarington" . .2 Wherever in the Specification the word "Consultant" is used in any form, it shall mean " WGA Wong Gregersen Architects Inc. " .3 In the Specification, reference such as "Shown on the Drawings", "Specified", "Scheduled" , "Called for" and the like shall be deemed to include work required by any of the Contract Documents. .4 In the Specifications the expression Trade (s) is synonymous with Subcontractor(s) if the context permits. .5 The expression "All Trades" shall be deemed to include the Contractor. • 6 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE . 1 Store packaged materials in original, undamaged containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. .2 Store sand, masonry units and manufactured items off ground on approved supports and protect each pile with weatherproof covering: stack to permit air circulation and to prevent damage to units. Use mechanical equipment for handling to minimize damage. . 3 Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. 4 Damaged materials are not acceptable; remove damaged or rejected materials from site immediately at own expense. SECTION 01005 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page: 01005-2 ---------------------------------------------------------- .7 LINTELS AND BRIDGING . 1 The Contractor shall ensure correct formation and bridging of openings in masonry and structural walls required by the Trades. Conform with lintel requirements shown on Structural Drawings or Standard Details. .8 TEMPORARY WORK . 1 The expression "Provide" shall be deemed to include the provision installation and finishing, maintenance, servicing and removal of the work described. All work damaged by temporary installation shall be repaired and made good at no expence to the Owner. .9 EXAMINATION . 1 Each Trade shall examine surfaces prepared by Other Trades which effect its work and shall ensure that defects are corrected. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of prepared work. 2 All Trades shall check and verify with the Contractor all dimensions, especially those pertaining to the work of more than just their trades. . 3 All details and measurements of any work which is to fit to, or conform with, work already installed by Other Trades, shall be taken at the job site by the Trades concerned. . 10 SATISFACTION/APPROVAL . 1 The expression to the satisfaction or approval of the Consultant" shall be implied throughout the Specification in regard to all materials and workmanship. .2 "Submit for approval" means that the item in question is to be submitted to the Consultant for approval and that a written acceptance of it and authorization for its. use in the Work shall be obtained before it is incorporated in the Work. Trades shall submit items for approval to the Consultant via the Contractor. . 3 An "approved method" means that which has the manufacturer's recommendation or which is generally accepted as good trade practice. The Consultant's approval is also required. . 11 FASTENINGS . 1 Use exposed metal fasteners and accessories of a permanent type that are of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur. SECTION 01005 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page: 01005-3 --------------------------- ------------------------ . 11 FASTENINGS (cont'd. ) 2 Use metal fastenings of the same materials as the metal component they are anchoring or of a metal which will not set up an electrolytic action which would cause damage to the fastening or metal component. . 3 Use fastenings of a type and size and install them in a manner to provide positive anchorage of the unit to be anchored in Position. Install anchors at required spacing to provide required load bearing or shear capacity. 4 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out. Show on Shop Drawings. 5 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is being made are not permitted. 6 Limitations for Use of Power Actuated Tools: . 1 The use of power activated fasteners is prohibited without the written authorization of the Consultant. .2 Where such authority is given, it will be for low velocity type power activated fasteners and for horizontal application only. . 3 The manufacturer of the equipment selected, Ramset, omark or equal, shall send a representative to the site to demonstrate the equipment prior to its use, and this representative shall make periodic inspections to ensure compliance with instructions issued by him and correct application of material. In all cases a shield shall be used where fasteners are to be applied to concrete. The use of fasteners in precast concrete is to be avoided if possible as there is an increased tendancy to shatter surfaces. . 4 Fasteners shall be not nearer than 63 mm to the edge of any cast-in-place formed concrete member. .5 Under no circumstances shall such fasteners be used on concrete members less than 75 mm in thickness. . 6 Such fasteners shall not be in areas where corrosion can take place, for instance due to high humidity or condensation. .7 Generally use support anchorage of cast-in-place type set into concrete forms prior to pouring concrete, or self- drilling type such as "Red Head" T-32 tie wire type. When drilling upwards, use jig to hold drill steady and plumb. SECTION 01005 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page: 01005-4 ------------------------------------ ---------------------- . 11 FASTENINGS (cont'd. ) .8 Provide pull-out tests on anchors, or otherwise test to ensure anchorage is sufficient for the particular application including a minimum safety factor of seven. Provide evidence of such tests if requested. .9 Submit samples of proposed anchoring or hanging devices with technical data and test data. , 12 BURIED SERVICES . 1 Make all necessary enquiries to determine the location of any existing services such as hydro, telephone, water, gas, sewer, etc. This applies to interior as well as exterior work. .2 Ascertain the location of any services buried in floor slabs prior to cutting and obtain Consultant's approval before work commences. . 13 EMERGENCIES . 1 Notify the Consultant and Owner immediately should an emergency arise on the site, including personal injuries and accidents. Provide complete details on extent of emergency, cause and the action being taken. This notification shall be by telephone or facsimile immediately to the Ministry of Labour after the occurrence. . 14 EXISTING SERVICES . 1 The Owner will not be liable for any loss, damage, delay or claim whatsoever resulting or arising from the absence in whole or in part any municipal or other of services. .2 without limiting the generality of the foregoing, this includes roads, water, storm and sanitary services, electricity and condition of drainage from or to the site. . 15 FIELD MARKING . 1 Do not use wick pens to mark face of products to be installed in the work. Such pen marks will show through applied paint or vinyl coatings in due course. The Contractor will be held responsible and required to remedy such defects, classified as "latent defects" regardless of when they occur. . 16 TRADEMARKS AND LABELS . 1 Trademarks and labels, including applied labels shall not be visible in the finished work. Such trademarks or labels shall be removed by grinding if necessary, or painted out where the particular material has been painted. SECTION 01005 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS----------------------- Page_01005_5 -- ------------------------------------ . 16 TRADEMARKS AND LABELS (cont'd. ) 2 The exception of this requirement shall be those essential to obtain identification of mechanical and electrical equipment and those required to be visible by Authorities having jurisdiction and those on plumbing fixtures and trims, i.e. all U.L.C. , C.S.A. , and A.S.T.M. labels. , 17 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK . 1 Install and arrange ducts,piping,tubing,equipment and fixtures in such a way as to conserve headroom and space as much as possible, to provide minimum interference and to be neat,orderly and tidy. Unless otherwise noted, run pipes, ducts, tubing and conduit, vertical, horizontal and square with building grid. Conceal pipes, ducts, tubing and conduit above ceiling,rooms and unfinished spaces,unless indicated or specified otherwise. Dimensions and elevations of ceiling heights on Drawings must be maintained. .2 The general intent is that the Contractor shall include for all cutting and patching indicated on mechanical and electrical drawings and as required to meet the requirements and Specifications of Divisions 15 and 16 unless requirements are not given with timely notice or areas are substantially finished, in which case the Trades shall assume costs. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01020 - CASH ALLOWANCES Page: 01020-1 1. PROCEDURE . 1 The express intent of this Specification is that all Cash Allowances shall be carried by the Contractor, not by individual sub-contractors. The Contractor shall read the entire Specification prior to bidding and shall include in his Tender all Cash Allowances called for in this or any Section of the Specification. If allowances specified herein are repeated in Trade Sections, or if allowances are specified in Trade Sections but not listed in this Section. Bidders are requested to inform the Consultant immediately in order that an Addendum may be issued to implement the express intent that all Cash Allowances shall be carried by the Contractor. . 2 No expenditure including Contractor's supervision and coordination, against Cash Allowances shall be made or incurred. . 3 No additional mark up for the Contractor's expense and profit will be allowed where individual specific purpose Cash Allowances are exceeded. Goods and Service Tax Included. 2 . SPECIFIC PURPOSE CASH ALLOWANCES 1 Include in Tender Sum the following specific purpose Cash Allowances to be expended in whole or in part as directed by the Consultant. Allowance for Inspection: $ 30,000. 00 Finish Hardware: $ 60, 000.00 Signage: $ 15, 000. 00 Acoustic Treatment: $ 35, 000.00 P.A. Sound System: $ 15, 000.00 Hydro Connection: $ 25, 000. 00 Sewer Connection: $ 15, 000.00 Gas Connection and piping to $ 6, 000. 00 North Wall of Building END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS--------- Page_ 01027-1 ---------------------------------------- ----------------- . 1 GENERAL . 1 Applications for payment may be submitted by the Contractor to the Consultant once monthly in accordance with the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract. . 2 Application for payment shall be submitted in five copies in format approved by the Consultant and shall be documented as specified in this Section. 2 SCHEDULES OF VALUES . 1 To facilitate release of holdback in accordance with the Construction Lien Act, the Schedule of Values referred to in the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract shall show the actual amount of each Subcontract exclusive of the Contractor' s mark-up for overhead and profit. 3 MATERIALS ON SITE . 1 Payment for materials on Site will only be made when material is built into the structure. 4 STATUTORY DECLARATION . 1 With each application after the first, submit in duplicate a properly completed statutory declaration using the standard C.C.A. 9B, latest edition, published by the Canadian Construction Association. The standard form shall be amended by adding paragraph 4 under heading "to Wit" as follows: "That all assessments and levies under the Unemployment Insurance Act, the Worker' s Compensation Act or other social or labour legislation in respect of the said Contract have been duly paid" . Note: Standard Forms referred to in this Section of the Specification may be replaced by similar forms in use by the Owner if so directed by the Consultant. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION-------------------------- Page_ 01040-1 -------------- . 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . 1 Coordination of the Work is the reponsibility of the Contractor. .2 Evaluate all requirements of the Contract and Specifications and ensure coor.idination and supervision for the prosecution of these requirements for the Work. . 3 Installation of systems and components and their interrelated function required by Division 15 and 16 shall be coordinated by those Trades with final coordination and fitness to intended use the responsibility of the Contractor. 4 Ensure service masts, pipes, meters and the like service equipment is inconspicuously located, or as indicated. Verify locations for service work in the final assembly with the Consultant before installation. Bear all costs for relocation of services where location has not been confirmed by the Consultant. .5 Schedule and expedite, review and make comment, that required submittals are coordinated by the respective Trades that installation are complete and as intended in the Work. 6 Ensure environmental conditions required by installations of the Trades are met and their work proceeds in accordance with the environmental conditions specified. 7 Regularly review job records of the Trades to ensure as-built conditions are properly recorded. 8 Schedule, supervise and coordinate attendances for reviews by Authorities of jurisdiction, and specialist inspections and testing as specified in Section 01410. . 2 COORDINATION . 1 Coordinate all Work in each area and Work on which subsequent Work depends to facilitate mutual progress, and to prevent conflict between parts of the Work. 2 Ensure that each Section makes known, for the information of the Sub-Contractors and other Sections, the environmental and surface conditions required for the execution of its Work; and that each Section makes known the sequence of others' Work required for installation of its Work. . 3 Ensure that each Section before commencing Work, knows requirements for subsequent Work and that each Section is assisted in the execution of its preparatory Work by Sections whose Work depends upon it. SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION Page:01040-2 . 2 COORDINATION (cont'd. ) .4 Ensure that setting drawings, templates and all other information necessary for the location and installation of materials, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels are provided by each Section whose Work requires cooperative location and installation by other Sections and that such information is communicated to the applicable installer. . 5 Deliver materials supplied by one Section to be installed by another well before the installation begins, and not later than the date established by agreed schedules. .6 Sections giving installation information in error, or too late to incorporate in the Work, shall be responsible for having Work done and paid for which was thereby additionally made necessary. . 7 Remove Work installed in error which is unsatisfactory for subsequent Work, and without additional cost or delay install remedial Work as required for subsequent trades Work. .3 CUTTING AND PATCHING . 1 Before cutting, drilling, or sleeving structural load-bearing elements, obtain approval of location and methods from Structural Consultant. .2 Do not endanger Work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No Section shall cut or alter the Work of another Section who has installed it unless approved by that Section. . 3 Cut and drill with true smooth edge to minimum suitable tolerances. .4 Fit construction tightly to ducts, pipes and conduit to stop air movement completely. The Section performing Work that penetrates a fire, air, vapour, moisture, thermal or acoustic separation element of the building shall pack voids tightly with insulation; vapour and moisture barriers; and caulk joints as may be required to ensure that no air movement through the penetration is possible, and that permeance, thermal, acoustic and firestopping values required are maintained. .5 Cutting, drilling and sleeving of Work shall be done only by the Section who has installed it. The Section requiring drilling and sleeving shall inform the Section performing the Work of the location and other requirements for drilling and sleeving. Each Sub-Contractor shall directly supervise performance of his own cutting and patching. . 6 Each Sub-Contractor shall replace, and otherwise make good, damaged Work. SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION Page: 01040-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- .3 CUTTING AND PATCHING (cont'd. ) 7 Each Section shall be responsible for all cutting and patching in addition to that specified for mechanical and electrical Work. 8 Patching or replacement of damaged Work shall be done by the Subcontractor under whose Work it was originally executed, and at the expense of the Subcontractor who caused the damage. 9 Make patches invisible in final assembly. END OF SECTION 'E DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 I, SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING--------------------- Page_-01050-1 --------------------------------- ---------- i !i .1 SITE . 1 Lines, Levels and Locations for Building as per Site Plan. .2 Lay out Work with reference to building and as shown on Drawings. 3 Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions indicated and report any errors or inconsistencies to the Consultant before commencing Work. Confirm job dimensions at once to allow prompt checking of Shop and other Drawings. .4 Locate and fix locations of walls, partitions, shafts and all parts of the construction, as Work proceeds. .2 BUILDING DIMENSIONS 1 Ensure that necessary job dimensions are taken and trades are coordinated for the proper execution of the Work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions and for coordination. .2 Verify that Work as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent Work, as set out be requirements of the Drawings, and ensure that Work installed in error is rectified before construction continues. . 3 Check and verify dimensions referring to Work and interfacing of services. Dimensions, when pertaining to the Work of other Trades, shall be verified with the Trade concerned. Ensure that Subcontractors from various Trades cooperate for the proper performance of the Work. 4 Do not scale directly from the Drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information, immediately inform the Consultant. Any change through the disregarding of this clause shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor concerned. .5 All details and measurements of any Work which is to fit or to conform with Work installed shall be taken at the Site. END OF SECTION �� r DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01060 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Page: 01060-1 --------------------------------------- ---------------- 1 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS . 1 Conform to the Building Code (Ontario Reg.413/90 including all amendments) Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) , CAN/CSA B-44-1990 and W59-1989 as applicable, and A.S.H.R.A.E. 90. 1. Conform to The Occupational Health and Safety Act, Ontario, latest edition and to the National Fire Code, and the Municipal Fire Code, and all other applicable Codes and building By-Laws, hereinafter referred to as Codes. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including public utilities and Ministry of Natural Resources and Central Lake Ontario Conservation Authority. Where required under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineer to design formwork and false work for concrete. 2 Nothing contained in the Drawings or Specifications shall be so construed as to be in conflict with any law, by-law or regulation of the municipal, provincial or other authorities having jurisdiction. Work shall be performed in comformity with all such laws, by-laws and regulations. 3 Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals, and installation, application and maintenance instructions, referred to in these specifications are of the latest published editions at the date of signing the Contract. .4 Provide copies of Standards referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor and Consultant on Site - when so requested by the Consultant. . 2 FIRE SAFETY FEATURES . 1 The Contractor shall ensure that all fire safety features called for in the Contract Documents are supplied and installed to meet fire safety standards established by the authorities having Jurisdiction. The Contractor shall ensure that the Work of Subcontractors is properly coordinated to achieve the intent of this Specification. .3 GOVERNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 The Contractor shall obey all Federal, Provincial and Municipal Laws, Acts, Ordinances, Regulations, Orders-in-Council and By-laws, which could in any way pertain to the Work outlined in the Contract or to the employees of the Contractor. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Contractor shall satisfy all statutory requirements imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations made thereunder on a Contractor, a Constructor and/or an Employer with respect to or arising out of the performance of the Contractor's obligation under this Contract. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01150 - VALUATION OF CHANGES--------------Page_01150-1 -------------------------------- --------------- 1 VALUATION OF CHANGES . 1 General Procedures . 1 Changes in the Work ordered by the Consultant in accordance with the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract shall be valued in accordance the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract and as more fully specified herein. .2 The standard documentation for effecting changes in the Work shall be as follows: . 1 Consultant's Notice of Change issued to the Contractor on standard form and accompanied be necessary Drawings, Schedule, Details and Specifications. .2 Contractor's Quotation submitted to the Consultant showing amount by which the Contract Sum shall be adjusted by way of increase or decrease if the change is ordered. . 3 Consultant's Formal Change Order issued to the Contractor on Standard Form after Owner's approval. NOTE: Standard Form of Notice of Change and Change Order may be seen at the Consultant's office during normal working hours. . 2 Valuation of Changes . 1 Quotations submitted by the Contractor in response to Consultant's Notice of Change shall be fully detailed and itemized to facilitate checking and processing by the Consultant. Quotations shall be submitted in triplicate and shall: . 1 List Work proposed to be carried out by Contractor' s Own Forces showing labour, material, plant and equipment charges together with quantities and unit rates in the assessment of such charges. .2 List Work proposed to be carried out by Sub-Contractors showing the amount quoted by each Sub-Contractor as verified by the Sub-Contractor' s quotation which shall show labour, material, plant and equipment charges together with quantities and unit rates upon which the quotation is based. SECTION 01150 - VALUATION OF CHANGES Page: 01150-21 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ .2 Valuation of Changes (cont'd. ) ' . 3 Use unit rates quoted in Tender and incorporated into the Contract where applicable. The quantity to which the unit rate is applied in assessing the net cost shall be the net difference in quantity between the original and revised Work. For example: If the change effects the deletion of 1 sq.m. and the addition of 1.2 sq.m. of an item covered by unit rates, the value of the change will be assessed by applying the unit rate to the net difference of 0.2 sq.m. (Extra) and applying the appropriate mark-up specified herein. . 2 Where Contract unit rates are not applicable: . 1 Quote material prices which shall be the net price paid by the Contractor (or Sub-Contractor) after deduction of all trade discounts and the like other than reasonable discount for prompt payment. .2 Quote plant and equipment costs which shall not be more than rates quoted in the latest edition of "Rental Rates on Contractor's Equipment" published by the Canadian Construction Association. .3 Quote labour costs which shall be the actual rate paid to the workmen in accordance with the fair wage provision of the Contract plus a mark-up of thirty-eight percent to cover Welfare contribution, Pension contribution, Vacation Pay, Trade Improvement Fund, Promotional Fund, Training Fund, Supplementary Unemployment Benefits, Check Off, Apprenticeship, Trust Fund and similar labour contract payments; Worker's Compensation Insurance Canada Pension Scheme and other statutory charges on labour. .3 Unless otherwise specified in the Form of Tender, unit rates quoted in Tender and incorporated in the Contract shall include the mark-up for labour on-cost specified in paragraph . 2 . 2 . 3 hereof, but shall be exclusive of mark-up� for overhead and profit. .4 The following maximum mark-ups for overhead and profit may be applied as appropriate to the net costs assessed as above where the effect of the proposed change is an increase in the Contract Sum. If the effect of the change is a decrease in the Contract Sum no mark-up shall be applied: SECTION 01150 - VALUATION OF CHANGES Page:01150-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ .2 Valuation to Changes (cont'd. ) . 4 . 1 Work carried out by Contractor's Own Forces - 10%. . 2 Work carried out by Sub-Contractors: . 1 Sub-Contractor's mark-up - 10%. .2 Contractor's mark-up - 5%. .5 It shall be understood and agreed that the mark-ups specified above shall be deemed to provide for payment in full for all items that in the custom of the Construction Industry in Ontario are considered to be site or head office overhead, profit, supervision, administration and labour on-cost. . 6 Where premium payments in respect to overtime are paid to workmen with the Consultant's/Owner's prior approval in writing and where such payments are recoverable from the Owner, then the premium time shall be subject to a mark-up of 23% in lieu of the mark-up of 38% specified in paragraph 2 .3 above. There shall be no mark-up for overhead and profit on premium time payments. . 7 The issue of a Change Order shall be deemed to be formal acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's quotation. Following the issue of a Change Order the Owner will not entertain claims for extra payments due to errors alleged to have been made in the Contractor's Quotation. i END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS Page: 01200-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 PROJECT MEETINGS . 1 Contractor shall Chair project meetings on Site, on a bi-weekly basis and will send out notices stating time and place to Owner's Representative, Consultants, Sub-Contractors, and/or other persons whose presence is required. 2 General Contractor shall take minutes of meeting showing: . 1 List of persons attending. .2 Decisions taken. . 3 Instructions required or issued. .4 All matters discussed. . � . 5 Progress of job. . 3 Within three days of meetings, submit typed copies of minutes to all present at meetings and to any other person, company, or organization as necessary. Consultant and Owner shall receive two copies each. 2 PROGRESS REPORTS . 1 Keep a permanent written report on the Site of progress of the Work. This record to be open to review of the Consultant. A copy to be furnished to the Consultant upon request. 2 Record to show dates of commencement and completion of trades and parts of the work coming under the Contract, including reports on daily weather conditions, excavation work erection and removal or forms, and other similar pertinent information. . 3 Report delays (and potential delays) giving reason for delay and action being taken to resolve the problem. END OF SECTION r 1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01301 - SUBMITTALS Page: 01301-1 ------------------------------------------------------ • 1 BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 1 Obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to Consultant within the time stipulated in the Specification, or if not so stipulated, before issue of the first Certificate. .1 Performance Bond/Labour and Material Bond. .2 Insurance Policies required under General Conditions of Contract. .3 Certificates of good standing from the Worker's Compensation Board for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. .4 Shop Drawing Schedule. .5 Permits for temporary structures, hoists, etc. . 6 Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions of Contract. . 7 Estimate of monthly progress claims (cash flow schedule) . .8 Construction Schedule. . 2 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED DURING PROGRESS OF CONTRACT . 1 Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to the Consultant, within the time stipulated in the Specification or, if not so stipulated, as soon as possible following Consultant's request. .2 Adjust Cash Allowances by award of separate Contracts, where appropriate. 3 Documents specified under Section 01050 - Field Engineering, Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, and ' Section 01410 - Inspection and Testing. .4 Any permits required from authorities having jurisdiction enabling Owner to occupy the Work (or part thereof) prior to Substantial Performance of the Work. .5 Record Drawings: . 1 Consultant will provide two sets of white prints for record drawing purposes. Obtain "as-built" drawings from Trades and consolidate in a manner to the satisfaction of the Consultant. SECTION 01301 - SUBMITTALS Page: 01301-2 ------------------------------------------------------- .2 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED DURING PROGRESS OF CONTRACT(cont'd. ) . 5 Record Drawings: . 2 Maintain project "as-built" record drawings and record accurately significant deviations from Contract Documents caused by Site conditions and changes ordered by Consultant. .3 Mark "as-built" changes and changes in Shop Drawings in red coloured ink. .4 Record following information: . 1 Depth of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2 Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvement. . 3 Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. .4 Field changes of dimension and detail. . 5 Changes made by Change Order or Supplementary Instructions. ' .5 At completion of project and prior to final inspection, neatly transfer "as-built" notations to second set and ' submit both sets to Consultant. . 6 Clearly mark each of the project record drawings, "Project Record Copy" . . 7 Final completion of Project Record Drawings shall be a condition precedent to the issuance of Consultant's final payment certificate. .8 Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for more specific requirements regarding preparation and submission of final Record Drawings. .3 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE . 1 Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading during the 45 day waiting period following the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Performance. Delivery of these documents is a condition precedent to the issue of a Certificate for Payment of the holdback monies of the General Conditions of the Contract. SECTION 01301 - SUBMITTALS Page: 01301-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE 2 Certificates of good standing from the Worker's Compensation Board for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. 2 Inspection Certificates required by Provincial, Municipal and other authorities having jurisdiction. 3 Certificate of Inspection from Structural Consultant. .4 Final adjustment of allowances, specified in Section 01020. 5 All maintenance manuals, warranties, operation manuals and teaching seminars. r END OF SECTION r r r r f DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 01311 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Page: 01311-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ . 1 SCHEDULE . 1 Before commencement of Work, update Construction Schedule to Consultant and Owner. .2 Schedule shall show: f . 1 Commencement and completion dates of Contract. . 2 Commencement and completion dates of stipulated stages if any. .3 Commencement and completion dates of Trades. .4 order and delivery times for materials and equipment, where possible. r . 5 Dates for submission of Shop Drawings, material lists and samples. . 6 Any other information relating to the orderly progress of Contract, considered by Contractor to be pertinent. 2 UPDATING AND MONITORING . 1 Set up format of Construction Schedule to allow plotting of actual progress against scheduled progress. .1 Allow sufficient space for modifications and revisions to the Schedule as Work progresses. . 2 Format shall be approved by the Consultant. 2 Copy of Schedule shall be displayed in Site office during complete construction period and actual progress plotted weekly. 3 Updated and Progress Reporting: . 1 Arrange participation, on Site and off Site, with Subcontractors and Suppliers, as and when necessary for the purpose of updating schedule and monitoring progress. . 2 Reviews of progress by inspections and meetings will be conducted at least once a month or as directed by Consultant. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,SAMPLES Page: 01340-1 . 1 SCHEDULE . 1 Within 5 working days after award of Contract, prepare and submit to Consultant for comment, a schedule fixing the dates for the submission of all Shop Drawings. . 2 Allow reasonable promptness for Consultant to review Architectural submission, exclusive of Consultant and Contractor inter-office(s) transmission period and mail periods. . 3 All shop drawings must be reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor prior to submission to the Consultant. ' 2 GENERAL . l. Submit to Consultant, for review, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples specified. .2 Until submittal is reviewed, Work involving relevant product may not proceed. . 3 Do not use for construction, Shop or setting Drawings or diagrams which do not bear Consultant's stamp and signature. .4 Submission and subsequent review of Shop Drawings constitute a service and does not entitle the supplier or subcontractor to the right to renumeration until the materials are supplied and installed on the Site in accordance with the Contract. .3 SHOP DRAWINGS . 1 Drawings shall be copies of original drawings prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors, supplier or distributor, for the work of the Contract which illustrate appropriate portions of the Work; showing fabrication layout, setting or erection detail as specified in appropriate Sections. Provide Drawings on same size sheets as Contract Drawings generally. .2 Submit Shop Drawings with transmittal forms listing the name of the manufacturer, the job, the Drawing number, the number of copies and reference in the Specification to which the Shop Drawings refer. . 3 Submit Shop Drawings to authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approval. .4 On Shop Drawings for fire rated assemblies show required fire rating and ULC design numbers. SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Page: 01340-2 ' -------------------------------------- i ' .3 SHOP DRAWINGS (cont'd. ) . 5 Submit Shop Drawings to the Consultant in the form of two white prints. Provide two additional prints for structural, mechanical and electrical items. After review, the Consultant will retain one white print and return the other white print to the Contractor. On completion of the revisions, one complete set sepias of Shop Drawings used for construction shall be supplied to the Consultant. ' .4 PRODUCT DATA . 1 Certain Specification Sections specify that manufacturer's standard schematic drawings, catalogue sheets, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data will be accepted in lieu of Shop , Drawings. .2 The above will be accepted if they conform to the following: . 1 Delete information which is not applicable to project. .2 Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project. . 3 Show dimensions and clearances required. , .4 Show performance characteristics and capacities. . 5 Show wiring diagrams and controls. ' . 6 Add to standard sheet the Project identification data. 5 SAMPLES ' . 1 Submit samples in duplicate as called for by the Consultant. ' . 2 Where colour is criteria, submit full range of colours. . 3 Construct field samples and mock-ups at locations acceptable to Consultant. .4 Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including Work of , all Trades required to finish Work. Ensure all materials used in samples or mock-up conform to materials specified. . 5 Reviewed samples or mock-ups will become minimum standards of ' workmanship and material against which installed Work will be checked on Project. SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Page: 01340-3 --------------------------------- . 6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 1 Check, and certify as correct Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples prior to submission. 2 Verify: . 1 Field measurements. r .2 Field construction criteria. .3 Catalogue numbers and similar data. . 3 Co-ordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. .4 Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission of any deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract Documents. .5 Stamp, initial or sign each Drawing, certifying approval of submission, verification of field dimensions and measurements and compliance with Contract Documents, prior to submission to the Consultant(s) . 6 After ConsuLtant(s review, distribute copies, as follows: . 1 Job Site file (2 copies) .2 Record documents file. . 3 Other prime contractors. .4 Subcontractors. . 5 Supplier. . 6 Fabricator. .7 Authorities having jurisdiction, where required by Codes and/or By-Laws, i.e. structural steel and sprinklers. .8 Owner and Data Book where applicable. .7 Distribute samples as directed by the Consultant. 8 Ensure that all samples are approved by authorities having jurisdiction, supplier for correct application in Project, and other parties such as Owner in time to permit approval prior to ordering of quantity delivery to Site. r SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,SAMPLES-------- Page_01340-4 -------------------------------------------------- . 6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY (cont'd. ) .9 The Contractor shall advise all Trades, Subcontractors and ' suppliers of the limits of the Consultant's responsibility with respect to Shop Drawings and other submittals as detailed , under paragraph .7 below. .7 CONSULTANT' S RESPONSIBILITY . 1 Within reasonable promptness of the receipt of samples and r shop drawings Architectural, the Consultant shall return to the Contractor indicating that, the items have been: . 1 Reviewed (no resubmittal required) . .2 Reviewed as indicated (resubmittal required) . . 3 Reviewed (resubmittal required) . . 2 Review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of , ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information ' that pertains solely to the processes or techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all subtrades. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL------------------------Page_01400-1 ------•--------------------- ----------- 1 QUALITY CONTROL . 1 Provide a system of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are attained. .2 Bring to the attention of the Consultant any defects in the work or departures from the Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Consultant will decide upon corrective action and state his recommendations in writing. 3 The Consultant's general review during construction and inspection by independent inspection and testing agencies reporting to the Consultant are both undertaken to inform ' the Owner of the Contractor's performance and shall in no way augment the Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility. 2 NOTIFICATION . 1 Give the Consultant advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and other phases of the work so as to afford him reasonable opportunity to inspect the work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the work as defective. . 3 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 1 Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred of that Work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, concrete cores, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the Work must be replaced, Test, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense,regardless of their results, which may be such that, in the Consultant's opinion, the Work may be acceptable. .2 All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this would, in the Consultant's opinion, cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page: 01410-1 ----------------------------------------------- • 1 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT 1 Unless otherwise specified, the Consultant will appoint the Inspection and Testing Agency on behalf of the Owner to carry out the inspection and testing specified in various Sections of the Specifications. r .2 Where so specified, payment for the services of the Inspection and Testing Agency will be made from cash allowances included for this purpose in Section 01020, Cash Allowances. . 3 The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for the following: . 1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. . 3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor. . 6 Additional tests specified in paragraph 1.4. . 4 Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with Contract requirements, Contractor shall pay costs for additional tests or inspections as Consultant may require to verify acceptability of corrected Work. •2 CONTRACTOR'S RELATED WORK 1 Furnish labour and facilities to: . 1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested. .2 Facilitate inspections and tests. .3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test. .4 Provide storage on Site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples. Page: 01410-2 SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES----------------Page---1410-- ------------------------------------------- i .2 CONTRACTOR' S RELATED WORK (cont'd. ) , 2 Notify Consultant sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of , test. .3 Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory. .4 Pay all costs in connection with Contractor's related Work. , . 5 Pay costs for uncovering and make good Work that is covered before required inspection and testing is completed and ' approved by Consultant. END OF SECTION 1 r r i i ' DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page: 01500-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ' . 1 GENERAL . 1 Accept responsibility for all temporary structures and comply ' with applicable rules and regulations. Pay all taxes. .2 The expression "provide" shall be deemed to include the provision, installation and finishing, maintenance, servicing and removal of the work described. All Work damaged by temporary installations shall be repaired and made good at no extra cost to the Owner. . 3 Maintain temporary facilities in good condition. .4 Clean Site offices daily. .5 Clean sanitary facilities daily. .2 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SECURITY . 1 Provide necessary traffic control and security personnel as ' required for the safe performance of the contract and security of the premises. 2 Conform to the requirements of the local authority. . 3 Conform to requirements of insurance companies providing coverage for this Contract. .4 Provide flagman as required. . 3 CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICE . 1 Provide office large enough to accommodate both Consultant 's private office and Contractor's office. .2 Furnish office with 2 drawing laydown tables, 2 drawing ' storage racks, three drawer filing cabinet, shelving and coat hooks, desk and table and chairs for Site meetings (to accommodate a minimum of twelve people) . 3 Install lighting to provide 70 foot candles using surface mounted shielded commercial fixtures with 10% upward light component. r4 Insulate building and provide heating and cooling system to maintain 22 deg.0 inside temperature. Provide as a minimum two operable windows for cross ventilation. . 5 Provide telephones in Contractor's area in Site office. Pay telephone is not acceptable. Provide facsimile machine in Contractor's office. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page: 01500-2 , --------------------------------------------------------- .4 STORAGE SHEDS . 1 Provide sheds for the storage of cement, lime and other ' perishable goods and articles, including hardware and finished millwork, of ample size for the purpose, built with tight ' wooden floors, weatherproof walls and roofs, and door fitted with locks. . 5 SANITARY FACILITIES ' . 1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with the municipal regulations and ordinances. ' . 2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition. Have toilets maintained in sanitary conditions under contract. Clean and disinfect site of the toilets on removal. . 6 TEMPORARY SERVICES ' . 1 Provide, install,maintain and locate where directed the following temporary facilities for the Work and for all Trades except where specified otherwise and remove them upon completion of the Work. These facilities shall be considered minimal and shall be increased as necessary. Pay all charges and billings in connection therewith. . 2 Light and Power: Supply electric power for all constructionrk purposes. Make connections available to an p ' within distance of go' 0" extension. Provide power at temporary storage sheds and field office. . 3 Provide water of potable quality for all construction ' purposes, at locations as directed by Consultant. . 4 Maintain fire protection as required by jurisdictional ' authorities. .7 CONSTRUCTION AIDS , . 1 Select, operate and maintain hoisting equipment and cranes as may be required. Operate such equipment only by qualified' hoist or crane operators. Make hoist available for Work of each Section. .2 Erect scaffolding, independent of walls. Use scaffolding so as ' to interfere as little as possible with the Work. When not in use, move scaffolding as necessary to permit other Work. Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner. Remove scaffolding promptly when no longer required. Scaffolding shall permit convenient access to all levels for all workmen and inspection staff. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page: 01500-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------- $ GENERAL PROTECTION 1 Without limiting the Contractor's responsibility to provide all necessary protection, the Contractor shall: . 1 Remove snow and ice as may be required for the protection and/or execution of the Work. Do not use salt under any circumstances. . 2 Wet all areas to prevent dust rising and power hose daily to remove dirt. During cold weather, ensure that mud is ' scraped off areas outside hoarding as well as in. .2 Any Work damaged by failure to provide protection as required or damaged as a result of lack of adequate temporary heat ' shall be removed and replaced with new, at no additional cost to the Owner. :3 Each Trade shall avoid damaging the Work of other Trades. Conduct the Work and provide protective covering as necessary to meet this requirement. Make good at own expense any damage resulting from failure to meet this requirement. Protective measures shall be to Consultant's approval. .4 Provide all necessary shoring, bracing and sheeting as required ■ for safety and execution of the Work. a .9 HEATING OF BUILDING DURING CONSTRUCTION 1. Heat the building during construction and finishing to ensure a minimum temperature of 15 deg. Celcius and to maintain temperature for working, surface and curing conditions required by all specified materials. Use only oil or propane heaters with enclosed combustion chamber vented to exterior in accordance with good practice and safety regulations. i2 Locate heating units to ensure materials, formwork and falsework are not damaged by excessive heat. 3 Permanent building heating systems may be utilized to provide heat during construction, subject to approval of Consultant. Contractor to make good all damages, maintain system and pay for all operational costs. Warranty period to commence after re- servicing or from date of Substantial Completion of the Work, whichever is later. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01550 - SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Page: 01550-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ' . 1 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEASURES . 1 Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by National Building Code 1990, Canadian Construction Safety Code, Occupational Health and Safety Act, Ontario Regulations, Worker's Compensation Board and municipal statutes and authorities. ' 2 In the event of conflict between provisions of above authorities the most stringent provision applies. ' . 3 Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated the "Constructor", as defined by the Occupational Health and Safety Act. ' 2 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS . 1 Comply with requirements of standard for Building Construction Operations FCC No. 301 - issued by Fire Commissioner of Canada. .2 This standard may be viewed at Regional Engineer's office at the Municipality. ' . 3 FALSEWORK 1 Design and construct falsework in accordance with CSA 5269 . 1. .4 SCAFFOLD ]. Design and construct scaffolding in accordance with CSA 5269.2. .5 VISITORS . 1 Provide hard hats for use by all visitors. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 ' SECTION 01575 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION -------------------------------------------------------Page: 01575-1 --------------- ' • 1 FIRES . 1 Conform to Ministry of Natural Resources and Central Lake Ontario Conversation Authority. .2 Fires and burning of rubbish on Site is not permitted. ' 2 DISPOSAL OF WASTES 1 Burying of rubbish and waste materials on Site not permitted. 2 Disposal of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits oil or paint thinner into storm or sanitary sewers ' prohibited. • 3 POLLUTION CONTROL 1 Prevent extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application areas, by providing temporary enclosures. •2 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. . 3 D.G.Biddle & Associates Ltd. shall approve all environmental protection requirements and the cost of same shall be included by the Contractor in the Tender Price. 4 DRAINAGE . 1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep ' excavations and Site free from water. .2 Dispose of water containing silt in suspension in accordance with local authority requirements. - 3 Take full responsibility for maintenance of existing drainage, above ground and underground, adjacent to the Work or affected by the Work. . 4 Before commencing any Work likely to affect the drainage of from the rainage systems to ensure tthat rwater will sber conducted ttoealternative outlets. Do not block or impede any drain, roof outlet or rainwater leader until such safety precautions have been made. f END OF SECTION P DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSE OUT--------------------- Page: 01700-1 ------------------------------- -------------- ' .1 TAKE OVER PROCEDURE . 1 Contractor's Inspection ' . 1 The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of Work, and correct all deficiencies. ' 2 Consultant' s Review . 1 Notify the Consultant, in writing of satisfactory completion of the "Contractor's Inspection" and request a "Consultant's Review " . The inspection team shall consist of all design consultants and the Contractor. 3 Deficiencies . 1 During the " Consultant's Review " a list of all deficiencies shall be drawn up and signed by the Consultant.The Contractor shall promptly correct all deficiencies. 4 Final Inspection . 1 When the Contractor is satisfied that all deficiencies have been corrected, he shall request, in writing, a " . Final Review " by the Consultant, the Contractor and the Owner. 5 Declaration of Completion . 1 After the " Final Review " and when it is mutually agreed by the Owner, Consultant and Contractor that the Work is substantially complete, a "Certificate of Substantial Completion" shall be signed by all parties, declaring the building is substantially complete except for deficiencies. The Consultant shall provide the Contractor with a list of deficiencies which are required to be completed within thirty days after "Final Review" . . 6 Certificate of Substantial Performance . 1 Once the Contractor has received a copy of the Certificate of Substantial Performance, he shall comply with the following after which the holdback will be due and payable by the Owner. .2 Publish Certificate of Substantial Performance as required by the Construction Lien Act. . 3 Await expiry of the required lien period. SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSE OUT Page: 01700-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ . 1 TAKE OVER PROCEDURE (cont'd. ) . 6 Certificate of Substantial Performance (cont'd. ) ' .3 Supply all documents specified in Section 01301. Submittals under heading "Documents Required at ' Substantial Performance" .4 Submit final invoice for all monies due. ' .5 The Warranty Period on this Project will expire twelve months from the date of the Certificate of Substantial ' Performance of the Work, except for extended warranties as called for in the Specification. . 6 O.G.C.A. and O.A.A. Take-over procedure document No. 100 shall govern. . 2 TERMINATION OF CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR BILLINGS FOR ' BUILDING SERVICES . 1 With effect from the date of the Certificate of Substantial Performance or at earlier date as may be agreed between Owner ' and Contractor, the Owner shall assume responsibility for: . 1 Utility Company Billings for water and energy relating to ' service provided from day following date of Certificate of Substantial Performance. END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO.94027-24 ' SECTION 01710 - CLEANING Page: 01710-1 ------------------------------- ' . 1 GENERAL . 1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ' ordinances, anti-pollution laws, and recommendations of Construction Safety Association. 2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. . 3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. .4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. .5 Provide instructions designating proper methods and materials ' to be used in final cleaning of Work. .2 MATERIALS 1 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. .3 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION . 1 Maintain project grounds, and public sidewalks free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Do not allow rubbish to accumulate in work under construction or on low roofs. ' . 2 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, and rubbish. . 3 Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed ' basis until building is ready for substantial performance or occupancy. .4 Schedule cleaning operations so that dust or other 1 contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 5 Cleaning operations shall include those areas used for temporary site access or used on a temporary basis to facilitate the Work. 1 SECTION 01710 - CLEANING Page: 01710-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ .4 FINAL CLEANING . 1 In addition to the progressive removal of rubbish from the entire building and Site, and leaving the buildings broom clean, the Contractor shall perform the following work before final acceptance. ' . 2 Clean glass both sides, and replace broken glass. . 3 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work, ' electrical and mechanical fixtures, casework and the like. Remove protective materials. ' .4 Clean hardware, aluminum, stainless steel and the like. .5 Remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces. , . 6 Vacuum clean all building interiors affected in construction operations. ' .7 Broom clean paved surfaces. .8 Remove debris and materials from roof areas. , . 9 Clean all exterior walkways, driveways and the like. . 10 Replace heating, ventilating and air conditioning filters if ' units were operated during construction. . 11 Leave premises ready for immediate occupation without further cleaning, all to the Consultant's approval. . 12 Road cleaning during construction and at completion of Contract ' shall be executed and maintained by the Contractor in strict accordance with Municipality and Regional Works Department Standards and shall be included in the Tender Price. ' END OF SECTION ' DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 01730 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page: 01730-1 -------•---------------------------------------- ---------------- . 1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL .1 On completion of project submit to Consultant two copies of Operations Data and Maintenance Manual made up as follows: . 1 Bind data in vinyl hard covered, three-ring loose leaf binder for 8-1/2" x 11" size paper. .2 Enclose title sheet, labelled "Operation Data and Maintenance Manual", project name, date and list of contents. .3 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project specification break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets. 2 Include following information plus data specified. . 1 Maintenance instruction for finished surface and materials. .2 Copy of hardware and paint schedules. . 3 Description, operation and maintenance instructions for equipment and system, including complete list of equipment and parts list. Indicate name plate information such as make, size, capacity, serial number. .4 Names, addresses and phone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. . 5 Guarantees, warranties and bonds showing: . 1 Name and address of Project. .2 Guarantee commencement date (date of Certificate of Substantial Performance) . .3 Duration of warranty. .4 Clear indication of what is being guaranteed and what remedial action will be taken under guarantee. .5 Signature and seal of Contractor. SECTION 01730 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page: 01730-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ . 1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL (cont'd. ) . 6 Additional material used in project listed under various sections showing name of manufacturer and source of supply. .7 Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams or 1 manufacturer's literature. .8 Include one complete set of final approved Shop Drawings (bound separately) indicating corrections and changes made during fabrication and installation. .2 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS . 1 Where supply of maintenance materials is specified, deliver to Consultant as follows: . 1 Materials in unbroken cartons, or if not supplied in cartons, they shall be strongly packaged. . 2 Clearly mark as to content. . 3 If applicable give colour, room number of area where material used. . 3 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS . 1 Provide As-Built Drawings (Record Drawings) as specified in Section 01301. END OF SECTION SECTION 02212 TOPSOIL& FINISH GRADING 1 General I.1 WORK INCLUDED 1 Comply with the General Conditions of the Contract and the Requirements of Division 1. Section 02222 Excavating Section 02223 Trenching and Backfilling .2 Provide all labour, materials, tools services and incidentals to do complete work required and/or indicated on the drawings and specified herein. L2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 1 Schedule placing of topsoil and finish grading to permit sodding or operations under optimum conditions. 2 Products 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Topsoil: friable, neither heavy clay nor of very light sandy nature ' consisting of 45% sand, 35% silt, 20% clay and pH value of 7. Free from subsoil, roots, vegetation, debris, toxic materials, stones over 50mm dia. .2 Planting soil for planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers: mix 4 parts topsoil with I part peatmoss. Incorporate bonemeal into planting soil at rate of 3 kg/m3 of soil mixture. .3 Peatmoss: .1 Derived from partially decomposed fibrous or cellular stems and leaves of species of Sphagnum Mosses. .2 Elastic and homogeneous, brown in colour. .3 Free of wood and deleterious material which could prohibit growth. .4 Shredded particle minimum size: 5mm. .4 Fertilizer: .1 Complete commercial synthetic fertilizer with minimum 65% insoluble nitrogen. .2 Formulation ratio: 1:4:4 CR as recommended by soil test. .3 Bonemeal: finely ground with a minimum analysis of 20% phosphoric acid. Copyright 1996 02212 Page - 1 Project 94027 V& A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02212 ' TOPSOIL& FINISH GRADING .5 Limestone: I Ground agricultural limestone containing minimum 85% of total carbonates. .2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1.0 mm sieve, 50% passing 0.125 mm seive. 3 Execution 3.1 PREPARATION OF BACKFILL MATERIAL �. I Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage. Remove soil contaminated with toxic materials. Dispose of removed materials as directed by Consultant. .2 Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to depth of 100mm. Repeat cultivation in those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil. .3 Remove surface debris, roots, vegetation branches and stones in excess of 25mm diameter. 3.2 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL I Spread topsoil after Consultant has inspected and approved backfill and subgrade. .2 Spread topsoil with adequate moisture in uniform layers over approved, unfrozen subgrade, where sodding and planting are indicated. .3 For sodded areas keep topsoil 15mm below finished grade. .4 Apply topsoil as indicated to following minimum depths: 150mm for sodded areas .5 Apply planting soil as indicated to following minimum depths: 300 mm for flower beds 450 mm for shrub beds y .6 Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs and y obstacles. Copyright 1996 02212 Page - 2 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 �. ' SECTION 02212 TOPSOIL& FINISH GRADING 33 SOIL AMENDMENTS I Apply soil amendments at rate as specified and as determined from soil sample test. .2 Mix soil amendments into full depth of topsoil prior to application of fertilizer. 3.4 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER I Apply fertilizer at least one week after limestone application. .2 Spread fertilizer uniformly over entire area of topsoil at rate determined on basis of soil sample test. .3 Mix fertilizer thoroughly to full depth of topsoil. 3.5 FINISH GRADING .1 Fine grade and loosen top soil. Eliminate rough spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking. v/ .2 Roll to consolidate topsoil for areas to be sodded leaving surface ■■ smooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, and with a fine loose texture to approval of Consultant. 3.6 SURPLUS MATERIAL .1 Dispose of materials not required off site. END OF SECTION Copyright .1996 02212 Page - 3 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 ' DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 02222 - EXCAVATION 1 ---------------------------- ------2222_ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Backfill and Grading Section 02223 .2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.2 PROTECTION . 1 Protect existing Phase 1 Structures and Sitework, fencing, service poles, trees, wires, underground services and paving located on this and adjoining properties from damage. Make good damage resulting from Stage II Work, or replace any damaged materials to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. Make good any damage due to inadequate bracing, improper compaction of backfill at no cost to the Owner. Maintain carefully all bench marks, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at the cost of this Contractor as directed by a Registered Land Surveyor. . 2 Provide protection and heating as necessary where the bearing surface is in danger of freezing before concrete is poured. 3 Do not load vehicles employed in the cartage of materials beyond rates limited, nor in such a manner as to cause spillage. Promptly remove spillage and tire tracking on public property. Alert drivers to the right of way of pedestrians and other vehicular traffic at exit from the site. 1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A copy of the Soil Report will be bound separately and will form part of the total Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .1 PREPARATION . 1 Consult utilities to ascertain location of services. Promptly notify the Consultant if uncharted services are uncovered during excavation. Cap services to the approval of the utilities affected. .2 Provide four independent and suitable located bench marks for elevation control and selected grid line references. Provide detailed line and grade staking for elements of the earth work. SECTION 02222 - EXCAVATION Page: 02222-2 ---------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 EXCAVATION . 1 Do all excavation required for the Work and refer to and coordinate excavation work for mechanical and electrical trades as noted in the mechanical and electrical specifications. .2 Excavate to depth required for footings, slab on grade and underbed. Rase of footings and foundation shall be not less than 1200 mm (41011) below finished grade nor less than 450 mm (18") below original grade. .3 Excavations carried too low shall be filled with 25 MPa (3000 psi) min. concrete at no additional expense to the Owner. Obtain prior approval from Consultant for lowering footings. .4 Trim bottom of excavations and obtain approval of the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction before placing concrete or granular material. . 5 Do not place concrete on frozen ground. Protect ground and/or bottom of excavation to prevent freezing using suitable insulation materials. If ground is frozen at foundation level when concrete is about to be placed, defrost or excavate to lower depth where ground is not frozen, and extend new construction down to new approved foundation level at no extra cost to Owner. Frozen ground shall not delay progress of work. 6 Should soil at depth shown provide to be unsatisfactory to the Consultant for placing of structural work thereon, (except for reasons specified in paragraph . 5) then upon the Consultant' s written order, excavate to greater depth until a satisfactory bottom is reached. 3. 3 PUMPING AND DRAINAGE . 1 Keep excavation free from water until concrete is poured. Pump out and remove any free water and do not allow water to accumulate in the excavations. .2 If it should prove necessary during the progress of the work to interrupt or obstruct flow of artificial drains, provide for this in such a way that no damage shall result to the property of the Owner, including all Phase I construction, or to the adjoining property. END OF SECTION DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK PROJECT NO. 94027 SECTION 02223 - BACKFILL AND GRADING -------------------Page_ 02223-1 ------------------------------------ -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Topsoil and Finish Grading Section 02212 .2 Excavation Section 02222 . 3 Trees, Shrubs & Groundcover Section 02490 i ti .4 Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks Section 02500 .5 Precast Concrete Unit Paving Section 02515 6 Precast Concrete Wall Section 02617 .7 Hydraulic Seeding Section 02934 8 Sodding Section 02838 .9 Membrane Waterproofing Section 07132 ' 1. 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . 1 Consultant shall appoint an inspection and testing company to test proposed fill material, to inspect, test and approve compaction of fill. . 2 Co-operate with the inspection company and give adequate notification of any changes in sources of supply, additional work shifts and any other proposed changes. . 3 The cost of such inspection and testing shall be paid for under ii Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. The cost of retesting unacceptable compaction shall be borne by this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Fill material - approved graular, free draining material excavated from the Site or approved local excavated materials free from organic matter, rubbish and other deleterious materials and complying with the following requirements: . 1 Granular "A" - OPSS Form 1010, clean, angular, crushed run, ' natural stone from approved source, free from shale, clay and friable materials and organic matter and graded. . 2 Granular "B" - OPSS Form 1010, clean, natural river sand and gravel material, free from silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials and organic matter graded. SECTION 02223 - BACKFILL AND GRADING Page: 02223-2 r -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 3 Granular "C" - clean washed coarse river sand material free from clay, shale, vegetable matter, conforming to sand aggregate requirements of CSA Standard A23 . 1 .4 Granular "D" - concrete backfill 20 MPa (2500 psi) strength at 28 days complying with the requirements of Section 03300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 PREPARATION . 1 Carefully examine Site including access to the Site. .2 Establish the extent and nature of the materials, which may be necessary to remove and the amount of fill to provide the required grades. 3 . 2 BACKFILLING . 1 Do not backfill over frozen ground. Do not place backfill until the sub-grade, footings, foundation walls and drainage tile have been inspected and approved. Do not backfill at ambient temperatures below O degrees C. without approval. Temporary backfilling not permitted. Be responsible for damage to buried services, due to backfilling. . 2 Place fill material against both sides of walls. If it not practical to carry out backfilling in this manner, brace the walls adequately to prevent damage to the walls. .3 Where walls are to be backfilled on one side only, commence backfilling only when the structural members are in place or adequate bracing is provided for top and bottom of foundation walls. .4 Backfill service line trenches as required. . 5 Fill locations: . 1 Use Granular "A" fill to areas and depth requirements as shown in Geotechnical Report. .2 Use Granular "B" fill to areas and depth requirements as shown in Geotechnical Report. . 3 Use Granular "C" fill in drainage trenches. .4 Use Granular "D" fill under foundations where Specified. SECTION 02223 - BACKFILL AND GRADING Page: 02223-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 BACKFILLING 6 Properly roll, tamp or otherwise consolidate in place each layer of backfill. Maintain fill within 2% of its optimum moisture content. If fill is too dry, dampen it with water to obtain the water content required. If the fill is too wet,aerate it. . 7 Spread fill in layers not exceeding 150 mm (611) uncompacted depth. Carry out fill operations systematically. Prevent segragation of particle sizes. . 8 After backfilling and compaction is completed, scarify surface to a uniform depth sufficient to eleminate depressions and irregularities. 3 .3 COMPACTION . 1 Do not compact any material containing frost. Compact until the required density is achieved. . 2 Fill hollows and depressions which develop under compaction with matching backfill material. If the base becomes rutted �. or displaced due to any cause, regrade the surface. . 3 Compact backfill by means of vibratory type equipment capable of achieving the desired degree of compaction. Use manually operated vibratory tampers in the proximity of foundations and in areas not readily accessible to roller equipment. .4 Make good damage to the structure due to compaction and settlement of fill. Report damage to foundation promptly to the Consultant. Obtain approval of remedial procedures. y . 5 Compact Granular "A" fill to 98% Standard Proctor Density or as shown in Geotechnical Report. . 6 Compact Granular "B" fill to 100% Standard Proctor Density or as shown in Geotechnical Report. j . 7 Compact Granular "C" fill to 98% Standard Proctor Density. . 8 Compact Granular "D" fill as Specified in Section 03300. .9 Make good any damage caused by uncompacted backfill at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION r+ SECTION 02490 a TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS 1 General 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1 Comply with the General Conditions of the Contract and the Requirements of Division 1. Section 02212 Topsoil and Finish Grading Section 02222 Excavation Section 02223 Backfilling and Grading Section 02934 Hydro Seeding Section 02940 Landscape Maintenance .2 Provide all labour, materials, tools, services and incidentals to do complete work required and/or indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 Obtain approval of plant material at source. .2 Notify Landscape Architect of source of material at least 7 days in advance of shipment. No work under this Section is to proceed without approval. .3 Acceptance of plant material at its source does not prevent rejection on site prior to or after planting operations. .4 Imported plant material must be accompanied with necessary permits and import licenses. Conform to federal and provincial regulations. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS .1 All planting and related work shall be done by experienced, qualified personnel, under the direction and supervision of foremen with at least 5 years of horticultural and planting experience. .2 The work shall be done to conform with the best horticultural practice and the specifications. 1.4 TESTING 1 Testing is required for all imported and/or site-stockpiled topsoil. Arrange for and be responsible for costs related to soil testing. .2 Test for N, P, K, and minor element values, soluble salt content, organic matter and pH value using an approved independent inspection and testing agency. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 1 Project 94027 N V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS &GROUNDCOVERS .3 Conform to recommendations from soil testing agency with respect t to improvement of tested topsoil. .4 Adjust fertilizer requirements and rates as well as addition of other additives, to conform to soil testing recommendation, at no extra cost , to the Contract. .5 Arrange for and be responsible for costs related to additional soil testing for confirmation of conformance to soil test report recommendations and as may otherwise be required by the Landscape Architect. 1.5 SAMPLES r .1 Submit samples of mulch, topsoil, and accessories for tree guying and staking. .2 Retain approved samples on site until all work has been inspected, approved and accepted. .3 All work shall conform to approved samples. 1.6 INSPECTION .1 Make all materials available for inspection at source of supply or upon arrival on the site. .2 Give timely notice, in writing, to the Landscape Architect when materials are available for inspection. .3 Approval of plant materials at source of supply does not impair the right of the Landscape Architect to inspect plants upon arrival on project site or during the course of construction. .4 Such inspection may result in rejection of plant materials which have been damaged or which, in any way, do not conform to the specifications. .5 Planting of plant materials, prior to inspection by the Landscape Architect will be the Contractor's responsibility. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject any plants, whether planted or not, which do not conform to the specifications and/or drawings. Remove all rejected materials from the site immediately. .6 Furnish all inspection certificates as may be required by federal, provincial and other applicable regulations. 7 Do not remove any labels from plants until plants have been inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 2 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 ' i SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS 1.7 SHIPMENT AND PRE-PLANTING CARE 1 Supply and deliver all materials, such as fertilizers, bonemeal and mulches in standard containers clearly indicating contents, weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. .2 Where such materials are supplied in bulk, written statements shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect indicating the same k information as if supplied in standard containers. .3 Co-ordinate shipping of plants and excavation of holes to ensure minimum time lapse between digging and planting. .4 Protect plants from damage and drying out from the time of digging until planting. .5 Plants with broken or abraded trunks or branches or with broken or cracked rootballs or plants which are strongly desiccated, will be subject to rejection upon arrival on the project site. .6 All plant materials which cannot be planted immediately upon arrival on the site, shall be properly heeled in or well protected with soil or similar material to prevent drying out and shall be kept moist and shaded until commencement of planting. .7 Tie branches of trees and shrubs securely and protect plant material against abrasion, exposure and extreme temperature change during (ransit. Avoid binding of planting stock with rope or wire which would damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape of plant. Give full support to root ball of large trees during lifting. .8 Cover plant foliage with tarpaulin, and protect bare roots by means of dampened straw, peatmoss, saw dust or other acceptable material to prevent loss of moisture during transit and storage. .9 Remove broken and damaged roots with sharp pruning shears. Make clean cut and cover cuts over 10mm dia with wound dressing. 1.8 WARRANTY .1 Submit written warranty to the effect that all: .1 Plants accepted during the period from January Ist to July 15th shall be warranted until July 15th the following year. y .2 Plants accepted during the period from July 15th to December 31st shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. .2 The warranty periods, listed above, shall apply to all "nursery- grown" plants. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 3 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS .3 During the warranty period make periodic inspection and replace all plants which are dead, missing or which are not in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. .4 Notify the Landscape Architect, in writing, of any corrective or preventative measures necessary to safeguard plants prior to treatment. .5 Supply and plant all replacements in strict accordance with plans and specifications and warranty replacements as specified. .6 The guarantee period for replacements shall be the same as the guarantee period for the original plant material and shall extend from the date of acceptance of the replacement. .7 Tag or mark, in a permanently visible manner, all replacement trees M and notify the Landscape Architect in writing, of the date on which the replacements were planted. Include sketch showing location of replaced plants. Notify the Landscape Architect when replacements are to be planted. Plant replacements at a time which is in accordance with good horticultural practice. .8 Remove all accessories and cut at grade those trees, which are to be replaced at a later date. Remove plants, which are to be replaced, when found or notified by the Landscape Architect and paint fluorescent orange paint on the stumps to identify location and hazard. 1.9 REPLACEMENTS .1 During warranty period, remove from site any plant material that has died or failed to grow satisfactorily as determined by Landscape Architect. .2 Replace plant material in the next planting season. .3 Extend warranty on replacement plant material for a period equal to the original warranty period. .4 Continue such replacement and warranty until plant material is acceptable. 2 Products 2.1 TOPSOIL .1 Use only imported topsoil when topsoil from site has been depleted. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 4 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS 2 Topsoil shall be fertile, friable natural loam containing 4% minimum organic matter for sandy loam and have an acidity range from pH 6.0 to 7.5 and shall be capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth; and be free of any admixture of subsoil, lumps, stones and roots over 25mm in diameter and other extraneous matter and shall be reasonably free of weeds, weed seeds and rhizomes. 2.2 PEATMOSS .1 Partially decomposed fibrous or cellular stems and leaves of Sphagnum Mosses with a texture varying from porous to spongy fibrous with a pH value ranging from 4.5 to 6.0. .2 It shall be baled and free of decomposed colloidal residue, wood, sulphur, and iron, be brown in color and finely shredded with particles not exceeding 6mm in size. 3 The use of peat, supplied in bulk, will not be permitted unless approved by the Landscape Architect upon submission of sample and location of source and supply. 2.3 FERTILIZER .1 Inorganic complete, commercial fertilizers of approved manufacturer not less than 60% urea-formaldehyde by weight. .2 The following fertilizer requirements have been included for tendering purposes only. The requirements and rates shall be adjusted to conform to soil testing reports and subsequent recommendations. Such adjustments shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. 10-6-4 @ 9 kg. per 25mm tree caliper 12-6-4 @ 1 kg. per 1 cu. metre of soil mixture for all planting beds 2.4 BONEMEAL .1 Commercial, raw bonemeal, finely ground, and with a minimum analysis of 2% nitrogen and 11% phosphoric acid. 2.5 LIME .1 Lime to be used in all cases where the pH of the soil is less than 6.0: Limestone containing not less than 8% of calcium and magnesium carbonates combined, finely ground to pass a #10 mesh sieve with at least one half passing a #100 mesh sieve. Rate of application shall be determined after determining the pH of the topsoil. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 5 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS 2.6 WATER 1 Potable and free of minerals which may be detrimental to plant growth. 2.7 STAKES 1 Stakes to be wood: 38 x 38 x 2400mm long. 2.8 CABLES .1 Cables, eye bolts and turnbuckles required for supporting trees shall be zinc coated and of sufficient strength to withstand any wind pressure. Turnbuckles shall have a 150mm long opening with a 9.8mm diameter threaded opening for tightening of turnbuckle, for A trees 75mm in caliper or over. For smaller trees the opening shall be 75mm long with a 6mm diameter threaded opening. Spannfix may be substituted for turnbuckles for trees less than 150mm caliper, as manufactured by C. French Ltd., Grimsby, or other approved manufacturer. .2 Guy wires: steel wire strand to CSA G4-M1977 at following sizes: .1 Shrubs and trees under 75 mm caliper use 2.5 mm wire. .2 Trees 75 to 150 mm caliper use 3 mm wire. .3 Trees 150 to 500 mm caliper use 3 strands of 4 mm wire. Twisted together or Grade 110, 8 mm 7 strand cable. 2.9 ANCHORS .1 Required for the support of large shrubs and trees and stakes for small trees, as detailed: new metal "T" bars, 38mm x 38mm x 5mm (I 1/2 in. x 1 1/2 in. x 1/4 in.), painted black or spruce stakes 50mm x 50mm (2 in. x 2 in.) stained brown or as detailed. 2.10 HOSE .1 New black rubber hose, two-ply, reinforced and 12mm ( 1/2 in.) inside diameter, or other approved manufacture shall be used to encase wire where they circle the trunk branches. 2.11 MULCH .1 Mulch shall be a clean, shredded mulch, free of sticks and leaves and not greater than 50mm (2 in.) in diameter for tree saucers and planting beds, as supplied by All Treat Farms of Arthur, Ontario or approved equal. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 6 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS 2.12 ANTI-DESSICANT 1 Anti-desiccant, where required, shall be an emulsion "Wilt Pruf", or other approved manufacture. It shall be permeable enough to permit transpiration, and shall be delivered, mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.13 FILTER FABRIC 1 Filler fabric, where required, shall be Terrafix 270R or Mirafi Geotextiles P40 or approved equal. 2.14 ROOTBALL BURLAP 1 150g. Hessian burlap 2.15 TREE WRAPPING MATERIAL I New, clean, plain burlap strips minimum 2.5 kg/m2 mass and 150mm (6 in.) wide or an approved heavy waterproof crepe paper. 2.16 WOUND DRESSING: .1 Horticulturally accepted non-toxic, non-hardening emulsion. 2.17 DRAINAGE COURSE: 1 Drainage course, where required, shall be a clean, clear, stone, free of sticks and leaves and not greater than 20mm diameter. 2.18 STEEL GRATE 1 Grate to be Dominion Bridge Grate Type 19-4 or approved equal with 2" x 3/16" bearing bars complete with banding of ends and 3 1/2" x 1/4 " kick plate around perimeter of tree opening with galvanized finish. 2.19 PLANT MATERIAL 1 Quality and source: comply with Guide Specification for Nursery Stock, 1978 Edition of Canadian Nursery Trades Association referring to size and development of plant material and root ball. Measure plants when branches are in their natural position. Height and spread dimensions refer to main body of plant and not from branch tip to branch tip. Use trees and shrubs of No. 1 grade. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 7 Project 94027 V& A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS &GROUNDCOVERS .2 Additional plant material qualifications: 1 Plant material obtained from areas with milder climatic conditions from those of site acceptable only when moved to site prior to the breaking of buds in their original location and heeled-in, in a protected area until conditions suitable for planting. .2 Use trees and shrubs with strong fibrous root system free of disease, insects, defects or injuries and structurally sound. Use trees with straight trunks, well and characteristically branched for species. .3 All plants shall be No. 1 Grade, nursery grown, under proper horticultural practices with respect to fertile soil, ample spacing, regular cultivation, weed, pest control, adequate moisture and pruning, in accordance with good horticultural practices as advocated by the Canadian Nursery Trades Association. All such plants shall have been transplanted and/or root pruned regularly, but not later than nine (9) months prior to arrival on the site. The Contractor shall submit sources of plant material, in writing, if so requested by the Landscape Architect. .4 Large trees must have been half root pruned during each of two successive growing seasons, the latter at least one growing season prior to arrival on site. .5 Plant material that has come out of dormant stage and is too far advanced will not be accepted unless prior approval obtained. .3 Container-grown stock: acceptable if containers large enough for root development. Trees and shrubs must have grown in container for minimum of one growing season but not longer than two. Root system must be able to "hold" soil when removed from container. Plants that have become root bound are not acceptable. Container stock must have been fertilized with slow releasing fertilizer. .4 Balled and burlapped: coniferous and broad-leafed evergreens over 500 mm tall must be dug with soil ball. Deciduous trees in excess of 3 m height must have been dug with large firm ball. Root balls must include 75% of fibrous and feeder root system. This excludes use of native trees grown in light sandy or rocky soil. Secure root balls r,, with burlap, heavy twine and rope. For large trees: wrap ball in '. double layer of burlap and drum lace with minimum 10 mm (1/2 in.) dia. rope. Protect root balls against sudden changes in temperature and exposure to heavy rainfall. .5 Frozen ball for large trees: dig root ball in fall when soil conditions permit good ball formation. Mulch root ball to prevent intermittent freezing. r Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 8 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS .6 Tree spade dug material: dig plant material with mechanized digging equipment of hydraulic spade or clam-shell type. Root balls to satisfy CNTA standards. Lift root ball from hole, place in wire basket designed for purpose and line with burlap. Replace root ball and tie basket to ball with heavy rope. Take care not to injure trunk of tree with wire basket ties or rope. .7 Collected or native plant material: use only native trees indigenous to area into which they are to be transplanted. Select trees from reasonably open stands. Trees must have well developed crowns and must be characteristically branched. Not more than 40% of overall ?+ tree height may be free of branches. Collected material may only be used if approved by Landscape Architect. .8 Substitutions to plant material as indicated on planting plan not permitted unless written approval has been obtained as to type, variety and size. Plant substitutions must be of similar species and of equal size as those originally specified. Give timely notice, in writing, to the Landscape Architect when applying for substitutions. .9 Nomenclature of specified plants shall conform to the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants and shall be in accordance with the approved scientific name given in the latest edition of Standardized Plant Names. The names of varieties not named therein are generally in conformity with the names accepted in the nursery trade. .10 The use of plant materials which require chemical treatments as ordered by the Canadian Department of Agriculture shall be prohibited. ' .11 Plants shall be freshly dug and shall be in a healthy, vigorous condition at arrival on site. Heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will not be accepted. Whenever practical, trees shall be supplied from nurseries located within the same hardiness zone and having the same soil conditions and types of soils as the area of the project site. Plants specified as "B.R.", shall be moved with bare roots, while in a dormant condition. Plants specified "B & B", shall be moved with solid balls, wrapped in burlap, or approved equal. Root balls shall not be cracked or broken at time of planting. .12 Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, well-branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests' eggs or larvae and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. All shrubs and trees shall possess all characteristics of the specified kind with all the leaders intact, undamaged and uncut, growing from an unmutilated root system. The stems shall be free from sun-scalds, frost cracks, abrasions, fire and crust. All old injuries shall be completely calloused over. Pruning wounds must show vigorous Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 9 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS bark on all edges and all parts show live, green cambium tissue when cut. .13 All plants shall conform to the measurements specified in the plant list, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Landscape Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the contract price. If larger plants are approved, the ball of earth shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. .14 All plants shall be measured when the branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch tip to root base or from branch tip to branch tip. Where trees are measured by caliper (cal.) reference is made to the diameter of the trunk measured 150mm above ground as the tree stands in the nursery for trees up to 100mm cal., and 300mm for trees larger than 100mm cal. .15 The sizes of root balls for trees shall be as specified below. Ball sizes are minimum and shall be adjusted according to growth habits of plants. At any rate ball sizes shall be sufficiently large to contain at least 75% of the fibrous root system. Deciduous Trees Caliper Root Ball Diameter 50mm (2") 762mm (30") 75mm (3") 912mm (36") 100mm (4") 1,067mm (42") 150mm (6") 1,525mm (60") 200mm (8") 1,830mm (72") Coniferous Trees Hejyht Root Ball Diameter 2,438 - 3,048mm ( 8' - 10') 914mm (36") 3,657 - 4,572mm (12' - 15') 1,212mm (48') 7,315 - 8,534mm (24' - 28') 1,981mm (78") .16 The ball depth-ratio for "B&B" deciduous and coniferous trees shall be not less than as follows: Root Ball Diameter Depth up to 50mm (2") not less than 457mm (18") 610mm (2') to 1,372mm (4'-6") not less than 457mm (18") to 762mm (30") respectively 1,372mm (4'-6") and over not less than 50% of ball diameter Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 10 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS &GROUNDCOVERS .17 All root balls less than 457mm (18") in diameter shall be wrapped with Hessium burlap or approved equal. Balls from 457mm to 762mm in diameter shall be double burlapped. Balls 914mm and larger in diameter shall be double burlapped and drum laced with 6mm rope at 200mm spacing or approved equivalent. i 3 Execution 3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Apply anti-desiccant in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. .2 Co-ordinate operations. Keep site clean and planting holes drained. Immediately remove soil or debris spilled onto pavement. 3.2 SITE PREPARATION 1 Obtain approval of finished subgrade from Landscape Architect before placing topsoil or planting. r .2 Stake out all tree locations and planting beds and obtain approval from Landscape Architect before excavating. Co-operate with Landscape Architect where minor adjustments to such locations is necessary. .3 The location of trees and planting areas, where shown on drawings, is approximate only and may require adjustment due to site conditions. .4 The outline of all planting beds shall be staked out on site and finalized to the Landscape Architect's approval. 3.3 PLANTING TIME 1 Plant deciduous plant material during dormant period before buds have broken. Plant material noted for spring planting only, must be planted in dormant period. .2 Plant material imported from region with warmer climatic conditions may only be planted in early spring. .3 When permission has been obtained to plant deciduous plant material after buds have broken, spray plants with anti-desiccant to slow down transpiration prior to transplanting. i .4 Plant evergreens in spring before bud break. Planting of such stock ' with root balls may start after middle of August. Apply anti- ' desiccant to evergreens before digging. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - ]1 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS .5 When permission has been obtained, trees, shrubs and ground covers growing in containers may be planted throughout growing season. J .6 Plant only under conditions that are conducive to health and physical conditions of plants. .7 Provide planting schedule. Extending planting operations over long period using limited crew will not be accepted. 3.4 EXCAVATION .1 Shrub beds: excavate to minimum depth of 500 mm (2 ft.). Bulb and annual beds: excavate to minimum depth of 300mm (1 ft.). .2 Individual shrubs: excavate planting holes 500 mm (2 ft.) deep and at least 500 mm (2 ft.) wide. .3 Small trees (up to 3.0 m): excavate holes 600 mm (2.5 ft.) deep with diameter of 300 mm (1 ft.) greater than root spread or root ball. .4 Large trees: excavate to depth of at least 200 mm ( 8 in.) deeper than height of root ball, with width of 750 mm (3 ft.) greater than diameter of root ball. In heavy soils, increase planting holes by 50 mm (2 in.) for each 100 mm (4 in.) of root ball diameter. .5 Provide drainage for planting holes in heavy soil if natural drainage does not exist. Have method approved. .6 Protect bottom of excavations against freezing. .7 Remove water which enters excavations prior to planting. Ensure source of water is not ground water. .8 Remove from site all excavated material from planting beds and tree pits and dispose of, unless directed otherwise. 9 Scarify sub-grade planting beds and tree pits to a minimum depth of 150mm (6 in.). 3.5 SOIL PREPARATION 1 Backfill planting beds and tree pits with a soil mixture consisting of four (4) parts topsoil and one (1) part peatmoss. .2 Add bonemeal to the soil mixture at the rate of .6 kg. per m3. .3 Add commercial fertilizers in accordance with soil testing report. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 12 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS &GROUNDCOVERS .4 Mix topsoil, peatmoss and other additives thoroughly on the site, not more than two (2) days before backfilling. f' .5 Do not mix or backfill when topsoil or soil mixture is in a muddy or frozen condition. .6 Backfill to a height above finished grade sufficient to allow for normal, natural settlement. .7 Finished grade after settlement, shall be as shown on drawings. .8 Loosen bottom of planting hole to depth of 150 to 200mm (6-8 in.). Cover bottom of each excavation with minimum of 150mm (6 in.) of topsoil mixture. Backfill soil mixture in layers not exceeding 150mm (6 in.) depth. .9 Tamp each layer firmly before placing subsequent layers. { 3.6 PLANTING .1 Planting shall be done during periods suitable with respect to weather conditions and locally accepted practice and to the Landscape Architect's approval. Plants shall be set plumb in the centre of the pit and at the same relation to grade as originally grown, after settlement has taken place. .2 Planting shall be done in a continuous operation, completing total areas, rather than individual species. .3 Plant trees and shrubs vertically with roots placed straight out in hole. Trees and other plant materials shall be faced to give the best appearance or relationship to adjacent structures, and to the approval of the Landscape Architect. .4 Set plants in partly filled pits or beds of soil mixture, allowing at least 150mm (6 in.) of soil mixture under each plant. .5 Remove all ropes and wires and pull burlap away from top 1/3 of rootball. .6 Tree spade excavated material: .1 Dig tree pit with same mechanical equipment as used to dig plant material. Ensure hole dug is upright as possible. Place in hole a mixture of 40 L of planting soil and fertilizer mixed with water to soupy consistency. This will be forced up sides of ball as root ball is placed in hole. .2 In heavy clay soil, dig planting pit as specified for excavation of large trees. Pit preparation: Loosen bottom of planting hole to depth of 150 to 200 mm (6 - 8 in.). Cover bottom of each excavation with minimum 150 mm (6 in.) topsoil mixture. V&A Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 13 Project 94027 January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS &GROUNDCOVERS .7 During planting of bare-rooted stock, first shake backfill of planting soil among the roots. .8 Tamp planting soil around root system in layers of 150 mm (6 in.) eliminating air voids. Frozen or saturated planting soil is unacceptable. When 2/3 of planting soil has been placed, fill hole with water. After water has completely penetrated into soil, complete backfilling. .9 Fill hole completely, leaving a shallow saucer, minimum 100mm deep, directly over rootball, slightly smaller in diameter than the excavation to assist with maintenance watering. .10 Place plant material to depth equal to depth they were originally growing in nursery. .11 With balled and burlapped root balls, loosen burlap and cut away minimum top 1/3 without disturbing root ball. Do not pull burlap or rope from under root ball. With container stock, remove entire container without disturbing root ball. Non bio-degradable wrappings must be removed. 12 With frozen ball material, mulch planting pit to prevent freezing. .13 When planting is completed, give surface of planting saucer dressing of organic 10-6-4 fertilizer at rate of 12 kg/100 m2 for shrub beds or 40 to 50 g/mm of caliper for trees. Mix fertilizer thoroughly with top layer of planting soil and water in well. 3.7 WRAPPING .1 Wrap deciduous trees, whose caliper is 50 to 150 mm (2 - 6 in.), spirally from ground up, to height of second branches. Treat trunk with paste of long residual insecticide, lindane or equivalent before applying wrapping. Secure burlap with binder twine wound in opposite direction to burlap at 100 mm (4 in.) intervals. Place wrapping neatly and snugly with 40 mm(1 1/2 in.) overlap. 3.8 TREE SUPPORT 1 After planting and wrapping, support all trees as detailed on drawings. .2 Staking for trees up to 3 m (10 ft.) and evergreens up to 2 m (6 ft.) in height: Backfill planting hole 2/3, drive T-rail stake 900 mm (3 ft.) into bottom of pit, taking care not to damage main roots. Place stake or anchor 150 mm (6 in.) away from trunk on side of prevailing wind. Fasten trunk to stake or anchor with tree-ring. Different methods of fastening tree trunk to stake or anchor are acceptable if Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 14 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS no damage to bark of tree will occur. Obtain approval of Landscape Architect prior to using other methods. .3 Tree stakes and wire mesh: protect trees indicated requiring tree guards. Encircle staked trees with galvanized wire mesh. Leave space of at least 150 mm (6 in.) between tree trunk and wire mesh. Fasten wire mesh to stake at 4 places using 3 mm wire. j ' .4 Guy wires for trees up to 150 mm(6 in.) caliper: .1 For deciduous trees taller than 3 m and evergreens taller than 2 m, fasten three wires to tree where a branch will prevent j slipping down. Use tree rings to prevent abrasion of bark. .2 Fasten guy wires to anchors at distance from tree base equal to height of where wire is attached to trunk. Break wires, install wire tighteners and tighten slightly. .3 Use sufficient number of guy wires to support large shrubs. .5 Guy wires for trees over 150 mm (6 in.) caliper: .1 Maintain tree in correct position with 4 guys spaced at equal intervals. .2 Fix guys at 2/3 height of evergreens, above bottom branches of q, deciduous trees or at least half tree height. .3 Secure guys to dead man at 45 degree angle to trunk of tree. .4 Position each dead man at right angles to trunk in pit 1200 mm (4 ft.) deep. Compact backfill to 90 Standard Proctor density. .6 Secure cable ends with cable splicing bolts. .7 Where guy wires are used close to pedestrian traffic ways, fasten metal flags to wires to make them clearly visible. .6 Cover wires and cables with rubber hose at points of contact with bark. .7 Trees not guyed are subject to all requirements of this specification including warranties. 3.9 PRUNING .1 Prune trees and shrubs after planting, as indicated, to compensate for loss of roots suffered during transplanting. Postpone pruning, d of those trees where heavy bleeding may occur, until in full leaf. Employ clean sharp tools and make cuts flush with main branch, smooth and sloping as to prevent accumulation of water. Remove projecting stumps on trunks or main branches. Remove dead and injured branches and branches that rub causing damage to bark. Trim out crown of trees and shrubs without changing their natural shape. Do not damage lead branches or remove smaller twigs along main branches. Treat cuts in excess of 20 mm (3/4 in.) dia and damaged parts with application of wound dressing. I� Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 15 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS .2 Trace back to living tissue all cuts, bruises and scars on the bark of the tree. Smooth and shape wood so as not to retain water. 3 Defoliate trees only when approved by the Landscape Architect. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 16 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 1 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS I � 3.10 WATERING 1 Keep all plants well watered from time of planting until acceptance. 2 Apply sufficient water to saturate root system, but do not overwater. 3.11 MULCHING !I 1 Obtain approval of planting before mulching material is applied. f Loosen soil in planting beds and pits and remove debris and weeds. Spread mulch to minimum thickness of 50 mm. Mulch material susceptible to blowing must be moistened and mixed with topsoil before applying. When mulching is placed in fall, place immediately after planting. When mulch is placed in spring, wait until soil has warmed up. 3.12 CLEAN-UP .1 Immediately after planting remove all debris and excess material from the site, leaving the area neat and tidy. Clean all areas, which are contaminated as a result of planting operations. I� .2 Do not burn debris and rubbish. 3 Maintain all areas neat and tidy at all times until acceptance. ' 3.13 MAINTENANCE .1 Water once a week for first 4 weeks and then sufficiently thereafter to maintain optimum growing conditions. Ensure adequate moisture in root zone at freeze-up. .2 Keep soil, within confines of planting saucer around trees and planting beds, shallowly cultivated and free from weeds. .3 Spray plants to combat pests and diseases. Do not use DDT or sprays prohibited by Agriculture Canada. .4 Adjust tighteners to keep guys taut at all times. Keep tree guards and guy wires in proper repair. .5 Provide adequate protection against winter damage including damage caused by rodents. .6 Maintain plant material from date of planting up to end of warranty period. .7 Remove trunk wrapping, tree stakes and guy wires at end of warranty period. Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 17 Project 94027 V& A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02490 TREES,SHRUBS&GROUNDCOVERS .8 Submit monthly written report outlining: .1 Growth and development of plant material. , .2 Preventive or corrective measures required which are outside Contractor's responsibility. .9 Remove all debris and broken branches and maintain planting beds in a neat condition at all times. Water, when necessary, with sufficient amounts to saturate root system. .10 Maintenance shall include all measures necessary to establish and maintain plant materials in a vigorous, healthy, growing condition. .I1 Maintain all plant and tree accessories, such as tree wrappings, tree guys, stakes and tighteners from time of installation until acceptance of work. 3.14 PROTECTION AFTER COMPLETION 1 Assume full responsibility for protection of all planted areas until all project work has been completed, approved and accepted. .2 Erect protective fencing and post signs where necessary and maintain such works until acceptance and remove same after acceptance of work, unless otherwise directed. 3.15 FINAL INSPECTION .1 Final inspection and acceptance of planting work shall coincide with final inspection and acceptance of all work included in the Contract. .2 Al time of final inspection all plants shall be in a healthy, vigorous, growing condition, planted in full accordance with drawings and conditions. .3 Planting beds and tree saucers shall be freshly cultivated and free of weeds and debris. .4 Any plants found dead, missing or unacceptable at time of final inspection will delay acceptance of other work, included in the Contract. .5 Partial acceptance will be considered when approved, in writing by the Landscape Architect and upon receipt of written application by the Contractor. .6 Requests for partial acceptance must be based on completion of all work within well-defined areas. END OF SECTION Copyright 1996 02490 Page - 18 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS Page: 02500-1 ------------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Backfill and Grading Section 02223 . 2 Pavement Markings Section 02580 . 3 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 d 1. 2 WORK INCLUDED . 1 Supply, place and compact granular sub-base for driveways, concrete sidewalks and curbs. . 2 Construct all paved parking areas. . 3 Construct all poured-in-place concrete curbs and sidewalks, curb cut and ramp. .4 All saw-cutting as required. .5 Make good all areas damaged due to the Work of this Contract. 1. 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS . 1 O.P.S. S. Specifications 1150 for HL3 and HL-8. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Concrete: Conform to CAN3-A23. 1-M90. . 2 Base, BelOF sidewalks: Granular "B" . . 3 Base, below, paved areas: Granular "A" and Granular "B". 4 Asphalt: Lower binder course, HL-8, upper wearing course,HL-3, all hot-min: hot-laid asphaltic concrete shall conform with O.P.S. S. 13.50. . 5 Concrete Curing Compound: "White Ritekure" . . 6 Expansion Joint: Asphalt impregnated fibre board. . 7 Form Lumber: 50 mm x 100 mm , free of warp. 8 Reinforcing Steel for Concrete: 150 mm x 150 mm mesh. SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS Page: 02500-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .9 Reinforcing Steel for Curbs: Two #10 M continuous bars. . 10 Polyethylene Sheeting: 4 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - SUB-BASE . 1 Refer to Section 02223 for backfill and grading and OPSS 1010. .2 Examine excavated areas to determine that proper depths have been provided; to accommodate granular fill and concrete for walkways, paved areas and curbs as indicated on Drawings. . 3 Place and compact granular fill, with an optimum moisture content of -+ 1%, as follows: - sidewalks, 100 mm Granular "A" , 98% Proctor Density. - paved areas, Granular "A" and "B" , 98% Standard Proctor 3 .2 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE CURBS . 1 Excavate trenches as shown on the Drawings to lines and grades required and remove surplus material from the Site. . 2 Carefully consolidate curb grade; erect formwork to obtain the curb section by a single lift to line and grade and of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain line and grade when concrete is in place. . 3 Obtain approval of forms from Consultant before pouring concrete. . 4 Fill sections under the curb shall be granular material, brought to sub-grade level in minimum 150 mm loose depth layers. .5 Side forms shall be of nominal 50 mm thick lumber, free of warp, and properly supported to maintain alignment and grade, except on curved sections where nominal 25 mm lumber may be used. Treat all form lumber with a non-staining mineral oil prior to concrete placement. Construct form to prevent honeycombing. . 6 Place two continuous reinforcing bars, one near the top and one near the bottom of the curb. SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS Page: 02500-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE CURBS (cont'd. ) 7 Cut expansion joint material to the full cross-sectional shape of the curb and place at generally 5 m intervals (not more than 7 m) and at the beginning and end of all curved sections. Place before pouring concrete; do not force into freshly poured concrete. 8 Pour concrete in accordance with Section 03300. .9 Do not deposit concrete on frozen ground. When deposited in forms concrete shall have a temperature between 10 deg.0 and 30 deg.0 and these limits shall be maintained for 72 hours. . 10 Fill forms with an excess of concrete and, after compacting strike to the required level in such a manner as to force the course aggregate below the mortar surface; finish top surface with a wood float to an even, smooth, dense surface. . 11 Finish top edges of curb with tool to produce a rounded edge of 6 mm to 12.7 mm radius. . 12 Do not strip forms for 24 hours after pouring. . 13 After finishing and after stripping the forms,treat top curb surfaces with approved curing compound. . 14 . By means acceptable to the Consultant, protect concrete from harmful effects of sunshine, drying winds and cold running of surface wager for a minimum period of five days. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - SIDEWALKS . 1 Erect formwork for sidewalks to achieve lines and grades shown on the Drawings. . 2 Proceed as specified above in Paragraphs 2 . 3, 2 .4 and 2 . 5. .3 Ensure correct placing of sub-base as specified in Paragraphs 1. 1, 1. 2 and 1. 3 above. . 4 On top of base, place one layer of wire reinforcing mesh; _ before pouring concrete, raise mesh 25 mm above base. .5 Pour sidewalks with minimum of 100 mm depth with a transverse slope of 6 mm per 300 mm on length. . 6 Cut expansion joint material to full cross-sectional shape of the walk at: place at approximate intervals of 5 m, also where walks abut paved area curbs; place to create a clean break. . 7 Fill forms as specified in Paragraphs 2 .8, 2 . 9 and 2 . 10 above, then brush lightly to form a non-slip surface. 1 SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS Page: 02500-4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 .3 INSTALLATION - SIDEWALKS (cont'd. ) .8 After broom finishing sidewalks, treat the surface with specified curing compound in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions. . 9 Immediately after stripping forms, treat exposed edges with curing compound; do not strip forms for a minimum of 24 hours after pouring. . 10 Divide walk sections between expansion joints into the pattern indicated on the Drawings with power driven carbide tipped blade, or other device approved by the Consultant. 3 . 4 PAVING . 1 Car Car Truck Parking Access and Bus Areas Roads Routes Asphaltic Material OPSS 1150 HL3 30 mm 40 mm 40 mm HL8 40 mm 50 mm 50 mm Granular A Base Course 100 mm 150 mm 150 mm Granular B Subbase 300 mm 300 mm 350 mm .2 All granular base course materials should be uniformly compacted to at least 100% Standard Proctor Density. . 3 Considering the moisture sensitivity of the subgrade soil on this site, paving shall take place only during the summer months under the full-time supervision of a soils technician. . 4 In order to prevent unnecessary saturation of the subgrade soil, surface run-off water should be directed away from the perimeter of the pavement. .5 The asphalt mixture shall be delivered to the Site at a temperature of not less than 107 deg.0 , only when the base is dry, and when the weather is suitable. The mixture shall be distributed by a mechanical spreader of approved design or by means of hot shovels and rakes. The layers shall be loose and of uniform depth to give a finished thickness when properly rolled and consolidated. . 6 While the asphalt mixtures are still hot, and as soon as they can bear the roller without undue displacement or hair cracking, the surface shall first be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by a three-wheel power driven roller weighing at least 4 .5 tonnes. 7 The surface of the lower binder course shall be free of all deleterious material before the application of the final wearing course to ensure a satisfactory bond between the two layers. SECTION 02500 - PAVING, CURBS AND SIDEWALKS Page: 02500-5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 . 4 PAVING (cont'd. ) 8 Each pavement course after compression shall be smooth and true to established grades and measured with a 3 m straight edge. Any mixture which becomes loose or broken, mixed with dirt or in any way defective, shall be immediately remedied by removing the defective area in either course, replacing it with fresh material and compacting it immediately to conform with the surrounding area. . 9 Compact with hot tampers around curbs and catch basins to produce well sealed joints. . 10 Allow no traffic for a period of 48 hours on freshly laid asphalt surfaces. . 11 All paved asphalt surfaces shall have a transverse slope of 12 .7 mm in 1 m when finished and shall be sloped without depressions of "pockets" to provide continuous surface drainage in accordance with the Drawings. . 12 All areas to be made good due to damage or as directed by Consultant shall be done as per above methods. 1� END OF SECTION SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING I General 1.1 RELATED WORK 1 Section 02222 Excavating I Section 02223 Backfilling and Grading 1.2 SAMPLES .I Submit full size sample of paving unit. 1.3 TESTING .1 Sub-grade and base course shall be uniformly compacted to minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density. Failure of stone due to improper compaction will be Contractor's responsibility. .2 Arrange for compaction test of sub-grade and granular base course. 1.4 INSPECTION .1 Contractor to inform Landscape Architect if sub-base is unacceptable. If extensive repair is required, Landscape Architect will provide written authorization to contractor to correct the base at the contract unit price as outlined in the Tender Form. .2 Arrange for inspection of layout and finished grade elevations as marked on grade stakes prior to commencing work. .3 Give timely notice, in writing, when work is ready for inspection. .4 Do not begin work until inspected to the Landscape Architect's approval. .5 Make adjustments where necessary. .6 Final inspection of work will be done after completion of all contract work. 1.5 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT I Correct and repair all defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship, submitting written guarantee for one year period from date of acceptance of all project work. Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 1 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING 2 Products 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Unit pavers: uniform in material, color, size and from one manufacturer, as noted on Details. .2 Generally: Concrete materials shall be in accordance with CAN3- A23.1-M77. .3 Crushed stone or gravel: hard, durable, angular particles, free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .1 Gradations: within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136- 84a and ASTM C117-84 and OPC #1010 ASTM Sieve Designation % Passine 19 mm 100 12.5 m m 70 - 100 4.75 mm 40 - 70 2.00 mm 23 - 50 0.425 mm 7 - 25 0.075 mm 3 - 8 .4 Screenings: hard, durable, crushed stone particles, free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .1 Gradations: within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136- 84a and ASTM C117-84 and OPC 1010. ASTM Sieve Designation % Passing 9.5 m m 100 4.75 m m 80 - 100 2.00 m m 50 - 90 0.425 m m 1 - 50 0.075 m m 0 - 10 .5 Sand: to CSA A82.56-M1976, hard, durable, angular particles, free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials and conforming to the following gradation: Tyler Sieve Size % Passing No. 8 (2.36mm) 15 - 40 No. 48 (0.32mm) 0 - 10 No. 100 (0.15mm) 1 - 50 No. 200 (0.075mm) 0 - 5 Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 2 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING 2.2 SAND/CEMENT SETTING BED 1 Sand mix consisting of hard, durable, strong, uncoated mineral or rock particles, free from injurious amounts of organic or other deleterious materials. .2 Cement shall be a standard, grey, slow-setting Portland Cement conforming to CSA-A.5. .3 Sand / Cement mix shall consists of mixture of 3 parts sand and l part cement proportioned by volume. .4 Joints: .1 All joints through concrete base shall continue through .� precast concrete paving. .2 Sealant and bedding for such joints shall be 2 part polysulphide sealant. 2.3 JOINTING SAND I Be a clean sand material passing a 3/64"mm sieve and contain some 10% of silty material. 2.4 PAVING STONES 1 'Beech Stone" and 201 x 101 x 60" manufactured by Oaks Precast Industries, color to be Northern Blend. .2 Supply complete with normal side and end stones of the thickness detailed. 3 Execution 3.1 SUBGRADE .1 Ensure that subgrade preparation conforms to levels required to allow for installation of granular base. .2 If written instruction is given by the Landscape Architect to repair the existing sub-base and after approval of layout, excavate to the minimum specified depth as detailed. .3 The specified depth shall be after compaction of subgrade. .4 Compact sub-grade uniformly to minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density. Sub-grade to be unfrozen and free of ice and snow. Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 3 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 i SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING .5 Arrange for inspection of sub-grade to Landscape Architect's approval. .6 Ensure concrete bed is clean and dry, free of all loose debris. 3.2 GRANULAR BASE 1 Sub-base minimum thickness: 150 mm. Install base course to the minimum specified depth obtained after compaction. .2 Spread and compact crushed stone or gravel in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness per layer. .3 Compact granular base course to minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D698-78. .4 Maintain final level of base course parallel to finished grade of paving. Shape and roll alternately to obtain a smooth, even and uniformly compacted granular base and ensure conformity of grades with finish surface. .5 Apply water as necessary during compaction to obtain specified density. If granular base is excessively moist, aerate by scarifying with suitable equipment until moisture content is corrected. .6 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with approved mechanical tampers. .7 Ensure top of granular base does not exceed plus or minus l0mm of finished grade less combined thickness of granular laying course plus surface course. 3.3 EDGING .1 Install edging true to grade, in location, layout and pattern as indicated. 3.4 BEDDING SAND 1 Install sand uniformly over approved granular base to a depth higher than specified, to allow for compaction after pavers have been installed. .2 The depth, 1/2" to 1" shall be obtained after compacting pavers into place. The bedding sand shall not exceed 1 inch. .3 Use a straight edge to obtain a uniform level, parallel to finished grade. Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 4 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING .4 Have a uniform moisture content when spread and within a range of 4% to 8%. .5 Protect screened bedding sand from any precompaction, including from rainfall. Re-install bedding sand that has been precompacted. 3.5 LAYING PAVERS DRY .1 Install pavers with closely butted joints, at 5/64" - 1/8" and to the approved pattern. .2 Abut an edge constraint with the first row. .3 Lay all full units first. .4 Install pavers true to line and grade, location, layout and pattern as indicated. .5 When adjustment of paving units is necessary, avoid premature compaction of bedding. .6 After laying of pavers, compact on sand cushion to achieve consolidation of the bedding and to achieve design levels and profiles with no less than three passes of a plate compactor to achieve compaction of sand in joints. ,! .7 Compact with a high frequency low-amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator with a plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve }I paving units. Compact down on minimum 19mm thick plywood until pavers are true to grade and free of movement. .8 Compact immediately after laying stones and prior to any traffic. .9 Continue compaction until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. .10 Fully compact all work within one metre of laying face at the completion of each day's laying. 11 Remove and replace any unit damaged during compaction. .12 Immediately after compaction and prior to termination of work on that day and prior to any traffic, sand and fill joints. .13 Spread joint sand on surface and broom in to fill joints. .14 Allow traffic on joints after filling of joints. +! Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 5 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING .15 Make up joint sand as it settles within the joint until joint is entirely filled. 3.6 LAYING PAVERS ON CONCRETE WITH SAND/CEMENT SETTING BED 1 Install precast concrete paving stones in accordance with drawings and details. .2 Lay in the patterns as indicated on drawings. .3 Sweep concrete base clean and free of any deleterious material. .4 Apply sand / cement setting bed a minimum 20mm thick. .5 Install paving stones true to line and level and to blend smoothly with existing paving, and tops of curbs. .6 Maintain butt joints of even uniform width and in straight line to match existing and as detailed. .7 Mix sand and cement dry, in equal proportions as previously specified. .8 Compact pavers as per previous sub-section "Laying Pavers Dry". .9 When compacting pavers do not damage adjoining surfaces or structures. .10 Where necessary, saw paving stones with a diamond blade to produce a true, even and undamaged edge. .11 Do not sawcut paving stones within 2 metres of adjacent structures. .12 Seal all joints over contraction and expansion joints in concrete slab with sealant, color grey, to match concrete color as closely as possible. .13 After installation, verify grade with a straight edge and remove any unevenness and make true to the required grade, level and cross- section. Correct any imperfections exceeding 1/8" per 10'. .14 Spread joint sand on surface and broom in to fill joints. .15 Remove excess sand and compact with no less than two passes with the plate vibrator. .16 Allow traffic on joints after filling of joints. Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 6 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING .17 Make up joint sand as it settles within the joint until joint is entirely filled. 3.7 BACKFILL 1 Backfill in accordance with Section 02223 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling. 3.8 PROTECTION AFTER COMPLETION 1 Protect paving from vehicular traffic for a period of at least seven (7) days, unless directed otherwise. .2 Pedestrian traffic shall not be allowed on paving for at least three (3) days, unless directed otherwise. .3 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. .4 Reinstate areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to match condition of adjacent, undisturbed areas. .5 Immediately remedy all defects to completed work, which occur during the maintenance period. .6 Refill joints and re-compact pavers and adjust for level and alignment when necessary. .7 Be responsible for the repair of all damages until paving has been inspected and approved. END OF SECTION Copyright 1996 02515 Page - 7 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 02580 - PAVEMENT MARKING---------------------- Page_02580_1- ---------------------------- ------ PART 1 - GENERAL ? 1. 1 RELATED WORK . 1 Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks Section 02500 1. 2 SAMPLES !, . 1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01340. . 2 Clearly mark samples with name of project and its location, paint manufacturer' s name and address, name of paint, CGSB specification number and formulation number and batch number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Alkyd traffic paint to CGSB 1-GP-74M & AMDT - MAY - 81 as manufactured by Benjamin Moore Ltd. , or approved alternate. . 2 Colour - White. . 3 Upon request, Consultant will supply a qualified product list of paints applicable to work. Qualified paints may be used but Consultant reserves right to perform further test. .4 Thinner to CGSB 1-GP-5M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS . 1 Paint applicator to be approved pressure type, capable of applying paint and that will ensure uniform application and having a positive shut-off. 3 . 2 CONDITION OF SURFACES . 1 Pavement surface to be free from surface water, frost, ice, dust, oil, grease and other foreign materials. 3.3 APPLICATION . 1 Lay out pavement markings. . 2 Unless otherwise approved by Consultant, apply paint only when air temperature is above 10 deg.C. and no rain is forecast. SECTION 02580 - PAVEMENT MARKING Page: 02580-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 3 APPLICATION (cont'd. ) .3 Apply traffic paint evenly at a rate of 3 sq.m. per 4 . 6 litres (10 sq.ft. per gal. ) . 4 Do not thin paint unless approved by Consultant. . 5 Symbols and letters to conform to dimensions indicated. . 6 Apply other specified marking materials as directed by Consultant. .7 Paint lines to be of uniform colour and density with sharp edges. .8 Thoroughly clean distributor tank before refilling with paint of different colour. .9 Apply paint using specified equipment only. 3 .4 TOLERANCE . 1 Paint markings to be within plus or minus 12 .7 mm (1/211) of dimensions specified. 3 .5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK . 1 Protect pavement markings until dry. END OF SECTION l; SECTION 02617 PRECAST CONCRETE WALL 1 General 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1 This section specifies the supply and installation of "Pisa - Stone" precast concrete retaining walls. Section 02222 Excavating ? Section 02223 Trenching and Backfilling 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 1 All work must be executed by skilled tradesmen having at least 2 years experience in this type of work. .2 Use only products from approved manufacturers. 1.3. All concrete products must conform to C.S.A. CAN3-A23.1- M77, latest edition for materials and method of manufacture. .1 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 Chipped or damaged products not conforming to the approved samples will be rejected. .2 All damaged or deteriorated materials will be rejected and must be removed from the site immediately. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1 Do not proceed with installation if the sub-grade is in a frozen or muddy condition. 1.5 INSPECTION .1 Obtain the approval of the Landscape Architect of the layout, compacted sub-grade and compacted granular base before proceeding with subsequent work. 1.6 SAMPLE PANEL 1 When instructed by the Landscape Architect, erect a sample wall section, minimum 4000mm long. Have sample approved before proceeding. Ensure all other work conforms to sample panel. Copyright 1996 02617 Page - 1 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02617 PRECAST CONCRETE WALL 2 Products 2.1 MATERIALS 1. Precast concrete products: "Pisa-Stone II" interlocking retaining wall system, comprised of premanufactured units: Pisa Stone II, coping stone and corner stone. Manufactured by Risi Stone Ltd., P.O. Box 390 Gormley, Ontario LOH 1G9 (416) 887-1717 or Unilock Ltd. , 287 Armstrong Avenue, Georgetown, Ontario L7G 4X6 (905) 453-1438. .2 Butyl Tape: 13mm bead size as supplied by the manufacturer and intended for use with these precast concrete products. 3. Drain Pipe: 100mm diameter perforated flexible polyethylene weeping tile. 4. Filter Fabric: non woven polyester geotextile Terrafix 270R by Terrafix Filter Fabrics Inc. or Mirafi P150 by Dominion Textile Inc. 5. Drain Rock: 20mm clear angular gravel. 6. Granular "A" & "B": granular material conforming in all respects to OPSS 1001 and !010, latest editions. 3 Execution 3.1 PREPARATION 1. Layout location of wall to Landscape Architect's appproval. 2. Excavate area to depth shown on the drawings to receive granular bedding and base courses. 3. Fine grade sub-grade sliminating uneven areas and filling low spots. Remove all debris. 4. Compact finished sub-grade to 95% Standard Proctor Dry Density in accordance with ASTM D698-70. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1. Install 150mm granular "A" bedding and compact to 95% Standard Proctor Density. 2. Lay out all work true to line and level, plumb and true. Accurately place structural supports and members in position and brace securely, to remain plumb and true until permanently fixed. Copyright 1996 02617 Page - 2 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02617 PRECAST CONCRETE WALL 3. Install wall components as required according to manufacturer's instructions to achieve elevations shown on the drawings. Install base course and second course below finish grade with top of second course approximately flush with finished grade. Level carefully in all directions. 4. Install wall units by sliding in place, achieving tight butt joints. Stagger all vertical joints of adjacent horizontal courses with a minimum overlap of 150mm. 5. All corners shall be lap jointed. Use premanufactured corner stones and cut angle as instructed by the manufacturer to suit the particular application. 6. Use a masonry saw to make cuts as required. All cuts on exposed edges shall be "rockfaced" with hammer and chisel to match finished texture pattern of wall. .7 Install drain tile, filter fabric and drain rock as shown on the drawings. Slope drain the at min. 1.0% to discharge at end of wall or into storm sewer. 8. Drain rock shall be used for backfill immediately adjacent to rear face of wall to a depth of 300mm. 9. Backfill behind wall with native material or granular "B" as indicated, and compact material in maximum 200mm lifts to 95% Standard Proctor Density. l� 10. Install coping units on top course of wall and secure to lower course with two continuous strips of butyl tape on either side of groove. 11. Finish grade behind wall shall be 50mm below top of wall with maximum slope of 20%a unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 3.3 CLEAN UP 1. Clean up site of all debris at completion of work. 3.4 GUARANTEE 1. Guarantee retaining wall for a period of 1 year from date of acceptance against settlement, cracking or leaning. 2. Repair all wall sections which have settled or shifted during the .� guarantee period. Replace all cracked components. END OF SECTION Copyright 1996 02617 Page - 3 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 02700 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE Page: 02700-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Excavation Section 02222 . 2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 3 Mechanical - Storm Drain Division 15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Pipe and Fittings: 100 mm dia. corrugated, plastic drainage tubing to CGSB 41-GP-29M, Type 1 (non-perforated) for discharge lines, Type 2 (perforated) for collector lines. . 2 Weeping Tile: Prefabricated Drainage Composites, 1IR270" as manufactured by Terrafix Ltd. , or approved alternate. . 3 Filter Material: Clean crushed stone, to size indicated on Drawings. I� PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - PERIMETER DRAINAGE . 1 Place minimum 150 mm filter material. . 2 Non-perforated pipe to be laid at 1% slope. 3 Install minimum 150 mm filter material to sides and top of perforated pipe for perimeter drainage. .4 Ensure pipe interior and coupling surfaces are clean before laying. . 5 Do not use concrete, masonry, stones, wood or any type of shim to establish pipe slope. . 6 Connect pipes using manufacturer's recommended fittings. 7 Protect pipe ends from damage and ingress of foreign material at each end of each days work or work stoppage. 8 Connect pipe to discharge lines, sump pits, storm sewer lines by appropriate adapters manufactured for this purpose. SECTION 02700 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE Page: 02700-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - PERIMETER DRAINAGE (cont'd. ) .9 Place filter material after pipe installation has been inspected. . 10 Place filter material by hand in 150 mm lifts. Consolidate by tamping lightly. Prevent displacement of pipe. . 11 Contractor shall execavate, inspect and clean Phase 1 drainage system and shall connect to Phase 2 . 3 . 2 CLEAN UP . 1 Do all clean up work in strict accordance with Section 01710. END OF SECTION r SECTION 02934 HYDRAULIC SEEDING i 1 General 1.1 RELATED WORK 1 Section 02212 - Topsoil and Finish Grading Section 02485 - Sodding Section 02940 - Landscape Maintenance 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Provide product data for: .1 Seed. .2 Mulch. .3 Fertilizer 2 Products 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Grass seed: Canada Certified No. I Grade in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations. .2 Mulch: "Verdyol Mulch Extra' or approved equal. .3 Water: free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth. .4 Fertilizer: 1 Type 1: complete synthetic, with mimimum 65% water soluble nitrogen. Ratio: 1:4:4. .2 Type 2: complete synthetic, slow release, with maximum 35% water soluble nitrogen. Ratio: [2:1:1]. !, 2.2 GRASS SEED MIXTURE 1 55% Creeping Red Fescue 30% Annual Rye 10% Perennial Rye 5% Kentucky Blue Grass .2 In containers with original tags. 2.3 EQUIPMENT I Truck: 1 Slurry tank: minimum 4500 L. I ' .2 Pumps capable of maintaining continuous non-fluctuating t flow of solution. i I� Copyright 1996 02934 Page - 1 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02934 HYDRAULIC SEEDING 3 Execution 3.1 WORKMANSHIP r 1 Take reasonable care to prevent spraying items such as structures, signs, guiderails, fences, plant materials and utilities. .2 Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as wind speeds over 10 km/h, frozen ground or ground covered with snow, ice or standing water. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 1 Ensure areas to be seeded have been cultivated to depth of 25mm and are moist to depth of 150mm before seeding. Fine grade free of humps and hollows and free of deleterious and refuse materials. 3.3 SLURRY APPLICATION 1 Slurry mixture applied per hectare: .1 Seed: 115 kg. .2 Mulch: 1120 kg. .3 Fertilizer: Type 1, 895 kg; adjust fertilizer application as directed by soil test report. .4 Water: quantity as required to form slurry in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. .2 Apply seed slurry uniformly. .3 Blend applications into adjacent sodded areas and previous applications to form uniform surfaces. .4 Reshoot areas where application is not uniform. .5 Remove slurry from items and areas not designated to be sprayed. 3.4 ESTABLISHMENT .1 Perform following operations from time of seed application until final acceptance by Landscape Architect: .1 Water seeded area as required to ensure germination and continued growth of grass. Control watering to prevent washouts. .2 Cut grass to 40mm whenever it reaches height of 60mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass. Copyright 1996 02934 Page - 2 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02934 HYDRAULIC SEEDING .3 Fertilize seeded areas one month after seeding. Spread evenly and water in well. Use Type 2 fertilizer, ratio 2:1:1, at rate as determined by soil test. Postpone fertilizing until following spring if application falls within four week period prior to expected end of local growing season. .4 Repair dead or bare spots to allow establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .5 Eliminate weeds by mechanical means. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE .1 Areas will be accepted by Landscape Architect provided that: .1 Seeded areas are uniformly established and turf is free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots and free of weeds. .2 Seeded areas have been cut at least twice. .2 Areas seeded in fall will be accepted in following spring one month after start of growing season provided acceptance conditions are ' fulfilled. END OF SECTION Copyright 1996 02934 Page - 3 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02938 SODDING 1 General 1.1 RELATED WORK 1 Section 02,212 - Topsoil & Finish Grading Section 021934 - Hydro Seeding Section 02940 - Landscape Maintenance 1.2 SCHEDULING 1 Schedule sod laying to coincide with topsoil operations. 1.3 TESTING ! 1 Test for N, P, K and minor element values, soluble salt content, j organic matter and pH value using an approved independent inspection and testing agency. .2 Submit three 1 lb. / 1 kg. samples of existing topsoil taken from different spots to the laboratory listed below. Clearly indicate that the intent is to plant sod and nursery stock material in this soil. Pesticide Residue Testing Laboratory c/o University of Guelph Building 43 McGillvray Street Guelph, Ontario N1G 2W1 .3 Conform to recommendations from soil testing agency with respect to improvement of tested topsoil. .4 Adjust fertilizer requirements and rates as well as additions of other additives, to conform to soil testing recommendation, at no extra cost to the Contract. .5 Arrange for and be responsible for costs related to additional soil testing for confirmation of conformance to soil test report recommendations and as may otherwise be required by the Landscape Architect. 1.4 INSPECTION .1 Obtain approval of sub-grade from the Landscape Architect before commencing work. .2 Make all materials available for inspection, upon arrival on the site, or at source of supply when requested. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 1 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02938 SODDING .3 Supply name of sod supplier and field location of where sod was cut. .4 Give timely notice, in writing, when materials are available for inspection. .5 Installation of sod, prior to inspection by the Landscape Architect is the Contractor's responsibility. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject sod, after it has been installed, if sod does not conform to the specifications and/or drawings. .6 Remove all rejected materials immediately from the site. .7 Give timely notice to the Landscape Architect in writing, when all sodding work has been completed. All sodding work is to be inspected upon completion to establish the start of the specified maintenance period and issue of a Final Acceptance Certificate, if in the Landscape Architect's opinion, the grass is well established and in healthy growing condition. 1.5 DELIVERY,HANDLING&STORAGE 1 Protect sod during transportation and deliver to the site in a fresh and healthy condition. .2 Do not store sod on site for more than 48 hours before installation. .3 Install sod immediately upon arrival on site. Protect sod from drying out if immediate installation is not possible. .4 Supply and deliver all materials, such as fertilizers and similar materials, in standard containers, clearly marked with contents, weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY .1 Warranty all sodded areas for I month from date of acceptance of all work. .2 During the warranty period, replace sod where necessary and make periodic inspections of all sodded areas. Notify the Landscape Architect, in writing, of any corrective or preventative measures prior to treatment necessary to maintain grass in the specified condition. Replace all sod which has failed to establish into a healthy, vigorously growing condition, as a result of faulty materials, workmanship, and/or erosion. .3 If re-sodded areas exceed ten percent (10%) of the total sodded area, an additional one (1) month guarantee will apply to the re-sodded areas. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 2 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 ' SECTION 02938 SODDING 2 Products I'! 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Nursery sod: Quality and source to comply with standards outlined in 'Guide Specification for Nursery Stock', Section 17, 1978 edition, published by Canadian Nursery Trades Association. .1 Number one Kentucky Bluegrass sod: grown from minimum mixture of 3 Kentucky Bluegrass cultivars. .2 Water: potable. .3 Fertilizer: complete synthetic slow release fertilizer with maximum 35% water soluble nitrogen. .4 Herbicide: type, rate, and method of application subject to approval by Landscape Architect. 2.2 TOPSOIL .1 Use imported topsoil for work only when site supply runs out. .2 All topsoil shall be a fertile friable natural loam containing 4% minimum organic matter for clay loams and 2% minimum organic matter for sandy loams with acidity range of 6.0 pH to 7.4 pH and shall be capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. It shall be free of any admixture of subsoil clay lumps, stones and roots over 25mm in diameter and other extraneous matter and shall be reasonably free of weeds and weed seeds and rhizomes. Topsoil shall be free of soil contaminants and/or pesticide residue. .3 Mix topsoil as recommended by soil test. .4 Topsoil that is unacceptable shall be removed from site at the sole cost of the contractor. 2.3 SCD .1 Sod shall be a certified No. 1 cultivated turf grass sod as specified in the planting notes and grown by a member in good standing with the Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario. Composition of sod shall be minimum 50% Touchdown Kentucky Blue Grass and remainder shall be approved Kentucky Blue Grass cultivars. .2 At time of delivery it shall have a strong fibrous root system free of stones, burned, or bare spots and contain not more than 1% twitch grass or other weeds. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 3 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02938 , SODDING .3 Cut sod shall be a maximum thickness of 38mm and a minimum thickness of 25mm, 1 square metre in area. 2.4 INORGANIC FERTILIZERS 1 Complete, commercial fertilizers of approved manufacturer, containing not less than 60% urea-formaldehyde by weight. .2 The following fertilizer requirements have been included for tendering purposes only. The requirements have been included for tendering purposes only. The requirements and rates shall be adjusted to conform to soil testing report and subsequent recommendations. Such adjustment shall be made at no extra cost to the Contract. 10-10-10- 9 kg. per 81 square metres and/or 0-20-10 @ 5.4 kg. per 81 square metres and/or Superphosphate @ 11 kg. per 81 square metres. .3 Commercial superphosphate: finely ground with a minimum , analysis of 20% P2O5. .4 Lime: to be used in all cases where the pH of the soil is less than 6:0. Lime containing not less than 85% of calcium and magnesium one , half passing a #100 mesh sieve. Rate of application shall be determined after determining the pH of the topsoil. 3 Execution 3.1 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL 1 Spread dry topsoil during dry weather over approved, dry, unfrozen subgrade. .2 Keep topsoil 25mm below finished grade. Place 100mm minimum depth of topsoil under sodded areas. .3 Fine grade topsoil. eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. .4 Ensure that ditches and swales are properly graded with adequate falls for draining. .5 Fine-grade area to a smooth, even loose-textured surface, free of roots, debris, stones 25mm 0 and larger and to the Landscape Architect's approval. .6 Before rolling, mix in time and fertilizers at rates specified previously. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 4 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 ' SECTION 02938 SODDING 3.2 LAYING OF SOD 1 Prior to sodding, obtain approval from Landscape Architect that finished grade and depth of topsoil are satisfactory. .2 Lay sod as soon as possible upon arrival on the site. Lay sod within 24h of being lifted. .3 Sodding during excessively wet conditions, at freezing temperatures or over frozen soil is not acceptable. .4 Handle sod in such a manner to prevent breaking or tearing. Do not lay damaged and broken pieces but remove from site. .5 Place sod, closely knit together in such a manner that no open joints are visible, or pieces overlapping. Cut out irregular or thin sections ! with sharp implements. Blend sod smoothly and uniformly with paved areas and existing turf as detailed on drawings. .6 Lay sod in rows, perpendicular to slope, and with joints staggered. .7 Lay sod to a width of 3 metres in swales and place perpendicular to direction of swale. .8 Water sod immediately after laying to obtain moisture penetration `! into top 100mm of topsoil. .9 Lay sod sections perpendicular to slopes greater than 3:1 (run/rise) and secure with wooden pegs. Place pegs 3 per m2, 100 mm below top edge to prevent shifting of sod and drive pegs flush with top of sod soil. .10 After sod and soil has dried sufficiently to prevent damage, roll area with 8kg. roller to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor irregularities. Use of heavy roller to correct irregularities in grade is not permitted. .11 Upon completion of all sodding work arrange for inspection by the Landscape Architect. Give timely notice for such inspection. .12 Approval of work at such inspection will establish commencement of maintenance period, which shall be at least thirty (30) days after completion of all sodding work. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 5 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02938 , SODDING 3.2 PROTECTION AFTER COMPLETION 1 Assume full responsibility for protection of all sodded areas until end of maintenance period. .2 Erect protective barriers and post signs where necessary and maintain same until acceptance. Remove after final inspection. .3 Remedy all damages, wash-outs and eroded areas resulting from , weather, improper protection or other causes. .4 Report, in writing, to the Landscape Architect all damages resulting from vandalism or any other causes beyond Contractor's control. 3.3 MAINTENANCE .1 Maintain sodded area from start of installation until final acceptance. , .2 Maintenance shall include all measures necessary to establish and maintain all sodded areas in a healthy, vigorous growing condition, free of thin, poor or burned-out patches. ' .3 Roll sodded areas, where necessary, to remove depressions and irregularities. .4 Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at frequency required to maintain soil under sod continuously moist to depth of 75 to 100 mm. .5 Cut grass to 40 mm when it reaches height of 60 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grassed areas. .6 Fertilize sodded areas one month after sodding with 2:1:1 ratio fertilizer. Spread evenly at rate of .5 kg of nitrogen/100m2 and water in well. .7 Check sodded areas for disease and weeds and take immediate measures to eliminate diseases and control weed growth. .8 Use chemicals for disease and weed control in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Assume full responsibility for the use of such chemicals and repair, replace or remedy otherwise all damage resulting from the use of such chemicals. Pesticide application to be performed by competent personnel holding a valid ' licence for this type of soil. Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 6 Project 94027 V& A January 10, 1996 , SECTION 02938 SODDING .9 Re-sod areas which show deterioration or which are thin, bare or burned-out and repair all damages resulting from erosion and washouts or any other causes. .10 At time of final inspection all sodded areas shall have a healthy, even, vigorously growing stand of grass, free of diseases, weeds, bare, thin or burned-out areas. Grass shall be cut to a maximum height of 60mm at time of final inspection. iff 3.3 ACCEP I ANCE .1 Sodded areas will be accepted at final inspection provided that: .1 Sodded areas are properly established. .2 Sod is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds. .3 No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 40 mm. .4 Sodded areas have been cut minimum 2 times. .2 Lawns sodded in fall will be accepted in following spring one month after start of growing season provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled. END OF SECTION if Copyright 1996 02938 Page - 7 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02940 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 1 General 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1 Comply with the General Conditions of the Contract and the Requirements of Division 1. .2 Provide all labour, materials, tools, services and incidentals to do complete work required and/or indicated on the drawings and specified herein. ' .3 Landscape Maintenance under this Section shall apply to the period starting on date of substantial completion of construction work (start of warranty) and shall continue until acceptance at end of warranty period, subject to Landscape Architect's inspection and approval. '.� Note: Maintenance prior to substantial completion of construction work shall be work included under this contract as specified in Sections 02490 and 02930. 1.2 ACCEPTANCE 1 All maintenance work shall receive final inspection by the Landscape Architect at end of maintenance period prior to final acceptance. .2 All defects shall be remedied and all deficiencies corrected prior to final acceptance. 1.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP 1 Program timing of operations to growth, weather conditions and use of site. .2 Store on site equipment and materials in location approved by Landscape Architect. .3 Collect and dispose of debris or excess material from sodded areas and planters on daily basis. .4 Supply materials, topsoil mulch, fertilizer, replacement of tree ' stakes, wire, etc. .5 All maintenance work shall be carried out under the direction of a qualified horticulturalist having at least 5 years experience. .6 All herbicides and pesticides shall be products registered under federal and provincial pesticides legislation, and shall be supplied by 6perators licensed under provincial legislation. Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 1 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECITON 02940 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.4.1 Deliver and store fertilizer, lime and bonemeal in waterproof bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturers. Store in weatherproof areas. 2 Products 2.1 MATERIALS , .1 Topsoil: friable loam, neither heavy clay nor very light sandy nature containing minimum of 10% organic matter to maximum of 25%. Free of subsoil, roots, sod, stone, foreign object. Acidity range (pH of 5.5 to 7.5). Topsoil shall be reasonably free of crabgrass, couchgrass or other noxious weeds. Topsoil shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. .2 Peatmoss: decomposed plant material, fairly elastic and homogeneous, free of decomposed colloidal residue, wood, sulphur and iron and of brown colour containing minimum 60% organic matter by weight and finely shredded with particle size not exceeding 6mm (1/4") in size. Minimum pH value of peat 4.5, ' maximum 6.0. .3 Sand: hard, granular natural beach sand, well washed and clean of impurities, chemical or organic matter. .4 Fertilizer: complete commercial fertilizer with minimum 50% of t elements derived from organic sources of non-burning type with slow N release. .5 Lime: ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates. .6 Bonemeal: raw bonemeal, finely ground with minimum analysis of , 3% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid. .7 Water: potable. .8 Weed Killer: .1 Type 1: 2,41) amine or approved equal. , .2 Type 2: Fenoprop or approved equal. Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 2 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 i SECTION 02940 ' LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE .9 Nursery sod: especially sown and cultivated in nursery field as turf grass crop containing maximum 2% broad leaf weeds and 10 other weeds within 42 sq.m. (50 sq.yd.) as specified in Section 02485. Thickness of sod soil portion 25mm (1") maximum. Sod with soil visible when grass is mowed to 38mm (1-1/2") height, is not acceptable. .10 Pest and disease controls of approved type and chemical content as required. Use only products, which are registered under Federal and Provincial Pesticides legislation. .11 .1 Stakes: T-rail iron stakes 38mm x 6mm (1-1/2" x 1/4") primed with 1 brush coat of black zinc rich paint to C.G.S.B. 1-GP-181. .2 Snow fence: standard model with slats dipped in chemical preservative, spaced and tied together with iron wire making continuous fence. .12 Wound dressing: horticulturally accepted non-toxic, non-hardening emulsion. .13 Mulch: shredded bark mulch as specified in Section 02490. .14 Burlap: first quality burlap for winter tree protection measures. 3 Execution 3.1 SPRING CLEANING 1 Planting Beds .1 Clean shrub borders and planters of debris and dead plant material. Loosen and cultivate soil lightly without disturbing roots below surface. .2 Where mulching material of vegetative nature has been used in planters or planting beds remove temporarily all material that has not been decomposed and mix decomposed parts with topsoil. Replace mulching material. Supply and add sufficient material of equal quality to provide covering of 25 mm (1"). .3 Trim grass edges around planting beds neatly in lines as in original layout. r r Copyright gt 1996 Page 02940 - 3 Project 94027 January 10, 1996 1 SECTION 02940 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3.2 REPAIR AND RENOVATING I Regrading 1 Remove sod and topsoil from areas requiring regrading. Regrade as required. .2 Remove excess material from site or supply and spread fill to bring subgrade to require elevations. .3 After regrading subgrade, supply and spread topsoil to depth of 150mm (6"). .2 Resodding .1 Remove existing and dead sod, weeds and debris from area to be resodded. Loosen top layer by discing or roto-tilling. Prepare smooth, loose surface for laying sod. .2 Apply 10-6-4 fertilizer at rate of 12.2 kg/100 m2 (25 lbs. per 110 square years). Rake into top layer of soil. .3 Use sod with grass mixture equivalent to one growing on site. .4 Lay sod with sections closely butted, without overlapping of , gaps, smooth and even with adjoining areas. Roll lightly and tamp. Continue to obtain moisture penetration of 75 mm to 100 mm (3" to 4"). Continue penetration at intervals maintain sufficient growth. Keep grass cut at height of 38mm (1-1/2"). , .3 Top Dressing and Reseeding. .1 Mow areas to receive top-dressing to height of 40mm (1 1/2"). ' .2 Rake thoroughly, removing loose and dead grass, stones and debris. .3 Use dry, friable and clean topsoil and spread to thickness of , 10mm (3/8") to 13 mm (1/2") filling in low areas and bare spots. .4 Overseed area with seed mixture equivalent to one growing on site and suitable for region. Seed at rate of 1.7 kg per 100 m2 (3.5 Ibs per 100 square yards). 3.3 AERATING .1 Select time during early spring when soil is sufficient dry to allow breaking up of soil particles. .2 Clean lawn areas to be aerated and mow grass to height of 40mm (1- 1/2"). .3 Aerate lawn using aerating equipment which extracts and deposits ' (at location of extraction) earth plugs a minimum of 64 mm (2-1/2") deep and spaced on maximum of 125 mm (5") on centres. .4 Drag heavy mat over grass or rake to break up plugs and spread resulting soil evenly through grass. Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 4 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02940 i LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3.4 FERTILIZING LAWN AREAS I Apply 10-604 of 7-7-7 fertilizer at rate of 12.2 kg per 100 m2 (25 lb. per 110 square yards). Apply in early spring as soon as frost is out of ground. Make supplementary application of 7.32 kg per 100 m2 (15 Ibs per 110 square years) towards the end of August. Use mechanical spreading equipment. Check calibration to ensure specified amounts are applied evenly and uniformly. 3.5 FERTILIZING PLANT MATERIAL .1 Apply 10-6-4 fertilizer in early spring at rate of 1.4 kg per 25 mm (3.0 lb. per 1") caliper per tree and .45 kg (11b.) per individual shrub. .2 For trees drill holes 300 mm (12") to 375 mm (15") deep, starting at dripline of branches and working towards trunk. Make one hole for every square foot and divide required fertilizer over holes. Water in well. .3 Mix 14.6 kg per 100 m2 (30 lb. per 100 square yards) of bonemeal n top 200 mm (8") of topsoil and apply 10-604 fertilizer at rate of 12.2 kg per 100 m2 (25 lb. per 110 square yards) surface of flower and shrub beds. Water well. 3.6 WATERING .1 Watering outlets are available. Contractor supplies equipment, pumps, etc.. .2 Watering: apply sufficient water per application to obtain moisture penetration of 75 mm to 100 mm (3" to 4"). Apply water in soft spray to avoid 'packing' of soil. Move sprinklers as required to avoid running of water and return to those areas until moisture penetration has been reached. Do not impede use of sidewalks and other paved areas. .3 Timing: water when necessary, or as directed by the Landscape Architect (but no less than 5 times per growing season), to ensure that the landscape areas remain in healthy vigorous growing condition. Watering operation must be continuous and completed within reasonable period. Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 5 Project 94027 V & A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02940 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3.7 WEED CONTROL I Prepare spray mixture to manufacturer's recommendations, in ' accordance with all applicable legislation, and apply recommended rates by means of even fine spray. , .2 Use weed killer which leaves nozzle as droplets. Do not use mist blower. .3 Apply when weeds are growing well but before seed forming. .4 Confine spray pattern to area to be treated. Avoid spray and vapour draft. .5 Use herbicides only between air temperatures of 15 degrees C -32 degrees C. .6 Apply on dry plants when no rain will be expected within 12 hours. .7 Repair and compensate for any damage caused through improper ' use of herbicides. .8 Prepare full report on herbicide application. ' 3.8 PEST AND DISEASE CONTROL 1 Apply approved pesticides to control pests and diseases. Strictly follow manufacturer's specification. .2 Be responsible and make good all damages resulting from application ' of pesticides. 3.9 CULTIVATING PLANTERS AND SHRUB BEDS I Cultivate whenever required to keep top layer of soil, loose friable and free from weeds. Any operation must be continuous without interruption. .2 Cultivate top 50 mm to 75 mm (2" to 3") of planters and soil areas around trees and hedges. .3 Remove weeds, including their roots. .4 Take care not to damage roots of shrubs. Use small hand tools for , areas of closely planted shrubs. .5 Collect and dispose of paper and refuse. Remove dead plants, leaves, branches, seed pots and fallen fruit. Notify Landscape Architect of all dead plants, replace as specified in Section 02490, under the terms of the warranty or as directed. ' Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 6 Project 94027 V&A January 10, 1996 SECTION 02940 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE .6 Clean, by hand, areas that are covered with mulch. Loosen top layer of mulch without mixing it with soil underneath. 3.10 PRUNING 1 Prune in dormant season but not during heavy frost. Prune evergreens in spring before start of new growth. Prune heavy bleeders such as birch, hard maple, when in full leaf. Prune shrubs ' which flower on the previous year's growth only after flowering. .2 Employ clean sharp tools. Make cuts flush with main branch, smooth and sloping to prevent accumulation of water on cut. Do not leave little stumps on trunks or main branches. Remove dead and injured branches and branches that rub together causing damage to bark. .3 Remove smaller branch at juncture of limb from which changing their natural shape of habitat. Do not damage lead branches. .4 Remove .smaller branches at junction of limb from which they originate or cut at twig or bud pointing outward. Undercut larger branches to prevent tearing of bark. .5 Treat large cuts and damaged parts with coating of approved wound ' dressing. 3.11 WINTER PREPARATION 1 Rake and assemble leaves after they have been shed by trees. .2 Clean out planting areas, and remove debris from site. .3 Wrap all coniferous trees with burlap, in an approved fashion, to provide winter protection as required. 3.12 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESSORIES 1 Maintain all plant accessories such as tree supports, grip wire, tree wrapping, tree guards, etc. in good condition throughout the maintenance period. .2 At end of maintenance period, remove all tree supports, wrappings, etc. as directed and to Landscape Architect's approval. END OF SECTION Copyright 1996 Page 02940 - 7 Project 94027 V &A January 10, 1996 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK Page: 03100-1 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PROJECT NO. 94027 I , PART 1 GENERAL f 1.1 GENERAL i, .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 02500 - Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks if .2 03200 - Concrete reinforcement .3 03300 - Cast-in-place concrete .4 03345 - Concrete floor finishes .5 05120 - Structural steel .6 07900 - Sealants 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Do concrete formwork in accordance with latest revised editions of CAN/CSA-A23.1- M90, and CAN3-A23.3-M89 if .2 Conform to the Ontario Building Code. .3 Falsework, where required, shall conform to CSA Standard S269.1-1975. if .4 Scaffolding, where required, shall conform to CAN/CSA-S269.2-M87. .5 Formwork shall conform to CAN/CSA-5269.3-M92. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS {� .1 Submit shop drawings for shoring and Falsework, where required, in accordance with Section 01340 - Shop Drawings-Product Data-Samples .2 Provide copies for review by the Architect and Engineer with sufficient lead time to allow minimum 10 days for the review process. Prior to submission to the Architect and Engineer, copies shall be checked in detail by the Contractor and shall bear the checker's initials. 1.5 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT 1 No measurement will be made under this Section. Include cost in Items of work for which concrete formwork is required. SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK Page: 03100-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Provide new material equal in all respects to specified material. .2 Formwork lumber: plywood and wood formwork materials to CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. ' .3 Falsework Materials: to CSA S269.1-1975 .4 Form liner: .1 Plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA 0121-M1978, T & G square edge,20 mm thick. ' .2 Waferboard: to CAN3-0188.2-M78, 20 mm thick (where allowed by Architect) .5 Tubular column forms: round, spirally wound laminated fiber forms, internally treated ' with release material and lined if necessary. (spiral of form must not show in hardened concrete). .6 Form release agent: non-staining chemically active release agents containing compounds that react with free lime present in concrete to provide water insoluble soaps, preventing concrete from sticking to forms. .7 Form stripping agent: colourless non-staining mineral oil, free of kerosene. Plywood with factory coating of synthetic resin may be used. ' .8 Form ties: removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length as required, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm dia in concrete surface. Ties to have breakback ends for removing the tie end for a minimum of 25 mm from the concrete ' surface after form removal. PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.1 ERECTION , .1 Verify lines, levels and columns centres before proceeding with formwork and ensure dimensions agree with drawings. .2 Construct forms to produce finished concrete confirming to shape, dimensions, locations , and levels indicated within tolerances required by CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. .3 Line forms for following surfaces with material only as approved by the Consultant: e .1 Exposed faces of concrete. .4 Obtain Consultant's approval: ' .1 For use of earth forms. .2 Before forming openings not indicated in concrete walls, slabs, beams or columns. .5 Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earth forms before placing concrete. SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK Page: 03100-3 .6 Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum. Locate horizontal form joints for exposed columns 2400 mm minimum above finished floor elevation. .7 Forrn chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated. .8 Clean formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 before placing concrete. .9 Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of time after placing concrete. .1 7 days for beam soffits, slabs, decks and other structural members, with shoring replaced immediately with adequate re-shoring to standard specified for shoring. I, .2 7 days for columns. .3 3 days for footings. .10 Re-use of formwork is subject to requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. .11 Install anchors or other cast-in materials supplied by or required by others. 3.2 INSPECTION & TESTING .1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an independent Inspection and Testing company approved by the Consultant and Architect. Testing company shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. .2 Inspection and Testing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 Inspections shall cover the following: .1 General inspection of work required by other trades. .2 Written reports covering materials, workmanship and progress of work. .4 The Inspection Company is responsible only for sampling, testing and reporting as described elsewhere in this Section and shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct the Contractor. The Inspection Company shall advise the Contractor's Superintendent and the Consultant by telephone and subsequent report. .5 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Representatives of the Inspection and Testing Company and shall advise the Testing Company a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of each erection sequence. 3.3 ANCHORS FOR EXTERIOR HANDRAILS .1 Take delivery of stubs or inserts for handrails and install in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings. 3.4 CLEAN UP .1 Upon satisfactory completion of the work, clear away from the building and site all excess or waste materials and debris and leave the premises in a condition acceptable to the Architect, within the contract time. END OF SECTION 51 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK Page: 03200-1 ' SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PROJECT 94027-24 i PART 1 GENERAL !' 1.1 GENERAL .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 02500 - Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks .2 03100 - Concrete formwork. ,.' .3 03300 - Cast-in-place concrete. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS ' 1 Do reinforcing work in accordance with the latest revised editions of CAN/CSA- A23.1-M90, ACI-315-1980 and the RISO Manual of Standard Practice, except where specified otherwise. .2 Conform to the following CSA Standards ' .1 G30.5-M1983, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 G30.12-M1977, Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .3 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.1-M90, Concrete Materials and Methods of Construction/ Methods of Test For Concrete ' .4 CAN3-A23.3-M84, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings .5 A283-1980 & A283S1-1987, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories ar' .6 Do welding of reinforcing with the latest revised edition of CSA W186-M1981, except where specified otherwise. 1.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 Upon request, provide Consultant with certified copy of mill test report of i� reinforcing steel supplied, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 5 weeks prior to commencing reinforcing work. .2 Upon Request, inform Consultant of source of material to be supplied. } 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings-Product Data-Samples. SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCMENT Page: 03200-2 ' .2 Provide copies for review by the Architect and Engineer with sufficient lead time to ' allow minimum 10 days for the review process. Prior to submission to the Architect and Engineer, copies shall be checked in detail by the Contractor and shall bear the ' checker's initials. .3 Indicate bar sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement, mesh, , mechanical splices, chairs, spacers and hangers with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. Do drawings in accordance with Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice - by Reinforcing ' Steel Institute of Ontario. .4 Detail placement of reinforcing where special conditions occur. .5 Design and detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CAN/CSA-A23.3-M90, , unless otherwise indicated. .6 Shop drawings kept at the site shall bear the review stamps and initials of all , parties. .7 Copies of structural drawings utilized as erection drawings is not permitted. ' 1.6 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT .1 Reinforcing steel will be measured in tonnes of steel incorporated into work, ' computed from theoretical unit mass specified in applicable CSA standard, for lengths and sizes of bars as indicated or authorized in writing by the Consultant. ' 1.7 SUBSTITUTES .1 Substitution of different size bars permitted only upon written approval of the ' Consultant. PART 2: PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS ' 1 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 400, plain deformed bars to CSA G30.12- M1977 unless indicated otherwise. .2 Reinforcing steel: weldable low alloy steel deformed bars to CSA G30.16-M1977. N .3 Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: To CSA G30.3-M1983. ' .4 Deformed steel wire for concrete reinforcement: to CSA G30.14.-M1983. .5 Welded steel wire fabric: to CSA G30.5-M1983. Provide in flat sheets only. .6 Chairs, Bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. .7 Mechanical splices: subject to the approval of the Consultant. 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90, and the ORSI Manual of Standard Practice. I' °1 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCMENT Page: 03200-3 .2 Obtain Consultant's approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than shown on steel placing drawings. .3 Fabricate steel bar or rod mats clipped together in accordance with CSA G30.5- M1983 using bars to CSA G30.12-M1977, grade 400. .4 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar list. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD BENDING .1 Do not field bend reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by the Consultant. ' .2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure. -' .3 Replace bars which develop cracks or splits. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT .1 Place reinforcement steel as indicated on review approved shop drawings and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. j, .2 Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardened concrete with one coat of lead or asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of mineral lubricating grease. .3 Notify the Testing Agency at least 24 hours in advance of placing concrete to allow time for checking of reinforcing placing. ], 3.3 INSPECTION & TESTING .1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an (t independent Inspection and Testing company approved by the Consultant and Architect. Testing company shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. .2 Inspection and Testing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 Inspections shall cover the following: .1 Field inspection of placing, including size, spacing and cover for reinforcing. .2 Written reports covering materials, workmanship and progress of work. .3 Welding of reinforcing where required. .4 The Inspection Company is responsible only for sampling, testing and reporting as described elsewhere in this Section and shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct the Contractor. In the event of deficiencies, the Inspection Company shall advise the Contractor's Superintendent and the Consultant by telephone and subsequent report. SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCMENT Page: 03200-4 , .5 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Representatives of the Inspection and Testing Company and shall advise the Testing Company a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of each placing sequence. , 3.4 CLEAN UP .1 Upon satisfactory completion of the work, clear away from the building and site all ' excess or waste materials and debris and leave the premises in a condition acceptable to the Consultant, within the contract time. ' END OF SECTION 1 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK Page: 03300-1 rt SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE PROJECT NO. 94027-24 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL ' .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 02200 - Earthwork 1 .2 02500 - Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks .3 03100 - Concrete formwork and falsework .4 03200 -Concrete reinforcing h� .5 03345 -'.Concrete floor finishes .6 05120 - Structural steel i■ .7 07900 - Sealants 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Do cast-in-place concrete work and testing in accordance with the latest revised editions of [he Ontario Building Code and CAN3-A23.1-M90 except where specified otherwise. .2 Conform to the Ontario Bulding Code. I� .3 Conform to CSA Standards: .1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.1-M90, Concrete Materials and Methods of Construction/ ' Methods of Test For Concrete .2 CAN3-A23.3-M84, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings .3 CAN3-A23.5-M86, Supplementary Cementing Materials .4 CAN/CSA-A5/A362-M88, Portland Cement/Blended Hydraulic Cement .5 CAN3-A266.1-M78, Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete .6 CAN3-A266.2-M78, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete .7 CAN3-A266.4-M78, Guidelines for the use of Admixtures in Concrete .8 CAN3-A266.6-M85, Superplasticizing Admixtures for Concrete .9 A266.5-M1981, Guidelines for the use of Superplasticizing Admixtures in Concrete .10 A283-1980 & A283S1-1987, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page: 03300-2 , .11 CAN/CSA-A363-M88, Cementitious Hydraulic Slag ' 1.4 SAMPLES ' .1 Submit samples in accordance with General Conditions. .2 At least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, inform Consultant of proposed source of ' aggregates and provide access for sampling. 1.5 CERTIFICATES ' .1 Provide certification that plant, equipment, and materials to be used in concrete comply with requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. , .2 Provide certification that mix proportions selected will produce concrete of specified quality and yield and that strength will comply with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. , 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Submit proposed quality control procedures for Consultant's approval. ' 1.7 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT .1 Cast-in-place concrete in sub-structure will be measured in cubic metres calculated from ' neat dimensions indicated or authorized in writing by Consultant. Concrete placed beyond dimensions indicated will not be measured. ' .2 No Deductions will be made for volume of concrete displaced by reinforcing steel or structural steel. .3 No deductions will be made for volume of concrete less than 0.15 sq. m in volume displaced by individual drainage openings. .4 Heating of water and aggregates and providing cold weather protection will be measured in cubic metres of concrete treated and incorporated in structure will not be measured but considered incidental to work. ' .5 Cooling of concrete and providing hot weather protection will be measured in cubic metres of concrete treated and incorporated in structure will not be measured but considered incidental to work. ' li .6 Supply and installation of anchor bolts and bolt grouting will not be measured but considered incidental to work. Supply of anchor bolt washers and nuts will not be ' measured but considered incidental work. .7 Supply and installation of waterstops will be measured in lineal metres installed. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' .1 Portland Cement: to CAN 3-A5-M88. , .2 Blended Hydraulic Cement: to CAN3-A362-M88. ' SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page: 03300-3 .3 Supplementary Cementing Materials: to CAN/CSA-A23.5-M86. ' .4 Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. .5 Aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90. Coarse aggregates to be normal density. l' .6 Air Entraining Admixture: to CAN3-A266.1-M78. ' .7 Chemical Admixtures: to CAN3-A266.2-M78. Engineer to approve accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing. .8 Shrinkage Compensating Grout: premixed compound M-Bed Standard by Sternson Limited or approved equal. .9 Curing Compound: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90, white Type 1-chlorinated rubber or Type I- D with fugitive dye. 10 Ribbed Waterstops: extruded PVC Arctic Grade of sizes indicated with shop welded corner and intersecting pieces with legs not less than 500 mm long: 1 Tensile Strength: to ASTM D412-83, Die "C" method, minimum 11.4 MPa. .2 Elongation: to ASTM D412-83, Die "C: method, minimum 275%. .3 Tear Resistance: to ASTM D624-86, Die "B" method, minimum 48 kN/m. .11 Labyrinth Waterstops: extruded PVC Arctic Grade of sizes indicated with prewelded corner and intersecting pieces with legs not less than 500 mm long: .1 Tensile Strength: tp ASTM D412-83, Die "C" method, minimum 8.3 MPa. .2 Elongation: to ASTM D41752-83, Die "C" method, minimum 250%. .3 Tear resistance: to ASTM D624-86, Die "B" method, minimum 30 kN/m. .12 Prernoulded Joint Fillers: 1 Bituminous Impregnated Fiber Board: to ASTM D1751-83. .2 Sponge Rubber: to ASTM D1752-84, Type I, firm grade. ' .3 Self-expanding Standard Cork: to ASTM D1752-84, Type II. .13 Weep Hole Tubes: purpose made galvanized steel or plastic. 1 .14 Dovetail Anchor Slots: minimum 0.6 mm thick galvanized steel with insulation filled slots. .15 Dampproof Membrane: 1 Kraft/Polyethylene Membrane Lamination: 0.10 mm polyethylene film asphalt bonded both sides to 2.44 kg/m asphalt treated kraft. .2 Reinforcement: 13 X 13 mm glass fibre cross directional scrim embedded in asphalt laminate. .3 Membrane Adhesive: as recommended by membrane manufacturer. .16 Dampproofing: .1 Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral Colloid Type, Unfilled: to CGSB 37-GP-2M and to Section 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing. .17 Polyethylene Film 0.15 mm: to CGSB 51-GP-51M. SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page: 03300-4 , 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES 1 Proportional Normal Concrete in Accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90, Alternative 1 ' to give Following Properties: for all concrete unless otherwise indicated on the drawing or in the specifications: .1 Cement: use Type 10 normal portland cement. , .2 Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 25 MPa. ' .3 Minimum Cement Content: 320 kg/cu.m of concrete. .4 Minimum water/cement ratio: 0.55 ' .5 Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregate: 20 mm. .6 Slump at Time and Point of Discharge: 75 mm. , .7 Air Content: 5 to 7% for exterior concrete only. , .8 Chemical Admixtures: in accordance with CAN3-A266.4-M78. .2 Do not change concrete without prior approval of the Consultant. Should change in ' material source be proposed, new mix design to be approved by the Consultant. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 WORKMANSHIP 1 Ob'.ain Consultant's approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 hours notice prior to plai:ing concrete. .2 Pumping of concrete will not be permitted is permitted only after approval of equipment , and mix. .3 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement. , .4 Prior to placing of concrete obtain Consultant's approval of proposed method for ' protection of concrete during placing and curing in adverse weather. 5 Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken. ' .6 In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete. Place steel dowels of deform steel reinforcing bars and pack solidly with non- , shrink grout to positively position and anchor dowels. .7 Do not load new concrete structures until authorized by the Consultant. 3.2 INSERTS ' .1 Set sleeves, ties, pipe hangers and other inserts and openings as indicated or specified ' elsewhere. Sleeves and openings greater than 100 X 100 mm not indicated on structural or civil drawings must be approved by the Consultant. �- SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page: 03300-5 .2 No sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings shall pass through joists, beams, column capitals or columns, except where expressly detailed on structural drawings or approved by the Consultant. .3 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of all modifications from the Consultant before placing of concrete. ' .4 Check locations and sizes of sleeves and openings shown on structural and civil drawings with architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings. .5 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicated and as required by Non-Destructive Method of Testing Concrete. .6 Anchor Bolts: .1 Set anchor bolts to templates under supervision of appropriate trade prior to placing concrete. .2 With Consultant's approval, grout anchor bolts in preformed holes or holes drilled after concrete has set. Formed holes to be at least 100 mm in diameter. Drilled holes to be minimum 25 mm larger in diameter than bolts used. ' .3 Protect anchor bolt holes from water accumulations. .4 Set bolts and fill holes with non-shrink grout. .5 Locate anchor bolts used in connection with expansion shoes, rollers and rockers with due regard to temperature at time of erection. .7 Drainage Holes and Weep Holes: 1 Form weep holes and drainage holes in accordance with Section 03100 - Concrete formwork. If wood forms are used, remove them after concrete has set. .2 Install weep hole tubes and drains as indicated. E .8 Dovetail Anchor Slots: .1 Install continuous vertical anchor slots to forms where masonry abuts concrete wall or columns. .2 Install continuous vertical anchor slots at 800 mm oc where concrete walls are masonry faced. 3.3 PLACING GROUT 1 Grout under base plates and machinery using procedures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations which result in 100% contact over grouted area. 3.4 FINISHING r .1 Finish concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 and Section 03345, Concrete M Finishing. Y , SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page: 03300-61 .2 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radiused edges unless otherwise detailed. 3.5 WATERSTOPS .1 Install waterstops to provide continuous water seal. Do not distort or pierce waterstop in such a way as to hamper performance. Do not displace reinforcement when installing waterstops. Use equipment to manufacturer's requirements to field splice waterstops. Tie waterstops rigidly in place. ' .2 Use only straight heat sealed butt joints in field. Field weld corners and intersections. 3.6 JOINT FILLERS ' .1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depth and width required for joint, unless otherwise authorized by Engineer. When more than one piece is required for a joint, , fasten abutted ends and hold securely too shape by stapling or other positive fastening. .2 Locate and form isolation/expansion joints where indicated. Install joint filler. .3 Use 12 mm thick filler to separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces and extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 12 mm of finished slab surface unless indicated otherwise. , 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will be carried out by a , Testing Laboratory approved by the Consultant in accordance with CAN/CSA- A23.1/A23.2-M90 and A283/A283S1. ' .2 Inspection and Testing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 The Consultant will require additional test cylinders during cold weather concreting. Cure cylinders on job site under same conditions as concrete which they represent. .4 Non-destructive Methods for Testing Concrete shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA- A23.2-M90. .5 Inspection or testing by Consultant will not augment or replace Contractor quality control nor relieve him of his contractual responsibility. 3.8 CLEAN UP .1 Upon satisfactory completion of the work, clear away from the building and site all excess or waste materials and debris and leave the premises in a condition acceptable to the Architect, within the contract time. ' END OF SECTION 11 ' SECTION 3 - CONCRETE PROJECT NO. 94027-24 ' SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHING---------------------Page_03345-1 ---------------------------------- ------------ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1. 2 QUALIFICATIONS f . 1 Execute the Work of this Section only by a subcontractor who has adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to the specified, during a period of at least the immediate past five years. 1. 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS . 1 Reference standards quoted in this Section refer to: �( ASTM C309-74 , Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane- Forming compounds for Curing Concrete. CAN3-A23 . 1-M90, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. CAN2-19.24-M80, Sealing Compound, Multicomponent, Chemical Curing. 1.4 COOPERATION . 1 Ensure that concrete supplied for slabs contains no admixtures which would be incompatible with floor hardener materials or other applied finishes. 1. 5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . 1 Perform Work only when environmental conditions are as specified in Section 03300. .2 Ensure that adequate temporary heating is provided as required for cold weather Work. . 3 Make use of adequate moisture, sun shades and wind barriers to prevent rapid drying of concrete during warm weather. 1.6 PROTECTION . 1 Ensure that finished concrete floor areas are protected from abrasion from foot or wheeled traffic, and from damage caused by spillage of oil or other harmful materials. r SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHING Page: 03345-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Unless specified otherwise, materials shall meet specified requirements of Section 03300. . 2 Concrete Sealing Agent - Protex LR151, as manufactured by Construction Chemicals Ltd. for Concrete Slabs where . indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 EXAMINATION . 1 Before commencing Work, ensure that surfaces are acceptable to receive and maintain concrete finishing, and that specified installation will be achieved. 3.2 INSTALLATION . 1 The top or final surface of all horizontal concrete shall be finished by one, or more, of the following operations of screeding or floating. . 2 Screeding consists of moving a straight edge or template with a sawing motion along approximate with a 25 mm diameter pipe screeds. The screeds shall be accurately established on rigid supports at the specified elevation by transit level. Screeding shall be done immediately after consolidation of the concrete to give the surface its approximate shape and elevation. Floors which are to have a finishing surface bonded to the base slab shall be subsequently roughened by raking or wire brooming before the concrete has fully hardened. . 3 Floating consists of accurately finishing the concrete surface with a wood float to the elevation or profile shown. Floating shall follow screeding but shall not be started until some stiffening has taken place in the concrete surface. .4 Steel trowel finish consists of trowelling surfaces with a steel hand trowel or power trowel to produce a smooth dense surface. . 5 Where floor drains occur, floors to be level around walls and have a minimum 6 mm per 900 mm uniform pitch to drains, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. tSECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHING Page:03345-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. 3 APPLICATION . 1 All concrete floors left exposed shall be given one coat of concrete floor sealer. Sealer shall be diluted with 1 qt. of water, for each gallon of sealer. .2 As late as possible, prior to turning the building over to the Owner, clean down concrete to remove surface discolourations, effloresce and the like. Use a suitable cleaning agent which will not itself stain the surface or mar the texture through chemical reaction. 3 All concrete areas to be wet cured for a minimum period of i 3 days. 3 .4 PATCHING AND REFINISHING . 1 Before completion of project, patch and refinish defective surfaces to match surrounding areas with no discernable variation in appearance. 3 .5 CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE r? . 1 All exposed areas where formwork has been removed shall be treated as follows: €' . 1 Top of curbs and sidewalks Wood Float . 2 Balance of all exposed areas Wood Float i .2 Where sealer is used Steel Trowel 3 . 6 SAND-BLASTING . 1 Finish surface as required for smooth rubbed finish and k, arrange for review by the Consultant before sand-blasting. I 2 After concrete is at least 21 days old and thoroughly cured, sand-blast using a hard sharp sand until course aggregate is in uniform relief and a medium texture is achieved. i` END OF SECTION Ik' I DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 03410 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS ----------------Page_03410_1- I --------------------------------------- ---- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Handrails and Railings Section 05520 1. 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 The precast concrete stairs shall be designed and fabricated by a fully experienced and recognized manufacturer of precast concrete stairs whose manufacturing plant and facilities are equipped for this type of work. . 2 Conform to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and Municipal By-Laws and Regulations. . 3 Conform to the requirements of the following Standards: ' CAN3-A5-M90 Portland Cement CAN3-A23-1M90 Methods of Test for Concrete CAN3-A23-4M90 Precast Concrete Materials and Construction CSA-W186-M1989 Welding of Reinforcing Bars and Reinforced Concrete Construction. 1. 3 INSPECTION AND TESTING . 1 Do all inspection and testing as directed by the Consultant. Pay for all inspection and testing from Cash Allowance Section 01020. 1.4 STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING and PROTECTION . 1 Design lifting devices for the stair units to ensure that they will be safely and efficiently handled and not produce distortion, cracking or deflection nor strain or adversely �. affect the units. .2 Support precast stair units uniformly while curing. Keep a daily check to discover and development of warpage or other distortion. Rearrange supports as required to compensate for warpage or distortion, if required. 3 Precast stair units shall be handled and adequately protected during fabrication, curing, storage and transport by methods, that will prevent damage, warping, cracking, breakage, t; �+ chipping, staining or other disfigurement. Units shall not be permitted to contact the earth or be stored so as to be exposed to splashing of earth, mud, and the like. .4 Allow for storage and protection of fabricated stair units in the plant at no extra cost to Owner, until units are required at the job site to meet construction schedule. SECTION 03410 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS Page: 03410-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1.4 STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING and PROTECTION (cont'd. ) . 5 Precast stair units shall be delivered to the site clearly marked in an acceptable manner as indicated on the Shop Drawings, showing final position on the Building. The sequence of delivery to the site shall conform to an erection schedule. The timing of the delivery shall be scheduled to suit the storage space available and the handling and erection operations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS . 1 Prepare and submit fully detailed Shop and Erection Drawings in accordance with Section 01340, containing all pertinent information in regard to the fabrication and erection of the precast concrete stairs including: . 1 Location of each unit in the completed structure and identifying marks for each unit. . 2 Size and dimensions of each stair with complete details of connections. . 3 Reinforcing details, grade of reinforcement, concrete strength and admixtures. . 4 Locations and details for lifting hooks and handling points. . 5 Sequence of erection and any special instructions that may be required in handling, setting and temporary bracing. . 5 Shop Drawings shall bear seal and signature of an engineer registered to practice in the place of the Work, employed by the precast sub-contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Cement: Grey Portland, Type 10, Conforming to CAN3-A5-M90. .2 Aggregates: Conforming to requirements of CAN3-A23 . 1-M90. . 3 Reinforcements: Conforming to requirements of CAN3 .A23 . 1-M90, galvanized if less than 25 mm cover. ■■ .4 Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Conform to CSA-G30.5. II SECTION 03410 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS Page:03410-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 5 Formwork Material: Conform to CAN3-A23 . 4 . . 6 Tolerances: Conform to CAN3-A23 .4. 2.2 TESTING 1 Provide certificates of Testing for the period of manufacture. Testing shall be performed by a Professional Testing Company based on standard procedures set out in A.C. I. Codes. 2 .3 FABRICATION . 1 Make thorough examination of Drawings and details, check interfacing with work of other Sub-Contractors and other factors influencing the design and performance of the work and be fully cognizant of requirements. 2 Design connections and anchorage to transfer forces to structure and in conformity with structural and architectural constraints. . 3 Design connections to provide means of compensating for deviations of the building structure. . 4 Fabricate precast concrete stairs to the requirements specified in CAN3-A23 . 4 and to riserand tread and dimensions for the various stairs as called for on the Drawings. . 5 All forms shall be steel, accurately constructed, well braced and stiffened to avoid deformations under pressure of wet concrete and vibrators. All surfaces shall have smooth finish without pin holes, form marks or rough edges. The quality of forms shall be such that all dimensional tolerances and exposed concrete quality can be consistently maintained. The steel forms shall be manufactured to produce raised non-slip continuous parallel ridges near the tread nosing. Nosing to be rounded and junction of tread and riser coved. . 6 Accurately set reinforcing steel and weld at intersections. Weld lifting hooks, and inserts to reinforcement. Vibrate {gip continuously during casting of concrete. . 7 Bearing areas shall be reinforced against diagonal tension, splitting, rupture and flexure. Extra ties, stirrups and reinforcing bars shall be placed at support points. SECTION 03410 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS Page: 03410-4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 . 1 FABRICATION (cont'd. ) . 8 Cast in lifting devices required for erection of the precast concrete stair units. Ensure that lifting devices used externally or cast into units are capable of supporting the precast units in all positions that the units may be in during course of manufacture, transportation and installation. Ultimate capacity of lifting devices shall be sufficient to resist forces obtained by applying load factor of 2 . 5 to weight of precast concrete work. . 9 Cast in all welded plates and threaded inserts for all stair handrails. Cast in all carborumdum non-slip treads and nosing. . 10 Apply coat of sealer to finished stair units to assist in easy clean-up of stairs at completion of project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .2 ERECTION . 1 Erection at: the site of the precast stairs units shall be by the concrete Sub-Contractor. END OF SECTION r DIVISION 4 - MASONRY PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY 1 -------------------------- Page_04200_ ----- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 .2 Brick Work Section 04210 3 Structural Steel Section 05120 4 Supply only Steel Lintels Section 05500 .5 Air Barrier System Section 07196 .6 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 1.2 SUPERVISION 1 Work of this Section shall be executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent foreman for each class of work. .2 One thoroughly experienced, reliable and competent man shall be in charge of mortar mixing. 1. 3 SUBMITTALS . 1 Consult the approved Shop Drawings to determine the exact location of items to be built into masonry. . 2 Submit for approval clearly labelled samples of masonry materials to be used in the work. Submit for approval of alternative! materials if requested by the Consultant. 1. 4 DEFECTS DEFINED . 1 In addition to non-compliance with specified requirements or other contract requirements, the following will be considered defects: . 1 Shrinkage in individual units as erected. . 2 Spalling. . 3 Poor colour or texture blending of units. . 4 Surface deterioration dusting. . 5 Discolouration, crumbling and similar deterioration of �. mortar. . 6 Failure of built in items to remain anchored. .7 Excessive cracking of mortar joints on block faces. SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-2 t ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 1.5 STORAGE OF MATERIALS . 1 Store cementitious material in accordance with CAN3 .A5. Store aggregates in accordance with CAN A.23 . Stack masonry units to avoid chipping. Manufacturers seals and labels shall be intact. Refer to cold weather protection Article 3 . 12 for requirements of preheating masonry materials prior to building in. 1. 6 FIRE SAFETY FEATURES . 1 Masonry units used in partitions designed to provide fire separation shall be of material specified and in the case of hollow units shall have the percentage of solid material necessary to provide the rating called for and/or required by authorities having jurisdiction. . 2 Concrete block and similar hollow units shall be identified as to percentage of solid material and tested for fire separation value in each thickness. Delivery slips shall state tested status of the units and the skids shall be marked to facilitate identification of the units at Site. 1.7 PROTECTION . 1 Cover top of completed and partially completed masonry walls at the end of each working day not protected by permanent work. Use waterproof coverings draped 600 mm down each side of wall and securely anchored. 1.8 INSPECTION AND TESTING . 1 In addition to other requirements of this Section, Load Bearing walls shall conform to Clause 5 of CSA Standard CAN3-5309-M84, Design of Plain and Reinforced Masonry Based on Engineering Analysis. .2 Testing shall be performed in accordance to CAN3-S304-M84 Clause 3 . 4 . 3 , Field Control Test for Method B. . 3 At least three masonry units and six mortar cubes shall be tested for each 5400 sq.ft. of wall or portion thereof, for each type and for each storey. .4 Payment for Masonry Inspection and Testing will be made under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-3 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Masonry Cement - CAN 3-A8-M77, Type H. 2 Portland Cement - CAN 3-A5-M77, Normal (Symbol 10) type. 3 Hydrated Lime - CSA A82 .43 . .4 Sand (aggregate) CSA A82 .56 - M1976. .5 Concrete Block . 1 To CAN/CSA A165-M Series M85 . 2 Type H/15/A/M normal weight block. .3 Type S/15/A/M 75% solid block to be used behind all recesses in fire rated walls. .4 Size metric. . 5 Special Shapes - Supply corner block, "L" shape block, bullnose block, header block, lintel block and the like as specified, and as required. Stack bond where indicated. Bullnose block to be installed at all sides of window and door openings, top of partition walls, unless otherwise noted. Note: Notwithstanding the visual inspection requirements of CSA Standard A165, masonry units for paint or special paint finish shall be free of surface indentations,surface cracks or chipping. . 6 Architectural Block: Split Face, Ledger Block, Smooth Face, as distributed by TCG Materials Ltd. , or approved alternate. Allow for special shapes and sizes. Refer to Legend on Drawings for locations of various types. . 6 Masonry Reinforcement (Truss or Ladder Type) : .1 This Specification is based on products manufactured by Blok-Lok Limited. Products by Dur-O-Wal Ltd. are approved alternative. .2 Finish - Brite Basic in interior walls and partitions.Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication for exterior walls. . 3 Type - Blok-Lok for general purpose, Tri-Rod ladder type for exterior walls with face brick veneer. Drips on cross rods are not permitted. i i SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 6 Masonry Reinforcement (Truss or Ladder Type) : (cont'd. ) .4 Size - Wall thickness less 50 mnm, . . 5 Weight - Standard 9 ga. rods. Welded for internal partitions only. 4.5 mm thick side and cross rods for exterior walls, foundation walls and all cavity walls. . 6 Construction - Provide factory welded tee and corner sections and provide sufficient lap length for continuity of reinforcing. .7 Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to CSA G-30-12-M1977, Grade 60, 000 psi. .8 Control Joints:P.V.C.control joint,Blok-Tite by Blok-Lok Ltd. . 9 Cavity Wall Insulation: Refer to Section 07196. 2 .2 MORTAR . 1 Use same manufacturer's product for the entire project to ensure uniformity of mix and colouration. .2 Mortar Type shall conform to CSA A179-1976,Table 2 : Type "N" for non load bearing partitions. Type "S" for structural, load bearing walls. Type "M" for wall below grade and under bearing plates and lintels. . 3 Mix mortar ingredients thoroughly in quantities needed for immediate use. .4 Mix mortar in mechanical mixer (except for small quantities where hand mixing is permitted) until materials are homogeneously blended - not less than five minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Keep mixer clean. . 5 Use mortar within 2-1/2 hrs. of mixing when temperature is 25 degrees C.or higher and within 3-1/2 hrs. when temperatures are below 25 degrees C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP . 1 Employ properly qualified masons for laying up masonry units. SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. 1 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP (cont'd. ) !, 2 Distribute exposed masonry units of varying colours, tones and textures evenly over wall surface to avoid patches and streaks and to produce a pleasing appearance. . 3 Leaving courses uneven or with visibly thicker mortar joints will not be acceptable. Any such work must be removed and rebuilt to approval of Consultant. .4 Construct masonry evenly in maximum lifts of 1500 mm. Shallow concave joint back ends of unfinished walls, flush joint cavity side, do not tooth and bond new masonry. .5 Chases must be built - not cut. . 6 Install masonry anchors for hollow metal door frames by building in masonry anchors and fill voids with mortar. Refer to Section 08100 for number of masonry anchors per jamb. Keep frames free of mortar stains. .7 Chipped or blemished units may be used where concealed. Defective and broken units must be removed. . 8 Build masonry with accurately plumbed faces, truly horizontal . � bed joints and accurately aligned vertical joints. . 9 Notwithstanding current trade practices in this regard, fill all vertical collar and bed joints through the entire wall thickness solidly with mortar. . 10 Cut masonry neatly with a carborundum saw where it comes in contact with the structure and where else required and build tightly against the structure except where expansion control 't and deflection joints are required. Build masonry up and j' neatly fit to all openings, and all anchors for frames for such openings shall be built securely into joints. . 11 Do all cutting, fitting and patching in masonry work to receive work of other trades. Install items supplied by other Trades to be built into masonry walls, plumb, level, rigid and secure. Build in all miscellaneous metal work, loose lintels, bearing plates, sleeves, anchor bolts, wood nailer and all other items which require building in to the masonry. 12 All exposed interior outside corners including sills and jambs shall be formed using bullnose corner block. Where appropriate units are not available, grind corners to match bullnose available. . 13 Grout in voids in metal deck at top of masonry load bearing walls. i � d SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP (cont'd. ) . 14 Layout of control joints to be provided prior to commencement of Work. 3 . 2 LINTELS . 1 Set loose lintels supplied under Division 5 for bridging openings in masonry. Keep loose. Do not anchor to wall with mortar, etc. . 2 Install reinforcing steel for block lintels and fill with 20 MPa concrete. .3 Bridge openings not exceeding 450 mm in width with 6 mm mild steel plate lintels bearing 100 mm on each side of opening. Width of plate shall be wall thickness less 25 mm. 3 . 3 LATERAL SUPPORTS . 1 Where non load bearing unit masonry partitions meet structural elements at top of partitions, provide lateral supports as required by Ontario Building Code. In areas where ceilings are scheduled, use 150 mm lengths of steel angle located each side of partition at 1200 mm and staggered. .2 Where no ceilings are scheduled, use continuous length of steel angle on each side of partition. Use angle of sufficient size to accommodate anticipated deflection. Provide additional reinforcement where required due to Fire Rated walls. Refer to Structural Drawings and provide channels where noted in lieu of angles. 3 .4 DEFLECTION JOINTS . 1 Construct deflection joints between top of partition and structural slab as detailed. If not detailed proceed as follows: . 1 Ascertain amount of deflection to be provided for and terminate top of partition accordingly. .2 Fill joint between top of partition and structural slab using joint filler. 3 . 5 TOLERANCES . 1 Surface of masonry exposed to view, including surfaces scheduled to receive adhesively applied finishes (drywall, tile) shall be accurate, plumb and within a tolerance of 3 mm in any 6 m direction. Flush point surfaces to receive adhesively applied finishes. ` SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- f' 3 . 6 DAMPPROOF COURSE 1 Dampproof courses must be stepped with lapped and seamed edges where vertical and horizontal sections intersect. 3.7 CAVITY WALLS . 1 Co-operate with Air Barrier Trade to ensure that location of horizontal cavity wall reinforcing permits installation of cavity insulation without cutting (reinforcement to occur in joints of insulation board) . 2 Make provision for and clean out base of cavity on completion;- every third brick at base of cavity to be left out for cleaning and inspection. Do not insert bricks into opening until directed by the Consultant. . 3 Build in cavity wall ladder type reinforcing as herein before specified at 400 mm o.c. vertically. Provide 600 mm lengths of additional reinforcing to intermediate mortar joints at openings and as required by Ontario Building Code or By-Laws, and B-263 C. S.A.Standard for Masonry Connectors. . 4 The width of cavity wall reinforcing shall be fabricated to extend to within 25 mm of the exterior face of the outer wythe and 25 mm of the interior face of the inner wythe. Do not crimp reinforcement to form drips. 5 Reinforcement shall be placed at top of cavity wall flashings and at last mortar joint at top of walls in addition to the locations specified in Item 1 above. 3 .8 CAVITY WALI, FLASHING . 1 Flashing: F.V.C. by Lexsuco Ltd. , unless otherwise noted. Ensure compatibility with air barrier and insulation type. . 2 Edge of flashings to be cut flush with edge of brick. j � . 3 Prefinished aluminum through wall flashing to match exposed aluminum flashing where shown on Drawings. . 3 Cavity flashings, rivetted lapped joints sealed with caulking is acceptable. .4 Cavity wall flashings shall be extended vertically minimum 200 mm above base of cavity or above openings. Use adhesive sealant combatable with air barrier to achieve water tight connection or vertical membrane flashing and air barrier. i � SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page: 04200-8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .9 CONTROL JOINTS (Exterior and Interior Walls) . 1 Control joints shall be located at maximum spacings of 6 m centres and be located at the intersection of masonry walls and spaced at equal distant intervals and as shown on Drawings. At exterior cavity walls, stagger the location of control joints between inner and outer wythes a minimum of 200 mm horizontally unless shown otherwise. Locate one control joint within 400 mm to 600 mm of external or interior wall corners. 3.10 BLOCKWORK . 1 Lay concrete block in running bond, with thicker end of face shell upward. Coursing to be modular 200 mm for one block and one joint. . 2 Concrete masonry units to have face shells and their end joints fully filled with mortar, and joints squeezed tight. Also fill webs at cores, to be reinforced and grouted, and strike flush at core taking care to prevent mortar from falling into core. . 3 Tie intersecting non-bearing walls together with masonry reinforcing every second course. . 4 Do not tie intersecting bearing walls together in masonry bond, except at corners. . 5 Masonry block to receive thinset ceramic tile installation to be laid plumb with maximum variation of 3 mm in 1500 mm with joints finished flush. . 6 Where resilient base is indicated, tool the joints to within 100 mm of the floor. Cut joints flush behind the base. .7 Attention is called to the fact that all exposed interior masonry is only painted in certain areas and must be laid and pointed with extreme care. Distribute exposed masonry (unpainted) of varying colours, tones and textures evenly over wall surface to avoid patches and streaks and to produce a homogeneous blend. Avoid using units that are too contracting in appearance for satisfactory blending. 3 .11 PARGING AND DAMPPROOFING . 1 Provide weep holes at 600 mm o.c. in exterior masonry to drain insulated cavity at top of foundation wall below grade, typical for all foundation walls, including existing walls. . 2 Parge all exposed unit masonry foundation walls typical for all foundation walls, including existing walls. SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY Page:04200-9 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 3 . 11 PARGING AND DAMPPROOFING (cont'd. ) 3 Provide heavy coat of dampproofing to all exterior masonry below grade. 3. 12 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION . 1 Refer to the Ontario Masonry Contractor's Associations provision and publications. Include for tarped heated enclosures, heated mortar mixing pans - no non-freeze additives such as calcium will be tolerated on this project. END OF SECTION f , a � 1 ! � DIVISION 4 - MASONRY PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 04205 - GLASS BLOCK 4205-1 ---------------------------------- PART I - GENERAL r1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 1.2 SUPERVISION 1 Work of this Section shall be executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent foreman. 2 One thoroughly experienced, reliable and competent man shall be in charge of mixing mortar. 1. 3 SUBMITTALS . 1 Consult the approved shop drawings to determine the exact location and heights for this Section of the Work. .2 Submit for approval clearly labeled samples in conformance with Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Glass Block: Refer to Legend on Drawings for Type and Dimensions. .2 Mortar: Conforming to CSA A179-1976, Table 2 . .3 Expansion Strips: Fibreglas compressible 10. 5 x 50 x 600 mm as furnished by glass block supplier. .4 Panel Reinforcing: Galvanized 4 .5 mm dia. steel wire installed rin double row at each course. .5 Panel Anchors: Galvanized (after perforating) 20 gauge perforated steel strips 600 mm long x 25 mm wide as furnished by glass block supplier. 6 Asphalt Emulsion: to be furnished by glass block supplier. .7 Oakum: to be furnished by glass block supplier. .8 Portland Cement: Normal CAN3-A5-M77 Type 10. .9 Lime: ASTM C-207, Type S. . 10 Sand: ASTM C-144 for thin joints. . 11 Caulking: Non-staining waterproof mastic 1 component silicone. SECTION 04205 - GLASS BLOCK Page: 04205-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Conform to ANSI A41. 1-1953 (R1970) . .2 Embed reinforcing in horizontal mortar joints on approximately 600 mm centres and in joints above and below all openings, within panel. Reinforcing shall run continuously from end to end of panels and shall not overlap less than 150 mm where more than one length is used. .3 Paint all surfaces upon which glass block is to be laid with asphalt emulsion or asphalt paint before spreading first mortar bed. Allow emulsion or paint to dry before spreading mortar. .4 when asphalt is dry, place full mortar bed joint, do not forrow. . 5 Set lower course. All mortar joints shall be full and not furrowed. . 6 Joints shall be minimum 6 mm or 9 mm maximum. All joints shall be completely and evenly filled with mortar. Lay blocks plumb and true and all joints to be uniform and accurately spaced. Point and tool concave to a smooth surface after mortar has reached its initial set. Mortar to be coloured to later selection. . 7 Do not strike units with a metal tool while lasying, but lay by a method known as "shoving" (working into place with the hands) , thereby compressing vertical joints. .8 Take care not to lay a greater number of courses than the joints will support without sagging. .9 Provide open space for expansion. Space to be sealed under Section 07900. . 10 After initial set of mortar joints, tool exposed edges of joints with a rounded jointer so that they are thoroughly compressed. Finish surface of joints to be slightly concave, smooth and nonporous. . 11 Clean and polish units conforming to Section 01710. END OF SECTION DIVISION 4 - MASONRY PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY------------------------- Page_04210-1 ----------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 . 2 Aluminum Windows and Window Wall Section 08520 1.2 SUPERVISION . 1 Work of this Section shall be executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent foreman. 1. 3 SUBMITTALS and MOCK UP M . 1 Submit for approval clearly labelled samples of materials to be used. 2 Install mock-up of total exterior wall construction, including face brick, ties, concrete block, air barrier system and insulation, and window assembly. Include for jointing, pointing and bonding. . 3 Approved mock-up shall establish standard for acceptance or rejection of actual work, and shall be approved by the Consultant prior to commencement of Work of this Section. 1. 4 PROTECTION . 1 Provide protective boards to exposed external corners and other vulnerable surfaces which may be damaged by construction activities. Maintain such protection for the duration of the construction and reinstall after masonry cleaning operations. Remove and dispose of protective material when directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .1 MATERIALS . 1 Face Brick: Jumbo Size. Refer to Legend on Drawings for Types. y .2 Metal Anchors: 22 ga. hot-dipped galvanized Conforming to Ontario Building Code. . 3 Through Wall Flashing: P.V.C. by Lexsuco Ltd. .4 Brick Vents: Plastic as manufactured by Goodco Products Ltd. II � G: SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY Page: 04210-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .5 Brick Anchors and Ties: Dovetail 12 ga. x 25 mm wide crimpled galv. steel length as required to suit wall thickness and achieve 56 mm lap on exterior face brick. Anchor Slots - roll formed 18 ga. galvanized steel insulation filled. Conform to O.B.C. Standards. .6 Mortar: conforming to CSA A179M-1976-Table 2 . Mortar shall be premixed. . 7 Special Shapes as required including external corner soldier course bricks, colour and texture to provide exact match on all exposed faces to the face brick. . 8 Non-Shrink Mortar Grout as manufactured by Master Builders Ltd. or approved alternate. . 9 Parging: 12 mm Type N mortar for parging to interior of all exterior brick masonry walls. . 10 Cavity wall consisting of 69 mm insulation 25 mm air space for a total of 90 mm with a poured back-up concrete wall where shown - Dovetail Flex-O-Lok c/w Bar 9 ga. hot-dipped galvanized by Blok- Lok Ltd. , or Dur-A-Wall Ltd. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Exposed brickwork on the exterior of the building shall be as as specified under materials. . 2 Bond: Lay up exterior facebrick generally in running bond. Provide Soldier and stack bond special courses where noted on Drawings. Provide Soldier course return at outside corners. 45 deg. cut brick at these locations will not be acceptable. . 3 Mortar: For exterior face brick: Type "N" or premixed Type "S" . .4 Pointing: Exterior face brick - Tooled - Concave. .5 Tooling of joints shall consist of compressing mortar as the work proceeds with a non-staining (plastic or stainless steel) tool to produce a dense concave joint. . 6 Rake out all joints of sill 13 mm and fill with non-shrink mortar grout. SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY Page: 04210-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) .7 Completely fill joints with mortar. This is a mandatory requirement. If inspection reveals that this requirement has not been met the complete masonry panel, partition or wall wherein the omission occurs shall (if so instructed by the Consultant) be pulled down and rebuilt in accordance with this Specification at no additional cost to the Owner. .8 Through Wall Flashing: Supply and install through wall flashing in locations indicated. 9 Brick Vents: Install brick vents in all areas top and bottom as indicated on Drawings. 10 Reinforcing as specified under Section 04200, Article 7 "Masonry Reinforcing" and as specified herein shall be placed at first mortar joint above flashing and immediately below top of walls. 11 Provide vertical through wall control joints from slab to structure above in locations indicated or at 6 m O.C. maximum, in continuous walls having no intersections or vertical structural abutments. . 12 In exterior brick veneer, leave open vertical joints for filling and caulking; width 9 mm. . 13 Provide weep holes above all through wall flashings at max. 400 mm O.C. in vertical joints. 3 .2 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION . 1 Refer to the Ontario Masonry Contractor' s Associations provision and publications. Include for tarped heated enclosures, heated mortar mixing pans - no non-freeze additives such as calcium will be tolerated on this project. .2 The sand shall be fully protected with tarpaulins. .3 Do not use masonry units coated with snow or ice until such coating has been removed by heat. .4 In ambient temperatures below 5 deg.0 but not forecast to drop below minus 4 deg.0 in the 24 hours following laying, water and sand to be heated. Do not allow cement to come in contact with heated water until the water and sand have been mixed. Do not heat water and sand warmer than 71 deg.C. The mortar temperature shall be between 18 deg.C. and 40 deg.0 at time of laying. 5 When warm mortar is used, fresh masonry work shall be protected by tarpaulins overnight, or longer, if feasible. Secure tarpaulins to prevent entrance of drafts. SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY Page: 04210-4 f -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION (cont'd. ) . 6 Heated enclosures are necessary when ambient temperature is below minus 4 deg.C. Maintain temperature inside enclosure at 12 deg.0 minimum. (If units are used which have been standing in very low temperature, freezing of mortar next to the units is likely to occur with subsequent destruction of the highly important bond between mortar and units. ) Units shall be warmed in such cases, by allowing them to stand inside the heated enclosure until the temperature of the units reach a minimum of 5 deg.C, or other methods approved by the Consultant. Masonry shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 12 deg.0 for a period of three days after laying. Heating shall be reasonably uniform. .7 Do not wet masonry units used in cold weather, before laying. With high absorbtion block, sprinkling (not soaking) with warm water is acceptable immediately before laying. .8 Arrange enclosures to allow warm air circulation on both sides of wall or other structural component. Do not heat masonry on one side while freezing temperature prevail on the opposite side. 3 .3 PATCHING AND CLEANING . 1 At completion of work, holes and other defects in masonry joints shall be repaired, and masonry surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. .2 Holes in masonry joints shall be filled with mortar and suitably tooled. Cut out and repoint defective joints. . 3 Dry brush masonry surfaces at end of each days work and after final pointing. .4 Remove mortar smears and droppings from concrete block masonry surfaces after such smears and droppings have dried. When mortar joints are dry and hard, clean block masonry surfaces by rubbing down with abrasive blocks and stiff fibre brushes. . 5 Remove efflorescence from masonry by wet cleaning in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to Consultant's approval. END OF SECTION J DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-1 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda. thereto form an integral parr of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 03300 - Cast in place concrete. .2 04200 - Masonry. .3 05210 - Steel Joists .4 05310 - Metal Deck .5 09900 - Finish Painting. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1 Do structural steel work in accordance with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89 and CAN3-5136-M89 with CSA- S136.1-M86 except where specified otherwise. .2 Do welding in accordance with CSA-W59-M1989 and W59S1-1989, by companies certified by and welders qualified in accordance with CSA-W47.1-1983 and W47.1 S1-1 989, except where specified otherwise. .3 Conform to CSA Standard W178.1-1990, "Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations", and W178.2-1990, "Certification of Welding Inspectors". .4 Conform to the Ontario Building Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. .5 Conform to the Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) assembly numbers where noted on Architectural or Structural Drawings. 1.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .1 Prior to commencing of work, if required by the Consultant, submit certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties of steel used in this work. 1.5 DESIGN OF DETAILS AND CONNECTIONS .1 Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CAN3-516.1-M89 to resist forces, moments and shear indicated. .2 For non standard connections, submit sketches and design calculations stamped and signed by qualified Professional Engineer registered in Province of Ontario. .3 For standard connections, select details from CISC Handbook of Steel Construction to ensure structural adequacy. .4 Unless noted otherwise, beam connections shall be designed for minimum 50% of shear capacity of beam. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-2 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 .5 Unless detailed otherwise, all structural steel for roof areas, including joists, shall be designed for wind uplift in accordance with Ontario Building Code requirements. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 Shop Drawings Product Data-Samples .2 Erection diagrams shall be prepared using Metric Units and shall be to a minimum scale of 1:100 showing all beams, joists, columns, etc. .3 Provide shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts and welds. Indicate welds by welding symbols defined in CSA-W59-M. .4 Provide copies for review by the Architect and Engineer with sufficient lead time to allow minimum 10 days for the review process. Prior to submission to the Architect and Engineer, copies shall be checked in detail by the Contractor and shall bear the checker's initials. .5 Shop drawings kept at the site shall bear the review stamps and initials of all parties. .6 Shop drawings and calculations for moment connections shall be submitted for review bearing the seal and signature of the design engineer. .7 Copies of structural drawings utilized as erection drawings is not permitted. 1.7 LINTELS 1. Beams and lintels consisting of two or more sections shall be connected with separators. Use gas pipe for separators where the beam or lintel depth is 230 mm or less and channel sections where the depth exceeds 230 mm. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Structural Steel: to CANS-G40.21-M92 Grade 300W. (350W for HSS Sections) .2 Anchor Bolts: to CAN3-G40.21-M92, Grade 300W. .3 Bolts, Nuts and Washers: to ASTM-A325M-89 or ASTM-A307-89. .4 Welding Materials: to CSA-W48-M Series, latest editions .5 Shop Paint Primer: to CGSB 1-GP-40M or CISC/CPMA 1-73a. .6 Hot Dip Galvanizing: (if required) galvanize steel, where indicated, to CSA-G164-M1981, minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m). .7 Shear Siud Connector (if required): to CSA-W59-M1984. .8 Pool Area Paint Primer: Amercoat 68A Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer .9 Pool Area Finish Paint: Amercoat 385 Multi-Purpose Epoxy Paint. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-3 ' SECTION 05120: STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate structural steel, as indicated, in accordance with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89 and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. .2 Drawings show major components of the structural framing system. Work of this section also includes levelling plates, column caps, connector clips, separators, masonry anchors, ceiling extensions,stiffeners, bridging,truss connections, wall plates, brackets, and other parts required to complete the work although not sized or detailed. .3 Attach masonry anchors of an adjustable type to columns, beams and joists where these are adjacent to exterior and interior masonry walls. Anchors shall conform to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code. .4 Size loose angle lintels for minimum bearing of 150 mm on each end. When of 2 angles, set vertical legs back to back, weld or bolt together. When of 3 or more angles, fasten together with separators. .5 Do shop cutting and reinforcing to accommodate other trades. Punch or drill holes required for bolting wood lagging and fastening work of other trades. Examine Architectural details, Mechanical, Electrical and Structural Drawings to determine locations of such work and show on shop drawings. .6 Do field cutting and reinforcing at the expense of the sub-trade requiring the work. Drilling and tapping of holes after erection shall be done by the sub-contractor requiring the work. Locations and sizes of the work are subject to the approval of the Consultant. .7 Finish all connections for HSS members in canopy or other exposed areas as follows: 1 prepare all joints for welding in accordance with CWB standards; .2fully weld all joints; 3 grind smooth all welds to flat, concave or convex surfaces as required to match adjacent metal; 4 finish grind all welded surfaces with 400 grit paper prior to prime painting. .8 Provide drain holes in closed HSS Sections exposed to weather to prevent water storage within member. .9 For trusses in pool area, fully contour all truss members to ensure complete and accurate fit-up of to the profile of chord members to which they are connected. Fully weld all diagonal members to truss chords and grind smooth welds if required to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.2 CONNECTING TO EXISTING WORK .1 Verify dimensions of existing work before commencing fabrication and report any discrepancy to the Consultant and await instructions. 3.3 SHOP PAINTING DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-4# SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 .1 Clean prepare surfaces to SPCC-SP1 & SPCC-SP2 and shop prime structural steel in accordance with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89 except where members to be encased in concrete. .2 Joints which are to be field welded shall be left free of primer or other coatings. .3 Provide minimum 2 coats of specified primer to all structural steel at exterior conditions which are protected with masonry only without vapour barrier. .4 For all structural steel in the pool area, whether exposed to view or not (except steel encased in concrete), prepare, prime and paint in accordance with the coating manufacturers instructions and with Division 9. Check manufacturers requirements prior to tendering to confirm methods of application. (Ameron Canada Inc. (905)847- 1500). .5 Prepare pool area steel for painting in accordance with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast"d or pickle in accordance with SSPC-SP10 "Near White". Blast to achieve a 1 to 2 mil (25 to 50 micron) anchor profile as indicated by a Keane Tator Surface Profile Comparator or similar device. .6 Field touch up all damaged surfaces of pool area steel after erection in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. .7 For all structural steel in the Main Pool Room #145, and Filter Room No. 146, whether exposed to view or not (except steel encased in concrete or masonry), prepare, prime and paint with epoxy paint in accordance with the paint manufacture's instructions, OPCAIOntario Painting Contractors Association)Architectural Specification Manual,and with Section 09900 - PAINTING. Confirm manufacturer's and OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements for shop painting prior to tendering to confirm methods of application and include cost for shop painting inspections. .8 Touch up all damaged surfaces of shop painted steel in the field in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and to OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements. .9 Provide minimum of two (2) coats of specified primer to all structural steel at exterior condition which are protected with masonry only without a vapour barrier. 3.4 MARKING 1 Mark materials in accordance with CAN3-G40.20-M81 . Do not use die stamping. If steel is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection. .2 Match Marking: shop mark bearing assemblies and splices for fit and match. 3.5 RELATION TO OTHER TRADES .1 Provide all necessary materials, details and direction for setting anchor bolts, bearing plates, etc., and all other members required to be built in with the work of other trades. .2 Verify the location and condition of all bearing surfaces placed by others. Confirm levels and elevations as required by the drawings. Commencement of erection implies acceptance of the work of other trades which affect the work of this section. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-5 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 .3 Lintels shall be supplied by this section and placed by the General Contractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the correct size and quantity of lintels are provided. Lintels shall conform to the typical sizes and notes shown on the Structural and Architectural drawings. .4 Provide openings through and reinforcing of beams as required by the work of other trades. All openings and reinforcing shall be to the approval of the Structural Consultant. The cost for this work shall be by the trade requiring the openings. Reinforcing shall be as required to maintain the design strength. .5 Co-ordinate work with Mechanical and Electrical Contractors to ensure that no interference with ductwork, lighting fixtures, hangers, etc. will occur with beams, joists, etc. 3.6 ERECTION .1 Erect structural steel, as indicated and in accordance with CAN3-S16.1-M89 and in accordance with shop drawings. Provide a competent and experienced supervisor on site during all phases of the erection. .2 Obtain written permission of the Consultant prior to field cutting or altering structural members not shown on shop drawings. .3 Clean with mechanical brush and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets, welds and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection. .4 Provide and install all necessary temporary works including bracing required to keep the structure safe and plumb. .5 Continuously seal members by continuous intermittent welds where indicated. Grind sealants smooth. .6 Erection tolerances shall conform to CAN3-16.1-M89. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an independent Inspection and Testing company approved by the Consultant and Architect. Testing company shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. .2 Cost of Inspection and Testing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 Costs for testing required due to Contractor error or departure from the requirements of the Contract documents shall be paid for by the Contractor. .4 Inspections shall cover the following: 1 Shop inspection of fabrication. Finished work must be approved by the Inspection Company prior to shipping to the site. .2 Field inspection of erection including proper placing, plumb, levels, temporary bracing, DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05120-6 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PROJECT NO. 94027 ' 3 Field inspection of bolting and welded joints. .4 General inspection of work required by other trades. .5 Inspection of shop painting and field touch-up. .6 Written reports covering materials, workmanship and progress of work. .5 All welds shall be stamped with the operator's number or symbols and fabricators number assigned by the Canadian Welding Bureau under the requirements of CSA Standard W59. .5 The Inspection Company is responsible only for sampling, testing and reporting as described elsewhere in this Section and shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct the Contractor. The Inspection Company shall advise the Contractor's Superintendent and the Consultant by telephone and subsequent report. .6 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Representatives of the Inspection and Testing . Company and shall advise the Testing Company a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of each erection sequence. END OF SECTION DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05210-1 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PROJECT NO. 94027 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 04200 - Masonry .2 05120 - Structural Steel. .3 05310 - Steel deck 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1 Conform to CAN3-516.1-M89 and CAN3-S136-M89 with CSA-5136.1-M86 except where specified otherwise. .2 Do welding in accordance with CSA-W59-M 1989, by companies certified by and welders qualified in accordance with CSA-W47.1-1983 and W47.1S1-1989, except where specified otherwise. .3 Conform to CSA Standard W1 78.1-1990, "Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations",and W178.2-1990, "Certification of Welding Inspectors". .4 Conform to the Ontario Building Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. .5 Conform to the Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) assembly numbers where noted on Architectural or Structural Drawings. .5 Use qualified fabricators in accordance with CSA-W47.1-1983 and "CISC Steel Joist Facts". 1.4 DESIGN OF STEEL JOISTS AND BRIDGING .1 Design steel joists and bridging to carry loads indicated on drawings in accordance with CAN3- S16.1-M89. All design drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer responsible for the design. .2 Deflection of joists under live load shall not exceed 1/360 of the span where supporting ceilings, or 1/240 of the span otherwise. '. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 - Shop Drawings - Product Data- Samples. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Metric Units. .2 Each drawing submitted shall bear the signature and stamp of qualified Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. .3 Indicate joist locations, spacing, bridging lines, bearing and anchorage details, framed openings, accessories, schedule of materials, depth, camber and loadings. Provide shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts and welds. SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS Page: 05210-2 .4 Provide copies for review by the Architect and Engineer with sufficient lead time to allow minimum 10 days for the review process. Prior to submission to the Architect and Engineer, copies shall be checked in detail by the Contractor and shall bear the checker's initials. .5 Shop drawings kept at the site shall bear the review stamps and initials of all parties. .6 Copies of structural drawings utilized as erection drawings is not permitted. 1.8 SHOP PAINTING 1 For all structural steel in the Main Pool Room #145, and Filter Room No. 146, whether exposed to view or not (except steel encased in concrete or masonry), prepare, prime and paint with epoxy paint in accordance with the paint manufacture's instructions, OPCA(Ontario Painting Contractors Association) Architectural Specification Manual, and with Section 09900 - PAINTING.Confirm manufacturer'sand OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements for shop painting prior to tendering to confirm methods of application and include cost for shop painting inspections. .2 Touch up all damaged surfaces of shop painted steel in the field in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and to OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements. .3 Provide minimum of two (2) coats of specified primer to all structural steel at exterior condition which are protected with masonry only without a vapour barrier. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Structural Steel: to CAN3-G40.21-M92 Grade 300W. .2 Bolts, Nuts and Washers: to ASTM-A325M-89 or ASTM-A307-89. .3 Welding Materials: to CSA-W48-M Series, latest editions .4 Shop Paint Primer: to CGSB 1-GP-40M or CISC/CPMA 1-73a. .5 Hot Dip Galvanizing: (if required)galvanize steel, where indicated,to CSA-G 164-M 1981, minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m). 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate steel joists and accessories in accordace with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89. .2 Weld in accordance with CSA-W59-M1984 and CSA-w47.1-1983 ' .3 Provide top and bottom chord extensions where indicated or where required to accomodate support of ceilings. .4 If required, provide holes in flanges of top chords only weld threaded studs to top chords for attachment of wood nailers. .5 Where roof slopes are required to be accomodated using joists, provide variable shoe depths, shims, etc., as required to achieve level and sound bearings. This contractor shall provide all plates, shims, etc., required to maintain uniform slopes, and sound bearing and anchorage. 2.3 SHOP PAINT SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS Page: 05210-3 .1 Clean prepare surfaces to SPCC-SP1 & SPCC-SP2 and shop prime structural steel in accordance with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89 except where members to be encased in concrete. .2 Joints which are to be field welded shall be left free of primer or other coatings. .3 Provide minimum 2 coats of specified primer to all structural steel at exterior conditions which are protected with masonry only without vapour barrier. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 ERECTION .1 Erect steel joists and bridging as indicated in accordance with CAN3-S1 6.1-M89 and in accordance with shop drawings. .2 Obtain written permission from the Consultant prior to field cutting or altering joists or bridging. .3 Clean and touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, burned of scratched surfaces at completion of erection. 3.2 BRIDGING .1 All bridging and anchorage shall be as required by the drawings and CSA/CAN3-516.1-M89. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY (',ONTROL .1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an independent Inspection and Testing company approved by the Consultant and Architect. Testing company shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. .2 Cost for Inspection and Testing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 Costs for testing required due to Contractor error or departure from the requirements of the Contract documents shall be paid for by the Contractor. .4 Inspections shall cover the following: .1 Shop inspection of fabrication. Finished work must be approved by the Inspection Company prior to shipping to the site. .2 Field inspection of erection including proper placing, plumb, levels, temporary bracing, .3 Field inspection of welded joints. .4 General inspection of work required by other trades. .5 Inspection of shop painting and field touch-up. .6 Written reports covering materials, workmanship and progress of work. .5 All welds shall be stamped with the operator's number or symbols and fabricators number assigned by the Canadian Welding Bureau under the requirements of CSA Standard W59. .6 The Inspection Company is responsible only for sampling, testing and reporting as described elsewhere in this Section and shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct the SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS Page: 05210-4 Contractor. The Inspection Company shall advise the Contractor's Superintendent and the Consultant by telephone and subsequent report. .7 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Representatives of the Inspection and Testing Company and shall advise the Testing Company a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of each erection sequence. END OF SECTION 7 DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05310-1 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PROJECT NO. 94027 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 RELATED WORK 1 05120 - Structural Steel. .2 05210 - Steel Joists 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Do design, fabrication and erection in accordance with CAN3-S136-M84 and CSA 5136.1- M1 986. .2 Do steel deck work in accordance with Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute Standards2(CCSBI) for Steel Roof Deck, 10M-86 (rev.88) and Composite Steel Deck, 12M- 84 (rev.88) except where specified otherwise. 3 Do welding in accordance with CSA W59-M1984 except where specified otherwise. 1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA .1 Compute structural capacity of steel deck using limit states design. .2 Steel deck and connections to safely carry dead and live and diaphragm loads as indicated. .3 Deflection under specified live load to not exceed 1/240th of the span, except that when gypsum board ceilings are hung directly from deck, live load deflection not to exceed 1/360th of span. .4 The minimum uniform factored total load for steel roof deck shall be 1.2 kPa. 5 Where possible design deck to span continuously over 3 or more spans. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 - Shop Drawings-Product Data- ' Samples .2 Erection diagrams shall be prepared showing all gauges, sheet layout, supports, curbs, closures, etc. and position of sheets in relation to supports. .3 Indicate deck plan, profile, dimensions, base steel thickness, metallic coating designation, connections to supports and spacings, projections, openings, reinforcement details and accessories. .4 Indicate position of temporary shoring of floor deck if required. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05310-2 S SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PROJECT NO. 94027 .5 Provide copies for review by the Architect and Engineer with sufficient lead time to allow minimum 10 days for the review process. Prior to submission to the Architect and Engineer, copies shall be checked in detail by the Contractor and shall bear the checker's initials. .6 Shop drawings kept at the site shall bear the review stamps and initials of all parties. .7 Copies of structural drawings utilized as erection drawings is not permitted. .8 Each drawing submitted to bear the signature and stamp of a Professional Engineer Registered in the Province of Ontario, who is qualified to design and supervise the installation of, the metal deck. 1.8 SHOP PAINTING .1 For all structural steel in the Main Pool Room #145, and Filter Room No. 146, whether exposed to view or not (except steel encased in concrete or masonry), prepare, prime and paint with epoxy paint in accordance with the paint manufacture's instructions, OPCA (Ontario Painting Contractors Association) Architectural Specification Manual, and with Section 09900 - PAINTING. Confirm manufacturer's and OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements for shop painting prior to tendering to confirm methods of application and include cost for shop painting inspections. .2 Touch up all damaged surfaces of shop painted steel in the field in accordance with the ' manufacturer's instructions, and to OPCA Chapter 7 Warranty requirements. .3 Provide minimum of two (2) coats of specified primer to all structural steel at exterior condition which are protected with masonry only without a vapour barrier. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Zinc-iron Alloy (ZF) coated steel sheet: to CSSBI 101 M-84 structural quality Grade A, with ZF75 coating, for interior surfaces not exposed to weather, unpainted finish, 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness. .2 In Pool Area, Zinc (Z) coated steel sheet: to CSSBI 101 M-84 structural quality Grade A, with Z275 coating, regular spangle surface, not chemically treated for paint finish, exterior surfaces exposed to weather, 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness. .3 Cover plates, cell closures and (lashings: steel sheet with minimum base steel thickness of 0.76 mm. Metallic coating same as deck material. .4 Closures to external walls: Neoprene. .5 Primer for weld touch-up: zinc rich, ready mix to CGSB 1-GP-181 M or CGSB 1-GP-40M. .6 Caulking: to Section 07900. .7 Pool Area Paint Primer: Amercoat 68A Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer .8 Pool Area Finish Paint: Amercoat 385 Multi-Purpose Epoxy Paint. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05310-3 ' SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PROJECT NO. 94027 2.2 TYPES OF DECKING .1 Roof deck: .1 Single fluted element with minimum nominal base steel thickness of 0.76 mm and depth of 38 mm to Vic Westeel profile RD-938 or approved equal. See drawings for location and loading requirements. .2 Single fluted element with minimum nominal base steel thickness of 0.76 mm and depth of 75 mm to Vic Westeel profile RD-306 or approved equal. See drawings for location and loading requirements. .2 Floor deck: .1 Composite single fluted element with minimum nominal base steel thickness of 0.76. .3 Cellular deck for electrical raceway: to CSA C22.22 No. 79-1978. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION 1 Erect steel deck in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. As a minimum, weld deck to supports with 15 mm dia. fusion welds at maximum 300 mm c/c. .2 Butt ends: to 2.0 mm gap. Install steel cover plates over gaps wider than 3 mm. .3 Lap ends: to 75 mm minimum. .4 Fasten deck to supports at the bottom of alternate ribs with 20 mm dia. arc welds or mechanically fasted with self drilling self tapping screws. Side joints to be mechanically fastened at max. 900 mm c/c for roof deck. .5 Immediately after deck is permanently secured in place, touch up metallic coated top surface with primer where burned by welding or where screws penetrate deck. .6 General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor or Roofing Contractor to provide protection to metal deck to ensure that no damage can occur due to roofing or other operations. 3.2 CLOSURES .1 Where steel deck rests on exterior masonry walls, fill web with closures as recommended by the manufacturer. .2 Where flutes are at right angles to exterior walls, and deck extends beyond these walls, caulk interlocking side laps of deck for 400 mm immediatley over walls. Install interior and exterior closures. Caulk exterior closures to prevent air infiltration. Caulk interior closures to prevent water vapour exfiltration. In addition, provide roofer with sufficient quantity of glass fibre pads to close off the topside of flutes directly over face of wall or use closures as recommended by the manufacturer. .3 Where flutes run at right angles to interior partitions, fill web spaces with double run of steel closures or as recommended by the manufacturer. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05310-4 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PROJECT NO. 94027 .4 Where flutes are paralles to interior partitions, install steel closure flashings to provide neat juncture between two materials or as recommended by manufacturer. .5 Attach metal cell closures at locations required to contain poured concrete as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 OPENINGS AND AREAS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS .1 No reinforcement required for openings cut in deck which are smaller than 150 mm square. .2 Frame roof deck openings 150 mm to 450 mm as recommended by manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated. .3 Frame floor deck openings 150 mm to 300 mm as recommended by manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated. .4 For roof deck openings over 450 mm square, floor deck openings over 300 mm square and for areas of concentrated load, reinforce in accordance with structural framing details. 3.5 CONNECTIONS .1 Install connections in accordance with CSSBI Steel Roof Deck, 10M-86 and Composite Steel Deck, 12M-84 and in accordance with design requirements for diaphragm action. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an independent Inspection and Testing company approved by the Consultant and Architect. Testing company shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. .2 Costs of Ispection and Tesing under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. .3 Costs for testing required due to Contractor error or departure from the requirements of the Contract documents shall be paid for by the Contractor. .4 Inspections shall cover the following: .1 Field inspection of erection including proper placing, alignment, etc. .2 Field inspection of crimped and welded joints. .3 General inspection of work required by other trades. .4 Inspection of field touch-up. .5 Written reports covering materials, workmanship and progress of work. .5 The Inspection Company is responsible only for sampling, testing and reporting as described elsewhere in this Section and shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct the Contractor. The Inspection Company shall advise the Contractor's Superintendent and the Consultant by telephone and subsequent report. DIVISION 5 - METALS Page: 05310-5 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PROJECT NO. 94027 .6 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Representatives of the Inspection and Testing Company and shall advise the Testing Company a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of each erection sequence. END OF SECTION f 1 '1 DIVISION 5 - METALS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS-------------------- Page: 05500-1 ---------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Precast Concrete Stairs Section 03410 .2 Structural Steel Section 05120 i .3 Handrails and Railings Section 05520 .4 Carpentry and Millwork Section 06110 .5 Painting Section 09900 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS . 1 Submit Shop Drawings. Show and describe detail work of this Section including large scale details of members and materials,of connections,joining details,anchorage devices, dimensions,gauges,thicknesses,description of materials, metal finishing specifications,as well as all other pertinent data and information. 1. 3 FABRICATION . 1 Design, fabricate and erect structural steel members in accordance with CSA 5-16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Structural Steel - CSA G40-21. . 2 Welding Materials - CAN/CSA W59-1989,CSA W 55.2-57;for stainless steel, ASTM A371; for aluminum, ASTM B 285. .3 Sheet Steel - wiped coated, ASTM A 446; structural quality Grade A or B, maximum permissible working stress. Grade A 137,895 kPa; Grade B. 154,442 kPa. .4 Prime Paint - CGSB 1-GP-40. . 5 Bituminous Paint - CGSB-I-GP-108. . 6 Touch-up Paint - zinc rich, galvafroid by W. R. Meadows of Canada Ltd. or other approved manufacturer. SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page: 05500-2 -------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 WORKMANSHIP 1 Use only workmen skilled in the work of this Section. Do work to best standard practice and in accordance with laws, by-laws and regulations which govern. Conform to the requirements of the authorities. . 2 Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute work according to details and approved shop drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop. . 3 Welding: CAN/CSA W59 . 1989. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush, so as to be invisible after painting. .4 Make workmanship of best grade of modern shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Fit joints and intersecting members , accurately. Make work in true plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate to sizes and shapes detailed, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. .5 Insulate metals where necessary to prevent corrosion due to contact between dissimilar metals and between metals and masonry, concrete or plaster. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved means. . 6 Supply all fastenings, anchors and accessories required for fabrication and erection of the work. Make exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same material, texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur unless otherwise shown or specified. Keep exposed fastenings to an absolute minimum and inconspicuous, spacing them evenly and setting them out neatly. Make fastenings of permanent type. .7 Draw mechanical joints to hairline tightness and seal countersunk screws and access holes for locking screws with metal filler where these occur on exposed surface. . 8 Thoroughly clean all ferrous metals, by methods suitable to remove burrs, weld spatter, rust, loose mill scale, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. Apply one coat of prime paint to all surfaces except those requiring field welding. Brush on thoroughly and work well into all crevices. .9 After erection and installation, thoroughly clean the work and apply field touch up of same formula as shop coat to all damaged or unpainted surfaces. Work all paint well into all joints, crevices and open spaces. SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page: 05500-3 ' 3. 1 WORKMANSHIP (cont'd. ) . 10 Galvanizing - Do all galvanizing after welding. . 11 All exterior steel and all steel built into exterior areas of the structure shall be hot-dipped galvanized. . 12 All lintels both exterior and interior shall be hot-dipped galvanized. 3.2 SUPPORT STEEL . 1 Provide and install for extent noted structural steel supports and any other steel fabrications required for the following items: .2 Steel Ladders: Provide steel ladders as indicated on Drawings. Ladder shall consist of 63 mm x 9 mm bar stringers and 18 mm 0 rod rungs at 300 mm o.c. let through stringers and welded. Ladder shall be 450 mm wide set 150 mm clear of wall on 50 mm x 9 mm steel bar brackets, maximum 1500 mm o.c. 3 Perforated Panels for Railings: Provide to Section 05520 cadmium plated panels as detailed on Drawings for Stair ST-3 at Main Pool No. 145. .4 Bollards: Supply and install galvanized steel bollards as shown on Drawings. Bollards shall be 150 mm dia. x 9. 5 mm thick wall x 1070 mm high, seamless steel pipe weighing 7.26 kg per 300 mm. Install 900 mm into a concrete foundation. Finish prime coat. Pipe to be filled with 25 MPa concrete and top rounded. .5 Lateral Support Channels: Supply Masonry Section with galvanized formed channels to suit masonry block. Supply quantity required for retaining tops of non-bearing partitions where lengths exceed 6 m between intersecting walls or supports. Retainers shall occur at not more than 2 m O.C. or 2 m from an intersecting wall. Supply all fixing bolts. .6 Anchor Bolts,Lag Screws,etc. : Supply anchor bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, etc. where required or called for on Drawings for work of this Section. Such items occurring on or in exterior wall or slab shall be hot dipped galvanized. Thread dimensions shall be such that nuts and bolts fit without rethreading or chasing threads. .7 Posts and Chains: Provide 50 mm pipe post, stainless steelas as detailed on Drawings in the Filter Room. SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page: 05500-4 --------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 SUPPORT STEEL (cont'd. ) .8 Miscellaneous Sections: Provide all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, tubes, plates, etc. of shapes and sized noted or required which are not included on Structural Drawings or called for in other Sections of the Specifications. .9 Areaway Gratings: Fabricate frames of 50 mm x 50 mm x 6 mm angle with welded anchors for anchoring into concrete. Trench covers and areaway gratings to be pressure locked type grating in maximum 600 mm long sections for easy removal to clean areas. Covers and grating shall be capable of supporting minimum load of 38 . 46 kg per 0. 1 m2 with deflection of 1/240 of span. Galvanize complete cover after fabrication. Where noted, provide removable or hinged gratings. Provide tamperproof fittings at removable gratings to prevent unwarranted removal. END OF SECTION r r DIVISION 5 - METALS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS-----------------Page: 05520-1 -------------------------------------- ---------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Precast Concrete Stairs Section 03410 .2 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 . 3 Painting Section 09900 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Weld structural requirements: in steel, to conform to requirements of CSA Standard W59-M1989, and by a fabricator fully certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions of CSA Standard W47 . 1 and W55.3 if applicable. 1. 3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES .1 Work of this Section which resists structural forces imposed ' by dead and live loads, shall conform to requirements of jurisdictional authorities. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS . 1 ASTM A366, Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. '.� .2 CGSB Specification 1-GP-108c, Paint, Acid and Alkali Resistant, Black. 3 CGSB Specification 1-GP-159b, Lacquer, Acrylic Cellulose Nitrate, Gloss. 4 CSA Standard G164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .5 CSA Standard W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. . 6 CSA Standard W55.3 , Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members used in Buildings. .7 CSA Standard W59, Welded Steel Construction of (Metal-Arc Welding) . .8 ASTM A-361 for Stainless Steel - Stair ST-3 at Main Pool Room 145. 1. 5 SUBMITTALS 1 Submit Shop Drawings for the Work of this Section in accordance with Section 01340. SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page: 05520-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.5 SUBMITTALS (cont'd. ) .2 All Shop Drawings to bear seal of Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario conforming to O.B.C. requirements. 1. 6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Label, tag or otherwise mark Work supplied for installation by others to indicate its function, location in building and Shop Drawing designation. .2 Deliver Work to location at building site designated by Contractor and to meet requirements of construction schedule. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS . 1 Maintain protection provided for Work of this Section from time of installation until final finishes are applied or to final cleanup. . 2 Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal Work which does not receive site finishing with protective coatings or wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removed, and harmless to the finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS , . 1 Unless detailed or specified otherwise, standard products will be acceptable if construction details and installation meet intent of Drawings and Specifications. . 2 Include all materials, products, accessories, and supplementary parts necessary to complete assembly and installation of Work of this Section. . 3 Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength of , durability, or which are visible. Metal shall be new, of best quality, and free from rust or waves and buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles. .4 Refer to Section 01005 for general fastening requirements. .5 Galvanizing: for irregular sections, zinc coating to meet ' specified requirements of CSA Standard G164, unless otherwise indicated. . 6 Steel Railings: profiles as per Drawings, complete with pickets at maximum 100 mm on centres. .7 Co-ordinate with Section 05500 for perforated cadmium panels. SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page: 05520-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2 FABRICATION 1 Fabricate Work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing process and with skilled tradesmen. .2 Fit and assemble Work in shop. When this is not possible make a trial shop assembly. 3 Fabricate Work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and within allowable design factors imposed by jurisdictional authorities. .4 Ensure that Work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortions, and permanent deformation. . 5 Construct railings to withstand both required vertical and i horizontal loadings. . 6 Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly and in true planes. .7 Fasten Work with concealed methods unless otherwise indicated on Drawings . .8 Cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads, and ' provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. .9 Welded joints shall be tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. . 10 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding Work. . 11 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes. . 12 Galvanized Steel: Galvanize anchors and sleeves following fabrication. Paint galvanized surfaces that are cut, welded or threaded with zind rich paint to ensure a minimum coating of 4 mills, immediately following damage to galvanized protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 EXAMINATION . 1 Take Site measurements to ensure taht Work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction, around obstructions and projections in place, or as shown on Drawings, and to suit service locations. SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page: 05520-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION . 1 Install Work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work. .2 Work supplied by this Section shall include anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, and other items necessary for secure installation as required by loading and jurisdictional authorities. . 3 Attach Work to masonry with lead plus and galvanized steel of other corrosion resistant fastenings to support load with a safety factor of three. . 4 Insulate between dissimilar metals; or between metals, and masonry or concrete with bitiminous paint to prevent electrolysis .5 Provide posts maximum 1200 mm o.c. top and intermediate rails as , required. All joints shall be continuous welded, all corners mitred, open ends plugged. . 6 Set posts in concrete minimum 125 mm grout-in with non-shrink grout through 6 mm foot plates (round or square to match posts) minimum 4 per plate, or weld to steel framing, as applicable to conditions. . 7 Wall Handrails: Provide square tubular support brackets and wall cover plates located at maximum 1200 mm centres. Weld brackets to ' plates to be built into wall by the Masonry sub-trade. .8 Refer to Drawings for height extent and type of railing required. . 9 All stair and wall mounted railings shall be assembled and , fabricated to intersect horizontal railings at vertical breaking lines coinciding with common lines of stringer sections. ' 3. 3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING 1 Refinish shop applied finished in field only with approval of Consultant. .2 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation Work. . 3 Final Painting under Section 09900 - Painting. END OF SECTION DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY------------------------Page 06100-1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .2 Carpentry and Millwork Section 06110 i . 3 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System Section 07511 .4 Hollow Metal Work Section 08100 . 5 Painting Section 09900 1. 2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE . 1 Accept delivery of lumber materials. Arrange for proper sequence and scheduling so as not to delay the progress of the Work. Prevent materials not reasonably required from accumulating. .2 Provide dry storage areas. Stack materials with 150 mm minimum clearance off the floor. . 3 Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture. 1. 3 WIND BRACING I . 1 Brace masonry walls during construction until the structure provides sufficient lateral support. This is a mandatory requirement . Co-ordinate with Masonry Sub-Contractor. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Wood materials - straight, sawn square, true, dressed four sides, properly sized and shaped to correct dimensions from nominal sizes indicated or specified. . 2 Lumber grade and moisture content - comply with the official grading rules of MLGA for the particular lumber and grade, and structurally complying with the latest requirements of the Ontario Building Code. Comply with CSA Standard 0141 Softwood Lumber. Use only grade marked lumber. 3 All wood materials - well seasoned NLGA, free from defects which impair strength and durability. Moisture content limit: S-GRN: Unseasoned; S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content: KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY Page: 06100-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- i 2 .1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .4 Blocking, grounds, nailing strips - NLGA No. 2 Ontario White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, all complying with the grading rules of the NLGA, or Construction, Douglas Fir dense complying with COFI standard grading and dressing rules. Pressure treated where required. .5 Birch plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0121, COFI Exterior. Western softwood plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0151, COFI Waterproof glue WSP. Exposed two sides shall be grade G25, and exposed one side shall be grade G/Solid. . 6 Wood preservative - Solignum manufactured by Sturgeons Ltd. , Pentox manufactured by Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of Canada Ltd. , Rez Sanding Sealer manufacturer by Monsanto Co. Ltd. or other approved manufacturer. For painted surfaces use clear type and for concealed surfaces use green tinted type. .7 Rough hardware - nails, screws, bolts, lag screws anchors, special fastening devices and supports as required for the erection of all carpentry items. r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 PREPARATION , . 1 Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section and proceed only when conditions are satisfactory for a proper installation. 3 .2 INSTALLATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY . 1 Blocking and Grounds - Fasten wood nailers, blocking, bucks, grounds curbs, copings and strapping solidly to supporting , materials in true planes so that they will remain straight and not be loosened by work of other Contractors or Subcontractors. .2 Framing- Do all wood framing in accordance with the Building Code (Ont. Reg. 431/90) and to CAN 3 086-M1983 as applicable. . 3 Wood Copings - Fasten wood blocking to structure with 3 mm ' dia. bolts 750 mm o.c. Fasten curbs as indicated. . 4 Preservative - Preserve concealed wood members in contact with exterior walls and roof before fixing in place. Preserve all other wood indicated to be preserved. Preserve wood by immersing in preservative for at least one hour. r SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY Page: 06100-3 !, -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. 3 PANEL BOARDS . 1 Panel boards for installation of electrical equipment shall be 19 mm fire retardent Birch Plywood fixed on wood strapping. Consult Electrical Drawings for requirements. ! � END OF SECTION , i 1 i �1 'M 1 r �r DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTIC PROJECT NO. 94027-24 ' SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page: 06110-1 ------------------------------------ ---------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 . 2 Wood Doors Section 08200 3 Finish Hardware Section 08710 .4 Glazing Section 08800 . 5 Painting Section 09900 . 6 Mechanical Division 15 .7 Electrical Division 16 1. 2 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 The Work of this Section shall be provided by a specialist millwork firm established in Ontario for a minimum of five years immediately prior to date of Tender and able to produce evidence of satisfactory completion of quality casework comparable with Work specified under this Section. 1. 3 INTENT . 1 The intent of this Specification is that casework shall be manufactured and finished at the plant, delivered to the Site and immediately installed by this Section including provision of necessary strapping, backings, bearers, rough hardware and finish hardware. Touch up finish immediately prior to completion of the work and leave in perfect condition. Co-ordinate with Mechanical, Electrical and other trades as required. 1.4 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit Shop Drawings of all millwork in accordance with General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. .2 Draw Shop Drawings in related and/or dimensional positions with sections. . 3 Shop Drawings shall show fabrication details, materials, jointing, description of anchorage and hardware. Dimensions shall be based on actual measurements taken at the Site. .4 Submit samples of materials, construction method and finish for Consultant's approval. SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK----------------------Page_06110-2-- -------------------------------------- 1. 5 CO-OPERATION . 1 Co-operate with other Sections and do all cutting, fitting and making good own work for all Sections as may be necessary to carry out the true intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Examine the work and materials installed by others insofar as it affects this Work, and report to Consultant any such work not done properly. 1. 6 MEASUREMENTS . 1 Take necessary measurements on Site of spaces and conditions to which work must conform or through which access is required. Take such measurements prior to fabrication of the Work of this Section and in ample time to avoid delays in the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1 Do not deliver finished material during rain or damp weather or until "Wet Trades" have completed their work and windows are glazed of covered. Carefully protect from damage of any , kind. . 2 Accept delivery of millwork. Arrange for proper sequence and scheduling of millwork delivery so as not to delay the , progress of the Work. Prevent materials not reasonably required from accumulating. . 3 Inspect millwork for damage which cannot be readily corrected ' by sanding. Check that primer or sealer has been applied. Promptly return defective units to manufacturer. .4 Provide dry storage areas. Stack materials with 150 mm minimum , clearance off the floor. .5 Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture. 1. 8 PROTECTION r . 1 Protect countertops with 6 mm plywood or other suitable sheet material. ' . 2 Protect installed hardware from damage and blemishes. 1. 10 WARRANTY . 1 Provide an extended Warranty to the General Conditions of the Contract of five years against workmanship and delamination. SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page: 06110-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Lumber grade and moisture content - comply with the official . � grading rules of NLGA for the particular lumber and grade, and structurally complying with the latest requirements of the Ontario Building Code. Comply with CSA Standard 0141 Softwood Lumber. Use only grade marked lumber. . 2 All wood materials - well seasoned NLGA, free from defects which impair strength and durability. Moisture content limit: ! , as measured on Site prior to installation, S-GRN: Unseasoned; S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content: KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. 3 Blocking, grounds, nailing strips - NLGA No. 2 Ontario White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, all complying with the grading rules of ' the NLGA, or Construction, Douglas Fir dense complying with COFI standard grading and dressing rules. . 4 Birch plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0121, COFI Exterior. i� Western softwood plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0151, COFI Waterproof glue WSP. Exposed two sides shall be grade G25, and exposed one side shall be grade G/Solid. I5 Rough hardware - nails, screws, bolts, lag screws anchors, special fastening devices and supports as required for the erection of all carpentry items. . 6 Softwood Lumber: Conform to CSA 0141 and National Lumber Grades Authority requirements. .7 Hardwood Lumber: Conform to National Hardware Lumber Association (NHLA) requirements. .8 Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115. .9 Canadian Softwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0151. . 10 Douglas Fir Plywood: Conform to CSA 0121. 11 Poplar Plywood: Conform to CSA 01530. . 12 Nails and Staples: Conform to CSA B111. 13 Plastic Laminate: Facing Sheet; Melamine surfaced, Class 1, high pressure plastic laminate sheeting conforming with CSA A172, standard 1. 5 mm thick, and post forming grade not less than . 052" thick. Backing Sheet: by same manufacturer as facing sheet not less than .020" thick, sanded one side. Plastic laminate to be manufactured by "Arborite" , "Formica", "Wilsonart" finish to Consultant' s later selection. It SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page: 06110-4 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) ' . 14 Glue: Waterproof synthetic resinous glue, of approved type for general Carpentry work and Urea Formaldehyde thermo-setting type for plastic laminate work. . 15 Wood Preservative: "Pentox" by Osmose Wood Products Ltd. , or approved alternative. . 16 Millwork Finishing Hardware: . 1 Hinges - 19 mm cupboard door 69GP-8M-8-109 284x 20 mm offset C15 32 mm cupboard door 69GP-1M-101 1761 75 mm x 75 mm C15 icontinuous hinge 69GP-IM-140 C15 . 2 Pulls - , cupboard door/drawer (Stanley) 915-3 1/2 C32D . 3 Locks - cupboard door (19 mm ) Corbin 02067 x 7/8 x 12S C15 drawer (19 mm) Corbin 02066 x 7/8 x 12S C15 Supply to each cupboard drawer and door . 4 Surface Bolts - ' cupboard door (19 mm) 69GP-6M-6-23 62 x 1-1/2 flat keeper C15 cupboard door (32 mm) 69GP-6M-6-20 HA1296 1/2 x 6 flat keeper C15 . 5 Clothes - cupboard door 69GP-8M-45 Magnetic catch , 9765 cupboard door 69GP-8M-8-39 Spring cushioned (movable millwork) Roller 9710-2G ' . 6 Pilasters 69GP-8M-8-21 KV255 - 2C .7 Rests (Style B) 69GP-8M-21 KV256 - 2C .8 Drawer slides 69GP-8M-8-95 KV1375 drawers up to & including 600 mm wide Drawer slides 69GP-8M-8-96 KV8505 drawers over 600 mm wide .9 Coat Hooks 307 32D . 10 Closet Rods - deep cupboard 69GP-8M-8-50 KV 2NP shallow cupboard KV 1NP SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page: 06110-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) 16 Millwork Finishing Hardware: (cont'd. ) . 11 Display Cases - standards KV 80 ANO @ 750 mm O.C. brackets KV 160 ANO track KV 992 2C locks KV 963 CHR 2.2 FABRICATION GENERAL - MILLWORK . 1 Fabricate all built-in fitments and do all cabinet work ' detailed or indicated on the Drawings as being part of this Contract. . 2 Fabricate casework to AWMAC conventional construction custom concealed grade. . 3 Set nails and screws, apply wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish. .4 Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. ' Recess shelf standards unless noted otherwise. .5 Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise +, noted. . 6 Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. I, .7 Provide 3 mm thick solid hardwood matching strip rebated on plywood edges 13 mm or thicker, exposed in final assembly. Strips same width as plywood. . 8 Factory seal and varnish casework and cabinetwork on all surfaces. On site finishing limited to touch-up only. . 10 Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. "r 2 . 3 FABRICATION - PLASTIC LAMINATE FACE WORK . 1 Provide cores of not less than 19 mm nominal thickness solid face Birch plywood. . 2 Apply backing sheet to laminated flatwork. Supply uniform coating sealer on exposed edges. Provide backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate for stresses caused by the facing sheet. SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page:06110-6 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 3 FABRICATION - PLASTIC LAMINATE FACE WORK (cont'd. ) . 3 Self-edge straight-line edging with 3 mm standard material and radius corners with post-forming material, apply with same adhesive as facing sheet.Chamfer edges uniformly at approximately 20 deg. , using machine router. .4 At L-shaped corners mitre plastic laminate to the outside corner. Accurately fit members together to provide tight and ' flush butt joints, in true planes. . 5 Provide cut-outs as required for inserts, fixtures and fittings. Use radiused corners and chamfer edges around cut-outs to avoid chipping laminate. . 6 Post-form laminate work full bullnose edge to details indicated. Provide same core and laminate profiles to provide continuous support for bond for the entire surface. .7 Assemble work, true to square. Arrange adjacent parts of , continuous :Laminate work to match in colour and pattern. .8 Upon completion of fabrication, remove manufacturer's identification markings and clean plastic laminate surfaces. 2 . 4 FABRICATION - TRIM ' . 1 Trim members shall be slow-fed work, free from chatter and other machine marks. 2.5 FABRICATION - PLYWOOD EDGING ' . 1 All exposed 19 mm and 13 mm thick plywood edges shall be ' covered with glued-on 3 mm thick hardwood strips. 2. 6 FABRICATION - MILLWORK AND FITMENTS ' . 1 Fitments shall have joints mortised, housed, dowelled and all joints shall be glued and nailed or screwed. All cabinet bases shall be 19 mm plywood; blocked 900 mm o.c. maximum and at corners. . 2 All plywood used in millwork, except drawers, shall be 19 mm ' birch faced graded for satin finish. Shelves in storage rooms shall be constructed of 19 mm fir plywood. Counter tops shall have splash backs and returns at walls, as detailed. . 3 Drawer fronts shall be fabricated utilizing the same material and edge finish as doors. All four edges shall be edged with solid hardwood edging. Drawer fronts shall be equipped with ' one pull and two composition drawer silencers. Fronts will be secured to drawer bodies with five screw nails through the front of the body into the core of the drawer front. SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page: 06110-7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 6 FABRICATION - MILLWORK AND FITMENTS (cont'd. ) j 4 Drawer bodies shall consist of box construction fabricated from 13 mm birch plywood front, sides and back with a 6 mm plywood bottom dadoed and glued into box members. Join sides and back carefully fitted and glued dovetail joints. . 5 Backs of cabinets facing wall mounted heating units shall be insulated with 25 mm foil faced rigid Fibreglas insulation - AF-530 with foil towards heat source. .6 Shelving shall be 19 mm plywood adjustable or fixed as I � detailed. Maximum unsupported span for shelving shall be 900 mm. Adjustable shelves shall be set on angle clips on surface mounted metal pilaster strips. Provide hat-shelf to all wardrobes. Loose shelves shall have hardwood edges on both longitudinal edges. ' .7 Gables shall be 19 mm at max. 900 mm spacing. 2 . 7 CHANGE ROOMS WOOD BENCHES 1 Bench seats shall be maple. Tops shall be mechanically sanded. All sharp edges and corners shall be rounded by sanding. Securely fasten seats to metal brackets, supplied under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Set and place all materials and components in place, rigid, plumb and secure. . 2 Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets. . 3 Install al]. counter tops and doors. .4 Use draw bolts in countertop joints. .5 At junction of plastic laminate counter, back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant. Scribe to wall. 6 Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction. 7 Supply and install, fit and adjust all hardware as specified above for wood and laminated plastic cabinet doors, drawers and shelves. SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page:06110-8 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL (cont'd. ) . 8 Finished woodwork shall be free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes, and other defects in accordance with AWMAC Standards. .9 All metal items such as grilles, tracks, supports, legs, brackets etc. supplied by other trades shall be built into fitments, panelling wood doors, etc. , in strict accordance with directions of trades supplying such. . 10 All cabinets and shelves shall be supported on 25 mm x 75 mm hardwood bearers and prevented from tipping with steel angles , fastened to top of cabinet or shelf, spaced 900 mm o.c. and lagged into wall surface. 25 mm x 50 mm hardwood rails shall be at top and bottom of cabinet or shelf unit, secured into , gables of units and fastened to supporting wall with expansion shields and lag screws. Where bulkheads occur over cabinets, upper framing shall be secured to the ceiling. , 3 . 2 INSTALLATION - HOLLOW METAL AND WOOD DOORS . 1 Check doors for correct size. If improperly sized, return to manufacturer for corrections. .2 Prepare doors to receive hardware. Check each hardware item , before installation. Before installation of finish hardware submit Shop Drawings indicating the location of all hardware. Drill pilot: holes of suitable diameter. ' . 3 Install doors. Maintain an even clearance, not exceeding 3 mm between door and frame and 19 mm at floor to allow free action of door. ' 3. 3 INSTALLATION - FINISH HARDWARE . 1 Accept delivery of finishing hardware from Section 08710 for 1 all hollow metal and wood doors and be responsible for its safe storage. . 2 Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's r. written instructions. Do not modify finish hardware without manufacturer's written approval. ' .3 After installation of finish hardware, check opening units for correct fit and uniformity of space around perimeter of units, or between units. Provide smoothly operating units , free from binding. .4 Set, fit, adjust and clean hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions. r SECTION 06110 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Page:06110-9 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - FINISH HARDWARE (cont'd. ) 5 Do not install finish hardware until after painting in area is completed. 3 .4 INSTALLATION - ROOM AND AREA SIGNS . 1 Install all room and area signs, numbers and card holders. Co-ordinate with Door Hardware - Sections 08710. Refer to Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. END OF SECTION ' DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07132 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING-----------------Page_07132-1 -------------------------------------- --------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' 1 Apply waterproofing using applicators approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials, with not less than five years proven experience of this type of work. ' 1.2 INTENT . 1 To provide waterproofing for extent noted. . 2 Waterproofing: A treatment to prevent passage of water under pressure. . 3 To provide a continuous blanket of waterproofing to areas as indicated on the Drawings. 1. 3 WARRANTY . 1 Warranty for the waterproofing shall be extended in writing for a period of two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Membrane: Hot rubberized asphalt-flexible membrane waterproofing Hydrotech 6100 by Permaquik Corp. .2 Surface Conditioner: Surface Conditioner 6170, asphalt cut-back conforming to CGSB-37-GP-9a. . 3 Expansion Joint Rubber Sheet: Permaquik Heavy Duty Elastosheet 6146. .4 Construction Joint Rubber Sheet: Permaquik Standard Elastosheet 6147 . .5 Rubber Sheet Adhesive: as recommended by manufacturer. . 6 Insulation: Expanded,extruded,polystyrene boards,CGSB-4I-GP-14a, Type 4, thickness as noted. Dow Roofmate, by Dow Chemical Ltd. 7 Sealants: As recommended by the membrane manufacturer compatible with membrane being used - 2 part polysulphide CAN 2-13 . 19-M82 . 8 Joint Fillers: For sealants, formed polyethylene rope Ethafoam, or approved alternative. 9 Primers for Sealants: as recommended by sealant manufacturer. SECTION 07132 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Page: 07132-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 10 Protection Board: 2 mm x 92 mm x 122 mm hollow core board made , of polypropylene co-polymer as distributed by Hydrotech Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 1 INSPECTION , . 1 Ensure that surfaces to be waterproofed are completely dry, clean, free of grease, oil dust and other contaminants. .2 Do not apply waterproofing during rain, sleet, snow or on ice covered surfaces, or when temperatures are below 7 deg.C. . 3 Check to ensure that all drains, pipes and other items passing ' through are in position and set properly and rigidly. .4 At all intersections between horizontal and vertical surfaces , where membrane to be installed, supply and install 50 mm x 50 mm concrete cant grouted in place with 45 degree slope. 3.2 INSTALLATION - WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE . 1 Apply surface conditioner to concrete and allow to dry. ' .2 Do not exceed 205 deg.0 in metal kettle. Use approved kettles. .3 Apply membrane evenly, between 175 deg.C. and 205 deg.C. to a thickness of not less than 1.5 mm and averaging 4.5 mm thick. Carry membrane up junction of horizontal and vertical surfaces where indicated. ' .4 Seal membrane around all protrusions. .5 Install control joint rubber sheet 300 mm wide, centred over ' cracks and construction joints in substrate, and junctions of horizontal and vertical surfaces. .6 Fill expansion joint to within 75 mm of top with premolded filler 50% wider than joints. Carry expansion joint rubber sheet down into joint approximately 38 mm and 150 mm on each side of joint. , .7 Prior to application of protective board over membrane; inspect membrane and apply an additional coat of membrane to areas exhibiting pinholes or ruptures. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - INSULATION . 1 Provide insulation for extent noted and to thicknesses noted over membrane waterproofing. SECTION 07132 -MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Page: 07132-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .3 INSTALLATION - INSULATION (cont'd. ) ' 2 Lay insulation with boards lightly butted and all joints staggered. 3 Cut and fit around peripheries and items projecting through insulation. .4 Ensure a uniform and continuous thermal barrier is obtained. .5 Install all protection board over membrane waterproofing prior ' to backfill application. ' END OF SECTION i�a i 1 t r r DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION---------------Page: 07196-1 i ------------------------------------ ------------------ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 .2 Unit Masonry Section 04200 ! , . 3 Brick Masonry Section 04210 .4 4-ply Built-Up Roofing Section 07511 .5 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 . 6 Aluminum Entrance Doors Section 08400 . 7 Aluminum Windows and Window Wall Section 08520 1.2 WORK INCLUDED . 1 Cleaning, preparation of surfaces and priming of substrate. . 2 Installation of air barrier , detail completion, insulation attachments and or other requirements depending on wall !' complexity. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ! . 1 Submit original copy of test data from certified independent testing laboratory confirming performance requirements of air barrier membrane specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 1 All air barrier products shall be applied by a contractor currently approved by W.R.Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd. Provide written evidence of approval from manufacturer prior to commencement of the work. .2 The work shall be inspected prior to, during and upon completion by a representative of the manufacturer to ensure adherence to specifications. { 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 Deliver materials in original, unopened packaging units with all units intact. 2 At job site store materials, protected from weather by use of weatherproof coverings and raised platforms. 3 Pallets of materials shall not be double stacked on site. SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page: 07196-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 6 GUARANTEE . 1 The work described in this Section shall be guaranteed against ' all air tightness defects for a five year period, effective from the date of Final Certificate of Work is signed. PART 2 - RPODUCTS 2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS , . 1 Air Barrier System shall be manufactured by W.R.Grace & Co. . or approved alternate. ' 2.2 MATERIALS . 1 Perm-A-Barrier Membrane minimum 1.02 mm (40 mil) composite sheet, dark grey, supplied in 900 mm (31011) wide rolls 23 .23 sq.m. (250 sq.ft. ) per roll. Membrane shall incorporate 6 mm (1/411) edge ' bead of rubberized asphalt on all side laps. .2 Properties Property Value Test Method 1 Colour Dark Grey N/A , Pliability 180 degrees Unaffected ASTM D146 bendover 25 mm (111) mandril at -32 deg.C. ' Tensile Strength 2 .8 MPa min. ASTM D412 - membrane 400 psi Die C modified ' Elongation 200% ASTM D412 Ultimate failure of ' rubberized asphalt (96) Cycling over crack at No effect ASTM C836 -26 deg.C. 100 cycles ' Cycling over 25 mm (111) No effect Grace B-138 joints at 1, 000 cycles , Peel adhesion 0.822 min. See footnote #2 (N/mm width) 28 days wet (submerged aging) Property Value Test Method Puncture 178 min. ASTM E154 resistance (N) (stretched by blunt object) SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page:07196-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .2 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) 2 Properties (cont'd. ) Puncture resistance 1,746.25 min. ASTM D781 ' polyethylene film (mm N tear) (compact from sharp object) Air permeance of less than . 01 ASTM E283-83 "In Place" System litre sq.m. See footnote #3 Pressure difference of 75 Pa. Resistance to 3 kPa No increase ASTM E330 Air pressure difference in equivalent See footnote #3 Permeance 0.517 metric 0. 009 perms ASTM E96 perms Water Absorbtion 0. 1% weight gain ASTM D570 72 hours Footnotes ' . 1 Membrane is applied across two primed blocks with no separation between blocks at -26 deg.0 blocks are pulled apart to 6 mm (1/411) then returned to original. Cycle is repeated 100 times. For joint cycling the blocks are double covered with membrane separated by 25 mm (111) then cycled at -26 deg.C. between 19 mm to 32 mm (3/4" to 1-1/411) a minimum of 1, 000 cycles. .2 Membrane is applied to primer blocks and rolled. Blocks are then stored for 28 days under water. Membrane is then peeled from the concrete at a 90 degree angle. M� . 3 Membrane is adhered to concrete block wall and penetrated by mechanical fasteners. System is tested with both positive ' and negative pressure differentials. (independent certified laboratory test figures) . .4 Bituthene EM3000 Mastic-Rubber based mastic for termination. . 5 Liquid Membrane LM3000 - two component liquid membrane with 100% solids content. . 6 Bituthene Primer P3100 - rubber based solvent used to condition all subtrates. SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page:07196-4 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .3 INSULATION ATTACHMENTS , . 1 Wedge fasteners type "wedge-Lok" as manufactured by Blok-Lok, or , an approved alternative. 2 .4 CAVITY WALL INSULATION ' . 1 Rigid Insulation: Glass fibre reinforced polyisocyanurate foam with reflective aluminum foil facers conforming to CAN/CGSB 51-26-M86, 69 mm thickness R-Value of 20, by Celotex or approved alternate. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 .1 EXAMINATION ' . 1 Examine all surfaces to receive air barrier for conformance to recommended surface conditions. ' .2 Do not proceed with air barrier installation until defects are repaired to comply with paragraph 3 .2 . 3.2 PREPARATION . 1 Acceptable surfaces include cast-in-place concrete, precast ' concrete, masonry (strike masonry joints flush) gypsum board, plywood and sheet metal. .2 All surfaces to receive air barrier must be smooth, clean, dry, , and in good condition. All moisture, grease, machine oil or other foreign material shall be removed. . 3 Concrete must be smooth, monolithic, free from voids, spalled , areas, loose aggregates or sharp protrusions. . 4 Concrete must be cured minimum 7 days and dry before air barrier is applied. Cure concrete with clear resin-based curing compounds containing no oil, wax or pigment. .5 Allow concrete to dry following rain. 1 . 6 Use form release agents which will not transfer to the concrete. ' .7 Repair defects, such as spalled or poorly consolidated areas. Remove sharp protrusions and form match lines. . 8 If walls are rough use a well adhered parge coat to achieve a smooth finish. SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page: 07196-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 PREPARATION (cont'd. ) 9 Concrete Blocks: . 1 Uneveness between blocks shall not exceed 2 mm (3/3211) . 2 Holes and openings must be patched. .3 Excess mortar shall be removed. ' . 10 Cast-in-Place Concrete: . 1 Reliefs at framework joints shall not exceed 5 mm (3/1611) . 2 Concrete lumps shall be removed. .3 Tie holes shall be filled. .4 All surfaces shall be clean, dry, free from oil, etc. 11 Prefabricated Panels (plywood,gypsum,concrete,metal) : . 1 Acceptable panels are those currently used for roofing decks ' .2 Uneveness at joints must not exceed 5 mm (3/3211) . .3 Joint openings greater than 19 mm (3/411) must be filled. 3 .3 INSTALLATION . 1 Apply Perm-A-Barrier to primed structure substrates in 2400 mm (81011) lengths, or as per manufacturer's recommendations. .2 All side laps shall be 64 mm (2-1/211) minimum and all end laps shall be 150 mm (611) . ' . 3 At top and bottom terminations heavy pressure should be applied to membrane: with the back of utility knife to assure positive adhesive at the edge. !, .4 The membrane shall be rolled, firmly and completely immediately after each sheet is applied. An extension handled counter top ,t roller shall be used. .5 Apply a trowelled bead of EM3000 Mastic to all terminations of membrane at the end of the day's work. . 6 Inspect, membrane thoroughly before covering and make any corrections immediately. . 7 Misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, punctures or other damage shall be repaired with a patch of Perm-A-Barrier extending 150 mm (611) in all directions from the edge of the damaged area. Seal all edges of patch with EM3000 Mastic. .8 Perm-A-Barrier shall be covered immediately to protect the air barrier from other trades. .9 Perm-A-Barrier shall be mechanically fastened to the structure, to resist high pressures of air. SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page:07196-6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .3 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) . 10 Fastening requirements will vary depending on the wall design and the fastening system of the wall cladding and the insulation. . 11 If cladding support brackets and/or insulation boards are to be ' mechanically fastened through Perm-A-Barrier immediately then mechanical fastening of membrane will not be required. . 12 Mechanical fastening of Perm-A-Barrier shall be required should ' the membrane be installed and left exposed without insulation or cladding brackets fastened through the membrane. 3 .4 DETAILS ' . 1 At all detail areas take extra care to ensure continuity of the air barrier. .2 Perm-A-Barrier shall be mechanically fastened to frames of , windows and doors. At all inside and outside corners use 300 mm (11011) reinforcing piece of membrane prior to installing air barrier. . 3 All gaps and joints wider than 6 mm (1/411) shall be filled with LM3000 or a foam backer rod and reinforced with 300 mm (11011) piece of membrane prior to application of field membrane. ' .4 Liquid Membrane LM3000 shall be used at all protrusions which do not allow for easy installation of sheet membrane. LM3000 shall ' be placed over or under Perm-A-Barrier with at least a 64 mm (2-1/211) overlap required. 3 .5 ROOF/WALL JUNCTIONS ' . 1 Co-ordinate proper construction of roof/wall junction with roofing contractor so as to maintain continuity of air barrier , from wall to roof. .2 Ensure compatibility of air barrier with roofing membrane and flashing. , 3.6 CAVITY WALI, INSULATION . 1 Install insulation only in strict accordance with manufacturer's ' printed literature. .2 Install insulation only when building substrate materials are , dry. . 3 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal performance , required within building elements and spaces indicated. SECTION 07196 - AIR BARRIER & INSULATION Page:07196-7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 3 . 6 CAVITY WALL INSULATION (cont'd. ) ' 4 Fit insulation tightly around all structural angles, penetrations and protrusions, and ensure that no thermal gaps exist. ' 5 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly offset vertical joints. Use only insulation boards free from torn, chipped and broken edges. . 6 Wedge fasten insulation boards directly through Perm-A-Barrier membrane into structural sunstrate. ' 7 Install insulation boards and hold in place by wedge type insulation fasteners. Tamp down to positive locked position at every cross tie location. .8 Any damage to air barrier as a result of improperly placed insulation fasteners shall be immediately repaired as previously ' described. 3 .7 SEQUENCE CONSTRUCTION . 1 Co-ordinate installation of insulation to minimize exposure of air barrier. ' .2 Also co-ordinate installation of insulation with installation of preformed metal panel system to minimize exposure of insulation. ' 3 .8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . 1 Air barrier manufacturer shall provide on the job inspections, technical assistance, and membrane application guidance, as may ' be necessary to complete the air barrier application. 3 . 9 JOB COMPLETION . 1 Contractor shall inspect completed air barrier and correct all defects to meet the specifications. !� .2 Clean up all debris, excess materials, and equipment and remove from site. 3 All drippage, or spills of coating sealant, mastic or primers shall be cleaned. 4 General Contractor shall restrict construction traffic and equipment and movement near completed air barrier to only essential related trades. 5 For trades continuing to work near the complete air barrier, appropriate protection shall be provided. END OF SECTION i DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO.94027-24 ' SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Page: 07240-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK . 1 Provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary to install the Field Applied System. 1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 1 QUALIFICATIONS ! ' . 1 The Applicator, Panel Fabricator and Insulation Board Manufacturer shall be trained and approved by the Dryvit -. ' System Manufacturer. Materials as manufactured by STO Systems Ltd. , are an approved alternate. .2 DESIGN AND DETAILING . 1 At all locations the Insulation Board shall be encapsulated by the assembly or Substrate, and shall be ' separated from the interior of the building by a thermal barrier having at least a 15 minute finish rating. .2 The minimum slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less a than 6" (152mm) in 12" (305mm) . .3 Deflection of Substrate Systems shall not exceed L/240 ' for finish as selected by the Consultant. .4 The Trained Applicator shall verify that the proposed Substrate is acceptable to the applicable regulatory authorities prior to application. .5 Substrate Systems shall be engineered with regard to structural performance. . 6 Expansion joints are required at building expansion joints, at panel joints, where Substrates change, and where significant structural movement occurs. . 3 APPROVALS, LISTING AND CLASSIFICATIONS . 1 The Assembly and Insulation Board shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories. r SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Page:07240-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (cont'd. ) .3 APPROVALS, LISTINGS AND CLASSIFICATIONS, (cont'd. ) , .2 The System shall be approved by Factory Mutual as listed in the Factory Mutual Approval Guild. , . 3 The System shall be approved as described in the following documents: ' 1. B.O.A.C. Research Report No. 78-98 2 . I.C.B.O. Research Committee Report No. 2728 ' 3 . S.B.C.C.I. Compliance Report No. 7218 4. H.U.D. Materials Release No. 883b. .4 The System shall meet the requirements of H.H. S. ' Technical Bulletin No. 30. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' . 1 Trained Applicator shall submit two 2 ' (610mm) x 4 ' (1220mm) samples of the System for each finish, colour and texture using , same tools and techniques as for actual project. . 2 Trained Applicator shall submit complete shop drawings for panels including erection drawings and details. , 1. 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Deliver al]. materials in original unopened packages with labels ' intact. .2 Store all materials protected from weather and at temperatures ' not less than 40 Deg. F. (4 Deg. C. ) . 1. 6 JOB CONDITIONS ' . 1 Ambient air temperature shall be 40 Deg. F. (4 Deg. C. ) or greater and rising at the time of insulation of the Dryvit ' System and shall remain at 40 Deg. F. (4 Deg. C. ) or greater for at least 24 hours after application. .2 Adjacent materials and the System shall be protected , during installation while curing and/or unattended from weather and other damage. 1.7 WARRANTY ' . 1 Submit to the Owner a warranty for an extended period of ten ' years, for workmanship and materials. SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM------ Page: 07240_3 -- ----------------------------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Primus Adhesive - 100% acrylic base. 2 Dryvit Insulation Board 1. Nominal L.Opcf (16Kg/m3) , aged expanded polystyrene meeting the required specifications. 2. Flamespread and smoke development shall be less than or equal to 25 and 450 respectively when tested by A.S.T.M. E84 . 3 . Maximum size shall be 2 ' (610mm) x 4 ' (1220mm) . 4. Minimum thickness shall be 3/4" (19mm) . . 3 Reinforcing Meshes - A balanced, open weave, treated glass fibre mess supplied by Dryvit System Inc. available in three strength grades Detail, Hi-Standard and Intermediate. .4 Heavy Duty Mesh - A balanced, treated, heavy glass fibre mesh to 3 . 6 m above grade and in all other areas susceptible to damage. .5 Finish - Sandblast, 100% acrylic based, factory mixed, texture and colour to Consultant's selection. 6 Assembly - Shall be Classified by Underwriters Laboratory as having a flamespread of less than or equal to 25 when tested by A. S.T.M. E84. 7 Exterior Finish System 1. Shall have been tested for moisture resistance, rain resistance, absorption-freeze, accelerated weathering, mildew resistance, salt spray resistance and abrasion resistance. .2 Shall have been tested at full scale for impact resistance and structural loan capacity per A.S.T.M. E72 and E330 respectively. . 3 Shall have been tested by the following diversified fire methods: 1. Modified A.S.T.M. E108. 2 . U.L.C. 5101. 3 . Factory Mutual Corner Test. ' 4 . Multi. -story Fire test with 15' (4.5mm) w x 10 ' (3 . 1m) d x 10' (3 . 1m) h room and 1500 (681kg) lb. wood crib. 5. Multi-story Fire Test with 15 ' (4.5m) w x 15 ' (4.5m) d x 12 ' (3.7m) h room and 1285 (583kg) lb. wood crib. SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM-------Page: 07240-4 ----------------------------------------------------- ----------- 2 . 2 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .8 Cement - Type 1, 1-11 or 11 Portland Cement meeting A.S.T.M. C150. .9 Water - Shall be clan and potable. . 10 Sealant System - As recommended by this Trade Manufacturer and compatible with this System and adjacent materials. .11 Vapour Barrier: 6 mil polyethelene sheet. 2. 3 MIXING AND PREPARATION . 1 Adhesive Mixture - Mix Adhesive with cement in a ration of 1: 1 by weight, wait five minutes, then stir again. Use immediately. .2 Finish Coating - Stir until material is homogeneous. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INSPECTION . 1 Prior to application of System the Substrate shall be examined for compliance with the contract documents. The General Contractor and Consultant shall be advised of all discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION . 1 Insulation Board shall be applied with its joints offset with respect to Substrate joints using a running bond pattern. . 2 Joints shall be staggered and interlocked at corners. . 3 Adhesive Mixture 1. Ribbon and Dab Method - Apply 2" (51mm) w x 3/8" (10mm) thick of Adhesive Mixture to entire perimeter of one face of Insulation Board with trowel. Apple eight 4" (102mm)diameter x 3/8" (10mm) thick dabs of Adhesive Mixture equally spaced in two rows, to the area inside the perimeter ribbons. 2 . Notched Trowel - Apply beads of Adhesive Mixture to entire surface of one face of Insulation Board using trowel. Apply 2" (51mm)w x 3/8" (lomm)thick ribbon of Adhesive mixture to entire perimeter of same side with trowel. This method shall be used for sheathing Substrades only. 3 . Push Box - Apply beads and ribbons of Adhesive Mixture ' in accordance with manufacturer's Application bulletin. SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Page:07240-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) 4 Take prepared Insulation Board to Substrate and mount on Substrate. Tamp board using even pressure to produce uniform contact and bond. Make surface flat by using straight edge to align edges of adjacent Insulation Boards. .5 Let dry 24 hours. . 6 Sand high areas if any, to produce level surface. 3 .3 BASE COAT . 1 Inspect surface for flatness, damage and deterioration due to weathering, and repair prior to application of Base Coat. 2 Base Coat - Using Hi-Standard or Intermediate Reinforcing Mesh, apply 1/16" (1. 6mm) thick coat of Adhesive Mixture to entire surface of Insulation Board. Immediately embed Reinforcing Mesh into wet Adhesive and smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Lap mesh edges 2-1/2" (64mm) minimum on all sides. Allow to dry 24 hours. . 3 Heavy Duty Mesh Base Coat - Apply 3/32" (2.4mm) thick coat of Adhesive Mixture to entire surface of Insulation Board. Immediately embed Mesh into wet Adhesive Mixture and smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Adjacent Mesh pieces shall be abutted. Allow to dry 24 hours. Apply one layer of Standard Base Coat to Mesh layer per 2 above. 1 3 . 4 FINISH 1 Apply Finish using clean stainless trowel using sufficient manpower and equipment to insure a continuous operation without cold joints, scaffolding lines, etc. Texture finish to match approved sample. 3 .5 TRIM, EXPANSION JOINTS, PLASTER STOPS 1 All trim shall be vinyl and shall be installed prior to installation of the reinforcing mesh except for external corner reinforcing beads. 2 All trim shall be uniform throughout of ground cover as specified. 3 Trim shall be installed straight true and plumb to a tolerance of not more than 5 mm in 2 .0 m. .4 Trim that is bent, damaged or otherwise marred shall be discarded. 'd SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Page: 07240-6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .5 TRIM, EXPANSION JOINTS, PLASTER STOPS (cont'd. ) ' .5 Trim shall be fastened along the wing/s and shall be spaced at not more than 300 mm o.c. . 6 Plaster stops/Casing beads shall be installed at alltermination points, around all openings or as specified on plans. .7 Leave a 12 mm space for caulking/sealant joint where specified on plans. .8 Expanded wing corner bead trim section shall be installed continuously alone all external corners. They shall be installed so to create the nominal specified ground cover thickness. .9 Expansion joints shall be placed at all points of maxi-mumstress such as corners of openings, in the direction as shown on the plans. . 1 Expansion joints shall be placed at all points where dis-similar substrates meet. . 2 Installed expansion joints at the lesser of each floor horizontally at the level of the underside of ceiling, or spaced at not more than 3 .0 m o.c. vertically. . 3 Install expansion joints vertically, spaced at not more than 6. 0 m o.c. . 4 Expansion joints shall be laid out so to divide the wall surface! into panels of not more than 12m2 . . 5 Lay out: the expansion joint in a pattern that enhances the overall aesthetics of the structure. 3 . 6 CO-ORDINATION . 1 Co-ordinate all work of this Section with Unit Masonry Subcontractor. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07270 - FIRE STOPPING & SMOKE-SEAL --------------Page_07270_1 ------------------------------------- ------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Cutting and Patching, Co-ordination Section 01040 . 2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 .3 Unit Masonry Section 04200 . 4 Aluminum Windows and Window Wall Section 08520 .5 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 . 6 Mechanical Division 15 . 7 Electrical Division 16 1.2 DESCRIPTION . 1 This Section specified firestopping materials or systems intended to act as a firestop and smoke seal within fire resistive wall and floor assemblies for any through- penetrating items, poke-through termination devices, receptacles or any unpenetrated openings or joints. The seal shall form a draft-tight barrier and act to retard the passage of smoke, flame and hose-stream. 1. 3 SCOPE OF WORK . 1 Firestopping for this Project is a complete and integrated work scope. It shall be tendered as a separate work scope and shall be inclusive of all firestopping and smoke seal requirements as detailed herein and shown on all of the Tender Drawings. .2 To supply and install Firestop only at building perimeter and at fire-rated walls where they abut exterior walls. . 3 To supply and install Firestop only at gap between top of fire-rated block walls and u/s slab above and at expansion joints of fire rated block walls. .4 To supply and install Firestop and fire resistant caulking at mechanical penetrations, pipes, HVAC ducts, through fire- rated wally and slabs. . 5 To supply and install Firestop and fire resistant caulking at electrical penetrations through fire-rated walls and slabs. SECTION 07270 - FIRE STOPPING & SMOKE SEAL Page: 07270-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK (cont'd. ) . 6 To supply and install fire resistant calking material at the top of fire-rated drywall partitions. .7 To supply and install Firestop/fire resistant caulking at intersection of fire-rated walls. 1. 4 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions. .2 Submit certificates indicating firestopping materials conform to the specified requirements of CAN/CSA4-115-M90. .3 Submit ULC Listings with copies of ULC cards as requested by the Consultant in accordance with Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .1 MATERIALS 1 All Materials shall be certified and have been tested in accordance with one, or a combination, of the following standards: CAN/CSA4-S115M, UL-1479, DIN-4102 or ASTM E-814. . 2 Fire Stopping and Fire Resistant Caulking: supplied by A/D Fire Protection Services Ltd. , or approved alternate meeting or exceeding the above testing methods. . 3 All materials shall provide a fire and hose stream rating not less than the fire resistance rating of the surrounding floor or wall assembly. .4 Site systems design must be in accordance with U.L.I . , U.L.C. , F.M. , F.M.P.A. , and/or S.W.R. system restrictions and/or technical evaluation as approved by the Consultant. PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3 .1 INSTALLATION . 1 Compress firestop minimum 25% to ensure complete sealing and to accommodate substrate irregularities. .2 Butt each firestop section tightly against the proceeding section. Leave no voids. �1 SECTION 07270 - FIRE STOPPING & SMOKE SEAL ------------------Page_07270_3-- --------------------------------------- 3 . 1 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) 3 Wall voids: Where fire-rated masonry partitions are built to within 20 mm of underside of structure over, fill such space with properly sized Firestop, packing from each side of partitions greater than 100 mm nominal thickness. 4 Floor Voids: At perimeter locations throughout building in which slabs form junction with exterior walls fill such spaces with e Firestop for sufficient depth to provide appropriate fire-rating. . 5 Provide two impaling clips per length of material approximately 600 mm o.c. to support and secure Firestop between exterior wall and floor slab. 6 Apply to mechanical and electrical service through-penetrations including formed, sleeved, or cored openings sin smoke and fire rated masonry, concrete and/or gypsum structural floors and ceilings. .7 Apply to both sides of control and sway joints and deflection spaces in fire rated masonry or stud walls. (Top of fire resistance rated masonry, concrete and gypsum board partitions) including control joints at intersections of the following fire- resistance-rated walls, assemblies and/or building components with one another; masonry, gypsum board, concrete and vertical beams. Single application in floor control joints, including perimeter curtain or precast exterior wall to slab joints. 8 Apply to the back of electrical plug-ins and other receptacles. Use intumescent, permanently pliable pads specifically designed for this purpose, such as Nelson Flameseal 2 pads. .9 Apply 12 .7 mm bead of Service Penetration Firestop caulking at interface of retaining angles around fire-dampers, where retaining angles meet fire-rated walls/floors/ceilings or membranes thereof as well as interface of retaining angles and duct or fire damper. This means two bead per side, four beads per damper. Caulk in strict compliance with manufacturer' s instructions in order to prevent toxic gases and smoke from penetrating opening. 10 Apply at unpenetrated openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistance rated separations. . 11 Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside busducts) shall be provided as part of the Work of Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. Fire stopping and smoke seal around the outside of such mechanical and electrical assemblies where they penetrate rated fire separations shall be part of �] the Work of this Section. ■ SECTION 07270 - FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL Page: 07270-4 ---------------------------------------------------- 3.1 INSTALLATION (cont 'd. ) . 12 Where necessary, remove insulation from insulated pipe and duct where such pipes or ducts penetrate a fire separation, unless U.L.C. certified assembly permits such insulation to remain within the assembly. 3.2 PENETRATION SIZING . 1 The following shall regulate the sizing of service penetrations to be firestopped in an effort to standardize and minimize penetration sizes: . 1 Single, circular penetrants shall be sleeved by Section 15 and 16 respectively. Multiple penetrations of circular penetrants shall be considered such, if the circular penetrants are no further than 100 mm apart. The forming of such multiple penetrations shall be created by the respective trades, who erect the fire separations by forming and open, square or rectangular, box around the multiple penetrants. This box, or frame, shall have a maximum 25 mm clearance around the outer penetrants. . 2 Penetrations with square penetrants shall be created in the same manner as the above mentioned multiple, circular penetrant penetrations. The only difference here is that the maximum clearance between penetrant and penetration shall be a maximum of 5o mm. . 3 An exception to that rule is the fire dampers, which require a design specific clearance around them. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM------------- Page_ 07350-1 ----------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Dampproof Coursing Section 04200 .2 Cutting Reglets in Masonry Section 04200 3 Wood cant strips, blocking, curbs, nailers and insulation stops Section 06100 .4 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 1 Execute Work of this Section only by a subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform Work expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least the immediate five years. . 2 Ensure that materials, including adhesives, meet requirements of jurisdictional authorities and regulatory agencies. Ensure that roofing materials, including adhesive and roof anchorage are listed by Factory Mutual as approved roofing components. .3 Perform all Work of this Section to applicable standard in Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) and Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) . 1.3 WARRANTY . 1 Provide a written guarantee stating that the membrane manufacturer will guarantee to replace at its own expense any portion or all of the roofing membrane which experiences actual leaks resulting from defects in the workmanship or in the manufacturer of the roofing membrane for a period of ten years from date of completion of Project. .2 Provide a written guarantee stating that the Contractor will guarantee to repair or replace at its own expense any actual leaks in the roofing membrane, flashing membrane resulting from faulty workmanship for a period of ten years . 1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING . 1 An independent Inspection and Testing Agency, nominated by the Consultant, will be appointed to inspect and test Roofing and Sheet Metal Work, and shall be paid under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07350-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 4 INSPECTION AND TESTING (cont'd. ) .2 Arrange Site meeting with Roofing Inspector three weeks prior to commencement of Work on Site. Obtain Inspector's instructions re procedures to be followed. . 3 Co-operate with the Inspector and afford all facilities necessary j to permit full inspection of the Work and testing of materials prior to their use. Act immediately on instructions given by the Inspector. . 4 Ensure that a technical representative from the membrane manufacturer is present to make cut-outs for testing purposes when required and make good roofing without additional cost to the Owner. 1. 5 SPECIAL PROTECTION . 1 Schedule the roofing installation so that all unnecessary work or traffic over the finished roof will be avoided. .2 Protect the Work of other Trades from soiling or other damage during the application of the roofing materials and make good any damage caused by these operations, all to the approval of the Consultant, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. 6 PREPARATORY WORK . 1 Obtain copy of roof deck level tabulation and advise Consultant in writing of any deviation from the specified tolerance. . 2 Prior to the application of any roofing material examine the deck and ensure that any defect of level or construction is corrected before proceeding with the Work. . 3 Sweep deck completely free of all dust, dirt and debris. The roof deck must be dry, smooth and free prior to the application of any roofing materials. . 4 Inspect wood blockings, cant and marine grade plywood where called for on Drawings. Do NOT install roofing over such items if method of attachment is inadequate to withstand stresses imposed by thermal movement of roofing components. . 5 Commencement of Work implies acceptance of prepared surfaces. 1. 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Manufactured roofing materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's original unopened containers and rolls with labels intact and Legible. Where materials are governed by a referenced specification number, type and class, as applicable. •' SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07350-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (cont'd. ) . 2 Materials shall be in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of Work. Roll materials and insulation shall be handled,protected and stored so that they will be installed in a dry and undamaged condition. Wet and damaged materials shall be marked and permanently removed from the Site. Store adhesives and caulking at temperatures above 5 degrees C. 3 Materials temporary stored on the roof shall be distributed to stay within the live load limits of the roof construction. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. .4 Storage, walking, wheeling or trucking will NOT be permitted, directly on roof surfaces, unless protective runways or platforms are provided and used. Equipment for roofing Work shall not damage deck during roofing operations. 5 Post " NO SMOKING " signs in areas where materials are stored. 1.8 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit samples of roofing membrane, flashing membrane and ballast and manufacturer's literature before ordering materials and proceeding with Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Insulation: Protherm glass fibre reinforced polyisocyanurate foam conforming to CAN/CGSB 51-26-M86 as distributed by Prospex Roofing Products Inc. , factory cut complete with necessary clips for roof area over semi-circular atrium. .2 Roofing Membrane (non-exposed) : PMA 1.2 mm polyvinyl chloride (PVC) membrane, non-woven glassfiber reinforced. Tensile strength ASTM D-412; Elongation at Break ASTM D-412; Hardness (Shore A) ASTM 2204; Shrinkage ASTM D-1204; Colour to Consultant's later selection; Thickness 0. 047" Compliance CGSB 37-GP-5 (Type 2) Class A, ULC rated. . 3 Roofing Membrane (exposed) : LL 1.2 mm, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) membrane, non-woven glassfiber reinforced, UV resistant, Tensile Strength ASTM D-412; Elongation at Break ASTM D-412; Hardness (Shore A) ASTM 2204; Fire Resistance ASTM E108; Shrinkage ASTM D-1204; Colour to Consultant's later selection; Thickness 0. 047". Compliance CGSB 37-GP-54M (Type 2) Class B, ULC Rated. I: SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Page:07350-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .4 Adhesive: Profix 1700, elastomer solvent based, colour light brown, viscosity 800 cps. . 5 Sealant: Proflex, silicone base, one component sealing compound, colour grey. Sarna primer for Sarnaplast 2260. . 6 Tape: Protape isobutyl, colour grey, 3 mm x 35 mm (1/8" x 110) . .7 Perimeter Fixing: Prostrip 473 . No alternatives to this System will be accepted. PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3. 1 APPLICATION . 1 Install insulation over metal decking to complete area as indicated on Drawings. . 2 Roofing Membrane, mechanically fastened: Unroll Proseal PMA membrane and draw tight without folds or wrinkles. Progressively as membrane is laid, immediately install ballast as appropriate. . 3 Flashing: Adhere Proseal LL membrane and Profix 1700 adhesive to all vertical areas and flashings. Using a solvent- resistant paint roller, coat surface with Profix 1700 at a rate of 0.50 gal. per 100 sq.ft. and allow to dry minimum 1 hr. Do not apply under excessively humid conditions or at temperatures below - 10 Degrees C. (14 Deg.F. ) . Do not coat more sunstrate than can be covered with membrane in one day. .4 Unroll membrane in position and turn back 1/3 of its width. Coat underside of membrane with Sarnacol 2170 at a rate of 0.5 gal. per 100 sq. ft. and allow to dry just sufficiently to produce "strings" when touched with a finger. Turn down membrane carefully onto the coated surface and press solidly down. Repeat procedure with remaining 2/3 of membrane width. .5 Avoid any adhesive at lap area. Clean with Sarnacleaner if necessary. . 6 General: Hot air weld all seams in strict accordance with Prospex Roofing Products Inc. 's printed instructions and as per instructions provided in Sarnafil Canada Ltd. 's welding Seminar. - Only Leister Triac and Sarnamat welding equipment are accepted for performing welds. SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM-------------------Page_07350_5-- ----------------------------------------- 3 . 1 APPLICATION (cont'd. ) - Welding surface must be clean and dry and free of any foreign particles. If necessary, clean welding surface with a damp cloth or Sarnacleaner and allow 30 minutes drying time. - Prior to commencement of welding process, determine correct temperature setting and welding speed of equipment using test samples. .7 Hand Welding: Perform hand welding in three stages: . 1 Tack weld overlap at 900 mm (31011) o.c. .2 Preweld back edge with continuous seam at approximately 0.5" width. . 3 Final weld outside edge with continuous seam of approximately 0.5 to 1" width. .8 For straight laps use a 1-1/2" wide nozzle. For corners and compound use a 5/8" wide nozzle. Remove membrane residue collected at nozzle with steel brush prior to start of new seam. Welding speed ranges from 1 to 2 ft. per minute. .9 Machine Welding: Perform machine welding as per welding-machine instructions. Continuously guide and supervise welding-machine during entire welding process. Remove membrane residue collected at nozzle with steel wire brush at least every 65 ft. and prior to start of new seam. Welding speed ranges 8 to 10 ft.per minute. .10 Joint Overlap: Lap side and end joints minimum 2" for hand welding; 4" for machine welding over insulation board; and minimum 3" for machine welding over other surfaces. . 11 Prospex materials over . 07811: Taper membrane at cross joints approximately 1" with grinder or Sarnaplane prior to commencement of welding process. 12 Testing Welds: Check all seams for continuity after completion by use of a screwdriver. Visible evidence of good welding is smoke development during the welding process, shiny membrane surface and an uninterrupted extrusion bead of melted material from the joint. . 13 Metal Flashing: Install a continuous strip of Protape between parapet and metal flashing to stop windblown water. 14 Install all. roof drains as required. . 15 Do all caulking and sealing as required to make roof a complete weathertight installation. SECTION 07350 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07350-6 r --------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSPECTION OF MEMBRANE AND FLASHING . 1 Inspect completed membrane and flashings for punctures, tears and discontinuous seams. Apply additional layer of membrane over punctures and tears, extending minimum 4" beyond damaged areas in all directions, and heat weld. Re-weld where necessary. 3 . 3 CLEAN UP . 1 Promptly as the Work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the premises all rubbish and surplus materials. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07460 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING ------ Pages 07460-1 --------------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Structural Steel Section 05120 . 2 Preformed Metal Siding Section 07465 . 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 1.2 WARRANTY . 1 Submit a warranty as specified under General Conditions of the Contract stating that the preformed metal roofing will remain free from all failures for an extended period of five years. 1. 3 QUALIFICATIONS 1 Installation of preformed metal roofing shall be by manufacturer' s construction forces, or by an accredited applicator under direct control and responsibility of manufacturer, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. . 2 Perform welding to requirements of CAN/CSA W-59-1989. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS . 1 Submit shop drawings and erection drawings of preformed metal roofing, incorporating design conditions. .2 Shop drawings shall clearly show and describe in detail, materials, fastening devices, fastener spacing, flashings, trim, caulking, finishes, rough wood carpentry and forming, erection details, and relationship to adjoining Work. 3 Wherever practicable, take field dimensions and check against Drawings.Do no fabrication until in receipt of reviewed Drawings. 1. 5 SAMPLES . 1 Submit one (1) sample of panel in colour selected for approval prior to delivery on Site. 1. 6 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 Unload and handle siding panels using methods recommended by manufacturer, and of not pile higher than one unit strapped load. .2 Retain metal strapping until immediately before erection of panels. SECTION 07460 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING Page: 07460-2 r -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 6 PRODUCT HANDLING (cont'd. ) .3 Store clear of ground on wooden stringers of full sheet width, spaced 750 mm maximum. .4 Keep stock piled panels dry with plastic tied-down covers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Sheet Metal - Unpassivated galvanized coil coated steel sheet in accordance with requirements of ASTM A446-73, Grade A, with zinc coating designation of ASTM A525-73 , Z275. . 2 Preformed Metal Roofing - MRC-300 22 ga. by Peerless Enterprises Ltd. or approved alternate by the Consultant in writing. . 3 Coatings - Apply finish coating of silicone modified polyester paint equivalent in performance and mil thickness to 10, 000 Series to requirements of CSSBI Technical Bulletin No. 5. Colour: from manufacturer's standard colours to later selection by the Consultant, or as indicated on Legend on Drawings. .4 Insulation - Semi-rigid batt to thickness and R-Value as indicated on Drawings, as manufactured by Owens-Corning Fibreglas Canada Limited, or approved alternative. . 5 Ice Shield: Self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt bounded to polyolefin sheeting 1 mm thick, as manufactured by W.R.Grace & Co. , " Ice and Water Shield" . . 6 Fasteners - concealed fasteners: No. 12 teks. self-drilling, self-tapping galvanized screws. Metal roofing, flashing and all trim members; Series 400 stainless steel and nylon colored coated head to match substrate colour, Atlas "Colormate", or similar by Pioneer Screw and Nut Co. . 7 Internal Sub-Grits, Thermal Clips and Accessories - minimum 1. 65 mm galvanized formed sheet steel in accordance with requirements of ASTM A446-73 , Grade A, with zinc coating designation ASTM A525 -73, 2275. Thermal clips shall be appropriately slotted to minimize through-metal conductivity. .8 Sealants - 1 component polysulphide sealant or epoxy urethane in accordance with CAN/CGSB 19. 13-M82 . Select colour to match adjacent panels at exposed bead locations. SECTION 07460 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING------------------- Page_07460_3 --- --------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) 9 Field Touch-Up Paint - Zinc rich anti-corrosion primer, W. R. Meadows "Galvafroid: , Grade SB and top coating of type and colour to match finish sheet. . 10 Flashing: Provide to Section 07600 sufficient flat material for the flashing and sheet metal work adjacent to the metal roofing where colour is required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION 1 Erect preformed metal roofing and accessories in strict accordance with reviewed shop and erection drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 2 Co-operate with other trades to ensure proper installation and anchorage of this Work. . 3 Damaged, bent or dished sheets will be rejected. . 3 For ice dam protection cut the specified self-adhering membrane into 1 - 600 mm lengths and re-roll. Peel back 250 - 750 mm of release paper, align the membrane on the lower edge of the roof and .place the first 250 - 750 mm. Pull the release paper under the membrane and continue to peel it from the membrane. Press the membrane in place. Roll lower edges firmly with a hand roller. .4 Place metal wall against supporting structure and adjust to final position before permanently securing. Bring each unit to bear evenly on framing. 5 Align units to provide accurate fit with corresponding sections r; parallel and straight. Ensure complete nesting of interlocking and sealed side lap joint and fasten sheets as indicated on Drawings. . 6 Install necessary closures and trim. or neoprene closures at openings and penetrations, fastening at 300 mm c. Make cut-outs neatly by saw cutting. .7 Rigidly connect all pre-coloured flashing pieces with specified colour matching fasteners at 300 mm c along length. Use preformed corner pieces and erect with ample allowance for thermal movement. 8 Where welding has been performed on this Work, or field cutting or scratches have been made, field coat such areas with touch- up paint after thoroughly cleaning affected surfaces. SECTION 07460 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING Page: 07460-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 CLEANING . 1 Remove debris and surplus materials from Site upon completion of Work. .2 Clean dirt, soil and misplaced sealants from metal roofing panels with recommended cleaners and solvents. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 07511 - 4-PLY BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM--------- Page_07511-1 --------------------------------------------- ----------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Carpentry Section 06100 .2 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 1.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1 Do not store roof insulation in direct contact with the earth, road surface, or roof deck. Place suitable supports under the insulation upon delivery to protect it from absorbing dampness from the surrounding terrain or deck. 1.3 PROTECTION 1 Protect walls where hoisting is necessary. Locate kettles so that smoke and fumes will not discolour the buildings or become a nuisance to adjacent owners or the public. - � 2 Protect roofs from damage due to traffic and material handling until completion of the building. 1.4 WARRANTY 1 Warranty specified under General Conditions of the Contract shall be extended in writing by the installer for a period of seven years and the mebrane manufacturer for seven years. 1.5 SAMPLES OF METAL FLASHINGS . 1 Submit samples of fabricated sheet metal work showing method of forming joints, seams, expansion joints, stiffeners and anchors. 1. 6 INSPECTION AND TESTING . 1 An independent inspection and testing agency, nominated by the Consultant, will be appointed to inspect and test Roofing and Sheet Metal Work. .2 Arrange site meeting with Roofing Inspector three weeks prior to commencement of work on site. Obtain Inspector's instructions with reference to procedures to be followed. 3 Cooperate with the Inspector and afford all facilities necessary to permit full inspection of the work and testing of materials prior to their use. Act immediately on instructions given by the Inspector. .4 Make cut-outs for testing purposes when required and make good roofing without additional cost to the Owner. i rt. SECTION 07511 - 4-PLY BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07511-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING (cont'd. ) . 5 Payment of the inspection and testing agency to be made under Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS .1 Fibreboard: 12 . 7 mm as supplied by Domtar Building Materials, or approved alternative. . 2 Asphalt for use on roofs not exceeding a slope of 111; in 1 '-0 111; (25mm in 300mm) 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) melt complying with the CSA Standard A123-4 Type 1. . 3 Asphalt for use on roofs with a slope over 2" in 1 ' -011; (50mm in 300mm) 210 degrees F (99 degrees C) melt complying with the CSA Standard A123-4 Type 3 . .4 Asphalt for use on roofs with a slope of 1"-2" in 1 '-011 ; (25mm to 50mm in 300mm) 170 degrees F (76. 6 degrees C) melt complying with CSA Standard A123-4 Type 2 . . 5 Asphalt primer - comply with CGSB Specification 37-GP-9Ma. . 6 Asphalt saturated roofing felt-perforated No. 15. Type complying with CSA Standard A123-3M. .7 Asphalt felts and asphalt - compatible materials supplied by one manufacturer. .8 Gravel - water washed, clean, dry and free from dust. All particles shall be rounded and shall be uniformly graded in size from 1/4" to 5/8" (6mm to 16mm) . .9 Vapour Barrier - Dura-Perm on Dura-Perm adhesive. . 10 Rigid Insulation - RX-ISO - 2 layers of 38 mm thickness as distributed by Domtar Building Materials Ltd. , or other approved manufacturer. . 11 Tapered Insulation - as manufactured by Posi-Slope Canada Ltd. , or Acuplane Ltd. . 12 Flexible Membrane Waterproofing - as recommended by Domtar Building Materials Ltd. . 13 Control Joints - as recommended by the Roofing Contractor in accordance with C.R.C.A. Standards. 'i SECTION 07511 - 4-PLY BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07511-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Minimize exposure of the deck to the elements by proceeding as soon as the roof deck is completed. Do not work during rain, fog, sleet, ice or snow. Warm felts and gravel before using in cold weather. .2 Use materials in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations. . 3 Follow Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractor's Association Good Practice and Minimum Standards Code latest revision when higher application standards are not specified or shown. . 4 Maintain equipment in good condition. Equip kettles with thermometers which will accurately register the temperature of the bitumen at all times. Do not heat asphalt over 450 degrees F (232 degrees C) . Unless otherwise specified, temperatures at the time of mopping shall be between 350 - 400 degrees F (176.6 to 232 degrees C) for Type 1 asphalt and between 375 - 425 degrees F (190 to 218 degrees C) for Type 2 and Type 3 asphalts. 3 .2 INSULATION . 1 Install vapour barrier in the widest available width. 2 Lay insulation in parallel courses. Stagger joints between pieces. Lay insulation in two layers of 38 mm thickness, staggering joints 12" (300mm) between layers and laminate the insulation with a continuous and uniform coating of bitumen at the rate of 20 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. (lkg/sq.m. ) of roof area. 3 Take care to ensure that no voids exist between the roof surface and the underside of the insulation or between pieces of insulation. Where insulation butts a sloping surface, trim the insulation to the profile of that surface. .4 Trim insulation to provide plain butt joints at the perimeter of the insulation, at copings, parapets, curbs, where the insulation meets a vertical surface passing through roof, and at water cut-offs and trim off ship lap or bevel on edges in these locations. 5 Apply only as much insulation to the roof as can be covered the same day with fibreboard. At the conclusion of each day's work, seal exposed edges of roof insulation. This seal shall be cut and lifted upon continuation of the work. SECTION 07511 - 4-PLY BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07511-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 3 FIBREBOARD . 1 Install fibreboard over insulation with long side parallel to flutes of steel deck. Provide full support at ends. Cut and trim boards to provide plain butt joints at perimeter, parapet, curbs, etc. Lay boards in parallel course, butted together in moderate contact without gaps, with staggered end joints. 3 .4 BUILT-UP ROOFING . 1 Install four-ply felt and gravel built-up roofing to all roof surfaces over fibreboard. .2 Mop the surface of the fibreboard with a uniform and continuous coating of bitumen into which immediately embed four plies of saturated felt. Lap each ply 27-1/2" (700mm) over the preceding lap and mop the full 27-1/2" (700mm) under each lap, leaving no areas unmopped. All areas shall be covered with minimum four plies of felt embedded immediately in bitumen, Broom each ply to ensure full adhesion. .3 Apply felts smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths, prominent lap joints or tears. Lap the end joints at least 6" (150mm) and avoid end joints coinciding with under- laying joints. Terminate all roofing felt plies at the top of incline slope of cants. Over the entire surface of the top felts, pour a continuous coating of bitumen, into which immediately embed a layer of clean, dry gravel, levelled and clearly spread. . 4 After the first pour coat has been completed and the gravel applied, sweep (not scrape) the roof free of loose gravel. Over the swept roof pour a second continuous coating of bitumen into which immediately embed a second layer of dry, clean gravel. Remove excess gravel from the roof. Repair areas where bubbles of bitumen bleed through the surface. . 5 Do not leave felts uncovered at the conclusion of work session. Cover them up with a mop coat of bitumen, or install the final pour coat and gravel. . 6 Do not extend built-up roofing felts beyond top of any cant strip. Secure the roofing felts to the cants which permit nailing with large head galvanized nails at 6" (150mm) o.c. to c. on other cants. Mop solidly to the cants with bitumen. 3 . 5 BALLAST . 1 Carefully spread ballast to an even thickness over entire roof at a rate of 16.36 kg per m square. . 2 After installation of metal flashing, push ballast up base of metal for a depth of 50 mm (211) to secure toe of flashing. SECTION 07511 - 4-PLY BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM Page: 07511-5 --------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- 3 .6 ROOF VENTS . 1 Supply and install roof vents to all areas as indicated on Drawing. I � 3 .7 PAVING STONES . 1 Paver Pedestals: 115X Pave-E1 Pedestal" by Envirospec Inc. , honeycomb structure high density polyethylene with vertical rspacing ribs complete with 3 mm levelling plates where necessary. 2 Precast Slabs: 600 mm x 600 mm x 50 mm precast concrete slabs of _ 25 MPa standard grey concrete with 6% air entrainment suitably reinforced. .2 Install paving stones on paver pedestals to manufacturer's written instructions to areas as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION j � DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL-------------- Page_ 07600-1 ---------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Flashing Inserts Section 03300 .2 Through-Wall Flashing Section 04200 . 3 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System Section 07511 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 1 Work of this Section shall be executed by same trade specialists performing Work under Section 07511 in accordance with practices and details of SMACNA Architectural Manual (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. ) 1. 3 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit typical 300 mm long sample of flashing indicating design method of locking and method of anchoring and corner section fabricated from materials specified. 1. 4 WARRANTY . 1 Contractor hereby Warrants that Work performed under this Section shall remain free against leakage, joint spalling and similar defects in accordance with General Conditions, but for a period of five years. 1. 5 INSPECTION AND TESTING . 1 Inspection and testing of this Work is included in inspection and testing of roofing and roof insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS 1 Metal Flashing: Minimum 22 ga. prefinished sheet steel supplied in flat sheet stock, colour as selected by Consultant. .2 Nails: Chromium/Nickel, No. 12 x 25 mm flat headed, annular- threaded stainless steel. a ■. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page: 07600-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 3 Cleats, Starter Strips and Back-up Plates: Same metal and thickness as metal flashing; cleats minimum 38 mm wide and interlocked with metal flashing; starter strips, continuous. Back-up plates minimum 300 mm wide where adjacent lengths of cap flashing meet, fabricated of same material thickness and finish as cap flashing. .4 Screws, Bolts and Expansion Shields: Non-ferrous metal compatible with adjacent surfaces. Exposed fastenings; same materials as metal surfaces through which they penetrate. Use cadmium plated screws with round heads suitable for soldering for galvanized Work. .5 Solder: ASTM B32-70, 50% block tin and 50% pig lead. . 6 Flux: Commercial hydrochloric acid cut with zinc, or 10%-20% solution of orthophosphoric acid in water, for use with galvanized Work. .7 Sealant: One component polysulphide sealant, CAN2-19-13-M82 . . 8 Flashing Paint: CGSB 1-GP-108c; Flintkote "Primer 910-02" or "Ace-of-Spades" quick drying asphaltic base paint. 2.2 FABRICATION . 1 Where possible, shop fabricate flashing components in accordance with applicable requirements of SMACNA Architectural Manual. . 2 Carry out fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where carbon steel is torch cut, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon steel dust will not be embedded in prefinished surfaces. Clean tools and dies which have been used on carbon steel prior to fabrication to prevent contamination of surface with carbon steel dust. . 3 Form sheet metal on bending brake. Perform shaping, trimming and hand seaming on bench, where practicable, using proper sheet metal working tools. . 4 Form sections square, true and accurate to size. Flashings shall be free from distortion, waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to appearance and performance. . 5 Make allowances for thermal movement when forming, installing, interlocking and soldering sheet metal Work to avoid buckling, fullness of metal straining of joints or seams. Maximum length of flashing pieces; 2400 mm. Double back exposed edges at least 12 .7 mm for appearance and stiffness. II SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page: 07600-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2 FABRICATION (cont'd. ) 6 Fabricate flashings, copings, closures, plastic boxes, pipe sleeves and flashings for roof mounted equipment to details shown, unless otherwise indicated. . 7 Wipe and wash clean, soldered joints immediately after joint is soldered to remove acid. .8 Where soldered joints are absolutely necessary and where approved for use in prepainted metal, clean paint off both surfaces before soldering for minimum area necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 2 INSTALLATION 1 Carry out Work in accordance with industry standard sheet metal practice with joints lapped, locked, cleated with "S" cleats and caulked or soldered as required. Hem exposed edges 12 .7 mm. Type of joints used shall be adequate for various conditions, subject to approval. 2 Fabricate exposed fastening, where used, in such a manner as to prevent water penetration at point of fastening. . 3 Provide starter strips where indicated or required to present true, non-waving, leading edge. Anchor to back-up to provide rigid, secure installation. 4 Make end joints where adjacent lengths of metal flashing meet using 300 mm long back-up flashing secured in place before installing flashing. Apply beads of caulking compound on face of back-up plate to seal ends of metal flashing. Leave 12 . 7 mm wide space between end of adjacent lengths of metal flashings. Fabricate back-up of same material and finish as metal flashing with which it is being used. Make back-up plate exact profile of flashing allowing for thickness of flashing joints. . 5 Form metal fascia with inner edge extended over fascia top and ` down cant to meet roofing aggregate. Nail with roofing nails and neoprene washers at 300 mm C. Avoid placing nails in face of fascia, through membrane or flashing. 6 Interlock counter flashing pieces with prepainted metal base flashing and fold locking seam into position ensuring complete sealing. Continue counter flashing down to hemmed and sprung position at base of cant and junction of aggregate. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page: 07600-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) . 7 Provide underlay of resin sized paper under sheet metal installed over masonry, concrete or wood. Lay underlay dry as sheet metal Work is installed. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm. . 8 Imperfections in sheet metal Work such as holes, dents, creases, or oil-canning is cause for rejection. .9 Repair damaged sheet metal Work, wash entire installation down, and leave in neat condition. . 10 Provide all flashings required for proper execution and completion of the Work in acceptable manner including metal flashing around mechanical and other equipment occurring on roof. END OF SECTION ' DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 07820 - ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS-------------------- Page_07820_1 - � ---------------------------------- ------- PART 1 - GENERAL i 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing Section 07511 .2 Sealants Section 07900 . 3 Aluminum Windows Section 08520 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. 2 Clearly indicate size and description of components, materials, attachment devices, finishes, flashing details, verification of design criteria and construction details. . 3 Skylights and support structures to be completely engineered by the Skylight Manufacturer. The manufacturer shall employ an Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, to stamp all shop drawings prior to submission to the Consultant. This manufacturer shall be responsible for the complete fabrication and installation of this portion of the i Work. 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA . 1 Skylights to withstand snow loads and wind uplifts anticipated by climatic conditions as stated in Ontario Building Code for the area of the work based on minimum 30 year return; without damage to system or permanent deflection of seals. . 2 Adjust and seal assembly with provisions for expansion and contraction of components. . 3 Design skylights and support structure to the following minimum performance requirements: . 1 Deflection: Maximum deflection of any member not to exceed L/175 or .875" whichever is smaller under negative and positive design load. . 2 Air Infiltration: Maximum 0. 033 C.F.M. per square foot under a test pressure of 1. 56 p.s.f. (74 . 7 Pa) . . 3 Water Infiltration: Zero at the above pressure under water- spray of 5 gals. per minute for 15 consecutive minutes. .4 Thermal Expansion Allowance: Design system to take a temperature difference of 85 degrees C. without putting stresses in any member or sealants. SECTION 07820 - ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS Page: 07820-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 3 DESIGN CRITERIA (cont'd. ) .5 Design system on the heat sink principle with the greater part of the structure to the interior. . 6 System to have internal drainage channels placed into exterior pressure zone. .7 System to be pressure equalized. Air seal to be achieved with continuous polyisobutylene shim tape on inner and outer face of glass. Tape to be fused at intersections. .8 Purlins to be designed on overlap shingle principle and ' "dump" water into rafter channels, joints to be sealed, mechanically fixed to allow for expansion and contraction under temperature changes. No exposed screws at this joint are permitted. .9 Sill to have positive swirl chamber to prevent water blow back. 1. 4 TEST REPORTS . 1 Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories certifying compliance with specifications for: . 1 Air infiltration rates. .2 Water infiltration rates. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA . 1 Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of skylights for incorporation into maintenance manual. 1. 6 WARRANTY . 1 Warranty the total installation in writing to the Owner's for a period of five years after installation is complete. Warranty shall be against structural defects and leakage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 Alloy. .2 Steel: Conforming to CSA G.40.21 Class H. . 3 Thermo-Break: Extruded rigid polyvinyl-chloride. Co-efficient of thermal conductivity 4 .S (BTU/Sce/sq.ft. /fin. 10-4. ) SECTION 07820 - ALUMI:NUM SKYLIGHTS Page: 07820-3 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS .4 Aluminum Sheet: 100 alloy, anodizing quality. .5 Assembly Screws: Stainless Steel. . 6 Fixing Screws and Bolts: Mild steel cadmium plated. .7 Sealant: Conform to CAN/CGSB 19.13 .M82. .8 Glass: Exterior 6 mm (1/411) tinted tempered clear. Interior 6 mm (1/4") laminated clear. . 9 Pressure Plate Compression Screws: Self-sealing nylon capped, cadmium plated self-tapping point A-B. . 10 Shear Transfer Bolt: 1/4-20 stainless steel round head screw with acorn nut and lock washer. !, . 11 Exterior and Interior Seal: Preshimmed polyisobutylene tape. . 12 Glass Support: Rigid P.V.C. - 100 mm (411) wide at 1/4 points. . 13 Setting Block: Neoprene 90 Durameter. 2 . 2 FINISH . 1 Aluminum - Duranar - to Consultant's later selection. 2 . 3 FABRICATION . 1 Skylights shall be Series 2200 as manufactured by Kawneer Ltd. Sherwood Windows Ltd. or Alumicor Ltd. are an approved alternate. . 2 Comply with dimensions, profiles and fabrication details shown on design drawings and as required by manufacturer's standard product fabrication. . 3 Reinforce members for anchorage attachment and of hardware. . 4 Ensure that glazing rebate is provided with depth and width to accommadate specified glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. . 5 Incorporate weepholes to drain off pocketed water. Baffle to prevent entry of driven water to conform to specified performance. . 6 Where fastenings are exposed to dampness or moisture, use cadmium plated steel for steel-to-steel, aluminum for aluminum to aluminum, and stainless steel otherwise, or alternatively for all above. SECTION 07820 - ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS Page: 07820-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .3 FABRICATION (cont'd. ) .7 Where fastenings are not exposed to dampness or moisture, cadmium plated steel may additionally be used for all combinations of metals noted in the proceeding subparagraph. .8 Fabricate skylight units and assemblies to provide for expansion and contraction of component members and between window units when subjected to surface temperatures from -34 deg.0 to 82 deg. C. .9 Protect material from electrolytic action when dissimilar metals are in contact with one another. . 10 Protect aluminum in contact with masonry with a heavy coating of bituminous paint. . 11 Incorporate anchorage to .structure for skylight unit at minimum 450 mm centres and to support skylights adequately when subjected to specified loads. . 12 Allow for complete adjustment in anchorage for levelling and positioning of skylight units during installation. . 13 Incorporate a thermal break in the frame of skylights. . 14 Apply specified finish to conform with manufacturer's standards, and according to coating manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 EXAMINATION . 1 Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or installation are provided for, that allowance is made for possible clearances to other constructions have been maintained. .2 Ensure that anchors and inserts, installed by others, are adequate to meet specified requirements, and make adaptions before installation. 3 .2 INSTALLATION . 1 Install skylights plumb and level as applicable, and in accordance with Shop Drawings, by qualified experienced workers and to conform to fabricator's instructions. .2 Do not force skylight units into place, nor superimpose on them loads for which they are not designed. SECTION 07820 - ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS Page: 07820-5 --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) . 3 Provide for thermal movement to take place between skylight units and adjacent construction. .4 Secure skylights by non-corrosive and inorganic anchorage s materials. .5 Conceal anchors, clips, blocking, and all other attachments. . 6 Install reinforcing and supporting members as specified or indicated as part of the Work of this Section. 7 Seal metal-to-metal joints between components included in the Work of this Section to ensure weathertight assembly, and in accordance with sealant manufacturer's specifications. Support sills throughout their length. .8 Install skylight units with consideration for finish variations. Abrupt variations of appearance or colour in adjacent components will not be acceptable without approval before installation. .9 Caulking between skylight units and adjacent construction at openings, as part of the Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 07900 of this Specification. . 10 Provide all necessary flashing of 3 mm (1/811) thick aluminum sheet, colour to match window framing. 3 . 3 CLEANING . 1 Remove deposits which affect appearance of exposed surfaces of skylight units. .2 Clean interior and exterior surfaces by washing with clear water; or with water, and soap or detergent; followed by a clear water rinse. . 3 Clean and restore stained skylight surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace if cleaning is impossible .4 Final cleaning is specified in Section 01710. 3.4 PROTECTION . 1 Protect prefinished surfaces of metal with protective coatings or wrappings to remain in place until construction completion. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removed, and harmless to finish. . 3 Maintain protection from time of installation to final cleanup in accordance with Section 01710. END OF SECTION t� DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07830 - ROOF HATCHES Page: 07830-1 ---------------------------- ------------------ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE - . 1 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 .2 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System Section 07511 I � . 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 4 Sealants Section 07900 1.2 SUBMITTALS I ■ . 1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01340. 1. 3 SCOPE OF WORK . 1 Install roof hatches to areas as shown on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Roof Hatches - Bilco Type "S", as supplied by Serco Division of Richards-Wilcox or approved alternative. .2 Cover shall be equipped with hold-open arm. Sides shall be provided with an integral cap flashing of the same gauge and materials as the curb; and shall be fully welded at the corners for absolute weathertightness. . 3 Roof hatches shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Hatches shall be single leaf door and of steel construction. Cover and sides shall be 3 mm and cover liner shall be paint- bond galvanized steel. 4 Sides and cover shall be fully insulated with 25 mm rigid foil backed fibreglass. .5 Flanges shall be provided with holes for fastening to roof deck. Hatches shall have heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, latch with turn handles, padlocks hasps inside and outside and neoprene seal. SECTION 07830 - ROOF HATCHES Page: 07830-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .1 INSTALLATION . 1 Set the roof hatches in place as shown on the Drawings and fasten to the roof deck using galvanized steel screws. Co- ordinate this Work with the Work of the roofing trades, to flash units into the roofing membrane. (Flashings to cover fastenings) . END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 07900 --SEALANTS------------------------------------ -1 ----- PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .2 Carpentry and Millwork Section 06110 . 3 Preformed Metal Roofing Section 07460 .4 Preformed Metal Panel System Section 07464 .5 Preformed Metal Siding Section 07465 . 6 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 .7 Aluminum Skylights Section 07820 .8 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 9 Aluminum Windows and Window Wall Section 08520 . 10 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 fi . 11 Tile Section 09310 . 12 Aluminum Louvres Section 10200 ! 1.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS . 1 The products of the following manufacturers are approved for use subject to meeting the specifications for the particular type of sealants listed below. However, this is not an approval to substitute another type of sealant for those specified: . 1 Canadian General Electric Company Limited .2 Dow Corning Silicones Inter-America Limited . 3 Parr Sealant of Canada Limited. .4 PRC Chemical Corporation of Canada Limited. . 5 Sternson Limited . 6 Tremco Manufacturing Company (Canada) Limited .7 W.R.Grace and Company of Canada Limited SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS Page: 07900-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Sealant for exterior locations - one-part primerless, low modulus silicone weatherproofing sealant, CGE Silpruf, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company Limited and conforming to the product properties published. . 2 Sealant for interior and exterior locations - two part polytremdyne 'Dymeric' sealant, manufactured by Tremco. Manufacturing Company (Canada) Limited. . 3 Sealant for exterior locations - two (2) component LP polysulphide base sealant type 2 where subjected to foot traffic and type 1 where not subjected to foot traffic (20-35 Shore A) Class B (non-sag) of formulation and manufacture conforming to building trade performance specification and bearing seal of approval from Thiokol Chemical Corporation and conforming to CAN/ CGSB19.24-M80.The following manufacturers of materials conforming to the above may be used: . 1 `Parmastic' - Parr Sealants of Canada Limited. . 2 `Lastomeric' - Tremco Manufacturing Company (Canada)Limited. . 3 `RUbbercalk 250' - PRC Chemical Corporation. .4 `Duoflex' - Sternson Limited. .4 Sealant for interior locations - one (1) component polysulfide base sealant of formulation and manufacture conforming to the Thiokol building trade performance specification and bearing seal of approval from Thiokol Chemical Corporation and conforming to CAN3-11. 13-M82 . .5 Colours of sealants and caulking when exposed in the finished work - to the approval of the Consultant and shall be of colour additive similar to the predominant material to which the sealants are applied. . 6 Primers for sealing - as manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials. .7 Joint backing material - closed cell foam plastic circular strips, of approved manufacture, compatible with sealant and 50% greater width than joint width. . 8 Cleaning material for surfaces to receive sealant - xylol, methyl -ethyl-ketone, toluol, or as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant. SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS Page: 07900-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 LOCATIONS . 1 Unless sealant is specified to be included in the Work of other Sections, seal with silicone sealant at the junction of the following exterior materials and surfaces plus at other locations where sealant is essential in maintaining the continued integrity of the watertight barrier. . 1 Concrete to metal 2 Concrete to masonry and concrete . 3 Masonry to metal . 4 Masonry to masonry . 5 Metal to metal 6 Junctions of foundation walls and footings . 7 Around pipes and services entering through unit masonry and concrete foundation walls .8 Perimeter of steel frames, metal panels, thresholds, framed openings .9 Perimeter junction of hollow metal frames and screens occurring in Unit Masonry Construction, on both sides to walls . 10 Perimeter of louvre units, mechanical hoods, ducts, etc. occurring in or extending through exterior walls .2 Seal with dymeric sealant at the following interior and exterior locations: 1 At expansion joints .2 At control joints full height in exterior unit masonry construction. Vertical joints will be raked out to a depth of 12 .7 mm under Masonry Section 04200. .3 At control joints full height in interior and exterior unit masonry walls, block back-up of exterior walls. Control joints will occur at maximum 6000 mm in interior unit masonry walls and at intersections of interior unit masonry walls to each other, except corners. Vertical joints will be raked out on both sides of walls to a depth of 12 . 7 mm under Masonry Section 04200. . 3 Seal at the junction of the following interior materials and surfaces using one component polysulphide base sealant unless joints are covered by trim, or unless sealant is specified to be included in other sections. !, . 1 Concrete to metal . 2 Concrete to masonry . 3 Masonry to metal .4 Masonry to masonry `i SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS Page:07900-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 LOCATIONS (cont'd. ) . 3 (cont'd. ) . 5 Metal to metal . 6 Metal to drywall . 7 At junctions full height of intersecting interior masonry walls including at angular corners. Vertical joints on both sides will be raked out to a depth of 12 .7 mm under Masonry Section 04200. .8 Around pipes and services entering through unit masonry and concrete foundation walls. . 9 Perimeter of steel frames, metal panels, thresholds, framed openings. . 10 Perimeter junction of hollow metal frames and screens occurring in Unit Masonry Construction, on both sides,to walls. .4 Seal with `silicone' at the following `interior' locations: . 1 At junction between vanity counters and adjacent substrate with neat 3 mm bead. .2 Around access panels in ceramic tile faced walls with a neat 3 mm bead. .5 Seal, where indicated or specified at locations other than in paragraph 2 . 1.1, 2 . 1. 2, 2 . 1.3, and 2 . 1.4 above, with a one-part sealant unless sealant is specified to be included in other Sections. 3 . 2 SUPERVISION . 1 Unless specified otherwise herein comply with the recommendations and directions of the manufacturer whose materials are being used on the work. .2 Arrange for one of the sealant manufacturer's technical representatives to visit the site prior to the commencement of the sealing to meet with the Contractor and the Consultant. .3 The technical representative shall be consulted and the following items shall be discussed: . 1 Analysis of job and weather conditions .2 Anticipated frequency of joint movement . 3 Shape factor of the joint .4 Correct size of joint for sealant used . 5 Recommendations for priming joints . 6 Durometer hardness of material to be used . 7 Number of beads to be used in the sealing operation SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS Page:07900-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 SUPERVISION (cont'd. ) . 3 (cont'd. ) .8 Inspection of surfaces and joints .9 Make recommendations for sealant installation . 10 Mixing procedures for two (2) part sealants 3 .3 PREPARATION . 1 Clean all joints and spaces to be sealed. •' .2 Ensure that surfaces are structurally sound, free from grease or other contaminants which may adversely affect the adhesion of the sealing materials. Use dry oil free clean compressed air stream if necessary to clean out the joint. .3 Clean surfaces with a solvent or cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant materials. . 4 Install when surfaces and ambient temperatures are suitable for the materials used. .5 Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing is commenced. I� 3 . 4 PRIMING . 1 If recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials prime joints to prevent staining, or to assist the bond,or to stabilize ` porous surfaces. .2 Apply primer with a brush which will permit the priming of all joint surfaces. 3 .5 INSTALLATION . 1 Install joint backing materials at all locations as detailed or where required by sealant manufacturer's printed directions. .2 Install a bondbreaker tape or packing over asphalt impregnated fibre board as recommended by sealant manufacturer. . 3 Ensure that the correct sealant depth is maintained. 4 Finished joints shall be free of wrinkles, sags, air pockets, ridges and embedded impurities. 5 Tool all sealant surfaces to produce a smooth surface. SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS Page: 07900-6 --------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 5 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) . 6 Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses and before material sets. .7 Sealing materials shall be gun grade or tool grade consistency to suit the joint conditions. .8 Commence sealing only after all adjacent surfaces have been painted under Painting Section. 3 .6 MASKING . 1 Where necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, mask the areas adjacent to the joints with masking tape. END OF SECTION DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METALWORK Page: 08100-1 -------------------------------- ---------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . 1 Conform to Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Doors and Frames. published by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association, dated February 1982 except as specified therein. 1. 2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Installation of Pressed Steel Frames Section 04200 and Section 09250 .2 Installation of Hollow Metal Doors Section 04200 . 3 Installation of Hardware. Section 06200 .4 Finish Hardware (Supply only) Section 08710 . 5 Glazing Section 08800 . 6 Painting Section 09900 1. 3 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01340. .2 Clearly indicate each type of door, frame, material, gauge, mortises, reinforcements and anchors. . 3 Do not fabricate until Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Consultant. 1.4 MEASUREMENTS . 1 Where work is to be built into existing openings, measurements shall be taken on site at the actual location of the work. The work shall be fabricated to job measurements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Steel Sheet - Commercial grade hot rolled steel to ASTM-A526-71 with "wiped coated" zinc finish to ASTM-A525-71, 0. 25 oz.per sq.ft. .2 Reinforcing Steel - To CAN-G40.21-M81 Type 33W hot dip galvanized with minimum zinc coating G90 to CSA G. 164-M1981. SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METALWORK Page: 08100-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .3 Insulation - Loose fibreglass,minimum density 1. 5 lbs. /cu.ft. (24Kg per cu.m) . .4 Door Bumpers - Black neoprene. .5 Primer - Zinc rich to CGSB-I-GP-181M. .6 Core Material - Resin impregnated, rot resistant kraft honeycomb for interior doors, rigid polyurethane board stock foam insulation for exterior doors to CGSB-5I-GP-21M. Fire rated doors to conform to U.L.C. requirements. .7 Georgian Wired Glass: Clear conforming to CAN/CGSB 12 . 7 . 2 . 2 METAL THICKNESS Gauge Inches mm . 1 Frames & Framing 16 . 060 1. 5 .2 Doors , Surface Sheets 18 . 048 1.2 Top and bottom end channels 18 . 048 1. 2 . 3 Accessories Lock and strike reinforcement 16 . 060 1. 5 Hinge reinforcement 10 . 135 3 .4 Flush bolt reinforcement 16 . 060 1.5 Reinforcement for surface applied hardware 12 . 105 2 .7 Mortar guard boxes 22 .030 0.76 `. Jamb floor anchors 16 . 060 1. 5 Jamb spreaders 18 .048 1. 2 .4 Anchors 'T' - Strap Type 16 . 060 1.5 'L' - Strap Type 18 .048 1.2 Stud Type 18 . 048 1. 2 2 .3 FABRICATION OF WELDED FRAMES AND SCREENS . 1 Construct framing in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings. . 2 Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames and reinforcement to receive hardware using templates provided. SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METALWORK Page: 08100-3 --------------------- •----------------------------------------------------- 2 .3 FABRICATION OF WELDED FRAMES AND SCREENS (cont'd. ) 3 Install 3 bumpers on strike jamb of frame for each single door and two bumpers at head of double door frames. 4 Protect strike, hinge and overhead concealed door closer reinforcement completely by guard boxes welded to frame. .5 Weld in 2 channel spreaders per frame, to ensure proper frame alignment. . 6 Where frames terminate at finished floor, provide floor plates for anchorage to structural slab. .7 Cut mitre accurately and weld continuously on inside of frame profile. . 8 Grind welded corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish. NOTE: Neatly mitred and reinforced corners will be accepted subject to Consultant's approval of sample prior to bidding. . 9 Fill surface depressions and butted joints with metallic paste and sand to a uniform smooth finish. . 10 Provide 3 7' strap adjustable jamb anchors per jamb for frames up to 7 '-0" (2133 mm) high to be installed in masonry walls. Provide additional anchor for each 210" (600 mm) over 7 ' -0" (2133 mm) high. . 11 Provide steel anchors of suitable design for frames to be stalled in stud partitions and for frames adjacent to precast concrete. Securely wedge or weld anchor inside each jamb as follows: . 1 Frames up to 7 '-0" (2286 mm) high - 4 anchors per jamb. .12 Insulate frames for exterior doors with fibreglass for full height and depth. 2.4 FABRICATION OF DOORS . 1 Construct doors in accordance with details and approved shop drawings, fully welded construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. .2 Assemble doors with full sheets laminated under pressure to honeycomb core. .3 Reinforce and frame openings required for glazing. Provide glazing stops with countersunk flat head screws. SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METALWORK Page: 08100-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4 FABRICATION OF DOORS (cont'd. ) .4 Mortise, reinforce, tap and drill doors and reinforcement to receive hardware using templates provided by hardware supplier. Refer to Finishing Hardware Schedule for mounting heights. . 5 Provide sound deadening and thermal insulation material to fill all voids in doors. . 6 Assemble components by means of spot or arc welding. .7 Fit exterior doors and all interior stair doors with flush steel channel caps at top of door and seal against moisture penetration. .8 Provide condensate weep holes at bottom of exterior doors. 2 .5 SHOP PAINTING . 1 Wipe coated steel frames: touch up areas where wipe coating has been removed using zinc rich paint. . 2 Wipe coated steel doors: touch up areas where wipe coating has been removed, using zinc rich paint, and apply one full coat of rust inhibitive primer to CGSB-I-GP-105M. . 3 . Uncoated Steel - Apply one coat rust inhibitive primer conforming to CGSB-I-GP-105M. 2 . 6 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES . 1 Supply fire door and frame assemblies to meet fire resistance time rating called for and carry the appropriate U.L.C. label. .2 Fire doors and frames shall be installed as tested and approved by a nationally recognized agency having a factory inspection service. .3 Locate label on frame on jamb midway between top hinge and head of door frame. Provide labels on door edge, hinge side. . 4 Provide label on hanging edge of door near frame. 2 .7 HARDWARE PREPARATION . 1 Templated hardware: prepare work in accordance with templates supplied under Section 08710. SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METALWORK Page: 08100-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.7 HARDWARE PREPARATION (cont'd. ) .2 Reinforce doors and frames for concealed, mortised and surface mounted hardware. Steel reinforcing shall be positioned by welding and meet the minimum thickness requirements listed in Table 1, "Thickness of Steel for Component Parts" in the "Canadian Manufacturing Standards for Steel Doors and Frames" , published by the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association. . 3 Drill and tap doors and frames for templated hardware. .4 Provide door closer reinforcement at exterior doors and frames whether closer is required by Hardware List or not. .5 Doors shall be prepared to receive hardware as scheduled under Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. . 6 Prepare doors and frames for installation of hardware. at the following heights: Finished floor to centre of push plates 1143 mm i� Finished floor to centre of door pulls 1067 mm Finished floor to centre of push bars 1067 mm Finished floor to centre of strike 1024 mm Finished floor to centre of deadlocks 1524 mm Finished floor to centre of bottom butt 330 mm Framehead rabbet to centre of top butt 248 mm Middle butt(s) equal distance between top and bottom butts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION 1 Installation of pressed steel frames and doors to be executed under Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. 2 Install all Georgian wired glass to doors and screens as indicated on Drawings, with proper glazing strips and required fasteners. END OF SECTION I i � DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO.94027-24 SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS Page: 08200-1 -------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Carpentry and Millwork Section 06110 .2 Finish Hardware Section 08710 I� . 3 Glazing Section 08800 . 4 Painting Section 09900 1.2 WARRANTY 1 Warranty all doors for an extended period of three years against manufacturing defects, core ghosting and warping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Doors shall be solid core slab doors, manufactured by Premdor Ltd. , or approved alternate. . 2 Special Door Frames as detail No. 3 on Door Type Detail AD8-2a. 3 Fabricate doors to thicknesses and sizes as indicated on the Door Schedule in accordance with CSA 0188-85. 4 Prepare doors for installation of grilles or glass as required. .5 Undercut or rebate bottom rails as required. . 6 Core - wood staved laminate. .7 Crossband - 3 ply hardwood plywood not less than 3 mm thick before sanding. Face veneer 0.75 mm thick Birch, uniform Sapwood for paint finish. L � . 8 Vertical and horizontal edges, stops and beads for glass and grilles to be solid birch to match veneer. Edges shall be minimum 38 mm wide by thickness of door. . 9 Stiles and rails to be low density softwood staved type minimum 82 mm wide with 19 mm thick hardwood edge handing. Moisture content shall not exceed 8%. . 10 Glazing beads to be flush type front edge recessed 3 mm at bottom. Mitre cut and fit all corners to form tight flush joints. SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS Page: 08200-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 11 Transom panels of same construction as the door. Top of door and bottom of panel shall have rabbetted interlocking edges to reveal only a 3 mm crack on front and back surfaces when door is closed. . 12 Sound absorbing doors complete with sound absorbing insulation pressure laminated between face STC rated 43 , complete with automatic door bottom and sound seal. 2.2 FABRICATION . 1 Door cores unframed, solid, laminated wood stave core construction, comprising narrow pieces of kiln dried wood, grain running vertically and end joints well staggered, solid (no voids) and electronically glue bonded. Floating core construction will not be accepted. Sand door cores both sides prior to application of faces. .2 If particle board core of fire rated cores used, frame with 103 mm minimum wood stiles and 70 mm minimum wood rails; edge stiles with birch 19 mm wide minimum, full length piece. Glue stiles and rails to core and apply face veneer and machine flush with door edges. .3 Seal top and bottom edges with two coats urethane finish or lacquer applied in door manufacturer' s plant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Installation of wood doors under Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. END OF SECTION r DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 08364 - ROLLING SHUTTERS -----------------------Page�08364_1- --------------------------- -- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 SUBMITTALS . 1 Provide Shop Drawings, clearly indicating the material being supplied and showing all connections, attachments, anchorage, reinforcements and location of fastenings. .2 Provide all necessary templates and instructions where fastenings or anchors have to be built in by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 ROLLING SHUTTER . 1 Rolling shutter to be FC-17E Manually Operated as manufactured by Kinnear Industries Corp. Ltd. Materials as manufactured by Amstel Ltd. or Dynamic Closures Ltd. are approved for this Project. .2 Curtain: Composed of interlocking flat-faced, midget-type slats. Slats to be clear anodized no less than . 050 ga. (lmm) thick. Alternate slats to be fitted with endlocks to hold curtain in alignment. Safety endlocks shall be installed. Bottom of curtain shall be finished with an extruded bottom bar with a continuous vinyl bumper to protect counter top. . 3 Locking Device: Curtain shall be locked at each end of bottom bar by concealed slide bolts which shall engage slots in each guide. Bolts to be capable of accepting with keyed cylinders supplied by Section 08710. . 4 Barrel and Counterbalance: Curtain to be coiled around a steel pipe fitted, when required, with involute shaped rings for ease of operation. Rings to be faced with suitable material to prevent curtain abrasion. Barrel to be of sufficient thickness and diameter to prevent deflection exceeding 1 .5 mm per 300 mm. Barrel to be supported be steel plate brackets and so designed that it can be removed without disturbing supporting brackets. Helical, oil-tempered springs shall be installed inside the steel pipe, which shall rotate on self-lubricating bearings. Spring tension shall be adjusted in the field by means of an adjusting wheel. . 5 Guides: Form guides from steel shapes and extend above lintel so as to furnish support for brackets. Guides to contain retaining groove to engage safety endlocks and prevent curtain leaving guides. Continuous strips of heavy nap stripping shall be locked into guides to eliminate metal-to-metal contact and to provide dust-seal. I� ,,i SECTION 08364 - ROLLING SHUTTERS Page: 08364-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 ROLLING SHUTTERS (cont'd. ) . 6 Operation: Shutters shall be manually operated by means of handles mounted on bottom bar or where power operated by a remote push button, open, close, stop. Power control to be interlocked with door lock so door does not operate when locked. .7 Finish: Clear anodized aluminum to all components and surfaces exposed to view. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Install at Kitchen Area in strict accordance with written manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION ! � DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 j � SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES-------------------- Page 08400-1 ------------------------------ --------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Perimeter frame sealants Section 07900 .2 Finish Hardware Section 08710 jr 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit Shop Drawings to requirements of Section 01340 which clearly indicate materials being supplied, connections, attachments, anchorage, reinforcing, plan of swing doors, elevations, dimensions and location of openings. Show details of hardware including push/pull connections. List trade names of sealants to be used. . 2 Submit for review, 300 mm long pieces of frame material of each shape and finish specified before delivery of materials to Site. j� 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA . 1 Include in "Maintenance Manual", as required under Section 01340, maintenance instructions pertaining to doors, door closers and hardware adjustment. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING . 1 Protect hard colour and anodized finishes with coating that will not mar, nor deface finish on removal. Leave protected coating intact until all risk of damage is past, or immediately j prior to final cleaning. j� 1.5 WARRANTY . 1 The period stipulated in General Conditions of Contract shall be extended in writing to five (5) years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Extruded Sections - extruded aluminum alloy Alcan 6063-T6 free from scratches and surface blemishes. 2 Sheet and plate - 1100-H14 alloy, anodizing quality. l . 3 Steel - complying with CSA Standard G40. 12 SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES Page: 08400-2 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .4 Glass - bearing manufacturer' s labels, indicating quality and thickness. .5 Aluminum Finish - Natural Anodized. .6 Float Glass - CAN/CGSB 12 . 3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise noted; reject any glass having surface distortion. .7 Safety Glass - fully toughened plate or float complying with CAN/CGSB 12 .1, Type B, Class B. .8 Laminated Glass - CAN/CGSB 12 . 1, Type A, Class B, layers of , plate or float glass laminated together with vinyl inner layer. .9 All exterior glass in exterior doors to be green tinted, to match window glazing. . 10 Glazing Tape - Vulcanized butyl tape with continuous neoprene spacer. Black colour, 440 by Tremco Manufacturing Co. , or approved alternate. . 11 Weatherstripping - mohair pile Schlegel inserted into keyed ' grooves., . 12 Inner Frame Insulation - Rigid, expanded polystyrene conforming to CGSB 51-GP-20M, or foamed-in-place polyurethane insulation conforming to CGSB 41-GP-16a. . 13 Thermal Break Component - Rigid polyvinyl chloride. . 14 Accessories - Shims, spacers, expansion bolts and screws, non-ferrous; clips, angles and fastening devices, galvanized steel, CSA G40.21-M1978, Grade 300W, or Type 316 stainless steel. 2.2 FABRICATION - GENERAL . 1 Conceal nut, bolts, screws, clips and other means of fastenings ' in finished work, except where shown or specified. .2 Insert concealed steel reinforcements into all door jamb members and any other units as required, sized to adequately withstand snow and wind pressure requirement of Ontario Building Code, and action of hardware. . 3 Maintain dimensional tolerances to closest possible accuracy for various parts, and to vertical and horizontal planes. .4 Assemble, secure, anchor, seal and make weathertight all doors ' and frames in manner which does not restrict thermal movement and in strict accordance with certified Shop Drawings. is SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES Page 08400-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- if2.2 FABRICATION - GENERAL (cont'd. ) .5 In assembly of various components, make allowances for deflection of structure above; when making connections ensure that no structural load is tramsitted to frame or door. I� . 6 No manufacturer's nameplate shall appear on exposed face of door or frame assembly (while door is in closed position) . ' . 7 Accurately join and fit corners of doors to flush hairline joints. Weld unexposed sides leaving no surface imperfections such as pitting, discolouration or weld halo. .8 Do all fitting and assembly as far as practicable in factory. . 9 Accurately prepare and reinforce with backing plates to ensure adequate strength, all cutouts, recesses and mortising required for hardware. . 10 Provide removable frame bottoms at concealed closers. . 11 Where no masonry or structural beam occurs above entrance screens, extend mullion reinforcing to underslab above for anchorage. . 12 Blast clean and galvanize all reinforcing brackets and other steel supplied under this Section in accordance with CGSB Specification 31-GP-404 and CSA Standard G164, coating weight G90. Galvanize after fabrication. i� 2. 3 SWINGING DOORS . 1 Exterior Swinging doors shall be Kawneer Model 350 medium stile door, Double Glazed, Interior Balance door to be single glazed. or approved alternative. j� . 2 Screens shall be Kawneer Series 1600 or approved alternate. 2 .4 INTERIOR GLAZED DOORS AND SCREENS . 1 Doors shall be Series 350 Kawneer Ltd. , or approved alternate. ,i .2 Screens shall be Series Tri-Fab 450 x 25 mm mullion Kawneer Ltd. or approved alternate. 2 .4 HARDWARE i . 1 Unless otherwise specified herein, supply and install all finishing hardware associated with doors including but not limited to floor stops where required. Perform drilling necessary to install stops and other hardware items fixed to adjacent construction. `�1 SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES Page 08400-4 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4 HARDWARE (cont'd. ) . 2 Prepare swinging glass doors for surface mounted overhead closers, exit devices, pushes, pulls and cylinder dead locks as required. . 3 The following material will be supplied by the Finish Hardware Supplier and installed by this Section: . 1 Push/Pull Combinations. ' . 2 Hinges or pivots . 3 Door closers. .4 Weatherstrip for each swinging door as required, and thresholds as required. . 5 Exit devices as required. . 6 All locks and cylinders and keys PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 ERECTION . 1 After alignment, positively lock anchorage devices to prevent movement other than that designed to accommodate deflection and thermal expansion and contraction. . 2 Erection tolerances for operable elements - consistent with smooth operations and weatherproof performance. . 3 Perform necessary drilling of concrete, masonry and steel necessary to install the work of this Section. Site located fixings to the masonry and concrete shall be stainless steel lag screws and lead shields. Bear cost of repair satisfactory to the Consultant of concrete chipped by drilling or fixing operations. . 4 Apply a heavy brush-coat of asphaltic paint to aluminum or galvanized steel placed in or in contact with concrete, masonry mortar or dissimilar metals. . 5 Make the completed installation free from objectionable noise. rattles, wind whistles, cracks or noise due to movement. . 6 Gun-apply 3 continuous beads of sealant under extruded aluminum thresholds. Make bead diameter sufficient to ensure a full- width seal. Remove excess sealant by approved means. SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES Page 08400-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 GLAZING 1 Perform glazing associated with work of this Section. Leave labels on glass until it has been set and inspected and approved. Leave glass whole and without cracks, scratches and other defects and with settings in perfect conditions at completion,to the approval of the Consultant. Remove rejected, broken or damaged glass due to defective materials or improper setting and replace with perfect materials. Reject units producing distorted vision and replace. 3 . 3 ADJUSTMENTS . 1 Upon completion of the project and just prior to the handing over of the building to the Owner or at a time as directed inspect, test and adjust installation as follows: . 1 Inspect all units for damage and correct same immediately. .2 Test and adjust all hardware and replace all faulty items. .3 Adjust all weatherstripping so as to leave each opening unit in its most weathertight position. .4 Test all operable elements and ensure easy and smooth operation. 3 .4 CLEANING i� . 1 Do all cleaning as per Section 01710. END OF SECTION 'i ! � DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 08425 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATOR Page ------------------------ --------------------- _08425 1 - ------- !� PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' . 1 Aluminum Entrances Section 08400 ' 1.2 EXTENT OF WORK . 1 Work of this Section consists of the complete supply and installion of aluminum entrance doors operator and 11 associated hardware. .2 This work shall be supplied and installed by the Automatic ' Door Operator Contractor. 1. 3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 Submit shop drawings for approval, indicate and identify all items, show assembly, installation details and methods. 1.4 WARRANTY . 1 The entire automatic swing door system shall be covered by a two (2) year warranty, parts and labour. . 2 Loosening, fading or discolouration of material and assemblies, deforming, faulty operation of hardware will be judged as defective work. 1.5 APPLICABLE CODES . 1 All assemblies to be CSA and U.L. approved and shall meet all applicable standards as specified under the ANSI. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIAL . 1 Automatic Door Operator shall be Besam Ltd. Series No. 150, or approved alternate. 2 .2 AUTOMATIC SWING DOOR OPERATORS (Surface Applied) ' .1 Supply automatic swing door system for all doors so designed on the drawings and as specified in this section of the L! Specifications. �1 SECTION 08425 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATOR Page: 08425-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- , 2 .3 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL POWER OPERATOR ' . 1 For double swinging doors, each leaf shall have a seperate power door operator. Each pair of doors to operate simultaneously. .2 Motor current draw shall not exceed 5 amps per operator at 120V. .3 The operator shall have built-in breakway feature to the ' closed position eith or without manual resetting. . 4 The forces and speeds of power opening, manual opening in both directions of swing, and spring closing in both directions of swing shall conform to the requirement of all applicable codes. . 5 The operator shall function as a manual door closer in the normal direction of swing with or without electrical power. Not more than 22 lbs. at the lock stile ( 42" wide door) shall required for manual use. 2.4 ELECTRONIC CONTROL . 1 The door operator shall have a solid state completely enclosed electronic control with quick plugs incorporated. 2.5 LINKAGE ASSEMBLY . 1 Shall have positive control of door through entire swing. 2 . 6 BOTTOM PIVOT ASSEMBLY . 1 The pivot shall be sealed ball or needle bearing type, self-aligning, and designed specifically for automatic door ' systems. The bottom plates of the bottom pivot shall be fastened by using 1-1/2" x #14 stainless steel screws. Pivot and bearing shall be lubricated with a high quality waterproof grease before placing door. .2 Floor mounting plate thickness not less than 1/2" with a vertical adjustment not less than 3/811 . . 3 Door portion of pivot shall be tightly fitted within bottom rail of door. .4 Steel components shall be plated. 2 .7 ACTIVATING DEVICES . 1 Automatic Door operators shall be activated by means of push button. 'rr SECTION 08425 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATOR Page: 08425-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Install all automatic entrance door operators in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 'i �1 1 �1 1 '1 1 �!I '1 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and --------------- WINDOW WALL--------------------- Page_ 08520-1 ------ -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Brick Masonry Section 04210 .2 Fire Stopping & Smoke Seal Section 07270 .3 Preformed Metal Panels Section 07464 .4 Preformed Metal Siding Section 07465 .5 Sealants Section 07900 ! , . 6 Aluminum Entrances Section 08400 1.2 SUBMITTALS if . 1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01340. . 2 Show detailed window assembly, including: large scale details of members and materials, of brackets and anchorage devices and of connection and jointing details; fully dimensioned layouts for positioning of brackets and anchorage devices ' to structures; dimensions gauges, thicknesses; glazing details, description of materials including catalogue numbers, products and manufacturer's names; aluminum alloy and temper designations, finish specifications and all other pertinent data. . 3 Provide documentation of thicknesses, profiles and descriptions of all components used in the window assembly; engineering calculations verifying the window assembly has been designed, constructed and attached to withstand all forces anticipated for this Project as required by 1990 Ontario Building Code. if .4 Provide authentic original documentation verifying that the window assemblies meet all requirements of the CAN/CSA A440-M90 Standard. . 5 Provide documentation verifying that glazing complies with the relevant standards referenced in the 1990 Ontario Building Code. . 6 Employ a licenced professional engineer licenced to practice in the Province of Ontario to stamp all Shop Drawings, and be responsible for the installation of the complete aluminum window and window wall system. .7 Work shall be executed in accordance with design requirements, performance requirements, and erection tolerances specified herein. Substitutions of specified materials or departures from Contract Documents will not be permitted without prior review by the Consultant. I� SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and r WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE . 1 Adequately protect aluminum and aluminum finishes to prevent damage thereto during fabrication, storage, shipping, handling and installation. . 2 Deliver, handle and store units by methods approved by manufacturer. Protect from damage and staining. . 3 Protect sills and stools after installation with boards, heavy paper or other suitable protection, secured in place, to prevent staining or scratching. Do not remove protection before final cleaning. 1.4 WARRANTY . 1 The Warranty contained in the General Conditions with respect to this Section shall be extended from one year to five years in writing. .2 In addition to the above, insulating glass units shall carry manufacturer's standard warranty of minimum five years for defective materials and ten years for seals. 1. 5 CO-ORDINATION . 1 Co-ordinate all work of this Section with Masonry and Preformed Metal Siding sub-contractors. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS . 1 Aluminum Windows and Window Wall components shall be fabricated t and installed by one of the following acceptable manufacturers or other whose proposals are deemed acceptable by the Consultant: ' . 1 Kawneer Ltd. Series 1600 Curtainwall, Window Series 518. .2 Sherwood Windows Ltd. . 3 Alumicor Ltd. 2.2 MATERIALS . 1 Extruded aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5 or T6. Finish: Natural Anodized. . 2 Steel sheet : commercial quality to ASTM A526 with wiped ZF075 zinc coating, min. 0. 91 mm core thickness. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 2 .2 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .3 Thermal barrier: a low thermal conductivity inert polymerized materials. .4 Steel sections, clips, anchors and reinforcement: to CSA G40.21 grade 300W, hot dip galvanized after fabrication with minimum zinc coating of 275 g/m2 to CSA G164-M1981. .5 Glazing Mian Pool Room No. 145 and Therapy Pool Room 144: Winter Night U-Value (I) 0. 13 ' Summer Day U-Value (I) 0. 16 Visible Light Transmittance 19 Visible Reflectance Out 7 Visible Reflectance In ($) 20 Solar Transmittance 8 Solar Reflectance (%) 8 Shading Coefficient: 0. 17 . 6 Insulating Glass: factory sealed, double glazed units, conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.8-M84, with 6 mm B2-20 "Sky-on-Green" green tinted exterior pane, as manufactured by AFGD heat strengthened, 13 mm air space and 6 mm clear interior pane. Units shall be of total thickness to suit design loads, but not less than 25 mm, to A.S.H.R.A.E. 90. 1 Standards. .7 Insulating Glass in Main Pool Room 145 and Therapy Pool Room No. 144: factory sealed, triple glazed units, conforming to CAN/CGSB 12 .8-M84 , with 6 mm B2-30 "Sky-on-Green, green-tinted exterior pane, as manufactured by AFGD, heat strengthened, 13 mm air space, 6 mm clear middle pane, 13 mm air space, 6 mm laminated clear inner pane (3 mm clear pane, 0.76 mm (0.0311) PVB interlayer 3 mm clear pane. . Units shall be of total thickness to suit design loads, but not less than 25 mm, to A.S.H.R.A.E. 90. 1 Standards. .8 Fasteners: self-tapping stainless steel or cadmium plated steel, finished to match adjacent materials. .9 Setting Blocks: neoprene or EPDM, Shore "A" durometer hardness 80 to 90. Size to suit job conditions. . 10 Glazing Tape: preformed macro-polyisobutylene tape with continuous built-in shim, serrated, paper release. "Polyshim" tape as manufactured by Tremco (Canada) Ltd. . 11 Compression Gaskets: neoprene or E.P.D.M. dry glazing keyed-in gasket to suit aluminum extrusions, type as approved by glass manufacturer. t SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and ' WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 2 .2 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) , . 12 Insulation: rigid polyurethane board AF-530 x 75 mm thick as manufactured by Fibreglas Canada Ltd. , or approved alternate, conforming to CGSB 51-GP-26-MP. ' . 13 Bonding Adhesive: type for purpose intended and as recommended by manufacturer. . 14 Sealant for glazing use: glazing quality, one component polysulphide or silicone, qualifying to CAN/CGSB 19 . 13-M82. Sealant shall be equal to C.G.E. "Gesil N " . ' . 15 Sealant at vertical mullions: High modulus, one component silicone sealant qualifying to CAN/CGSB 19. 13-M82 . , . 16 Isolation Coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution. ' 2.2 DESIGN . 1 Design and fabricate windows, brackets and anchorage devices so that when installed they will: . 1 Compensate for unevenness and dimensional differences ' in structure to which they are secured. . 2 Allow full expansion and contraction of window framing ' members without causing stress within the window assembly as a result of such expansion and contraction. . 3 Tolerate structural deflection and distortion of structure, , under design criteria conditions, without imposing load on window assembly. .4 Adequately sustain themselves any superimposed wind and ' rain loads without allowing window framing members to deflect more than 1/200 of span under design criteria ' wind load. .2 All the Work shall be designed to withstand safely a wind force as listed in Ontario Building Code based on 30 year , probability and wind gust at 2 . 5 factor of safety. .3 Deflection of members when under full loads shall maintain adequate clearance for glass. Maximum deflection shall not be more than 1/200 of the span of any member. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 2 DESIGN (cont'd. ) .4 Condensation: Not more than 25 mm high across the bottom of inside pane and none on aluminum frames under conditions of ' - 33. 3 degrees C. exterior, 22 .2 degrees C. interior, 30% relative humidity interior 25 m/h wind measured on lee side of building, or zero condensation with no wind. .5 Other performance requirements, CAN/CSA3 A440-M90, and O.B.C. Standards. 2 . 3 FABRICATION - ALUMINUM WINDOWS . 1 Aluminum windows shall be Series 518 modified as required, as manufactured by Kawneer Ltd. Materials as manufactured by Sherwood Windows Ltd. or Alumicor are the only approved materials for this Project. No other manufacturer's will be accepted. .2 Make profiles of framing members as shown on Drawings. . 3 Entire assembly shall be weathertight throughout. .4 Fabricate complete units in shop to provide minimum tolerance and hairline joints throughout. ' .5 Assemble members with aluminum screws. All connections shall be internally sealed in factory with approved sealing compound. ' Exposed frame sealants will not accepted. . 6 Aluminum extrusions shall be designed to provide sufficient section modulus to safely resist imposed loads but minimum thickness of any part of the load bearing extrusion shall be 1/811 . Glazing stops may be 1/411. Be prepared to submit design data is requested by Consultant. .7 Conceal interconnecting members and fasteners in completed assembly. I, . 8 Do not place manufacturer's name plates, labels or any other finished means of identification on exposed or finished parts. . 9 Provide an extruded rigid thermal break integrated with the inner and outer aluminum extrusions to form a rigidly inter- connected assembly without the use of fasteners or other thermal bridging elements. . 11 Glass stops shall provide edge margins recommended by glass manufacturer. . 12 Paint all metal surfaces in contact with concrete or masonry, plastic, mortar or dissimilar metals with protective lacquer or bituminous coating. i� SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 2 .3 FABRICATION - ALUMINUM WINDOWS (cont'd. ) . 13 Mitre and full strength vulcanize joints in weatherstripping. 2 .4 FABRICATION - WINDOW WALL SYSTEM , . 1 Provide frame sizes as detailed. .2 Provide frames with integral glazing stops suitable for butt joint glazing. .3 Fabricate window wall individual units square and true with ' maximum tolerances as specified herein. .4 Provide concealed structural steel reinforcement as required , for adequate strength, stiffness and connections. .5 Where practible, shop fabricate and assemble curtain wall work with various parts of assemblies ready for erection at building. Trial fit work which cannot be shop assembled to ensure proper and expeditious field assembly. . 8 Accurately fit intersecting members to flush hairline, weathertight joints and mechanically interlock together, except where specified or detailed otherwise. , .9 Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings may be permitted. ' . 10 Apply isolation coating to components in contact with dissimilar metals and concrete. . 11 Work shall include all fixings, clips, stiffeners, covers, closures, trim pieces, soffits, flashings and other curtain wall related items, as required for a complete installation. ' . 12 Make allowances for deflection or structure to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to curtain wall system. ' . 13 Fabricate covers, closures, trim pieces, soffits where required of minimum 3 mm thick aluminum. . 14 Fabricate ilashings of minimum 3 mm thick aluminum. . 15 Fabricate corner caps, brackets, head pieces of minimum 3 .2 mm thick aluminum. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-7 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 PREPARATION . 1 Before components are delivered to site, examine building structure and indicate in writing acceptability of site conditions or rejection of conditions which will prevent the proper execution for work or endanger its permanency. Do not begin erection of aluminum windows or window wall components until such conditions are corrected or satisfactorily adjusted. i , .2 Coordinate work with that of other trades, reporting errors, omissions, and inconsistencies. ' 3 .2 INSTALLATION - WINDOW WALL . 1 Erector shall be responsible for assembly of components, ' anchoring methods, arrangements and allowances for expansion and contraction, proper joints and intersections, glazing, and sealing, as required to obtain a rigid and watertight installation. . 2 Furnish anchor bolts, inserts, and templates for setting in ample time to prevent delay to their trades. Supervise setting of inserts and make an instrument survey to verify setting prior to erection of components. . 3 Cutting and altering of members in field will not be permitted. Errors in shop work shall not be corrected until method has been reviewed by the Consultant. .4 Details show components in their final position when full dead load and partial live load have been applied. Make necessary adjustments caused by discrepancies in elevations, alignment, and loading. ' . 5 After components are properly positioned, draw connections up tight except where expansion is to be provided between members. ., Make connections rigid by welding or other positive means. ! Make intersections tight and inconspicuous. 6 If temporary braces or erection clips are employed, prevent unsightliness upon removal. Field welding on concealed surfaces shall be performed as specified for shop fabrication. 7 Completed work shall be plumb, level, and true within the following tolerances: . 1 Maximum deviation from true vertical or horizontal: 3 mm in any member or 12 .7 mm in any total run in any wall plane. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 3 .2 INSTALLATION - WINDOW WALL (cont'd. ) , .2 Maximum offset from true alignment between consecutive member in line, end-to-end: 1.5 mm. . 3 Maximum deviation of outside face of glazing members in any opening: 1. 5 mm from glass plane. .4 Maximum offset between abutting members in glazing rabbet: . 075 mm. .5 Maximum variation from square of any glass opening: 3 mm. , 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - ALUMINUM WINDOWS . 1 Provide all fastenings or anchors required to be built in , under work of other Sections. . 2 Use only concealed fastenings. , . 3 Securely install components so that they line up square in true, straight flat and/or flush planes, plumb and level, ' free from distortion. .4 Make joints neat and fine as practicable. Allow for full ' expansion and contraction and take into consideration climatic conditions prevailing at time of installation. . 5 Fasten galvanized steel supports and clips with galvanized bolts and fasten aluminum members with stainless steel screws and bolts. . 6 Ensure that: corner joints of frames are weathertight. , .7 Clean aluminum and glass surfaces that are to receive glazing , materials with an oil removing solvent and wipe dry. .8 Place setting blocks at quarter points for each light of glass. ' . 9 Install glass with clean cut edges, leaving spaces for expansion and contraction between edge of glass and inside of frame as recommended by glass manufacturer. . 10 Finish tape and glazing wedge with straight unwaving sight lines. 3 .4 INSTALLATION OF GASKETS . 1 Prepare surface to receive gaskets as recommended by manufacture. ' Gaskets shall be mechanically fastened to framing members in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable. ' ' SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-9 --------------------------------------- -- ------------------------------- 3 .4 INSTALLATION OF GASKETS (cont d. 2 Install gaskets on framing members before adjacent members are positioned and brought up tight. Gaskets shall make positive contact for full length of joint, both horizontally and ' vertically. Edges of gaskets exposed to weather shall be flush with or slightly above face of framing members. ' 3 .5 GLAZING . 1 Reflective Glass: I ' . 1 Edges shall be clean-cut. Do not install with flared edges at bottom. Do not seam or nip edges. ' .2 Do not bump or brush edges against any hard surface. . 3 Avoid cold edge effects and temperature differences over ' glass surface. . 2 Insulating Glass: . 1 Insulating glass manufacturer shall have a qualified representative at project site at beginning of glazing operations to ensure that installation is acceptable under terms of warranty. .2 Installation shall be as recommended by insulated glass manufacturer using special setting blocks as required. Method of installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions as well as latest CAN/CGSB Standards. 3 . 6 CAULKING . 1 Conform to sealant manufacturer's written recommendations for cleaning, priming, backing and joint design to suit type and location of joint and temperature conditions at time of ' application. . 2 Seal joints between members of aluminum work and between frame members and other non-operating components with sealant to provide weathertight seal at outside and air/vapour seal at inside. 3 Apply sealant using pressure operated gun fitted with suitable nozzles approved by the sealant manufacturer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 4 Apply sealant in such a manner as to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill voids in joint. Form surfaces of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and imbedded impurities. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS and WINDOW WALL Page: 08520-10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ' 3 . 6 CAULKING (cont'd. ) , .5 Remove masking tape, soils and sealant which may have been deposited on surfaces near joints. . 6 Seal all window frames to adjacent materials both sides. 3 .7 CLEANING ' . 1 When directed, inspect work and remove protective wrappings, coatings and devices and clean glass and aluminum surfaces. , Use methods which will not scratch or damage glass, paint or coatings. .2 Upon completion, leave work free from grease, dirt, dust, , labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials. . 3 Use only cleaning materials recommended by installer and glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO.94027 ' SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE Page 08710-1 ---------------------------- --------------- ', ' 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 ! � .2 Wood Doors Section 08200 ' . 3 Aluminum Entrances Section 08400 .4 Aluminum Sliding Doors Section 08426 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Hardware List - Submit 12 copies of hardware list prepared ' by a qualified AHC. Examine Drawings, Schedules and Shop Drawings to be sure that hardware listed can be used as specified and as indicated. ! 1. 3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Delivery- Supply hardware as and when required for each opening. Package hardware separately for each opening in a package which contains all the hardware for that opening and bears the number of the opening. Supply hardware to those who are ' to install it, complete with keys, templates and installation instructions together with all required screws, expansion shields, anchors, jigs and other related accessories for ' satisfactory attaching or installing hardware. 1. 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' . 1 All door closers shall have back checking features and shall be of proper size to operate door efficiently. . 2 Confirm all kick plate and threshold sizes before ordering them. . 3 Exposed screws for installing hardware shall have Phillips or Robertson heads. .4 Rim panic device strikes shall be mortise type application. Equip panic devices with sex bolts. 5 Confirm degree of swing for door holders, closers, etc. li 1.5 KEYING . 1 All locks shall be keyed as required to Grand Master keying system as later described by Owner. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE Page: 08710-2 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL , . 1 Check all hardware when it has been installed and notify , Consultant of any cases where it has been improperly installed, is defective or is not as specified. .2 The door closer supplier shall review installation and operation 1 of all door closers on Site and issue a written report to the Consultant. 1.7 WARRANTY . 1 All hardware to be Warranteed for an extended period of five ' years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2. 1 MATERIALS 1 . 1 Refer to Section 01020 - Cash Allowances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION , . 1 Installation of Finish Hardware under Section 06200 - Finish 1 Carpentry. END OF SECTION 1 i i DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS PROJECT NO. 94027 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 08800-1 ------------------------------- Page_ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE j � . 1 Sealants Section 07900 .2 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 . 3 Toilet and Bath Accessories Section 10800 ' 1.2 WARRANTY . 1 Warranty all glass and mirrors to be free from defects in workmanship and materials of any kind for a period of five (5) years. . 2 Replace (including removal and installation) of defective glass and mirrors. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Tempered Glass - conforming to CAN/CGSB 12 . 1, 6 mm thick. ' .2 Georgian Wired Clear conforming to CAN/CGSB 12 . 11. . 3 Mirrors - CAN/CGSB 12.5 M76 6 mm float Type 1, with wiped edges. j, .4 Mirror Clips - Continuous "J" clip clear anodized aluminum. .5 Foam Tape - Black, closed cell neoprene foam 12 . 7 mm wide, adhesive back manufactured by Jacobs and Thompson Ltd. , or thicknesses required. ' . 6 Glazing Tapes - Vulcanized butyl tape with continuous neoprene spacer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 SITE CUTTING OF GLASS . 1 Site cutting of glass is prohibited except with the express permission of the Consultant to contrary after review of the Contractor's proposed methods. SECTION 08800 - GLAZING Page: 08800-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION . 1 Conform to the recommendations of the Glazing Manual, Flat Glass Marketing Association, USA, 1981 edition. . 2 Cut wired and patterned glass so that pattern is parallel. ' . 3 Replace loose stops in their original positions, set all screws tight, countersink all nails. ' 3. 3 INTERIOR GLAZING (DOORS, WINDOWS, SCREENS) . 1 Apply glazing tape to stops both sides of glass; use tape of ' thicknesses to suit installation. Centre glass in opening and set on setting blocks. . 2 Apply glass, glazing tape and stops. , . 3 Finish to neat appearance by trimming tape above sightline. ' . 4 Glaze sloping lights dry, using continuous neoprene channel gaskets. 3 . 4 EXTERIOR GLAZING (HOLLOW METALWORK) . 1 Apply 440 tape to fixed leg of frame accurately cutting and ' butting joints at corners. .2 Run a heal bead of sealant 150 mm (611) up and 150 mm (611) along ' frame at bottom corners of glass rebate, lapping tape and frame to ensure weathertight seal. .3 Remove protective paper cover from tape, and apply setting , blocks at 6 mm (1/411) points and not more than 150 mm (611) from ends. Set glass in rebate and press firmly in place. Apply spacer shims to edges of glass maximum 600 mm (2411) apart and more than , 150 mm (611) from corners and secure glazing beads in place. .4 Gun in Tremco caulking compound to fill void between glass and ' beads, trim off excess compound to a neat, even sightline, bevel approximately 1.5 mm (1/1611) onto glass. 3 .5 MIRRORS . 1 Provide and install all mirrors throughout the project. .2 All mirrors to be installed utilizing continuous "J" clip , fastenings. 3 . 6 CLEANING ' . 1 Do all cleaning in accordance with Section 01710. END OF SECTION , DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM------------------- Page_09250_1 ----------------------------------- ------- ' PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 . 2 Unit Masonry Section 04200 . 3 Firestop and Smokeseal Section 07270 ' . 4 Finish Painting Section 09900 . 5 Lighting Fixtures Division 16 1.2 STANDARDS . 1 Metal furring, and gypsum wallboard shall comply with the ' requirements of CSA A82 .27-M1977, A82. 30-M1980, and A82 . 31-M77 unless otherwise specified herein. Where notes in italics occur in CSA and are recommendations to this work, they shall be followed, but notes suggesting substitutes may I, not be followed unless approved by the Consultants. 1.3 ULC FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS 1 Fire rated partitions and ceilings to conform to all requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada designs to provide the required fire resistance ratings. 1. 4 SUBMITTALS ' 1 Provide samples of materials and finishes for approval, conforming to requirements of Section 01340. . 2 Samples when approved will serve as a basis for approving finished work. 1. 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Gypsum board and cementitious materials shall be kept under cover and free from dampness and temperature extremes. .2 Deliver and store corner beads, casing beads and similar items in crates to prevent damage to the material. 1. 6 PROTECTION . 1 Protect surrounding surfaces against damage. Use approved means as required to ensure adequate protection. ; SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM Page: 09250-2 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Anchors for Hangers: `KWIK-BOLT' tie wire anchors, 32 mm (1-1/411) x 6 mm (1/411) manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems Limited. ' Neither Drive-Pin or similar type nor power actuated fasteners are to be used. .2 Hangers: galvanized mild steel pencil rods, 4.5 mm (3/1611) dia. or support of one layer of gypsum board and 6 mm (1/411) dia. where more than one layer of gypsum board is to be supported. , . 3 Runner channels: 38 mm (1-1/211) deep cold rolled steel channels by Bailey Metal Products Ltd. , or approved alternate. , . 4 Furring channels: screw type, 19 mm (3/411) deep cold rolled steel channels by Bailey Metal Products Ltd. , or approved ' alternative, painted after fabrication. . 5 Tie wire: 0. 048" annealed and galvanized steel. . 6 Steel Studs: 92 mm (3-5/811) wide unless otherwise noted, 26 ga. for ' partition heights of 3 m high, and 18 ga. for all heights over 3 m, hot dipped galvanized steel sheet, for self-drilling screws, by ' Bailey Metal Products Ltd. , or approved alternate. .7 Casing beads: channel type casing, galvanized steel, size to suit thicknesses of drywall, by Bailey Metal Products Ltd. .8 Control joints: formed galvanized steel, by Bailey Metal Products Ltd. , or approved alternate. , .9 Gypsum Board: gypsum board with tapered edges, conforming to CSA A82 . 27-M1977. Sizes: 1200 mm (4 '-011) wide and in lengths ' to minimize the number of joints. 16 mm (5/811) and 13 mm (1/211) thick for ceilings. . 10 Cement Board: "Denshield" as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Ltd. , ' . 11 Screws: type 'S ' self-drilling, self-tapping steel drywall screws for use with power operated driver. ' . 12 Joint treatment materials: as recommended by manufacturer of the gypsum board. ' . 13 Sealant (fire resistant) : PRC Chemicals PR 855. .14 Foam tape: foamed vinyl, self adhesive, 6 mm (1/411) thick. ' SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM Page:09250-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3. 1 LOCATION . 1 Refer to Room Finish Schedule and the Drawings for location of drywall. 3 .2 COORDINATION . 1 Prior to commencing installation, check that all overhead architectural, mechanical and electrical work is complete ' and that work area is free from excessive moisture. . 2 After installation of light fixtures and diffusers, check ceiling and make good ceiling deficiencies. : t 3 .3 INSTALLATION - FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES ' 1 Install drywall ceilings including suspension systems to conform to ULC designs noted. . 2 Where fire rated dampers occur, install gypsum drywall full depth of partition around fire damper opening. 3 . 4 SUSPENDED CEILINGS . 1 Unless otherwise specified in ULC designs shown, install furring as stated below. ' . 2 Finished work shall be rigid, secure, square, level and plumb, constructed to maintain dimensions and contours shown. Make allowance for thermal movement. . 3 Furring shown is not exact or complete. The location and method of securing pieces is to the option of the Contractor but to the Consultant's approval. i . 4 Provide control joints in wallboard surfaces at maximum 8 m (25 '-011) o.c. in large ceiling areas. Provide 6 mil. thick polyethylene strip 100 mm (411) wide continuous above control joints. Provide double furring channels at joints. Attach polyethylene strips and control joints on both flanges to furring channels along entire length of joints. . 5 Frame around openings, access panels, ventilation and lighting fixtures with suitable channels. . 6 Furr around ducts, and pipes in finished areas and at vertical breaks within or at termination of suspended ceilings. .7 Erect furring for suspended ceilings independent of walls, columns, pipes and cuts. Furring shall be level and securely fastened to hangers attached to the structure. SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM Page: 09250-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.4 SUSPENDED CEILINGS (cont 'd. ) ' .8 Fasten hangers to underside of concrete slab using specified , anchors or cast-in-place inserts, or rubber vibration inserts. .9 Kinks or bends shall not be made in hangers as a means of ' levelling main runner channels. . 10 Locate main runners not more than 1200 mm (4 '-011) o.c. to suit ' ceiling layouts and to frame items such as lighting fixtures. . 11 Space furring channels at right angles to main runner at not ' more than 400 mm (1611) o.c. 3 .5 INSTALLATION - METAL TRIM . 1 The drawings do not purport to show all metal trim required; ' verify with the Consultant the precise locations and types of trim to be used. , .2 Carefully inspect the drawings and verify location of all metal trim required. . 3 Install all trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations paying particular attention to make all trim installation plumb, level and true to line with firm attachment ' to supporting members. .4 Reinforce all vertical projecting angles, vertical and ' horizontal exterior corners with metal corner beads fastened with staples 225 mm (911) o.c. on both flanges along entire length of beads. All vertical reinforcing to be in one piece full height. ' .5 Where gypsum wallboard assembly terminates against concrete, masonry, windows, hollow metal screens, door frames or other ' dissimilar material, install metal casing bead to stop the wallboard and form proper junction. Secure at 300 mm (1211) o.c. along entire length of beads. Beads shall be in one ' length up to 3 m (10 '-011) and no lengths shall be less than 1800 mm (6 '-011) . Mitre and fit corners and junctions accurately and free from rough edges, suitable for taping and finishing. ' 3 . 6 ACCESS PANELS . 1 Install access panels as provided by others. ' SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM Page:09250-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .7 TAPING AND FINISHING . 1 Environmental Conditions: . 1 Control heating and ventilating during finishing operations to ensure the maintenance of 13 deg.0 minimum temperature. . 2 First Coat: . 1 Spread compound evenly over all joints, using suitable tools designed for the purpose. .2 Fill all joint recesses and metal trim. . 3 Centre the reinforcing tape on the joint and press into the fresh compound, wiping down with sufficient pressure to remove excess compound but leaving sufficient compound under the tape for proper bond. .4 Feather all edges and leave the surface free from blisters and tape wrinkles. .5 Apply compound to all fastener recesses, metal trim and control joints, leaving flush with the adjacent surfaces. . 6 Fold reinforcing tape along its centreline and apply to all interior angles, following the same procedure as for joints. .3 Second Coat: . 1 Lightly sand the dry compound with fine sandpaper to remove all irregularities. . 2 Apply a second coat of compound to all joints, feathering approximately 75 mm (311) beyond edges of tape. . 3 Apply second coat to all fastener recesses, metal trim and control joints; allow to dry. {� 4 Third Coat: I� . 1 Lightly sand the dry compound with fine sandpaper to remove all irregularities. . 2 Apply final skim coat, feathering out approximately 50 mm (211) beyond second coat. . 3 Third coat all fastener recesses, metal trim, control joints and all interior angles;allow to dry. .4 Carefully sand the third coat to a uniform smooth surface completely free from irregularities visible to the unaided eye at a distance of 1500 mm (5 ' -011) . SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM Page:09250-6 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .8 BULKHEADS AND FURRING ' . 1 Construct bulkheads at change in ceiling levels in drywall and suspended ceilings, light coves, valance and light coves, ducts as indicated on the drawings. Bulkheads to be of same construction as ceilings to obtain the same assembly rating as the ceiling in which they occur. Securely attach 13 mm (1/2") gypsum wallboard to 41 mm (1-5/811) steel studs at 600 mm (24") vertically o.c. attached to 38 mm (1-1/211) channels to panel ' bottom suspended at 1200 mm (4 '-011) o.c. from structure above. Provide cross bracing of 19 mm (3/411) channels as required. Install corner beads, and casing beads at all junctions of other materials. .2 Construct light recesses in ceilings as detailed with 13 mm (1-1/211) main channels and 19 mm (3/4) " furring channels. Install 24 ga. , zinc coated cold rolled steel, "L" type edge trim around perimeter for support of diffuser. . 3 Construct gypsum wallboard soffits to steel stairs and landings. ' Frame as required and attach to stair and landings in a rigid secure manner. Install 13 mm (1/211) gypsum wallboard, tape and fill all joints. Provide casing beads at all junctions to other ' materials. . 4 Construct bulkheads at window heads with gypsum wallboard finished surfaces to top and sides. Form necessary wallboard returns to accommodate and receive acoustic ceiling systems. 3 .9 EGGCRATE SYSTEM and ACRYLIC PANEL SYSTEM , 1 Supply and install 13 mm x 13 mm silver eggcrate ceiling system complete with all tee bar, hangers and accessories as required to areas as .indicated on Drawings. Eggcrate system "Parabolic Louvre" as distributed by Cesco Electronics Ltd. , or approved alternate. END OF SECTION . DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE ---- Page: 09310-1 -------------------------------------------------- ---------------- PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Concrete Finishing Section 03345 .2 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .3 Sealants Section 07900 . 4 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 ' .5 Toilet and Bath Accessories Section 10800 . 6 Swimming Pool Section 13000 1.2 REFERENCES ANSI A108.4, ANSI A118. 1, ANSI A118. 3, ANSI A118.4 , ANSI 108. 1-1985 Installation of Ceramic Tile ASTM C207-91 (1992) - Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C847-88 (1992) - Specification for Metal Lath CAN/CGSB-19 . 22-M89- Mildew-Resistant Sealing Compound for Tubs and Tiles CAN/CGSB-51 . 33-M89- Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for Use in Building Construction CGSB 71-GP-22M-78- Adhesive, Organic, for Installation of Ceramic Wall Tile ' CGSB 71-GP-30M-79- Adhesive, Epoxy and Modified Mortar Systems, for Installation of Quarry Tiles CAN/CGSB-75. 1-M88- Tile, Ceramic CAN/CSA-A5-93- Portland Cement CSA A82 .30-M80 (R1992) - Interior Furring, Lathing and Gypsum Plastering CSA A82 . 56-M76- Aggregate for Masonry Mortar CSA A123 . 3-M79- Asphalt or Tar Saturated Roofing Felt t CSA G30.5-M83 (1991) - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement TTMAC- Terrazzo Tile & Marble Association of Canada 1. 3 SUBMITTALS 1 Submit 4 samples of each colour, texture, size and pattern of tile. Adhere samples to cementitious board (or cement flat panel) 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 1211) with setting compound and grout as specified. SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE Page: 09310-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3 SUBMITTALS (cont'd. ) . 2 If requested, submit samples as above showing corner construction with vertical (wall) and horizontal (floor) installations of ceramic tile. . 3 Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on Drawings, tile will be selected by the Consultant after award of Contract. Consultant may select colours, shades and textures of tile within limits of selected manufacturer's standard type and colour list. If Consultant so directs, tiling shall be carried out in 2 or more colours. .4 Maintenance Manual: Submit 3 copies of maintenance manual issued , by TTMAC in accordance with Section 01340, Submittals. 1. 4 PROJECT PROCEDURES . 1 Environmental Requirements: Maintain air and structural base temperatures at ceramic tile installation area above 12 deg C (54 deg F) for 43 hrs before, during, and 45 hrs after installation. 1.5 MAINTENANCE . 1 Extra Materials: Supply 2% extra ceramic tile for maintenance use of each colour, type and finish of same production run as installed material. Store where directed on Site in labelled boxes giving manufacturer's name, material description, colour, pattern and location of installation. 1. 6 SUPERVISION 1 . 1 Unless specified otherwise herein comply with the recommendations and directions of the manufacturer whose materials are being used on the work. 2 Arrange for manufacturer's technical representatives to visit the site prior to the commencement of the waterproofing and epoxy grouting to meet with the Contractor and the Consultant, and to remain on Site during all Work of this Section. . 3 The technical representative shall be consulted and the following items shall be discussed: ' . 1 Analysis of job conditions .2 Anticipated frequency of joint movement . 3 Shape factor of the joint .4 Correct size of joint for grouts being used . 5 Recommendations for waterproofing and grouting . 6 Hardness of material to be used . 7 Inspection of surfaces .9 Make recommendations for installation SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE Page: 09310-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.7 WARRANTY . 1 Warranty for the waterproofing and epoxy grout shall be extended in writing for a period of ten years from date of total completion of the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 . 1 ABBREVIATIONS . 1 Following abbreviations of manufacturer's or supplier's company names apply. Abbreviations Full Name of Company C-Cure C-Cure Corporation Crest Crest ' Dymac Dymac Chemical Flextile Flextile Ltd. Gemite Gemite Ltd. H.L. Blachford H.L. Blachford Ltd. Laticrete Laticrete International Inc. LePage LePage Ltd. Olympia,Dal-Tile,American Olean Mapei Mapei Inc. Master Builders Master Builders Technologies 2.2 CERAMIC TILE . 1 Floor Tile: .1 Ceramic Mosaic Unglazed Floor Tile: CAN/CGSB-75. 1-M, Type 2, Water Absorption Class MR1, dot mounted, with field and border tiles for Viewing Area, Lobby, Foyer, Lounge, Corridor, Washroom, Change Rooms, etc. 300 mm x 300 mm by Olympia Floor & Wall Tile Ltd. , or approved alternate. See Plan Details. .2 Main Pool, Pool Deck, Washroom, Monitor Room, etc. American Olean Pool Porcelain Mosaic 50 mm x 50 mm includes cove base, trims and nosing, etc. and 25 mm x 25 mm for edgings, markings, signage, patterns and design, etc. Provide 85% standard colour and 15% premium colour. Provide CAD produced Shop Drawings for pool tile lay-out and design as guided and approved by the Consultant. Other approved manufacturers are Dal-Tile and Olympia Tile Porcelain Mosaic as equivalent to or better. No other approved alternatives or substitutions are allowed. r SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE Page: 09310-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2 CERAMIC TILE (cont'd. ) .2 Wall Tile: . 1 CAN/CGSB-75. 1-M, Olympia Tile or approved alternate in the Pool Area, Change Rooms, Washrooms. Provide 15% of the Wall Area with Mosaics for Accent Banding and Graphic ' Wall Design as detailed. . 3 Sealer: Non-wax penetrating sealer, recommended by tile ' manufacturer. For unglazed tile only. 2 . 3 MORTARS AND ADHESIVES . 1 Use of following mortars or adhesives is Contractor's choice, subject to restrictions stated and Site conditions, except where epoxy or acid resistant mortar and grout is required: . 1 Thin Set Mortar: ANSI 118 . 1, or ANSI 118 . 4 (CGSB 71-GP-30M for Type 2) except where epoxy adhesive required: -For glazed and unglazed wall and floor tile, water absorption class MR 2 : Kerabond or Ultraflex II by Mapei or Mu.lticure (Modified System) by C-Cure. .2 Adhesives for Tile Setting: -Organic Adhesive: CGSB 71-GP-22M, Type 1 for intermittent wet areas, Duoflex #90, or #99 by Flextile or Ultramastic 1 by Mapei or TA-190 Double Duty Modular, or Perma II-2001 by LePage, or Dymac #68 by Dymac; Type 2 elsewhere, Econobond #93 by Flextile or Crest 3000 by Crest or Perma II-2002 by LePage, or Dyamc #64 by Dymac except where epoxy is required. -Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3 , CGSB 71-GP-30M Type 1 (100% solids epoxy) , Chemset by Master Builders or Epoxy 100 by C-Cure, Latapoxy SP-100 by Laticrete, Kerapoxy by Mapei or Flex-Epoxy 100 by Flextile. -Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118. 3 , Chemset by Master Builders or Flexi-Bond by Crest, or Permaplus 3030 by LePage. -Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3 , Chemset by Master Builders or Epoxy 100, 200 by C-Cure, Flex-Epoxy, Flex-Epoxy 100 by Flextile, or Kerapoxy by Mapei, or Latapoxy 210, Latapoxy SP-100 by Laticrete, or Crest Epoxy 200, Epoxy 100 by Crest. -#90 Duoflex by Flextile, or Ultramastic 1 by Mapei, or Perma. I-2001 by LePage, or Dymac #68 by Dymac. SECTION 09310 - CERAM:IC TILE Page: 09310-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .3 MORTARS AND ADHESIVES (cont'd. ) 4 Grouts between Tiles: Use of following grouts is Contractor's choice subject to restrictions stated. Colour grout-white, unless otherwise specified. . 1 Portland Cement Sanded Grout: Floor Grout by Flextile or Ultra/Color by Mapei; or mixed on Site cement grout, consisting of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Colour as selected by the Consultant. For white colour, in lieu of grey cement, use White Portland Cement, Type 10, CAN/CSA-AS-M, manufactured by Federal White Cement Co. .2 Dry Cure Unsanded Grout: Thin-set, narrow joint, up to 3 mm (1/811) wide, by Flex-Epoxy 200 Modified Emulsion by t Flextile, or C-Cure Polymer Modified unsanded grout by C- Cure, or Keracolor unsanded grout mixed with Plastijoints by Mapei. . 3 Epoxy Grout: Chemset by Master Builder, or Epoxy 200 by C- Cure, or Flex-Epoxy 200 by Flextile, or Kerapoxy by Mapei, or Latapoxy 210 by Laticrete. Use mandatory with epoxy adhesive. 2.4 MORTAR BED . 1 Scratch Coast: 1 part cement, 1/5 to 1/2 parts hydrated lime to suit job conditions, 4 parts and, 1 part water. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand. Use as little water as possible to obtain a stiff mix. . 2 Slurry Bond Coat: Cement and water mixed to creamy paste. Latex additive may be included. . 3 Mortar Bed for Floors: 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, 1 part water. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand. Latex additive may be included. .4 Levelling Coat: 1 part cement, 4 parts sand, 1 part water, including minimum 1/10 part latex additive (as per manufacturer's instructions) such as Level-Cure by C-Cure. . 5 Bond or Setting Coat: 1 part cement, 1/3 part hydrated lime, 1 Upart water. . 6 Measure mortar ingredients by volume. .7 Thin Set Mortar: Mix to manufacturer' s instructions. .8 Organic Adhesive: Pre-mixed. SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE Page: 09310-6 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 2 .5 BLOCK WATERPROOFING SEALER . 1 Concrete Block Sealer: Miacryl as distibuted by Jozsa Industries Ltd. 2 . 6 SWIMMING POOL, TOT'S POOL, HYDROMASSAGE POOL . 1 Levelling and patching compound: 3701/226 . 2 Latex Fortified Mortar 4237/221 . 3 Latipoxy 210 All above as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. , and shall carry a warranty of ten (10) years from date of completion of Contract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Wipe back side of tile with slightly damp towel or sponge to yr remove dust, dirt and/or residue. Apply back-buttered thin coat a of fresh mortar or adhesive approximately 2 mm (1/611) thick to back side of each tile immediately before laying into freshly applied wet notch trowel applied mortar bond coat. Provide 100% mortar coverage at perimeter edges and corners. .2 Apply tile and backing materials to clean and sound surfaces and in accordance with setting system specified. . 3 Remove paper facing after setting and adjust tiles where applicable. .4 Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain uniform joint appearance. Make cut edges smooth and even. .5 Maximum Surface Tolerance: 1:800. . 6 Make joints between tiles uniform and approximately 1. 5 mm (1/1611) wide, plumb, straight, true, even and flush with adjacent tile. Ensure sheet layout not visible after installation. Align patterns. .7 Lay out tiles so perimeter files are minimum 1/2 size. .8 Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow sounding units to obtain full. bond. .9 Make internal angles square and external angles (rounded) . ! � SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE Page: 09310-7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ! � 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL (cont'd. ) . 10 Make coved based of the same material as floor tile. .11 Use round trim at termination of wall tile panels, except where panel abuts projecting or right angle surface or flush adjacent surface. . 12 Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles before grouting. Prepare and apply grout to manufacturer' s instructions. . 13 Clean installed tile surfaces after grouting cured. . 14 Install control joints in floor tiles directly above control joints in floor slabs. Make joint width same as the joints. Fill control joints with sealant in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations. 3 . 2 SETTING SYSTEM •, �' . 1 Wall tile: Install in accordance with TTMAC detail No. 200-3, No. 200-5B, No. 200-7. .2 Floor Tile: Install in accordance with ATTMAC detail No. 200-15. 3 Sealer: Apply l coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to unglazed tile floors, except in wet areas as directed by the Consultant. 4 Epoxy Grout: Apply epoxy grout to floors and base in the following locations: Women's Changeroom Room No. 's 136, 136a, 136b, 136c, 136d, 136e, 136f; Men' s Changeroom Room No. 's 138, 138a, 138b, 138c, 138d; Corridor No. 140; Steam Room No. 142; Sauna Room :143; Therapy Pool Room 144; Shower on Therapy Pool Deck; Main Pool Room No. 145; Filter Room No. 146; Storage Room No. 153 . Apply epoxy grout to floors, walls and gutters in the following locations: Main Pool Tank; Therapy Pool Tank; Wading/ Pool Tank; Water Feature Area, and Family Change Room No. 's 137, 137a, 137b, 137c, 137d, 137e, 137f, 137g, 137h, 137i, 137j . 3 . 3 CONCRETE BLOCK WATERPROOFING SEALER 1 Apply waterproofing sealer to Steam Room 142 concrete block walls prior to application of ceramic tile. .2 Waterproofing sealer shall be applied in 2 coats and in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3 .4 PROTECTION . 1 Prohibit all traffic in work areas during installation and for 72 hours after installation of tile. END OF SECTION K� '; I. PROJECT N0.94027-24 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09505 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS----------------------Page: 09505-1 --------------------------------- ---------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 14 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 .2 Mechanical Work Division 15 . 3 Electrical Work Division 16 1.2 CEILING SYSTEM . 1 This Specification includes the ceiling systems listed below, and shown on Reflected Ceiling Plans. . 1 610 mm x 1220 mm lay in exposed Tee system. 1. 3 N.R.C. RANGE . 1 Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system the N.R.C. Range shall be 60-65 (Table 1 of CGSB 92.GP-1a) . 1.4 CEILING S.T.C. 1 Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system the S.T.C. rating shall be 35 or better. 1. 5 LIGHT REFLECTANCE . 1 Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system, panels shall have a light reflectance co-efficient designation of ! L.R. 1 (0.75 minimum) . Table 3 of CGSB 92.GP-la refers. 1. 6 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 Reflected ceiling plans indicate proposed layout but this shall not relieve Contractor of responsibilty for co-ordination of the work and provision of Shop Drawings where field conditions call for variation from proposed layout. .2 Accurately .located lighting fixtures, ventilating grilles and other ceiling fittings. . 3 Conform to Section 01340. rj 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE IIJJ . 1 Transport, handle and store material in manner to prevent warp, twist and damage to tile and board edges and surfaces in A It accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 09505 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS Page: 09505-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE (cont'd. ) .2 Any warped and/or damaged boards, tile and trim shall be rejected and be replaced by new, straight, undamaged and acceptable materials at no cost to the Owner. . 3 Store materials in warm, dry place away from water and the elements. Protect against undue loading stresses and shock. .4 All packaged material shall be delivered in original manufacturer wrappers and containers with label and seals intact. 1.8 PROTECTION . 1 Exercise care in the execution of Work under this Section to prevent damage to finished surfaces and adjacent work, and mechanical and alectrical installations. 1. 9 EXTRA PANELS . 1 Provide 5% typical acoustic panels of each type specified for use in maintenance work. Obtain receipt from the Consultant. 1. 10 SPECIAL CLEANING . 1 Clean, repair or replace dirt, discoloured or defective units or exposed suspensions members to Consultant's satisfaction. 1. 11 ENVIRONMENT . 1 Commence installation after building enclosed and dust-generating activities completed. .2 Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation. . 3 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15 deg.C. and humidity of 20% to 40% prior to, duting and after installation. 1. 12 WARRANTY 111FFF . 1 The Warranty stipulated shall be deemed to include the following definition in reference to Work specified in this Section. "The following will be considered defects without being limited thereto: " . 1 Failure of the suspended ceiling to remain water free. . 2 Lifting or sagging of tile and board between supports. . 3 Staining and discoloration of factory finishes. . 4 Development of corrosion of galvanized ferrous metal. . 5 Development of cracks, splits and other surface deterioration in acoustic panels. . 6 Failure! of hanging wire anchorage. SECTION 09505 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS--------------------------- Page_ 09505_3- --------------------------------- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - LAY-IN SYSTEM . 1 Acoustic Ceiling Tiles: MINABOARD SERIES, 610 mm X 1220 mm, 610 mm x 610 mm CORTEGA PATTERN, BY ARMSTRONG WORLD INDUSTRIES CANADA LTD. , or approved alternate. In Swimming Pool Area supply vinyl covered tile. '! 2 suspension: . 1 Exposed interlocking tee grid system, formed out of cold rolled zinc-bond steel .021" thick. Provide fire rated tees where specifically required. Donn DX Fast-loc by Donn Canada Ltd. , or approved alternate, as follows: 610 mm x 1220 mm, FINISH: OFF-WHITE 610 mm x 1220 mm, AX-Environmental Prefinished Aluminum Grid 6 System by CGC, c/w stainless stell hanger wire for swimming d Pool Area . 2 Main tees - 38 mm x 25 mm double web rectangular bulb top {� with capping plate in precoat baked-on white or black paint ■mil finish as indicated on Drawings and incorporating holes for hangers and slots for connecting pieces, and capable of supporting 62 kg/per 1210 mm continuous spans and 32 kg per 1210 mm span for single span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of the span. . 3 Standard Cross-Tees - 25 mm x 25 mm double web, bulb top, capping plate in precoated white baked on finish, capable of supporting 55 kg per 610 mm span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of span, and with positive interlock with main tees. . 4 Structural Cross-Tees - as main tees, but with crimped ends for lapping botton flange of main tees and interlocking tack ends to engage slots in main tees. .5 Accessories - Splice plate, clips, screws, etc. as required to complete the installation. All galvanize finish. . 6 Concealed flat spline - 22 ga flat steel spline. .7 Edge Trim - zinc bonded steel, cold rolled, reveal recess i, type mould. L . 8 Finish to tees and edge trim - flame resistant white baked enamel satin finish to match panel finish, 2 coats on exposed surfaces, 1 coat elsewhere. . 4 Carrying Channels: 38 mm x 19 mm cold rolled galv. weighing 1. 042 kg per metre. SECTION 09505 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS Page: 09505-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS - LAY-IN SYSTEM (cont'd. ) . 5 Tie Wire: 18 ga, galvanized soft annealed steel. . 6 Hangers: 12 .7 mm galv. steel wire. .7 Screws: Corrosion resistant, self-tapping Phillips truss head, of , length and gauge to suit installation. .8 Ceiling Hanger Pins (for fixing to metal) : KSM Canada Ltd. capacitor discharge ceiling hanger pins of type approved by Consultant. . 9 Inserts for Concrete: Philips "Red Head" tie wire self-drilling anchors T-32 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Employ mechanics skilled in this Trade and install work in strict accordance with the system manufacturer's printed directions to produce a first class, true finish, free from dropping, warping, soiled or damaged tile. .2 Make provisions for termal movement. . 3 Install hanger inserts in a manner approved by Consultant. .4 Locate hangers directly over Main Tees and as close to intersections as possible. Secure hanges firmly to concrete inserts, steel joints and beams, bracing, etc. .5 Erect ceiling grid plumb and square with accurately fitted locked in joints in true alignment, secure and rigid and with provision for thermal movement. Water level ceiling to tolerance of 3 mm in 3600 mm and maximum deviation of 3 mm from mean level. . 6 Frame around recesses, fixtures, diffusers, grilles and the like and provide heavier section hangers and supports as necessary to support same. Provide hangers with 6" of each fixture corner. . 7 Consult with Electrical and Mechanical Trades for requirements and provide access to valves and switches. .8 Ensure that all hangers and carrying members are designed and spaced to support entire ceilinh system including recessed lighting fixtures. Note, weight of fixtures is approximately 44-66 kg. . 9 Install panels only after all mechanical and electrical equipment conduits, piping, telephone distribution, etc. are in place. SECTION 09505 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS Page: 09505-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1 Generally hangers shall be spaced at not more than 1210 mm o.c. directly above main tees, except at fixtures, where they shall be 610 mm o.c. or closer as required to adequately support fixtures. Locate hangers as close as possible to tee junctions. Locate first hanger within 300 mm of perimeter wall. .2 Install main tee runners continuous at 1210 mm o.c. with inter- locking structural cross-tees each side of fixture at right angles to main tees. Install standard cross-tees generally at 90 degrees to main tees and as required to achieve pattern shown on Reflected Ceiling Plans. Secure joints by web of tees; snap- lock into place forming rigid connections. Main tees shall be as long as possible with butt ends joined by means of splice plates locked into webs. . 3 Frame up around light fixtures, grilles, diffusers, speakers, openings, etc. as required. .4 Secure edge mouldings to walls, bulkheads and other vertical surfaces at perimeter edges of acoustic ceilings. . 5 Securely fix hangers to tees by bending ends 90 degrees at the correct height and inserting through holes in top of main tees, then wiring around open side at least 3 turns twisting ends together. Flats shall be bolted to tees. Secure to concrete inserts in similar manner. 3 . 3 LAY-IN PANEL INSTALLATION . 1 End panels shall not be less than half full size and installation in each area shall be symmetrical, with end tiles and abutting opposite vertical wall surface to be of the same width. Do all necessary cutting and fitting neatly and accurately to suit grid openings and accommodate fixtures, grilles, detectors, speakers and the like located on the ceiling panels. . 2 Lay directionally patterned acoustic panels in one direction, parallel to the longest direction of the grid concerned. .3 Place panels between tees so that edges bear evenly on flanges. Where valves occur above, panels shall be suitably and inconspicuously marked by the use of small coloured pins. �/ END OF SECTION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING---------------------Page:09650_1 ---------------------------------- ------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Concrete Finishing Section 03345 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit samples as per Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Primers and Adhesives: those recommended by tile and base manufacturers and which will produce good and permanent waterproof bond between sub-floor and tile, and between wall surfaces and cove base. .2 Tile: Conforming to CSA A126. 1-1967 . Vinyl composition asbestos free. 3 Tile: 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm. Refer to Legend on Drawings and Room Finish Schedule. .4 Rubber Base: 100 mm x 3 mm continuous thick unless otherwise specified, colour as selected by the Consultant, by Johnsonite, or approve alternate. Provide carpet type base where carpet specified. Rubber base to be type which is stabilized to prevent expansion and contraction. Refer to Legend on Drawings and Room Finish Schedule. . 5 Sportsfloor: 9 mm thick Ramflex to colour as selected by the Consultant, as manufactured by Mondo Rubber International and distributed by Gymcon Ltd. (705) 728-2222 for Exercise Room. . 6 Sealer: Type approved by flooring manufacturer. .7 Wax: Non-Slip Type approved by flooring manufacturer. 8 Metal Edge Trim: Aluminum or brass alloy with lip of edge strip extending under and with shoulder finishing flush with top of resilient floor. p SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING Page: 09650-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSPECTION . 1 Check floor surfaces for evidence of carbonation, dusting, excessive moisture or other defects affecting bond of adhesive. Ascertain nature of curing and/or sealing compound used on concrete and its compatibility with flooring adhesive. Take all required remedial measures. Remove compounds if necessary to ensure that adhesive bonds to concrete. 3 .2 GENERAL . 1 Do not start installation of resilient flooring until all other trades have completed their work and just prior to completion of building. 3 . 3 PREPARATION . 1 On concrete floors, level depressions and cracks with non- shrinking latex joint filler. Report large cracks to Consultant. Do not proceed util remedied. Prime surface with approved primer. . 2 Thoroughly clean concrete floors of any substances deleterious to bond of adhesive. 3 . 4 APPLICATION . 1 Apply adhesive uniformly with an approved notch-tooth spreader at the recommended rate. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered before initial set takes place. Use waterproof adhesive throughout. .2 Lay out each area to be tiled symmetrically from its axis. Adjust starting line so width of border tile shall be at least one half tile. Distribute tiles having varying tones or texture evenly over entire floor area to avoid patches or streaks, and to produce homogeneous blend. Reject tiles having undue variations in colour, shade and texture. Make tile joints flush, uniform, in straight lines and as inconspicuous as possible. Lay tile so that directional patterns of tiles are parallel to each other. . 3 Lay out tiles so that joints parallel to axis of room are continuous. .4 Cut tile around excessively heavy or fixed objects. Roll tile with 150 lbs. roller immediately after laying. Lay tile so that it is flush with adjacent floor surfaces, .5 Install metal edge strips at unprotected edges of flooring. li SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING ------ Page_09650_3- - ---------------------------------------------------- 3 .4 APPLICATION OF BASE 1 Fill cracks and level irregularities of surfaces to which base is to be applied with filler approved by adhesive manufacturer so as to provide solid backing over entire area behind base. Cement cove base to vertical surfaces so that gaps do not occur behind base, so that front lip of base cove bears firmly and uniformly on floor surface, and so that good and permanent bond is produced between base and surface to which it is applied. For right angled external corners use preformed matching cove corner units. Make end joints flush with gap. 2 At wall ends and openings where ends of preformed corners come close together or touch or overlap, cut each corner unit equally so that a neat, inconspicuous joint is formed in middle of wall end or opening or so that filled gap, if gap is necessary, is not less than 38 mm wide and located in middle of wall or end of opening. . 3 Use as long a piece as possible. Numerous short pieces will not be accepted. 3.5 ADJUST AND CLEAN . 1 Remove surplus adhesive from face of tiles as work progresses. Upon completion of work remove all markings and heel scuffs. . 2 Clean, seal , wax and polish immediately after installation. . 3 Clean and wax the day prior to turnover to Owner. END OF SECTION c J i DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Concrete Finishing Section 03345 . 2 Resilient Flooring Section 09650 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit for approval two 1200 mm x 1200 mm samples of carpet. .2 Submit seaming diagrams as Shop Drawings showing dye lots, locations and lengths of seams, cross joints, open edges and other details required by Consultant to clarify the Work. 1. 3 CERTIFICATION 1 Submit manufacturer's product data verifying compliance with Specification requirements for carpet, binder bar and adhesive material. .2 Submit evidence verifying compliance of carpet material with: . 1 Flame resistance to CGSB 4-GP-129 by certification as conforming to Hazardous Products Act, Carpet Regulations, or a test report certified by approved independent testing laboratory. .2 ULC flame spread and smoke developed classification by ULC listing or test report certified by nationally recognized fire test laboratory. . 3 Submit certification with submission of samples. .4 Each carpeted area shall be of same dyelot. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Contractor to be an approved applicator of the material manufacturer. 1. 5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1 Provide triplicate set of printed maintenance instructions for inclusion in Data Book as specified under Section 01730. .2 Maintenance instructions shall contain specific warning against maintenance methods and materials harmful to the appearance and durability of installed carpet. SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS . 1 Provide 3% of each carpet used on the Project for maintenance purposes. Deliver to Owner's Agent prior to final payment of Project. 1.7 WARRANTY . 1 Provide a Warranty as stipulated in the General Conditions, but for an extended period of five years from the date of final completion and acceptance of the Work. Warranty shall be signed by both manufacturer and installer. .2 Defects shall include, without being limited to, the following: deterioration of backing, delaminations, failure of seams, stretching or wrinkling, loss of more than 5% of surface pile in any given area, excessive fading, unravelling. Decision of Consultant on loss of pile to be final and binding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Refer to Section 01020 - Cash Allowance for Supply Only. . 2 Flame resistant: to meet or exceed CGSB standard 4-GP-129. . 3 Subject to compliance with the technical specification and approval by the Consultant, prior to bidding, other manufacturers equivalent products may be provided. .4 Use carpet manufactured from yarns of the same dye lot for each colour. Select materials for colour and pattern consistency using matching pieces in each location. . 5 Threshold and Binder Edge: Heavy duty aluminum, colour anodized, to Consultant's selection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 ENVIRONMENT . 1 Do not install carpet when air temperature of subfloor is below 10 deg. C. 3 .2 PREPARATORY WORK . 1 Surface to receive carpet shall be clear and free of grease, wax and other deleterious materials. SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-3 ------------------------------------------------------ 3.2 PREPARATORY WORK (cont'd. ) 2 Concrete slab shall have cured for a minimum of 60 days and shall be dry. If requested by the Consultant, test concrete for moisture content and obtain acceptable result before commencing Work. . 3 If sealer specified under Section 03345 ensure that sealer has been applied before commencing installation of carpet. Ensure sealer is compatible with carpet adhesive. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Install carpeting after finishing work is completed. 2 Finish installation to represent smooth wearing surface free from conspicuous seams, burring or other faults. 3 Ensure perfect colour, pattern and texture match with any one area or suite. . 4 After installation is complete, remove any spots with suitable spot remover, remove all cuttings, clean with an industrial vacuum cleaner and protect as specified. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD . 1 Cut 2 pieces of carpet to length, plus trim and lay in place, forming seam by method as recommended by the carpet manufacturer or the carpet installer, and snap a chalk line to mark seam location. Either the butt seam or the double cut seam will be acceptable. I' . 2 Turn each piece back approximately 1. 5 m from seam and spread adhesive uniformly each side of chalk line. 3 Unroll 1 piece of carpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles toward seam. Unroll second piece toward seam and work cut edge into adhesive to "butter" seam. Roll out air bubbles in second piece toward seam. . 4 Roll up cemented portion of first piece toward seam, apply adhesive and unroll carpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles away from seam. Do likewise with second piece but omit adhesive for 600 mm from uncemented edge where next seam will occur. Cut off excess carpet. .5 Cut next length of carpet and lay in place. Repeat installation procedure. . 6 Join seams with carpet seaming adhesive. SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD (cont'd. ) .7 At columns and other penetrations, cut carpet with maximum possible coverage. Position the seams made by these cuts first. .8 End seams are generally not acceptable. However, where such seams can be so located that they are hidden from view or are otherwise inconspicuous, the Consultant may permit an exception to the above requirement, provided that written authorization is received. .9 Locate seams in light traffic areas where possible and match pile and pattern in making seams. Make seams parallel to length of room where possible. . 10 Carpet edges shall extend under wall or fitment bases. Edges of carpet in door reveals shall occur directly under door bottom. . 11 Provide metal binder bars at thresholds and at junction with other flooring materials. 3 .4 PROTECTION . 1 Protect traffic areas of carpeted floors with 6 mil polyethylene drop sheets. Tape joints to prevent shifting. . 2 Do not remove without Consultant's written authorization. END OF SECTION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027 SECTION 09680 - CARPET 09680-1 ---------------------------------Page_ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Concrete Finishing Section 03345 .2 Resilient Flooring Section 09650 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit for approval two 1200 mm x 1200 mm samples of carpet. .2 Submit seaming diagrams as Shop Drawings showing dye lots, locations and lengths of seams, cross joints, open edges and other details required by Consultant to clarify the Work. 1. 3 CERTIFICATION ?' . 1 Submit manufacturer's product data verifying compliance with Specification requirements for carpet, binder bar and adhesive material. . � .2 Submit evidence verifying compliance of carpet material with: . 1 Flame resistance to CGSB 4-GP-129 by certification as conforming to Hazardous Products Act, Carpet Regulations, or a test report certified by approved independent testing laboratory. 2 ULC flame spread and smoke developed classification by ULC listing or test report certified by nationally recognized fire test laboratory. . 3 Submit certification with submission of samples. 4 Each carpeted area shall be of same dyelot. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Contractor to be an approved applicator of the material manufacturer. ' 1.5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS t . 1 Provide triplicate set of printed maintenance instructions for inclusion in Data Book as specified under Section 01730. . 2 Maintenance instructions shall contain specific warning against maintenances methods and materials harmful to the appearance and durability of installed carpet. SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-2 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 1. 6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS . 1 Provide 3% of each carpet used on the Project for maintenance purposes. Deliver to Owner's Agent prior to final payment of Project. 1. 7 WARRANTY . 1 Provide a Warranty as stipulated in the General Conditions, but for an extended period of five years from the date of final completion and acceptance of the Work. Warranty shall be signed by both manufacturer and installer. .2 Defects shall include, without being limited to, the following: deterioration of backing, delaminations, failure of seams, stretching or wrinkling, loss of more than 5% of surface pile in any given area, excessive fading, unravelling. Decision of Consultant on loss of pile to be final and binding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Allow $ 28 . 00 per sq.yd. for the Supply, Installation, including Provincial Sales Tax and Goods & Service Tax for all carpet. . 2 Flame resistant: to meet or exceed CGSB standard 4-GP-129. . 3 Subject to compliance with the technical specification and approval by the Consultant, prior to bidding, other manufacturers equivalent products may be provided. . 4 Use carpet manufactured from yarns of the same dye lot for each colour. Select materials for colour and pattern consistency using matching pieces in each location. .5 Threshold and Binder Edge: Heavy duty aluminum, colour anodized, to Consultant's selection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 ENVIRONMENT . 1 Do not install carpet when air temperature of subfloor is below 10 deg. C. 3 .2 PREPARATORY WORK . 1 Surface to receive carpet shall be clear and free of grease, wax and other deleterious materials. SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 PREPARATORY WORK (cont'd. ) .2 Concrete slab shall have cured for a minimum of 60 days and shall be dry. If requested by the Consultant, test concrete for moisture content and obtain acceptable result before commencing Work. . 3 If sealer specified under Section 03345 ensure that sealer has been applied before commencing installation of carpet. Ensure sealer is compatible with carpet adhesive. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL . 1 Install carpeting after finishing work is completed. .2 Finish installation to represent smooth wearing surface free from conspicuous seams, burring or other faults. . 3 Ensure perfect colour, pattern and texture match with any one area or suite. .4 After installation is complete, remove any spots with suitable spot remover, remove all cuttings, clean with an industrial vacuum cleaner and protect as specified. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD . 1 Cut 2 pieces of carpet to length, plus trim and lay in place, forming seam by method as recommended by the carpet manufacturer or the carpet installer, and snap a chalk line to mark seam location. Either the butt seam or the double cut seam will be acceptable. . 2 Turn each piece back approximately 1.5 m from seam and spread adhesive uniformly each side of chalk line. . 3 Unroll 1 piece of carpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles toward seam. Unroll second piece toward seam and work cut edge into adhesive to "butter" seam. Roll out air bubbles in second piece toward seam. . 4 Roll up cemented portion of first piece toward seam, apply adhesive and unroll carpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles away from seam. Do likewise with second piece but omit adhesive for 600 mm from uncemented edge where next seam will occur. Cut off excess carpet. .5 Cut next length of carpet and lay in place. Repeat installation procedure. . 6 Join seams with carpet seaming adhesive. f, SECTION 09680 - CARPET Page: 09680-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD (cont'd. ) .7 At columns and other penetrations, cut carpet with maximum possible coverage. Position the seams made by these cuts first. .8 End seams are generally not acceptable. However, where such seams can be so located that they are hidden from view or are otherwise inconspicuous, the Consultant may permit an exception to the above requirement, provided that written authorization is received. .9 Locate seams in light traffic areas where possible and match pile and pattern in making seams. Make seams parallel to length of room where possible. . 10 Carpet edges shall extend under wall or fitment bases. Edges of carpet in door reveals shall occur directly under door bottom. . 11 Provide metal binder bars at thresholds and at junction with other flooring materials. 3 .4 PROTECTION . 1 Protect traffic areas of carpeted floors with 6 mil polyethylene drop sheets. Tape joints to prevent shifting. . 2 Do not remove without Consultant' s written authorization. END OF SECTION V DIVISION 9 -FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09760 - SEAMLESS FLOORING--------------------- Page_ 09760-1 --------------------------------- --------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 1. 2 DESIGN CRITERIA 1 Ensure structural substrate to receive topping is designed to prevent random cracking and/or deflection. Provide sufficient control and expansion joints. . .2 Ensure substrate is sound, dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreign substances. 3 Variations is substrate level should not exceed 3mm x 33m (1/8" in 101011) . Ensure deviations or deteriorated concrete are corrected prior to start of this work. .4 Substrates in contact with ground must have a effective vapour barrier to prevent potential problems resulting from hydrostatic or capillary moisture pressure. 1.3 SAMPLES AND JOB MOCK-UP 1 Submit two (2) samples minimum 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 1211) that are representative of finished work. 2 Construct panel 9 sq. m. (100 sq. ft. ) minimum of typical flooring on site as part of final installation for approval. Location to be determined by Consultant. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . 1 Ensure Contractor maintains surfaces and ambient air temperature at least 50 F/10 C for a minimum of 72 hours before, during and after flooring application and for storage areas. . 2 Adequate ventilation required during installation. . 3 Advise other trades of fixtures and fitting not to be installed until flooring is cured. . 4 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this trade. If necessary, mark and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc. by suitable means. . 5 Post "NO SMOKING" signs while work is in progress and curing. SECTION 09760 - SEAMLESS FLOORING Page: 09760-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Flooring by an "CERTIFIED INSTALLER" of manufacturer with factory approved/recognized qualifications. .2 Provide proof of certification in writing from manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY . 1 Warrant that seamless flooring will conform to manufacturer's published test data for flooring type installed and will perform satisfactorily for a period of three years without cracking, delaminating, crazing, spalling, pitting, dusting or softening under normal usage of the intended occupancy. Unless sub-floor develops structural cracks, normal shrinkage cracks are not considered structural cracks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Surfacings - Quartzite Ceramic Granular Flooring Type 2200 - manufactured by Master Builders in colour patterns selected by Consultant. Materials as manufactured by Stonehard Ltd. are and approved alternate. for this Project. . 2 Primer two component penetrating dampproof epoxy to suit applicable condition. . 3 Aggregates colour-coated Quartz with a minimum Moh's hardness of 6. . 4 Matrix-epoxy/aggregate composition. .5 Grout and top coats - clear two component epoxies. 3 . 1 INSPECTION . 1 Examine surfaces to receive flooring. They shall be smooth, sound, dry and free from conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work. 3 . 2 NOTIFICATION . 1 If any substrata deficiency is apparent, notify Consultant in writing prior to commencing work. .2 Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and conditions. SECTION 09760 - SEAMLESS FLOORING Page_09760_3-- ----------------------------------------------------------- �. 3 .3 PREPARATION 1 Effectively remove concrete laitance by steel shot blasting, sand blasting, acid etching or method approved by flooring manufacturer. . 2 Remove all projections, oil contaminates, etc. It 3 .4 INSTALLATION . 1 Complete work to manufacturer's written instructions. 2 Prime entire surface with recommended primer. . 3 Apply clear epoxy and decorative aggregate matrix at a minimum thickness of 3 mm (1/811) to Kitchen Area and Snack Bar Area. ' .4 Apply grout and top coats to provide a uniform, dense surface. .5 Match finished work to approved samples - uniform in thickness, .' � sheen, colour, pattern and texture, and free from defects detrimental to appearance or performance. . 6 Apply temporary protection until flooring is fully cured. .7 Slope seamless flooring toward floor drains. 8 Bring seamless flooring up wall base 150 mm to give a tub effect. END OF SECTION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09800 - PLASTIC WALL PAINT-------------------- Page_ 09800-1 ---------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Concrete Blockwork Section 04200 + 2 Painting Section 09900 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Installation by manufacturer's own forces or franchised applicator. 1.3 BASIS OF SPECIFICATION . 1 This Specification is based on Glazetite Type II by Master Builders Ltd. Materials as manufactured by Stonehard Ltd. are an approved alternate for this Project. 1.4 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit two 12" x 12" samples of material in selected colour by Consultant, applied over concrete pad with simulated joint to match block joints. 1. 5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 Deliver and store materials in original containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact in a warm, dry lockable area until surfaces are ready for application. Store "red label" (fire hazard) materials in locations approved by local fire 1' authorities. .2 Keep thinner soaked rags and other similar combustible materials in closed metal containers and remove from Job Site at end of each work shift. 1. 6 ENVIRONMENT . 1 Do not apply coatings at a temperature below 10 degrees C. , and to surfaces having a moisture content greater than 15%. 1.7 PROTECTION . 1 Post legible signs at all points of entry to areas in which work of this Section is being applied. These signs shall warn against smoking and use of open flame, such as torches, matches and lighters. SECTION 09800 - PLASTIC WALL PAINT Page: 09800-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.7 PROTECTION (cont'd. ) .2 Erect suitable barriers to prevent traffic and other trades from working in areas during application of coatings. .3 Mask all surrounding adjacent surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines with no adjacent surfaces. 1.8 WARRANTY . 1 Provide Warranty that interior special coatings shall remain free from defects of workmanship and materials in accordance with the General Conditions but for three years and agreeing to replace or repair all faulty materials or work without cost to the Owner. Crazing, blistering, fading, bond failure and softening shall be considered defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Coatings - as specified in Article . 3 . . 2 Finish - To match approved sample as selected by the Consultant. . 3 Sealant - Polysulphide, two component type conforming to CGSB/ CAN 19. 24-M80, or one component type conforming to CGSB/CAN 19. 13- M82 . Colour selected by Consultant. .4 Foundation Coat - Cementitious material with acrylic latex additive, as manufactured by Master Builders. 2 .2 MIXES . 1 Mix foundation coat and coating in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATION COAT . 1 Inspect masonry finish and advise Architect if tolerances and joint finish are below standard necessary to facilitate successful application of coating to achieve approved finish appearance. .2 Apply foundation coat in accordance with manufacturer's direction and to a finished thickness of approximately 40 mils. SECTION 09800 - PLASTIC WALL PAINT------------------------- Page: 09800-3 ---------------------------------- ----------- 3 .2 INSTALLATION - FINISH COATING 1 Apply special coatings before adjacent work is painted, to Change Rooms, Snack Bar, Kitchen, Childcare Area, Washrooms above ceramic tile, Swimming Pool 145, Therapy Pool 144, Corridor 140, Filter Room 146, and all other areas as shown on Room Finish Schedule. .2 Do not apply coating over non-hardening sealants or caulking materials. . 3 Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4 Finished work shall be even, uniform in colour and appearance, free from marks, runs, craters or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance and shall match approved samples. . 5 Dry film thickness excluding filler coats shall be 15 mils. . 6 Seal around all fixtures and fittings protruding through coating. . 7 Upon completion remove masking and clean adjacent surfaces free of overspray. END OF SECTION f DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-1 ------------------------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 .2 Handrails and Railings Section 05520 . 3 Rough Carpentry Section 06100 .4 Hollow Metalwork Section 08100 .5 Wood Doors Section 08200 6 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 .7 Shop Priming Specified in various Sections of the Specification. j� .8 Factory applied paint coatings unless otherwise specified. .9 Mechanical Division 15 . 10 Electrical Division 16 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK . 1 With exceptions specified above or specifically called for in other Sections of the Specification, all paintwork is included in the scope of this Section of the Specification. Colours will be specified at a later date by the Consultant, allow for accent walls of primary colour to some areas. Allow for minimum 4 colours per room and 3 accent colours and special graphics to later instruction. 2 In locations where Drawings do not call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings, the intent of this Specification is that all wood, masonry and metal surfaces normally in view are painted or similarly finished shall be so treated. . 3 Paint exposed drywall and the like in locations where finish is not otherwise specified or noted. Do not paint such surfaces in mechanical shafts, unless specifically noted. .4 In locations where Drawings do not call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings, the intent of this Specification is that items including miscellaneous metal work, shall be painted. Patched work shall require a complete surface to be painted, back to a proper cut off point, i.e. corner or change in direction from floor to ceiling for walls and wall to wall for ceilings. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK (cont'd. ) .5 Paint new pipes, conduit, ducts and related thermal insulation and all prime painted mechanical and electrical equipment and supports located in mechanical and electrical storage and maintenance rooms in all locations where Drawings call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings. Paint all ductwork, grilles, diffusers, hangers, pipe insulation, wires, support angles, luminaires, conduit, junction boxes, wires, ties, etc. , exposed to view with epoxy paint, in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations. . 6 Do not paint pipe, conduit, ducts, insulation and the like where concealed above ceilings or in service shafts. Items exposed on the roof shall be painted. .7 Make good paint finish on shop coated work where damaged. .8 Paint visible portions of steel shelf angles, lintels and structural steel. .9 Paint edges and all faces of doors where primed for paint supplied. Paint all top and bottom edges of all wood doors. . 10 Interior of ducts and diffusers visible from exterior on room side. . 11 Repaint existing surfaces after approved preparation, includes all previously painted surfaces, i.e. walls, doors, frames, handrails, closets, etc. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS . 1 Do painting and finishing to CGSB-85-GP series standards including Appendix A and to material manufacturer's instructions and/or to Canadian Painting Contractor's Association except where specifically specified otherwise. 1.4 ENVIRONMENT . 1 Do not commence interior painting in temperatures below 15 deg.0 or when adequately controlled ventilation is not available. Do not paint exterior surfaces during cold, windy, rainy, dusty, foggy or frosty weather when temperature is likely to drop below 5 deg. C. . 2 Test for moisture content in each location immediately before commencing application of paint. Do not apply paint on surfaces where moisture content exceeds 14%. Promptly notify Consultant if such conditions are encountered. . 3 Provide approved equipment for testing moisture content of surfaces to receive paint finishes and have available on Site at all times during Work of this Section. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ',� 1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit triplicate samples 12" x 8" (300 mm x 200 mm) panels of each type of paint finish specified. Panels shall be of same material as that on which sample coatings are to be applied in the field where possible. Identify each sample as to job, name of paint manufacturer, finish, colour, name and number, sheen and gloss units and name of Contractor. 2 Furnish an OPCA two year guarantee in accordance with Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 of the OPCA Manual including inspection. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS . 1 Provide one sealed can, four litre capacity, of each product in each colour used in the Work for Owner's use in maintenance Work. 2 Container to be new fully labelled with manufacturer' s name, type of paint, and colour. 1.7 STORAGE . 1 Store paint and painter's materials in locations approved by the Consultant. .2 Provide CO2 fire extinguisher minimum 20 lbs. (9 Kg) capacity in paint storage area. Maintain CO2 fire extinguisher readily available in all areas of work. 1.8 SIGNS . 1 Provide legible signs throughout the Work reading "WET PAINT" in prominent positions during painting and while paint is drying. . 2 Use 3" (75mm) high letters on white card or board. 1.9 TEMPORARY COVERS AND PROTECTION . 1 Protect floors and other surfaces with temporary covers such as dust sheets, polyethylene film or tarpaulins. Contractor shall be responsible for remedial work necessary in consequence of not providing adequate protection. 2 Mask identification plates occurring on equipment, switch boxes, and fire rating labels, etc. which require painting. . 3 Protect, remove and replace hardware, accessories, lighting fixtures and similar items as required except primed for paint door closers which shall be painted. 4 Keep oily rags, waste and other similar combustible materials in closed metal containers; take every precaution to avoid spontaneous combustion, remove waste and combustible materials daily. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 9 TEMPORARY COVERS AND PROTECTION (cont'd. ) .5 Clean surfaces soiled by spillage of paint, paint spattering and the like. If such cleaning operations damage the surface, repair and replace damaged work at no cost to the Owner. 1.10 RETOUCHING . 1 Do all retouching, etc. to ensure that the building may be handed over to the Owner in perfect condition, free of spatter, finger prints, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes of other disfiguration. .2 After fully decorating and retouching a room or other area, notify Consultant. After inspection and final approval by Consultant post sign `DECORATING COMPLETE - NO ADMITTANCE WITHOUT PERMISSION' . 1. 11 TEST AREA . 1 A room or area in the building will be designated by the Consultant as a test area to establish standard of workmanship, texture, gloss and coverage. . 2 Prior to any painting being started, request a meeting on Site between Consultant, Contractor, Subcontractor and Material Manufacturer's Representative to review conditions, surfaces, anticipated problems and to clarify quality of workmanship acceptable to Consultant. .3 Apply finishes to each type of surface within room with correct material, coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss in sample area and have same approved prior to providing Work of this Section. .4 Retain test area until after completion of Work. Test area to be minimum standard for the Work. . 5 Failure to comply with the above will be just cause for Consultant to request all Work previously painted to be repainted PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS . 1 Paint and finishing materials - highest grade, first line quality provided by manufacturer who agrees to provide supervision service during painting operations. The following manufacturers are acceptable. !� SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 1 Benjamin Moore Co. .2 Glidden Company, Division of S.C.M. (Canada) Ltd. -� .3 Para Paints Ltd. .4 Sherwin Williams .5 Colour Your World 2 Paints, enamels, fillers, primers, varnishes and stains - ready mixed products of one of the manufacturers listed herein. Substitutes will not be allowed. 3 Thinners, cleaners - type and brand recommended by the paint manufacturer. 4 Only products manufactured by paint manufacturer stated at time of submission of samples will be allowed on Site unless other materials specifically specified herein. No painting to be performed until paint manufacturer identified and acceptance received from the Consultant. . 5 Deliver materials to Site in original unbroken containers bearing brand and maker's name. The presence of any unauthorized material or containers for such, on Site shall be of sufficient cause for rejection of ALL paint materials on Site at that time. PART 3 - EXECUTION !� 3 . 1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES . 1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following standards unless otherwise specified: . 1 Prepare wood surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-la. Use CGSB 1-GP-125b vinyl sealer over knots and resinous areas. Use CGSB 1-GP -103b wood paste filler for nail holes. Tint filler to match for stained woodwork. . 2 Touch up damaged spots of shop paint primer on steel with CGSB 1-GP-40d to CGSB 85-GP-14. . 3 Prepare galvanized steel and zinc coated surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-16. This includes wiped coated steel surfaces. .4 Prepare masonry and concrete surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-31. .5 Prepare wallboard surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-33 . Fill minor cracks with plaster patching compound. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES (cont'd. ) . 6 Prepare concrete floors to CGSB 85-GP-32 . .7 Prepare copper piping and accessories to CGSB 85-GP-20. .8 Apply prime coat on wood scheduled for paint finish before installation. .9 Back prime wood scheduled for transparent finish. Do not prime surfaces scheduled for transparent finish. 3 .2 APPLICATION . 1 In accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and manufacturer's Site representative. .2 With suitable, clean equipment in good condition. . 3 In dust-free suitable conditions on the surfaces free from machine, tool or sandpaper marks, insects, grease, or any other condition liable to impair finished work to prevent production or good results. .4 Even, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush or roller marks, well brushed or rolled in and free of sages, crawls, runs, join marks or other defects. . 5 Permit paint to dry between coats. Touch up suction spots after applying first coat. Tint various coats of multiple coat work in light shades of the final colour selected, to distinguish between coats. Give Consultant due notice and sufficient opportunity (minimum 48 hours) to inspect each coat. Do not proceed with subsequent coat until preceding coat approved. Consultant reserves the right to order complete retreatment if this condition is not observed. . 6 Painting coats are intended to cover surfaces perfectly; if in painter's opinion, formula specified is inadequate to provide a first class finished surface, report to the Consultant before commencing work. Surfaces imperfectly covered shall receive additional coats at no additional cost. .7 Use paint unadulterated. Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate and finish coats. Factory mix all paints. .8 Paint finish shall be applied by roller except in the case of wood trim, door frames, base board and similar work of small surface area which shall be painted by brush. Do not use roller for applying finish other than paint. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 2 APPLICATION (cont'd. ) . 9 Spray painting will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the Consultant in each instance. Consultant may withdraw approval at any time and prohibit spray painting for reasons such as carelessness, poor masking or protection measures drifting paint fog, disturbance to other Trades or failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque finish. Spray painting shall be full double coat, i.e. at least two passes for each coat. Do not use spray or roller on wood or metal surfaces, brush only unless approved in writing by Consultant. . 10 Finish all edges of doors with paint or stain treatment as required to match face of door. Seal hidden edges of wood doors with one coat of shellac and one coat gloss varnish or two coats paint. Repaint tops and edges of wood doors after fitting. . 11 Even up stained woodwork in colour as required by nature of wood and as directed by Consultant. Apply same finish on trim,fitments cupboards and other protecting ledges as on surrounding work, disregard sight lines. . 12 Carefully hand smooth and sandpaper wood between coats (including priming) . Apply one coat sealer before applying first coat paint filler to knots or sap blemishes on wood surfaces to receive paint or strain finish. . 13 Remove rust:, oil, grease and loose shop paint from metal work by brushing or with wire brushes and make good shop coat before j� proceeding with final finish. Feather out edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous. . 14 After first coat, fill nail holes, splits and scratches, using putty coloured to match finish. .15 Clean castings with wire brush before application of first paint coat. . 16 Do not etch galvanized metal. Use zinc rich primer. This includes metal door frames and the like with wiped zinc coating. . 17 Remove form oil or parting compounds from concrete surfaces. Use Xylol or approved compound. . 18 Paint interior of pipe spaces, ducts, etc. visible through grilles or through linear metal ceilings in black matt finish. . 19 Conform with Consultant's colour schedule and exactly match approved samples. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 APPLICATION (cont'd. ) 20 Mechanical and Electrical Pipes, Ducts and Conduits: . 1 Commence Work when piping installation complete in the area concerned. . 2 Do not paint plated or other prefinished surfaces, unless otherwise noted. . 3 Paint conduit in same colour as background paint, except gas piping in unpainted areas which must be gas company orange. . 4 Apply formulae specified even though surface prime painted at shop prior to delivery. Touch up shop priming where damaged. .5 Use heat resistant epoxy paint on pipes and surfaces where operating surface temperature exceeds 65 degrees C. . 6 Paint exposed pipes and ducts and their supports and related items in colours to suit colour coding adopted by Owner, to Consultant's later instructions. .21 Do not paint exterior work (materials) when temperature is below 10 deg.0 and/or damp weather conditions. .22 Allow 4 paint colours per room if not otherwise specified. 3 . 3 REPAIRS . 1 Cracks occurring in walls or ceilings requiring patching during "Warranty Period" shall be repainted in such a way that the patch is not visible at a distance of 900 mm. . 2 If patch painting is not acceptable, repaint entire wall, or ceiling. 3 .4 PAINT SCHEDULE . 1 Painting shall conform to CAN/CGSB 1-G-QPL (low odour) ECP 07 for water-based paints and bears "Ecologo" . No alkyd or solvent based paints are to be used. .2 INTERIOR WORK Priming SURFACE COATS MATERIAL Plaster 1 Latex Sealer Wallboard, concrete block, concrete 1 Super-Seal Latex Sealer Wood Surfaces 1 Enamel undercoat SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-9 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- I� 3 . 4 PAINT SCHEDULE (cont'd. ) . 2 INTERIOR WORK (cont'd. ) Finishing AREA COATS MATERIAL Walls/ceiling/trim 2 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel Walls/ceilings/woodwork 2 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel Doors 2 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel Ceilings in public spaces 2 Latex Flat Walls/woodwork in 2 Latex Semi-Gloss Corridors and Stairwell Unpainted Concrete Floors 2 Oleo-Resinous Sealer All Exposed Piping (to 1 Primer include al]. insulated or 1 Latex Finish Colour to uninsulated exposed piping Coding System Colour Schedule for Piping and Boiler Equipment Domestic Cold Water - Green Domestic Hot Water Blue Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Blue Heat Supply Orange Heating Return - Orange All Drains _ Black Fuel Oil Lines Blue Natural Gas Lines - Yellow Fire Protection _ Red Air Conditioning Purple .3 EXTERIOR WORK Carry out all Exterior Work in accordance with CGSB 85-GP-la, using only first-line materials. SURFACE COATS MATERIAL Ferrous Metals 1 Latex primer 2 Exterior gloss latex Galvanized Steel Frames 1 Galvanizing primer ii SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .4 PAINT SCHEDULE (cont'd. ) . 3 EXTERIOR WORK SURFACE COATS MATERIAL Doors, Grilles 2 Exterior gloss latex Stained Wood Fences 2 Exterior "Urethane" Structural Steel 1 Primer 2 Epoxy .4 SWIMMING POOL AREA Provide OPCA 2 Year Warranty of 100% 2 Year Maintenance Bond with OPCA inspection for painting commencing at date of Substantial Performance. Both warrenty and maintenance and maintenance bond to be in accordance with requirements of Chapter 7 of OPCA Manual including related inspections and payment of same. Provide and pay for OPCA inspection pursuant to warranty or maintenance bond. Acceptable products: Per Chapter 5 OPCA Manual and as listed: Miscellaneous metals: Primed: INT. 12-A. Semi-Gloss Galvanized: INT. 13-A. Semi-Gloss The following areas shall receive epoxy paint: deck; trusses, all exposed steel including doors, frames, lintels, etc. in swimming pool areas and change room areas. Structural Steel Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast DFT Primer: Coronada Epoxy Zinc Rich 2 .5 - 3 .5 mils Intermediate: Coronado Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils Finish: Coronado Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils Flume Ride Steel Surface Preparation: Lightly sweep blast in accordance with SSPC-SP7 DFT Primer: Coronada Epoxy 4 . 5 - 5.5 mils Finish: Coronado Superthane 1. 5 - 2 .0 mils SECTION 09900 - PAINTING Page: 09900-11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .4 PAINT SCHEDULE (cont'd. ) 4 SWIMMING POOL AREA (cont'd. ) Satin Coat Galvanized Metal ' Surface Preparation: Remove oil, grease and other containents by washing with Sur-Prep I oil and grease emulsifier. DFT Primer: Coronada Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils Finish: Coronado Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils Hot Dipped Spangled Galvanized Metal Surface Preparation: Lightly sweep blast in accordance with SSPC-SP7 DFT Primer: Coronada Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils Finish: Coronado Epoxy Semi Gloss 2 - 3 mils END OF SECTION I� DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 10160 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS----------------Page_10160-1 --------------------------------------- -------------- PART I - GENERAL "�. 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ■ . 1 Unit Masonry Section 04200 .2 Washroom Accessories Section 10800 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. 2 Clearly indicate fabrication details, plans, elevations, hardware and installation details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Floor mounted overhead braced Model No. 110-MC as manufactured by Watrous Sales Inc. , or approved alternates as listed below: j� . 1 "Academy" by Hadrian Products Ltd. .2 "Shanahan" by W.G.Wood Sales. . 2 Ceiling mounted Stainless Steel Shower Cubicles Model 130-SS as manufactured by Watrous Sales Inc. Cubicles shall be mounted 300 mm A.F.F. .3 Sheet Steel: commercial grade to ASTM A526-71 (1975) , with galvanized zinc coating to ASTM A526-76, designation G90. Minimum core thickness; panels and doors 0.759 mm; pilaster 0. 912 mm; reinforcement 2 .657 mm. .4 Headrails: 25 mm x 41 mm x 0.912 mm minimum core thickness tubular steel. .5 Pilaster Shoes: 76 mm high die formed stainless steel. . 6 Fixing Devices: As recommended by the manufacturer,tamperproof. 7 Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous metal. . 1 Hinges: Fully enclosed gravity type(concealed within door) ball bearings and adjustable to hold open in any desired position. .2 Latch: Slide bar type and latch keeper. Provide D-Handle to inside of Handicapped Stall. .3 Coat Hook: Combination with door stop and rubber tipped bumper. i 'j� SECTION 10160 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page:10160-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) .7 Hardware: (cont'd. ) .4 Brackets: Heavy duty extruded aluminum alloy, chemically brightened and polished. 2 . 2 FABRICATION . 1 Door and Panels: Sheet steel faces pressure bonded to honeycomb core to 25.4 mm thick door to sizes indicated on drawings. .2 Pilasters: Same construction as door but 32 mm thick to sizes indicated on drawings. . 3 Provide formed and closed edges welded together and sealed with oval locking strips, to doors, panels and pilasters. Mitre and weld corners and grind smooth. .4 Provide internal reinforcement for attachment of hardware and fittings. Indicate location of reinforcement for tissue holders and grab bars where required. 2 . 3 SHOP FINISHING . 1 Clean, degrease and neutralize steel components with phosphate of chromate treatment. . 2 Shop prime and baked on enamel finish in colour to Consultant's selection from manufacturer's standard colour range. Allow for minimum of two colours. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Install partitions secure, plumb and square. .2 Leave 12.7 mm between wall and panel or end pilaster. . 3 Fix brackets securely using stainless steel screws and shields. .4 Attach panel and pilaster to brackets with through type sleeve bolt and nut, adjust using jack levelling screws. . 5 Fix pilaster shoes in position to mask pilaster fastenings. . 6 Install and adjust doors for correct operation. .7 Attach headrail to wall with manufacturer's fittings and to pilasters to form a rigid installation; make all joints in headrail at pilaster, mitre corners. SECTION 10160 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page: 10160-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 . 1 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) . 8 Install specified hardware. .9 Install all partitions, hardware and the like using one way screws and/or tamperproof fixings. a� END OF SECTION I� �r 1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 10200 - LOUVRES 10200-1 --------------------------------Page_ PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Sealants Section 07900 2 Blank Off Panels Division 15 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Provide shop drawings clearly indicating the material being ! supplied and showing all connections, attachments,reinforcing, anchorage and location or exposed fasteners. Provide also sizes based on Mechanical Drawings for net area, and percent of free air. . 2 Submit samples of finish to the Consultant for approval prior to fabrication. 1. 3 DESIGN . 1 Design all members to withstand within acceptable deflection limitations their own weight, and the minimum design loads due to the pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with the Building Code of Ontario, based on 30 year probability. .2 Deflection .limits for all members - a maximum of 1/175 of the span under design loading. Submit wind load calculations to the Consultant for approval before commencing fabrication. . 3 Design louvres such that an area of 50% minimum of the face area allows free passage of air. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Aluminum louvres shall be complete with all necessary accessories continuous blade extruded aluminum louvres and frame Model No. A-4100 as manufactured by The C/S Group. Provide integral wind-driven rain baffle on blades. Fabricate louvres with mullions or reinforcing not visible on the outside. Finished appearance shall be that of continuous blades housed in a rectangular frame. Provide weep holes at 210" (600 mm) o.c. j for drainage to exterior. Materials as manufactured by C/S Group Ltd. are the only approved materials for this Project. No other manufacturer will be accepted. .2 Provide al]. extruded aluminum angles and channels required to frame the louvre elements. SECTION 10200 - LOUVRES Page: 10200-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 3 Construct louvres of 12 gauge (2. 6 mm) extruded aluminum 6063-T5 all 4" (100 mm) depth. .4 Construct frames of 6063-T5 allow 0. 125" (3 . 175 mm) thick 4" x 1-1/2" (100 mm x 38 mm) tubular,mitred corners, all welded construction. . 5 Supply and install 16 gauge (1.6 mm) diameter wire aluminum bird screen 1/2" (12 .7 mm) square mesh. Securely fasten standard screen to louvre frame. . 6 Finish all aluminum exposed to view in the completed work shall be Duranar to Consultant' s later selection. 2 .2 FABRICATION . 1 Fabricate the Work of this Section by skilled craftsmen in accordance with the best practice in the shops or companies specializing in the Work specified. . 2 Execute fitting and assembly of louvres in the shop with the various parts or assemblies ready for erection at the Site. . 3 Fabricate the Work true to dimensions, square, plumb and level. Accurately fit joints and intersection members with adequate fasteners. . 4 Fabricate the finished work free from distortion and defects detrimental to appearance and performance. . 5 Welding shall be done using inert metal arc equipment by a fabricator fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau under the requirements of CSA Standard W47. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Do not leave grinding marks. . 6 Weld connections where possible; where not possible bolt connections or secure in an approved manner. Countersink exposed fastenings and cut off bolts flush with nuts, and make as inconspicuous as possible. . 7 Provide fabricated metal work complete with all components required for anchoring to concrete or masonry. Perform all drilling of concrete necessary to anchor components. .8 Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis due to metal to metal contact or contact between metal and masonry or concrete Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved methods. SECTION 10200 - LOUVRES Page: 10200-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .2 FABRICATION (cont'd. ) 9 Provide all necessary templates and instructions where fastenings or anchors have to be built in by others. Verify all dimensions on the Site before preparing drawings or proceeding with shop work. . 10 Supply and build in 0.040 (1.016 mm) thick sheet aluminum flashing where required to prevent entry of moisture into building. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION i� . 1 Fasten louvre frame to supporting structure plumb, level and true and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure blank offs are provided for unused portions of the louvre area from inside with insulated panels adequately fixed to frames and blades to prevent vibration. Blank off panel shall be provided by Division 15. Seal joints in metal sheets and between panel and frame. Comply with Section 09700. . 2 Blank off panels to be sealed in manner to ensure continuity of the thermal and vapour seal of the building skin. .3 Perform all drilling of concrete and masonry necessary to anchor components. .4 After installation touch up to make good the shop coat of finish. END OF SECTION � r� DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS -----------Page_ 10500-1 -------------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Concrete Section 03300 ! 1.2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01340. 1.3 HANDLING AND STORAGE . 1 Protect all materials during transit and on the Site from damage and from the elements. .2 Do not remove units from crates and protective packaging until ready for installation. 3 Handle the units with care to prevent damage and use protective pads and covering to prevent marring of the finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS . 1 Sheet Steel: commercial grade to ASTM A526-71 (1975) , with ' galvanized zinc coating to ASTM A526-76, designation G90. .2 Size: 305 mm wide, 400 mm deep and 600 mm deep, 1500 mm high minimum Model No. 1722. Half locker, complete with hasp and !� staple. Padlock by others. . 3 Size: 305 mm wide, 600 mm deep, 1500 mm high minimum Model No. 1711 single: locker complete with hasp and staple, for family change rooms. Padlock by others. . 4 Base: 100 mm high minimum. .5 Lockers as manufactured by North American Steel Products Ltd. Lockers as manufactured by Canadian Lockers Ltd. are an approved alternate for this Project. . 6 Doors: Fully enclosed, rigid, reinforced, with 2 hinges per door, positive friction latches nylon, proud 25 mm beyond face of frame handle recessed to provide snag-free surface and accommodate regular padlock; provide adequate number of rubber silencers for noiseless closures. I . 7 Louvers: Provide at bottom for unobstructed flow of ventilation. SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS Page: 10500-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) . 8 Numbers: Individually and consecutively numbered with easily readable number plates. . 9 Metal Edges: Roll all exposed edges of shelves ,etc. or fabricate with a return to protect users from cutting or snagging. 2 . 2 FINISH . 1 Primer: Prime uncoated steel with approved primer. .2 Enamel: Two coats of baked enamel finish; a maximum of two colours will be selected later by the Consultant from the manufacturer's Locker Colour Chart. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 SURFACE CONDITIONS ' . 1 Before commencing Work the Contractor shall examine the work already executed by other trades for any condition preventing the proper and satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. The Contractor shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been rectified. 3 . 2 FIELD MEAS11REMENTS . 1 Verify all measurements and dimensions affecting this Section ' of the Work shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 3 . 3 INSTALLATION . 1 Supply and install all lockers, including bases, clothes hooks and door hardware. (Padlock not included. ) . 2 Supply and install all fastenings, anchors, filler panels, clips, and accessories required for the erection and completion of the Work. . 3 Accuately position lockers as detailed on Drawings. Erect in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. .4 Fasten lockers at floor as required to provide rigidity. .5 This Contractor to be responsible for strength of construction , methods and adequacy of anchoring. .6 Dissimilar metals in contact or metals and masonry or concrete in contact, when necessary to prevent corrosion, to be insulated one from another by methods and materials required for such results, as approved by the Consultant. SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS Page: 10500-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .3 INSTALLATION (cont'd. ) I� . 7 No cutting, patching, plugging, skimming or other such means of overcoming defects, discrepancies or errors will be resorted to without written permission of the Consultant. . 8 Upon completion, this Contractor shall examine all installation make necessary adjustments and leave in perfect operating condition, to the approval of the Consultant. END OF SECTION i� if i� DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Page: 10800-1 ------------------------------------------- -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED . 1 Gypsum Board System Section 09250 . 2 Metal Toilet Partitions Section 10161 1. 2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit all samples of all accessories for approval by the Consultant, in accordance with Section 01340. 1. 3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . 1 Package accessories and label with description of contents and installation location. .2 Deliver accessories where designated at site by Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MATERIALS 1 Specified manufacturer's catalogue references establish minimum acceptable standards for Work of this Section. Catalogue numbers refer to the manufacture of Watrous Sales Inc. Scarborough.Ontario. Washroom accessories as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Ltd. , Scarborough, Ontario and W.G. Wood Sales Ltd. , are an approved alternative. No other manufacturer will be accepted. i 2 .2 PUBLIC AREA ACCESSORIES . 1 Toilet Tissue Holder: To be supplied and installed by the Owner. . 2 Paper Towel Dispenser Disposal: W-1001-5 recessed,with universal towel dispensing mechanism. Wall box and waste receptacle shall be fabricated of 22 ga.satin coat zinc steel. Door shall be fabricated of double pan type 302 stainless steel polished to a 14 satin finish. Door shall be attached to unit with a full length stainless steel piano hinge and 3 point concealed lock, by Watrous Sales Inc. . 3 Soap Dispenser Vanity Mounted: Supply and install in locations shown on Drawings a vandal resistant lavatory soap dispenser, W-902, by Watrous Sales Inc. Units shall have a capacity of 455 ml and shall dispense soap in liquid form, with simple vandal resistant top filling device. Body and plunger shall be chrome plated brass with stainless steel working parts. fi SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Page: 10800-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .2 PUBLIC AREA ACCESSORIES(cont'd. ) .4 Feminine Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: W-64684 recessed. Door shall be fabricated of type 302 stainless steel polished to a #4 satin finish. Door shall be attached to unit with a full length stainless steel piano hinge and held in closed position by two cylinder locks. Mechanism shall be set for 25 cent operation. Coin box shall be keyed separately from the door. . 6 Feminine Napkin Disposal Surface Mounted: Stainless Steel, W-0852 by Watrous Sales Inc. Door shall be fabricated of Type 302 stainless steel polished to a #4 satin finish, and counter balanced for positive closing action, with rubber silencer and continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Design to have a minimum 3 . 4 L capacity bin to accept disposable waxed paper or plastic bags. Fabricate removable bin from .8 mm stainless steel Provide satin chrome finished door pull. Provide deodorant block holder. . 7 Hand Dryer: Surface mounted with infra-red sensors, Model No. W-0110-91 as manufactured by Watrous Sales Inc. .8 Hair Dryer: Surface mounted with infra-red sensors, Model No. W-0111-91 as manufactured by Watrous Sales Inc. .9 Purse Shelf: Stainless Steel, W-0694-to widths as indicated on Drawings, by Watrous Sales Inc. . 10 Grab Bar: Supply and install to handicapped toilet units ' Stainless steel, peened, 18 ga. W-3100 x 600 mm and W-3100-SHL or SHR-L-Shape, by Watrous Sales Inc. Grab bars shall conform to Ontario Building Code 413/90. Install grab bars capable of supporting a 100 lbs. downward pull. 2 .3 JANITOR STORAGE . 1 Mop Strips: Supply and install to each janitor closet,mop strip W-1307B-900 mm complete with 4 hooks, by Watrous Sales Inc. 2 .4 FABRICATION . 1 Weld, ground flush and smooth joints of fabricated components. Use mechanical fasteners only when approved. .2 Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. . 3 Brake form sheet metal with 3 mm radius bends. .4 Form flat surfaces without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. , .5 Paint back of components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Page: 10800-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .4 FABRICATION (cont'd. ) 6 Hot dip ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to conform with CGSB G164 . . 7 Shop assemble and package components complete with anchors and fittings. 8 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate I� time for building in. Provide templates or rough-in measurements as required. . 9 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing. 10 All exposed stainless steel edges to be hemmed. . 11 All stainless steel units to be double panned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION . 1 Securely fasten accessories level and plumb in the locations shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Mounting heights as shown on Drawings, or as directed by Consultant. !, . 2 Co-ordinate installation with the work of Trades providing adjacent construction as required to achieve the reveals or other edge conditions shown where front faces of units are flush with the finished wall surfaces. .3 Perform drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary to install the accessories. .4 Insulate accessory surfaces to prevent electrolysis due to contact with masonry, concrete or dissimilar metal surfaces. Use bituminous paint, building paper or other approved means. . 5 Clean all accessories in conformance with Section 01710. END OF SECTION DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 10950 - MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES Page: 10950-1 --------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 EXTENT OF WORK . 1 Work consists of supply only of miscellaneous manufactured specialties as specifically listed herein, and as indicated on Drawings. 1. 2 SUBMITTALS . 1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 FLAGPOLE L� . 1 Furnish and erect flagpole in location indicated. . 2 Type: Cone tappered aluminum flag pole with sleeve type base and ' equipped with fittings specified below, Model CTS 25 by Dominion Aluminum Fabricating Ltd. , or approved alternate. .3 Flagpole: 8 m exposed height with the outside butt dia. 175 mm and outside tip dia. 88 mm. Pole shall be cone tapered from seamless aluminum tubing alloy 6063-T6. 4 Reveloving Truck: Aluminum body, sealed bearings and two aluminum sheaves. .5 Ball: 150 mm dia. constructed of aluminum, chemically edged and anodized finish. 6 Cleats: Two 150 mm cast aluminum cleats attached with stainless steel screws. .7 Halyards: Two 7 .5 mm No. 12 nylon braided ropes. 2.2 FOOT GRILLES . 1 Foot grilles shall be Model No. 475-RPV Vinyl tread, complete with alumimum framing conforming to 6063-T52 alloy aluminum, neatly coped at corners and assembled with #14 stainless steel screws to provide for rigid frame connections. Surfaces in contact with masonry shall receive one shop coat of zinc chromate primer. All aluminum surfaces shall be natural anodized aluminum, as manufactured by CIS Group Ltd. Materials as distributed by W.G. Wood Sales Ltd. are an approved alternate. a SECTION 10950 - MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES Page: 10950-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 3 TACKBOARDS . 1 Tackboards Vinyl Cork: Type 1/2" thick A.S.P. Prelaminated tackboards to sizes as shown on Drawings. Colour as selected by Consultant at a later date. 2.4 CHANGE ROOM TABLE . 1 Supply horizontal design baby changing station complete with sanitary bed liner dispenser, safety straps with snap lock fastener. Unit dimensions: 508 mm high, 889 mm wide, 102 mm deep when closed, 508 mm deep when opened, as distributed by Koala Corp. END OF SECTION '.� DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-1 ------------------------------ -------------- PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Excavation Section 02222 .2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 I� . 3 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 . 4 Handrails and Railings Section 05520 s, . 5 Tile Section 09310 . 6 Painting Section 09900 . 7 Mechanical Division 15 .8 Electrical Division 16 i 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK . 1 To supply and install Main Pool, Tot's Pool, Spray Pad, Hydromassage Pool, and Flume Ride complete with all fitments and accessories. . 2 Co-ordinate all Work of this Section with Prime Mechanical and ' Electrical Contractors and General Contractor. 1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 1 The Work of this Section shall be performed by a sub-contractor who has adequate plant, equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory and regular installations of Class "A" pools similar to that specified during the past five years. .2 The following list of pool contractors and suppliers are approved for bidding purposes: . 1 Acapulco Pools . 5 Target-Gem Construction . 2 Benson Pools .6 Gib-San-Sanelli Pools . 3 Bonavista Pools .7 Betz Pool . 4 Loaring Construction I� I� :d SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (cont'd. ) Other qualified pool subcontractors and General Contractors can apply for approval by submitting proof of qualification such as record of Class "A" pools constructed and letters of reference for the three past projects, or completed CCA Document 11, no later than Friday June 21, 1996. The decision by the Consultant on such application shall be final and binding. Every minor item is not necessarily or specifically mentioned or shown in the Contract Documents, but is reasonably implied and is obviously necessary. In case of any omission, discrepancy. conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents, request clarification immediately in writing to the Consultant. Do not proceed, commence or resume work until instructions are given. Do not scale drqwings when dimenions are required. Field verify , dimenions. 1. 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS . 1 Latest CSA Standard for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe for Pressure Applications; for Rigid Chlorinated PVC Pipe for Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems; for the Definitions and General , Requirements for Thermoplastic Piping. .2 Latest ASTM Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride , (PVC) compounds and chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride Compounds; for Socket Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; for Socket Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; for Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings and C-PVC. . 3 Latest CASA - Canadian Amateur Swimming Association Rules. . 4 Latest FINA - Federation Internationale de Natation Amateur Handbook. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES . 1 It is intended that the Shop Drawings and Specifications for the Work by this subcontractor will be certified by an officer of the Ontario Ministry of Health as meeting the provisions of Ontario Regulation 849 Public Swimming Pools Regulation made under the Public Health Act. Other required regulatory agencies are the Ontario Ministry of Housing, the Ontario Building Code, and the Ontario Ministry of Consumer and Commercial Relations. . 2 Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to restrict any liability , of this subcontractor specified in Division 1 or arising out of any law in force in the Province of Ontario. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, SAMPLES t . 1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01340. !i SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 6 SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, SAMPLES (cont'd. ) . 2 All Swimming Pool Shop Drawings, sketches and line drawings as I� well as construction or working drawings are the responsibility of the subcontractor for this Section of the Work. Prior to commencement of construction, this Section subcontractor must supply three (3) sets of engineered drawings and specifications it to the branch of Government that certifies such work for the Owner and local health authorities. The cost of such engineering and drawings is the responsibility of this subcontractor. it . 3 All Flume Ride Shop Drawings showing X Y Z axis co-ordinates, support and structural connections and components certified by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario shall be submitted to the Consultant and the Elevating and Lifting Devices Branch engineer for review, approval and inspections under the Amusement Device Act and as amended. The application fee shall be paid by this Sub- Contractor. . 3 Immediately following the date established by the Consultant of substantial completion of the project, this subcontractor shall supply to the General Contractor three (3) copies of As-Built Drawings showing exact locations of all buried pipe and fitments or other relocation of fittings, lines, cables, rebar, joints, seams, sleeves, and other hidden aspects of the project not visible to direct inspection and 1 framed schematic of all 3 i� systems. 1.7 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY . 1 Design the material of this Section under the Recommended Guidelines, latest edition, of the N.S.P. I. (CANSPA) and under the supervision of a professional engineer licensed to practice ' in the Province of Ontario employed or retained by the flume ride supplier. 1. 8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA, TRAINING . 1 Submit three sets of detailed operating and maintenance manuals after completion of work, including complete literature of every item of pool equipment and complete detailed instructions for all aspects of proper pool operation and maintenance. 2 This subcontractor shall start up and fine tune or calibrate all systems in the presence of the Owner's forces as well as make available on call and in person for not less than three (3) occasions at this subcontractor's cost, the services of a representative thoroughly experienced in pool operation, chemistry of pool and spa waters, and maintenance. Start up and I,� run-in shall be considered one of these occasions. The Consultant or appointed representative such as engineer or aquatic consultant shall be present and verify start-up training/ instruction and fine tuning of systems. SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA, TRAINING (cont'd. ) . 3 Provide a complete systems training session for Owner's personnel prior to commissioning; conducted on Site. . 4 Within the first year of operation, provide a follow-up refresher review of the methods of operation and maintenance; satisfactory to the Consultant and Owner. 1.9 WARRANTY . 1 This subcontractor shall provide in favour of the Owner, copies of bonding certificates or other surety; that all pipe is ' warranted for a period of not less than five (5) years against leakage or rupture under normal use and the pool shell against leakage and cracking for a period of ten (10) years. Hold-back , payments shall not be certified until such surety is in place to the satisfaction of the Consultant and Owner. .2 Submit also a warranty of the entire pool installation covering two (2) years beyond the expiration of the warranty period as specified in the General Conditions of the Contract. 1. 10 WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR and/or OTHER ' SUB-CONTRACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: . 1 Excavations, backfilling and compaction, grades, location of pool , tanks and filters, weeping tile around tanks as required. .2 Filter tank formwork, rebar, concrete and finish. . 3 Sump pits, cover grilles and frames, drain lines. . 4 Pool decking, deck tile to bond beam interface, deck drains. ' .5 All electrical conduit, wire and starters. . 6 Chlorine room vents, window, door, heating, wash station, lighted fan. light switch outside window. .7 50 mm (211) I.D. Municipal water supply line to deck level filter , tank room with approved backflow preventer and shut-off valve, and 25 mm I.D. water supply to basement hydromessage filter as above. .8 Flume ride steps, railings, locked gate, start platform, floor drains at top and side of ride. .9 Deck level filter room tanks rail/chain/posts, air exhaust fan, mechanical make-up air louvres in sealed door, three 110-120 vac 15 ampere receptacles for body feeders, cleaning access platform at hydromessage filter. j� SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.10 WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR and/or OTHER ' SUB-CONTRACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: . 10 Hose bibs, drinking fountain and electrical outlets for automatic vacuum cleaner in Natatorium. 2 Lap Timer Clock single switched outlets. . 11 Motor control centre, emergency STOP/START controls in pool office for hydromassage jet pumps, timer relay, flume ride pump, spray pad nozzles, bypass motorized valve, all systems STOP override control in office. (solenoid) . i' . 12 Flume ride STOP motor control button at top and bottom of flume ride and START timer control near hydromassage pool. . 13 Electrical receptacle 3 for soda ash pumps, 3 mixers, three it (3) chemical controllers, conduit and wiring for three (3) chlorine booster pumps in basement. !� . 14 3-six wire Bedlon Cables to Deck Supervisor Office from chemical I controllers for remote readouts supplied by Pool Sub-Contractor. 15 Dry-O-Trons, heat exchangers, heating controls, heat sensors in- line, controls and wiring for computer interface for pool water temperatures to pool pipe flanges. . 16 Install electrical outlet near gas chlorine room window area for the Gas Chlorine Leak Detector as supplied by and located �. by Pool Sub-Contractor. . 17 All Electrical Equipment shall be supplied and all Final Hook-Ups shall be executed by the Prime Electrical Contractor. . 18 Locate, form and pour dished out water spray pad features in deck as shown on Drawings. WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY POOL SUB-CONTRACTOR . 1 Pool tanks. floor inlet pipe, formwork, rebar, concrete, pipe placement, hydrostats, mudmat, gravel under pool tanks, waterproofing, tile, rebar extensions to deck rebar, waterstop, joint sealants and continuous water stop to deck/bond seam interface, fittings and tile work for water spray feature. . 2 Filter tank design layout and shop drawings, locate and install supply and return pipe stubs with flanges, verify baffle plate concrete locations, tank waterproofing, tank bottom grout and slope grades to waste pipe, drain pipe stubs, location of handrailing. . 3 Pipe, stubs and locations to sewer pits. i SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-6 , -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. 11 WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY POOL SUB-CONTRACTOR (cont'd. ) , .4 Rebar to tie deck reinforcing, water stop, tile and waterproofing , to deck/bond beam interface, sealant between deck tile and pool tile, .5 Provide starter requirements, motor locations for conduit, final , installation and connection details. . 6 Install scale, anchor chains for cylinders, SCABA, PVC conduit , and lines for gas chlorine, switchover units, verify final sealing of room. .7 Three (3) water meter branch offs from Municipality supply line, ' air gap, quick fill lines and valves, pressure gauges, hose bibs, line and float valve to soda ash tank. .8 Set out location and anchors for start pool, supply pipe and connection to entry pod for flume ride, anchors, posts and rails around flume ride at deck, signage, M.C.C.A. inspections and approvals, support anchors, columns, beams, location of railing and features for flume ride steps, gate and start pod area, location of STOP bottoms, caulking at joints and any platform and support interfaces with deck tile and coved areas as supplied by others. . 9 Location and concrete anchors for body feeders, locate ' receptacles for same as well as chlorine leak detector. . 10 Recommend location and type of electrical requirements for automatic vacuum equipment. . 11 Provide electrical requirements for all pumps, motors, metering ' equipment and locate for other trades; pump pads. . 12 Provide electrical details for hydromassage and flume ride pump motors, provide pump/motor pads, solenoid valve and pipe for spray feature. . 13 Provide location for electrical requirements, soda ash mixer and ' metering pump flush head, three (3) chemical controllers and wiring routings, chlorine booster pump wiring routes, advise on direction of rotation. . 14 Provide C-PVC gasketed flanges and make connections to heat exchangers and Dry-O-Tron, provide thermowells and other C-PVC fittings for sensors as required by Mechanical and Electrical Prime Contractors. . 15 Provide and locate 8 - 10 bronze flush-mounted spray heads at water feature "Dish" in Pool Deck Area as shown on Drawings as well as drain boxes and grilles. !,r SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-7 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 1. 11 WORK AND MATERIALS PROVIDED BY POOL SUB-CONTRACTOR (cont'd. ) . 16 Under pool bottom slab drainage system connected to underslab drainage in basement, gravel cover and granular base, compaction, poured concrete mudmat, and membrane waterproofing as per Soils Investigation Report and as shoen in the Drawings. . 17 Provide membrane waterproofing to poured concrete floor slabs (suspended and slab on grade) in one continuous application from pool tanks horizontally onto pool decks and extended vertically up base of perimeter walls 150 mm above finished floor in Main Pool Room 145, and Therapy Pool 144. Apply over membrane waterproofing, mortar bed, galvanized steel mesh reinforcement, tile adhesive, mosaic tile and coved base, 100% solids epoxy grout. All sub-contractors shall be approved applicators of Laticrete International Inc. , and TTMAC Certified Members. Prior to performing work of this Section, Swimming Pool Sub-Contractor shall supply to Consultant approved applicator status from the manufacturer, and TTMAC membership certificate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS - GENERAL . 1 In this Section, where product numbers and manufacturer's names are given, alternates may be used with the written permission of the Consultant prior to Tendering. Where no supplier is identified , the Sub-Contractor shall confer and confirm with the 1� Consultant for approval prior to on-site supply and /or installation as to the quality, style, type, colour, size, location, and performance. The first item listed is the Base Bid choice, following item(s) are alternates. ' . 2 All safety, competitive, deck, play and water treatment equipment shall be deemed to be of model, size, type, quality, and location acceptable to Health and Safety authorities having jurisdiction over public swimming pool and spa facilities in addition to all building codes and related legislation, as hereinafter approved as part of the Drawings and Specifications for this Project. . 3 Where equipment is to be supplied other than identified in this specification, (alternates) ; the sub-contractor shall provide specifications and shop drawings for approval by the Consultant prior to installation. 2 .2 MATERIALS 1 Pipe, valves, fittings shall be C-PVC Schedule 80 and PVC Sch 80; J PVC Schedule 40 where not exposed. Use manufacturer's solvents and glues as directed. Metal to screwed PVC not permitted. 'I, SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-8 ---------------------•----------------------------------------------------- 2 . 2 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) ' . 2 Concrete to be new-form-poured, steel reinforced, screeded, , vibrated, stripped, acid-washed and neutralized suitable for tile work as stipulated by Structural Consultant, epoxy coated rebar on water side at al joints. , . 3 Tile and application: Refer to Section 09310. .4 Stainless steel deck fittings and underwater fittings to be Low Carbon Type 312 or 316 stainless steel with screws, bolts, washers, anchors of identical grade and type; supplied by Sta-Rite, Jacuzzi, Mermade, Paragon or Hayward. , . 5 Flumes columns yield strength of 250 MPa, H. S.S. members of 350 MPa, welding shall conform to CSA W-59. , . 6 Grates, grilles, inlets to be white or blue cycolac commercial grade and supplied by Wylain, Jacuzzi, Hayward or Mermade. .7 Pipe and valve supports and hangers to be galvanized steel hot- dipped with field welds and connections covered with "Galvafroid" paint or as directed by the Consultant. .8 Valves larger than 19 mm (3/411) to be butterfly type, gear operated, bronze gate, stainless steel shaft, buna rubber gasket of "Chemline", "Zurich" manufacture. Metal handles. Colour coded tagged. . 9 Flume chute to be "Waterforms WP-150" or approved alternate. ' Gel coat plastic-reinforced fibre-glass with standard blue colour; structural steel and support components designed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, suitable for Ministry of Consumer and Commercial Affairs Elevating and Lifting Branch inspection and approval. . 10 NOTE: For purposes of regulatory approvals, an "*" astrict preceding the item denotes "SUPPLIED BY OWNER" and shall be on site prior to commissioning and start-up approval but is not supplied by the erector. Where no supplier or alternate supplier is stated, the erector shall obtain approval from the Consultant. Catalogue or part numbers are current or intended to be the most recent model and part number supplied by the indicated , manufacturer(s) . The quantity indicated is in all cases superseded by the drawings as is location and attachment. N. S.P. I. guidelines shall be considered "MINIMUM" in all parts, systems, and erection methods. Failure to comply will result in removal and replacement at full cost to the erector. C.S.A. , U.I. ASTM, O.B.C. , N.B.C. regulations and standards obtain in this Section. N. S.F. and N.S.P. I. guidelines for reference only. SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-9 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.3 SAFETY EQUIPMENT !� SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. i . 1 Portable Guard Stand Paragon A1236S 2 .2 Reach Pole Non-Conducting Jacuzzi AP1212E 2 if . 3 Ring Buoy c/w 40 ' Rope R.L. S. S. 2 .4 Rescue Hook Jacuzzi 2 I, .5 Spine Board and Straps R.L. S. S. 530 1 . 6 Air Mask, Tank, Case M.S.A. 401 1 ' .7 Eye Wash Station Division 15 2 * .8 3/4" Poly Safety Rope Jacuzzi 250 ft. .9 T-403 Rope Hooks 3/4" Jacuzzi 8 !� * . 10 3/4" I .D. Floats Jacuzzi 12 i . 11 6" Dia. Black Tile Floor Disc in each area 5 * . 12 Hooks and Chains for C12 Cylinders 4 sets . 13 Sample line flow switch I.T.T. - F.S. 1 3 j, . 14 "STOP" push button override for 3 filter pumps, hydromassage jets and flume ride pump motors. Division 15 5 15 Outside Gas Chlorine room, W & T 50-125 1 intake line thru wall for Chlorine Gas Leak Detector . 16 Pool Safety Rules Min. of Health 3 Sets . 17 Hydromassage Use Sign 1 . 18 NO DIVING ALLOWED wall sign 4 . 19 Flume Ride Use Sign 2 .20 First Aid Kit R.L.S.S. 320 1 i * . 21 Safety Goggles 2 pair * . 22 Rubber boots, apron, gloves 2 pair j, .23 Lock and Key for flume stair entry gate 1 i, :p SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-10 i -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 3 SAFETY EQUIPMENT (cont'd. ) ' SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. ' * . 24 Portable Loud Hailer 1 * . 25 WHMIS station 1 * . 26 Outside dedicated line telephone 1 . 27 Mecanaids Lifter (Inserts by Con) H.Geen 1 * .28 Pads of DAILY LOG SHEETS 3 ' 2.4 ARCHITECTURAL DECK EQUIPMENT . 1 S. S. Grab Rails, wedge anchors, Paragon 4 pairs covers Jacuzzi Wicor .2 Step entry handrails S.S. with Paragon 4 wedge anchors, covers Jacuzzi . 3 Access Ramp Handrails S.S. with Paragon 1 pair ' wedge anchors, covers .4 Tile insert depth markings See Dwgs. ' * . 5 S.S.Posts,anchors for false start Wicor 6-8 pairs rope and backstroke plus flume ride . 6 Insert sleeves for mecanaids North Ass. 3 (Supply and Install) Geen , 2.5 RECREATION AND COMPETITIVE EQUIPMENT * . 1 Racing Line Float Line 25 m Kieffer 200331 7 * .2 Ratchet Wrench Kieffer 200202 2 . 3 Cup Anchors S.S. Hor. Bar Wicor 9144 24 t * . 4 Storelane Reel Kieffer 200350 2 , . 5 Deck Anchors Paragon 6 Paraflite * . 6 Start Platforms Paraflite 6 * .7 Backstroke Flag S. S. Posts Wicor 4 , * .8 Paceclock Kieffer 200301 2 SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.5 RECREATION AND COMPETITIVE EQUIPMENT (cont'd. ) SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. 9 Brone Flush Spray Nozzles Custom 25 mm 8 - 10 . 10 Approx. 150 ' long WP-150 As Per Specification Flume with gate on stair assembly *. 11 Deck level tot slide Acapulco 11-0070 2 I, 2 . 6 CLEANING EQUIPMENT * . 1 Vacuum head, spare wheel, sweep Jacuzzi VC-18 1 set, S.S. clamps .2 Vacuum hose 2" industrial grade Wicor 11069 50 feet . 3 Vacuum Handles Wicor 12100 2 .4 Leaf Rake Screen for filters Jacuzzi LS400 2 .q�aJ OtAI..Lft-e- sr-EL W4U- NoaeS 6 .5 Telescopic Handles Jacuzzi TAP 1216 2 . 6 Wall/Floor Brush Jacuzzi CWB 200 2 r * .7 Direct suction underwater vacuum Aquaking 1 * .8 L304/316 S.S. wall hooks for above 12 9 Spare pump screen baskets for Mermade 6 ' each non-vacuum pump Armstrong Berkley Wicor Jacuzzi * . 10 Cart-mounted, portable vacuum Wicor 1 pump, motor, lint trap, valves, Jacuzzi 3/4 - 1 H.P. , 120 V.A.C. Hayward . 11 Chemical controller analog or G.L. I. 3 i, Digital + ITT - F.S.I. Flow Chemtrol Switches and 6 Meters 2 .7 WATER TREATMENT i . 1 Wall inlet fittings,hydromassage Wicor 8429 5 .2 Floor Inlets (c/w 2 plastic Wicor 8417 28 1� wrenches) Approx. 3 Floor drain frames and grills Hayward SP1031 12 l i I� SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-12 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .7 WATER TREATMENT (cont'd. ) ' SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. .4 Floor drain frames and grills Hayward SP1033 3 .5 Booster pump and shelf 1/2 HP for Southern J547 3 chlorine injectors 40-50 psi Armstrong . 6 Gas Chlorine Cylinder and Master Alldos 1 , Unit + 2 Auxiliary Units 50#, 10# Regal and 5# per day rotomters, 2 cyl units auto switch over 3 in all , 2 cylinder weight scale WST 50-345 1 .7 Gutter return fittings, cycolac 4" x 2-1/2" 60 .8 Hydromassage Jets, run air intake Hayward SP1450TC 12 to filter room. . 9 Metering pump c/w shelf, spare LMI B231-79 3 parts and :3 with autoflush . 10 Solution storage tanks and lids LMI 10350P 250 USG 2 ' 50 USG . 11 Gear drive economy mixer Neptune Benson GM2 . 0 2 ' . 12 CD Ozone Generator with Mazzei Water Quality Mgt. 1 injector system , . 13 Flume ride and main pool 15 H.P. Armstrong 2 pumps @ 70 ft of head, 900-1-1,500 Berkeley , USGPM 3 ph, 575 VAC and concrete Jacuzzi R15EMB base Bronze volute and impellers Goulds Main Pool 700 USGPM, Tot's Pool 2 700 USGPM, High Energy Efficient Motors . 14 FRP and Acrylic pump strainer 8" Mermade 1 with clear lid. PVC screen and spare basket for flume pump. .15 Filter tank, valves, gauges for Jacuzzi VMB 7.5 hp 1 ' hydromassage pool; 10 filter Mermade, 10 elements for 400 USGPM Gen.Filtration (3 x 5) ' Custom Concrete . 16 Bag loading, dry hopper, feeder B.I.F. 3 vibrator and timer (body feed) ' SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-13 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 .7 WATER TREATMENT (cont'd. ) ' SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. . 17 Hydromassage Jet Pump c/w remote Jacuzzi VMB 75 1 STOP/START button adjustable 15 Armstrong 7 .5 HP min timer, pump strainer + spare Berkeley basket. All bronze and stainless shafts, High energy efficient. . 18 Poly coated filter elements for General Filtration 20 elem. Tot's Pool @ 640 USGPM Mid Cycle Mermade . 19 Poly coated filter elements for General Filtration 20 elem. Main Pool c/w S.S. tie downs, Mermade gasket, manifold 640 USGPM Mid Cycle . 20 Float activated valves Wicor 13600 3 i (Drain lines into filters) .21 Auto fill water level valve CLA-Valve 3 .22 Shut off valves for pressure and Chemline 13 vacuum gauges. . 23 Backflow preventer Wicor 14557-1 3 .24 Butterfly Valves, gear actuated Copex s.a. 1/2" 6 bronze or P.V.C. Discs, S.S. stems Zurich Metal Handles Only. Colour-coded Chemline 1" 10 RED for n.c. ; GREEN for n.o. 6 - ,,' 9 valve extensions for pre-coat 2" 25 and drain valves to deck level (Number and sizes of valves 3" 7 can vary depending upon final pipe run configuration - valves should 4" 15 be S. S. shafts and non-corroding seats and operators in buna rubber or 6" 10 equal seals and seats: Base Bid CHEMLINE 8" 6 ' All above quantities are "Approx. " . 25 Anti vibration flange, flume ride 1 6" I.D. PVC, S.S. bolts, nuts * .26 Filter element 3/4" spray hose Custom or CTC 2 and handle . 27 In-Line Thermometers S.I. + IMA 6 . 28 Push Button Flow Meters Metaflex 4 .29 Pressure Gauges (0-60 psi + S.I. ) Brooks 8 I� i SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-14 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- SUPPLIER & ALTERNATE SIZE-NO. ' 2 .7 WATER TREATMENT (cont'd. ) . 30 Vacuum Gauges Combination 5 . 31 Water Test Kit - Porta-Lab Lamotte 1 . 32 One inch solenoid valve (N/C) for 1 spray wired ON/OFF to pool office , (see Dwgs. ) 120 V.A.C. * . 33 Portable TDS meter range 100 - 3 ,500 ppm 2.8 FLUME RIDE ' . 1 Prequalified manufacturers include: ' . 1 White Water West .2 U.S.A. Slide . 3 Big Country .4 Waterf.orms . 5 Pro Slide . 6 Acapulco ' . 2 Flume to be continuous FRP sections of semi circular 1100 mm diameter gel-coated in light azure blue colour flanged and ' fitted using dual cut grooves for Silkaflex marine caulk or equal and hand finished to a smooth, continuous interior run. . 3 Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings as supplied and installed as ' per Pool Specifications along with the 15. 0 H.P. pump, motor and three START/STOP controls in office, start pool and wall near entry pool. ' . 4 Entry chute shall be below normal water level in main pool and depths and dimensions of pool verified and included in overall warranty and licence. .5 All supporting structural steel members and connectors to be galvanized, prepared, primed and shop painted with epoxy paint as , per Section 09900 - PAINTING, manufacturer' s, and OPCA (Ontario Painting Contractors Association) Chapter requirements. . 6 Starters, pump, motor, strainer, check valve, motor mounts, , START/STOP bottoms, to be supplied and installed as specified. .7 This sub-contractor shall be responsible for any additional cost ' incurred to reinforce any structural element which may be required for the structural support of the flume ride. 2 .9 FABRICATION - SWIMMING POOL , . 1 Pool tanks formwork to be of new material. j' SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-15 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 9 FABRICATION - SWIMMING POOL (cont'd. ) 2 Rebar to be tied with coated wire - welding not permitted. .3 Waterstops 150 mm (611) minimum at any cold joints to be continuous. Epoxy-coated re-bar through water side concrete at all waterstopped joints. .4 Open joints to be caulked with Sternson Thycol or approved alternate, two part polysulphide colour matched to adjoining tilework. .5 Valve extensions to be through drilled holes in filter room floor with handles at waist height 825 mm (3311) approx. and operator identification for OPEN and CLOSED positions of metal handles. t2. 10 SUMMARY - SPECIAL 1 Electrical, starters, bases, shelves and mounts will be required for the following pumps. Each pump should be installed with vacuum and pressure gauges (except metering chemical feeder pumps) isolated by shutoff valves and flow control butterfly valves and unions. Main Pool Pump 1 Whirlpool Booster Pump for jets 1 Whirlpool. filter pump 3 Chlorine .injector water pumps, contactor starter relays 1 Water Flume Ride Pump 1 Water Filter pump for Tot's pool 1 Vacuum pump motor ' . 2 Duplex receptacles required for metering equipment to be located by installer, for the following: 3 Filter Aid hopper/vibrator/feeders 1 Spa Chemical Controller 2 Pool Chemical Controllers (main pool + tot' s pool) 2 Neptune Solution tank mixers (soda ash and bi-carb) 1 Ozone Generator (alternate addition for hydromassage pool) 1 Auto Rinse timer for soda ash/bi-carb metering pumps . 3 Light and exhaust fan switch for GAS CHLORINE ROOM shall be installed OUTSIDE THIS ROOM near a viewing window such that the pool operator may turn on the light and fan prior to entering this area. The fan switch should be wired to an indicator light to signify it's operation. . 4 The hydromassage pool jets pump ON/OFF time limit switch to be located near pool deck for user operation. Time limit should be staff adjustable from 10 to 15 minutes operating time. SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-16 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. 10 SUMMARY - SPECIAL (cont'd. ) ' .5 The flume chute slide pump motor should be able to be stopped ' (overridden) by staff from the deck staff control room, top/ bottom. . 6 Silent operation chemical readouts (6 meters) remoted to pool ' supervisor's office should read F.A.C.R. equivalent and actual pH units for the three systems. F.A.C.R. shall be in mg/1 or P.P.M. ' not millivolts nor digital. Reading scales shall be analog with manual "zero" adjustment on each readout meter. 3 Hammond Cabinets. .7 The filter tank pre-coating and cleaning room at dec level is to be air tight hence door louvres and air exhaust fan is required to remove "dusty" air to the exterior during handling of , filteraid materials. .8 Supply and install labelled valves and pipe fittings to allow manual interconnect QUICK FILL for the Tot's Pool and the ' Hydromassage pool using heated and chemically treated water after the discharge side of the main pool recirculation pump. 2 . 11 SUMMARY - ELECTRICAL ' . 1 Supply current is 100 amperes at 600 Volts, 3 Phase. , . 2 Switch gear, panels, fusing, knife switches are part of this Contract for co-ordination purposes only. . 3 Step-down dry transformers, if required for lower voltage pumps, , are part of this Contractor co-ordination. . 4 Heaters, fuses and relays are part of this Contract vis-a-vis ' advisory to Electrical Prime Contractor. . 5 Four (4) 120 volt 15 ampere duplex receptacles will be supplied and installed by others in the filter/mixing room; and six (6) 120 VAC 15 amp duplex rec. in pool basement for controllers and mixers. , . 6 Lighted light and fan exhaust switch for the chlorine room will be supplied and installed by others; by the viewing window. ' .7 Approximate pump sizes are as follows: P-1 A) Main pool recirculation pump 15. 0 H.P. , 600 VAC, 3 ph. , B) Chlorine booster pumps .75 H.P. 3@ 3/4 H.P. C) LMI Buffer metering pumps 3 @ 120 VAC Plug-In 1/8-1/4 D) Agitator Motor 2 @ 120 VAC Plug-In 1/2 H.P. , P-5 E) Flume/Water Slide Pump 15. 0 H.P. , 600 VAC 3 ph. P-4 F) Hydromassage Jets Pump 10 or 7 .5 H.P. , 600 VAC 3ph Page: 13000-17 SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 11 SUMMARY - ELECTRICAL (cont'd. ) 7 Approximate pump sizes are as follows: G) Vacuum Cleaner Pump and i� Aqua Mixing up to 1. 0 H.P. , 120 VAC P-3 H) Hydromassage Filter Pumps 5-7.5 H.P. , 600 VAC 3 ph P-2 I) Tot's Pool Filter Pump 15. 0 H.P. , 600 VAC 3 ph j� NOTE: All electrical wiring shall be in PVC or non-corroding conduit, not along floor or areas where splashing or moisture will contact same. Pumps larger than 1. 0 H.P. to i� have high energy-efficient motors. .8 Pumps to be on MASTER EMERGENCY STOP button in pool deck supervisor's office. Ozonator, if supplied, should also be interlocked with hydromassage filter pump motor. B. I.F. body- feeders, agitator motors can remain operative. Soda Ash, Bi-Carb and Chlorine booster pumps are locked out during NO FLOW by chemical controllers. .9 Spray solenoid valve either N/O or N/C does not effect water flow if filter pump is shut down. 2 . 12 SUMMARY - POOL FINISHES . 1 Concrete pool tank interiors will be cleaned of form oils, dust, dirt and debris by acid etching, water washing, de-greasing with tri-sodium phosphate solution and neutralized with a soda ash washing. i .2 Pool interior tile to be installed as per Section 09310. 2. 13 SUMMARY - WATER TREATMENT PARAMETERS . 1 SYSTEM A MAIN POOL Ramp, steps, lap pool flume chute, catch pool, play area TEMPERATURE 85-87 deg F operating TURN OVER RATE 3 .5 hours mid-cycle @ 640 USGPM Approx. 450 sq. ft. effective filter area. Vacuum leaf, filter aid . 2 SYSTEM B TOT'S POOL i TEMPERATURE 88-92 deg F operating TURN OVER RATE 1. 0 hours mid-cycle @ 350 USGPM Approx. 450 sq.ft. effective filter area. Vacuum leaf, filter aid SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-18 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 . 13 SUMMARY - WATER TREATMENT PARAMETERS (cont'd. ) ' .3 SYSTEM C HYDROMASSAGE POOL t TEMPERATURE 93-102 deg F operating TURN OVER RATE 15 min. mid-cycle @ 350 USGPM ' Approx. 250 sq. ft. effective filter area. Vacuum leaf, filter aid pH ACID/BASE 7 . 45 units F.A.C.R. equivalent 1.8 mg/l Systems A & B , 4. 5 mg/l System C T.A. 100 mg/1 ' S. I. + or - 0. 3 units T.D.S. Below 1,500 micromhos/cm2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 PRE-INSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITY ' . 1 Prior to commencement of work, provide three sets of Shop Drawings of more for the specified submission for approvals by ' Ministry of Housing, Health Protection and Promotion Legislation, Elevating and Lifting Devices regulatory approval, local Departments of Health, Plumbing and Building Departments for , their approval. . 2 Check all dimensions, pipe and pump sizing, filter sizing, deck ' sizing, excavations and proposed backfilling operations. Any discrepancies in design and field dimensions shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant. Work shall not proceed until these discrepancies are corrected. ' 3 . 2 ERECTION - SWIMMING POOL . 1 Coordinate work and down time with General Contractor and ensure ' all installed units are plumb and level. Label pipes/valves to code. ' . 2 Provide inserts and set out their location at concrete filter tanks for the General Contractor. Direction of flow arrows on process pipe. !r SECTION 13000 - SWIMMING POOLS Page: 13000-19 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 .2 ERECTION - SWIMMING POOL (cont'd. ) . 3 Provide inserts and set out their locations for grab rail anchors handicapped lifter, start/stop buttons, motor starters, backstart and false start rope anchors, starting platform anchors and other materials that must be installed within the work of others. j' .4 Advise on the optimum location for receptacles, motor starters, relays and other devices to be used by pool equipment. . 5 Equipment not otherwise located on Drawings (e.g.ring buoys) shall be stored in wrapped protection at the direction of the General Contractor or located at the direction of the Consultant on the advise and approval of the Owner. .6 Final location and installation of valves, gauges, meters and full lines shall be for optimum ease and convenience of operation and viewing by Owner's forces. Temporary supports and locations may be used until final connections are made prior to commissioning. .7 Tile work and preparation should be by water level and level beam at all rimflow locations using thin set tile and grout suitable for underwater application. Rimflow bullnose course should be j installed prior to walls, floor or coping runs of tile, verify by water level. ' 3 . 3 INSTALLATION - FLUME RIDE . 1 This Work will not be continuous and must be carried out in stages as platform, pool and decking work is completed by others. .2 The manufacturer's XYZ design and assembly specifications and ' instructions must be strictly adhered to. i . 3 All seams and joints once caulked, must be hand trimmed, gel coated and polished to a smooth matching interior. .4 The flume ride contractor will attend pool filling and at least one (1) training session during fine tuning to demonstrate the ., product and verify its safe operation after installation is completed. ' . 6 Initial cleaning, waxing and bolt/nut tightening will be performed by this sub-contractor or supplier. . 7 All signage and safety and instructional requirements will be provided to the M.C.A.A. inspectors as required. .8 Provide one (1) tube of recommended caulking material and container of gel coating/patching mix (1/2 pint or more) to Owner's representative for maintenance use at completion of Work. END OF SECTION -i jr DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROJECT NO. 94027-24 SECTION 13052 - SAUNAS-------------------------------- -----1 ------ PART 1 - GENERAL ;I 1. 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . 1 Floor Drains Division 15 i .2 Junction Boxes and Wiring Division 16 ' 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS . 1 Work of this Section shall be executed by a company specializing in sauna work using skilled sauna craftsmen and in accordance j� with best practice of this trade. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I . 1 Submit Shop Drawings clearly indicating products being supplied, method of fabrication, installation and co-ordination with other trades. 1.4 WARRANTY . 1 Submit a five year guarantee for the heater and controls against defects in materials, workmanship and malfunction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 .1 MATERIALS . 1 Wood wall and ceiling framing: No. l construction grade pine. . 2 Insulation: Styrofoam SM 50 mm rigid insulation, as manufactured by Dow Chemical Canada Ltd. . 3 Vapour Barrier: Aluminum foil/fibreglass scrim/flame resistant Kraft paper having vapour barrier effect of 0. 03 perms. 4 Panelling for walls, ceiling, door: 25 mm x 150 mm T & G V I' joint "A" grade certified kiln dried Cedar. 5 Fasteners: Corrosion and heat resistant. . 6 Bench Framing: Kiln dried No.2 construction grade or better Cedar. .7 Benches and Heater Enclosure: 50 mm x 100 mm "A" grade certified kiln dried Cedar with exposed edges pencil rounded. f� W _ SECTION 13052 - SAUNAS Page: 13052-2 ' -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1 MATERIALS (cont'd. ) ' .8 Vents: Upper and lower, adjustable painted steel or aluminum. ' .9 Heater, Temperature Control and Lights: Electric, CSA approved, size of heater shall suit size of sauna. Control and ' thermometer calibrations shall be in the Celsius scale. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 .1 INSTALLATION . 1 Securely fix wood framing in place at 400 mm o.c. spacing. ' .2 Install wiring for lights, controls and heater. Mount controls ' outside sauna room. Connect wiring from heater and controls to junction box supplied under Division 16. .3 Apply insulation on wood framing on walls and ceiling to obtain , 100% insulation coverage. Fix vapour barrier to warm side of framing over all walls and ceiling, lapping joints 50 mm tapping vapour barrier sheet joint and joints to adjacent , surfaces. .4 Install panelling vertically to walls and with panelling on , ceiling having joints in alignment with wall panelling. Make all joints tight. All fastenings shall be concealed. Provide 25 mm x 75 mm horizontal running furring over vapour barrier at 300 mm o.c. where required for fixing of panelling. .5 Install "A" grade certified kiln dried Cedar door frame. .6 Construct doors from solid core 600 mm x 1980 mm lined with ' Cedar with all Cedar edges protected by 50 mm x 50 mm Cedar frame. Install door to open out and with self closing hinges t protected from human touch. Install pulls of Cedar. .7 Construct benches as detailed on Drawings. Countersink all nails and screws. ' .8 Construct heater enclosure of two horizontal rows of 50 mm x 100 mm grade "A" kiln dried Cedar. ' . 9 Sand all exposed wood smooth, free of roughness and slivers. . 10 Supply and install heater, thermometer, sauna light and vents to ensure proper ventilation. Provide Cedar water bucket. END OF SECTION THE OR MON OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON OURTICE 'CO COMPLEX (OURUCE, ONTARIO VOLUME 2 OF 4 DETAIL BOOK PHASE 11 1 TENDER NO. CL96-4 (RE-TENDED PROJECT NO.: 9027-24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION: JULY 22, 19% III�1 III III 1• WGA Wong Gregersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED VIII III I I i� � WOA Wong Gregerren I ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED II Ij� l� i 1 Tender No. CL-96-4 (Re-Tender) Courtice Community Complex Project No. 94027-24 LIST OF ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES REFERENCE CODES i AD3 EXTERIOR ENVELOPE DETAILS AD6 MILLWORK DETAILS AD7 ROOFING DETAILS AD8 WINDOW AND DOOR DETAILS AD9 INTERIOR ELEVATION, PLAN AND SECTION DETAILS AD10 MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL AD13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (INDEX OF DETAILS ONLY) DF DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULES RF ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES W EXTERIOR WINDOW SCHEDULES j EXTERIOR ENVELOPE DETAILS I NUMBER: TITLE: DATE: AD3-1 PARTIAL ENTRANCE CANOPY ELEVATION 12 JUNE 96 AD3-2 COLUMN CAPITAL DETAIL- ENTRANCE CANOPY 12 JUNE 96 AD3-3 ENTRANCE CANOPY CONCRETE BASE 12 JUNE 96 AD34 ENTRANCE CANOPY SECTION DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD3-5 PARTIAL SECTION OF ENTRANCE CANOPY 12 JUNE 96 'y AD3-6 EXTERIOR CORNER COLUMNS ELEVATION 12 JUNE 96 AD3-7 SECTION DETAILS- LOBBY SKYLIGHT 12 JUNE 96 j, AD3-8 SECTION DETAILS- ROOF PARAPET AT LOBBY 12 JUNE 96 AD3-9 SECTION DETAILS-GLASS BLOCK AT LOBBY 12 JUNE 96 AD3-10 ELEVATION DETAILS-LOBBY COLUMN/BEAM CONNECTION 12 JUNE 96 r� MILLWORK DETAILS NUMBER: TITLE: DATE: AD6-1 SECTION OF BENCH AND LOCKER BASES 12 JUNE 96 AD6-2 CHANGEROOM COUNTERTOP DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD6-3 MAIN WASHROOM COUNTERTOP DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD64 TYPICAL STEEL VANITY SUPPORT DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD6-5 TYPICAL STEEL SHUTTER DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD6-6 TYPICAL STEEL SHUTTER HEAD AND SILL DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD6-7 TYPICAL CLOSET ROD AND SHELF DETAILS 12 JUNE 96 AD6-8 TYPICAL KITCHEN DRAWER UNIT 12 JUNE 96 AD6-9 TYPICAL KITCHEN CUPBOARD DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD6-10 RECEPTION DESK PLANS (ROOM 126) 12 JUNE 96 AD6-11 RECEPTION DESK ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS 12 JUNE 96 AD6-12 RECEPTION DESK ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS 12 JUNE 96 WGA Wong Gregerren I ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED 7 WINDOW DETAILS DOOR DETAILS NUMBER: TITLE: DATE: AD8-1 DOOR TYPE SCHEDULE 12 JUNE 96 AD8-2 DOOR FRAME TYPES 12 JUNE 96 ADS-3 ALUMINUM WINDOW AND DOOR FRAME DETAILS 12 JUNE 96 DOOR FINISH SCHEDULES DF1 TO DF5 12 JUNE 96 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES RF1 TO RFS 12 JUNE 96 N INTERIOR ELEVATION, PLAN AND SECTION DETAILS NUMBER: TITLE: DATE: AD9-1 SHOWER TROUGH DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD9-2 FLOOR FINISH JUNCTION DETAIL 12 JUNE 96 AD9-3 SECTION DETAIL OF MANUAL OPERABLE WALL 12 JUNE 96 AD9-4 SECTION AND PLAN DETAIL OF GLASS BLOCK 12 JUNE 96 AD9-5 TO UNASSIGNED AD9-8 AD9-9 TYPICAL WALL TILE AND ACCENT STRIP 12 JUNE 96 MISC. DETAILS AD10-1 TYPICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET 12 JUNE 96 '! SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS(INCLUDED IN SECTION 13000) NUMBER: TITLE: DATE: AD13-1 POOL EDGE DETAILS 25 JAN. 96 AD13-2 POOL DRAIN DETAILS 25 JAN. 96 AD13-3 POOL DETAILS 25 JAN. 96 -a AD13-4 POOL DETAILS 25 JAN.96 AD 13-5 POOL HANDRAIL DETAILS 25 JAN. 96 AD13-6 POOL STAIR HANDRAIL DETAIL 25 JAN. 96 {I AD13-7 TYPICAL GUTTER POOL DETAILS 25 JAN.96 AD13-8 POOL DETAIL WATER STOP PLATE 25 JAN. 96 AD13-9 POOL DETAIUPIPE EXP.JOINT 25 JAN. 96 AD13-10 WEDGE ANCHOR DETAIL 25 JAN. 96 AD13-11 POOL CONSTRUCTION JOINT 25 JAN.96 AD13-12 FILTER TANK SECTION 25 JAN.96 AD13-13 POOL CONSTRUCTION JOINT 25 JAN.96 AD13-14 POOL GRAB RAIL &CAST-IN STEP DETAIL 25 JAN.96 0 PAINTED FINISH CONTINUOUS BENT STEEL EDGE SEE DETAIL aoa-z 4992 PAINTED WELDED STEEL FRAMING ALL WELDS CONT. AND GROUND AD3-4 SMOOTH. So DRALSO W b � � I I 850 416 I (TYPICAQ) I PAINTED STEEL BEAM J` JJ SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 1 � AD3-2 PAINTED STEEL COLUMN SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AD3-3 I � i I ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BASE SEE DETAIL A03-3 3400 FILE NO IIII W G A ( Wong G,egerxn l ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED 94D27-24 SCALE 240 Richmond 51. w., SUITE 401 Tel I4161 595-9955 1:4D Taronlo, COnOdO M5V 1V6 Fox (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 23/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME SHEET N0. COURME COMMUNITY COMPLEX PARTIAL BMWXE CANOPY'82YA1pN AD3-1 COURTICE, ONTARIO AOldend, No.1 PAINTED STEEL BEAMS. SEE STRUCTURAL DWGS. 203 PAINTED CIRCULAR STEEL CAP PLATES 1 "" '-T`� --------=CTURALRAWN ' o WELDED STEEL PLATE CAPITAL ALL WELDS TO BE CONCEALED, GROUND AND POLISHED SMOOTH - '�Yr" PAINTED FINISH o }6 _ , 1215 �i 00 CIA. BOLTS (8) 15 15 WELDED TO STEEL TOP PLATE rn - �- h N 25 THICK STEEL TOP PLATE ,nom WELDED TO STEEL COLUMN 6 THICK TRIM COLLARS WELDED TO STEEL COLUMN a ED EO 5615 VARIES TINT FILE NO 9 527—G4 r WGA Wong Grcger n ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED WI I III SCALE IIIIIpII To, Richmond ontl SI. W., SUITE lVS Tel 1416) 595-9955 +I Toronto, Canoda MSV 1V6 Fox 14161 595-0823 DATE ,JUN 2396 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO :p COURTICE COMM MY COMPLEX COLLAM CAPITAL DETAIL-ENTRANCE CANOPY AD3-2 COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No.1 PAINTED STEEL COLUMN �- — SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS i� 5I 19 15 38 15 i ' PAINTED STEEL GUSSET PLATES (S) WELDED TO o COLUMN. ALL WELDS M GROUND AND POLISHED SMOOTH ° 15 75 0 0 - O O 1 f EQUAL EQUAL —__ ° -- -- ___ _ ARCHITECTURAL CONCRE7 � VARIES - COLUMN BASE TO SUIT -- --- --- - --- - -- _-- STRUCTURAL FOOTING CAST CONCRETE PIER AND FOOTING SEE STRUCTURAL --- DRAWINGS i FILE NO 94027-24 11,FIfl�� I WGA ( Wong Gregersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED SCALE VIYINIY�IIII 5 240 Richmond SL W, SUITE 401 Tel (416) 595-9955 ulultl Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fas (416) 595-0823 NAB JUN 23/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO coin CoMMUN"coMP EN TRANCE CANOPY CONI BASE AD3-3 COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No.1 a ROOF CONSTRUCTION TO BE: STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING ON ICE AND WATER SHIELD ON 19 EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD ON i 38 METAL ROOF DECK ON / H.S.S. STRUCTURE 4MM THICK BENT STEEL PLATE GUTTER FORM I WOOD BLOCKING 38 DIA SCUPPER ------- CONTINUOUS ALONG Ej G� Oo H.S.S. STRUCTURE BEYOND ---6MM THICK STEEL GUSSET PLATES j WELDED TO H.S.S. STRUCTURE AND STEEL GUTTER I , I PPE No 94027-24 ��E'Iry�����IIQ�II„„„„EIIIIII��IIII 11 WGA ( Wong GrWce nl ARCHITECTS I N C 0 R P 0 R A TED VIII SCALE 240 Richmond SI. W., SUITE 601 Tel 14161 595-9955 1.5 Toronto, Conado MSV 1V6 Fa. 14161 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PROJECT NMI SHEET NAME: SHEET NO CWME COMMUrm WWLEX eflRANCE CANOPY SECTION DETAIL AD3—4 COURTICE. ONTARIO M DD i � I i i N Nj 1 : O R W G A Wo»g Gngersenl ARCHITECTS INCDRPORATED FILE No 94027-24 1 240 Richmond 51. W, SUITE COt Tel (4 16) 595-9955 SCALE 1:40 Toronto, Canada MSV 1V6 Fax (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PROJECT NME SHEET MANE: SHEET NO COURME COMMLNrn Calyx PARiWL SECTION OF ENTRANCE CANOPY AD3-5 COURTICE, ONTARIO i ' GRID i J _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I o 'm - CIRCULAR STEEL TOP PLATES U/S OF STEEL PLATE LINTEL z�I PAINTED FINISH e PAINTED STEEL CAPITAL SEE DETAIL AD3-2 - - - - - - - - - -.- - - - -.- - - - - - -.- i I I 1 9 I I I I I PAINTED STEEL COLUMN - - - - - - - - ` - _. "- - - - - - - - - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS / / o / o � ry M of ELEVATION BEYOND --< m' SHOWN DOTTED / / J \\ _ ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BASE ` SEE DETAIL AD3-3' p I�al FILE NO 94027-24 240 II r WGA ( Wong Gsrgersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED I�IIII�III SCALE 1..20 Tor Rlo, C ntl St. W., SUITE 601 Tel (6161 595-9955 Toronto, Lanotlo MfiV 1V6 Fax 16161 595-0823 OAR JUN 23/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO 0008 E C011AMUNTY COMPLEX DM310111 00MM=JA*8 EXVATION AD3-6 COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No GRID i !� ANODIZED ALUMINUM SNYUGHT FRAMING J SEE SPECIACA11ONS PACK CANlES N11H BAIT N9AAP04 J WOW BLODONG AS REDUIRED DOUBLE ROOF MEMBRANE Ij MINIMUM 3W WIDE 1 !� ROOFCWSIBUCI TOM ROOF 1 / SINGE PLY PVC ROOF NEMMEMBRANE W R +11]I RIGID IN9.ILARIW W VAPOUR BARRIER 0'DC METAL ROOF DECK O O N STEEL STRUCTURE rTO.S 142.68 L I �i CONTINUOUS BENT STEEL PLATE BRACKET WELDED TO STEEL BEAM W25D r 33 STEEL BEAM SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS .--I OW STEE L TUB WLUMNB SEE S RUC 1 DRAWINGS 127 GYPSUM BOARD ON METAL STUD FRAMING PAINED STEEL TPoM RING I 515 I ` PAINTED TUR COLUMN SEE STRUCTURAL UMNINCS FlIE No. 84027-24 WGAIA'oqqGrgwrmnlARCHITECTS INCORPORATED SCALE 240 Richmond 51. W., SUITE 401 Tel 14161 595-9955 1:5 Toronto, Canada 45V 1V6 Fax 14161 595-OB23 DATE JUN 1296 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO. A COURRIDE COMtMRRJiY COMPLU 9ECTIM DUAL- AD3-7 COURTICE, ONTARIO LOEUP SI JOM ICE AND SNOW GUARD BY ROOF CONTRACTOR 6mm GALVANIZED STEEL PLATE WELD TO 6mm GALVANIZED STEEL PLATE BOLTED TO 6mm GALVANIZED !00 BENT STEEL PLATE SEAT 19mm DIA SOLID STEEL (GALVANIZED) SO A VA KIZED) TYPIC4 SINGLE PLY 3I .2S ROOF/CONSTRUCTION PROVIDE DOUBLE ROOF MEMBRANE AT ROOF EDGE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD NAILER PRE-FINISHED ALUMINUM FLASHING ON CONTINUOUS CLIP FASTENERS BENT STEEL PLATE CLIP BRACKETS SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS T_ STEEL BEAM SILICONE SEALANT SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS CONTINUOUS BENT STEEL PLATE EDGE WELDED TO STRUCTURE E.F.I.S REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS CEMENT BOARD 200 W IS A W119 A R C H I T E C T S I N C 0 R P 0 R A T E D FILE NO 94027-24 Ginv� I KALE 240 Richmond St W., SUITE 401 Tel 1416) 595-9955 1:5 Toronto, Canada N15V 1V6 Pa. (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 23/96 SHEET NAME SHEET NO E Comm COMM"COMIRM SECTION DUAL- AD3-8 S i( 41# PROXCT NAME --T'HFOOF PARAPET AT LOBBY COURTICE, ONTARIO Addencum No I i; ��1 WOOD BLOCKS 1 _ - PRE-FINISHED METAL FLASHING 1. - -- CAULKING ON BACKER ROD —� ' - - CAULKING ON BACKER ROD L. - - -- FIBROUS GLASS EXPANSION STRIP 75 ' ---- GLASS BLOCK COMPLETE WITH PANEL — ANCHOURS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR 75 200 GLASS BLOCK TYPE J � P y --. FIBROUS GLASS EXPANSION STRIP j -- - -- CAULKING ON BACKER ROD WOOD BLOCKS CUT TO FIT ---- PRE—FINISHED ANODIZED ALUMINUM SILL SILICONE SEALANT - - TYPICAL PLASTER FINISH PANELS -12.7 GYPSUM BOARD ON j -— METAL STUD FRAMING EXTERIOR STUCCO FINISH 100 RIGID INSULATION -- AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER 1 AI CEMENT BOARD METAL STUD FRAMING In W G A Wong G I FILE NO 94027-24 f+S regelsen ARCHITECTS INC0R RATED oil SCALE 260 Rlo, ClO St. W., SUITE 101 Tel 1616) 595-9955 JU Toronto, Conatla MSV 1V6 Fox I4761 595-0823 GATE JUN 2396 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME. SHEET NO COURME COMWJNP MWLEx SECTION DETU_- AD3-9 COURTICE, ONTARIO OLABB BLOCK ATLOBBY Addendum No.l ) GRID y PAINTED STRUCTURAL COLUMN p SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS y PANTED STEEL PLATE WELDED UGHT FIXTURES(2 PER COLUMN)SHOWN DOTTED TO STEEL STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS III MOUNTING BRACKET MWIFlEO AS REWIRED ALL WEDS TO BE GROUND AND POLISHED SMOOIH i 75 0 PAINTED BEAM SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS I 9 9 ALIGN 4- a — L - �, I IOU ALA WELDED STEEL PLATE MOUNT FOR LIGHT FIXTURES COMPLETE WTH CAP NUTS AND STUD BOLT FASTENERS PAINTED FINISH 1 FILE NO. 94027-24 II WGAIWwwGwermmlARCHITECTS INCORPORATED SCALE 1:5 240 Richmond 51. W., SUITE 401 Tel (416) 595-9955 Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fax 1416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PRO.ECT NAME SHEET NOE: SHEET NO. A D3-10 COLIRME COURTICE, ONTARIO� X LOBBY COLUMN/BEAM CONNECTION A I r - -- - 25x75 STRA°PING (AS REO'D) � j I \\Y I l I I i 3000 WH'TE BIRCH BENCH SLATS 705 I �� �45x9C WHIT= BIRCH JOISTS 25 LOCKER 305 (CONT'S FOR FULL WIDTH AT i BACK-TO-BACK OF !CCKE:RS) SHIM LOCKERS 13 70 -6mm RADIUS (TYP) 1 � L 0 —30x76 WHITE BIRCH (SCREWED ONTO EDGE OF BOG-) --' >0 3Ex140 STUDS a _I-- ,_ N e-- -- -CERAMIC TILE FIN. ON 40C O.C. WITH '3 CEMENT BOARD M' m -ACNE CERAMIC Tb_t' " FLOOR FIVSHES (REFER TO ROOD FINISH SCHEDULE) I �R ,'E Na 94027-24 I�� I�II WGA IWJOng Gregersen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED CA-E 0 240 Fionmond St W, SWTE 49`. Tel !4161 596-8955 Toronto, Canada msV 1V6 Fox 14161 595-0823 CAi JUN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: $HEE NO COURTICE COMMINP COMPLEX BENCH AND LOCKER ease DETALL. AD6-1 COURTICE, ON TAR'0 PROVDE MT. STCDS FRAME SUPPORT ---- 25mm PLYWOOD & >r-- --- PAINTED WHIT:_ INSIDE c'.. _._.__.. LIGHT FIXTURE o O (SEE ELECT. DWGS.) 250 - --- —SUSP_ CEILING SYSTEM 9 lY ---- 12 x '2mm EGG GRATE w z s' o a. z > z i p 570 > 305 li I -- PL. LAM. COUNTER TOP, FRONT AND .°n ----. BACK SPLASH ON 19mm PLYWOOD I r ® ED PL LAM. ON 19mrr PLYWOOD FRONT I \� o WOOD BLOCKING ?� m `I ' ---- FLOOR & WALL FINISHES (SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDJLE) ��1 m II WGA Y''✓ang Gregersen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED Et. NO 94027-24 2LD R¢nmond St W, SUITE 4-1 Tel I416! 595-9955 surf 1:10 Toronto, C.,.dc M5V 'V6 Fax I4161 595-0523 DATE UN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME SHEET NO COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX CHANOEROOM COUNTER TOP DETAIL AD6-2 CCLRTICE, ON-AR',0 >ti is i ii /—SEALANT / - --- - PL LAM. COUNTER TOP, FRONT & BACK SPLASH ON 61O 1,9mm ''LYVVOCO LAVATOR" (SEE M_CH. DWGS) - - — - -- -- �r PL '_AM. ON 19mm PLYWOOD FRONT II I\ 4 STEEL "T" VANI'Y SUPPORT SEE DETAIF AD6-4 P_AC' ME BETWEEN EACH FIXTURE o -- — INSULATED DRAIN & H.W. SU'PLY - -. ---- -- -- FLOOR & WALL FINISHES (SE= ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE) FILE No 04027-24 I�I I�YI WGA IWon g GreB ersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED SCALE �IIIWI9�I� 240 Rl:h montl 51. W, SU Y'TE Ge IL161 595-9955 ?o�Dn�o Co m do MS'J 1VE Fcx IG 15i 595-D823 'OAT-` ,IUV 12, 1996 PRO.EtT NAM, SHEET NAME'. SHEET N^. COURTICE COMMUN11Y COMPLEX MAIN WASHROOMS COUNTER TOP DETAIL AD6-3 CCURTICE, ONTARC S' k ti q ANCHOR BOLTS AT y APPROX. 200mm OFF T- CENTRE LINE OF STEEL "i" - 130mm x 10mm ST. PLATE ;SET INTO MASONRY WALL AT VAN TIES THAT ABUT ?C I � MASONRY) --PRE DRILLED HOLES - r( COUNTERSUNK ON U/S OF a>�x' S-E�L "T" AND BACK OF STEEL BAR 100mm x 70mm ST. PLATE �e 'ZI WELDED -0 STEEL "T" AND 75mm x 100rtm x !Omm - iii SUPPORT COUNTER 'PONT �. _ E_L "Y' AT 915mm O.C.(M AX.) d h '1 AND TO SUIT PLUMBING FIXTURE LOCATION I i 1R FILE NO. 94027-24 W C A ( Wong Gmgelwe ARCHI T E C TS IN CORPORA T E _ 24C Riohmend St W, SUITE LDl Tel 1415] 595-9955 SCALE N.T,S, Toronto, Conada 115V 1VE Fax IC1E1 595-0523 SAT, JJN 12/9E PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME'. SHH-NO COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX TYPICAL STEEL VI SUPPORT DETAIL AD6-4 COURTICE ONTARIO MI F — I� WOOD BLOCK CUT TO FIT IF ROLLING SHUTTER BY - —I--= I AT BG"H ENDS { SHUTTER MANUFACTURER) JNE OF FACE OF CONC. BLOC( WA__ p GALV_ SHEET M-_TAL 4 HOJSING ABOVE (BY ? SHUTTER MANUFACTURER) '" 3-12mm PLYWOOD EDGING NAILED TO WOOD FRAME I I I -- WOOD FRAME ANCHORED 320 TO BLOCK 'WALL P. LAM ON MAX 19mm PLYWOOD COUNTER TOP, BACK & FRONT ED M � a I —LINE OF S/S COUNTER TOP ON y PLYWOOD FRAMING (DOTTED, i� & RADIU = 4900m m) r I I � I I LINE of s/s COUNTER TOP TI",— I ON PLYWOOD FRAMING --'r h 4'I i ur i iI ' i Ey y I I n'r d7 i�r L I rri o/— 1 PLAN DETAIL SCALE 1 20 I 214 / - —S/S FRAME ( J II III -t� (1 HR. F.R.R.) 2 r� �.. AS OD ODOCKING 2 L BLOCK I I/'ll NC. W 65 / �T STEEL GUIDE RAILS - I r Br SHUTTER MAVFACT_uRER) 2 JAMB DETAIL scA,_- 15 1 Im I FILE N' 94027-24 W G A Wong GW, SUITE n ARCHITECTS I N C O R P O R A T E D �I Iullel scAEE AS NOTED 2C0 Richmond 51 W, SUITE 401 Te� IG 16J 595-9955 Toronto, Canada M5V IV6 Fox (4161 595-0823 DATE JUV 12/96 GR6AC1 NAME SHEET NAME. SHEET NC. COURTCE COMMUNRY COMPLEX TYPICAL STEEL avnER PETAL AD6-5 COURTICE, ONTARIO GALV. SHEET METAL--- �- / HOUSING (BY ROLLING _ SHUTTER MANUFACTURER) i$) SHUTTER N RAISED -- S/S FRAME POSITION (DOTTED) 214 -- 1 HR FRR) I 5 i GUIDE PALS BEYOND (BY SHUTTER VANUFACT'JRER) --- d GA. S/S PIN SH ON PLYWOOD FRAMING SHU?TER IN ..OW�REO - 'I' I POSITION (DOTTED) � E10 1 , 'I P. LAN ON `9mm PLYWOOD COUNTER TOP, BACK-& FRONT - ---- - --- ------°t� VARIES _ _ - — — 320 - (100 MIN) i �V CAULKING-� SOLID WOOD EDGE ---- i j DOOR STOP PLYWOOD OUTRIGGERS C.N I � ADJUSTABLE SI-..E_F HARDWARE - --- -- - WOOD BLOCK,NO ANT � .. ANCHORED TO 9LCCK. ,�. '9mm PLYWOOD SHELF -- 1 I P. LAM. ON ° q 19mm PLYWOOD DOOR 2 1. / ' 12mm SOLID WOOD EDGE (TYP)---L� 19mm PLYWOOD BOTTOM 12mm PLYWOOD °ACK��- 50x100 WOOD BLOCKING -------- ------- i BASE ---- - - WOOD BLOCKS ('YP) - RLE No I Ian I 94027-24 WGA bi(ong Gregersen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED DATE G 260 R,chmond 51. W., SUITE 601 Tel 16161 595-9955 Toronto, Canatla MSV IVfi Fox 16161 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME. SHEET NO- COURTICE COMMI COMPLEX TYPICAL srm sruMER HEAD AND eLL DETAIL AD6-6 COURTICE, ONTARIO -----19mm BIRCH VENEER R_Y'NOGJ GABLES & SUP?ORT BELOW Iz —MAPLE FIN. REVEAL i N - - ,ACE OF CONCRETE BLOCK WALL r -- -CLEAR MAPLE i' EDGE STRIP ------- CLEAR MAP_E / EDGE STRIP o' I i 38x36 WOOD BLOCK -- �! 19mm oIRCH VENEER -BIRCH VENEER PLYWOOD SHELVES �LYW000 COA_ ROC BE-OW SHOWN DOTT=p 19 2 PLAN 1 FRONT EDGE DETAIL SCA- 1:10 D6— SCALE 1.5 y � 19mm BIRCH VENEER PLYWOOD BACK SECURELY ANCHOR TO BLOCK WALL °' --- --- -19mm BIRCH VENEER Y05 12 PLYWOOD SHELVES - - SOLID WOOD EDGE 19mm BIRCH VENEER P_YWCOD GABLES (PROVIDE N INTERMEDIATE GABLES ® 900 O.C.) I - 610 t 305 t i x x o� CHROMED STEE_ COAT ROD 32mm m MIN. FACE 0:1 BLOCK WA_L �ESLIENT Bas SECTION SCALE ":10 1 FLc Ne. I'H H m I r rse I 94027-24 A r WGA Wong Gegen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED YI VYI SIAiE AS NOT-_D 240 Richmond St. W, SUITE GOi Tel I476I 595-9955 Toronto, Canada M5V N6 F ax tG161 595-9823 DATE JUN 1295 °FOiE.T NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET N'. COUFME COMMUNfTY COMPLEX TYPICAL CLOSET ROD AND SHELF PLAN,SECTIONS DETAIL AD6-7 COURTCE, ONTARIO � r �r r r FACE OF WALL 610 --- — — P. LAM, COUNTER > - TOP & BAOK ON _ 25 "9mm PLYWOOD �f s� 7] N 1 CHROMED OR S/S 'D' PU-TS (TYP) 6mm PLYWOOD BACKING WOOD BLOCK (TYP) a M O --P. LAM. ON P - 19mm PLYWOOD DRAW=R FRONT W/ A_- EXPOSED DRAWER CONST'N FULL TENSI D VT FULL EXTENSION MT. SLIDES O'JD WOOD IDES & FRONT YW'D. BOTTOM '9mm PLYWCOD BOTTOM \- - 5Cx10C WOOD B'_OCKING 0 9a f ..- _. BASE io Ip FILE N0 94027-24 II ong regersen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED IVflllluli SCALE 240 Richmond Sf. W., SUITE IV6 Tel Ic161 595-9955 Toronto, Conodo MSV 1V6 Fox ILi61 595-0823 DATE JUV 12/96 PROTECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET ND. COU ME COMITY COMPLEX TYFC&KrraeN MVI JNrr AD6-8 COURTICE, ONTARIO LAM. ON 19mm PY'WOCO TO° i � I --- ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE SOLIC WOOD EDGE (TYF) �'I — --_-- 19mm ADJUSTABLE PLYWOOD SHELVES � r r _ --- P. '_AM. ON 19mm PYWOOD 30OR 6mm PLYWOOD BACK J r - P. LAM. ON 19mm PYWOOD BOTTOM -- bCHT FIXTURE ;SEE ELECT. DWGS.) I iI I 300 INTERIOR FINISHES (SEE RM. FINSH SCHUDLE) 0 610 a -OST FORMED F. LAM. COUNTER -OP, TRONT AND BACK SPLASH ON 19mm PLYWOOD _o T I- �—SOLID WOOD EDGE S/S KITCI-EN SINK ) � l l WOOD BLOCKS (TYP) 6mm PLYWOOD BACK ---ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE -' 525 "' -- -- P. LAM. ON 19mm PYWOOD DOOR m l� —19mm ADJUSTABLE PLYWOOD SHELF Iwo l -- P. LAM. ON 19mm PYWOOD BOTTOM N - - t - o. --_ - —Stamm X '00mm WOOD B�CRING o" ' t - - - BASE ECE p�I011 INCA Wong Gregusen I ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED staff E 94027-24 101n� 240 Richmond St W., SUITE 401 Tel (416) 595-9955 �' G Tc,onto, C.nodo M5V IV6 Fox (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PKJEC-NAME SHEET NAME_ SLEET NO COIJIMCE COMMON"COMPLEX TTPIGAL 0 HEN CLFWARO DUAL AD6-9 COURTICE, ONTARIO o I � m 6- ROLLING ALUMINUM.. . HARDWOO it SHUTTER I: 305 1 , PAINTED ACK�' RECEPTION Ia' PIS IE 126 ^ � ' �,_� D6— ROLLING UIDE 1 HIGH COUNTER TOPS �1P, 2 SHUXT� 2 PLAN DETAIL j ALUMINUM SHUTTER 1!. '�' SCALE 1:5 HOUSING OVERHEAD �-- Il DRAWER i PEDESTALS BELOW REFER1, Xr 3 TO 2/AD6-13 _ LOW -!COUNTER 66'T J� 10.85mm THICK ^ —_ TOP ,' "OCTOLUX 80' METAL LAMINATE ON 1Dmm 'FORMFLE COLUMN (by _ .00TOPUS PROD LTD) �292 45ON STUD AND PLVW00D DISK 3 PLAN DETAIL -! 4 CONSTRUCTION SCALE to 6- 9�S \\ 1 WOOD BLOCKING \ \ PAINTED BLACK � ■ AD6 12 5 6 4 PLAN DETAIL SCALE 1:5 �\ ROLLING SHUTTER! \GUIDE ^ O O 1520 1355_ - / 1 PLAN 5 PLAN DETAIL 6_ SCALE 1:50 SCALE I:5 m W G A Wong Gregrrsen FILE 40. 94027-24 l ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED SCALE IOuI 240 Richmond St. W., SUITE 401 Tel 14161 595-9955 AS NOTED Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fax (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COLME Comm COMPLEX REC�DESK PLANS(ROOM 126) AD6-10 COURTICE, ONTARIO --SOLID CHERRY TRIM — 57 191 '157" .. _ —SOLID CHERRY TRIM CHERRY VENEER � -CLEAR ANODIZED 5 ' '__ 16mm ALUMINUM REVEA ON HARD WOOD X57 628 'II BLOCKING -CHERRY VENEER r _ fi5 � „-, —12mm CHERRY REVEAL � N —WOOD BLOCKING (TYP) TYPICAL DRAWER CONSTRUCTION SOLID CHERRY EDGE 19rnm P ON './ TRIM TO BE COVERED PLYWOOD FOR AN 0 D C W LEGAL SIZE ,i ',/ / BY LAYER OF CHERRY I DRAWER FRONT AND,n _FILE HANGERS VENEER (TYP) ALL EXPOSED 13mm SOLID WOOD EDGES FINISHED ^' BACK, SIDES & FRONT I6mm PLYWOOD BOTTOM SOLID CHERRY EDGE 6mm PLYWOOD -- �-- / /r TRIM TO BE COVERED 19mm PLYWOOD BOTTOM / BY LAYER OF P.LAM. 1 ; 50x100 WOQD_BLQ�KING i CLEAR ANODIZED RUBBER BASE _ ——— ALUMINUM BASE ON ------ -- ) —— ....HARD WOOD '� 1 SECTION DETAIL SCALE 1:10 // EXPOSED CONCRETE BLOCK GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SECURELY ANCHOR _ ROLL-UP ALUMINUM SHUTTER 308 _�- HOUSING TO STEEL HARDWARE ABOVE CEILING l, STRUCTURE ABOVE W/ BRACED STEEL STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN-- N - ANGLES AS REQUIRED N ` SOLID CHERRY EDG�F�- I° N COUNTER TOP ——— — —— CHERRY VENEER FINISH } ' CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM D6- BASE ON HARDWOOD 2 SECTION AND ELEVATION SCALE 1:50 ��I'IryI'ry I W C A I Wong Gregersen ARCHITECT 5 I N C O R P O R A T E D 0.E N0. 94027-24 I�I�LI��II 240 Richmond SI. W Stn1£., SUITE 401 Tel 1416) 595-9955 AS NOTED u Toronto, Canada M5V WE Fox (416) 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PROACT NAME 7FK;-C;8yTI0N ME: SHEET NO CWWE COMMUNrrY COMPLEX DESK ERVATKW AND SECT01118 AD6-11 COURTICE, ONTARIO .L - CHERRY VENEER �i i i ,a 57 810 57 SOLID CHERRY TRIM CLEAR ANODIZED kr 6mm ALUMINUM REVEAL � ( —SOLID CHERRY TRIM ON HARD WOOD BLOCKING /i CHERRY VENEER- � 65 } 380mm WIDE DRAWER V� iPEDISTAL BEYOND i I I :PROVIDE REMOVABLE SOLID CHERRY EDGE / TRIM TO BE COVERED PANELS FOR ACCESS ' – BY LAYER OF CHERRY: 'TO WIRING RUN VENEER (TYP) II' CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM BASE ON '. HARD WOOD (�1:) SECTION DETAIL SCALE 1:10 EXPOSED CONCRETE BLOCK SECURELY ANCHOR HOUSING TO STEEL STRUCTURE W/ BRACED STEEL ANGLES AS REQUIRED ROLL-UP ALUMINUM SHUTTER _ _ 3 -HARDWARE ABOVE CEILING \\ ` DB GYPSUM BOARD CEILING \* 1 F -- --- --- - ---� a, II —SOLID CHERRY'EDGE i i I OR�� rn rn fl i� i o II � II°I II i COUNTER TOP-- ——— CHERRY VENEER FINISH - � -CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM ----- -,BASE ON ON HARDWOOD 2 ELEVATION AND SECTION SCALE 1:50 r W G A I Wow Gfeglefsral ARCHITECTS INCDRPORATED "E N0 94027-24 KALE 240 Ric h AS NOTED montl 51 W . ., SUITE G01 Tel (G 761 595-9955 Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fo. (416) 595-0823 DATE ,JUN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SNEET NO C05ME COMIl4 r COMi RECE1pN DESK e.e,A,aNS AND SECTIONS AD6-12 COURTICE, ONTARIO - 90 �90L- i ' ° ;i CLEAR ANODIZED . ALUM. FRAME 1 GL }o - 0 o GL ' TYPE DESCRIPTION TYPE DESCRIPTION A SINGLE GLAZED B HOLLOW METAL TEMPERED PAINTED AO DOUBLE GLAZED TEMPERED 1y° M _ GLAZING ° o' ° TYPE DESCRIPTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Bl HOLLOW METAL B2 HOLLOW METAL PAINTED / GLAZED PAINTED / GLAZED Inm ENO 94027-24 I• ` WCA ( Wong GIYgGI9Gnl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED 0 Iry SCALE AS NOTED VIII 2G0 Richmond SL W, SUITE 401 Tel I4161 595-9955 Toronlo, Conado M5V 1V6 Fa. I4161 595-0823 DATE JUN 12/96 PRD. CT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COURME COMMUNTY COMPLEX DOOR TYPE SCHEDLILE AD8-1 COURTICE, ONTARIO a1 50 16 50 16 o' �I v � N 4 ai Qi I, 2 2a HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES 1� 15 65 65 —FACE OF WALL DOOR i � _i511/ 41 —SS. 'STANLEY 327' PIVOT HINGES (SEE SPEC. FOR DETAIL) 3 SOLD WOOD FRAME TYPES p - WGA ( Wong Gregersen ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED KALE`E NO 94027-24 I' I' I In ql 240 Richmond St. W., SUITE 401 Tel 1416) 595-9955 AS NOTED �I Y Toronla, Canado M5V 1V6 Fax 14161 595-0823 DATE SUN 12/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COUnnnCE COM WITTY COMPLEX DOOR FRAME TYPE AD8-2 COURTICE, ONTARIO -- ALUMINUM ANGLE ANCHOR FOR DOOR FRAME ' RETURN BRICK —- LOOSE LINTEL ABOVE 44.50 r -T 10 45 I i li " ALUMINUM THRESHOLD 0 o i M � DOORJAMB —CAULKING ON BACKER ROD SINGLE ACTING — - -- BULLNOSE BLOCK r (a) TYPICAL ALUM. DOOR FRAME JAMB DETAIL I � JI m o v xi N' SEE SCHEDULE I SEE SCHEDULE I� DEFLEC7pN i WAD j MAL (d) (e) (f) HEAD o V) 25.40 2 .40 v SEE SiI�HEDULE �T 0 w NTERMEDIATE � (h) HORIZONTAL a JAMB MULLION 0 Spl `<I (g) (k) (m) ALUMINUM WINDOW AND DOOR FRAME DETAILS 'III I r��l FILE E AS NOTE 94027-24 r. . WGA ( Wong Griegre lj ARCHITECTS IN C0R P 0RA TEO scAEE AS NOTE 2G0 Richmond Sf. W., SUITE 401 Tel (476) 595-9955 Toronto, Canada M5V 1V6 Fax (416) 595-0623 DATE JUN 12/96 PROXCT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COURTK;E COMMMY COMPLEX ALU6WIM WIDOW AND DOOR FRAMES AD8-3 COURTICE, ONTARIO � @ QQ § ( LU ) � \ � LU i LU \ � ] k a)Eaa » a a. & \� k LL � LU 5 IL }� ( � � zzI � x k ■ 4 } k � § b \ § 0- a- _oa ° .. S■d LUZ § ) � a- CL CL � IL Bklb 2 §§§ }� § £ 8 §I . LU dd GG }@ � 22f � z � uz ©|B § �[[ t=ms 000 § 0 z-! $ Lr) Lo = = U� XXXozzzxx «, § gogoo § § Xx0)W0) � /! � xxx � « < « xx . � g14I §tN ee 2)§ LU aw mmco w m §§f § o - f CmaL.f) 0z2228 �� � 22 �§r \ @ ( ) K \ � ) \ � \ \ \ \ ( � ( ° ( § k ) ) ) ( ( 0nz / ® ., }� / r / / / / \ \ m a. � § } irIxww) x w ) }@ � ! ! X \� § . o \@ § § 4dU vv X00000 cc } w § U. <<< LLLL2LCL � kkIL CL ELI EL tL (L ELI @ U. 4 Ir } \ \ \ \ § � § w m 2M2 � § 2 2 § .7 222 x w CL k � § $ § qq q5 B § � - CL � � � » 2dd § ..Swo k 000 § o00 § §�\/ c a zzz F— wwRzz ; e wweee o < « CL CL � a. « « 9L CL CL CL CL CL � B &aw m8 &D a 0 0 0 uaa.uua � �k /� RRRR % � Ru £ m 2 « < « < _ m 2 m m m d # } 8 2 j ° § e& Is G �3! \ ) j } / § N � ) § j § ) 2 � No � � N �§ 0 ° § § le 00000x0 § % xxx ! 0 xxx0) � 0x20 Dxxxxx0) 00 § § § §, � @ $ $ g § � � xoxx � � � � � � xouxoxxx �2- ro A & � & _ zz � q � � z « « « « « � � z � nw � w m,a oo - - - - o � mCM CM C%IW v , - - - m C $ < $ § ��§ X22 « « § § m ; In mZ) m < « § ; § § ; InInm 2z§ § . « moo « « moo « < kk( B § § ) § § / / / ƒ § 7 ) ] 77 § 7 ] [ fF ) 7 [ / [ 2k§ � @ § § } @ . . 99 kaki &w § } � .Iw a; f § 3) (� )� m . \ � � \) )) 2828 TH }� k , o dd) d) ddd d d c oaa = o � a 6 } u § 0 000 000 0 0 ■ _ zwwwwzzzww £ zz wwzwwwwwzww \� 4xL « a. a. < << < « ILM « � a- MCL iL « I , ) j a w ] R R § § § 22 R x # k < « « _ _ « _ _ _ _ _ @ _ _ LU 2 � - 2 - ' k � akak as \ LL ~ ~ � Ir � « k § § qw § � - § q 2 � o ooG odd o ¥ ; ~ o = � � � � u � � � il a a .oi 8 & k % kkkk § / kk $ $ k $ § S< 6 , o@ 00000000 0000 0 $okZ / » CL » » < < < < < < £ I EE / Ea. 2 » a. / a. 8 e§\% @ m � dGG d k ) �S§E § t2mmmR % $ RR \ } \ -j -j \ c ■ < = = = = @k « < < < < < I % kzXfzz # zi d. .@ 0 22$ �m $; � � S kLn 0 ¥SS ) 0404 / § XXCV0a R § § § � § 2 / / § § 0404 %§ XXXXXOax § ( § xx xxxxxxxxxxx z� w ° jj \ j \ Lo0 \ 300 } \ j8xxxxxxxxxxx B§2 wzwLn w0wQg � $ - - - - - & AIWA § g ■ § 2g ■ ■ gg ■ gggg m|§ » §M» cn $ kk < § m � � # < « : ; « « « k � § < § � � mco w 0 �)/ § oe � ` ea & � � Q � # « oa § ;§ az � - - _ ■!§ Ow ZZ g 1 ' N l a W d. m 'I C r - W 0 w S } } U U U U � N ZE- � � arrrrr � azzrr zzrrf- rte Q Ii a a a W d d d d d d W ¢ ¢ d d ¢ ¢ a a a a a a J LL J rc G Q x W X W 2 2 2 2 2 S S x 2 2 2 ¢ ¢ 2 S ¢ ¢ S 2 5 2 2 a. ¢ W O m a v LL ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Y v N N N N N N N N N A l N N N N N N C41 N N r N 0 J J J J 2 O r r U U U U VIZ O d a U U a U U a d w W z x X o 0 0 0 0vwc~i (7 C7 C7 r Z CO r r r pa f- F r ► h r a z z H r z z H r r F r w �� -7 _ � aaawaaaaan. w ¢ ¢ aa ¢ ¢ an. an. n. 1 0: 00 aUod w 0 U g� Q '2 TL rG '2 J J J J '2 2 2 ? Y O 2 x x 2 x 2 2 2 2 2 x 2 ¢ ¢ 2 2 ¢ ¢ 2 2 2 2 2 N gig O r„„ G W-i °” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W W o 0 W o W U m W W Y7 VI IA W 0 W W W W W W w w N N W W N W N H LL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N X X N N X N X Q § X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O X X O X O r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 O O o W is 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 y Nm rn rn rn rn rn rn 0 0 w m m m Q a 0 0 0 0 X X m 0 X 0 X a�> W X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X W W W W W W X X W X W W w N 0 v> un W 0 w w W W W W W W W W Z Z Z Z W W W t9 W r E w w K- a ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Oya m m m m m m m m m m m ¢ ¢ m m > j > ? ¢ ¢ m m m CO mo 3=0 p ¢ m00 W U- ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ mU ¢ m <Fro 00 nn nnnnnnnmaornmoo � NC� vu� u� u� �nmmto w 0 Cl) <h M M M m M M 0 M 0 m 'Q v < v v v v v v v a v 4 O Z r r r r I N o r r w ¢ w w Z = = Z � O a a O 'LL O w 0 (K J 2 2 2 O O L`' w' ? w W W LU M m W W J W r S C', K H f cQ cO G L J J m a' 0 0 m ir J a W O 00 U U U U U 2 w N Z O O 0 0 0 0 O O 2 rH ZzI- F- rrHZzzzF- r F- F- zr rrr z J 4LLan. ¢ ¢ aaaaa ¢ a ¢ ¢ aaan. aaaa aaa O a J O O LU 0 W 0 0 W yy w S 2 ¢ ¢ m S 2 2 S ¢ a Q a 2 2 S 2 2 2 ¢ S 2 2 m 2 'I Q W U m a yy LL G a N N M N N¢ C<41 N N N N N N N Z r N N N M Z N Ir O W W W W W W ¢ W �O p U U U U U V_ O a.. c0 UUUVaa ¢ ¢ a. 0 ¢ �dVOh '= D D 0 0 0 0 � -j 3 O rF'cwiW N 00 0 0 0 0 �? 0 U U U O Z r F Z Z F- F r r F' Z Z Z Z r r r F r r Z IL a s a ¢ m m m a a a ¢ ¢ a a a a a a a Q a a a a rcoom aVUa. � � W ''22 ? � � OE 2012200Q a 0 USN W Q ^2 2 J J V m 2 2' 2 J J J J M m 2 2 cL ,m J � M, m V ? OO z S 2 a a N 2 2 = m a a ¢ a 2 S = 2 2 2 ¢ S S S co r m Q W 66 O O O O O O m a 0 M 0 0 0 O p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O Y9 1A N N N LO N N 0 w UO N N Ln m N lA to N 1A in 1n 1A n N N N N X N N X N N N N N N N N N N X N N N N N a $ X X X X O X X p X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X w O O O O w 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 O O W� p p O O O p p p O O O O p O � O p O O O a a a a X a X a 00) a 0 0 (D 0) w 0) CD X 0) a w 0) 0 D 0 m N Fm W XX W X X Ln X X LO X X X XXXXXXXNXX W XXX Ww; N N N z N N N N zt N N w 1A IA N N 1A N w 7 N N z Ln N iv fn v v 0 v < N •f a N ? v a a � a v a v N V < O a v w W i z N 55 W,o r CL Q Q V. a H m m ¢ m U m m m m ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ CO m m m m m ¢ m D m m U oZ0 SRo o a a a a ¢ m ago t0 f� OD a N M -W 1A 1A O f0 1- a0 a O N N M V 1A YI Yn (� O O L a a � 7 N Ln N N N N N N N N N N m m m m m m m m m GZ r r r � � � � � r �N� LL 0 $ @ W ) z B z z LL LL f� : � LU 0 0 ®` � ■ 2 2 on z ) � LU � � � ( zez } t8= 2 \� _ U) k � 2 ; \� iu � § § k § § k ■ 0) (000 }� i� qqE LUbujb � k . . � . \ -j / » 2 : : �- U) ) kkkk ) IL § z z § SSS § S 0 U. < � = o o � a6 § m6 � _ . ouu o 000000 Lm Z k Lij\ 0 . § z .. 0 � M : : : : : : : : §v§L @ § z zzkkkk 30§0 SS SSSSSS �S§ ± Do MWW6 6 8 ° 8888 @ X55 0 0 § § W § § § Emwo o (0 CO ?a§ @ 0 L w != $ ■ « 0 Ir z A § K! zt @ ) [ § § z0 w0 B§§ Ir = 3 w I } 2E2J S)§ $ aae § 0w0e0 # §E© G2 = § / S2Sq w 2§7 § 0 CM 2kR @ ° ~ � w § � ( z 2 22 ) 222 2k§ Y a LU W Owl LL ZZ O 'D Z O O O O O p O p E Li O p O O O O O o W W �O y oQrnmaoaoaovvQm m CD CMI) vv41) M > > ' H m F J IL d d d d i i ; i d d �; i d a a a a a a a a a a N d F Q' 2 m N N N N W Q7 x U U N U aw � mmm U l- F ~ ~ ¢ r- � aaa ¢ a ' 2 � fAUC7C7 ¢ 000UOOQ Q W W W C7 C9 C9 C7 C9 C7 mm U x Q O Z o ~ 3 z J p JtZ I aaaaaaaaaaa as aat~it~.� aaaa W a x 3 w x H ui _ Q J J N d-� J Z w � mm t7 J (� Q i m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m O U U N I U U U U U U U U U U U U U w U U U U U U m m m U U Z N O co w morn W J _ y ¢ m m m m m F F F VadO IX m I 00 F- W » » > U UU I- F- F- mHI- F WZZ ddddv� � � � � m > » I I dUUmddd �HVW O OJ U C7 oC- LL to LL O O WOaO m U U nUcoid y U J w w Z w F F F F I- H F t- Q Q t- LLU ddddtp > > > > > > > > W y > dUU > ddd Z& IL L) } Fah O U�e W.- w Z F S3 U 2 U~ Q w J O g K Z J O Qg Z w 2 Z 00 J ¢ ¢ W W F Z w U ¢ Z Q' W cr Ky W m () Z Y C7 U m to y w Q Q m m O Z J Q W w Z F= wZOU m2 w 0 _ } 2 2 U (� R R OF m W w ¢ m } � Z Q O O ¢ Q O U w ¢ Z w0OwzFF000 ¢ Z � FwJZO00wZmmX Orc� In co to 2 w j 0V Oo ZZO 0 30 ° ¢ 000 0000000000 � � � r � � r � � � � � � � N CJa� N , 1 Y a s M LL 1 zz � 1 W i z F- w r x N Iw- w k 1 W W ru O O O 0 C o 0 0 o 0 o o 0 o o 0 o 0 0 o 0 o o 0 K O ww W co ¢ Goo OD Q co O m m° CID m m °m O N COD w m m °m COD t0D f00 0 0 0 0 x N > N IN N N N N N N N M M N N N N N N N N N N N N F F F F F a a a F CL 1 a a a a CL a a a a a a a a F a Z N V) co N co N CO N co d d d d a a d d d d d d d d a a d m d d d Q N N N F F ❑ O ❑ ❑ p ❑ ❑ F ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ O ❑ O O ❑ O W U U N m m m m m m m U m m m m m m m m m m m m a m m U U U U W W W W W W W m W W W W W W w W W W W w 2 Om < Q ¢ Q U U U 0 0 L) 00100 U UUU U U U U U U UvU as a aaaaa Faaaa ° 1 000 UU U ri) CODU (1) UUUU ya ¢ a � ai aguFicQ~ng v~iviaiai °z Za. h- a- CLa. mOOOOO MCLO0M � ] � N m ' a a a a a a U 0 a 0 o U a a 0 U a a a U 0 a a a a 0 J W J a U a o 0 g W J -J J O f. Q < Q U 1 a m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m U m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U U U 2 N � O 0 V 0 O CO m m m a F- m 7 7 F F F- F- F F F F m F- F F F F F F F F F F F F W mmULYLK CCUUUUUUUUmUUUUUUUUUUUUU 0 O rFLaW O omF� LL w7rc0 mu a. ' Z F Q Q U ;"- F F F F• F F F•- Z r LL U U U > 0.0 010 U U U U > U U U U U U U U U U U U U N j2 F"NN O W-- 1..s w X 222 N0000 V^LL 2 ui 000 It 000 a 0 0 0 0 W W W W W a Z w Z a' w Ir w W w W w O ❑ � Z = � C1 (9 (9 2ZZZZ0 wy LL z_Z Z O ❑ O O U Z Z Z N ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ O �> m O O 0 0 0 O W 0 � 0 So N Q ¢ Q � 2 2 2 2 � Ww> ❑ F W W 0 J a, W Z X 2 2 2 U U U U W C73� W U N ~ LL S W 2 �2 LC W W U U U Z W J J J J Z .0 O w a Z 0 0 w ¢ = 0 ¢ = a m0 0 0 R > a-- p O r } ¢ O-_ U a 0 O 3 m 3 N 3 m U 3 a a a ❑ a LL a 0 z Zo p o$o z O ¢ m ¢ m ¢ mQa W a amU ❑ a52o t0 (D f- Co O) O N N N M M M V 10 m O tD O O m to A h (�o y O ��/ N N N N N Cl) M Cl) M M M M M M M M Cl) Cl) M M M M M M M M M U w � R S W/ : § \ } §LL ) \ 7 0' ®§ ;t g (§ �X )tJ k � ss@888880000 0 § \ � zmmmmmmmmmm § ) ] # ; cm ewewewwewe e ! ; � = m � � � � � a- CL � ¥ ¥ jz5 _5 kk % % tt � U- a_ a. a- } @ § coaceg8822 S S § ( § § k � & � & � e & \ � w � m � u � u xxxu � o � � � x suou0000uuu < o » � » � » a. » » E 2 \ @ ■ § kk % % % [ % kk § k 0) � 5 � 5 § w & K5 & wew E 255we5e55 ± x iL C a. LU LLI 0 « ( / _ \$ « 0000000m � � � � _ � � � � � � � � � � ■ oououoouoouo 00 o o M u000000 � § . O/O « wwwewwewwegw e w w � cww ) §�(/ C,ru 00000 � 0 0 0 : . ; o « « ooa ] 6 6 a u GEQ§ § ) \ \ § �k\§ & 8q8 B 2eweee 2 o ui - oe w F < w z� ou uj ©® (in) Coto ouoto : wee � 0 � !* ■ 0 R 0 § 5(� ■ g F w LU ■! § ICI z LULUWa A � CO z 22 } Qk $ 0 000 CO « o « � zzz z ou � � - uoo 000 M = o = Woo 000 » o ° X ozo [ ooR §(2 eou � c � m � � � 2 � � e0m200 � ■ zzzz ; o = z � w w WWW W � 0X » � = = u lz n < � � oz > � 0zm « « Lu < z � nu � m0to �_- $ 3: 0w2 / a. § 3LG § § § F- § 21L—LU< ) ) 0 222 ° 2 §§ @ � 0 ƒ 2aGoc _ � a� § ©§z Go § § / / ?S § Q g � kzQ two §U) § LU L OL k | 9 LLI■ § 8 ;6§ z 2 \ � 7§ § } @ ru § , § § , 00S00 § $ _ CN m � > N (L / � j . L : IL : Laaa ? � @ § § / § § § C.)x mm = CB @ . o : q « L « < 0000 < ui EL L @ § x / F- LU §LU F- e e e F -iz -5F- x (L : ma- MCL MOL 0- a- 0- CL L § k � CL $ § § § am . _ .. .. . . . . mD3 � m E � @ ■ u : 000uu0000u tN 0 § ..§a / 2 § m mmmmmDO MCO ec Luz � � m � §FRB © m $ � DWO � § �S§ CL z 8 \ § b § 0 < C.) < < F- k■2 > m > oou > 0000 a @ / R §|� � 0 § L � } R2 (L �}r @ 2 � 2gf � ° R � 22 � ■■' o « � � I � � � oc � , eep « eg � 5Ir §(- zzn � m � < § ix > gV) 0V $ 12SE ° ®!ZOZ o 2 <Qz ( $ k ) 2 / § 7777 / § 72 / / (\k 0 n n I I Fi ^^ ' 17 SLCP I _ I PLAN jTRACTION TILE NOSING-- L I � FF a � V a o E' D D p D / d '.. d ' D p p D D > D I> p d d (ANTI-SLIP FLOOR TILES ON REINFORCED MORTAR BED ;1 ON SLO°ED CONCRETE SLAB 247 (varies) SECTION I I9I W G A I Wong Greger aOr I ARCHITECTS I N C O R P O R A T E D PILE NO, 94027-24 h Ipl 260 Richmond St W, SUITE 401 Tel W6) 595-9955 KALE 2 Toronto, Canada M5V IV6 Fax 1416) 595-0823 DA'E ,JUN 1296 PRCJEC-NAME SHEET NAME'. SHET NO C01"CE COMMI COMPLEX SHOWER Try SAL AD9-1 COURTICE, ONTARIO I � 1 CERAMIC -'LE CARPET OR VINYL COVPOSITE TILE ZNC EAR 9EAD AT ALL JJNCTONS 07 CARPE- AND CER.T 6 ILE , 6 OR VC T. CONC. SLAB— i N o. o v o 0 0 0 _ o _ —THIN SE- TI-- FEATHER JP WITH ADHESIV= CEMEN- FLOCR LEV= -ER TO ALLOW CARPET -C A'_IGN W/ CESAMIC TILE rFILE NO 84027-24 WGA Wong Gregersenl ARCHITECTS INC0RP0R A TED loll DATED 240 Richmond St W., SUITE 431 Tel 1[161 595-9955 Toronto, Canoda MSV 1V6 Fax 14161 595-0823 DATE JUN 1296 FRI NAME SHEET NAME. SHEET NO COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX DETAL OF awnCN BETWEEN TWO DFFEF ENT MATEwALS AD9-2 COIJUCE, ONTARIO —� 2 LAYERS OF 13mm GYPSUM BOARD BOTH SIDES W/ 38mm SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS PROVIDE CRIL.ED hOLES i�. TO U/S OF ME-A'_ DECK FOR TdREADED RODS STRUCTURE ACOUSTICALLY SEAL AL'_ JOINTS 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL — SEE STRUCT. DWGS. 133 65mm METAL STUDS ''N' TRIM t F— —I— —I LJ G � I 1i I I OPERABLE WALL (N.I. �Z^I E2 cl- I I I AL- ALUMINUM EXTRUDED SECTION SI-A L BE CLEAR ANODIZED FINIS4 I I I - J FIN. FLOOR FILE N0. 94027-24 1Iu' WCA IWOgq Gregersenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED I�III®�I 240 Richmond St W., SUITE 401 Tel s-ALE l (416) 595-9955 1.5 p Toronto, Canada M5V IV6 Pox (416) 595-0823 6A'E „L'N 12/96 rROJECi NAME SHECT NAME. SHEET N0. COURIICE COMMUNI COMPLEX SECTION DETAIL OF MANUAL OPERABLE WALL AD9-3 COURTICE, ONTARIO \ \\ BRACED STEEL SUPPOR'S \ _ SECURELY ANCHORED v REFER ALSO TO V / STRUCTURA_ DRAWINGS inr. FIRE RATED 15mm GYPSUM BOARD ON 92mm META_ STUDS 100 XPANSION S'RIP CURVED STEE_ CHANNEL PACKING s c L SECURELY ANCHOR ,STEEL CHANNEL TO 13mm GYPSUM BOARD CONCRETE BLOCK WA N rp, �. CEILING ON ' i- 79 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM —SEALANT II \ BULNOSE CONCRETE �MORTAR lBLOCK __ IOOX50X6 STEEL GLASS BLOCK WALL II --CHANNEL 45m'.n. RATED II II HORIZONTALLY II II REINFORCE EVERY (I II JOINT u B.N. --�—U 1 C S A 1,90 SO'_D CO II II CURVED GLASS u III .BLOCK WALL �u u 190 CONCRETE I� HGRIZONTAL g REINFORCEMENTS u u j I i i � III II 314' BIKH W Ili I LOOK KNISH III III i e I III II� k, SECTION PLAN FILE No. Ills 94027-24 as■..E,IIII9 WGA IWong Gregienenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED ., .ItlI�I�INII SCALE 1.v 2L8 Richmond St. W., SUITE 101 Tel IG76) 595-9955 - Toronto, Canada MSV 1V6 Fox IG761 595-0823 BRIE JUN '296 'r PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COURnCE COMMIA Y COWLEx DUAL OF OusS BLOCK WALL AD9-4 COURTICE ONTARIO T6 T8 T12 75 z2s', . 51 _- > _._ COVE BASE (TYPICAL) COLOUR TO MATCH T8 T8 O TYPICAL WALL TILE PATTERN AT POOL J a ELEVATION SCALE 1 10 I TYPICAL CHANGE ROOM ELEVATION TYPICAL SHOWER ROOM ELEVATION (WASHROOMS SIMILAR) U/S SUSPEND CEILING (SEE RM. FINISH SCHEDULE) PAINTED CONC. BLO�K - - - ------, NOTE: — —L - FOR TILE TYPES > REFER TO TILE SCHEDULE BULLNOSE TILE EDGE TYPICAL ACCENT STRIP `—-�'—'"•�- ON WASHROOM AND CHANGE ROOM WALLS. OFFSET ACCENT BAND 25MM HORIZONTALLY FROM WALL TILE GRID DELETE AT LOCKER LOCATIONS - `�, To _TYPICAL TILE COVE BASE) 1 COLOUR TO MATCH ra TYPICAL WALL TILE PATTERN FOR CHANGE & SHOWER O ELEVATION SCALE 1:50 �I III FILE NO WGA ( Wong Gregersen 94027-24 l ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED �qEE I'O,uINdINIIIlY111IIINIIIINI 240 Richmond St. W., SUITE 601 Tel (416) 595-9955 AS NOTED Toronto, Conoco M5V 1V6 Fox 14161 595-0823 DATE ,JUN 23/96 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME' SHEET N0 COURTICE COMMU riY COMPLEX TYPCIAL WALL TIEL AND ACCENT STRIP AD9-9 COURTICE, ONTARIO Addendum No. 1 IWHERE FIRE '.EXTINGUISHER CABINETS _ ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN A FIRE RATED WALL, ENSURE THE WALL - BEHIND THE UNIT j- MAINTAINS THE WALL :THICKNESS (THICKNESS / I / I j I I I i I I I p , I I 1 I I I GLASS -- I I I M ° I I j I I I I / I I r I I i I j 2 ELEVATION 5.. / SCALE 1:10 I I WHERE FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS / ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN A FIRE RATED WALL, / — ' -- WA f__ ___ENSURE THE LL BEHIND THE UNIT / r �I MAINT ESSAINS THE WALL THICKNESS, / ' I / / GLASS- SECTION 1 PLAN SCALE 1:10 SCALE 1:10 FILE KALE 94027-24 r WGAIWo G ( ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED nYlY1YIGI�I 240 Rlchm.nd W, SUE 401 Tel (416) 595-9955 KALE AS NOTED Toronto, Conoda M5V 1V6 Fox 14161 595-0823 DAZE JUN 1296 PROJECT NAME SHEET NAME: SHEET NO COURTICE COMMUWTY COMPLEX �i �� �C� AD10-1 COURTICE, ONTARIO S.O.G. BY OTHERS DECK ANCHOR SET BY POOL CONTRACTOR 250 • o En - WATER LEVEL CUP ANCHOR r 4 � M ® DECK ANCHOR / CUP ANCHOR SOME TA ` I � } GUTTER DRAIN F,rnNG TN+T WATERLEVEL 50 DIA 70 'JFEADER TEE HEADER ZE VARIES 65 DIA. 90 E.L. 65 DNA. NO-LEAK !r PIPE FLANGE ® GUTTER DRAIN DETAIL O VACUUM FITTING 'aD SOME Tao TEE J11SUE 147 By FILE Na M7-z4 ` MCA I Wong Gregerj ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED . = 3cuE AS 1W R:<nmond 51 W, SUITE 101 TO 11161 595-9955 NOTED Toronto. Canodo n5V rv6 Fox 14161 595-0633 oA EE 2-5 JA1J I°1% DRMCI NAME :ME NAME:_ El NO COUlTlCE COM NTY COMPLEX (moo ME: COMIICE. ONTAIiO ' � 1 F' 450x450 FRAME AND GRILLE FLOOR REBAR 15Ml 0 450 E.W. A. f . EPDXY COATED • I ► 10M DOWELS 0 300 ► �' T 600 B00 �� NO LEAK FLANGE 600 ► ... v . ALL SIDES ► 100 P.V.C. WATERSTOP CONT. ` v I EPDXY COATED 3-10M BARS CONT. DRAIN DETAIL SCALE: 1:10 xW 0 A f w-w G/CRG.,1 I A R C H I T REV ;154 OAIF 9Y Fi1T N0. fff E C i 5 I N C O R P O R A T E D No J. I W027-Z4 240 Richmond 51. W.,.5V1TF Aol _ --- Ta,onla, Canada HSV rv6 iel 1416) 595-9955 -- sCA(E AS NOTED Fax (4161 595-0823 -- moscr NANF — — OAIE wE[r NAME _._. �_—. 25 JP.N 19510 COURTICE COMAAJW y COMPLEX Pool DKR!Ed t' — suEU NO ---_,-- COUMICE ONTApo uE nl� l�D13—Z to 6KASa sP2F- NOZZL-F-cb/ O o z - 4 PUG PIPS o Sm PLAN Nra c i O /, ' �L_D-pc Y4"vayiNPSre fir, { / r— 7E TL) IovL>6 P o e o S CSI n N t,rs WYE P2 1�CK OPEA1 PILL>s OR,AIN�. ® TEACH POOL SPRAY JET QETAIL --=-j 4fAVI� ro hcrt- , TANK— AIP�,*6r 150 P.V.C. WATERSTOP 150 P.V.C. WATERSTOP CONT. JOINT SEALANT CONT. JOINT SEALANT j� TERNSONS 'DUOFLor STERNSONS 'DUOFLW Y WALL REBAR EPOYY r—OATED FLOOR REBAR EPDXY COATED �• DDWELS O 450 15M O 450 a w. DOWELS O 450 WALL JOINT DETAIL FLOOR JOINT DETAIL SCALE: 1:20 O SCALE: 1:20 R[v rssur enRr FUND MCA Wonp Greperaenl ARCHITECTS INCORPORATED x0 1 W27 24 - 6r 1 salt AS NOTED 240 Ricnmon0 SL W. SUITE <Oi r<i 14161 595-9955 - - roron�o, Cona Ua MSV rv6 Fa. 1[161 595-DO23 '-' - - - RATE RROAa Nnur. — sNa, I -_ - _T— Jt+N 199(n-. r NAME -- � win 11NC y�+IxIlY1V1�11 I cvlxl LGx SHEEN/NO COURTICE. ONTARD ffJUt, i.:ET/+iLJ +—_ �_—_ AP1-3° a —_ 1 CERAMIC TILE ' FINISH HEADER SIZE VARIES ii SCHEMATIC 0 - o U FLOOR INLET RELIEF NO-LEAK FLANGE VALVE SCALE 120 ID0 WATERSTOP °.. • TYP. DRAIN LINE (� TYPICAL 50 COLLECTOR TUBE 100 MIN. CRUSHED STONE ALL AROUND ® HYDRO RELIEF VALVE N.TS FEV 59!' Oel NGA IWOFag GrgCPaj A RC HI T E C TS INCORPORATED °0 _. ,I e. fiIE NO - 94027_24 e�[ — Teo Ric6mona W. SUITE 101 Tel I116) 595-9955 -- _ AS NOTED Toronto, Conaa. m5v NSV rv6 Fox 44161 595-0633 -- i--- OAP[ PRO JE[t NANE - 1 25 J�,N 1996 /y p�.ep N��-1 ���y� 9rtE f veuE ---- -- �. COLWt -CIYIYIIYIIlI&I.IJIIif"I& I __.. — WE x - CO PDO D= L 1Tt lN110E, WARD � . rSTAINLESS STEEL NANDR ]IF r � FINISHED FLOOR START OF RAMP r A TYPICAL RAMP RAIL rSCALE: 1:25 �r 44M82200 R SOCKET t 660 RECESSED STEP HEON PLATE REAR ELEVATION r SIDE ELEVATION GRA_B_RAI�S SCALE- 1:20 M O A W o n g GgPexn I A R C H [ T E C TS I N C O R P O R A T E D Rov '<su[oaiF. eT ntE N0. ---- _ 9027-24 210 RtcNmand 51. w., SURE C01 i 5[NE toranlo, Canada N5V 1V6 Tel 1416) 5959955 _ A5 NOTE -----. Foa I1I61 595-062) - -cr N'uE �WET NAME: DAZE 26 JAN 1996 -- -- C�n i i NC wmmvl�l l 1 a.yryq-LCX _ 91EE1 ND. r 3 � ' STAINLESS STEEI. HANDRAIL P � i 1 TYP. STAIR RAIL SCALE: 1:25 =R7 ru No. 94027_24 MM ■C A I WdiQ Gepersen I A p C N I T E C T S I N C 0 R P 0 R A I E D _SGE- -co acnmone sl. w, smTE eal 1 AS NOTED Tmanlo, ConnEa u5v W6 Fn. I[I61 595 0623 O0.1E 25 JAM 1996 FRO�JfCryI NpA4E �/�����������p�y SYEEI NAME � 'JOL SE['NJ —COURAGE. ONTAW � I r/ V rgCa�-K- �c�l. E�tE lulc�c.�'rILE Foy FtnL Des c7yf) r'�d.IG T� FoR C,uT7�.P� cv-oRpu�� W 11r► Imo. 0 1 � �� , � . .. SW MM�K It-t�(o-u/�giol�l fl I z,Y si.oP� i -rILE, � ' q-5°GNPNfPERE��E � 4. qo Mo�o� ECG E' S'rRUCrURPL co��7E I Q Pact WP.L.L 'ro s u I'r i � ' vEKJcoL -I'oP coURSE _ TIEL--�� PIM�.IS�oN � sfi�U�'rU�AL PaIKED u�i�E'IE• Ph5L corJ�(R,uc�"lorl. REF � '4"EC--' Tn -STWE,Y4uRAL r �s I'oOL WAL)4S 6ryF) Ii4Sl AEG LIME WP4-ATES FCOLL �, I p I>`lnTEl��t�Fihl� MEMr��ie; G6(4AM IG T(l.E Ft�2 p, . . D D A D" ?1 rPfz ewp f /j 5 a OSECT 10N 'IV ISSUf DAIf I ( P a^ 0 O A I Wong CrW.,,( A R C H I T E C T S INCORPORATED xo I-- . 9r 1 94027-24 ALI z<o acnmona sl w, SUITE 401 T.I (4161 695 9955 1 - - _ AS NOTED To,enlo. Canada n5V IV6 Fu. (4161 696-0823 �- CAIT 2 reazrn NAUr TYPICAL r,—1?-T T>=`NOE CCU TCE CNTM PDOL c DCi E - _ A __._7 COUHfCE COMMUNITY COMPLEX _- --.. COT Co WERS �r yP. ) iTo Su,r PIPE _ Y \ ,p s ' 31r I (ryR) t a /y P. V. C.PLATE j aEAD 40 /? C.WELDING ROD (B0 TH SIDES) �;r r WATERST()P PLATE nr.r.s. NOTE'': This is a typical detailing for all PVC pip that Passes through the swimming pool, hydromass qe, and vacuum leaf filter aid filter tanks, Floor inlets and wall inlets with integrate Cycolac flanges/face plates are the only exceptions N C A I W REV I SUE On EF 04 NO-W GIWI .l ARCHITECTS I C 0 R P OR A TED p L -. RY 9402724 2ZO RiCnmom 51 w, SUITE <DI >! -- — _ SCALE AS NOTED ioronlo, Cana OO M5v Iv6 1e1 I1I61 5959955 Po. lufil 595-49]3 1 - �— DR[ —--'1- --- PRpdCt NAME DATE eeNC - 2S LAM COUFiTICE COA1A�lNV(n COMPLEX DO L D E TAI " sI[EI No COLffflCF ONTAf10 -�- AD 13 8 nATEKST)F PLn; i 1 size YprzrF� RETaNirl�� rtirk7s FoFM � i JI a i 0 NaTE : It��� -ryf ri J- 1 A L-PIPING EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL N.T.S. r i 1 1 MMN C A Wo C - - - REV i iss"E w, 6T FILE No �D27 2¢ /AB r7WOr �JA R CN I TE C T5 IN C0RP OR A TE O]LO Ri[M1monO SL W., SUR6 T<i In61 595-9955 - -- AS NOTED SM Toronto, Canado ms6 ca. lufil 595083] 25 JAN 96_ 4ICfT"AM[ - -- - CourtnCE CommuN ry Cowux POO L PETAIL S -- SeEEt eO COURAGE OiW -- i r�R Dill I-Ps. ' 190"V D a 14'2 I.P.h. N WEDeve c,HOF- BNO N7� SLUIMQUIP �il 1UIl NoA021 ESGEITGFfEDN APJUsTMEN 0 v o 2rJLT c 9 � WflSI-IER �s; 0 1 I 1i 0 ° r ' P 4" q 11 t" INSTALLATIDN DETAIL- 2- I, 1%32" k4!TD I n 3 z" <r SCALE: 1�Aa 1� ar WEDGE ANCHOR DETAIL SCALE:M SHOwM 'r r r r N G A I Wan CT rx[x0. P '.7er n I A R C H I T E C i S I N C 0 R P 0 R A T E 0 e[v oan 16r 94027 24 T.I n�<nmore s. u , scare ca. T.1 (4151 595-9955 -i-- - _ AS NDTED Torun io, ranoeo n5v m6 Fa. 1416) 595.0829 - ---- --- ---------- - .- __ DAR- 25t1Ar1'J6 r9�cn x,.,�r .—.__. 4REf NAM[ WEE r10 -. COURfICE COMMUMTY COMPLEX Af ED — COLRTICF_ ONT I cr o r 'r r - r � r r ' SU//IY1 d.6y 1'• I 1 r p CUP ANCHOR DETAIL r SCALE: 3"mi'- oll *CA W ARCHITECTS FFV 'ISSUE DATE NT [,I,N0. vnp CnperunI INC 0RP0R A TE D 9Q27-24 zw mm�n,o�e sl w, SUITE 10t -- 5 A[E AS NOTED Toronto, Canned H5V Iv6 !el 1461 5959955 1 _ Fea 14161 595 0823 J I--- DAE 25 t/AN ,ICJ PNOdCi _ C/yam ryy�E.-wry SHEEI NINE- - wttttyC VVt��w'' x I�IEO (��oO SNEII NO COIRfICE. ONfgiO lf)ET1 A I LI• F\ 1 ryr j V ' VARIES 6r 11" g" 5" by 84 � -t � n �o 1 1 I. pig I M, '� , H1 h Oc4si�y EiLr�R A .-LAY ene ELEMENT r�; /3 �e f�oof (/aiVe Q o � yswid'�uF� /36Bp-¢t� /p �/D Xfo��0 �j�^CtITPC� S�U�`Je {{✓/qy- �OO��67�7rrJ c fOY SECTION REV iisSUEOArc 94027-24 ■G A I Wong Grsgersen I A g q I i E C T S I M C O g V O q A i E 0 "� -- _ FL 240 R"chmonC 9 W SW IL 4n i¢I 1u61 595-9955 1 - _ AS NOTE? Taronlo, LnnO6o M5v rv6 i61 595 0621 z — OAII nRndcT NAVE --.__----- --- 25 JAN ° 5HEE1 NANO - --- -- cOMICECO►n�#MCO x FILTt1Z TASK- - — S1f " caumcE, oNTARO zEc oN - AP 1 3-12 1 z o / N4 ~ / N C , 1 LLI w U l z 1 to ok o ttom^^ ui Q ~ o z I �° oo tt u H Y -J v N JI_ UN NQ w� n�a 331 d I >w 0)7 F Q W t r� � v fF I 03 w ZU O C: - , Q_ d 1 as F o c, v hsvx our 9 r ' "n 94027-24 A+Y rpecrc4+:AR H I tE [ 15 (N COR PORe iED ne st w Svi,F _ sm'i gS_NOiED n5v t<I I4161 595-9955 ( _ S1 Fe. (4161 595-OB23 �- 6>I� 7r JAA 96--F9 JOINT NAME COMPLEX POO�CONSTRUCTION __ " °- — — -I A D 13 - 13 Zo„ I 5x,x, Hess sec/�ai�s m I � -- k ` 1 N - � Provide �rf�i sfe� where 6"afer fs dre�y m a , 3/81, G R A D R A � ° LS a CAST- N STEP S CAL E : OTC 1'_O II REV 551ff OM1IP - _ __—____ W G A W a n p C r e p e c u n l A R C H I T E C T S I N C O R P O R A i E 0 NO I y` f Ae X2]'24 240 N,hmonp SI W, SUILE c01 r 5 AIC- Roranlo Lanapo MSV Iv6 5959965 -- AS NOTED Fw (1161 595-OBdI PROACT NAPE - -- T 1 COlRME COMMUMTY COMPLEX NODL C-rK/}6 P.pIL 4 I -- { -- s((I N, --- cwmM ONTARIO CAST-1N STEP DEr - - - AG13- 14 7TH R: A DON OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CIARMT ON COU CE ''CONRAUNITY COMPLEX OURIICE, ON'T'ARIO VOLUME 3 OF 4 A ECI"CAL & ELECTRICAL I SPECIFICATIONS PHASE It TENDER NO. CL96-4 W-TENDW PROJECT N0: 94027-24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUMON: JULY 22, 1996 IEIPCI ER KAMIf IKR '`MITEI�MAN Tel: (416 )X445-8255 Dal,/ mals, x(416) 4453 1 865 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 INDEX SECTION TITLE PAGES 7 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 31 15240 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 4 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 8 it 'i 15330 SPRINKLERS 6 1, 15400 INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE 27 15850 VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 25 r �t r r 1 1 � . s a 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 t SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE i I ARTICLE NAME PAGE I ' PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 € 1.6 DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES • 4 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.11 WORKSHOP 6 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE . 6 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.15 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK • 6 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 "I 1.17 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.23 TEMPORARY HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.24 DATA BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.26 DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.27 CLEAN UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 l 1.28 GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PART-2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.1 THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.3 FILTER GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.4 STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.5 AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 J 2.7 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.8 ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.9 MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.10 STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE ii SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ARTICLE NAME PAGES PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.1 PIPE EXPANSION AND ANCHORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FILTER GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.6 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.7 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.8 CONCRETE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.11 SLEEVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.18 WIRING . . . . . . . . 3.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.20 PAINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.21 TESTING AND BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.24 STANDARD SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 i�a '! DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 1 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 1 I - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. 1.2 INTENT .1 This Section applies to all Sections of Division 15. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Comply with Section 01300 and specific additional requirements of Sections in j Division 15. I j 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .1 Painting of exposed piping, ductwork and unfinished mechanical equipment - under Division 9. Painting of natural gas piping - under Division 15. .2 Concrete work required for the supports and bases for mechanical equipment - under Division 15. Division 15 shall provide all supports, brackets, stands and platforms required for the proper installation of its equipment and work. .3 Backfilling for piping inside the building and under paved areas outside the building from 300mm above pipe - under Division 2. Backfilling around all piping and to 300mm above pipe - under Division 15. Excavation for all piping (inside and outside the building) and all backfilling for piping outside the building not under paved areas - under Division 15. 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .1 Tender price shall be based only on equipment specifically mentioned by name in the specifications, that is on "Base Bid" equipment or on "Named Alternate" equipment. I i i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 i PAGE 2 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .2 In the event that the tender price is based on any of the "Named Alternate" equipment, mark in the "Named Alternate" manufacturers in the appropriate space in the Tender Form. If no choice is indicated in the Tender Form, 'Base Bid" equipment shall be supplied. 3 For the purposes of these specifications and tender documents, the following definitions shall apply: .4 'Base Bid" - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named first in the specifications for any material or equipment; or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as 'Base Bid" equipment in the Specifications. .5 "Named Alternate" - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named second, third, etc., in the specifications, or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as "Alternate" equipment. .6 Materials not specified herein as to manufacture, quality, etc., shall be supplied of high commercial standard of quality, new and of uniform pattern. Used materials or equipment will not be accepted. .7 In case materials or equipment specked are unavailable, clearly state in the Tender the altemative material and/or equipment and price used in compiling the Tender. 1.6 DRAWINGS .1 The drawings accompanying this specification are to be considered as diagrammatic only and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at the building site. Make without additional charge any necessary changes or additions to the runs to accommodate structural conditions. .2 The drawings and these specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents. Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either plans or specifications shall not change the requirements or intent of the specifications for proper completion of the work to the full approval of the Consultant. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 3 .3 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., which are to be installed under this contract. Where the required conduit work, piping, ductwork, etc., is not shown on the plans or only shown diagrammatically, these shall be installed as tight as possible to structural members, concrete, ceilings and walls to interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. .4 The location of pipes, ducts, outlets and other equipment may be altered by the Consultant without charge to the Owner, provided the change is made before installation and does not necessitate additional material, or in the case j of electrical outlets the new location is within 3m of the original location. .5 Be responsible for the detailed layout of work with respect to the building structure and to other piping, ducts, conduit, etc. If required in certain sections, produce field drawings to show relative positions of various services and have these approved before work is proceeded with. j .6 Consult with the Consultant and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact location of equipment, and before the installation of fixtures and 'i equipment which may interfere with the interior treatment of the building. .7 The listing hereinafter of any article, material, operation or method requires that each item listed be provided of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted. Perform each operation prescribed according to the conditions stated, providing therefor all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals. .8 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be executed in the same manner as if contained in the specifications and shown on the drawings. .9 Should any discrepancy appear between these specifications and the drawings to cause doubt as to the true meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the Consultant before submitting the tender. If this is not done it will be assumed that the more expensive alternative has been included in the contract. i .10 Any error or inconsistency in the drawings or specifications noted after award of contract must be reported to the Consultant before commencing work. d � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 4 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .11 The omission or incorrect mention of work, materials, etc. that are indispensable to the completed work, is not to be interpreted as relieving of the necessity of providing such work, materials, etc. at no expense to the Owner. .12 The layout of the mechanical systems in the mechanical rooms and roof mounted equipment is necessarily based upon one manufacturer's physical dimensions. In substituting equipment of different physical characteristics, submit shop drawings for approval, indicating the proposed layout and piping connections. 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS .1 The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The Electrical Safety Code, the Building Code as amended to date, and any additional requirements of the Electrical Utility, Gas Utility, Ontario Water Resources Commission Regulations respecting Plumbing and codes, Fire Marshall regulations and by-laws of other jurisdictional authorities form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for piping, equipment, devices, wiring sizes or methods exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the interpretation of the codes, the local Electrical Inspector, Plumbing Inspector, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector, etc. shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. .2 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Consultant shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. Any work installed before approval is obtained from the above authorities shall be corrected without charge. Prepare and submit any additional drawings which may be required by Utilities. 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES 1 Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and inspections required for the work herein specified. Pay all fees for examination of drawings and specifications. Furnish any certificates required as evidence that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 i d SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 5 .2 This shall apply to Electrical Inspection, Gas Inspection, Heating Inspection, j t Plumbing Inspection, Pressure Vessel, Piping and Boiler Inspection, I Government, Municipal and Public Utilities and all other such bodies. .3 On completion of the work obtain final unconditional certificates of approval by all utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. All final certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Consultant before final payment is made. 44 .4 Arrange and pay for all tests of the work. :4 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS .1 Upon completion of the project, present to the Consultant a signed statement ;I to the effect that all tests have been carefully carried out as required by the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment and installations have been inspected by all jurisdictional authorities. li 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT .1 Protect finished and unfinished own work and work of other contractors from damage due to own operations. Cover floors and other parts of the building with tarpaulins, etc. Repair all damage to floor surfaces or other parts of the 'j building resulting from the carrying out of this work. i .2 All material damaged by weather or through negligence shall be removed and replaced with new material. .3 During freezing weather, protect all material in such a manner that no harm r can be done to the installation already made and/or materials and equipment on the job. j .4 Store all material and equipment neatly and out of the way. .5 Securely plug-or cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduits and equipment to prevent obstructions during construction. I� i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 6 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.11 WORKSHOP .1 Provide temporary buildings for field office, workshop, tools and material storage as may be required for own use and be responsible for any loss or damage thereto. Temporary buildings shall be of a type approved by the Consultant and located as directed by him. Temporary buildings shall be removed after completion of work as directed by Consultant. 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER .1 Temporary light, power and water will be provided under Division 1. Provide all necessary extension cords, lamps, hoses, etc. for own use. 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE 1 Maintain such insurance as will fully protect the Owner and the Contractor from any and all claims under the Workmen's Compensation Act and all insurance as noted in the Instructions to Tenderers. 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS .1 Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and local conditions, Electrical Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Structural Drawings, and Architectural Drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown on these Drawings and as herein specified. Before commencing work examine the work of the other trades and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work of this section or the guarantee of same. No extra will subsequently be allowed to cover any such error, omission and/or oversight for not having made a thorough inspection of the grounds, existing conditions, drawings, and specifications. 1.15 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for layout of own work so as not to conflict with other trades and also for damage caused to other's work by improper location or carrying out of own work. .2 Arrange work in co-operation with other trades in such a manner as not to interfere with other work being carried on and co-ordinate layout of work with other trades to get all pipework, wiring, conduits, ductwork, etc., installed to the best advantage. i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 I SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 7 I .3 Assume full responsibility for the prompt installation of wiring, conduits, pipes, ducts, equipment and sleeves in advance of the work of other trades as required. f .4 Where any equipment supplied under this Section must be built in with the work of other Sections such as Masonry, Plastering or Concrete, supply the equipment to be built in, provide templates, anchors, sleeves, bolts and j measurements to allow the installation of these in the proper sequence. .5 Confer and co-operate with all other trades in order to eliminate any unnecessary delay to any work being done under this Contract. .6 Submit composite drawings of crowded locations where there is possibility of conflict with the work of other trades. Indicate exact locations and elevations of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from field measurement. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Refer to and be governed by specification Division 1. .2 Should any cutting and repairing of either unfinished or finished work be required due to failure of this trade to advise of or install equipment or sleeves on time, such cutting and patching shall be carried out by the trade affected and Division 15 shall pay all costs of such work. .3 General Contractor will make good and patch surfaces cut by the mechanical trades. 1.17 WORKMANSHIP .1 Only first Gass workmanship will be accepted not only regarding the best accepted standard practices, safety, accessibility, durability, etc., but also regarding neatness of detail. Pipes shall be installed true to line and grade. All pipework, conduit, and ducts must be aligned parallel and at right angles to the building walls. Equipment must be accurately set, plumbed and levelled and hanger rods must be aligned vertically. The entire work shall present a neat and clean appearance on completion. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 8 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .2 Where possible, pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring are to be concealed in ceiling spaces, furred spaces, pipe spaces, walls, trenches, etc., except they shall be run exposed in the boiler and equipment rooms, or where specifically noted on the drawings. They shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring, etc., is kept as small as possible. Where pipes, ducts, conduits and other equipment are exposed, they shall be installed as close as possible to building structure, ceilings and walls. Provide all offsets for this purpose at own expense, whether shown or not shown on drawings. .3 Any conduits, pipes, ducts or other work which is not, in the opinion of the Consultant, installed as it should be, shall be taken out and replaced without cost to the Owner. 1.18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review eight copies of detail drawings showing equipment and systems before ordering same and immediately after the award of the contract. .2 Submit eight copies of typed sheets, catalogue sheets, or illustrations, giving suppliers and catalogue numbers for such items as valves, traps, expansion joints, hangers, switches, types of thermal insulation for all services and any other standard catalogue items. .3 These will be reviewed by the Consultant and returned. No allowance will be made later if equipment is condemned at the site because of failure to observe this instruction. .4 The Consultant reserves the right to reject any material or apparatus which, in his opinion, does not conform with the requirements of the Specifications. .5 Notify Consultant in writing if shop drawings differ from Consultant's design drawings in any respect. Certify shop drawings that they have been checked and agree with Consultant's drawings and Specifications. Assume all responsibility for errors made on shop drawings or for changes made from Consultant's drawings and specifications, unless such changes were set out in written notification to Consultant. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 9 6 Review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not indicate approval of the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Section submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Section of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all other Sections. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Mark in coloured ink on a set of whiteprints, which will be provided, every 1 change and deviation from runs of piping, ductwork, conduit and other services from where shown on drawings, so that on completion of the job the record drawings shall indicate the exact location of all services as actually installed. Record drawings shall be kept at the site and shall be kept up to date as the work progresses. Submit completed record drawings before final certificate of job acceptance is issued. .2 Dimension locations of buried drains, pipes, duct, conduit, tanks, pads, manholes etc. to building column centres or other fixed reference points. Also mark in location of all access doors. .3 In addition to the whiteprints, prepare and submit one set of transparencies of the record drawings. .4 Acceptance of record drawings by the Consultant does not constitute a guarantee by the Consultant of their accuracy, nor does the acceptance by the Consultant remove the Contractor's responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be on the record drawings. j 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS .1 Samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval before ordering f such items as name plates, tags, valves, thermostats, grilles, diffusers, etc., and other repetitive materials where finish or detail can be better examined by sample. All materials used for the work shall be fully equal to the samples as approved. r� PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 f PAGE 10 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS .1 All equipment, materials, controls, wiring and wiring devices, etc., supplied shall conform to the CSA, HEPC, CGA & ASME requirements for the purposes for which they are to be used, and shall bear a CSA or CGA approval label. .2 Special equipment which does not have a standard CSA or CGA label shall be inspected by the Special Inspection Department of the HEPC and the Approval Certificate shall be submitted to the Consultant as soon as possible. 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE .1 It is understood and agreed that the temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any mechanical device, electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any other work or material supplied under this Section before final completion and written acceptance by the Consultant, is not to be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same by the Owner and it is further understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the Contractor shall claim that the said work is complete and in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and for such reasonable length of time as the Consultant shall deem to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same and that no claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for the injury to, or breaking of any parts of such work which may be so used whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship of any kind whatsoever. .2 Should the Contractor feel that the equipment is being abused, improperly used or maintained, he shall advise the Consultant immediately. Verbal advice shall be followed up in writing, otherwise subsequent claims for damage will not be considered. 1.23 TEMPORARY HEATING .1 All temporary heating required while the building is under construction will be provided under Division 1. .2 The permanent pumps, convectors, unit heaters, etc., may be used for temporary heating, providing this equipment is installed in its permanent location and providing that the building is completely closed in and clean. Approval must be obtained from the Consultant for use of such equipment. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 11 i .3 Fans and air systems may not be used for temporary heat except with permission and specific instructions from the Consultant. .4 Be responsible for the operation, care and maintenance of the permanent heating system when used for temporary heating. At the completion of the job and prior to the final acceptance all permanent heating equipment used for temporary heating shall be thoroughly cleaned and put in first class operating condition and appearance to the approval of the Consultant. All damaged equipment piping, etc., shall be replaced to the approval of the Consultant. Replace filters and clean coils prior to owner's taking over the system. .5 Give all necessary instructions for proper operation of the permanent heating system used for temporary heating. 1.24 DATA BOOK 1 Bind within hard-covered, loose-leaf binders, two complete sets of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions showing all major mechanical equipment and systems. Include shop drawings, detail drawings and operating curves. Instructions shall be complete for installation, operation and maintenance. Spare part suppliers, lists and addresses shall be included. Instructions shall be reviewed with the operating personnel to ensure a !, thorough understanding of the equipment and its operation. Include copy of the Valve Chart. 1.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT .1 Where it is indicated that equipment is to be installed in future, leave adequate space for such future equipment and install the piping, conduits, ducts and other work in such a way that future equipment installations and connections can be made. Consult with the representative of the Consultant whenever necessary for the purpose. 1.26 DIRECTORIES 1 Prepare diagrams of the major piping systems including chillers, antifreeze systems, compressors, cooling towers, boilers, pumps, air supply units, etc. Prepare diagrams of air supply and exhaust systems identifying the respective fans and locations being supplied and exhausted. Three framed copies of both the water and the air system diagrams shall be delivered to the Consultant. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 12 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.27 CLEAN UP 1 All material shall be stored neatly and out of the way. Clean up daily all refuse caused by work. .2 On completion of the work remove from the premises all tools, debris, surplus and waste materials resulting from operations under this Section. Clean all fixtures and equipment and leave all items in perfect order ready for operation. 1.28 GUARANTEE .1 Before final payment is made, guarantee all materials and workmanship supplied in the performance of this contract, for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Consultant and, when called upon, make good without further charge any such defects as may appear within this period. Before final payment is made, test the operation of all equipment installed and regulate all balancing and control equipment, lubricate all mechanical equipment, etc., and demonstrate to the Consultant or his representative that all equipment is operating as intended, without undue noise and vibration. The period of this guarantee shall in no way supplant any other guarantee or warranties of longer period, but shall be binding on all other work not otherwise covered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOMETERS .1 Thermometers shall be Trerice BX or BX9 Series, 200mm 8" scale with brass separable sockets. Sockets to have extension necks for pipes with insulation. For air ducts use perforated stems. .2 Thermometers shall be Trerice, Taylor or Weksler. 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES .1 Pressure gauges shall be 115mm diameter Trerice No. 600. Pressure gauges shall be complete with 2.0 MPa isolating valve and shall suit fluid pressure measured. Steam gauges shall be complete with syphons. Gauges installed in pump suction and discharge pipes shall have Impulse Dampeners, Trerice No. 870 or approved equal. .2 Pressure gauges shall be Trerice, Ashcroft, Winters, U.S. Gauge. p� DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 13 2.3 FILTER GAUGES .1 Filter gauges shall be magnahelic gauges. Filter gauges shall have sufficient range for all types of filters and sufficient tubing for a proper installation. .2 Filter gauges shall be Dwyer or Airflow Developments. b l 2.4 STRAINERS .1 Pipe strainers shall be Y-type and basket type strainers as shown and shall be selected for 100% of pump capacity. .2 Screen perforations and working pressure shall be suitable for the systems in 1 which they are installed. .3 Strainers shall have monel screens and shall be reinforced when installed on j pump sections. .4 Y-type strainers shall be self cleaning and installed with 25mm hose end valve on blow-off connection. 5 Strainers up to 50mm shall be screwed and for sizes 60mm and over shall be j ' flanged. .6 All strainers connected to steel pipe and to copper pipe 60mm and larger shall have cast iron bodies. All strainers connected to copper pipe 50mm and smaller shall have bronze bodies. .7 Strainers shall be Sarco, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco or Atlas. 2.5 AIR VENTS .1 Automatic air vents shall be Sarco Type 13 WN air trap. 2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS .1 Use Myatt Fig. No. 124 or Grinnell Fig. No. 260 clevis hangers. For cold insulated piping hanger shall be sized for the O.D. of the insulation and shall be provided with a protection shield, Myatt Fig. No. 251 or Grinnell Fig. No. 1 167. For insulated hot piping the lower strap of the hanger shall be longer to place the horizontal rod outside the insulation - Myatt Fig. No. 124L or Grinnell Fig. No. 300. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 14 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .2 Where hanger rods are too short to accommodate the axial movement due to thermal expansion, use Myatt Fig. No. 258 or Grinnell Fig. No. 174 hangers for pipes up to and including 125mm size and Myatt Fig. No. 261 or Grinnell Fig. No. 171 for larger pipes. Include protection shields specified previously for cold insulated pipes. Include pipe covering protection saddles Myatt Fig. No. 210-240 or Grinnell Fig. No. 160-165 for hot insulated pipes. Use similar heavy duty and extra heavy duty hangers where loads imposed exceed the capacity of the previously specified hangers, e.g. Myatt Fig. No. 125. .3 Vertical piping shall be supported using wrought iron pipe clamps, anchored to the concrete slab, Myatt Fig. No. 182 or Grinnell Fig. No. 261. For cast iron pipe, locate hub at clamp. .4 Provide special supports, racks, platforms, guides, stands, floor supports where such are indicated on drawings. Construct such supports in accordance with details provided. 2.7 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS .1 Provide chrome or nickel plated floor plates where exposed pipes pass through the finished floors. These shall be split type of similar design to#1-BC or #10-BC shown on Page 1169 of Cat. 61 Crane Company or Grinnell Fig. 10. Where exposed pipes pass through ceilings and walls provide similar plates, but with set screws to hold them in position. .2 Escutcheons shall be chrome or nickel plated brass with set screws and shall be provided where exposed and uninsulated piping passes through the floors, walls or partitions, e.g. fixture supplies, waste pipes. Clip type escutcheons will not be accepted. 2.8 ACCESS DOORS .1 Access doors shall be LeHage to suit construction, or Ormsby Kane, or Dillon, flush type with recessed hinges. Access doors in fire rated ceilings and/or walls shall match fire rating of ceilings and/or walls and shall be ULC approved. All access doors shall be equipped with screwdriver locks. .2 Access doors shall be minimum size 450mm x 300mm and 600mm x 450mm where it is necessary for persons to enter and shall be adequately sized to properly service and maintain the equipment they serve. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 15 2.9 MOTORS .1 Unless otherwise specified for a particular application, motors up to and including 350 W shall be 120 Volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. .2 Motors larger than 350 W shall be Volt, 60 cycle, three phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors with speed of 3600 RPM will not be accepted. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors shall have open, drip proof fully guarded enclosures. .3 All motors over 1HP shall be high efficiency type. .4 Motors shall be Leland Electric, Westinghouse, Lincoln Electric, Canadian General Electric. 2.10 STARTERS AND CONTROLS 1 Unless modified in other sections of these specifications or by details or control diagrams, motor starters, control and disconnect switches shall comply with the following requirements. .2 Each motor shall be provided with a starter and all specified and required protective devices of suitable type and rating and adequate for the condition of application and in full accordance with Canadian and Ontario Electric Codes and Local requirements. .3 Starters shall be rated for safe making and interrupting of motor currents and 1 shall be equipped with overload relays to make or break simultaneously each ungrounded line to the motor. .4 Magnetic starters shall be used throughout this project, except that manual starters, with relays where required, may be used for single phase motors. .5 All manual starters shall have red or neon pilot lights. JJ d .6 Magnetic starters shall be equipped with: d r .1 Red or neon pilot light. 1 .2 Maintained contact on-off selector switch unless otherwise specified hereinafter. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 18 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS .1 Supply and install straight or angle pattern type thermometers where shown on the Drawings, where required and all other locations specified herein. In general, thermometers shall be installed in piping as follows: .1 On entering and leaving sides of all hot water heating coils. .2 On leaving sides and return sides of all three-way mixing valves. This applies to both the heating and the cooling systems. .3 Where further indicated on the Drawings. .2 In general, thermometers shall be installed in ductwork and fan apparatus as III follows: I .1 In all supply fan discharges. .2 Where further indicated on the Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES .1 In general, pressure gauges shall be located as follows: .1 On suction and discharge of all circulating pumps. .2 On all expansion tanks. .3 On low and high pressure sides of all pressure reducing valves. .4 Where further indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FILTER GAUGES .1 Supply and install water type filter gauges across all filter banks in air supply systems in order that the pressure drops across the filters are clearly indicated. Provide contacts for connection to building automation system. 3.5 GAUGE GLASSES .1 Provide gauge glasses on all tanks as required, shown and further specified. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 19 i ;2 Gauge glasses shall be approved fail-safe type complete with shut-off valves and ball checks. Gauge glasses shall cover the full height of the tank. .3 Where tank height exceeds maximum length of one glass (45cm) provide additional gauges and stagger location of gauges. Provide white enamelled brass backplates behind gauge glasses. 'I 3.6 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS j .1 Provide strainers where shown on the Drawings and in the following locations whether shown or not: .1 Suction sides of all pumps .2 Ahead of all pressure reducing valves. .I .3 Ahead of water meter 3.7 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS .1 Supply and install automatic air vents at all high points or pockets in the piping to remove air from the heating and cooling systems. A 13mm discharge from all automatic air vents or traps shall be piped to the nearest open drain to catch any trap discharge, arranging the discharge so it is readily accessible and visible. All air vents shall be installed in concealed accessible locations. .2 Provide a shut-off valve at each air vent. 3.8 CONCRETE WORK I � .1 All equipment supports and bases above floor required for mechanical work shall be provided as part of the work of Division 15. 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES .1 Provide concrete foundations and bases and steel supports, stands and platforms required for the proper installation of the equipment and work of this Division. Concrete shall be 20 MPa mix and formwork shall be plywood finish. .2 Hire the trade involved and pay all expenses. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 20 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .3 Supports and bases shall be as shown on drawings, as specified, as recommended by manufacturer, as required and as approved by the Consultant. Equipment such as tanks, pumps, fans, softeners, heat exchangers, meters, boilers, compressors, transformers, switches, panels, shall be supported on concrete bases and independently from the piping and conduits and ducts so that no undue strain is placed on the equipment. .4 Supply all necessary templates, anchor bolts, inserts and location drawings for the equipment supplied, and supervise the work of installation of the bases. Support bases above the floor shall be at least 50mm larger all around than the base of the apparatus, with chamfered comers and finished to a smooth neat surface. Unless shown otherwise on drawings, bases shall be 150mm above the floor and shall be dowelled to the concrete floor with not less than four 13mm dia. steel rods fastened to the reinforcing bars of the floor before pouring. .5 Heating coils and cooling coils in air supply units shall be supported on bases of concrete or structural steel, supplied and installed under this Division. .6 Wherever equipment is required to be suspended above floor level and details are not shown on the drawings, it shall be mounted on a platform bracketed from the wall. At locations where wall thickness is inadequate in the opinion of the Consultant to permit such brackets, supports shall be carried to either the ceiling or the floor, or both, as required. Shop drawing details of such supports shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval. .7 Equipment stands shall be constructed of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings which shall be braced and fastened with flanges bolted to the floor. Where saddles are indicated or required, provide welded steel or cast iron saddles, of the curvature to suit vessel being supported. 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS .1 Supply and install all inserts and fastenings required for support of equipment and hangers provided under this Division. Use beam clamps attached onto structural steel and/or inserts set in concrete. 2 Inserts shall be of the Midwest, Truscon manufacture and shall be firmly secured to the forms before the concrete is poured. Be responsible for correct location of inserts. +i 1 I DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 21 .3 Where supports are required under the roof slab and in other areas where structural bearings of sufficient strength do not exist, provide angle or channel iron supports, properly sized to support the load from the structural framework using beam clamps. Where the wall, partition, floor or roof does not permit the support of heavy equipment, carry suitable support to building structure. .4 Percussion type fastenings of any kind will not be permitted unless prior JJapproval in writing is obtained from the Consultant. i' .5 Bolts and anchors at metallic waterproofed surfaces shall be supplied under this Section but installed under the Waterproofing Section. Refer to architectural drawings for such areas. 6 Brackets may be attached to masonry walls using expansion shields in shear, but walls must not be punched through and before drilling is started, approval must be obtained from the Consultant. - 3.11 SLEEVES .1 Supply and set all necessary sleeves and be responsible for the exact location of all sleeves. Sleeves shall be of steel pipe for piping passing through masonry walls and 1.3mm galvanized iron for piping passing through concrete walls or floors. Sleeves for bare copper piping shall be lined with copper or lead. Sleeves shall be sized to permit insulation to pass through unbroken. Seal around pipes passing through sleeves with fire resistive non-hardening mastic (concrete not acceptable) to control transmission of sound and noise, " and to provide the full fire rating of the wall or floor. Unused sleeves shall be similarly sealed or filled with concrete. Use individual sleeves for each pipe. J .2 Where ducts enter through equipment room floor provide 100mm wide x 100mm high concrete curb to stop water. Pipe sleeves through equipment room floor shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe with machine cut ends, with top end at 100mm above finished floor. I � .f I � I, I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 22 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS .1 Supply and install pipe hangers and their supports for all piping. .2 Piping and conduits shall be securely supported from hangers or supports, in a manner to ensure that building construction is not weakened or overstressed; that pipes are secure, vibration free, free to expand and contract, and properly graded; and that vertical adjustment of horizontal piping is possible after erection. .3 Cast iron pipe with MJ joints shall have two hangers for each length of pipe. .4 Pipe supports for all other piping shall be spaced at the following intervals, using round steel rod supports of the diameter indicated: Pipe Diameter Horizontal Spacing of Supports Rod Diameter Up to 20 mm 1.8m 10 mm 25 mm to 30 mm 2.0 m 10 mm 40 mm to 50 mm 2.5m 10 mm 60 mm 3.0 m 12 mm 75 mm to 125 mm 4.0 m 16 mm 150 mm to 200 mm 4.8 m 22 mm 250 mm and over 5.8 m 22 mm min. .5 Rod diameter for larger pipes to suit weight being supported in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. .6 For plumbing piping, horizontal spacing of supports shall not exceed 2.5m for pipes 25mm and larger in accordance with the Plumbing Code. .7 Hanger rods must be vertical, without bends, or offsets, and workmanship must be such that finished piping is true both with respect to line and grade. They must be complete with adjusting and stopping nut locks. Each hanger is to be supported independently from the structure, i.e. piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment. .8 No perforated or flat iron hangers shall be used. I� DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 23 i .9 Where hangers are installed under and in direct contact with pipes, packing of 'j inert material shall be crimped around the hanger to prevent electrolysis and abrasion. Copper clad hangers will not be accepted. .10 Upper attachment of hanger rod shall allow rod to pivot without bending of the rod. 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS .1 Provide all belt driven equipment with belt guards with tachometer openings at both the driven and drive shafts. Belt guards shall be open mesh expanded metal type. { .2 Provide coupling guards for pumps with exposed couplings. I .3 Belt guards and coupling guards shall be fastened by bolts or wing nuts, so that they may be easily removed for servicing of equipment. I 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS .1 Separate dissimilar metals from direct contact with each other. Install all necessary gaskets, and dielectric couplings. All metal screws, clamps, and fastenings shall be of the same metal and finish as the material supported. 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS � .1 Provide access doors to all valves, cleanouts, electrical outlets, dampers, fire dampers, equipment, controls, plumbing devices and other apparatus requiring access where these are built in or concealed behind furring, walls or ceiling. .2 Access doors shall be supplied under.this Division but installed by the trade providing wall or ceiling. Correct location of access doors is the responsibility of this Division. Frame and cover shall have a prime coat finish. Where it is necessary to have a number of access doors installed in the same area of a ceiling or wall, submit to the Consultant the location of these access doors for his approval. Access doors provided in glazed tile walls shall suit the tile pattern. Refer to architectural drawings for room finish schedules. !I i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 24 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .3 Access doors in removable lay-in T-bar acoustic tile ceilings will not be required. Mark the location of the removable ceiling ties with approved coloured marking devices in the four comers of the tiles to indicate by their colour the nature of the item behind. Colour for different services to be later determined by the Consultant. Refer to architectural drawings for the areas having such ceilings. .4 Provide two sets of record drawings showing the location of all access panels with cross reference to their function. 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Division 15 shall supply electrical motors, starters, controls, relays, thermostats, float switches, pressure switches, flow switches, pilot lights, remote control stations, safety devices, aquastats, control transformers, disconnects for control circuits, and interlocks. .2 Division 15 shall mount the above equipment, except for line voltage wall thermostats and starters, which will be mounted by Division 16. .3 Division 16 will supply and mount isolation disconnect switches where required for safe servicing of motors, as well as disconnects at electrical panels of all factory assembled package equipment, e.g. rooftop units, condensing units, air conditioning units. .4 In the case of roof mounted exhaust fans, safety isolation switches shall be factory mounted within the fan, complete with wiring from switch to motor. .5 Division 16 will provide all power wiring as defined herein. .6 Division 15 shall provide all control and interlock wiring including connection to equipment and to source of supply. .7 Power wiring is defined as all single or three phase wiring carrying the full current of the mechanical equipment, including wiring of full equipment current carrying line voltage controls and isolation disconnects in line between the source and the mechanical equipment, and connection to the equipment. .8 Control and interlock wiring is defined as all mechanical equipment wiring other than power wiring outlined above. .9 Division 15 shall provide detailed wiring diagrams for each motor. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 25 I � .10 Division 15, unless specifically indicated otherwise, shall provide all damper motor power and control wiring. .11 To obtain line voltage supply for motorized dampers, motorized valves or other controls, provide wiring to the nearest lighting or power panel, including connection to same, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. .12 Where low voltage supply source is required, obtain line voltage supply as described previously and also provide control transformers of necessary voltage and wattage to suit the low voltage equipment and controls. .13 Division 15, unless specifically indicated otherwise, will provide all wiring for damper motor power and control from nearest lighting panel except where the drawings indicate power outlets by Division 16. For these instances Division 15 will wire from the outlet to the damper motor. 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS .1 Unless otherwise specified, all controls, interlocks, start-stop stations, and control wiring shall be 120 volts or lower, except if contained entirely within starter. Such lower voltage shall be obtained from transformers of adequate rating mounted within the starter. Transformers shall be oversized where circuits carry external loads in addition to the holding coil of the starter. Where groups of motors are interlocked so as to function in a co-ordinated manner as in the case of an air conditioning system, all control circuit wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Starter containing wiring powered by another starter (or source) shall have double voltage relays, mylar covered interlocks, or other such provisions permitted by applicable codes and regulations. .3 Each motor shall have a disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall 1 consist of a disconnect switch of suitable rating designed to break all ungrounded conductors of the motor under full load. The disconnecting means shall be located within 10m and within sight of the motor and the machinery I driven by the motor. .4 This Division shall provide detailed control wiring schematic diagrams for each motor. .5 Where motor control centres are shown on the drawing or where the number of starters grouped in one area warrants the use of motor control centres, these shall be as specified under 'Motor Control Centres' in this specification. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 26 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.18 WIRING .1 Wiring shall be in conformity with Ontario Electric Code and local regulations and motor manufacturer's recommendations and Division 16. .2 The following are minimum requirements and are not intended to override any minimum requirements or those shown in the electrical specifications: Power Wiring #12 Gauge Control Wiring #14 Gauge .3 In wet locations use wire type RW90 or TWH. In warm locations such as boiler rooms, kitchens and mechanical rooms, use wire type RW90. Wiring to or near heat producing equipment shall be fireproof type. 3.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT .1 Clearly mark all exposed ducts, pipes, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., to indicate the nature of the service. .2 All starters shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving, secured with screws. .3 Surface mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted on exterior face of door or cover. Flush mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted at the top of the inside face of the door or cover. .4 Every valve on the job except on radiation, unit heaters and fixture stops shall be provided with a 30mm diameter brass tag secured with split rings or brass 'S' hooks. The number on the tags shall be factory engraved in black ink. Prepare two framed and glazed valve diagrams showing the service, location and purpose of each valve so tagged. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 27 .5 Identify all fans, pumps, remote controls and all other equipment as to service j by a black lamacoid engraved nameplate with white core, firmly affixed with screws to each unit. Submit sample plate and lettering for Consultant's approval. All apparatus, including electrical motors, shall have a proper nameplate affixed thereto, showing the size, name of equipment, service, serial number, and all information usually provided which shall include voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and the name of the manufacturer and his address. All stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates shall be perfectly legible to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Nameplates shall not be painted over, and where apparatus is to be insulated, nameplates shall be firmly attached with rigid insulation back-up, of equal thickness of that of jacket. 3.20 PAINTING .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise after all equipment is installed and piping completed, thoroughly clean off rust and oil on all exposed iron and steel work of every description, including hangers, pipe, conduits, panels, etc., installed in mechanical equipment rooms, fan room, corridors, tunnels, etc., and then paint same with one coat of chrome oxide phenolic base primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. This shall apply regardless of whether the material comes on the job painted or not. Unless specifically noted otherwise, equipment which is specified with factory finish will not be painted. Where galvanized items are exposed in areas mentioned above, said items shall be coated with a galvanized primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. Where steam and return pipe and fittings are not insulated, these hot surfaces shall have primer and type of paint as recommended by paint manufacturer. .2 All new exposed insulation and covering shall be painted with two coats of 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. .3 After piping, etc. has been painted, paint on all pipes neatly stencilled letters about 25mm high designating the pipe service and arrows showing direction of flow. The wording shall be as later directed by the Consultant. The stencilling shall occur at approximately 3m intervals and where pipes pass through walls, pipe shall be stencilled on both sides of the wall. All exposed pipes and pipes in pipe spaces near access doors shall be identified in this manner. .4 Approved colour coding with plastic bands may be used in lieu of stencilling described above. I� PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 28 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.21 TESTING AND BALANCING 1 All water piping shall be tested to a pressure of at least 1000kPa (335 ft). .2 Piping connected to the fan-coil and chilled water system shall be tested at 2500kPa (840ft.). .3 All drains shall be tested for tightness and grade as required by the Ontario Water Resources Commission Act respecting Plumbing revised to date, and local authorities. .4 Make tests before application of pipe covering and before pipes are concealed t behind furring. .5 Make any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work or at its completion. Provide all necessary labour and equipment for such tests. Such tests shall be carried out solely for the purposes of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .6 All tests must last at least 2 hours and if leaks develop, these must be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner and the local authorities. .7 Caulking of threaded joints shall not be permitted, faulty piping shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings. .8 Notify the local Plumbing Inspector of all tests and conduct same to their satisfaction and in the presence of their representatives. .9 Provide all labour and equipment for tests and conduct same. Repeat tests until system is shown to be leak-tight and in proper working condition, all to the satisfaction of all Inspectors having authority. .10 All piping shall be completely flushed out. After the cleanout period, the systems shall be drained, each strainer cleaned out and the systems refilled. Boiling out of systems shall be carried out as specified elsewhere. .11 All high pressure steam piping shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of all jurisdictional authorities including local or Provincial authorities. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 29 .12 All necessary adjustments to the automatic temperature control systems shall be made and the controls left in first class operating condition. .13 Supply lubricating oils, packing, etc., for proper operation of the systems. The final tests and acceptance will not be made until the work is finally completed. .14 After the job is completed, keep one skilled mechanic on the job to operate it for two days and instruct permanent operators of the plant in the method of operation, one day during the heating season and one day during the cooling season. Refer to further testing as outlined under further divisions of these specifications. 3.22 AIR BALANCING .1 The air balancing must be carried out by a firm specializing in such work. The firm shall be an independent testing company with at least 5 years of proven experience in the balancing of air systems and shall have completed not less than 5 jobs of comparable size and complexity. .2 Air systems shall be balanced with clean filters in place and so that the fans operate at as low a static pressure as possible. i .3 Static pressure dampers shall be installed where static pressure must be reduced for control of either pressure or noise. .4 Fan speeds and dampers shall be adjusted until air quantities within 5% of those shown on drawings for each outlet, minimum noise level and minimum static at fan are obtained. .5 Adjust each outlet by anemometer, velometer, pitot tube, or anemotherm readings to provide proper air quantities. Adjust each supply outlet to provide proper throw and distribution in accordance with space and occupancy requirements. .6 Upon completion of the air balance and submittal of the air balance report, provide, if called for, a spot check on the system with the Consultant's representative. If actual air quantities do not agree with the air balancing report data, completely rebalance the system until satisfactory to the Consultant. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 30 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .7 Fumish all necessary equipment including gauges, pitot tubes, anemometers, velometers, etc., required for the testing and air balance, of quality and capacity to ensure proper accuracy. The Consultant may require proof of calibration of instruments. .8 Upon completion of the balancing, supply the Consultant with three complete sets of final balancing report showing actual air quantities at each outlet. .9 The report shall include the following information: .1 Diffusers, grilles, registers, floor outlets: System, room no., outlet designation and required air volume as per drawings, test air volume, test air velocity. .2 Air supply systems: Provide design and test information including fan number, fan make, total fan air volume, minimum outside air volume, return air volume, total pressure, total static pressure, suction static pressure, discharge static pressure, fan r.p.m., motor make, size, motor nameplate information, rated amperage, actual amperage. .3 Exhaust systems: Provide information including fan number, size and model, motor size, motor nameplate information, rated amperage, actual amperage, fan r.p.m., total pressure, static pressure, suction static pressure, air volume. 3.23 WATER BALANCING .1 Completely balance all water and control systems to conform to specified quantities and to the intent of the design of the mechanical system. .2 Water balancing of all hydronic heating systems and chilled water systems shall be carried out by a balancing company with minimum 5 years experience in projects of this size and complexity. .3 Water balancing shall be initiated by checking each pump NHP, suction and discharge pressures, and where possible, pressure drop across rated equipment, eg. heat exchangers and coils, etc. water distribution shall be checked and adjusted to all equipment by means of measuring air and off conditions at coils and for water temperature change entering and leaving coils. .4 Water systems shall be balanced with clean strainers in place for all pumps. J DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 31 I .5 Control balances shall be initiated by checking and recording the operating 1 sensibility of all controls under all operating conditions. 6 After all systems have been balanced satisfactorily, mark final positions of valves. Submit a report in triplicate containing the following: .1 Suction and discharge pressure and temperature readings and water flow for each pump in the system. .2 Pump curves for each pump showing plotted design and field conditions. .3 Water on and off temperatures at each major piece of equipment such as heating coils, heat exchangers, etc. .4 Rated and actual motor current at full load conditions, voltage and manufacture of every motor. .5 Circuit setter flow rates. 3.24 STANDARD SHEETS .1 The following detail drawings attached herein shall form a part of the Contract Documents: S-114 Piping Legend S-115 Plumbing Legend S-116 Ventilation Legend S-117 Heating Legend End of Section i 1 1 1 r t i 1 1 1 i r r r r i . PIPING LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION — COLD WATER (CW) —— — HOT WATER (HW) HOT WATER RECIRC. (HW RECIRC.) SANITARY DRAIN (BURIED) SAN[TATY DRAIN (HUNG) STORM DRAIN (BURIED) ...... STORM DRAIN (HUNG) J'C15&ING HUNG SANITARY DRAIN ! E j = EXISTING BURIED SANITARY DRAIN EXISTING HUNG STORM DRAIN EXISTING BURIED STORM DRAIN I --- ---- VENT LINE FIRE LINE G GAS LINE SP SPRINKLER MAIN (WET) DSP — _ SPRINKLER MAIN (DRY) .j � OXY— OXYGEN j VAC VACUUM -NO— NITROUS OXIDE MCA MEDICAL COMPRESSOR AIR N NITROGEN -F SP FIRE STAND PIPE LD LAB DRAINAGE PIPING -HWS HEATED WATER SUPPLY - HWR HEATED WATER RETURN — CHS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY — CHR CHILLED WATER RETURN CWS CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY — CWR CONDENSER WATER RETURN S7 STEAM SUPPLY co CONDENSATE A COMPRESSED AIR RCS REHEAT COIL SUPPLY RCR REHEAT COIL RETURN DATE: AUG/1991 ORAWINO NO. LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, I� SCALE: N.T.S. CUPLINKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMITED. S- 114 DRAWN BY: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO PLUMBING LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SUPERVISED PRV ------ � CAPPED BUTTERFLY VALVE �I CLEANOUT Sy 0 SUPERVISED BUTTERFLY VALVE G�� CLEANOUT IN FLOOR ABOVE ® CHECK VALVE WITH BALLDRIP --0o--7 VALVE AND CAP ® ALARM CHECK VALVE—WET SYSTEM i� FLOOR DRAIN O ALARM CHECK VALVE—DRY SYSTEM PARKING GARAGE GRAIN BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTER D4 GATE VALE • PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD pd VALVE O UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD cm GLOBE VALVE wl ® CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD ® CHECK VALVE O RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD ® BALANCING VALVE SIDEWALL SPINKLER HEAD 'z' VALVE AND ACCESS PANEL p i TE pq .3—PORT AUTOMATIC MIXING VALVE � WW 2—PORT CONTROL VALVE 'I DROP (PLUMBING) PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE DROP (DRAINAGE) PRESSURE DIFFMIMTIAL VALVE ^i I ROOF HOPPER ABOVE STRAINER � RH® ROOF HOPPER T PRESSURE GAUGE I _ TRAP / RUNNING TRAP THERMOMETER t --ii CLEANOUT SAFETY RELIEF VALVE —®— PUMP . SPRINKLER FLOW SWATCH _ +FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER i SUPPRRVISED VALVE FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET A PRESSURE SWITCH SIAMESE CONNECTION cl PRE—ACTION VALVE —j(HB HOSE BIBB MEDICAL GAS OUTLET NFHB NON FREEZE HOSE BIBB D EXIST. MEDICAL GAS OUTLET C8® CATCH BASIN PRESSURE GAUGE WITH COCK FD Q FLOOR DRAIN EMH O EXIST. MANHOLE RVIL RAIN WATER LEADER MH MANHOLE DATE AUG/1991 DRAWING NO. { LEIPCICER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, °LTS CUPUNKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMITED. 5-115 j DRAWN BY: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO � I VENTILATION LEGEND I SYMBOL LIGHT TROFFER SUPPLY OR RETURN !. FIRE DAMPER i, V.A.V. BOX OR REHEAT COIL �UN-3 uNlr HEATER "® MOTORIZED DAMPER (PLAN) MOTORIZED DAMPER (SECTION) FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ACCESS DOOR BLANKED-OF SECTION OF DIFFUSER SUPPLY AIR � RETURN AIR OUTSIDE AIR EXHAUST AIR I I DUCT TURNED UP DUCT TURNED DOWN j BALANCING DAMPER _y BALANCING DAMPER SUPPLY 200 CFM 10� 10 x 6 GRXJE 100 EXHAUST 100 CFM a 8x4fRULE _ SUPPLY 400 CFY NECK SIZE i ARROW DENOTES DUCT TO RISE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW 1/2- OR t' INTERIOR ACOUSTIC INSULATION - AS SPECIFIED x MARINE LIGHTS OR MANUAL LOUVRE DAMPER ? a r SAIL SWITCH IN DUCTWORK 12x12 SQUARE DIFFUSER IN 24x24 MODULE Q. 12x12 SQUARE DIFFUSER 24X24 SQUARE DIFFUSER L3 21x24 ROUND DIFFUSER OATS AUG/7991 DRAWING NQ LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, SCALE. " r' CUPLINKAS do ASSOCIATES UM17ED. S-116 DRAM Br: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO 1 f i 1 t 1 1 1 1 f i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 �r HEATING LEGEND rSYMBOL ( DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 0 PIPE DOWN t=4 MOTORIZ0 BUTTERFLY VALVE 1 is PIPE UP AO ANNUSAR FLOW SENSOR ->' PIPE ANCHOR STARTER –�— DIRECTION OF FLOW — EXPANSION JOINT SLOPE PIPE DOWN PIPE GUIDE GATE VALVE CONTROL VALVE CC VALVE 1♦ FIN GLOBE VALVE 1 pb SOLENOID VALVE 2 PORT CONTROL VALVE 43 3 PORT CONTROL VALVE l PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE ® CHECK VALVE r ® BALANCING VALVE s PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE r 4` SAFETY RELIEF VALVE �I AUTOMATIC AIR VENT STRAINER _{I UNION PRESSURE GAUGE . I THERMOMETER I N❑ HUMIOISTAT rTO THERMOSTAT FLOTREX VALVE I� CO DETECTOR –� PUMP • I WAY MOTORIZED BU BUTTERFLY VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE C/W GAUGE COCKS LacxswELO 6ALANpNC GLOBE VALVE WAY MOTORIZED BU i BUTTERFLY VALVE DATE: DRAWING NO. LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITEUMAN, SCALE-' CUPUNKAS & ASSOCIATES UMITED. S-117 i DRAW Or CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO I! I . 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS PAGE i i PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 SPRING HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1 ISOLATION BASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 J� I� 1 r t r r i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide sound and vibration isolation for all equipment as required to maintain acceptable noise (NC) levels in the occupied areas of the building. .2 Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of equipment to be isolated. These drawings to show belt centres, operating weights and motor positions. .3 Obtain all other applicable mechanical, structural and architectural drawings required to complete the vibration and sound control installation drawings. .4 Supply all silencers as shown on silencer schedule in specifications or listed on 1 the drawings. .5 All fans and pumps shall be vibration isolated. .6 All vibration isolation, duct silencers and acoustic plenums shall be supplied by a single manufacturer, who will take on complete responsibility for the entire project. I .7 Vibron Limited has been used as a base for this Specification. Acceptable { alternate manufacturers are Amber/Booth Co., Vibro-Acoustics Ltd., Korfund Sampson Ltd. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS I .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit shop drawings for the following: .1 Isolation Bases .2 Vibration Isolators ,11 r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 r PAGE 2 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS .3 Spring Hangers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS .1 All springs shall be completely stable, colour coded and selected to operate at no greater than two-thirds solid load. .2 All spring isolators shall be complete with levelling devices, 6mm thick ribbed neoprene sound pads and zinc plated hardware. For applications subject to outdoor or high humidity conditions, the housings shall have a two-coat system of rust resisting paint and the springs shall have two coats of neoprene unless otherwise specified. .3 Type CM closed spring mounts shall be complete with top and bottom ' housings separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. .4 Type FS open spring mounts shall have extra stable iso-stiff springs with a minimum horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. 5 Type CSR open controlled mounts shall have heavy rigid steel base frame, , built in limit stops and removable spacer plates. Springs shall be iso-stiff with a minimum horizontal to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. .6 Type MD elastomer rubber mount shall have threaded insert and hold down bolt holes. .7 Type R waffle pads shall be 30 durometer natural rubber (14MPa tensile), a minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an optimum loading of 42kPa. When pads are built into spring isolators or hangers, 50 durometer (21MPa tensile) pads are acceptable with an optimum loading of 630kPa. .8 Type N waffle pads shall be 50 durometer neoprene (12500kPa tensile), minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an operating load of 630kPa. .9 Type RSR rubber-steel-rubber pads shall consist of two layers of 12mm thick type R pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with an isolation washer. i _ t DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS PAGE 3 I .10 Type NSN neoprene-steel-neoprene pads shall consist of two layers of 12mm thick type N pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with isolation washer. .11 Type KIP Kinetic precompressed moulded fibreglass pads shall be coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Glass fibres, produced by the multiple flame attenuation process, shall have a diameter not exceeding 0.0046mm. I E .12 Pads shall be capable of sustaining 300 per cent overload without damage, permanent set, collapse or permanent loss in natural frequency. 2.2 SPRING HANGERS .1 Type SH shall have fabricated steel housing with one coat of anti-rust paint, and be complete with a colour coded stable spring, retaining cups and acoustic washer. .2 Type SHR shall be as for type SH above but shall have a 25mm elastomeric element in lieu of acoustic washer. i, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION BASES .1 'T' shaped concrete inertia pump bases shall be used only where shown on the drawings and shall be of sizes shown. .2 Type S integral steel fan and motor bases, complete with adjustable motor slide rails welded in place, shall have minimum vertical sections of 75, 100, 150, 200 and 250mm for motor horsepowers up to and including 2.2, 5.6, 15, 37.3kW, and larger than 37.3kW respectively. .3 Type SS slung steel base shall be of structural members with gusset plates welded to ends. .4 Type C reinforced concrete inertia bases shall have full depth perimeter structural channel frames with flanges pointed into the centre of the base. These are provided under Division 3. .5 For spring mounted units the load shall be carried by gusseted brackets forming an integral part of the channel frame. r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 4 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS .6 Unless otherwise specked, isolation materials shall be installed on 100mm concrete sub-bases, which extend at least over the full base and isolator area , of the isolated equipment. Concrete work will be provided under Division 3. .7 All steel bases and inertia bases shall clear the sub-bases by at least 25mm , and 50mm respectively. All bases shall be blocked and shimmed level, so that all ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system, at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS .1 All piping over 50mm diameter connected to spring isolated equipment shall be ' supported with minimum 25mm static deflection spring mounts or hangers as follows: Up to 25mm diameter - first 3 points of support 125 to 200mm diameter - first 4 points of support 250mm dia and over - first 6 points of support ' .2 The first point of support shall have a static deflection of twice the deflection of the isolated equipment, but not more than 50mm. .3 Any piping supported from the mechanical penthouse floor shall be isolated on type CM or SL mounts with the deflection being equal to that of the isolated equipment. End of Section ' r 1 r r r i1 rDIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 rSECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE I � PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 r 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 { 1.4 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 rPART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 r 3.2 HOT FLUID PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.3 HOT EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 COLD WATER PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ' 3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.6 PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.7 DUCTWORK AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.8 BREECHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 r 3.9 RECOVERING AND FINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 it it it ar r i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 i SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PAGE 1 I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE I � .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment required for installation of Thermal Insulation as shown, as specified and as otherwise required, in a satisfactory manner, for all Sections of Division 15. .2 Pipe covering, equipment and duct insulation shall be provided by a recognized specialist insulation applicator with an established reputation for this type of work. a .3 Product type designations of Fiberglas Canada Ltd., for insulation materials, { Flintkote and Childers for coatings, sealers and adhesives, are used in Specification and on Drawings to indicate physical properties and quality standards not otherwise described. Equivalent products of the following ' manufacturers are acceptable: ' .1 Insulation Materials I Fiberglas Canada Limited Manville Canada Ltd. Holmes Insulations Limited .2 Coatings, Sealers and Adhesives {' Foster Division, Amchem Products Inc. Minnesota Mining and Mfg. of Canada Ltd. Paisley Adhesives Ltd. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 2 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION 1.3 MATERIALS LIST , .1 Where applicator proposes to use materials other than those specified as acceptable, he shall submit a complete list of such materials, indicating thickness of material for each individual service. .2 Do not purchase materials so submitted until approval in writing has been , received. 1.4 STANDARDS , .1 The type, manufacture and application of pipe covering materials including application of sealer coat, shall be in strict accordance with requirements and final approval of local and Provincial authorities having jurisdiction. .2 All materials shall be asbestos free. , PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Pipe Insulation: Fibreglas one-piece or sectional insulation with All Service Jacket, 88 kg per cubic metre density. ' .2 Duct and Equipment Insulation: Fiberglas AF-545 with Reinforced Foil and Flame Retardant Kraft Facing (RFFRK), 72kg per cubic metre density. .3 Vapour Barrier Lag Adhesive: Flintstik 230-04 or Childers CP-82. .4 Insulation Lagging Adhesive: Flintkote 120-09 or Childers CP-50. .5 Glass Fabric Reinforcing: Flintkote Yellowjacket or Childers Chilglas. .6 Canvas Cloth: 200g per sq m. .7 PVC Jacketing and Fitted Pipefitting Covers: Manville Zeston, 25150 rated. ' 8 Aluminium Jacketing: .41 mm thick aluminium jacket with 13mm wide bands of ' same thickness. I� DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PAGE 3 i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP ' .1 Ensure the pipe fittings and equipment are dry and dean before applying covering. .2 Do not apply insulation until the item to be covered has been tested. .3 Apply covering in a neat workmanlike manner so that finished job is of uniform diameter and smooth in finish. Locate longitudinal seams so as to be invisible. .4 Mitre insulation at pipe elbows 25mm size and smaller and wrap joint with Mac-Tac tape. Use PVC Pipefitting Covers or cover joint with canvas pasted on and extending one covering diameter each side of joint throat. ' .5 Neatly cover flanges at fittings, strainers, expansion joints, valves and equipment, 75mm size and over, using "box" type flange insulation. .6 Treat insulation and finishes so that maximum flame spread does not exceed a rating of 25 or as directed by local bylaws or requirements. Smoke developed classification shall not exceed 50 where required by applicable Codes. .7 To maintain the integrity of fire ratings and to control transmission of noise tightly pack annular space between sleeve and pipe covering where insulated pipes pass through sleeved openings in walls or floors, for full length of sleeve, with approved fireproof insulating packing and finish flush at each end with caulking compound, aluminum colour, as manufactured by: I ' .1 The Tremco Manufacturing Co. - Last-Meric .2 Canadian Hanson & VanWinkle Co. Ltd. - Poly-Tite Joint .3 Foster Div., Amchem Products Inc. - Elastoler Sealant - 95-44 .8 Pipes covered with insulation having a vapour barrier jacket shall pass through ' walls or floors with continuous covering. Protect exposed pipe insulation at floor line with an 18 gauge galvanized iron jacket approximately 100mm high, secured to floor slab in an approved manner. ' .9 A steel insulation shield shall be placed between the hanger and the insulated pipe by pipe installer. I - PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 4 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION .10 At pipe support points with steel insulation shields use insulation with higher ' crushing strength to ensure that integrity and continuity of insulation and vapour barrier are maintained. .11 Make good in an approved manner existing coverings damaged or cut back ' due to installation of new work, using same materials as specified for new work. 3.2 HOT FLUID PIPING .1 Cover domestic hot water piping, domestic tempered water piping, domestic ' water recirculation piping, hot water heating system piping, steam piping, condensate return piping, with one piece fibreglass insulation with factory applied fire resistive all service jacket. Covering shall be 25mm thick for pipes smaller than 60mm and 40mm thick for larger pipes. .2 Cover fittings, valves, flanges and strainers with insulating cement of a , thickness equal to that of the adjacent insulation, regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. 3.3 HOT EQUIPMENT .1 Cover domestic domestic hot water storage tanks, heat exchangers with 40mm ' insulation wired on. Recover with 12mm thickness of insulating cement, reinforced with 25mm hexagonal wire mesh. The final finish shall consist of canvas jacket adhered with lagging adhesive and brushed with one coat of , lagging adhesive. 3.4 COLD WATER PIPING .1 Cover domestic cold water piping, soil and waste piping, rainwater piping, (including roof hoppers and fittings), with 25mm thick insulation. Insulation thickness may be reduced to 12mm for piping 50mm size and under. , .2 Annaflex insulation may be used for this service. .3 Vertical runs of soil, waste and rainwater piping may be left uninsulated where installed in airtight pipeshafts without ducts, but only if not subject to freezing (not close to outside walls) and not subject to sweating due to free air motion. , r DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PAGE 5 .4 Cover fittings and valves with a layer of glass fibre insulation with vapour barrier. Recover with insulating cement to insulation on adjacent piping and canvas neatly pasted on with adhesive regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. 3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING .1 Liquid refrigerant lines outside the building (from the inside of the building to ! the condensing unit) and the entire length of the refrigerant suction lines inside the building and outside the building, shall be insulated with 19mm thick Arrnaflex foamed plastic insulation as manufactured by Armstrong. 3.6 PUMPS .1 Enclose chilled water pumps with sheet metal boxes made so that packing gland is accessible for service from outside. Line box on inside with 50mm thick 72 kg per cu m density glass fibre rigid board. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or copper of suitable thickness and construction. ' .2 Apply insulation to interior surface of box with mechanical pins and speed washers. Seal joints and edges with adhesive and reinforce with glass cloth membrane. 3.7 DUCTWORK AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT .1 Externally insulate: .1 fresh air plenums .2 fresh air ducts .3 relief air plenums .4 exhaust air plenums ' .5 exhaust ducts min. 1.5m back from outdoor connection .6 blank-offs behind unused sections of louvres ' .7 air supply ductwork located in the fan rooms .8 air supply ducts in ceilings of non-airoonditioned spaces i :1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 6 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION .9 all air supply ducts .2 Do not apply insulation to casings, ducts or plenums which have been lined with acoustic insulation, unless indicated otherwise. External insulation shall ' extend 300mm over internal acoustic lining. .3 Ensure that sheet metal surfaces on which insulation is to be applied is free ' from moisture, dirt, and rust, before applying insulation. .4 Cover plenums, casings, and ductwork which are to be thermally insulated with 25mm thick rigid preformed flexible foil faced duct insulation with factory ' applied fire retardant vapour barrier, or field applied Kraft laminate attached with adhesive. .5 Insulate circular ductwork with vapour seal 25mm flexible reinforced foil faced duct insulation. .6 Insulate ductwork exposed to outdoors to provide an R value of not less than ' 1.25 RSI. .7 After insulation is applied, seal holes, comers and joints the same day with ' 75mm wide Mac-Tac scrim foil tape. .8 Cover angles or standing seams on the outside of plenums, casings and ducts, , which extend beyond face of applied rigid insulation with a 12mm layer of flexible fire resistant fibreglass, 16 kg per cu m density, with facing. Extend this ' insulation 75mm on each side of the angle and place tight around the projecting leg of the angle. Apply rigid insulation, overlapping edge of flexible fiberglass on angle, so that vertical part of insulated angle projects through work. Vapour seal joints with an approved sealer. .9 Secure insulation to flat sheet metal surfaces by means of welded pins or ' perforated base metal fasteners and speed washers. Locate on not more than 500mm centres throughout the sheet metal surface with a minimum of two rows per duct side, and adhere with fire resistant cement. Place insulation on the metal spikes, attach speed washers on spikes and cut off the excess spike , flush with washer. .10 Secure insulation to circular ducts with adhesive applied in strips 100mm wide ' at approximately 300mm centres. Seal joints and holes as previously specified. 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PAGE 7 I� I� 3.8 BREECHING .1 Cover new boiler breeching from the flue gas outlet of each boiler to the main I' existing trunk breeching with 75mm thick fiberglass metal mesh blanket. Recover with 12mm thickness of insulating cement reinforced with 25mm hexagonal wire mesh. The final finish shall consist of canvas jacket adhered iwith lagging adhesive and brushed with one coat of lagging adhesive. .2 Where breeching connections are made at flanged sections, fill the resultant void between the blankets with insulating cement to avoid cracking. .3 Insulation shall be installed to allow for expansion of the breeching. Recover insulation with canvas neatly pasted on. 3.9 RECOVERING AND FINISHING i' .1 Recover exposed pipe insulation in finished rooms, fan rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, duct and pipe shafts where access is available, pipe spaces, penthouses, with canvas jacket neatly applied. Recover with PVC jacket over ! ' insulation. .2 Finish externally insulated ducts in fan rooms, penthouses, duct shafts where i' access is available and equipment rooms, with canvas and lap adhesive after joints and holes have been sealed with 75mm wide Mac-Tac scrim foil tape. j' .3 Cement recovering laps with lapping adhesive. After canvas has been applied, j give the entire surface a heavy brush coat of the same adhesive applied undiluted. .4 Canvas for recovering shall be as previously specified with close weave and smooth finish. Submit sample of canvas for approval before installation. r .5 For recovering and finishing of exposed pipe insulation PVC Jacketing may be used instead of canvas. Apply Jacketing and Pipefitting Covers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1' i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 8 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION .6 Securely fasten a layer of 25mm hexagonal wire mesh over externally insulated exposed fresh air intakes, exhausts, return and supply plenums, (excluding those formed by masonry walls or those acoustically lined), sheet metal blank-offs, and units and casings which are susceptible to damage (i.e. ' mounted at floor level). Securely apply a comer bead on comers. Apply a 12mm coat of insulating cement in two 6mm layers. Temper final coat with Portland cement. Recover finish coat with canvas as previously described. ' .7 Cover insulated circular ducts in exposed locations with backing paper prior to applying canvas. .8 Hot and cold water piping in the kitchen area and the sterilizer areas where above the floor and exposed in finished areas, shall be covered with Johns-Manville Metal-on jacket insulation. ' .9 Insulation exposed to outdoors shall be finished not with canvas, but a layer of 880 kg per cu m roofing felt, lapped at all joints, sealed with lap cement and ' held in place with metal bands on not more than 300mm centres. End of Section ' rDIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS PAGE i I ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . 1 �r 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.5 SPARE SPRINKLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PART3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 f' 3.2 RISERS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 I 3.3 STANDARD SHEETS . . • • 6 it I �r 1 �r �r it Ir �r _ DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 All work under this Section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. .2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Sprinkler Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or I' modified by the Contract Documents. I 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND SCOPE .1 These specifications for the Fire Protection Systems are 'Performance" specifications and are intended to establish design criteria and basic guidelines for the work. This contractor shall assume full responsibility for the layout and details of all fire protection work to meet the requirements of local governing Codes or regulations; and to the approval of The Ontario Fire Marshall. The j basic location and routing criteria for mains, cross mains, and branch line ' piping shall be as shown and noted on the drawings. Design based on schedules system Hydraulic designed systems are acceptable. ' .2 As minimum requirements, all fire protection work shall comply with the applicable provisions for the National Fire Codes published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the local Fire Department and NFPA 13 Requirements. ' .3 The scope of work shall include all labour, materials, equipment and accessories necessary for the complete fire protection systems including, but not limited to the following major items: .1 Sprinkler contract starts at flanged connection where indicated on drawings. .2 Sprinkler riser and accessories at the general location indicated on the 1' drawings, including alarm checks, excess pressure pump, water motor gong, electric bell and accessories. .3 Siamese fire department connection as indicated on the Drawings. National Fire Equipment flush mounted siamese connection Model 229 all chromeplated "Auto Sprinkler". 1' I, i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 i PAGE 2 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS , .4 In general, sprinkler coverage shall include separate zones for pool area, community hall, foyer, library and basement area. .5 Preparation of detailed shop drawings and hydraulic calculations for the ' fire protection sytems to meet the approval of local authorities having jurisdiction on this project, IAO and Factory Mutual and as required by the Engineer. ' .6 Payment of all costs relating to fees, permits, inspections, tests, and plan reviews for the fire protection work and systems. ' .7 All signs and labels required by the insurance rating agency and/or local authorities. .8 Hangers and supports, drains, test connections, sleeves, escutcheons, spare sprinkler heads with cabinet, and other necessary appurtenances. .9 Perform all testing and submit completed contractor's test certificate for each sprinkler system. .10 Provide backfiow preventors at all sprinkler zone valves and ' fire/sprinkler line connections in sprinkler room. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Prepare a set of construction shop drawings, immediately after the award of ' the contract, showing the complete system and have same approved by local authorities, Factory Mutual, insurance rating organization, and as required by codes and regulations. After the above approvals have been obtained, the ' contractor shall submit the drawings to the Consultant and Engineer for approval. Materials shall not be ordered nor shall any work be installed until ALL the approvals have been obtained. .2 To avoid interference and clear all obstructions, any piping layouts shall be coordinated in the field with contractors of other trades, prior to the submission ' of shop drawings for approval at no additional cost. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 I, SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS PAGE 3 I, ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS ' .1 Black steel Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A120 or ASTM A53. Schedule 30 pipe may be used in sizes 8" and larger. Light wall pipe with roll groove for ' mechanical couplings may be used for all piping where permitted by Codes and authorities. .2 Fittings shall be cast iron, malleable iron or steel welding type. Screwed unions ' and couplings shall be used on piping 50mm and smaller. Screwed couplings, flanges, or welding shall be used to joint piping 65mm and larger, except where mechanical couplings are allowed as specified herein. ! .3 Mechanical couplings and fittings such as manufactured by Victaulic which are ULC listed for fire protection service and meeting with the approval of the insurance underwriting agency and governing Codes may be used to join above ground piping. i, 2.2 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES I .1 All valves shall be ULC listed for fire protection service. ' .2 All gate and check valves shall be rated for 175 psig non-shock cold water pressure. .3 Valves shall be as manufactured by Jenkins, Crane, Newman-Hender, Grinnell, Keystone, Victaulic. .4 Except as otherwise specified, all gate valves shall be OS&Y U-42 (two way) type and shall be electrically supervised. .5 Butterfly valves may be used in place of gate valves where approved by authorities. 2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .1 This contractor shall provide hydraulically calculated wet sprinkler systems I, designed to deliver the minimum densitities over the hydraulically most remote design areas as specified below. .2 System shall be installed in accordance with "Ordinary Hazard Occupancy" for j ground floor and "Light Hazard" for office areas, using automatic spray heads. Include necessary "accelerators", drum drips to maintain maximum clearance (' below sprinklers. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 4 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS , 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS ' .1 Sprinkler heads shall be ULC listed and shall be of the type and temperature rating as required. ' .2 Ceiling sprinklers in ground floor foyer, library, community hall, conference room, lobby and public corridors shall be fully recessed concealed type , Grinnell "Clean Line". Paint escutcheon plate to match ceiling. .3 Sprinklers in other areas with finished ceilings shall be semi-recessed , chromeplated pendant type equipped with chrome escutcheon plates. .4 Sprinkler in exposed areas shall be upright type with chrome finish. .5 All sprinkler heads shall be equal to Grinnell "Dura Speed" series. .6 Unless otherwise noted, fusible links for sprinkler heads shall be Ordinary , Temperature rated. Locations and clearances for sprinkler heads near hot equipment or piping, etc., shall comply with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 2.5 SPARE SPRINKLERS , .1 Provide not less than the minimum number of spare sprinkler heads, for each ' type and rating used on the job, in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. .2 Provide metal cabinet or cabinets for storage of spare sprinklers. Cabinets ' shall be provided, hinged door and latch and shall be finished with red enamel paint. Provide engraved plastic sign on each cabinet front to read: SPARE SPRINKLERS. Provide a sprinkler wrench in each cabinet. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION , .1 The entire installation shall apply with NFPA 13 as minimum requirements. ' .2 Coordinate the installation of all fire protection systems with the work of all other trades. Provide all necessary offsets in piping to avoid interference with other equipment and systems and provide additional sprinkler heads due to ' offsets and/or interference as required to achieve design coverage at no additional cost. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 ' SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS PAGE 5 ' .3 All horizontal piping shall be installed as high above finished floor as possible with due allowance for clearances for sprinklers as required by NFPA 13. Refer to notes on the drawings for additional requirements, if any, regarding ' clear heights for piping. .4 Provide drain valves and piping as required to permit all sprinkler piping to be completely drained. Provide inspector's test connections in accordance with NFPA 13 and as required by governing Codes and the insurance underwriting agency. .5 All drains and test connections shall be discharged into the building drainage system through an approved indirect waste connection or shall be piped to discharge to the building exterior. The contractor shall provide precast concrete splash blocks at all drains and test connections discharging to the building exterior at unpaved points. .6 All piping shall be concealed in finished rooms and areas. Drains and/or test connections shall not be terminated exposed in finished rooms, areas or toilet rooms. .7 All piping through interior walls and partitions shall be sleeved and closed off with escutcheons where visible. Penetrations through fire rated walls shall be sleeved, packed, and grouted as required to maintain the fire rating of the wall. Piping through floors and exterior walls, including foundation walls, shall be sleeved, packed and grouted with non-shrinking cement as required to make watertight. 3.2 RISERS AND ALARMS t .1 Flanged connections shall be used at the base of all risers. Steel pipe shall not be extended into the ground at the base of risers. Provided cast iron flange ' and spigot piece at the floor penetration for connection to the steel pipe riser. .2 Risers penetrating floors shall be sleeved, packed with oakum, and made ' watertight and non-shrinking grout. .3 Each riser shall be equipped with an alarm clock valve assembly, water motor alarm, drains, gauges, and related piping, valves and accessories. Water motor alarm gong shall be mounted on the exterior face of the building wall near the riser. Pressure gauges, complying with NFPA 13 complete with stop cock and draining provisions shall be provided on the supply and discharge side of each alarm check valve. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 6 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS ' .4 Provide automatically operated excess pressure pump at alarm check valves , and pressure gauge on pump outlet. .5 Provide a pressure flow switch on the discharge side of each alarm check , valve. Flow switches mounted in horizontal piping shall be mounted on the top side of the pipe. Waterflow switches shall be mounted at least 2 feet from elbows or tees and at least 10 pipe diameters from control valves. .6 Provide where indicated on the drawings a siamese fire department connection with two - 100mm hose connections, caps and chains. Hose threads to meet local Fire Department requirements. Fire Department connection shall have ' check valve and automatic drip piped to drain. 3.3 STANDARD SHEETS Standard Sheet S-420 Works Department ' Regional Municipality of Durham. End of Section ' 1 FROM LGA PRCHITECTS INC PHDNE NO. 416 535 8623 Pot jj l� 300 All SDO FINISHED FACE DT MALL yp, j/ YN ' MCTA" ,J COUPLN: MAN — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED N.TS I ALL VANES SMALL BE PLACED N AM Wall CD NC tPNOR POSIBDM 3k ' AOM. • • YN. RESWANED JDNT i FB19m FLOOR wCSAUUC iD7RUMC kf i{ , RESSMANEO APIT FI CbATION — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED A.I S I' ... . 3 ASraMD SMALL BE l FOR BAD6LOR PNEMiMYW OEIRMS COMM l MW AMT I®UCE PRESSYIS PMIWP ) N •H• TO 200 A 2. STAIOAROS SHALL BE USED FOR BAOULDR PRE%Vl OEMCOS i' LOCAIM N ABM GROLP0 ROOM Q CHAMBER. 3. IME SAO6LOM YCw¢SMALL BE A/POtiFD N AN APPROVED YAA {. CMAYEMBE RS SMALL BE LIGHTED B. pIAYBFRS SMALL BE ALPi ORr Al ALL lPES By TFAr a SLPi Al AUTOFATKAtlr, DA FETE FEASIBLE. A OAMM In1•E CO NEC1ED TD A STORM SENIOR. M.l pWEM510+$N YLLNCTfAS EPtEPT 1AERE M01ED THE REP AL MPOMPAUTY OF DURHAM Vol DEPARTMENT CHMED AEwS10M MO.� , BACICFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE LAYOUT PATE: ,BOS m FOR CHAMBER OR BUILDING 63 mm TO 200 mm IS-420- I 1 1 i I, DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 !, 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS 1 li 1.4 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 i PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 PLUMBING PIPE AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.3 CLEANOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS . . . 5 2.5 FLOOR AND ROOF DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.6 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.7 DUPLEX SUMP AND SANITARY PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.8 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.9 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK AND HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 !■ 2.10 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC HOT WATER BOILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.12 SIAMESE PUMPER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ' i 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.2 JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.3 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 li 3.4 PIPE HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.5 FLASHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.6 PIPE EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.7 TRAP PRIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ., 3.8 BACKVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.9 AIR CHAMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 i 3.10 DRIPS AND DRAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.11 COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.12 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.13 DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANKS AND HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.15 SPECIAL WATER AND WASTE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.16 NATURAL GAS PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.17 WHIRLPOOL BATH, HOT TUB, SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . 18 3.18 TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.19 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 i ARTICLE NAME PAGE 3.20 STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.21 SOFTENING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.22 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.23 TRAP SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1 d � DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE 1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all labour, materials, plant, tools, transportation, testing and put into proper operation a complete plumbing and drainage system to the full intent of the drawings and/or specifications. .2 In general, the major divisions of the work are as follows: .1 Plumbing fixtures, floor drains, roof hoppers and other plumbing fittings and equipment. .2 Storm and sanitary drainage piping inside the building and to 1.5m outside the building. .3 Domestic hot, cold, and recirculation piping inside the building and to 1.5m outside the building. .4 System of natural gas piping. .5 Service connections to equipment furnished by others. .6 Miscellaneous Plumbing Work as shown on drawings and/or as specified herein. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Underground piping from 1.5m outside the building - under Site Services Outside Plumbing and Drainage by others. .2 Thermal insulation - under Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. ' r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 2 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE 1.4 STANDARDS .1 All work shall conform to the Ontario Water Resources Commission Act, Regulation 471 respecting Plumbing, as revised to date; the National Building Code; the Ontario Building Code; and all regulations of City, Local, Provincial or Territorial Authorities having jurisdiction. In case of confliction of codes with Specifications and Drawings, the most severe requirements shall apply. Where Drawings call for pipe sizes larger than minimum of the codes, Drawings shall be followed. The codes, however, shall not be violated under any circumstances. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Valves .2 Plumbing specialties, including cleanouts, floor drains, roof drains, backwater valves, scupper drains, area drains, trap primers, garbage can wash drain, grease interceptors, etc. ' .3 Storm and sanitary sump pumps .4 Submersible pumps .5 Domestic hot water tanks and heaters .6 Pool fittings and equipment .7 Fire extinguishers , .8 Siamese pumper connection .9 Plumbing fixtures, including water closets, lavatories, sinks, showers, faucets, traps, stops, etc. a ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 { SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS I � 2.1 PLUMBING PIPE AND FITTINGS .1 Buried storm and sanitary drainage piping and fittings shall be plastic SDR 35 type. .2 Joints shall be cast iron, Class 4000 with Mechanical joints, factory treated with "black-dip" as supplied by Anthes Imperial Limited. II ' .3 Buried storm and sanitary drainage piping shall be asbestos cement Transite Type I with Crowle C.I. fittings. .4 Above ground storm and sanitary drainage piping and fittings, including main vent piping, shall be cast iron Class 4000 with mechanical joints, factory coated with raw linseed oil, or type "DWV" hard drawn copper with drainage type cast bronze or wrought copper solder fittings, or aluminum DWV pipe CAN3-B281-M85. j .5 Asbestos cement Transite Type I pipe with Crowle fittings may be used for above ground rainwater piping. .6 Branch vents shall be type "DWV" hard drawn copper with cast bronze or wrought copper solder type fittings or standard weight galvanized steel with standard weight galvanized malleable iron fittings, or aluminum DWV pipe CAN3-8281-M85. Buried vents may be plastic ABS DWV type piping. .7 Domestic water piping installed above the floor, including hot and cold and recirculating piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing with cast bronze or wrought copper solder type fittings. No copper piping shall be in contact with ferrous materials. Unions or flange connections similar to Epco "Di-Electric" pipe fittings shall be used when making such connections. Copper pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the latest issue of C.S.A. Standard Specification. 8 Buried water pipe 100mm 4" size and larger shall be Class 150 Ring-rite PVC or cement lined ductile cast iron water pipe. Buried water pipe less than 1 00m 4" size shall be soft temper copper with no joints below the floor, Type L" .9 Above ground sump and sewage pump discharge piping from pump to gravity drain shall be Type "L" copper. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 i PAGE 4 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE :10 Piping for special systems such as Natural Gas, Swimming Pool, Laboratory Piping, Compressed Air, etc., are specified in other articles of this Specification Section. 2.2 VALVES .1 All valves shall be suitable for 1.5MPa water working pressure and up to and including 60mm 2 1/4" size, shall be all brass. Larger sizes shall have iron bodies and bronze trim. All valves 100mm 4" and larger on main distribution piping shall be O.S. & Y. type with rising stem and shall be flanged. .2 Check valves 50mm 2" size and smaller shall be 15 degree swing type with brass disc, Figure 4092 for screwed ends and Fig. 4093 for soldered ends. Check valves larger than 50mm 2" shall be Jenkins Fig. 587. .3 Valves on branch piping supplying plumbing fixtures from mains and riser shall be globe valves set behind access doors, except for unfinished areas, where they may be exposed. .4 Gate valves on steel pipe up to and including 60mm 2 1/4" size shall be Jenkins Fig. 810 for screwed ends and Type 813 for soldered ends or Crane 430. Globe valves shall be Jenkins 106B or Crane 7. .5 Gate valves on steel pipe 75mm 3" size and over shall be Jenkins 454 or Crane 465. Globe valves shall be Jenkins 142 or Crane 7. .6 Valves on copper pipe up to and including 60mm 2 1/4" size shall be brass solder joint globe valves rising stem and shall be Jenkins 106 BP or Crane 1310. .7 Ball valves size 50mm 2" and less may be used in lieu of globe and gate valves; Jenkins Fig. 33 for screwed ends and Fig. 34 for soldered ends for on-off service. .8 Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of globe and gate valves size 60mm 2 1/4" and over as follows: .1 Size 60mm 2 1/4" to 125mm 5" - Jenkins Fig. 2232EL lug type with with bronze disc and EDPM liner and lever operated. .2 Size 150mm 6" and over, as above with gear operator Jenkins Fig. 2232GG. ' t DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 5 i .9 Outside hose bibbs shall be 20mm 3/4" non-freeze type, Ancon HY725PB or approved equal in Enpoco satin bronze box face, loose key handle, brass wall sleeve, locknut and BFP. In general, all bibbs shall be located approximately 60cm above grade. .10 Inside hose bibbs shall be Crane C-5046, Emco 4710/14 or approved equal, chrome plated 12mm 1/2" or 20mm 3/4" bibb and located in general 1m above floor unless otherwise specified. i .11 Valves shall be Jenkins, Crane, McAvity, Kitz, Red &White or Lunkenheimer - Morrison, Newman/Hattersly. Butterfly valves shall be Jenkins, Keystone, j Victaulic or Grinnell and Newman/Hattersly, Kitz. 2.3 CLEANOUTS .1 Cleanouts shall be Ancon CO200 series or approved equal in Enpoco, to suit floor construction. .2 Cleanout plugs shall be gasketed and fastened with brass hex bolts. .3 Cleanouts in waterproofed areas shall have flashing clamp devices to receive the waterproofing membrane. 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .1 Flexible connectors shall be Flexonics RW 81 or RW-91, all bronze construction, of length as recommended by manufacturer. 2.5 FLOOR AND ROOF DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES 1 Roof hoppers shall be lacquered cast iron body with removable dome galvanized strainer, flashing clamp and gravel stop, deck clamp, etc., equal to Ancon RD-100BEW for conventional roof, RD-100B CDHW1 for IRMA type roof complete with control flow device, or equal in Enpoco. Controlled flow drains have number of weirs indicated on Drawings. .2 Floor drains, unless otherwise noted, shall be Ancon FD200L 5x5 or equal in Enpoco with double drainage feature, lacquered cast iron body and adjustable polished bronze strainer. Strainer to be 150mm 6" diameter. Use 175mm 7" diameter strainer with removable sediment bucket in showers and janitor's mop sinks. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 6 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .3 Floor drains in mechanical equipment rooms, garbage rooms, areas where carts are used or traffic is heavy, shall have adjustable ductile iron tractor grate, Ancon FD340 complete with bucket, or equal in Enpoco. .4 Combination drains (floor and funnel drains) in mechanical rooms and fan rooms shall be Ancon FD200G or equal in Enpoco. In other areas combination drains shall be polished bronze finish. Hub drains in finished area shall be Roto-Tech Smith Series RS-2012-50PB. .5 Scupper drains shall be lacquered cast iron body Roto-Tech Smith 1510 or equal in Enpoco or Zum with brass strainer. .6 Area drains shall have lacquered cast iron body with galvanized dome strainer, Roto-Tech Smith 2140 or equal in Enpoco or Zum. .7 Flushing rim floor drains shall be Roto-Tech Smith 2500 or equal in Zum or Enpoco, lacquered cast iron body with porcelain interior double drainage, flange, nickel bronze strainer, hinged, flashing clamp, flushing connection, P-trap. Include flush valve Crane Presto 571 VB or equal in Watrous and all piping. .8 Backwater valves shall be Ancon BV200 or equal in Enpoco. Where backwater valves are located more than one foot below floor level, include an access pit with steel cover and cover frame set in floor of proper depth and size to permit servicing of the backwater valve and running trap. .9 Where required by plumbing regulations, floor drains, hub drains, funnel drains, etc., shall be trapped and provided with a 10mm 1/8" water connection for trap seal. Install trap primer units, Ancon MS810 or equal in Enpoco. .10 Floor drains in waterproofed areas protected with metal or lead safe, or any waterproofing membrane, shall have flashing ring and clamping device to receive the waterproofing membrane. .11 Garbage can wash drain shall be Roto-Tech Smith 2690. .12 Hub drains shall terminate 25mm 1" above finished floor. Provide welded steel funnel caulked into hub and sized to accommodate all open drains. i .13 Washroom - Floor drains shall be equal to Zum ZN-415B with reversible ■ clamp device, double drainage flange, and adjustable 125mm 5' diameter nickel bronze strainer, secured with vandal-proof screw. �y DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 7 E .14 Mechanical Rooms - AN-415-D Zum cast iron floor drain with 225mm dia. ry body, adjustable-reversible clamp collar, 125mm 5" dia. head and fixed grate to be nickel bronze. .15 Roof Drains - Zum Z-105 ERC controlled flow roof hoppers or equal cast iron roof drain with deck clamp, aluminum dome combination extension frame bearing pan. .16 All floor drains, hub drains, funnel drains, etc., shall be trapped and provided with a 10mm 1/8" water connection for trap seal. Install trap primer units Zum i Z-1022. ' 2.6 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS .1 Solids interceptors shall be recessed type for through-floor mounting with extensions above outlet connections, Roto-Tech Smith RS-8718 or equal in j Zum or Enpoco. 2.7 DUPLEX SUMP AND SANITARY PUMPS .1 Duplex sump pump unit shall consist of vertical electric motor driven pumps, cover plate and controls. Size as shown on the Drawings. Include steel cover v plate bolted down in place and fitted with manhole and cover in front of the pump. .2 Pumps shall be mounted on individual base plates and these shall be bolted to a steel plate of size to suit the frame around the concrete sump. .3 Supply a 75 x 75 x 6mm angle iron frame with concrete anchor bars and trim bar, all welded construction and of suitable size to fit the concrete sump. .4 Install manhole steps equal to Dominion Wheel & Foundry No. DS-576 immediately under the manhole at 300mm 12" centres, first step to be placed 75mm 3" below manhole. r .5 Starters and alternators will be located in the Motor Control Centre and will be supplied under Section. Include all wiring from Motor Control Centre to pumps and controls. .6 Pumps shall be controlled by floats and in addition shall be actuated by an automatic electric transfer switch so that the pumps will start in alternate sequence and also run together under peak flow conditions. r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 8 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .7 Connect discharge of pumps to drain line as shown, placing break union or flange, gate and check valves in the line from each pump and close to same. Keep discharge piping Gear of pumps to assist removal of same. .8 Provide a 110 Volt battery operated high water alarm bell and associated float. Provide special contact in controls for wiring to the Central Control Panel to indicate "running on standby" condition, i.e. warning that one pump only is operative. Also provide extra contact for high water level alarm, to be wired to same panel. Wiring from the Central Control Panel to contacts under Automatic Controls Section. .9 Sanitary pumps shall be high temperature type suitable for operation in 95 degree C water. Lower bearing shall be carbon type. Pumps shall be A.S. Leitch, S.A. Armstrong Heavy Duty or Canada Pumps. .10 Sanitary pumps shall be suitable for handling of raw sewage. 2.8 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS .1 Submersible sump pump units shall consist of a submersible electrical motor driven pump, and controls. Include steel cover plate, and frame for each pump. Each pump shall have discharge pipe connecting to the drains with break flange and gate and check valves in horizontal portion of the line from pump, adjacent to the pump. .2 Pumps shall be Bames or Myers with all electrical controls and accessories to make a completely automatic system. Size and type are indicated on drawings. .3 Include manual starter with pilot light. Include all wiring from starter to level control and to motor. .4 Pumps in condensation pump pits shall be suitable for operation in 100 degree C water. r qi DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 9 2.9 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK AND HEATER 1 Tank shall be Alco AI-Krete lined steel storage tank, or equal in O'Connor, Armstrong, Patterson-Kelly, or Ferro, in horizontal construction, complete with saddles, diameter by long, capacity constructed to A.S.M.E. Code for 800kPa working pressure conditions. AI-Krete lining to be applied on tank shell to 20mm 3/4" thickness over steel mesh lining. All flanged connections and heater nozzle to be fully AI-Krete lined, and all screwed connections to be Everdur construction. Lining shall be guaranteed in writing to be free of defects for a period of 10 years from date of final acceptance and any defects in the lining and damage to the shell as a result of such defects, shall be repaired or replaced without charge to the Owner. Include valved 30mm drain piped to nearest floor drain. .2 An A.S.M.E. Code rated temperature and pressure relief valve shall be mounted on tank as well as a 12mm 1/2" vacuum breaker. Tank shall be { complete with well for temperature controller and 275 x 375mm manhole. All connections 75mm 3" size and over shall be flanged. .3 A Taylor or Trerice industrial thermometer with removable socket shall be installed on the tank, with angle stem and 225mm face with suitable range. .4 Tank shall be equipped with one Alco U-bend or equal 20mm 3/4" seamless copper tube heating element having of heating surface, built to A.S.M.E. Code for 800kPa working pressure conditions with bronze tube plate. Provide 12mm 1/2" vacuum breaker on steam space. Heater capacity to be litres per hour from 5 degrees C to 60 degrees C to 82 degrees C when supplied with steam at atmospheric pressure. .5 Provide temperature regulating valve, Powers No. 11-A, size 100mm 4", complete with separable well. .6 Provide all hot, cold, and recirculation piping and drain connections. Steam, condensate return piping and steam traps, as well as installation of temperature control valve, will be provided under the Heating Section 15500. 2.10 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC HOT WATER BOILERS 1 Domestic hot water boiler(s) shall be fully automatic bumer/boiler units. Each j unit shall be Raypak Model TB.HWS full modulation coppertube hot water boiler built in accordance with ASME and the Province of Ontario Codes for working pressure of 160 psig. I �I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 10 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .2 Each gas train shall be CGA approved and include pilot regulating valve, pilot and main gas pressure regulating valves, firing valve, electric gas valve and lubricated plug cock. .3 Each unit shall have solid state electronic ignition and flame safeguard controls with .8 second safety shutdown and electric spark ignition. .4 Each unit shall have: .1 Heat exchanger consisting of 25mm 1" integral finned copper tubes rolled into heavy duty bronze headers and sealed with silicone "O" rings tested at minimum of 3500kPa and stamped with ASME rating of 1100kPa complete with baffles to ensure full efficiency and approved draft diverter outlet. The complete heat exchanger shall be guaranteed for 10 years. .2 Combustion chamber constructed of castable refractory interlocked and designed for continuous rating of 760 degrees C and maximum rating of 1200 degrees C. .3 Burners of stainless steel titanium stablized type with large high efficiency ports, mounted in an easily removable burner drawer. .4 The outer casing of baked enamel finished steel shall be air cooled internally and contain a heavy steel base. .5 Bronze body circulator. .6 L4008A operating aquastat mounted and wired on boiler. .5 Each boiler shall be complete with ASME rated safety valve (set 860kPa) with try level, piped to hub drain, McDonnell-Miller FS-4 flow switch interlocked with ignition system to prevent operation of boiler in event of "no-flow" condition. 2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .1 Extinguishers shall be Chubb Model No. ABCSP or equal in Walter Kidde or Levitt Safety, complete with suitable mounting bracket. .2 - Where indicated on drawings provide recessed cabinets suitable for flush mounting Wilson &Cousins Model No. 1 E10 or equal in Levitt Safety or Kent Fire Protection. All public area FE shall be cabinet type except in mechanical and storage rooms shall be wall mounted. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 11 2.12 SIAMESE PUMPER CONNECTION i .1 Siamese pumper connection shall be standpipe type with two 60mm 2 1/4" connections suitable for the local Fire Department thread, with caps and !, chains. Siamese shall be complete with escutcheon plate embossed with 'To Standpipe" and shall be connected to the main fire line as shown on the drawings, with check valve and 20mm 3/4" automatic drip connection in the line, piped to an open drain. Siamese shall be Wilson & Cousins IE-28 with double clapper valve. All exposed surfaces to be brass. 2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES .1 Plumbing fixtures shall be as described in the attached Plumbing Fixture Schedule. .2 Fixtures shall be complete with necessary trim, including traps, faucets, j supplies, stops, strainers, escutcheons, spuds, wastes, tail pieces, gaskets, brass bolts & carriers. { .3 Provide wheel handle or screwdriver stop valve on the hot and cold water supply to every fixture on the job, in addition to the valve or faucet on the fixture itself. .4 Shop drawings for fixtures shall consist of a carefully prepared portfolio showing illustrations, dimension drawings and detail descriptions of the fixtures to be furnished. I � I � � i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 12 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION .1 All work shall be executed by plumbers holding certificates of competency. All fixtures and equipment shall be roughed-in, installed and connected exactly in conformity with respective manufacturer's details and all fitted with individual shut offs. All lines shall be laid or hung to approved falls, and all lines shall be arranged so that any or all systems may be completely drained. All roughing-in shall be concealed, save where specifically excepted by the Consultant. Piping shall not touch the structure, sleeves, other piping, conduits or equipment at any point, save at the necessary connections. This shall be observed carefully to avoid transmission of noise. Allow sufficient space in sleeves, etc. for thermal expansion of piping. .2 Where piping is installed in filled ground, or earth that cannot support piping, piping shall be supported on a concrete pad or piers, or alternatively it shall be cast iron hung at every joint from reinforcing rods 10mm 1/8" diameter min. asphalt coated as described in Plumbing Code. Where piping passes through foundation walls, it shall be supported on a reinforced concrete pad as specified under "Excavation and Backfill" in Section 15050. .3 In all piping 75mm 3" size and over, located anywhere, install copper or brass flanges at each valve and at apparatus. .4 Water pipe in boiler room and mechanical equipment rooms shall be copper as previously specified but disconnecting copper or brass flanges shall be installed at boilers, chillers, etc., using wrought copper streamlined fittings and with Silfos solder within 8m of such connections. .5 Pipes to circular wash fountains and island fixtures shall be insulated, wrapped with polyken tape and run in individual ABS Plastic conduits. 3.2 JOINTS .1 Joints in cast iron pipes shall be Mechanical type. .2 Joints in screwed steel pipe shall be made up with an approved joint compound. The use of lampwick will not be permitted. Pipe threads shall be full and dean cut. Pipes shall be reamed after being cut. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 13 j .3 Joints in copper piping shall be made using special tools of proper size. Ends shall be cut off at right angles to pipe and reamed. Inside of fitting and outside of pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned with steel wool and coated with flux. Joints shall be soldered with a blowtorch or oxyacetylene flame using single or double tip torch depending on fitting size. Use hard solder made up of 95% tin and 5% antimony for pipe sizes up to and including 78mm 3 1/8". Use Silfos for pipe sizes 100mm 4" and above. Working parts of valves must be removed during soldering. Wrought copper steamlined fittings must be used where Silfos is specified. .4 Joints in plastic piping to be solvent welded. .5 All solders and jointing materials shall meet the current code requirements { regarding the maximum allowable lead content. 3.3 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION i .1 Provide cleanouts for drains 16m apart in all straight runs of sewers, at all changes of direction, at the end of all branches, at the base of all riser lines, on all exposed or accessible traps (except water closet traps), at all points on the system where so indicated or required by Code, or where necessary because of interruption of general line of flow. .2 Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe up to 1 00m 4" and not less than 1 00m 4" for larger pipes. Full size 'Y' or "TY" branches shall be provided for cleanouts on drains and their branches. .3 All cleanouts shall be made accessible and wherever necessary branch connections shall extend to finished surfaces of floors with polished bronze floor plate and frame for each, set flush with floor and with vandalproof socket head screws to match the cover finish. .4 Care shall be taken to locate all Barrett type cleanouts above any curbs, bases, etc. Ra-rretts shall be covered with access doors as specified. 3.4 -PIPE HANGERS .1 Provide pipe hangers and supports for all piping and equipment supplied and installed under this Section. Refer to Section 15050 for detailed requirements. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 14 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE , 3.5 FLASHING .1 All piping extending through the roof or other waterpr000fed area shall be flashed with Thaler Roofing Specialties Products roof flashing. Flashing shall be left ready as directed by the roofers or water proofers for them to make watertight connections. .2 All piping extending through the roof or other waterproofed area shall be flashed with 3.5mm sheet lead flashing about 50cm square burned to a lead sleeve extending up around the pipe for a distance of not less than 150mm 6" above the roof line and caulked into the pipe hub at least 25mm 1". Flashing shall be left ready as directed by the roofers or waterproofers for them to make watertight connections. .3 Piping other than cast iron may be flashed with 0.5mm sheet copper soldered at all joints and provided with a conical weather drip clamped to pipe. .4 Where pipes pass through walls, flashing shall be turned back into the wall and caulked. 3.6 PIPE EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION .1 Provide for the expansion and contraction of pipe work. Erect all pipe in such a manner that the strain and weight does not come upon cast connections or apparatus. Provide bends or swing joints for this purpose. .2 Provide anchors and expansion loops where required and where shown on drawings. Anchors shall be equal in strength to the pipe being anchored, both in shear and in bending. 3.7 TRAP PRIMERS .1 All floor drains, hub drains, funnel drains etc., shall be trapped and provided with a 10mm 1/8" water connection for trap seal. .2 Install insulated flush valve tanks at high level for priming. Locations as shown on drawings. it i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 { SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 15 3.8 BACKVENTS .1 Every plumbing fixture shall have its own trap and these shall be vented in accordance with the Ontario Water Resources Commission Plumbing Code or any other local rules and regulations. Vents are shown on drawings only to indicate the required routing. .2 Vents smaller than 75mm 3" shall be increased to 75mm 3" before passing through the roof. i 3.9 AIR CHAMBERS .1 Provide air chambers at least 600mm 24" long on all supplies at each fixture. They shall be of the same size as the main supply pipe to the fixture, and shall be concealed in the rough work. 3.10 DRIPS AND DRAINS .1 Supply and install 12mm 1/2 drip cocks with hose connectors at the base of all water risers and all low points. These shall be Dahl 2316 or James Robertson JR-4532 (Type "C" for copper pipe). 3.11 COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION .1 Provide a new water service and water meter as shown Gw flanged connection for sprinklers. .2 Connect to the existing domestic water system as shown and run new Run piping to all fixtures, hose bibbs and all other miscellaneous equipment requiring cold water connections on the job. Remove existing water meter and all piping no longer required. 3.12 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION .1 Make all necessary water connections to the existing domestic hot water j piping. .2 Run hot water piping as indicated on the Drawings and connect to all fixtures, hose bibbs, and all other miscellaneous equipment requiring hot water connection. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 16 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .3 Connect into the existing recirculation mains and risers as indicated on the drawings. Recirculation piping shall be arranged to provide a continuous and positive circulation of hot water throughout the system at all times. Branch shut-offs in recirculation piping shall match the shut-offs in the hot water mains, so that any section of the system could be shut down and drained for maintenance. No recirculation branch shall be less than 20mm 3/4" size. .4 There shall be no high points or air pockets in any recirculation lines. Lines shall be so arranged and graded that air shall collect at the fixtures or at the hot water tanks. Where it is impossible to avoid high points, install automatic air eliminator traps, Sarco Type 13WN with discharge piped to nearest drain. 3.13 DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 1 The general arrangement of the storm and sanitary drainage piping is shown on the Drawings. Install a complete drainage system as shown. .2 Include connections and revisions to the existing sewers. .3 The area drains connecting to internal drainage system are part of the work of this Section. 3.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANKS AND HEATERS .1 Provide all hot, cold, and recirculation piping and drain connections. .2 Steam, condensate return piping and steam traps, as well as installation of temperature control valve, will be provided under the Heating Section 15500. .3 Provide a Metalbestos or equal 175mm T' dia. vent connected to existing header as shown on drawings. through roof, complete with weather top, cone flashing, storm collar and all other necessary fittings to make a complete installation. .4 Supply and install 125mm 5" scale thermometer in supply main from each hot water tank. Thermometer to have separable socket and to be installed so that it can be read easily. Thennometers installed in insulated lines shall have extended bulbs and sockets. Thermometers shall be Taylor or approved equal. I t 3 � I � DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 17 { 3.15 SPECIAL WATER AND WASTE CONNECTIONS .1 Supply and install all hot and cold water, waste and vent connections required in the mechanical equipment rooms, and in any other locations where shown ior required for all items shown on Mechanical or Architectural Drawings, including "Not-In-Contract" (N.I.C.) items, "Cash Allowance" items, "Supplied by j Owners" (S.B.O.) items. Co-operate with all other trades to the extent of properly locating any connections they require and connect up complete to all pieces of apparatus so served, installing a valve on each water and gas connection close to each piece of apparatus. Install a cast brass trap with cleanout and vent on the waste connections, unless waste discharges into a floor drain, hub or combination drain. Include piping from apparatus waste connection to such open drains in the latter case. .2 Supply and install all necessary gas pressure and water pressure regulators where required by individual apparatus and equipment and run necessary vents to atmosphere. .3 In all direct connections of city water to equipment such as expansion tanks, boilers, fill connection to piping systems, provide a back-flow preventing j device, approved by Ontario Water Resources Commission and local Plumbing Inspection. Backflow preventors to be Watts, Clayton or Singer manufacture. 1, ! .4 Provide backflow connectors on all inside and outside hose bibb connections equal to Watts manufacture. .5 In the case of "Existing Relocated" items include all work and materials for disconnection in the old location and reconnection in the new location. .6 All exposed valves, traps, etc. in kitchen and dining area to be chromeplated. Provide pressure reducing valve assembly on water line to dishwasher to maintain 140-175kPa with 45 L/min flowing. Include 75mm 3" chromeplated pressure gauge on low pressure side and 3 valve bypass around reducing valve. j .7 Supply and install gas solenoid valves on gas lines serving gas fired equipment under kitchen hoods. .8 Provide al cold water, hot water and drain connections required for pool equipment contractor and connect to equipment. Coordinate with pool 1 contractor (Division 13) on site for locations and exact sizes. :1 � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 18 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE 3.16 NATURAL GAS PIPING .1 Make all necessary arrangements, pay all charges and do all necessary work for a new interruptible gas service and a new firm gas service from main road into the building where shown on the Drawings. Arrange piping and pay all charges for gas meter installations including service valve, etc., pressure reducing assemblies, relief valves, vent piping to the outside, etc., as and if required by the Gas utility. Continue piping from the meter installation, , connecting to all gas fired equipment on the job as indicated on the Drawings. Include the supply and installation of a lever operated approved type gas cock at each piece of equipment close to the point of connection. .2 Gas piping shall be standard weight black steel pipe with standard weight malleable iron screwed fittings. Piping shall be welded wherever required by the Gas Utility Inspection Officials. Piping shall be installed and tested in strict accordance with C.S.A. 8149 Standard, together with any other local rules and regulations having jurisdiction. .3 All concealed or buried piping shall be welded, vented and protected as required by the Gas Company. No such piping shall be installed or concealed until approval is obtained from the Gas Company. .4 All gas piping to be painted and identified by this Section as required by Code. 3.17 WHIRLPOOL BATH, HOT TUB, SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT .1 Supply and install all piping, pipe fittings, and valves from the pool fittings to the filter; all pipes, pipe fittings and valves from pool main outlet line, from overflow skimmers, and from other drain fittings as indicated on the plans to the drain disposal point or points; all fresh water lines, valves, tees, all piping and pipe fittings from the back-wash line valve to drain disposal points as shown; all associated pipe hangers, rods and supports as required by Division 13. Install pool piping for heater as shown on drawings. Pool filters, equipment and piping, etc. shall be by Division 13. Division 15400 shall supply water, drain, sump pits and associated piping as shown on drawing. Coordinate location for connections to pool equipment with Division 13. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 19 .2 Manufacturer shall supply complete drawings and printed instructions for installation and operation of all equipment specified herein and shown on the drawings. f .3 A qualified Engineer or Representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the work after the installation of such equipment has been completed, shall put into operation all mechanical equipment and shall, for a period of not to exceed one day, assist and instruct the Owners representative in the operation of all such equipment. .4 Piping to be Schedule 40C PVC pipe assembled and supported in accordance with manufacturers instructions for all connections to pool equipment. 3.18 TESTING .1 All water piping shall be tested to a pressure of at least 1050kPa. .2 All drains shall be tested for tightness and grade as required by the Ontario Water Resources Commission Act respecting Plumbing and local authorities. .3 All tests shall be made before the application of pipe covering and all concealed pipes shall be tested before being covered up. Underground drains shall be tested before backfill is placed. .4 Any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work or at its completion, shall be made without cost to the Owner. Such tests shall be carried out solely for the purpose of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .5 All tests must last at least 2 hours and if leaks develop, these must be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the local authorities. I I ' PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 20 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .6 Caulking of threaded joints shall not be permitted, faulty piping shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings. .7 Notify the Consultant and the local Plumbing Inspector of all tests and conduct same to their satisfaction and in the presence of their representatives. Provide all labour and equipment for tests and conduct same. Repeat tests until system is shown to be leak-tight and in proper working condition, all to the satisfaction of all inspectors having authority. 3.19 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND SUPPORTS .1 Supply, install and connect up complete all plumbing fixtures shown on the Drawings. Protect all fixtures until the building is accepted by the Owner. i .2 All wall hung plumbing fixtures shall be supported by wall brackets. The bolts ■ for these brackets are to be carried through the wall and through a steel plate 150mm 6" wide, 3mm thick and full length of bracket, plus 50mm 2" or to suit studs on wall. .3 Water closets shall be set in mastic to prevent water on floor from entering space between floor and bowl or pipe sleeve. .4 Supply and install below showers, janitor's receptors, and all other waterproofed areas required for plumbing fixtures a 2.5mm sheet lead safe, soldered at all joints, flashed into the floor drain and turned up 150mm 6" into all walls and curbs. "Compotite" manufactured membrane may be used in lieu of sheet lead. 3.20 STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM .1 Before placing into service, chlorinate the potable water piping system by injection of mixture of 5% calcium hypochlorite and 95% water thoroughly mixed from paste form to full mixture. .2 Inject the mixture into the mains in such a manner as to ensure treatment of the entire line. .3 Retain a dosage of 50 p.p.m. in the line for 4 hours after which a residual of 5 p.p.m, minimum should be obtained. .4 When a pipe line is already filled with water, inject a concentrate chlorine mixture at intervals along the pipe line. The retention period in this case shall be 8 hours. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 21 i .5 Operate all valves during chlorination so that they will be sterilized in the procedure. After chlorination period flush out the lines at extremities until water tests are equal, chemically and bacteriologically to those of the source of supply. 3.21 SOFTENING EQUIPMENT .1 Provide one (1) only triplex water softening system. System to include three 42" diameter pressure vessels (60" straight side) that are electric welded low carbon steel rated for 100 psig. Vessels to be pressure and hydrostatically tested to 50% in excess of rated pressure. Each vessel to have 30 cubic feet of sulphonated polystryene strong acid cation exchange resin. ( .2 Provide 11" x 15' manway in the top of the tank. .3 Tank support to include structural steel strap legs welded to the tank lower head. .4 The upper distribution to be a single point baffle type construction of Sch 40 galvanized steel pipe and fittings. .5 The lower distributor to be a hub and radial type constructed of PVC with { ' individual fine slotted non clogging polyethylene strainers embedded in a single subfill layer of washed 1/8" x 1//16" gravel. .6 Operating valve to be 2.5' multiport diaphragm valve consisting of a group of slow opening and dosing hydraulically operated valves inside the multiport housing. Valve to be Brunermatic. .7 Pipe and fittings to be Sch 40 galvanized steel and class 150 threaded fittings. Main valve and manifold to be factory assembled and attached to the tank. .8 Brine storage tank to be 42" diameter and 60" straight side 3/8" thick polyethylene tank with a salt capacity of 700 lbs. Tank to include salt platform, coer and float operated brine valve. Brine injector to be automatic self- adjusting to ensure correct brine flow regardless of fluctuations in fee pressure. .9 System to include three 2" turbo flow sensors coupled to the electronic programmable controller. r � r � r - PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 22 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE .10 Provide an electronic programmable controller to operate the system complete with Nema 12 enclosure, detachable electronic control module, prewritten software programs, digital display and colour coded keypad. Controller to be able to operate in paralleVprogressive mode allowing for the addition or removal of tanks online based on process demand. .11 Also provide the necessary valving and programming capability to allow automatic brine reclaim during system operation. .12 System to be Bruner HBR 900-2.5 triple IQS-3 as supplied by Biolab Equipment. 3.22 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS .1 Supply and install backflow preventors at all hosebibbs, pool water supply piping, water softeners, lawn sprinkler takeoff and at each boiler supply. Heating system water supply shall be supplied with reduced pressure backflow preventer. 3.23 TRAP SEAL .1 Provide trap seal primers and vents at all floor drains. 3.24 STANDARD SHEETS r Standard Sheet 5-443 Works Dept. ! I j DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING FIXTURE LIST WC WATER CLOSET WHITE VITREOUS CHINA ELJER 111-1425 "AUBURN" C/W 9T400 ACCESS PANEL, ANCON CARRIER SERIES CA-101, TECK FLUSH VALVE 83T145 AND CENTOCO 50OCC WHITE SEAT OPEN FRONT LESS COVER. j WC1 WATER CLOSET ! SAME AS FIXTURE TYPE "WC" ABOVE EXCEPT MOUNT AT WHEELCHAIR HEIGHT AND SEAT TO BE CENTOCO 820ST. I � U URINALS WHITE VITREOUS CHINA ELJER 161-1045 "CORRECTO" CM ANCON CO-441 RD 1.5 CLEANOUT TECK 817231 EXPOSED FLUSH VALVE. L LAVATORIES COUNTER (PUBLIC WASHROOM) WHITE VITREOUS CHINA 051-2954 "ROBERTA" C/W OFFSET TRAP WITH CLEANOUT AND OPEN GRID STRAINER TRIM TECK 21T134, AERATOR. L1 LAVATORY (HC) j WHITE VITREOUS CHINA WHEELCHAIR LAV 051-2968 CAN ANCON CA-411. PROVIDE TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, SUPPLIES WITH STOPS AND CAMBRIDGE {I BRASS 21T134 TRIM, AERATOR. SH SHOWER - PUBLIC SYMMONS MODEL 3-325 SHOWER OFF PUSHBUTTON CAN INSTITUTIONAL ifHEAD. UNIT TO BE C/W CHECK STOPS. SH1 SHOWER - HANDICAPPED SAME AS FIXTURE TYPE "SH" EXCEPT REPLACE HEAD WITH 54" CHROME BAR AND HAND SHOWER. j SS STAINLESS STEEL SINK (TRIPLE) ARISTALINE LBT6410-1C C/W CRUMB CUPS. TRIM TWO CAMBRIDGE BRASS 26T2633, AERATOR. rSS1 STAINLESS STEEL HAND SINK ARISTALINE LBS6807-1C CNV CRUMB CUP. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 26T2144, AERATOR. SS2 DOUBLE STAINLESS STEEL SINK ARISTALINE LBD6407-1CB. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 27T3833, AERATOR. J 'I DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 , SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING FIXTURE LIST SS3 SINGLE HAND SINK ARISTALINE LBS-9106-1C LEDGEBACK CNV CRUMB CUP, TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 21T133, AERATOR. JS MOP SINKS FIAT 24 X 24 C/W TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 28T2383. DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN HALSEY TAYLOR MODEL HT-EBP. EW EYEWASH GUARDIAN G1814 C/W VALVE AND FLAG HANDLE, STAINLESS STEEL BOWL, WALL MOUNTED. r r FRCRI LUfr PF,04ITFCTS iNu t'rLpjt Lau. .ao 'I I�i w q 300 FINED FACE OF WALL S7RM ER f .. METER - SEE MO1E I VICEAULK COWLING II LIT LOT ROOM 5"LL BE YIN. Bi5 . 2015 INSULATED STEEL NCUAATED. HEATED AND RESTRAINED JOINT MIN. UT. (THE METER AS ABOVE COOK CORRED ITIITI THE METER BUILDING OWNER K _ DOOR TO BE LOCKED MA A LET RESPONSIBLE iF THE PROVIDED TO THE REOON. METER IS DANA= DUE TO COLD TEMPEMTtREi 300L rL SRPAN90 PLAN — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED M.T i PLAN — TYPICAL HORIZONTAL FEED N.TS, ALL BREVES SALT V FNIISED CEILING BE PILLED IN AN lW'INGNB Pp}RION BT-PASS 5 NOT REOLPRED LESS FOR SEITWC6 50 AY11 OR 1E54 � r• it � STIGMER .z n� I: METER - SEE 107E T 30O VT. — Mw. V=AUUO Im - RESTRAI 4 jaw y 7ES7AAME0 FONSHED FLOOR DONE CBKIN jaw OF rLOR ELEVATION — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED METER AS 300 ABOVE �uI/^����C+ KLS. • _ N METER SMALL BE A 20 NNN TO 50 mm. S2E TURBwE. COMPOUND OR 51RLNF.N W-PA N E. S TYP 2. MI-MSS PIPE SW BE RCPRANED (A} THE SAME SOP AS OR INCOMING INPE WHEN ALLER A AN THE MC JOINT PIPE ANEW USING OR ONE Pro METER. a SMALLER TiM11 THE NCOMING PPE FEN N ALL A COMPOUND METER. (B) REOIIWKD ON ALL SERH^J<S FOR MULTI-RESIOENfNL, COMAR.RCML AND I wswK SULOINCS ELEVATIO — (C) REOIREO ON ALL Or $ LARGER THAN 5 mm. �. Mx CA T maw FOR . MOL MED BT-PASS T O E APIUED TO HOR ONTA F ❑ FLOW MOUNTED Br-PASS. N 7.S. ALL ONrtNSNINS IN MILLIMETERS EXCEPT MERE NOTEp. THE REGIONAL MUNK;IPALITY OF DURHAM WORKS DEPARTMENT CMECKEO• REMSON NO.: 2 APPROVED. TTMS o2 VED. WATER METER ROOM 5-443 Inal 601 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.5 UNIONS AND FLANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.6 RADIATION VALVES AND DRAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.7 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 +' 2.8 AIR CUSHION TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.9 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.10 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.11 HEATING BOILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 r 2.12 GAS VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 # 2.13 BOILER BREECHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.14 UNIT HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.15 HEATING CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.16 FLOW METERS AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.17 HEATING SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 l 2.18 PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.2 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.3 AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.4 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.5 BOILING OUT OF SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.6 PRESSURE WELDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 I i � r r� r DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 ' SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE 1 ' .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete heating j system and cooling system as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS j .1 Section 15400 will provide hub, floor and funnel drains. Section 15400 will provide domestic cold water piping to all equipment in the boiler room, fan rooms, equipment rooms, etc. Cooperate with Section 15400 in properly locating and arranging all such connections. .2 Thermal insulation - under Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. .3 Refrigeration piping, refrigerant and testing of refrigeration system - under Section 15530 Refrigeration. .4 Automatic control valves will be supplied under Section 15950 - Controls, but shall be installed under this Section. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: r .1 Pumps. .2 In-Line Circulators. j .3 Boilers and Heat Generators. I , .4 Condensers and Condensing Units. 1 � r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 2 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING .5 Heat Exchangers. .6 Air Coils for Heating. , .7 Humidifiers. .8 Unit Heaters. .9 Metal Hose Connections. r .10 Air Cushion Tanks. ' .11 Water Treatment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE .1 Unless otherwise specified, piping shall be as follows: .1 Hot water heating piping, shall be new, standard weight steel pipe, C.S.A. Specification B-63-1949 Grade B Schedule 40. .2 Steel pipe 50mm and under shall be butt welded. Pipe 60mm and over , shall be electric resistance welded. .3 Domestic water piping and drain lines from ducts, plenums, hoods, shall be type "L" hard drawn copper tubing. 2.2 FITTINGS .1 All elbows on any steel piping where welding is employed, shall be of the prefabricated type, Tube-Turn or equal. Long radius elbows shall be installed where pipe bends are used to take up expansion. .2 All screwed fittings in steel piping shall be minimum 1050kPa Gass. All welding fittings shall be standard weight where used with Schedule 40 pipe. They shall be extra heavy where used with Schedule 80 pipe. .3 All fittings used with copper pipe shall be wrought copper streamline fittings. Where it is necessary to connect threaded pipe to copper tubing, use unions or flange connections similar to Epco "Di-Electric" pipe fittings. , .4 All fittings used in connection with red brass I.P.S. pipe, shall be screwed and of cast bronze. 1 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 3 I 2.3 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPING .1 Grooved mechanical joints may be used in lieu of welded flanged or screwed joints in heating water, chilled water, condenser water, glycol systems. .2 Acceptable suppliers are Victaulic Couplox and Grinnell. Use the following Victaulic materials or equivalent in Grinnell: .1 Butterfly Valve: Model 700 Series, VIC 300. ' .2 Valve support couplings: Style 07 Zero flex. Such couplings shall be used in all equipment rooms. .3 Strainer. Type 730. .4 Check Valve: Stype 715, 711, 716. .5 Suction Diffuser. Style 731. 2.4 VALVES .1 Valves shall be Jenkins, Crane, McAvity, Red & White or Lunkenheimer - Morrison, Newman/Hattersly manufacture. Butterfly valves shall be Jenkins, Keystone, Victaulic or Grinnell, Newman Hattersly. .2 Valves shall be suitable for the operating pressures of the system in which they are installed. .3 Generally valves shall be gate valves with wedge discs, except for valves used in by-pass service around control and pressure reducing valves, or where otherwise shown and/or specified, where globe or angle valves shall be used. .4 Valves 20mm and smaller shall be globe type, or where used for on-off operation may also be ball type. .5 Balancing valves shall be lockshield type globe, angle, or butterfly valves. .6 Gate Valves r .1 50mm and smaller shall be Jenkins Fig. 810 for screwed ends; Jenkins Fig. 813 for soldered ends. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 4 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING .2 Ball valves may be used in lieu of gate valves in 50mm size and smaller, Jenkins Fig. 33 for screwed ends and Fig. 34 for soldered , ends. .3 60mm and larger shall be Jenkins Fig. 454. .7 Globe Valves .1 50mm and smaller shall be Jenkins Fig. 106-B or 108-13; Jenkins Fig. 106-B-P or 108-B-P for copper pipe. .2 60mm and larger shall be Jenkins Fig. 142. , .8 Butterfly Valves .1 Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate and globe valves for size 60mm and over. ' .2 Size 60mm to 125mm - Jenkins Fig. 2232EL lug type with bronze disc and EDPM liner and lever operated. ' .3 Size 150mm and over, as above with gear operator Jenkins Fig. 2232EG. .9 Check Valves .1 Size 50mm or smaller, Jenkins Fig. 4092 screwed ends; Fig 4093 soldered ends. .2 Size 60mm and larger, Jenkins Fig. 587. 2.5 UNIONS AND FLANGES .1 Unions in copper pipe, 50mm diameter and smaller, shall be wrought copper with ground joints, and with soldered connections. For 60mm and 75mm copper pipes, unions shall be brass ground joints. For copper pipes larger than 75mm, flanges shall be 1050kPa cast brass. .2 Unions in steel pipe 50mm and smaller shall be brass to iron ground joint. For ' steel pipe 60mm and larger, flanges shall be 1050kPa steel slip on type. .3 Gaskets for cold water service shall be 1.6mm red rubber. Gaskets for other ' services shall be 1050kPa 1.6mm of material suitable for these services. .4 Bolts for flanges shall be carbon steel, A.S.T.M. A-107. ' ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 5 2.6 RADIATION VALVES AND DRAINS .1 On the inlet side of each unit heater, provide a heavy brass valve, Jenkins Fig. 1167 or 1168 or Crane 67G provide a bronze body valve, DAHL heavy pattern, 1400kPa rating at 120 C, with spring loaded life time packing, angle or straight-way pattern as required. Valves shall be complete with union nut and nipple to permit removal of the heating element. I .2 On the outlet side of each such heating element provide a similar valve, but with a cap key. .3 The above applies to all radiation, including that controlled by room thermostats. .4 For each downfeed element provide a 12mm hose end sediment faucet. d 2.7 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS .1 Metal hose vibration absorbers shall be Flexonics RW 91, bronze braded assemblies with close pitch corrugations and 1050kPa 2.1MPa working pressure. Use screwed connections for sizes up to 60mm, flanged connections for larger sizes. Vibration absorbers with screwed connections shall have a union nut and nipple at one end. Hose live length shall be 300mm for sizes up rto 50mm 450mm for sizes 75mm to 125mm and 700mm for larger sizes. 2.8 AIR CUSHION TANK I .1 Expansion tank shall be sized as shown on drawings and shall meet the requirements of the Ministry of Commercial and Consumer Relations and A.S.M.E. for a working pressure of 860kPa. .2 Tank shall be complete with manual air vent, sight glasses, drain valve and jrelief valve. 2.9 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS .1 Pumps shall be vertical in-line type with outside mechanical seal and split type spacer coupling to permit servicing the seal without disturbing pump or motor or electrical wiring. .2 Pumps shall have radially split casings. They shall be single stage centrifugal type with cast iron casing, bronze impeller and stainless steel shaft. Pumps shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 860kPa. r r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 6 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING .3 The driving motor shall be of the vertical, solid shaft, normal thrust, "P" base, squirrel cage induction type. , .4 The complete pumping unit, including the seal, shall be suitable for the service shown in the pump schedule. The pump manufacturer shall conduct running ' tests to verify the conditions of head and capacity specified. .5 Pump casings shall have renewable bronze casing and/or impeller wear rings , on both sides of the impeller. .6 Inlet and discharge ports shall be flanged. All pumps shall have such performance characteristics that the motor will not be overloaded at low head conditions, nor will the pump develop excessive head at low flow conditions. Impeller diameter shall be not larger than 85% of maximum allowable for a particular casing size. Velocity in discharge nozzle shall not exceed 3.5m/s. .7 Impellers shall be enclosed bronze, dynamically balanced. , .8 Approval information shall include characteristic curves, power, head, capacity data and general construction details. .9 Pumps shall be suitable for continuously circulating water at temperatures between 4 C and 100 C at 700 kPa suction pressure. , .10 Pumps shall be S.A. Armstrong or equal in A.S Leitch, Canada Pumps and Bell and Gossett. 2.10 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS ' .1 Line circulators shall be of iron construction with brass impellers, bronze sleeve bearings, mechanical seal, spring type coupling, direct driven at 1750 R.P.M, by standard protected type motor. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous circulation of water at temperatures up to 100 C. , .2 Line circulators shall be S.A. Armstrong or equal in Bell and Gossett. 2.11 HEATING BOILERS .1 Provide fully automatic hot water boiler/bumer unit(s) to be fuelled with natural gas, equal to Raypak, with two 75/25% burners, finned coppertube heat exchangers built in accordance with A.S.M.E. and the Province of Ontario Codes for a working pressure of 1120kPa. ' .2 Boiler ratings and types are indicated on drawings. ! , DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 7 I ' j ' .3 Each unit shall be complete with: i .1 High limit aquastat .2 CGA approved gas train, including pilot regulating valve, pilot and main gas pressure regulating valves, firing valve, electric gas valve and lubricated plug cock .3 Solid state electronic ignition and flame safeguard controls with .8 second safety shutdown and electric spark ignition .4 Low water cut off j .5 Secondary circulating pump of capacity and head to suit boiler i .6 Heat exchanger consisting of 25mm integral finned copper tubes rolled j into heavy duty steel headers tested at minimum of 3.5MPa and 1 stamped with A.S.M.E. rating of 1120kPa, complete with baffles. .7 Approved draft diverter outlet I , .8 Combustion chamber constructed of castable refractory interlocked and designed for a continuous rating of 760 C and a maximum rating of 1200 C. .9 Burners of stainless steel titanium stabilized type with large high efficiency ports, mounted in an easily removable burner drawer .10 The outer casing of baked enamel finished steel, air cooled internally a and containing a heavy steel base. i .11 Temperature and pressure gauges .12 A.S.M.E. rated safety relief valve with try lever, set at 310kPa and piped to drain .13 McDonnell Miller FS-4 flow switch interlocked with the ignition system to pervent operation of the boiler in the event of a "no-flow" condition. II , I r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 8 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING ' .4 For automatic sequencing and control of the boiler system provide Raypak , B4-E2 staged controller. It shall control firing and sequence of boilers automatically to maintain the following temperature schedule: Outdoor temperature -23 C 16 C Boiler leaving temperature 90 C 50 C .5 Unit shall be completely enclosed in hinged steel box suitble for wall mounting. Include manual lead-lag selector switch to allow selection of lead boiler without rewiring. .6 Provide guarantee direct to Owner by Manufacturer as follows: r Heat exchanger- five years. , Controls and accessories - one year. .7 Equivalent boiler/bumer units of Bryan CL120 and Super Hot AAE manufacture ' are acceptable. 2.12 GAS VENTS ' 1 Provide Metalbestos or equal mm dia. vent vents for each boiler, connected to existing header as shown on drawings. through roof, complete with weather top, cone flashing, storm collar and all other necessary fittings to make a complete installation. 2.13 BOILER BREECHING ' .1 Supply and erect smoke connection from the boilers to the stack. .2 Inside dimensions are shown on plans. Breechings shall be made of 10 USS r gauge steel plate with 2'X2"x1/4" angle stiffeners on 6'-0" centres. Breechings shall be hung at approximately 7'-0" centres. Breechings shall be have sufficient hinged cleanout doors so that they may be cleaned without removing. Breechings will be covered as described in Section 15250. Each cleanout door shall have two hinges and two cam locks and shall be gas tight. .3 Supply and install all necessary structural steel hangers, etc., for the breechings. ' 2.14 UNIT HEATERS .1 Unit heaters shall be horizontal type and vertical projection type unit heaters of ' capacity and noise level class at operating speeds indicated on drawings. _ r 'I I j ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 9 .2 Unit heaters shall be complete with louvre fin diffusers and discharge cones. i .3 Unit heaters shall not be supported from roof slab. Include all necessary supporting bracing. .4 Unit heaters shall be Trane or equal in Eng "A". 2.15 HEATING CAPACITIES .1 Heating capacities shown on drawings for fintube radiation, force flow heaters, unit heaters, convector radiators, unit ventilators, are based on 88 C supply water temperature and 11 C temperature drop. 2.16 FLOW METERS AND FITTINGS I .1 Provide where shown on drawings Taco Sentinel Standard metering stations of pipe sizes shown, or equal by Preso or Aerodynamics. Provide one matching readout instrument. .2 Provide where shown Dale Automatic Flow Regulators Model AFR. Drawings indicate required capacity. 2.17 HEATING SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT II , .1 Supply and install for the hot water heating system one Bird Archer Model LP chemical feeder complete with valves. Include initial charge of chemical to be added after the system has been cleaned, flushed out and tested. 2.18 PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER .1 Provide plate type heat exchanger for hot water directly with pool water. 2 Frame shall be titanium with baked epoxy enamel paint. The frame shall be designed without additional welds and reinforcements. The carrying and guide bars shall be bolted to the frame, not welded. The moveable cover shall be supported from the upper carrying bar by means of a roller. The carrying and guide bar surface in contact with the plates and roller shall be made of, or cladded with a corrosion resistant material such as stainless steel. The bolts I ' shall be greased with a Molybdenum grease and protected with sleeves. i I , PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 10 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING , .3 Plates shall be type titanium steel and shall be complete with titanium lined connections for all poolside water piping connections. The space between port ' holes not feeding channels, and channels shall be vented to the atmosphere. Metal to metal contact shall exist between adjacent plates so that vibrations and risk of fatiguae are minimized. The plates shall have no supporting strips , and shall be pressed in one step. The part of the plate in contact with the carrying and guiding bars shall be reinforced to prevent bending and twisting during the handling of the plates. The plates shall be fully supported and fully , steered by the carrying bar and guided by the guide bar to prevent misalignment in both vertical and horizontal directions. .4 Gaskets shall be snap-on nitrile rubber. Gasket shall be in one piece, one piece molded, in a groove around the heat transfer area and around the port holes of the plate. Gasket groove shall allow for thermal expansion of the , gasket and provide continuous support along inner and outer edges of gasket. Gaskets shall be firmly cemented to groove by heat cured glue at factory. Clean and dry groove before applying adhesive. ' .5 The design, construction, inspection and testing shall comply with the applicable Provincial Pressure Vessel Regulations. ' .6 During manufacture, all tests and inspection required by applicable regulations and codes shall be performed and hydrostatic test shall be carried out. ' .7 Heat exchangers shall be equal to Alfa Laval, Vicarb or APV. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING .1 Steel pipe 50mm and larger shall have welded joints. At connections to apparatus, valves, at convenient points in long runs of piping and at connections to risers, flanges or unions shall be installed. ' .2 Steel pipe less than 50mm size may be welded or assembled using screwed fittings. All reducing fittings in horizontal pipe shall be eccentric. ' .3 Approved grooved couplings, Victaulic or equal, may be used for assembly of steel pipe, instead of welding. ' .4 Oil piping of all sizes shall be welded throughout. .5 Steam piping shall slope down in direction of flow 0.5% and return piping , 0.75%. Branch piping shall have greater slope. I ' 1 , DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 11 6 Water piping shall slope up in direction of flow 0.25%. Branch piping shall have greater slope. .7 Piping shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly. It shall be installed straight and true with uniform grade. .8 Piping shall not touch the structure, sleeves, other piping, conduits or { equipment at any point, save at the necessary connections. This shall be observed carefully to avoid transmission of noise. .9 The runs of mains and details of connections are shown on the Drawings. .10 All welding shall be performed by first class certified welders. .i , � .11 Risers shall be valved where they connect to the mains, and in addition supply and install 20mm drain valves with hose end at the base of all risers. In cases where there are no down-feed risers, or connections, the drain valve shall be between the shut-off valve and the heel at the riser. In cases where there are down-feed connections from the riser runouts below the level of the main, all piping shall grade in such a manner that the up- and down-feed risers and branch connections shall drain to the drain valves installed at the lowest points in the piping. .12 Provide drains at all low points in piping systems terminating with a plugged gate valve. .13 Provide a drain for each heating coil consisting of a gate valve and fittings turning down suitable for connection of a hose. 1 .14 Provide overflow and drain piping from apparatus to hub, floor and funnel drains. .15 Where either mains or branches are less than 150mm weld branch connections directly into the main pipe run if the main is 50mm or larger and at least one pipe size larger than the branch, otherwise welding outlet fittings or prefabricated welding tees must be used. Where branches are welded directly into the main pipe run, openings must be cut true and bevelled, and any branch pipes must not be allowed to project inside the main pipe. Openings into mains must not be cut large enough to permit entry of welding metal and slag within the pipes. .16 For all connections between mains and branches where both are 150mm or over, use welding tees. i , i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 12 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING , .17 Joints between copper pipes shall be made with copper to copper couplings soldered. No copper material shall be in contact with ferrous material. Solder , shall be 95/5 tin antimony. .18 For all changes in pipe sizes and connections to valves and equipment other ' than pipe size, use eccentric reducers for air elimination and proper grading of pipe. .19 Valves shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for servicing and i repacking. Valves installed in locations where operation is difficult shall be provided with extension spindles or operating chains, sprockets and guides. .20 Provide flanges or unions at all equipment requiring servicing and/or replacing. 3.2 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES , .1 Safety relief valves shall be installed where required and in accordance with ' the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and all other Codes and authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Run discharge lines from discharge elbow and safety valve independently of any other drain lines to nearest hub drain. 3.3 AIR VENTS ' .1 Provide for each up-fed hot water heating element a 25mm by approximately 150mm air chamber with screwdriver operated air vent piped for easy access. ' These shall be installed in such a manner that they will not interfere with the operation of the dampers. Provide slots in dampers for this purpose. .2 Provide a similar air vent for each force flow heater and unit heater. .3 In addition, provide a #37 Maid-O-Mist automatic air vent on the return end of , all hot water heating elements located on the top floor. .4 At down fed heating elements where piping is installed in such a manner that , there are no air pockets in the piping and elements, the air vent assemblies may be omitted. .5 At the high point in piping leaving boilers provide S.A. Armstrong VortexAir , Separator Model VA. a full pipe size air chamber at least 5 pipe diameters high. Connect the top of the air chamber air separator to the thermal ' expansion tank or provide it with a Sarco Type 13WN automatic air vent piped to nearest open drain. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15500 - HEATING AND COOLING PAGE 13 I ' J , 3.4 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS .1 Provide vibration absorbing metal hose connections in supply and return piping ' of air supply units. suction and discharge pipes of circulating pumps. .2 Firmly support or anchor piping near metal hose connections to prevent swaying of pipe. 3.5 BOILING OUT OF SYSTEMS .1 After all the piping of the hot water heating system has been flushed out and thoroughly cleaned, chemically clean the system by introducing Bird Archer GQ-75 boiling out chemical at the rate of 40g/L of water. Circulate at approximately 66 C for 24 hours. .2 Total volume of water in the heating system is approximately 1500 L. 3.6 PRESSURE WELDING .1 Welding of pressure piping shall be carried out by welders certified for this work, all to the approval of the Provincial Authorities having jurisdiction over such work. No covering shall be applied before the inspections are carried out. Notify authorities having jurisdiction, supply them with the necessary plans and j ' pay all charges incurred in the inspections. End of Section I ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE ' PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I � 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 ROOFTOP HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ' 2.2 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.3 GAS VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.4 EXHAUST FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.5 PROPELLER FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.6 V-BELT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.7 FAN BEARINGS . . . . ONTR L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 j 2.8 VARIABLE VOLUME CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.9 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS • 6 ill PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.1 DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.2 SHOWER EXHAUST DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.4 PLENUMS, CASINGS, BAFFLES . . 23 3.5 VOLUME AND SPLITTER DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.6 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE STOP FLAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.7 MOTORIZED DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.8 ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.10 STORM LOUVRES, BIRDSCREENS, DOOR GRILLES . . . . . . . . . • . . . 26 3.11 OUTSIDE OPENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 I ' 3.12 EXTERIOR INTAKE AND DISCHARGE COWLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.13 CONNECTION TO LOUVRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.14 BLANKING OFF LOUVRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.15 ACOUSTIC INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.16 DUCT WATERPROOFING . . 28 3.17 COVERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.18 PAINTING OF DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO OUTDOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.19 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.20 HUMIDIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.21 ADDITIONAL START-UP SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.22 LOCATION OF OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.23 FIRE THERMOSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.24 SMOKE DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.25 MOTORIZED DAMPERS, RELAYS AND INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.26 MOTORIZED DAMPER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.27 SERVICE ROOM VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.28 VENTILATION CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 i ' 3.29 FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 i 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i I, III ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 1 , SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE I .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT 1 Provide all material, equipment and labour as required for complete systems of ductwork and equipment for ventilation , heating, and cooling of the various areas of the building. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Thermal insulation - under Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. I , .2 Refrigeration piping, refrigerant and testing of refrigeration system - under j , Section 15530 Refrigeration. .3 Gas piping, domestic water piping and drains - under Section 15400 Inside ' Plumbing and Drainage. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS I ' .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. a .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: I ' .1 Rooftop units .2 Condensing units .3 Refrigeration piping .4 Make-up air units .5 Gas vents ; , .6 Fans PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 2 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .7 Air Filters .8 Variable air volume boxes ' .9 Grilles and diffusers ' .10 Fire dampers .11 Storrs louvres PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2.1 ROOFTOP HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS .1 Supply and install complete package type rooftop self-contained air cooled ' units where shown on drawings. Units shall consist of compressor, condenser, evaporator, gas fired furnace where indicated, electric ignition, filters, motors, ' controls, compressor and fan contactors, thermal overloads and variable pitch sheaves to give fan speed adjustable for l0% increase or decrease in speed from rated. Unit shall be completely weather proofed for outdoor installation and shall be internally insulated at the factory. Provide filters and all standard ' accessories. .2 Unit shall be supplied with a roof mounting frame complete with a nailing strip. ' .3 Unit shall be complete with a exhaust fan, 100% exhaust air damper and economizers and shall have adjustable outdoor air thermostat to lock out ' compressors on economizer control. .4 Compressor(s) to have extended 5 year warranty. ' .5 Each unit shall be complete with trapped condensate drain which shall spill onto roof. Include extension to drain if required so drain does not spill on , flashing. .6 Each unit shall be complete with heating/cooling thermostat with sub-base with ' fan, off, auto and heat, auto, cool selector switches equal to Carrier Temp Stat. Supply and install necessary transformers, etc., wiring required for low voltage temperature control. Provide contacts for connection to B.A.S. for unit status ' and space temperature. j DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 ' SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 3 .7 Each unit shall be supplied with an occupied/unoccupied switch to be mounted j ' beside the room thermostat or remotely. In the occupied position outside air shall be limited to the minimum flow rate for outside conditions above 75°F and below 55°F. In the unoccupied position fresh air dampers shall close and the unit shall operate on 100% recirculated air. .8 Size and fan characteristics for each unit shall be as specified in Fan Schedule. .9 Unit shall be of Carrier, Trane or York manufacture. .10 Provide wiring between thermostat, occupied/unoccupied switch and unit. 2.2 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT .1 Supply and install a rooftop cooling and gas heating make-up air unit equal to Eng A manufacture, size, type and arrangement as shown on Drawings. Unit shall be C.S.A. and/or C.G.A. approved complete with integral condensing section, stainless steel heat exchanger and fully modulating burner. ! ' .2 The unit shall be zinc bond galvanized steel finish coated with heat resistant alkyd enamel. The unit casing is to be suitably reinforced to ensure rigidity. All joints shall be gasketted and shall be waterproof. .3 The control system shall include the following components required to provide automatic operation and low fire start: .1 Four compressors complete with hot gas bypass and condenser fans ' .2 Main unfused disconnect switch .3 Control circuit transformer .4 Main fan magnetic starter and overloads .5 Control circuit fuses .6 Motorized inlet damper .7 Filter box with replaceable media filters (2" pleated) ' .8 Inlet hood and birdscreen .9 Auxiliary fan interlocks .10 Vibration isolation ' .11 Internal insulation !, .12 Stainless steel heat exchanger complete with fully modulating burner valve. .13 Heated weather housing .14 DX coil with bypass damper and drain pan. .15 7-day timer and controls and contacts for B.A.S. �I , PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 4 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ' .4 In addition, a remote station with burner on light, fan on light and summer/off/winter switch shall be supplied. , .5 Unit shall be interlocked with change room exhaust fan, so unit will not operate unless exhaust fan is operating. Include all interlock and control wiring. , .6 Unit shall supply 75°F (winter) and 65°F (summer) air to the change rooms. Provide duct thermostat and room thermostat override. Set DX coil bypass to , maintain 65°F DB and 60% R.H. maximum. 2.3 GAS VENTS , .1 Provide system of gas vents as shown. Gas vents shall be complete with draft hood connectors, weather top, cone flashing, storm collar, cleanout at vent , base and all other necessary fittings to make a complete installation. .2 Include vents for domestic hot water tanks. , .3 Gas vents shall be approved Selkirk or Metalbestos, Type B for draft hood vented systems. ' .4 Gas vents shall be Type A for bakery ovens and forced draft systems. .5 Flashings and curbs at the roof are under Division 7. Do all counterflashing in ' connection with gas vents. .6 Unless noted otherwise on drawings, gas vents shall be terminated at the height above roof as specified in Ontario Gas Utilization Regulation. .7 The complete installation shall be in accordance with all governing rules and , regulations of all local and provincial authorities. Vents to be securely supported from building structure. 2.4 EXHAUST FANS ' .1 Exhaust fans shall be supplied as indicated on Drawings. Units shall be ' Greenheck, Carnes or Penn Domex centrifugal belt driven roof exhausters with 13mm mesh bird screen and motorized louvre dampers. Include backdraft damper or motorized damper as indicated for each fan. Roof mounted fans ' shall be complete with prefabricated soundproofing roof curb for installation on flat, sloped or peak of sloped roof as required. Include undercover lock-off switch and wiring between lock-off switch and motor, motorized damper. ' 11' I I ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 { , SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 5 .2 Exhaust fan(s) shall be interlocked with intake air motorized damper to open on fan startup. I , 2.5 PROPELLER FANS i .1 Propeller fans shall be non-overloading, of size, type and capacity listed in schedules. Wheels shall have not less than four dieformed aluminium or steel blades rivetted to machined steel hubs and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. .2 Motors shall be totally enclosed, sleeve or ball bearing type. Provide wireguard where location is exposed. I ' .3 Where automatic dampers are not required, fans shall be complete with gravity backdraft dampers with galvanized steel frames, bronze bearings, felt edged min. 26 gauge aluminium blades. Interlock motorized damper with fan circuit and fresh air motorized dampers. .4 Provide 13mm mesh birdscreen. I , .5 Fans shall be equal to Greenheck, Cames or Penn. 2.6 V-BELT DRIVES 1 The V-belt drive provided with each fan shall be selected with 140% safety margin over motor horsepower listed. All fan and motor sheaves shall be minimum 2 groove, two belt. All sheaves for 5.6kW motors or smaller shall be of the adjustable type with companion sheaves, on the corresponding fan. For larger motors, the fan and motor sheaves shall both be fixed pitch type, but t provision shall be made by fan supplier to furnish one additional motor sheave for each fan on the job, if it is found necessary to adjust fan speed. 2.7 FAN BEARINGS .1 All fans shall be equipped with heavy duty pillow block type bearings. Access doors shall be provided in casings or ductwork to permit the bearings to be inspected and replaced if necessary. ' .2 Except for permanently lubricated bearings, run in all bearings and after they are run in, drain, flush out and refill with new charge of oil or grease as required. .3 Provide extended lubrication tubes for all bearings that require periodic lubrication. For permanently lubricated bearings provide for a future grease fitting. I i i d PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 1 PAGE 6 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING , 2.8 VARIABLE VOLUME CONTROL ' .1 Provide variable volume bypass type boxes of E.H. Price manufacture or equal in Carnes, size and type as shown on drawings. Include factory mounted 24 ' volt electric control motor, E.H. Price Control Package 011, with 120 volt to 24 volt transformer, and remote heating/cooling thermostat. Wiring to transformer from outlet by Division 16. Mounting of thermostat and all wiring from , transformer to thermostat and motor by this section. 2.9 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 1 Supply and install all grilles and diffusers as required and as shown on drawings. ' .2 Supply grilles shall be: .1 aluminium construction ' .2 curved frame 32mm wide ' .3 through frame screw mounting .4 adjustable double deflection airfoil blades on 19mm centres , .5 vertical face bars .6 key operated opposed blade dampers with removable key ' .7 off-white baked enamel finish. ' .8 prime coat finish for later painting by Division 9. .3 Wall return and exhaust air grilles shall be: ' .1 fixed single deflection 45 deg. horizontal face bars on 19mm centres , .2 construction, frame, mounting, dampers and finish as for supply grilles - above. ' DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 ' SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 7 .4 Ceiling return and transfer grilles shall be: I' .1 0 deg deflection 12mm eggcrate grid ' .2 T-bar type for lay-in ceiling .3 frame as for supply grilles for drywall ceilings .4 construction and finish as for supply grilles above. j' .5 Door grilles will be provided by Division 8. .6 Door grilles shall be: .1 steel construction .2 inverted-V louvre blade sight proof core .3 finish as for supply grilles above. ' .7 Special linear type grilles are specified on drawings. .8 Diffusers shall be as follows: .1 steel construction .2 combination damper and grid .3 type indicated on drawings .4 finish as for supply grilles above. ! ' 2.10 DEHUMIDIFICATION .1 Scope ' .1 Provide a packaged Dectron Dry-O-Tron system or equal in Eng "A" for natatorium environment control including dehumidification, pool and I whirlpool water heating, air heating and cooling, MODEL DS-150. 1 , PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 8 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .2 Quality and Safety Assurance ' .1 Unit shall be CSA and UL listed and shall comply with BOCA code M401.1 and M-402.1. .2 Coils shall be CSA and UL listed. ' .3 Blower motor and compressors shall be CSA and UL listed. ' .4 Water heaters shall be CSA and UL listed and comply with BOCA code P.1505.12.2. , .5 Piping in accordance with BOCA code P-308.2 for corrosion resistant coating of copper tubing and M-702.0 for joints and connections. All ' refrigerant pipes shall be copper type "L" and vinyl-coated for corrosion prevention. .6 Units shall be completely factory assembled, wired, piped and tested. ' All controls shall be factory adjusted and preset to the design conditions. Test report shall be available on request. Engineer reserves ' the right to witness factory performance testing. .7 Manufacturer of the packaged system for natatorium environment ' control shall have a minimum of five years experience in the production of these systems. .8 The systems shall have a limited parts warranty for one full year from , start-up and an additional 4 years on the entire refrigeration circuit. (exclusive of field supplied components and piping) ' .9 The entire cabinet shall be painted internally and externally. .3 Submittals ' .1 Submit overall dimension drawings, field wiring diagram, and product data including air flow, static pressures, total power consumption, ' moisture removal capacity, moisture removal efficiency, air leaving conditions under all operating modes, water heater characteristics and total refrigerant charge. 1 1 ,a DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 15650 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 9 i .4 Operating and Maintenance Data .1 Electrical wiring diagrams, installation and maintenance instructions tand an owner's manual shall be supplied with each unit. .5 General .1 Furnish and install natatorium environment control system. Performance and specifications shall meet or exceed that shown on the equipment schedule. .2 The dehumidifier shall be split system package complete with supply air blower, motor, starters, sensors, controls hot water coil and dual refrigeration circuits in one complete enclosure and remote condenser. EACH REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT shall include a compressor, evaporator (dehumidifying coil), condenser (air reheat coil), pool water a heat exchanger, whirlpool water heat exchanger, and receiver and valving for air conditioning to outdoor condenser. All controls shall be factory adjusted and preset to the design conditions. Either refrigeration circuit shall be able to operate independent of the other automatically in the event of a failure of one circuit or a reduced load situation. Compressors shall be staged to meet demand of increase in control signal for humidity, water temperature or air conditioning. .3 The unit shall be designed for indoor installation. .6 Principle of Operation .1 The unit shall be designed to simultaneously heat pool water, whirlpool water and reject heat to the air, or provide air conditioning. The unit shall not allow wide swings in pool water or room air conditions. Unit must always be capable of heating pool water regardless of other demands. .2 The unit shall operate according to the following sequence. The warm humid air from the natatorium passes through the dehumidifying coil - and is cooled below its dew point, thereby condensing moisture. The heat captured by this process and the heat generated by the u� compressor power consumption are absorbed by a mechanical refrigeration system. This heat is then distributed as specified herein. q j uY PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 ' PAGE 10 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .3 The first priority is to reject heat through water-cooled condensers to heat the pool and whirlpool and maintain pool/whirlpool water temperatures. An automatic compensation system shall proportionally direct the heat where it is required and permit unit start-up regardless of water temperature. During initial start-up with low pool water temperature, all available heat shall be directed to the pool water. Once the desired pool water temperature is reached, the water heating system shall adjust its output automatically. Unit shall be equipped with ' field adjustable water heating capacity accessed externally. .4 The unit shall operate normally at specified water flow rate ±20%. The water temperature difference between the inlet and the outlet shall not exceed 20 OF in all operating modes to allow for the use of non-metallic piping on pool water mains. Water temperatures exceeding 130 OF shall , not be acceptable. .5 All remaining heat shall be transferred to the air and contribute to the pool enclosure heating requirement unless air conditioning is in operation. The leaving supply air dry bulb temperature is always the same or higher than the entering return air temperature, except when air conditioning is in operation. .6 If heat contribution to space by Dry-O-Tron is insufficient to maintain room set point, a unit mounted temperature sensor shall energize supply air hot water heating coil circuits on demand to satisfy room condition. Control output signal to valve shall be 2-10Vdc or 4- 20mA. .7 Cabinet .1 The units shall be constructed of 14-gauge satin coated sheet metal, reinforced for maximum rigidity with a 12-gauge base. Cabinet shall have one section for the blower, compressors) and water heater(s) and a second section for the coils and drain pan. .2 Hinged, removable service panels shall be furnished to provide access to all internal parts from both sides and in both sections. .3 The unit shall have a built-in electrical control panel in a separate compartment in order not to disturb the air flow within the dehumidifier during electrical servicing. .4 The unit shall have a built-in air filter rack with separate access door. .5 The unit shall be equipped with an opening complete with built-in damper and filter suitable for connection of a duct to admit outdoor air. An integral 7 day programmeable time clock shall control the outdoor air motorized damper and remote exhaust fan during occupied/un- occupied modes. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 11 1 � .8 Insulation I � .1 Entire coil section shall be insulated to prevent condensation with 1/2 inch thick fibreglass duct liner insulation, approved for 250 OF operating temperature and up to 5,000 fpm air velocity. Surface to be protected against perforation with a reinforcing mesh. Fire resistance rating to conform with NFPA Standard 90A. Sound attenuation coefficient shall be not less than 0.64 at a frequency of 1000 Hz as per ASTM Standard C423. Thermal conductivity shall be not more than 0.232 Btufin-h-sq ft-F at 75 F. Insulation shall be securely fastened with approved adhesive and mechanical fasteners. i .9 Evaporator (Dehumidifier coil) 1 .1 Shall not be less than eight rows deep for maximum moisture removal capacity with air velocity not to exceed 500 fpm, with 1/2 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded to assure high heat transfer with maximum twelve flat aluminum fins per inch. 'll .2 Corrugated, facetized or copper fins shall not be acceptable. System performance reduction from coated coils must be fully disclosed. .3 Coil shall have a 16-gauge galvanized casing and end plates coated with 660 clear coat. .4 Coil shall be factory tested at air pressures not less than 400 psig in a water bath. .5 An automatic motorized damper shall be installed above the evaporator !, coil for apparatus dew point control during cold water start-up and occupied/un-occupied operation . Capacity reduction methods shall absolutely not be used for dew point control. .10 Condenser (Air Reheat Coil) .1 Shall not be less than three rows deep for variable heat transfer into the air with 1/2 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded to assure high heat transfer with maximum twelve facetized aluminum fins per inch. .2 Copper fins shall not be acceptable. System performance reduction from coated coils must be fully disclosed. .3 Coil shall have a 16-gauge galvanized casing and end plates coated with 660 clear coat. I� .4 Coil shall be factory tested at air pressures not less than 400 psig in a water bath. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 12 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .11 Drain Pan .1 Each unit shall be equipped with a sloped non-trapping drain pan under the entire evaporator coil and prevent condensate carryover. Flat drain pans susceptible to water pooling and subsequent bacteria growth shall not be acceptable. .2 The drain pan shall be made of 12-gauge grey Noryl plastic with hair cell finish , temperature resistant to 200 OF complete with recessed bottom drain, sanitary round comers, and flush mounted stainless steel strainer for minimum condensate collection in pan. Drain connection shall be suitable for 112 inch P-trap connection using compression ring fitting for easy disassembling and cleaning. .12 Blower .1 Shall be double width, double inlet, multi-blade forward curved centrifugal type blower wheel, dynamically and statically balanced and tested, mounted on a solid steel shaft coated with silicon. r .2 Shall have a galvanized steel wheel and galvanized steel casing ■ painted with a baked enamel finish. ■ .3 Bearings shall be grease-lubricated, self-aligning for 200,000 hours average life. .13 Blower Motor .1 Shall be open drip-proof, Gass B insulation, induction type, 40 °C rise, pre-lubricated ball bearings mounted on an adjustable base. .2 Shall have a service factor rating of 1.15 or higher and must be stamped or marked high efficiency. .14 Blower Belt Drive Assembly .1 Shall be single V-belt with a safety factor not less than 1.2 based on nominal motor horsepower, dynamically balanced cast iron fixed pitch blower sheave and dynamically balanced cast iron variable pitch motor sheave. ,j DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 13 i .15 Water Heaters .1 Shall be coaxial, double wall, vented, for maximum heat transfer from refrigerant to potable water and have cross contamination prevention feature. Pool heaters shall be corrosion resistant, cupro-nickel water circuit, self-purging and self-draining counter flow design. Water circuits shall be supplied with self-aligning union fittings for easy connection. The internal water circuit of the unit shall be smooth, valveless, and designed for constant water flow. .I .16 Compressors .1 Shall be semi-hermetic compressors, reciprocating type, suction gas cooled, suitable for refrigerant R-22, equipped with internal solid state thermal protection sensor, service valves, easily removable crankcase heater for liquid migration protection, spring mounted, muffler plate on the discharge valve, oil pump for forced lubrication, oil level sight glass, suitable for reduced voltage starting (not applicable for 460 V), pump down cycle protection and oil failure protection. Compressors shall have a 4-year extended parts warranty. .17 Refrigeration Circuit .1 Shall have a replaceable core type liquid line filter drier, liquid and moisture indicator visible from outside the unit without removal of the access panel, thermostatic expansion valve, pump down solenoid valve, two manual valves to isolate filter drier for fast drier core replacement. .2 Tamper proof, hermetically sealed non-adjustable high and low pressure controls and refrigeration service valves shall be installed using Schraeder type valves. �( .3 Refrigeration service valves shall be located outside of the airstream. .4 Suction line shall be fully insulated with not less than 1/2 inch closed cell insulation. .18 Control Panel .1 Shall be remote and will not to disturb the air flow during servicing. .2 Blower motor and compressors shall be controlled by contactors. .3 Blower motor and compressors shall be protected with push-button operated, adjustable thermal trip and fixed magnetic trip overloads. i � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 14 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .4 Voltage monitor shall be provided to shut down electrical system to prevent damage in the event of temporary voltage fluctuation or phase loss. Voltage monitor shall be auto reset. .5 Power block terminal shall be provided for proper wire size. .6 Dry contacts shall be provided for alarm and blower interlock. .7 Colour coding and wire numbering shall be provided for easy troubleshooting. All wires shall be in a wire duct. .8 Compressors shall have a time delay start to prevent short cycling. .9 All wiring shall be installed in accordance with UL or CSA safety electrical code regulations, and shall be in accordance with NFPA. All components used shall be UL or CSA listed. .19 Control Panel .1 Unit shall be monitored and controlled with a solid state microprocessor system complete with control panel equipped with 2 line by 16 character LCD display. .2 The operator panel shall be of metal casing, splashproof (NEMA 3R, front side) for use in hostile environments and equipped with 22 large snap-action keys. The operator panel shall be control panel mounted, and include a serial TTY 9600 baud communications interface to the controller. .3 The operator panel shall be field replaceable and connector shall be equipped with slide lock. The panel shall have a built-in self-test mode for keyboard and display. .4 Control panel shall provide on-off status of fan, compressor, supply/return air temperature, filter/coil pressure drop, cooling stage, dehumidification stage, pool water heating, sensors (temp) in pool water, supply air, humidity sensors, etc. for a complete diagnostic and operating system. .5 All sensors shall be unit mounted, factory tested and calibrated. Easy-to-use field calibration capability shall be provided through either Vim potentiometers or the operator panel. Humidity sensor shall be corrosion resistant, especially suited for harsh exposure such as indoor pools and spas with chlorine containing environments. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 15 i i .20 Air Filters .1 Shall be 2 inch disposable type suitable for commercial application, to handle average dust loading. Initial resistance at 100% R.A.F. of 0.12 inch W.G. and average arrestance efficiency of 85% based on 500 fpm { air velocity. .2 Unit shall have an extended filter rack with hinged door for even air distribution across the dehumidifier coil. Filters must not be less than 8 inches from the evaporator coil face. .21 Air Cooled Air Conditioning .1 Unit shall be equipped with air conditioning feature to reject heat to an outdoor air-cooled condenser. The condenser shall be equipped with transformer and 24 VAC control including contactor for fan motor. The unit hall be equipped with a dry contact rated for 24VAC/8A to operate the remote outdoor condenser control. .2 Each refrigeration circuit shall include three-way refrigerant valve, receiver with pressure relief valve set to 400 psig sized to hold the outdoor condenser charge, pressure control valve and pressure differential valve and 2 shut-off valves to isolate the condenser. .3 Unit shall include an oil separator package. .4 The condenser casing shall be constructed from heavy gauge galvanized steel with fan chambers in sectionalized cabinets. Major structural members shall be 10 guage galvanized steel for maximum rigidity, strength and durability. .5 Coils shall be constructed of die-formed, collared, self spacing aluminum plate fins and copper tubes staggered in direction of air flow and mechanically bonded to give metal to metal contact for maximum heat transfer. After welding each coil is factory leak and pressure tested at 400 psi. .6 Fans shall be 30" diameter, aluminum blades with steel hubs. Fans are j statically and dynamically balanced for smooth, vibration free operation.Maximum tip speed is 111 ft/sec. .7 Fans shall have automatic reset internal overioad protection and permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. Motors are weather protected for outdoor duty. Fan motors are wired with weather resistant harnesses. .8 Condenser shalll be complete with ambient fan cycling kit, control transformer and magnetic contactors. I �<J PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 16 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .22 Hot Water Coil .1 Shall be for variable heat transfer into the air, with 5/8 inch OD seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded to assure maximum of 12 aluminum fins per inch. .2 16 gauge galvanized casing and end plates coated with "660 Clear Coat". .3 Coil to be factory tested at air pressure of not less than 400 psi water bath. Coil shall have CSA and UL listing. .4 Provide for field mounting 3 way electric modulating hot water valve. .23 Outdoor air .1 An integral 7 day programmeable time clock shall signal unit occupied/unoccupied period to control outdoor air ventilation. The unit shall have auxiliary contacts to signal the integral fresh air intake damper and remote exhaust fan. .24 Performance Model DRY-O-TRON DS-150 575/3/60 Moisture removal capacity - 160 lb/hr @ 85 F / 50% RH (with 0 CFM outdoor air) Air Volume Occupied Supply Air - 13,000 CFM Return Air - 10,000 CFM (10,000) Outdoor Air- 3,000 CFM Un-occupied Supply Air - 13,000 CFM Return Air - 13,000 CFM Outdoor Air- 0 CFM Emergency Supply Air - 13,000 CFM Return Air - 7,000 CFM Outdoor Air- 6,000 CFM Compressor#182 25ton 20.0 kw 160 LA 136.0 RA ea Blower 13,000 CFM / 1.0" ESP Blower Motor 15 HP 17.0 FLA Minimum Ampacity 76 A Evap Sensible Cooling A/C 280 MBH Hot Water Coil 600 MBH, EWT 160F 76 USGPM, press. drop 3.52 psi Pool Heat Condenser 40 USGPM, press. drop - 6.0 psi DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 17 Outdoor Condenser 480 MBH THR Ampacity 575/3/60, 8.4 A I .25 Control Sequence t .1 The pool dehumidification system is controlled by a dedicated micro- processor provided by the unit manufacturer. Primary power to remote associated devices shall be wired direct with control interface only through dehumidifier micro-processor. .2 When dehumidifier disconnect is powered system controls shall be energized and supply fan shall start. Normally closed integral fresh air damper shall open to minimum position and pool area roof exhaust fan shall run on low speed, during Occupied mode. When system is in Un- occupied mode damper shall close and exhaust fan shall stop. A remote manual emergency 30 minute timer switch shall over-ride to open fully fresh air damper and power high speed of exhaust fan. .3 On a humidity rise the controller starts the compressors in stages on increased demand. Heat rejection is controlled by the water and air temperature sensors. i .4 On a pool water temperature drop, the unit controls will acknowledge the heating requirement, staging the compressors and energizing the integral 3-way refrigerant valves for full heat rejection to the pool circuit. Should the humidity level be below 45% RH with a co-incidental pool heating requirement, the compressors will not start Unit mounted dry contacts will signal the auxiliary pool and/or whirlpool heater control circuits for water heating if compressor is not running . A call for space cooling will over-ride this sequence energizing compressors to reject heat to pool and/or outdoor condenser on demand. .5 When the compressor(s) is operating during un-occupied period, the air is reheated to the same or higher than the return temperature via the units integral hot gas reheat coil regardless of operating mode. No cooling of the supply air occurs unless the pool enclosure specifically calls for air conditioning. .6 On a pool enclosure air temperature rise, the controller starts l r� compressor #1 and switches the dehumidifier to the air conditioning mode. This activates a solenoid valve which directs hot gas to the outdoor unit. A further rise in air temperature will energize the second compressor. Water heating will operate normally on demand during A/C mode. Pool/whirlpool water will have priority of heat rejection on demand during A/C mode with balance rejected to the outdoor condenser. i i i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 18 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .7 On a pool enclosure temperature drop the controller provides a 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc signal for proportional control of the integral air heating coil hot water valve. The dehumidifier has a built-in heating/cooling dead-band to prevent over-cycling. Dehumidification and pool water heating operate normally during this mode. .8 Integral supply air temperature sensors shall over-ride to maintain a minimum supply air temperature of 50F. An integral freeze stat shall protect heating coil by stopping supply fan. .9 A built-in water pressure switch shall stop the compressor in the event of loss of pool water flow. .10 The dehumidifier shall be equipped with in-puts for use as remote on/off and firestat interlocks. When either contact opens the blower is stopped immediately and the compressor pumps-down. All operation halts under this condition. Normal operation resumes when these contacts close. .11 The unit shall have a fault alarm circuit and dry-contact to be interlocked remote to alert a service requirement. .26 Product delivery, storage and handling .1 Handle unit carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Damaged units or damaged components shall not be installed. Replace all damaged parts with new parts from the manufacturer. .2 If unit is to be stored prior to installation store in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction and physical damage. _ .3 Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading the unit and moving it to the final location. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 I SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 19 .27 Installation .1 Execute work in accordance with the drawings and specification and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The contractor shall provide the services of a qualified refrigeration mechanic to install and connect the outdoor condenser. All brazing shall be done under nitrogen purge. Do not open ball valves inside the dehumidifier until all exterior piping is leak checked and triple evacuated. The last vacuum shall be broken with liquid refrigerant R-22, taking care to weigh in the amount drawn into the condenser piping. The remaining charge should be weighed in the gas state to suction access valve on the exterior of the dehumidifier with the compressor in operaticn. .1 The unit nameplate notes the field charge to be added by the contractor. It is the difference of"total system charge" and the "factory charge". DO NOT EXCEED the lineset length or size stamped on the nameplate as built-in receiver(s) may be under capacity for the extra field charge required as a result of such modifications. .2 All equipment and accessories field mounted remote of the Dry- O-tron and condenser proper are NOT supplied by the unit manufacturer unless specifically listed in the specification. This contractor shall provide for the supply and/or installation by appropriate trade all remote mounted equipment, including but not limited to, disconnects, starters, controls, sensors, relays, gauges, dampers and operators, fitters, valves, fittings and hardware etc, necessary to achieve a complete and operational system according to the specification. Dehumidifier unit supplier shall provide field assistance in co-ordinating installation and j interlocks as necessary. .2 Contractor shall balance system air and water flow to specified performance and provide a copy of report to the engineer and the unit manufacturers representative prior to commissioning. .3 Provide the services of a factory trained service technician to start-up, balance, calibrate and demonstrate unit to owners. Equipment supplier shall turn over to owners, upon satisfactory commissioning of system, letter of verification and applicable warranty certificates. .5 The manufacturer shall provide at no charge a factory training seminar for a limited number of owner representatives if desired. All expenses for out of town travel to the plant will be covered by owner. 1 r j PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 20 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCTWORK 1 All ductwork shall be constructed in strict accordance with the latest ASHRAE Guide. .2 All ductwork unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be made of galvanized iron. Metal shall be best quality open hearth steel. The galvanizing shall be carefully done to prevent cracking. .3 All laps shall be in the direction of air flow. No sheet metal screws shall be used in the dud where it is possible to use rivets and bolts. All edges and slips shall be hammered down so as to leave a smooth finished surface inside the ducts. .4 All duds shall be braced and stiffened so that they will not breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. .5 Rectangular duds shall be constructed by breaking the comers and grooving the longitudinal seam, using the Pittsburgh lock or approved air tight joint. Elbows and transformation sections shall be formed with Pittsburgh comer seams or double seam comers. .6 Ducts shall be free of obstruction, vibration and rattle. Leakage will be permitted to a maximum of 5% in the longest dud run. .7 All rectangular ductwork carrying air at low or medium pressure and having any side over 300mm in width or depth shall be reinforced by cross bracing. .8 All ducts shall be complete in themselves and no single partitions shall be permitted between ducts unless specifically shown. .9 All tees, elbows or bends shall be made with a centre-line radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the width of the dud. Where space conditions do not permit the specified radius, then square throat fittings may be used complete with double thickness turning vanes. .10 In special cases only, with prior approval of the Consultant, pipes may pass through duds. In these cases, the pipe shall be covered with a streamline deflector, the duct shall be sealed air-tight and increased in size to provide the original free area. f DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 21 .11 Where drawings indicate that the ductwork is to be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish around damper quadrants, access doors, etc. Mount metal collars of suitable size and width on insulated ducts to allow insulation to be neatly finished. .12 Provide counterflashing for roof mounted equipment and any other duct openings in the roof. .13 The sides of tapered fittings shall not slope at an angle exceeding 15 deg. from the line of air flow unless specifically shown or approval of the Consultant is obtained. .14 The transitions at the axial fan shall not exceed 10 deg. .15 Minimum low pressure duct gauges shall be as follows: .16 Rectangular Ductwork, Galvanized Iron- Up to 300 mm (Largest side).55 mm thick 310 to 750 mm .70 mm thick !, 760 to 1370 mm .85 mm thick j 1380 to 2150 mm 1.01 mm thick 2160 mm and up 1.31 mm thick i .17 Round Ductwork, Galvanized Iron- 660mm or less dia. .55mm thickness 670 to 910mm dia. .85mm thickness 920 to 1270mm dia. 1.01mm thickness 1280 to 1520mm dia. 1.31mm thickness .18 Round ductwork shall be shop or factory fabricated of helically wound galvanized iron strips with spiral lock seam. Each duct section and fitting shall have a plain and a belled or swaged end to permit a sliding fit with an overlap of not less than 100mm. Insert sheet metal screws in joints at 300mm centres around perimeter with not less than three screws per joint. Ducts over 1000mm dia. shall have flanged joints. Surface of overlap or flanges shall be cleaned and painted with duct sealing compound before sections are joined. .19 Ninety degree elbows shall be of five piece construction. Mitred elbows with approved turning vanes may be used where space limitations do not permit use of five piece elbows. Forty-five degree elbows shall be of three piece construction. .20 All ductwork in connection with the kitchen and dishwasher exhaust systems 'i shall be made absolutely watertight and sloped back to low drain points where possible. Access doors shall be provided in the sides of the ducts leading from the kitchen hoods at all changes of direction and shall be 200 x 300mm. Provide access doors to bottom of kitchen exhaust duct risers. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 22 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .21 Ductwork from the dishwasher, shower, whirlpool, swimming pool exhaust systems shall be aluminium ductwork of gauges as previously specified. The manner of construction, however, will differ in that the bottom and a portion of each side shall be formed by bending the sheet metal upwards at each side, thereby leaving no seams on the bottom of the duct. The joints of this ductwork shall be soldered and caulked. .22 Kitchen exhaust ductwork from the hoods that is not exposed shall be separate and shall be 16 gauge carbon steel, welded ductwork. .23 All exposed ductwork in connection with hood exhaust systems in kitchen shall be constructed of No. 316 stainless steel, 18 gauge, No. 4 finish. All seams, etc. shall be continuous external weld, polished smooth. .24 Make final connections to kitchen hoods. Install kitchen hoods supplied by others. .25 Installation of the kitchen exhaust system shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 96. .26 Supply and install deflectors or splitters with quadrant dampers at all points on supply systems and exhaust systems where small ducts are taken from larger ones. .27 Supply and install manual louvre dampers and turning vanes where shown. 3.2 SHOWER EXHAUST DUCTWORK .1 Slope shower exhaust ductwork up in direction of air flow to facilitate drainage of moisture back through exhaust grilles. The first six metres of shower exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of material specified for fume hood exhaust and shall be sealed waterproof. .2 Plastic flexible duct can be used if totally sealed tight. 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS .1 Ducts 1500mm and less in width or depth shall be supported by 25mm wide by 16 gauge or heavier galvanized bent hangers fastened to the side and bottom of the duct by bolts, rivets or metal screws. Straps shall be continuous under the duct. Speed nuts and nailed units shall not be used to fasten hangers to ducts. Hangers shall be spaced at not more than 2.5m intervals. .2 Duds over 1500mm width or depth shall be supported with 10mm diameter vertical rod hangers bolted to an angle supporting the dud from below and bolted to the bottom of the dud at 600mm intervals. Space hangers at not more than 1200mm intervals. � DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 23 .3 Where vertical ducts pass through floors, they shall be supported by angles rivetted or bolted to the duct and bearing on the building structure. .4 Support all ducts immediately adjacent to flexible connections. .5 Duct hangers for ducts shall not be suspended from the steel roof deck. Hangers for such ducts shall be supported from structural bearings such as beams, top chords of steel joists, or structural concrete slabs. Where structural " bearings do not exist, provide angle or channel iron from nearest structural bearings to support hangers. .6 Refer to Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods for further details regarding hangers and supports. 3.4 PLENUMS, CASINGS, BAFFLES I,I .1 Casings, plenums and connections between components of air supply units, all outdoor air intake and exhaust plenums and plenums around built up casings for double width fans shall be of 1.6mm thick prime quality galvanized steel plates. Each sheet of material shall be fabricated as a panel. Panels, both side, wall and roof, shall be joined by a 40mm standing seam. Seams parallel to air flow shall be mismatched in adjacent panels for strength and appearance. Standing seams shall be on outside of casing. Seams shall be rivetted or bolted on approximately 300mm centres. i .2 Drop type roof shall be assembled to side walls by standing seams extending 40mm above roof. .3 In general, standing seams perpendicular to air flow shall be placed outside casing. Supplemental reinforcing angles, where required, shall be placed inside casing parallel to air flow. Inside angles shall be bolted or rivetted to casing wall adjacent to standing seam. Rivets or bolts shall be on approximately 300mm centres. .4 Side walls to 1200mm high and roof span to 1200mm wide, will not have inside angles. I .5 Larger spans shall be reinforced as follows: Inside Reinforcing Angles i Side Wall Heights or No. Angles j Roof Width Angles Spaced Up to 1.25m 0 r 1.26 to 2.5m 1 Middle 2.51 to 3.7m 2 1/3 Points Over 3.7m Variable 1.25m centres I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 24 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .6 Where access door is in casing, one side angle shall be located just above the door. A similar angle shall be provided just below door to span only the panel in which door is included. .7 Casing access door openings shall be framed above and below door with 40 x 40 x 3mm galvanized angle spanning between vertical seams securely rivetted to panel. Bottom where plenums rest on floor shall be in accordance with Drawing No. D-116. Bracing in addition to that outlined above, shall be used as required to provide a structurally sound assembly. .8 Heating coils and cooling coils and their frames shall be completely enclosed within the casing. Casings shall be flanged and bolted to heating coils, cooling coils and other such equipment with galvanized 6mm stove bolts on approximately 75mm centres uniformly spaced, or as determined by holes in equipment flanges. All joints shall be air tight. Waterproof gaskets shall be provided on all joints on both sides of cooling coil section. .9 Baffles shall be installed in the mixing chamber to prevent stratification. Baffles shall be Barber Coleman prefabricated "Air turns" located where shown and as required for proper air mixing. .10 Mount metal collars on plenum openings where insulation is to be applied to provide a neat finish. .11 Openings for pipes, conduits, etc. shall be sealed air-tight. 3.5 VOLUME AND SPLITTER DAMPERS .1 Supply and install all hand operated splitter and volume dampers, complete with locking quadrant operators, in locations specified, as shown on the drawings, and as required for balancing purposes. .2 Provide balancing dampers at all supply and exhaust take-offs. .3 For supply ducts, splitter dampers shall be air foil type, fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel and shall be the full depth of the branch duct and not less in length than the duct width of the branch duct. .4 Splitters under 300mm in height or length shall have a pivot rod fastened to one end of the splitter sheet. The rod shall be held in place by a quadrant type damper control using Duro-Dyne Quadrant K-8 or K-9. .5 Splitters over 300mm in height or length shall be hinged to the duct crotch at the pivot end and shall be fitted at their downstream end with extension rods passing through to the duct wall and fastened to holding clips using Duro-Dyne SRP-40 and SRP-24. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 25 .6 Volume dampers shall be opposed blade with each blade not more than 175mm in width. Dampers larger than .5 sq m shall be multi-sectional with _ . 1.22m maximum length of blade. jl .7 All balancing, splitter and volume dampers shall be free from noise and vibration in any position. 3.6 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE STOP FLAPS .1 Supply and install a system of fire dampers and fire stop flaps. Dampers and flaps shall have ULC labels. Follow manufacturer's Installation Instructions. .2 Dampers, housings, and method of installation shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A - "Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems" and shall have C.S.A. and UL (Canada) approval. .3 Fire dampers shall be located within the fire separation membrane which the duct is penetrating and the opening in the fire separation membrane, e.g. masonry wall or floor, shall be sleeved and fire stopped with approved fire stopping material around and within the sleeve to provide for expansion and to maintain the integrity of the fire partition. .4 Where ducts penetrate dry-wall (gypsum board) construction, fire dampers shall be framed with double steel studs all around the opening, tied into the steel studs of the fire rated membrane. .5 If the fire damper cannot be installed within the fire rated membrane, the off-set must be of the same or equivalent material as the fire rated membrane. .6 Curtain type fire dampers in ducts 300mm and less in height shall be Type B. Type A dampers may be used in ducts over 300mm in height. I .7 Fire dampers shall be supported by structural members and independently from the ductwork. i .8 Ducts and fire dampers shall penetrate the fire rated membrane perpendicularly (at right angle). I .9 For ceiling mounted grilles and diffusers, provide fire stop flap type dampers as !, tested and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada and listed in "List of Equipment and Materials, Volume II, Building Construction," latest revision. .10 Generally fire dampers shall be installed in, but not necessarily confined to, the following ducts: 1 � .1 Ducts that enter or leave Mechanical Rooms and Fan rooms. .2 Ducts that enter or leave fireproof shafts. i �I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 , PAGE 26 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .3 Ducts passing through fire walls. .4 Ducts passing through floors and not enclosed in fireproof shafts. .5 As further required and/or indicated on the drawings. .11 Fire dampers in stainless steel and aluminium ductwork shall be of stainless steel construction. .12 Confine all fire damper construction and location with all Authorities having jurisdiction. 3.7 MOTORIZED DAMPERS .1 Supply and install all motorized dampers indicated on drawings. Dampers shall be of Honeywell manufacture and opposed blade type. 3.8 ACCESS DOORS .1 Supply and install access doors in ducts and plenums for servicing of control elements, fire dampers, balancing dampers, damper motors, coils and all other duct mounted equipment, and for oiling of bearings and removal of electric motors. .2 Access doors in ductwork shall be a minimum of 450 x 300mm clear, 1.3mm thick, or as close to these dimensions as duct size permits, with edges of door folded and duct opening provided with a frame. Door shall be secured with a minimum of 4 sash fasteners, shall be provided with a gasket, and shall be air tight. Fasteners shall be equal to Duro-Dyne SLA. .3 On insulated ducts access doors shall be double wall construction, with void filled with insulation equivalent to the duct insulation. 3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS .1 On the suction and discharge of all fans, provide 150mm wide airtight Duralon, elastomer coated, fibreglas fabric, flexible connections to isolate the fan from the ductwork. 3.10 STORM LOUVRES, BIRDSCREENS, DOOR GRILLES .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, storm louvres, birdscreens and door grilles will be provided under Divisions 8 and 10. 3.11 OUTSIDE OPENINGS .1 Openings will be left under Divisions 3, 4 and 7 in the outside wall, roof, etc., r where shown and required for fresh air intakes and exhaust. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 27 h{ .2 Flashing for roof curbs and ducts under Division 7. Counterflashing by this Section. .3 Supply and install all necessary ductwork and plenums for intakes and exhausts and patch around same to make a weathertight job. 3.12 EXTERIOR INTAKE AND DISCHARGE COWLS 1 .1 Supply and install exterior cowls where shown on plans. Cowls and hoods shall be equipped with 12mm mesh brass birdscreens fastened at the mouth of the intake or discharge of the cowls. Cowls shall be fabricated, set in place and flashed by this Section. Cowls shall be firmly secured to the structure. They shall be 18 U.S. gauge galvanized or as detailed. The flashing shall be soldered. .2 Roof hoods, where shown, shall be galvanized steel, complete with bird sreeen. Units shall be equal to Penn "Airette". 3.13 CONNECTION TO LOUVRES .1 Extend ductwork up to weatherproof louvres and make connections to same. Fill and caulk all openings to prevent water from draining to the wall or ceiling between the louvre and ductwork. 3.14 BLANKING OFF LOUVRES .1 Fasten 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal to unused louvres and unused portions of louvres and seal all around to prevent entry of air. .2 Apply 25mm thick rigid duct liner consisting of fibreglass formed into a rigid board of 72 kg/cu m density and coated on the exposed side with neoprene compound, with conductance of 0.032 W/(m.C) at 24 deg C mean temperature, to inside of sheet metal. Impale insulation over mechanical fasteners and 1 secure with clips. Paint raw edges of insulation with sealing compound. 3.15 ACOUSTIC INSULATION .1 Insulate the inside of ductwork and plenums up to 15' from all HVAC units with 50mm thick Fiberglas type AF-545 rigid duct liner, neoprene coated. Fasten iwith Flintstick 230-14 adhesive and metal clips and washers on 300mm centres. { .2 All insulation shall be cut to fit tightly between bracing angles and sizes left inside the insulation shall be the duct sizes shown on the drawings, i.e. the drawing dimensions are the finished inside clear dimensions. .3 Exposed edges of insulation shall be provided with metal nosings. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 28 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING , .4 Flame spread on insulation shall be in accordance with the requirements of all Authorities having jurisdiction. .5 Increase the duct size by 50mm in each direction to maintain the clear cross section shown on the drawings. This generally applies to ductwork above the roof for the rooftop A/C units on the roof. 3.16 DUCT WATERPROOFING .1 In all locations where cooling coils are located in ductwork, the interior of the duct from 300mm upstream of the cooling coil to 1500mm downstream of the cooling coil shall be coated as follows: 1 coat of Flintguard 700-01 1.5 Usq m 1 layer of yellow jacket 1 coat Flintguard 700-01 1.5 Usq m .2 Slope the bottom of the duct to a low point and provide a 25mm nipple for drainage. .3 Provide a galvanized drain pan outside the ductwork below each cooling coil, lined as above. 3.17 COVERING 1 Refrigerant suction lines shall be insulated with 19mm thick Armaflex with cemented joints pipe insulation. .2 Supply and install 25mm thick rigid fibreglas RFFRK insulation applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for combustion air intakes, and fresh air intakes. .3 Cover emergency generator exhaust inside the building and through roof with flexible 40mm thick Fibreglas metal mesh blankets Type 900 with R facing or 40mm thick calcium silicate block insulation, held in place with 20mm metal bands on 300mm centres, or 40mm thick magnesia block insulation, wired on with 25mm air space between pipe and insulation, using expanded metal lath. Recover with 12mm hydraulic setting insulation cement applied in two layers and trowelled to a smooth hard finish. Insulation is to be installed so as to allow for expansion. Provide thimble and sleeve and raincap where pipe passes through roof. 3.18 PAINTING OF DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO OUTDOORS .1 All ductwork exposed to outdoors shall be carefully sealed with Dow Coming silicone sealer. Ductwork shall then be painted on the outside with primer and two coats of Asphaltum or similar weather and corrosion resistant paint. This shall apply to intake and discharge cowls, hoods, cabinets, etc. 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 29 3.19 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR FANS .1 Supply to Section 15240 shop drawings of all equipment to be isolated. Such drawings shall be provided as soon as possible so that the progress of the project will not be hindered. 3.20 HUMIDIFIER I .1 Install humidifiers in the ductwork as per manufacturer's instructions. 3.21 ADDITIONAL START-UP SERVICE .1 In addition to service covered under guarantee provide start-up and shut-down of air conditioning systems for first full cooling season. Also provide start-up after the first full season. 3.22 LOCATION OF OUTLETS .1 The position of all outlets shown on the Drawings is approximate only. Check the location of all outlets with the Consultant and make such adjustments in { position as are necessary to conform with architectural features, acoustic tile pattern, etc., and the outlets required by the other trades, without extra charge. Ceiling outlets and their assemblies must be constructed so that they fit the j spacing and manufacture of the removable acoustic ceiling. i 2 Be responsible for exact dimensions and positions of openings required for the I4f passage of pipes, ducts, etc. 3.23 FIRE THERMOSTATS .1 Provide electrical manual reset type fire thermostats in the air mixing chambers in supply and return ducts of the rooftop units to shut down units on sensing of high temperature. Include wiring of such fire thermostats. 3.24 SMOKE DETECTORS I .1 Mount in ductwork smoke detectors provided under Division 16, in accordance with the Ontario Building Code and applicable standards. 3.25 MOTORIZED DAMPERS, RELAYS AND INTERLOCKS i .1 All supply fans shall be interlocked with respective motorized intake dampers so that on start-up of fan, respective motorized dampers will open fully. Include all control wiring, relays, etc. Motorized dampers to be of Honeywell manufacture with gasketting blades. Include 24 volt damper operators for idampers. Irit, _ PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 30 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3.26 MOTORIZED DAMPER CONTROL .1 Supply and install a modulating damper in ductwork and a heat/cool thermostat. Thermostat shall be controlled by a duct sensor sensing air temperature so that on rise in temperature, (winter operation) damper will close and on rise in temperature (summer operation), damper will open. Provide all necessary relays, etc. 3.27 SERVICE ROOM VENTILATION .1 Provide line voltage thermostat for electrical room ventilation. Wring of same by Section 16. Thermostat shall cycle fan and intake motorized damper to maintain 21 degrees C. 3.28 VENTILATION CONTROLS 1 Provide line voltage thermostat for room ventilation. Wiring of same by Section 16. Thermostat shall cycle fan and associated motorized dampers to maintain 70 deg. F. 3.29 FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN .1 For Units #AC-1 to AC-9 including any interlocking exhaust fans, provide auxiliary contacts to shut down units on activation of Fire Alarm. Wiring between Fire Alarm and Unit Starter and any additional relays by Division 16. 3.30 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION .1 Dry-O-Tron Unit .1 Humidistat wired to Dry-O-Tron cooling circuit shall energize cooling on rise in humidity from set point of approximately 50%. Interlock between DX coil and condenser. .2 Room thermostat shall control the following. On rise in room temperature, the valve controlling cooling coil located downstream of unit shall open on drop in room temperature. P.E. switch shall energize the condenser heat coil. On further drop in temperature, the valve controlling the hot water heating coil located downstream of unit shall be energized. .3 An aquastat located in supply pool water shall through a P.E. switch energize Dry-O-Tron pool water heater circuit. On further drop in temperature, a normally closed valve on the hot water supply to the hot water converter shall open. Supply water temperature to be approximately 82 degrees F. A flow switch in discharge water line shall deenergize Dry-O-Tron on low water flow. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGE 31 I .4 Cooperate with Dry-O-Tron supplier in preparing control schematic and n setting up controls. All wiring, pneumatics, P.E. switches, associated with Dry-O-Tron shall be by this Section. .2 Mechanical Room and Miscellaneous Ventilation j .1 Room thermostat shall cycle Exhaust Fan and open respective intake and exhaust dampers to maintain room temperature. Provide necessary P.E. switches. .3 Exhaust Fans .1 When fan is energized associated damper shall open. .4 AC Units .1 Space thermostat shall energize unit heating or cooling cycles and maintain set temperature. .2 In morning warnup mode, fresh air and exhaust dampers shall close, return air damper shall open and fan shall start until space temperature J, is uniform and at set point. On occupied mode, the dampers shall modulate and heating or cooling cycles shall be energized. .3 During unoccupied mode, space temperature shall be set back to 60°F and unit shall start in morning warnup mode to maintain set conditions. .5 Make-Up Air Unit (Change Rooms) .1 Unit shall be interlocked with change room exhaust fan. .2 On startup, motorized dampers shall open and fans shall start in free cooling mode. Space thermostat shall energize modulating heating or DX cooling to maintain set condition. .3 Unit control panel shall be provided for remote installation and monitoring of fan status, unit operation (heating/cooling/staging), alarms for fan failures. .6 Remote Startup of Exhaust Fans and AC Units .1 Provide a central panel and wiring to fans and air handling units and AC units for remote startup of all exhaust fans and AC units. Remote panel shall be located in program room of pool area for all units except !, library units and Library system controls to be located in Library workroom. .2 Units and fans operation status (on/off), cooling/heating/staging, alarms (audible/visible) shall be annunciated at these panels. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 15 PAGE 32 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .3 Provide contacts for each unit and fan for off-site (remote) monitoring of all systems. .4 All wiring from panel to AC units and fans by this section. .5 Control system shall be equal to Carver/Parker System complete with computer, monitor, printer and modem. Control contractor shall produce wiring/control diagram for each system and submit for approval by Consultant. .6 All thermostats shall be Carrier Temp. Stats model capable of communicating with three remote room sensors, 365 day programmable type. Provide two sensors in Library area complete with thermostats (tempstats) to operate AC-6 and AG7 simultaneously to maintain set space temperature. Provide two sensors in community halls to operate AC-2 and AC-3 separately for temperature control of each area served by AC-2 & AC-3, respectively. .7 Energy management system shall include a demand alarm (load shed module) to increase space set temperature at 1°F step to maintain total building load within hydro demand charge limit. .8 Provide controls for lighting control in each space to suit occupied/unoccupied periods. Space lighting shall be off during unoccupied modes except for circuit designated for nightlights in each space, ie. pool and change rooms, community halls, library, childcare and work area and foyer (lobby). Basement mechanical room lights shall be manually operated. End of Section r DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 INDEX j SECTION TITLE PAGES 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 39 16100 RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS 13 16310 HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6 KV 6 16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 13 16410 POOL MOTOR CONTROL 4 I 16500 LIGHTING 8 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 12 16750 P.A. SYSTEM 3 16850 ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING 2 i i J � II � I �I I � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 i i t 1 N 1 1 ii DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE i PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ' i 1.3 SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 j � 1.5 SEPARATE PRICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.6 ALTERNATE PRICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.7 CASH ALLOWANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S WORKSHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.9 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.10 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.11 DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.12 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.13 DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.14 CODES AND REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.15 CERTIFICATES AND FEES 7 1.16 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.19 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.20 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.21 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE . . 9 1.22 TEMPORARY HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.23 DATA BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.24 CLEAN UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.25 GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.26 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 lil PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1 CONDUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 j 2.2 CONDUCTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.3 ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.4 INSERTS AND HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 j 2.5 PLASTIC FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6 GROUND RODS AND CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.8 FIRE RATED SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.1 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.2 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.3 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.4 METHOD OF WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ARTICLE NAME PAGE 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.7 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.8 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, SLEEVES, AND CONCRETE WORK . . . . . . . . . 23 3.9 CONCRETE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.10 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.11 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.12 WRING OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OWNERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.13 WRING FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.14 WRING FOR KITCHEN AND LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.15 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND OUTLET LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.16 CIRCUITING OF OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.17 ELECTRICAL WRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.18 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3.19 PAINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.21 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3.22 TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.23 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.24 SEQUENCE OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE j .1 Comply with General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1. If 1.2 INTENT 'I .1 This Section applies to all Sections of Division 16. 2 The mention herein and/or indication on the drawing of any article, material, operation or method requires that it shall be provided and shall be of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted. Perform each operation prescribed according to the conditions stated, providing therefor all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I .1 Comply with Division 1 General Requirements and specific additional requirements of Sections in Division 16. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS .1 Painting of exposed conduits, ducts and unfinished electrical equipment - under Division 9. .2 Concrete work - under Division 3. .3 Excavation and backfilling inside the building - under Division 2. .4 Excavation and backfilling outside the building - under Division 2. .5 Excavation and backfilling inside and outside the building - under Division 2. .6 Cutting and patching will be by General Trades. i I I � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.5 SEPARATE PRICES .1 State separate prices in the Tender Form for deletion of the following work. Prices shall include the complete cost of the work, i.e. all equipment, wiring, material, labour, incidentals, profit, overhead, taxes, etc. .1 Undercoater pool lighting. .2 It shall be the Owner's option to delete from the Contract any of the work indicated at the prices stated. Separate prices shall be listed in the Tender Form. 1.6 ALTERNATE PRICES .1 Alternate prices requested for certain options are required to give the owner a clear indication of the cost implications involved in each option. It is therefore required that alternate prices include all costs necessary to make the changes required if the option is accepted by the owner. This shall include all direct and indirect costs required to make the changes. If other divisions are affected and their costs are not included in the alternate price, state so clearly in the tender form. .2 It shall be the owner's option to accept or reject any or all alternate prices. Alternate Prices shall be listed in the Tender Form. 1.7 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 The following cash allowances shall be carried in the Contract for the items indicated, each including all equipment, wiring, material, labour, incidentals, profit, overhead, taxes, etc. For each item, if the actual cost is less than the Cash Allowance for that item, the remainder shall revert to the Owner. If the actual cost exceeds the Cash Allowance, you will be re-imbursed for this amount by the Owner. Cash allowances shall be listed in the Tender form. .1 Ontario Hydro charges for padmount transformer plus an applicable termination and connection charges. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S WORKSHOP .1 Provide temporary buildings for field office, workshop, tools and material r� storage as may be required for own use and be responsible for any loss or damage thereto. Temporary buildings shall be of a type approved by the Architect and located as directed by him. Temporary buildings shall be removed after completion of work as directed by Architect. I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 3 1.9 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER .1 Temporary light, power and water will be provided under Division 1. Provide all necessary extension cords, lamps, hoses, etc. for own use. 1.10 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS .1 Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and local conditions, Electrical Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Structural Drawings, and Architectural Drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown on these Drawings and as herein specified. Before commencing work examine the work of the other trades and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work of this Division or the guarantee of same. No extra will subsequently be allowed to cover any such error, omission and/or oversight for not having made a thorough inspection of the grounds, existing conditions, drawings, and specifications. 1.11 DEFINITIONS .1 "Provide" or "furnish" shall mean "supply and install". "Install" shall mean "mount and wire". "Wire" shall mean "supply and install all required wire and raceways and make all connections". .2 Unless clearly indicated otherwise, words such as "approved", "allowed", "permitted", "satisfactory" and "as instructed" shall refer to such approval, allowance, etc. by the Architect. i 1.12 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .1 Tender price shall be based only on equipment specifically mentioned by name in the specifications, that is on 'Base Bid' equipment or on 'Named Alternate' equipment. .2 In the event that the tender price is based on any of the 'Named Alternate' equipment, mark in the 'Named Alternate' manufacturers in the appropriate space in the Tender Form. If no choice is indicated in the Tender Form, 'Base Bid' equipment shall be supplied. .3 'Bidder's Proposed Alternates' are invited and are to be marked in the ,.I appropriate space in the tender together with the reduction in the Base Bid tender price amount for each of the 'Bidder's Proposed Alternates'. These 'Bidder's Proposed Alternates' will be considered at the time of the award of the Contract and those accepted will be included in the Contract. '1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .4 For the purposes of these specifications and tender documents, the following definitions shall apply: .5 'Base Bid' - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named first in the specifications for any material or equipment; or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as 'Base Bid' equipment in the Specifications. .6 'Named Alternate' - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named second, j third, etc., in the specifications, or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as 'Alternate' equipment. .7 'Bidder's Proposed Alternate' - shall be equipment or manufacturer considered by the Bidder to be equal to 'Base Bid' or 'Named Alternate' equipment. Basic tender price shall not be based on, or include Bidder's Proposed Alternate' equipment. .8 Reductions in tender price due to the 'Bidder's Proposed Alternates' may be considered in selecting the Bidder for award of the Contract. .9 Be responsible for and cover all costs and labour in cases where a 'Named Alternate' or 'Bidder's Proposed Alternate' requires additional labour, material, piping, connections, or involves any other costs to any trade, General Contractor or the Owner, over the costs involved with the 'Base Bid' equipment or material. Such additional costs and work shall be included in the Tender Price. Availability of space, proximity to other equipment and arrangement of connections shall be considered. .10 Assume full responsibility for, and cover all costs involved in modifying the alternate or substitution as required in the opinion of the Architect to meet the specification. Should the Architect decide, after the necessary modifications to the 'Named Alternate' or 'Bidder's Proposed Alternate' are considered, that the originally specified equipment must be used, cover all costs of such reversal to original equipment, except for any stated difference in tender price, regardless of whether or not a preliminary approval for the 'Named Alternate' or 'Bidder's Proposed Altemate' was given earlier. .11 Assume full responsibility for any failure of the alternate to meet the requirements of the specification. The acceptance of an alternate by the Architect does not remove or change such responsibility. .12 Materials not specified herein as to manufacture, quality, etc., shall be supplied of high commercial standard of quality, new and of uniform pattern. Used materials or equipment will not be accepted. !i DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 5 .13 In case materials or equipment specified are unavailable, clearly state in the Tender the alternative material and/or equipment and price used in compiling the Tender. 1.13 DRAWINGS 1 .1 The drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic only and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at the building site. Make without additional charge any necessary changes or additions to the runs to accommodate structural conditions. .2 The drawings and specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents. Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone. Provide and install all work as required for a complete and functioning installation. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either drawings or specifications shall not change the requirements or intent of the specifications for proper completion of the work to the full approval of the Architect. j .3 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the r cables, ducts, conduits, etc., which are to be installed under this contract. .4 Where the required conduit work, cables, etc. is not shown on the plans or jonly shown diagrammatically, these shall be installed as tight as possible to structural members, concrete, ceilings and walls to interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. .5 The location of conduit, ducts, outlets and other equipment may be altered by the Architect without charge to the Owner, provided the change is made before installation and does not necessitate additional material, and the new location is within 10' of the original location. 6 Be responsible for the detailed layout of work with respect to the building structure and to other piping, ducts, conduit, etc. If required in certain sections, produce field drawings to show relative positions of various services and/or equipment and have these approved before work proceeds. i .7 Consult with the Architect and/or Interior Designer and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact location of equipment, and before the installation of fixtures and equipment which may interfere with the interior treatment of the building. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 N PAGE 6 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .8 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be executed in the same manner as if contained in the specifications and shown on the drawings. .9 Should any discrepancy appear between these specifications and the drawings, or between one part of the specifications and another, or between one location on the drawings and another, to cause doubt as to the true , meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the Architect before submitting the tender. If this is not done it will be assumed that the more expensive alternative has been included in the contract. .10 Any error or inconsistency in the drawings or specifications noted after award of contract must be reported to the Architect before commencing work on the item involved. .11 The omission or incorrect mention of work, materials, etc. that are indispensable to the completed work, is not to be interpreted as relieving of the necessity of providing such work, materials, etc. at no expense to the Owner. 1.14 CODES AND REGULATIONS .1 The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The Electrical Safety Code, the Ontario Building Code, Ontario Fire Marshal, National Building Code and regulations and by-laws of other jurisdictional authorities form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for conduits, equipment, devices, wiring sizes or methods exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the interpretation of the codes, the local Electrical Inspector, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector, etc. shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. .2 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Architect shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. Any work installed before approval is obtained from the above authorities and the Inspection Authority shall be corrected without charge. Submit any additional drawings which may be required by the Inspection Authority. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 7 1.15 CERTIFICATES AND FEES .1 Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and inspections required for the work herein specified. Pay all fees for examination of drawings and specifications. This shall apply to Electrical inspection Government, Municipal and Public Utilities and all other such bodies. .2 On completion of the work, obtain final unconditional certificates of approval by all utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. All final certificates of approval !I shall be delivered to the Architect before final payment is made. .3 Arrange and pay for all tests of the work. .4 Fumish certificate that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction and generally complies with the drawings and specification as revised by addenda, change orders and written field instructions. i 1.16 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS .1 Upon completion of the project, present to the Architect a signed statement to the effect that all tests have been carefully carried out as required by the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment and installations have been inspected by all jurisdictional authorities. 1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review one copy of a sepia and one white print or Submit for review at least 8 sets of white prints of detail drawings showing panels, switchboards, transformers, transfer switches, generators, contactors, electric heaters, alarm systems, sound systems, intercom systems, special outlets, control systems, control panels, and any other major equipment before ordering and immediately after the award of the contract. Indicate all pertinent data such as options, voltage, type of fuse Gip etc. .2 Submit eight copies of typed sheets, catalogue sheets, or illustrations, etc., giving suppliers and catalogue numbers for such items as switches, lighting fixtures and any other standard catalogue items. Indicate all pertinent data such as fixture letter types, ballast voltage, options, special finish or mounting etc. I � 1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 8 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .3 These will be reviewed by the Architect and returned. No allowance will be made later if equipment is condemned on the site because of failure to observe this instruction. .4 The Architect reserves the right to reject any material or apparatus which, in his opinion, does not conform with the requirements of the Specifications. .5 Notify Architect in writing if shop drawings differ from Architect's design drawings in any respect. Certify shop drawings to indicate that they have been checked and agree with Architect's drawings and specifications. Assume all responsibility for errors made on shop drawings or for changes made from Architect's drawings and specifications, unless such changes were set out in written notification to Architect. .6 Review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept This review shall not indicate approval of the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Division submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Division of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of the work of all other Divisions. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Mark on a set of white prints as the job progresses, changes made through any approved change order as well as the location of feeders, conduit runs, junction boxes, and all changes in circuiting location of equipment, runs of conduits, wiring, etc. from that originally shown, so that on the completion of the job the record drawings will show the exact conditions as actually installed. .2 Also mark on final actual room names and numbers. .3 Location of concealed and buried ducts, conduits and cables shall be dimensioned from fixed reference points. Also mark location of all access doors. Record drawings shall be kept at the site and shall be brought up to date as the work progresses. Submit completed record drawings before final certificate of job acceptance is issued. .4 In addition to the white prints, prepare and submit one set of mylars of the record drawings. Make any corrections required by the Architect and submit the corrected mylars to the Architect. �r DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 9 1.19 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS .1 Samples shall be submitted to the Architect for his approval before ordering jsuch items as name plates, tags, thermostats, etc., and other repetitive materials where finish or detail can be better examined by sample. All materials used for the work shall be fully equal to the samples as approved. 1.20 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS .1 All equipment, materials, controls, wiring and wiring devices, etc., supplied shall conform to the CSA, and Inspection Department requirements for the purposes for which they are to be used, and shall bear a CSA approval label. .2 Special equipment which does not have a standard CSA label shall be inspected by the Special Inspection Department and the Approval Certificate shall be submitted to the General Contractor as soon as possible. 1.21 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE .1 It is understood and agreed that the temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any other work or material supplied under this Section before final completion and written acceptance by the Architect, is not to be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same by the Owner and it is further understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the Contractor shall claim that the said work is complete and in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and for such reasonable length of time as the Architect shall deem to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same and that no claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for the injury to, or breaking of any parts of such work which may be so used whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship of any kind whatsoever. .2 Should the equipment be abused, improperly used or maintained by the Owner, advise the Architect immediately. Verbal advice shall be followed up in writing, otherwise subsequent claims for damage will not be considered. 1.22 TEMPORARY HEATING .1 All temporary heating required while the building is under construction will be provided under Division 1. I � r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .2 The permanent electric baseboards, unit heaters, etc., may be used for temporary heating, providing this equipment is installed in its permanent location and providing that the building is completely closed in and clean. Approval must be obtained from the Architect for use of such equipment. 1.23 DATA BOOK .1 Bind within a hard-covered, loose-leaf binders, a complete set of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions showing all major electrical equipment and systems. Include shop drawings and detail drawings. Instructions shall be complete for installation, operation and maintenance. Spare part suppliers, lists and addresses shall be included. .2 Make any additions and/or corrections required by the Architect and submit two correct copies to the Architect. .3 Instructions shall be reviewed with the operating personnel to ensure a thorough understanding of the equipment and its operation. 1.24 CLEAN UP .1 All material shall be stored neatly and out of the way. Clean up daily all refuse caused by work. .2 On completion of the work remove from the premises all tools, debris, surplus and waste materials resulting from operations under this Section. Clean all fixtures and equipment and leave all items in perfect order ready for operation. 1.25 GUARANTEE .1 Before final payment is made, guarantee all materials and workmanship supplied in the performance of this contract, for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Architect and, when called upon, make good without further charge any such defects as may appear within this period. Before final payment is made, test the operation of all equipment installed and demonstrate to the Architect or his representative that all equipment is operating as intended. The period of this guarantee shall in no way supplant any other guarantee or warranties of longer period, but shall be binding on all other work not otherwise covered. r r rDIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 11 1 1.26 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED .1 The following documents shall be submitted to the Architect on completion of the project as described above: .1 Electrical Inspection Certificate j .2 Fire Department Certificate .3 Fire Alarm Verification Certificate i .4 As-Built Drawings .5 Data book .6 Guarantee .7 Service Equipment Co-ordination Certificates j .8 Grounding & Groundfault Protection Test Certificates I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS .1 Rigid steel conduits shall be thick-walled, electrogalvanized with threaded couplings, locknuts and bushings. Bushings shall have nylon insulation to protect conductors. .2 Electra metallic tubing EMT shall be thin-walled, electroplated with set steel screw type couplings and connectors with watertight squeeze type couplings and connectors. Connectors shall have nylon insulation to protect conductors. Rigid PVC conduits shall be "Schedule 40" Scepter, Cobra, Canron or equal. Flexible PVC conduit shall be Scepter "Cor-Line" Type ENT with tooless snap-in connectors, couplings and EMT adapters. Type EB1 duct for installation in concrete duct banks. Type DBII for installation as direct burial. 2.2 CONDUCTORS .1 Generally, unless otherwise shown on the drawing or herein specified or required by Electrical Code, conductors run in conduits, ducts or other raceways shall be RW 90 x-link as manufactured by Canada Wire and Cable Industrial wire, CGE or equal. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 12 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .2 Where Corflex is indicated on the drawing, Teck, Flexfonn by Northern Electric or ACWU-90 may be used and shall be considered as equal. .3 Where aluminum sheathed, Teck, Corfiex or mineral insulated cables are specified they shall have copper conductors as shown on the drawings, complete with a bare copper ground wire. Termination of cables shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations and local Inspector's satisfaction. .4 Exterior underground wiring, unless otherwise indicated, shown as direct buried or concrete encased shall be type RWU 90 - x link installed in polypipe or equal with mechanical protection as required by the Electrical Code. .5 Conductors installed in underground ducts or conduits unless otherwise shown shall be type RWU 90. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS .1 Access doors, unless otherwise specified or shown, shall be at least 12 gauge steel, finished prime coat only, with concealed hinges, anchor straps, plaster lock, without screws. Access doors in ceilings, where acoustic tile is applied to plaster or gypsum board, shall be dish type designed to receive file inserts. .2 Access doors shall be as manufactured by: .1 Zum Industries Canada Ltd. - Inspectors .2 Wade International Limited - LeHage .3 A.G. Baird Limited - ABCO 2.4 INSERTS AND HANGERS .1 Inserts, hangers and supports shall be Electrostrut, Unistrut or equal. 2.5 PLASTIC FILM .1 Plastic film to mark buried services telephone, secondary and primary service ducts, cables and conduits shall be 150mm wide as manufactured by A.B. Chance Co. 3M or equal. Film shall contain continuous printed warning and messages designating service buried. 2.6 GROUND RODS AND CONNECTORS .1 Ground connectors of the mechanical type shall be Bumdy Hyground using specially designed dies which emboss the die index number into the Hyground connection. I , DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 11 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 13 .2 Ground rods shall be "Copper Weld" or equal. .3 Welded connectors shall use the thermit process as manufactured by Cadweld ' or equal. .4 Solderless grounding connectors shall be Bumdy or Thomas and Betts. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .1 Flexible conduit fittings shall be nylon insulated throat type as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Series 5331 and "O" ring Series 5262. .2 Connector shall be Tite Bite type with nylon insulated throats as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Series 3110 or equal. .3 Flexible conduit shall be PVC jacketed and shall be T&B, Greenfield or equal. 2.8 FIRE RATED SEALS .1 Dow Coming Silicone RTV Foam as distributed by Pilgrim Products or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.1 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT .1 Protect finished and unfinished own work and work of other contractors from damage due to own operations. Cover floors and other parts of the building with tarpaulins, etc. Repair all damage to floor surfaces or other parts of the building resulting from the carrying out of this work. .2 All material damaged by weather or through negligence shall be removed and replaced with new material. !, .3 During freezing weather, protect all material in such a manner that no harm can be done to the installation already made and/or materials and equipment on the job. .4 Store all material and equipment neatly and out of the way. j .5 Securely plug or cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduits and equipment to prevent ingress of obstructions during construction. I PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 14 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.2 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for layout of own work so as not to conflict with other trades and also for damage caused to other's work by improper location or carrying out of own work. .2 Arrange work in co-operation with other trades in such a manner as not to interfere with other work being carried on and co-ordinate layout of work with other trades to get all pipework, wiring, conduits, etc., installed to the best advantage. .3 Assume full responsibility for the prompt installation of wiring, conduits, ducts, equipment and sleeves in advance of the work of other trades as required. .4 Where any equipment supplied under this Division must be built in with the work of other Divisions such as Masonry, Plastering or Concrete, supply the equipment to be built in, provide templates, anchors, sleeves, bolts and measurements to allow the installation of these in the proper sequence. .5 Confer and co-operate with all other trades in order to eliminate any unnecessary delay to any work being done under this Contract. .6 Submit composite drawings of crowded locations where there is possibility of , conflict with the work of other trades. Indicate exact locations and elevations of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from field measurement. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP .1 Only first class workmanship will be accepted not only regarding the best accepted standard practices, safety, accessibility, durability, etc., but also regarding neatness of detail. Conduits shall be installed true to line and grade. All conduits, ducts and cables shall be aligned parallel and at right angles to the building walls. Equipment shall be accurately set, plumbed and levelled and hanger rods shall be aligned vertically. The entire work shall present a neat and clean appearance on completion. .2 Where possible, ducts, conduit and wiring shall be concealed in ceiling spaces, furred spaces, pipe spaces, walls, trenches, etc., except they may be run exposed in the boiler and equipment rooms, or where specifically indicated. They shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring, etc., is kept as small as possible. Where ducts, conduits and other equipment are exposed, they shall be installed as close as possible to building structure, ceilings and walls. Provide all offsets for this purpose at own expense, whether shown or not shown on drawings. I ' DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 j SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 15 I .3 Any conduit, duct or other work which is not, in the opinion of the Architect, installed as it should be, shall be taken out and replaced without cost to the Owner. i 3.4 METHOD OF WIRING .1 Unless otherwise shown or hereinafter specified rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used in all locations required by Electrical Code and for. .1 All exposed wiring subject to mechanical damage. j .2 Wiring in poured concrete slabs and walls not in contact with earth. .3 Wiring in damp locations, except where non-metallic duct is specified or shown. { .4 Rigid PVC or type ENT flexible PVC conduit may be used in poured concrete slabs and walls. .2 All conduits, couplings, connectors and boxes in poured concrete slabs and walls in contact with earth shall be non metallic. .3 Unless otherwise specified and subject to Electrical Code and any local authority having jurisdiction, electrical metallic tubing may be used for surface work, in furred walls, in poured concrete slabs not in contact with the grade,on earth in poured concrete walls not in contact with the grade,on earth ceiling spaces, and in masonry walls. .4 Unless otherwise specified and subject to the Electrical Code and any local authority having jurisdiction, armoured flexible cable AC-90 (BX) may be used for lighting, receptacle and motor branch circuits concealed in dry accessible ceiling spaces and hollow partitions. .5 Flexible conduit shall be used for final short connections between outlet and electrical equipment such as recessed fixtures, motors, transformers, motorized equipment or fixed appliances. .6 All low voltage and multi conductor cables shall be installed in conduit. i .7 If number of conductor in any one conduit exceeds 6 line conductors. Conductor size shall be increased to allow for derating as required by Code. I � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 16 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .8 A/S, Corflex, MICC,BXL and other such cables shall be used only where their use is specifically indicated on the Drawings. .9 Branch wiring installed underground outside the building shall, unless otherwise indicated, be RWU 90 installed in 60 psi polyethylene waterpipe with an insulated ground wire included. .10 Rigid PVC conduit shall be used for direct burial underground. Ducts shall be sloped at least I in 400 and shall be buried at not less than 900mm below finished grade unless otherwise indicated. .11 Supply and install a 150mm wide plastic film 200mm below finished surface or grade to mark the location of buried telephone service, primary & secondary service ducts, cables and conduits. ' 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION .1 All conduits generally shall be run concealed where possible except that conduits in boiler room, equipment and electrical rooms may be installed on surface. , .2 All conduits shall be completely installed with bushings in place before conductors are pulled into the conduits. .3 Conduits installed on surface shall be run in neat lines parallel to walls and ceiling. .4 Conduits shall be sized as per Electrical Code. Where conduit sizes are shown on the Drawings, these are minimum and in no case shall be reduced without the approval of the Architect. .5 Conduit shall enter properly and shall be secured to all fittings, outlet boxes, etc., by means of locknuts and bushings. .6 Locknuts and bushings shall be screwed up tightly to ensure a perfect mechanical and electrical bond. .7 Where conduit joints occur in concrete, couplings shall be concrete tight and painted with asphalt paint. .8 Where conduits cross building expansion joints, provide conduit expansion joints with telescoping sleeve and insulated bushings. Straight runs of conduit 30M or longer shall have expansion joints. Location of expansion joints shall be taken from Architectural and Structural Drawings. I �i DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 17 I .9 Running threads shall not be used. Where required, Erickson couplings shall be used. .10 All cut conduit ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges. .11 Conduit shall be laid out so as to avoid interference with other work and so that it can drain with no pockets in which water can collect. Conduits shall be at least 50mm clear of all mechanical pipes, flues, etc. .12 All rigid steel conduit and E.M.T. shall be supported with one-hole pipe clips or 1� by hangers, with supports at intervals specified in Electrical Code. I .13 Field bends and offsets shall be uniform and symmetrical without flattening of conduit. Minimum bending radius shall be 10 times conduit diameter. Where two or more exposed conduits are running parallel and close to each other all bends shall be concentric. I ` .14 Conduits or cables run outdoors shall be 900mm below finished grade unless otherwise specified. ' .15 Conduits below floors on grade shall be installed 300mm below the slab and shall be rigid PVC. Conduits in concrete slabs shall be installed between the top and bottom reinforcing steel and tied securely in place to the reinforcing steel. 1 .16 Where conduits are installed in concrete slabs, obtain Structural Engineer's approval on size of conduit that may be used therein. .17 Conduits in concrete or masonry shall be securely held in place during pouring and construction. Cap conduit during pouring with interlocking plastic "Space Caps" to prevent conduit damage and to maintain the proper spacings. .18 Conduits which are required to be installed, but left empty shall be tested for Gear bore and shall be left with fish wire and shall be sealed at both ends to prevent entrance of dirt and moisture. .19 All conduit in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical room, fan rooms, boiler room, and in such other areas as are indicated on the Drawings, shall be run exposed with outlets installed after mechanical or other equipment is installed. Outlet locations in the above areas as shown on the Drawings are approximate only, and are shown only to indicate the quantity of outlets required. Outlets shall be relocated to clear pipes, ducts or mechanical equipment. Relocation of r lighting outlets shall be consistent with good distribution of light to the satisfaction of the Architect. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 18 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .20 Where rigid conduit enters cabinets, panels, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, auxiliary gutters or other such enclosures the conductors shall be protected by a nylon insulated metal bushing. .21 Where electrical metallic tubing is installed, the couplings and connectors shall be set screw type. The connectors shall have nylon insulated throat. .22 Where a flexible raceway is exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture, the conduit shall be the liquid tight flexible type CSA type UA. It shall be installed in such a manner that liquids tend to nun off the surface and not drain toward the fittings. Sufficient slack shall be provided to reduce the effects of vibration. Where the fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knock-out, a gasket assembly, consisting of an "O" ring and retainer, shall be installed on the outside. , .23 The final raceway connection to motors, transformers, and other equipment subject to vibration shall be flexible metallic conduit at least 8 conduit diameters long. .24 Where a conduit pierces a fire rated wall or floor, seal the opening with , suitable material. .25 All conduits and outlet boxes shall be supported from building surfaces and shall not be supported from other conduits, ducts or pipes. Where existing hangers have space for the new conduits, these may be used but proper fastening devices shall be utilized and proper clearances maintained. .26 Electrical conductors shall be installed in service spaces that do not contain other combustible material or shall be protected against exposure to fire to ensure continued operation for a period of one hour. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .1 All conductors unless otherwise specified, shall be copper minimum #12 AWG except that control wiring shall be minimum #14 AWG. Wiring for emergency battery system shall be minimum #10 AWG. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 19 .2 Conductors for 15 amp 120/208V branch circuit home runs up to 20M shall be minimum #12 AWG and for home runs over 20M shall be minimum #10 AWG. For 15 amp, 120/208V receptacle branch circuit home runs up to 60 feet shall be minimum #12 AWG and for home run over 60 feet shall be minimum #10 and maximum length of branch circuit feeder from panel to furthest receptacle shall not exceed 20M. For 15 amp 347/600V branch circuit home runs up to 60M conductors shall be minimum #12 AWG and for home runs over 60M shall be minimum #10 AWG. In no case shall wire be smaller than shown on Drawings. .3 Conductors for circuits greater than 15 amps, and for which size is not shown on the Drawings, shall be sized for current-carrying capacity of breaker or fuse protecting them, and to limit the voltage drop at the outlet to 2% as shown in Table D3 of the Electrical Code. .4 Single conductor sheathed, Tack and Corflex cables shall be spaced I diameter apart and installed in such a manner that they will qualify for their free air current rating and cables 250 MCM and larger shall be installed to have no sheath current. .5 Cables shall be unjacketed and, where installed for no sheath current shall be installed on insulated supports to prevent sheath currents. .6 Cables shall be properly clipped and protected against mechanical injury. Clips shall be single conductor non ferrous type. ' .7 Cables shall be installed on building surfaces, cable trays, trapeze hangers. Cables shall not rest on mechanical pipes, ducts, conduits or ceiling (unless j fished in existing inaccessible spaces) nor shall they be supported from pipes, { ducts or conduits. .8 Control wiring shall be of type and size required for that particular system and voltage. Unless multicolour cable is specified minimum #14 AWG wire shall be used. 9 Method of installation shall conform to the Electrical Code. .10 Wire connections shall be made with pressure type solderiess connectors. j , Wire connection shall be twisted prior to splicing and shall be insulated with vinyl insulating caps and locking rings. Provide pigtails for all electrical fixtures and devices to ensure that neither the neutral or the power supply lines are ropened when a fixture or a device is removed from the circuit. .11 For multiple (parallel conductor) runs of cable, test for equal load sharing. r it PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS , .12 Measure the insulation value of all lighting and power circuit feeders and sub-feeders. If resistance between conductor and ground is less than that recommended by the Electrical Code, such circuits are to be considered defective and must be replaced. 3.7 GROUNDING .1 All grounding of services, equipment, light standards, feeders, conduits, etc., shall be done in accordance with the Electrical Code and any requirements of the local supply authorities. .2 The following requirements are supplementary and additional to the above requirements. .3 Grounding conductors run inside buildings beyond the electrical rooms or closets and transformer roomlvault shall be run in EMT conduit of sufficient diameter. .4 Provide a green insulated grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits. Size of grounding conductor shall be as shown on the Drawings. If size is not shown follow Electrical Code. Ground conductors shall be installed inside conduit or tubing containing the phase conductors. .5 Conduits installed under concrete slabs on grade and in concrete or in masonry exterior walls below grade shall have a green ground conductor. The conduits shall not be relied upon for grounding continuity. .6 All EMT conduits 38mm and larger shall have a green insulated ground conductor run parallel to the line conductors in the tubing. .7 All feeder and subfeeder conduits in excess of 50M shall have a green ground conductor run parallel to the line conductor in the conduit .8 Ground connections shall be made with approved solderless ground r connectors, or by welding, using therrnit process. .9 All ground connections underground and in places which will become inaccessible after installation, shall be made only by welding using the thennit process. .10 Where ground continuity through conduits is not maintained, a green insulated ground wire shall be installed inside the conduits. r r rDIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 21 ,11 Where isolated ground receptacles are specified provide a separate ground and separate neutral conductor from panel for each duplex or quad receptacle. .12 Ground all waste lines to the building ground or cold water line as per Electrical Code Article 10.406. If waste line is non-metalic, ground each metalic trap. .13 Where conduit diameter is not large enough to provide grounding of equipment or a service, an insulated grounding conductor shall be run within the conduit, tubing and flex. .14 The conduit system shall not be used for grounding transformer neutrals. transformer neutrals shall be connected directly to an approved grounding electrode to the full satisfaction of the Inspection authority. .15 The main service and building ground system shall consist of a minimum of 4 groundrods at least 3M apart driven to the required depth for reading ` permanent moisture. The ground rods may be installed outside the building or inside the building electrical room (if applicable) to the satisfaction and approval of the local power supply authority and the electrical inspection department. Where the main electrical room floor is located on ground provide 4 ground rods, one in each comer of the electrical room. These grounds rods, if acceptable to the electrical inspection department may be used for the main service ground. .16 Provide 4 ground rods for pad mount transformer vault, one in each comer as j per Ontario Hydro requirements (this is in addition to the ground rods required for the main service grounding described above). .17 Ground rods installed outside building shall have inspection cans, with top of cover flush with grade. j .18 Ground rods installed inside buildings shall protrude 100mm above finished floor. .19 Ground rods shall be of minimum size 20M diameter x 3M long and shall be interconnected with minimum #3/0 bare ground conductor. .20 In vault provide for Power Supply Utility transformer provide grounding as per Utility requirements but said installation shall not be less than those described herein. Leave 6M of ground conductor in vault for connection by Utility. I � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 22 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' .21 Below grade (buried) connections and ground rod connections shall be made with pure wrought copper compression devices, factory filled with inhibiting compound or by using the thermit process and shall meet IEEE837 "Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections used in Sub-Station Grounding". .22 Supply and install a 50mm x 6mm #3/0 or code minimum ground bus loop on , all walls attached at 1.5M intervals on 13mm stand offs in Main Electrical Room and Generator Room at a height of 300mm above the floor. The ground shall be continuous around the room and shall be continued above or below all such openings as doors and vents. Connect the ground loop to the ground rods with #3/0 minimum ground conductors. Conned to the ground loop all ' transformer neutrals, switchboard neutral and all metal equipment enclosures as well as all other metal parts such as mechanical pipes, ducts, waste lines, door and door frames, railings, grilles, fences, etc. ' .23 Ground connections (other than station grounds) shall be made using the thermit process or with pure wrought copper compression devices, factory filled with inhibiting compound or with appropriate all bronze or copper mechanical devices and shall meet current IEEE80 Standard and CSA C22.2 No. 41 grounding and bonding standard. ' .24 Mechanical connector hardware shall be bronze or stainless steel. .25 The electrical main system ground may be connected to the metallic water main if available on the street side of the water meter by means of 3/0 conductor run in conduit. Connections to the water mains shall be made in an ' approved manner. Provide ground wire shunts around water meters. .26 Provide a building ground system consisting of a continuous ground bus along the appropriate walls and conned to the main distribution system ground. This is for grounding of individual unit services and/or transformers. Bus shall be bare copper,#3/0 installed above level of suspended ceiling. Confirm height of ceilings with Architect. Alternatively, if acceptable to the local inspection ' authority, ground the building steel to the main system ground and provide shunts around expansion joints, so that the steel may be used as the ground bus. ' .27 All Corflex cables shall have a bare copper ground wire running parallel to the conductors from power source to the load. .28 Continuous rows of fluorescent fixtures and fixture wiring channels where such are used shall have a green ground wire of same size as phase conductors. ' The fixture or channel body shall not be relied upon to provide ground continuity. 1� j DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 23 .29 Swimming pool and fountain equipment, conduits and all metal parts within the water or with 3M from the water line shall be grounded in accordance with all applicable codes and local regulations. This shall apply to equipment, pipes, metal parts and reinforcing steel supplied and installed under this and any other Division of the Contract. All grounding shall be in accordance with the Electrical Safety Code and shall be supplied and installed by this Division. ' 3.8 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, SLEEVES,AND CONCRETE WORK .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide all foundations, supports, stands, platforms, etc. necessary for the proper installation of the work of this Section. .2 They shall be concrete, steel, etc. as shown, specified or required and as approved by the Architect. All equipment such as panels, transformers, I , switches, etc. shall be supported independently of the conduit. ' .3 All concrete foundations, and curbs for all equipment, unless otherwise shown j or noted, shall be provided by this Division. Hire the trade involved and pay all expenses. .4 Where concrete bases are specified for floor mounted equipment they shall be constructed of 3000# concrete using plywood forms. Supply and install dowels for all concrete bases unless noted otherwise. Concrete bases or curbs shall be not less than 1 00m thick and not less than 1 00m larger than base of equipment, and with chamfered edges and smooth finish. .5 Supply all necessary templates, anchor bolts, inserts and location drawings for equipment supplied and supervise the work of installation of same. .6 Provide foundation vault and concrete pad for transformer. All in accordance with Ontario Hydro requirements and complete with all appurtenances. Concrete encase ducts as shown on the drawing for primary and secondary ducts. .7 Hanger rods must be vertical without bends or offsets. Where other structural j ' supports do not exist, provide angle or channel iron supports, properly sized, to support the load from the structural framework. .8 Percussion type fastenings of any kind will not be permitted unless prior approval in writing is obtained from the Architect. .9 All electrical panels, switches or other electrical equipment shall be complete I ' with suitable mounting brackets. Provide required angle or channel iron supports to bear the equipment weight. I ' PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 24 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS , .10 Supply and set all necessary sleeves and be responsible for the exact location of all sleeves. Sleeves shall be plastic where allowed by building code. In the ' fan room and in other areas where water may accumulate on the floor, sleeves shall be of steel pipe and shall be extended 50mm above floor. .11 Install oversized sleeve for conduits passing through floor slab, caulk around joint. Apply cold cure fire resistant mastic between sleeve and conduit to maintain full fire rating. .12 Openings in floors for groups of conduits shall have a 150mm curb around the opening and voids between conduits and ducts shall be sealed to prevent sound transmission and to provide full fire rating of floor. .13 Where sleeves pass through fire walls voids shall be filled to restore full fire ' rating of wall so penetrated and prevent sound transmission. .14 Inserts for hangers, etc. shall be firmly secured to the forms before the concrete is poured. Supply these inserts and be responsible for their correct location. .15 Hangers, equipment etc., may not be supported from any precast concrete ' slab construction without the Architect's approval. Where conduits, equipment, etc., are to be supported under pre-cast concrete slab construction, or under ' the steel roof deck, support all this equipment from the building structural steel beams, trusses or joists, using beam clamps. .16 Where structural supports do not exist, or are spaced too far apart to be ' suitable for proper support of conduits and cables supply and install angle or channel steel members between beams of the structural framework as required for proper supporting of same. .17 Where holes are required in precast floor or roof construction, pay the appropriate trade for cutting of any such holes. Be responsible for accurately ' laying out the location and size of holes necessary and obtain prior approval for all such holes from Architect. 3.9 CONCRETE WORK .1 All concrete work required for electrical work will be performed by General ' Trades, expert in that field. Division 16 shall be responsible and pay for the work and shall supervise performance work, shall conform with the appropriate articles in the architectural divisions of the specifications. rDIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 I ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 25 3.10 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS .1 Provide access doors to all junction boxes, bus duct and other electrical equipment, where built in or concealed behind furring, walls or ceiling. Access doors shall be minimum size 300mm x 450mm and shall be adequately sized to properly service and maintain the equipment they serve. ' .2 Be responsible for their correct location. Frame and cover shall have a prime coat finish. Where necessary to have a number of access doors installed in the same area of a ceiling or wall, submit to the Architect for his approval the location of these access doors. i .3 Employ trade in whose work the access doors occur and pay for the ' installation of these. .4 Size and locate access doors in applied tile or in glazed or unglazed structural the to suit tile patterns. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule and details on Architectural Drawings in this regard. ' .5 Submit list of proposed access door locations and obtain approval thereof before commencing access door installation. .6 Access doors in removable acoustic file ceilings are not required. .7 Provide two sets of record drawings showing the location of all access panels with reference to their function. 3.11 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT BANK .1 Supply and install underground concrete encased duct banks for cables indicated. Concrete work as detailed.herein shall be provided by this Section. Trenching and backfilling shall be done by this Section. ' 1 .2 Where concrete work, trenching and backfilling is carried under other Divisions of the specifications it shall be this Division's responsibility to supervise the work and to make sure that the work is carried out as specified herein. I .3 Duct banks shall follow general route shown on the drawings and shall ' terminate at specified locations. Exact location of duct banks and terminating points shall be verified on the site prior to commencement of work. 4 The duct bank shall consist of paralleled ducts encased in concrete. The number and arrangement of ducts shall be as shown on the drawings. i � r i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 r PAGE 26 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' .5 Ducts shall be C.S.A. certified Type EB1 polyvinyl for concrete encasement or Type DBII for direct burial, with an intemal diameter of 100mm minimum ' unless otherwise shown on the drawings. .6 Bends shall generally be as factory supplied of approved radius. Radius of ' such bends shall not be less than 1000mm for the 100mm duct. .7 The duct lengths shall be joined together with an approved coupling to provide a sound joint. Adjacent couplings shall be staggered by at least 200mm. Joint solvent shall be used to seal the couplings. .8 Where trench is dry and firm, no bed shall be required; where trench is wet, r supply and install a 150mm layer of crushed stone in the bottom. No concrete shall be poured in trenches containing water. ' .9 The ducts shall be laid with a minimum spacing of 150mm centre to centre, both horizontally and vertically for 100mm ducts; for larger ducts spacing shall ' be increased correspondingly. Spacers shall be installed on 3M centres and within 600mm of each coupling used. Spacers shall be specially formed plastic. Wood spacers shall not be used. , .10 The ducts shall be on even grade sloped not less than 1 in 400 in direction indicated on the drawings. , .11 The top surface of the concrete encasement shall be a minimum of 900mm below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated on the drawing. ' .12 No ferrous metal shall be installed between primary cable ducts. Re-enforcing shall be installed only near bottom of duct unless specifically indicated otherwise or required by a local hydro authority. .13 Where the duct bank is constructed over recent fill or unstable ground or passes through walls or footings or under driveways or parking lots, the , concrete shall be reinforced with 15mm diameter Hi-Bond steel bars laid longitudinally at 150mm lateral spacing and set at 213 the depth of the concrete envelope below the bottom row of ducts. ' .14 All reinforcing rods used shall have a minimum length of 2M. Individual lengths of re-enforcing rods are to be overlapped by a minimum of 300mm and is to ' extend at least 1000mm onto solid ground. In all cases where the dud bank enters a building it shall be reinforced for a distance of 2.5M outside the building. Dud bank passing beneath or through building footings, under highways, streets, roads or heavily travelled driveways shall be reinforced and re-enforcing shall extend a distance of 1.5M beyond in both directions. ■ 1 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 1 , SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 27 .15 The ducts shall be encased with minimum 2,500 p.s.i. concrete with a minimum cover of 75mm on all sides. The concrete shall have a slump of 100mm to 150mm and be of pea gravel aggregate. I , .16 To prevent any displacement of the duct structure during pouring the duct structure shall be braced down every 3M and the concrete shall be deflected down alongside the ducts to the bottom and up through the duct assembly. .17 When crossing other utilities the concrete duct encasement shall maintain a i , minimum of six inches vertical clearance. When running parallel to another utility the duct bank shall be a minimum of 1.5M clear of said utility but in no case shall it be installed in the same excavation. .18 When completed the ducts shall be cleaned and the ends plugged with duct plugs. The ducts shall be tested for clearance by pulling a steel wire brush and a 95mm mandrel through their complete length. .19 Ducts installed for P.U.C. cables and ducts left as spare shall have one continuous length of 10mm polyethylene rope installed in each duct to facilitate the installation of the cables in the duct. Termination points, grades and route . of duct bank shall be confirmed by the P.U.C. on site. .20 Notify the Architect at least 48 hours before concrete is poured to permit inspection of the duct installation. .21 Assume responsibility to have the ducts inspected by the Inspection Office and P.U.C. (where applicable) prior to pouring of concrete and again prior to backfilling. 3.12 WIRING OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OWNERS .1 Completely wire and connect all items listed as supplied by Owner; Refer also to the Architectural Drawings. These items will be installed in place by other Divisions but this Division shall do all electrical work required for installation of these items, including control wiring. 3.13 WIRING FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNS ' .1 - Exterior illuminated signs will be supplied and installed by Sign Installer. Wire to and connect each of the signs, the location of outlets shall be verified with ' the Architect before installation. Obtain roughing in drawing from Architect. i 11 �1 � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 28 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' .2 Interior illuminated signs shall be supplied under other Division but shall be installed and completely wired by this Division. .3 For each illuminated sign supply and install a disconnect switch at the sign. 3.14 WIRING FOR KITCHEN AND LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ' .1 Install all conduits, outlets, receptacles and wiring for Kitchen equipment. wiring for Kitchen and Laundry equipment. Outlet locations shown on the Drawings are for estimating purposes only, and actual installation shall be in accordance with rough-in drawings, provided by the kitchen equipment , provided by the kitchen and laundry equipment supplier. Wiring in wet areas shall be liquid tight. .2 Unless otherwise shown where motors for kitchen Unless otherwise shown where motors for kitchen and laundry equipment are provided by the equipment supplier, these motors will be supplied complete with all starters and control devices. Install starters and control devices required, and do all , wiring including control wiring, wiring to starters and wiring to motors in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements. For each motor which is not controlled from a point within 30 feet and within sight of the motor and the ' equipment driven by the motor, supply and install a suitably sized unfused disconnect in a suitable location within 30 feet, and within sight of the motor and its driven equipment. , .3 Completely wire and conned refrigeration compressor, blowers, lights and associated controls for walk-in freezers and coolers. ' .4 Main breaker of the power panel supplying power to the cooking equipment under the exhaust hood or individual supply breakers shall have a shunt trip which shall be wired and tied into the sprinkler or CO2 system by this Division. The operation of the sprinkler or CO2 system shall trip the breaker. .5 Refer to kitchen equipment drawings for scope of work by this Division. Provide all field wiring and connections indicated. ' 3.15 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND OUTLET LOCATION .1 The location of outlets and equipment is subject to change without extra cost to the Owner, providing information is given prior to installation. No extra amount will be paid for outlets or equipment relocated requiring extra labour , and materials up to 3M from the original location, nor will credits be anticipated where relocations up to 3M reduces the materials and labour. ai DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 I ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 29 i .2 Unless dimensioned, symbols on the drawings show approximate locations j only. Care shall be used to locate each fixture at the centre of spaces or rooms and to align continuous rows of fluorescent fixtures. ' .3 Location of outlets in public areas or generally in any corridor, lobby, or in any areas having decorative wall finishes such as glazed tile, mosaic tile, marble, wood panelling, prefabricated panels, etc., shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to installation. i .4 Where outlets are located within 1.5M of a mechanical device such as a thermostat, co-ordinate with the Mechanical Trade to ensure that the items are located to the approval of the Architect. .5 Outlets shall not be mounted halfway through a ceramic or glazed tile dado line. If necessary, the mounting height specified shall be adjusted and the outlet located above the dado line. ' .6 Outlet boxes intended for wall receptacles, switches, telephone outlets, etc., located in exposed concrete block, brick walls or ceramic tile walls shall be ! , saw-cut into the top or bottom edge of the nearest course of block, brick or tile I at a height nearest the specified elevation, and the height shall be uniform throughout the project. Opening shall be of minimum size required to take the outlet box and such that the device cover plate will conceal the cut. .7 Where a number of outlets are located side by side, their centre lines shall be aligned horizontally. Where outlets occur one above the other, their centre lines shall be aligned vertically. In each case the distance between cover plates shall be 25mm. Stagger back-to-back outlets in partition walls. .8 Final roughing-in locations of all floor outlets shall be obtained from the Architectural furniture and equipment layout drawings. III ' .9 Receptacles in counters or furniture shall be mounted as detailed on Architectural Drawings. j ' .10 Outlets in kitchen shall be mounted at various heights and in locations shown on kitchen roughing-in drawings. Locations shown on electrical drawings are for pricing only. .11 Obtain mounting heights from the Architect for all outlets that do not have mounting height indicated. I, i' PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 ' PAGE 30 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS , .12 All wiring devices, loudspeakers, clock outlets, telephone outlets, etc. shall be mounted in a corresponding manner to those in the existing building unless othernrise noted. .13 All measurements listed, unless otherwise noted, refer to centre line of device ' from finished floor. .14 Mounting height above floor shall be as follows: .1 Top of panel board 1900mm. .2 Lighting switches shall be located on the knob/latch side of the door , unless otherwise indicated or applicable, and shall be mounted at 1100mm. .3 Recessed motor starters shall be mounted at same height as light switches in that area. ' .4 Receptacles, telephone and T.V. antenna outlets 300mm. Handicapped wheelchair access building 600mm. ' .5 Receptacles above counters 1200mm in general handicapped wheelchair face of counter. However coordinate this with actual counter , or backsplash height; obtain details from architectural drawings. .6 Fire alarm manual pull stations for buildings 1100mm. .7 End of line resistor for signal and alarm circuits shall be mounted at 1.8M AFF. .8 Alarm signals 2.5M, and 225mm below ceiling in areas where ceiling height is lower than 2.5M. .9 Clocks unless otherwise detailed 2.5M and 300mm below ceiling in ' areas where ceiling height is lower than 2.5M. .10 Speakers unless otherwise detailed 2.5M and 300mm ceiling in areas , where ceiling height is lower than 2.5M. .11 Sound system switches 1175mm for wheelchair use. ' .12 Thermostats shall be mounted 11 00m for handicapped access. , .13 Telephone intercom handsets at 1175mm for wheelchair use. 1 ' DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 31 .14 Receptacles in the Mechanical Rooms and other unfinished areas 1200mm. .15 Bottom of lighting fixtures over mirrors 50mm above mirror. Check { ' Architectural drawings for detail. 3.16 CIRCUITING OF OUTLETS .1 Each outlet shown on the drawing shall be connected to the lighting panel indicated. Outlets with same branch circuit number shall be connected to the same branch circuit breaker. Outlets without circuit number designation shall be connected to a spare circuit breaker in the nearest lighting panel, normal or emergency in accordance with the nature of the service required. Circuit numbers shall correspond to breaker number in panel. I .2 Circuit numbers also show grouping of outlets connected to any given circuit. Circuit numbers may be changed only where required to balance loads in a panel. ' .3 Common neutral may be used for circuits on different phases. Separate neutrals shall be provided for dimmed circuits and circuits connected to ground fault protected circuit breakers and circuits with isolated ground. ' 3.17 ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION .1 Division 15 will supply electrical motors, starters, controls, relays, thermostats, float switches, pressure switches, flow switches, pilot lights, remote control stations, safety devices, aquastats, control transformers, disconnects for control circuits, and interlocks. .2 Division 15 will mount the above equipment, except for line voltage wall thermostats and starters, which shall be mounted by Division 16. ! ' .3 Division 16 shall supply and mount isolation switches where required for safe servicing of motors, as well as at electrical panels of all factory assembled I ' package equipment, e.g. rooftop units, condensing units, airconditioning units. .4 The isolation switch shall be located within sight of and not more than 7.5mm from the motor and the machinery driven by the motor. .5 Unless otherwise indicated Division 16 shall provide all power wiring as defined ' herein. I' PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 ' PAGE 32 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' .6 Division 15 will provide all control and interlock wiring including connection to ' equipment and to source of supply. .7 Power wiring is defined as all single or three phase wiring carrying the full line ' current of the mechanical equipment, including all wiring of line voltage controls and isolation disconnects connected in line between the source and the mechanical equipment and including connection to the equipment. .8 Control and interlock wiring is defined as all mechanical equipment wiring other than power wiring outlined above. .9 Division 15 will provide detailed wiring diagrams for each motor. 10 Division 15, unless specifically indicated otherwise, will provide all wiring for ' damper motor power and control from nearest lighting panel except where the drawings indicate power outlets by Division 16. For these instances Division 15 will wire from the outlet to the damper motor. ' .11 Ascertain exact location of starters, motors and line voltage controls from Mechanical Drawings. If no starter location is indicated on the Electrical ' Drawings, obtain it from the Mechanical Drawings or from the Architect prior to dosing of Tenders. This shall also apply to motors indicated on single line distribution diagrams but not the floor plans. ' 3.18 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING .1 Excavate and backfill as required for this work both inside and outside the , building. All trench excavation shall be carried out in strict conformity with the Trench Excavator Protection Act and Amendments, Statutes of Ontario and ' Regulations, as revised and amended to date. .2 All excavation and backfilling shall also conform with the requirements of the Excavation and Backfilling Section of the Specification. ' .3 Carefully check and avoid disturbing or damaging any existing underground piping, conduit or other services uncovered during carrying out of work. Make ' good any damage. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 33 r 4 Existing underground sewers and other services are indicated approximately (� on the Mech., Elec., or Arch. Site Plans. The location of such services has been determined from available information but has not been verified in the field. Carefully check such locations, perform all necessary exploratory excavations and report any serious discrepancy before proceeding with any new work. Engage the services of local PUC, Hydro, Telephone and Gas Authorities to accurately determine location of any underground utilities. ! , .5 Excavations for all underground services shall be of the required depth and dimension and shall be: .1 Prepared as required, so that no portion of any duct shall bear directly against any rock or other hard surface. .2 Kept dry at all times by bailing, pumping or other means. Sides and bottoms shall be kept from freezing. .3 Bottoms of excavation shall be graded as required. .4 Banks of excavations shall be evenly cut and/or trimmed and they shall ' be shored as required to prevent caving in, and the material used shall be carefully withdrawn during backfilling. ' .5 Width of excavation shall be carefully controlled and shall be limited to twice the O.D. of ducts, conduits or duct bank, and as shown on the Drawings. .6 Excavating, duct laying, and backfilling shall be executed in limited length as determined by the Architect to enable all protective measures to function efficiently at all times. .7 Any rocks and boulders encountered shall be removed. Rocks and t boulders removed from the excavation shall be broken up as required, to permit handling. Any rock encountered shall be removed by drilling and wedging as no blasting will be allowed. I ' .6 Where any excavating is necessary in close proximity to and below any footing level, backfilling shall be done with 2000# concrete furnished under this Section to the level of the top of highest adjacent footing. { .7 All ducts and duct banks entering and leaving the Building or passing other excavated areas shall be supported on a reinforced concrete pad, resting at both ends on at least 1800mm solid undisturbed earth or a check in a concrete foundation wall. 1' 1� PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 ' PAGE 34 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' .8 Any concrete encased duct banks crossing unstable or excavated areas shall ' have reinforcing. .9 In areas where reinforced suspended slab is indicated on structural drawings, duct or duct banks shall be supported from reinforcing rods. , .10 Should the excavation by negligence or error, be carried to greater depth than shown or authorized, such extra excavation shall be replaced with ' well-compacted approved Granular B crushed stone fill or 2000# concrete, as required to give a bearing value equal to that provided by adjacent soil. .11 Backfilling shall not be commenced until installation is inspected and approved. , Backfilling shall be carried out carefully to avoid injury to the work and subsequent settlement and shall be executed as follows: ' .12 All backfilling required to bring level up to underside of stone fill (under parking areas, and roads) and to underside of sidewalk shall be Granular B material, ' supplied and placed under this Section and tamped every 150mm in depth to consolidate said fill. Fill shall be dean, shall not have particles over 65mm in largest dimensions, with not more than 8% passing a #200 sieve. ' .13 All backfilling under driveways, sidewalks, etc., shall be compacted in 150mm layers to a 95% standard Proctor Density. Cost of testing and inspection of ' said fill including checking the placing and compaction of fill, shall be bome by trades doing the work under this Section. One test shall be made (every 2 layers of fill) for each 500 sq.m. or less of filled areas for driveways, parking ' areas and sidewalks. .14 Exterior backfill in areas to receive sod or seed shall be clean fill, free from organic material and debris, placed in maximum 300mm layers and compacted ' to achieve 90% dry density as determined by the standard AASHO test. Frozen earth shall not be used for backfilling nor shall any backfilling be placed on or against frozen ground. ' .15 Backfill trenches within building with Granular B crushed stone in layers and compact to 100% Standard Proctor Density. , 16 Supply and install a 150mm wide plastic film 8" below finished surface or grade to mark the location of ducts, cables and conduits. Film shall be , manufactured by Griffolyn or equal and shall contain continuous printed warning and message designating service buried. Film shall be orange for power lines and green for communication lines. , i II DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 35 I ' .17 If settlement occurs, it shall be made up as soon as possible, so that the I, regular traffic in and around the work will not be inconvenienced. After a period adequate to reveal that settlement has passed, fill all depressions to restore the correct grade. .18 Patching of all paved areas, roads, walks, sodding etc. damaged by new work will be done by another division. .19 Be responsible for making good any subsequent settlement of fill and pay all costs involved in making good paving, curbs and all other surfaces restorations. .20 Backfilling shall be brought up to 300mm from final grade. Final backfilling l ' shall be by General Trades. .21 Excavated materials shall be piled, stored and/or disposed of as follows: ' .22 During the progress of the contract, in such places and in such a manner that a minimum of damage or disfigurement of existing ground will result. I , .23 On completion of work, dump all excavated material on site where directed by the Architect. The site shall be Gear and unencumbered to the Architect's satisfaction. 3.19 PAINTING ' .1 Unless otherwise specified, all surface mounted equipment such as panels, switchboards, transformers, etc. shall have factory prefinished exterior surfaces. All prefinished equipment surfaces shall be cleaned and any scratches shall be touched up with original paint on completion of project. .2 All equipment intended for recessing, such as flush panels and recessed t electric heaters and equipment specified with finish suitable for painting shall have factory applied prime coat of paint. Final painting of prime painted equipment will be done under Painting Section of this specification. L, .3 If in the Architect's opinion, touching up is not sufficient to provide a satisfactory appearance, the equipment shall be replaced and/or repainted to the Architect's approval. I' 3.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' 1 Refer to and be governed by General Specification applicable Division. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 ' PAGE 36 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' 2 Openings shall be kept to a minimum to receive conduits and equipment. .3 Mark carefully all areas to be cut prior to commencement of work. Coordinate ' the work with all other trades. Keep required cutting to a minimum. .4 Should any cutting and repairing of either unfinished or finished work be required due to failure of this trade to advise of or install equipment or sleeves on time, such cutting and patching shall be carried out by the trade affected ' and Division 16 shall pay all costs of such work. .5 No powder activated tools shall be used on this project. , .6 After penetration of any fire separation and installation of conduits or panels, restore the fire separation to its original rating. , 3.21 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT .1 All power, lighting, signal and telephone panels, disconnect switches, starters, ' contactors and time switches shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving, secured to the equipment with ' screws, to indicate function, voltage and designation appearing on drawings. .2 Cover plates for recessed motor starters shall have engraved designation, to , the satisfaction of the Architect, to differentiate them from light switches, e.g. "FAN". .3 All fusible units and/or breakers in power panels and switchboards shall be , identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving secured with screws to indicate load served. .4 Surface mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted on exterior face of door or cover. Flush mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted at the top of the inside face of the door or cover. ' .5 Each panelboard shall have a typewritten legend to indicate area or equipment controlled by each branch circuit. ' .6 All feeders in pullboxes shall be tagged with load. Tags shall be T & B "E-Z Code" markers or equal. , .7 Terminal strips in control panels shall be indexed and wires shall be colour coded. f� DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 37 .8 Raceways and junction boxes of the various systems shall be identified by ^, colour bars, dots or rings on the exterior of the raceway at 9000mm intervals and at termination points. The identification may be coloured adhesive tape or paint and shall be located 150mm from the duct or conduit coupling. Sheathed ! , cables shall be marked at 15000mm intervals and at termination points. ! .9 The identification shall be by voltage and system type as follows: 750 volts and higher- yellow plus voltage designation 600V & 347/600 volt- orange 120/240V & 120/208 volt- blue (light) 600V & 347/600 volt - Emergency - orange and white 120/240V & 120/208 volt- Emergency - blue and white Fire alarm system - red Alarm systems'- black Bell Telephone - green I1 Low voltage system - brown .10 All conductors shall be colour coded. All conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller I, shall have the colour impregnated into the insulation at the time of manufacture. In the case of conductors size No. 6 gauge and larger they may be colour coded with adhesive colour coding tape, but only black insulated t conductors shall be employed in this case except for neutrals which shall be white whenever possible. Where colour coding tape is utilised, it must be applied for a minimum of 25mm at all terminations and junction boxes. Painting of conductors will not be accepted under any conditions. The colour coding shall also apply to all bussing in panels and bus ducts, in which the phasing shall be 'A','B','C', from left to right when facing the panel or vertical bus duct. .11 Conductor colour coding shall be as follows: Phase 'A' - Red Phase 'B' - Black (Yellow) Phase 'C' - Blue Neutral - White ' Ground - Green Control - Orange Fire Alarm: Stations - Red and Blue Signals - Black and White Detectors - Red and Blue PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 38 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .12 All equipment, including electrical motors, shall have a proper nameplate , affixed thereto, showing the size, name of equipment, service, serial number, and all information usually provided which shall include voltage, frequency, phase, and horsepower of motors and the name and address of the manufacturer. All stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates shall be perfectly legible to the satisfaction of the Architect. Nameplates shall not be painted over, and where apparatus is to be insulated, nameplates shall be firmly attached with rigid insulation back-up, of equal thickness of that of ' jacket. 3.22 TESTING , .1 Make any tests required by the Architect during the progress of the work or at its completion. Provide all necessary labour and equipment for such tests. ' Such tests shall be carried out for the purposes of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .2 Tests must last for duration specified, defects and faults developed shall be , corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner, Architect and the local authorities. ' 3.23 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL .1 When the installation is completed and ready for acceptance, demonstrate to, ' and instruct, owners staff or representative in the operation of each piece of equipment and system. Provide required labour and equipment for the ' demonstrations and instructions. 3.24 SEQUENCE OF WORK .1 The work may have to be carried out in certain stages. Refer to Architectural Specifications for further details. 3.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT , .1 Where it is indicated that equipment is to be installed in future, leave such , space clear and install the conduits, outlets, equipment and other work in such a way that future equipment installations and connections can be made. Consult with the representative of the Architect whenever necessary for the , purpose. End of Section ' f' I, DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 i' 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 !, 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 COVER PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 LIGHT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 RECEPTACLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.5 PILOT LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ' 2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.7 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.8 TIME SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 I� 2.9 CONTACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.10 CLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.11 OUTLET BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ' 2.12 PULLBOXES, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.4 OUTLET BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.5 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.6 RACEWAYS FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.7 EMPTY CONDUITS FOR SPECIAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1, 1 1 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete and adequate installation of electrical materials as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements and Section 16050 for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Cover plates. .2 Light switches. .3 Receptacles. .4 Circuit breakers. .5 Time switches. ' .6 Photo-Electric controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES .1 Underground junction boxes: Crouse Hinds Type EGJ-422 or EGJ-421 complete with Ozite compound or equal. jl .2 EYS sealing condulets shall be Crouse Hinds or equal complete with Chico-A compound and Chico K fiber. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS .3 Condulets, outlet boxes and fittings shall be as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds of Canada Limited, Kondu Manufacturing Company Limited, Thomas and Betts Limited, Killark of Canada Limited and Efcor of Canada Limited. 2.2 COVER PLATES .1 Cover plates for receptacles, switches, pilot lights, telephone outlets, T.V. outlets and other devices requiring cover plates for flush mounted boxes shall be: .1 plate shall be protected by adhesive plastic film which shall be removed after painting. .2 nylon or bakelite of colour to match wiring devices. .2 Weatherproof cover plates shall be diecast contusion resistant PVC type which include protective WP enclosure even with cable plugged into receptacle and shall be suitable for mounting on F.S. type boxes. All weatherproof cover plates shall have rubber or neoprene gaskets between cover and box. Cover plate shall be as manufactured by Noma. .3 Plates for surface mounted cast boxes shall be galvanized formed steel type. .4 Plates for surface mounted cast boxes in non hazardous areas shall be ' aluminum or PVC to match the box. .5 Cover plates for other flush mounted equipment shall be supplied of quality and performance specified by the manufacturer of the equipment. .6 Cover plates shall not carry manufacturer's name. ' .7 Coverplates of quality specified shall be Bryant, Leviton, Smith & Stone, Harvey Hubbell, P & S. ' .8 Cover plates for receptacles other than 15 amps and 120 volt shall have the amperage and voltage engraved into the plate and filled with black paint. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE 3 I .9 Wall telephone outlets shall have single gang covers as specified for switches and receptacles in this specification. 2.3 LIGHT SWITCHES 1 Switches shall be unless otherwise indicated Bryant quiet type with white handles as follows: .1 Heavy Duty Grade 15A 20A Key15A Key20A Single Pole 120V 4801 4901 4801 L 4901 L Double Pole 120V 4802 4902 4802L 4902L 3-Way 120V 4803 4903 4803L 4903L 4-Way 120V 4804 4904 4804L 4904L .2 Heavy Duty Grade 15A 20A rSingle Pole 347V 6801 6901 Double Pole 347V 6802 6902 3-Way 347V 6803 6903 4-Way 347V 6804 6904 .2 Switches of equal quality as manufactured by P & S, Arrow Hart, Leviton and Hubbell shall be considered as acceptable as specified alternates. .3 Dimmers shall be Lutron with colour and wattage as indicated on drawings. 2.4 RECEPTACLES .1 Receptacles shall be, unless otherwise indicated, U ground type, white, screw terminal type. Receptacles connected to emergency power supply shall be red. Receptacles indicated as quad on drawings shall be two duplex receptacles in one 100 x 100 outlet box. Receptacles indicated as "DG shall be dedicated ground with individual ground and neutral wires back to panel. .2 Catalogue numbers listed are Bryant. .3 Receptacles shall be as follows: .j .1 Specification Grade - 15A 125V duplex 5262 15A 125V duplex (emergency) 5262RED i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 , PAGE 4 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS 15A 125V duplex ground fault GFR52FT .4 Devices of equal quality and type as manufactured by P and S, Arrow Hart, Leviton and Hubbell shall be considered as specified alternates. 1 Clock Hanger - Clock hanger outlets shall be used for all view boxes shown. 15A 125V Gw stainless steel plate, 2828GS 2.5 PILOT LIGHTS .1 Neon type, red plastic jewel for switch plate opening shall be Bryant 48071-R. .2 Incandescent type, single red jewel for use in single vertical opening plate with 6 watt 120V candelabra lamp shall be Bryant 1376. .3 Devices of equal quality and type as manufactured by P & S, Arrow Hart, Leviton, and Harvey Hubbell shall be considered as specified alternates. 2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Disconnect switches shall have ample gutter space for top or bottom wiring and shall have fully visible blades when in the "off' position with cover open. Disconnect switches shall have a quick-make, quick-break mechanism and shall be horsepower rated. .2 Disconnect switches shall have a mechanism by which their covers are interlocked with the handle to prevent opening when in the "on" position, but which can be defeated by means of a screwdriver or similar tool. Disconnect switches shall have pad locking provisions. .3 Flush mounted unfused disconnect switches shall have flush mounting trim and door and front operated rotary type handle. .4 Disconnect switches shall be Federal Pioneer, Square D, Commander, Westinghouse or Siemens Electric. 2.7 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROLS .1 Photo-electric controls shall be weatherproof temperature compensated and shock and vibration resistant. The electric cell shall be screened against ultraviolet rays. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 l SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE 5 .2 "On" and "off' action shall be adjustable from 20 to 500 Lux. Switch shall have a minimum of 5-second delay to prevent false switching due to temporary flashes of light. .3 Should any part of the photo-electric control fail to operate, the switch shall be in the "on" (fail-safe) position. 4 Photo-electric control shall be suitable for mounting on a flush mounted cast outlet box cover plate and shall have a swivel mount. j .5 Photo-electric control shall be Tork Cat. #2100 or equal by Interrnatic or Sangamo. 2.8 TIME SWITCHES .1 Time switches shall have Astronomic dial day omitting device and reserve power feature, Tork Cat. #7100 Z1 or equal. .2 "On" operation shall occur automatically at sunset and "off' operation shall be adjustable from 10:00 p.m. to 2:00 a.m. in one-half hour increments or at sunrise. Both "on" and "off' shall have a range of adjustability of 20-40 minutes before or after sunset and sunrise. .3 Time switches shall be 7 day type with skip-a-day and reverse power feature. .4 The time switch shall be powered by a self-starting synchronous motor. Time switch contacts shall be 40 amps T-rated at 120 volts and shall have number of poles shown on the drawing. .5 Time switches controlling mechanically held contactors shall be single pole double throw 120 volt 40 amps. .6 Time switches shall be single pole double throw 120 volt with 24 hour dial. .7 Enclosure shall be Nema 1 surface mounting type 8 Flush mounted time switches shall have hinged door and lock. .9 Time switch shall be Tork or equivalent by Intermatic or Paragon. i 1 � i r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 6 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS 2.9 CONTACTORS .1 Contactors shall be electro-magnetically operated, mechanically held. electrically held. The contactors sizes 0 to 5 shall be of the vertical action design, employing double break silver alloy contacts. Contacts controlling lighting load shall be rated to take 100% tungsten filament load and 80% continuous non-inductive heating load without enclosure. Enclosure shall be Name type 1 and of sufficient size as not to derate the device to less than 90% of the continuous open nominal current rating. Each contactor shall be capable of carrying continually without overheating the load specked on the drawing. If necessary,the next higher rated contactor shall be supplied. .2 Contactors shall be provided with shading coils imbedded in the magnet frame to reduce the a/c hum to a minimum. .3 Contactors shall have 24 volt or 120 volt control coils and control circuit fuse holder and fuse. Contactors controlling 208, 440, 347 or 600 volt loads shall have integral control circuit transformer. .4 Mechanically held contactors controlled by maintained contact pilot devices shall have coil Gearing contacts. .5 Electrically operated contactors shall have an "on-off-auto" selector switch in the cover except that heating load contactors shall have "auto-off' selector switches. .6 Mechanically held contactors shall have momentary contact on-off push buttons in cover. .7 Lighting contactors shall be Square D Class 8903. Other contactors shall be Square D Class 8502. Equivalent contactors by Arrow-Hart, Asco or Westinghouse will be accepted as approved equal. .8 Remote pushbuttons shall be flush mounted in brushed stainless steel cover plate. .9 Cover plate shall match cover plates specified elsewhere in the specifications. Square D Class 9001 type BB-9 or equal. I I � DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE 7 2.10 CLOCKS 1 Supply and install 120 volt 60 Hz electric clocks. Clocks shall be Edwards of Canada, Cat. # 2921-2, 300mm diameter, round, gray case, white face, black j and red metric numbers and black hands. 2.11 OUTLET BOXES .1 Outlet boxes shall be electro-galvanized and made of code gauge steel. Boxes shall be of size and type suitable for the particular location and application. .2 Unless otherwise specified, receptacles and switch boxes shall be sectional where recessed and formed steel, solid type boxes where surface mounted. .3 100mm square boxes with single gang plaster ring or extension ring shall be used for single devices where necessary to accommodate wiring and conduit entries. i .4 Outlet boxes for ceiling and wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be 1 00m octagon. Outlet boxes for recessed fixtures shall be 1 00m octagon or 1 00m square of depth as required by code. Where special outlets are required for wall mounted fixtures, these shall be used. j .5 Where more than one switch is shown on plan, a multigang box shall be used. .6 Outlet boxes for grouped outlets such as TV and receptacles, telephone and receptacles shall be solid gang type with barriers to separate the various systems and shall be Westinghouse type GSB with GBC plaster covers. .7 Outlet boxes for the various systems shall be as specified in their respective Sections of this Specification, and as required by manufacturer of the system. .8 Wiring devices located on prefabricated partitions shall be mounted in boxes supplied by the partition manufacturer and as described elsewhere in these specifications. j .9 Outlet boxes for 347 volt light switches shall be Westinghouse, MBD-1-HV or MBS-1-HV single or multi-gang as required. I �I 2.12 PULLBOXES, ETC. .1 Boxes shall be as manufactured by W.C. Pursley, Be[ Products, Stelpro Square D or Sylvania. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 ' PAGE 8 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PART 3.- EXECUTION 3.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTS .1 Contactors, photo-electric controls and time switches shall be used to control the exterior lights and signs. Refer to appropriate Detail. .2 If the photocell is not indicated on the Drawings, obtain the location from the Consultant. .3 The photo-electric cell shall be wired so as to control a magnetic contactor and shall cause the magnetic contactor to close at dusk and open at dawn for all-night items such as security lights. For each group of other items, a time switch shall shut off the appropriate contactor at the designated hours. Obtain designated hours from the owner. Each contactor shall have an "On-Off-Auto" switch to permit manual operation of the individual contactor. .4 Control circuit of contactor shall be taken through a control transformer from line side of contactor through a control circuit fuse mounted within the contactor enclosure. :5 Contactors shall have lamacoid nameplates indicating that control circuit is supplied from a different source. 3.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF INTERIOR LIGHTS .1 Shall supply and install contactors for remote or automatic control of circuits designated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES, ETC. .1 Wherever necessary for proper installation of anchoring of cables, whether shown on the drawings or not, pullboxes, junction boxes or cable anchor boxes r� shall be installed. .2 Pullboxes, junction boxes, cable anchor boxes, etc., shall be suitable for the application and location in which they are used. Where joints are made inside any of the above boxes these shall be equipped with terminal blocks with screw terminals for each wire. i� DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS PAGE 9 j .3 Flush mounted pullboxes, etc., shall have screw-on covers and a 20mm 1 overlap on all sides and shall be prime coated for painting. Location of all flush mounted pullboxes in finished areas must be approved by the Consultant prior to installation. it .4 Boxes shall be located so as to be accessible after the building is completed. Supply access panels where required to make boxes accessible. I .5 Each wire in pullboxes and junction boxes shall have wire ends colour coded and/or marked with E-Z Code Marker tape. 3.4 OUTLET BOXES .1 Outlet boxes recessed in exposed concrete block or masonry walls shall be saw-cut into the comer and lower edge of the block at the appropriate course of block or file closest to the specified mounting height. Uniform mounting heights shall be maintained throughout the project. Opening shall be of r minimum size required to fit the outlet box, and sufficiently small that the outlet box cover plate will conceal the cut. Outlet boxes on exterior wall shall be provided with vapour barrier. i .2 Outlet boxes for exterior or weatherproof receptacles and switches shall be t cast F.S. type with gaskets and shall be recessed, where possible, in the wall or structure. .3 Outlets in plaster walls shall consist of 100mm square box with raised plaster cover. For ganged outlets use solid gang type boxes with raised plaster cover. .4 Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission between adjacent areas. i .5 Outlet boxes for devices mounted side by side or one above the other shall be separated by a minimum of 25mm. I .6 Outlet boxes for outlets located in poured concrete ceilings shall consist of 100mm octagonal concrete rings and covers. Outlet boxes shall be of sufficient depth to avoid the need of conduit offsets. Conduits shall enter box between the top and bottom reinforcing rods. f' .7 Outlet boxes for connection of equipment located against walls or partitions shall be 100mm square and 65mm deep, complete with metal cover. Connection from box to equipment shall be made with extension box and flexible conduit and angle connector. 1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 10 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS .8 Outlet boxes used for high and low voltage devices which are indicated to be ganged shall use multigang boxes with securely fastened metal dividers. .9 Ceiling outlet boxes supporting suspended chandelier type lighting fixtures shall be provided with fixture studs. .10 Wall mounted exterior fixtures, unless otherwise shown shall have their outlet boxes flush mounted in the wall. .11 Outlet boxes shall be supported independent of the conduit. 3.5 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES .1 Where conduits are exposed, cast aluminum outlet boxes and condulets with suitable covers and gaskets shall be used. Conduit fittings shall be of a type suitable for their particular use. P.V.C. type outlet boxes may be used where P.V.C. conduit is used and permitted by code. .2 Condulets and outlet boxes shall have threaded hubs of size and number required for the application. Condulet covers shall be located in such a manner that the removal and access of the covers shall be clear of any obstructions. .3 Where necessary for proper pulling or anchoring of cables, junction boxes or cable anchor boxes shall be installed. All shall be installed in such a manner that they will be accessible after building is completed and they shall be set to come within finished surfaces of the building. .4 Sealing condulets shall be provided in all locations required by Code. In explosion proof areas suitable explosion proof condulets shall be installed for surface or flush mounting devices as specified. 3.6 RACEWAYS FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM 1 Supply and install an empty raceway system complete with conduits, pullboxes, panels, outlet boxes, and coverplates, suitable for the installation of telephone cables and telephone equipment, by the Telephone Company. The complete conduit installation shall meet all Telephone Company requirements. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 PAGE 11 t SECTION 16100 RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS I� each telephone outlet shall have a 20mm conduit run .2 Unless otherwise shown, panel or zone conduit location as applicable. to the telephone backboard, p 3 Raceways shall be rigid, galvanized steel conduit where exposed to mechanical injury. In all other locations, EMT may be used. 4 PVC duct shall be used for underground service entrance. Conduits shall be ^ 1 installed as specified under "Conduit Location and Installation" in this specification. 5 All conduit shall be fished with pull line. All blocks shall be cleared, and all outlet and pull boxes cleaned out at the completion of the installation. 6 Unless otherwise shown, wall telephone outlets shall be recessed flush with the wall finish. 7 Where telephone outlets are schrofied above with appropriate barriers�t g solid The type box shall be used as spe telephone outlet shall occupy two gangs of the multigang outlet box. .8 Outlets for telephones shall be single gang sectional type box. 9 Surface mounted telephone cabinets will be supplied and installed by Telephone Company in the locations shown. .10 At the telephone equipment location supply a plywood backboard, painted and securely fastened with flat head bolts to the wall. every 11 straight conduit run; every steel m or l less of straight co dluit run and one 90 deg. bend or equivalent; every two 90 deg. bends or equivalent. 12 Minimum posite ends of the box shall be at least 8 times having the diameter of the ' op largest conduit. .13 All telephone conduits shall be grounded to building ground. .14 Service entrance conduits shall be of type and size indicated on the drawings and shall be supplied and installed by this Division. 15 Provide one 100mm diameter service conduit from street to telephone service panel. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 12 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS .16 A 20mm conduit shall be run from the telephone service panel to service ground to provide a ground for the telephone service. 3.7 EMPTY CONDUITS FOR SPECIAL SYSTEMS •1 Supply and install a complete system of empty conduits, boxes and panels for ' the enclosure of wiring for systems specified. .2 All conduits shall be as specified in 'Basic Electrical Methods". Conduits shall be cleared and cleaned and all outlets and pullboxes cleaned out at the completion of the installation. All conduit shall be left with a pull line installed from outlet to outlet and fastened at each box. .3 Conduit bends shall have a bending radii or not less than ten times the conduit diameter. Conduit shall be reamed out and all ends identified. .4 All conduits shall be grounded to building ground. .5 Additional steel pullboxes shall be installed where necessary, so that throughout the entire system, there shall be not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends in each run so that wire or cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease. End of Section t 1 I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV PAGE i PAGE ARTICLE NAME PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED . . 1 1.4 CASH ALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 RELATED WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.6 CONCRETE PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 CABLE TERMINATION 2.3 SURGE ARRESTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . 3.1 CONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.2 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 CO-OPERATION WITH UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b 3.4 HIGH VOLTAGE FEEDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 � SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV PAGE 1 I� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Specification Sections 16050, 16100 and 16400 shall form part of this specification section as though written out in full herein. j 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Furnish all necessary labour, supervision, materials, equipment and services to complete the installation and testing of the completehigh voltage electrical systems as indicated on the drawings,specified herein and including, but not limited to the following: .1 HV underground service supply cable in concrete encased dud. .2 Transformer pad and vault suitable for Ontario Hydro supplied pad mount transformer. 1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED 1 The following lists works referred to in this section which is not included in this contract: 1.4 CASH ALLOWANCE 1 Cash allowance shall be in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Include the following cash allowances: .1 Work by P.U.C. .2 Pad mount transformer. .3 Dip pole and associated switches. 1.5 RELATED WORK .1 Excavation and Backfilling: Division 2 .2 Concrete Work: Section 16050. 3 Excavation and Backfilling: Section 16050. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV 1.6 CONCRETE PAD .1 The pad mount transformer shall be mounted on a concrete pad with vault j below to Ontario Hydro (PUC) requirements. Pad size shall be determined from shop drawings and shall extend 100mm beyond all sides of the equipment. All comers and top edges shall be clampered concrete work and required forming shall be supplied and installed by this Division. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE .1 HV cable shall be single conductor 28KV cable for operation on a 27.6 KV multi-grounded Public Utility system. Provide one spare cable in addition to phase conductors. .2 The cable shall have stranded copper conductors, XLPE insulation, extruded conductor with insulation semi-conducting shield, 100% insulation for 27.6 KV system, 33% concentric neutral and extruded polyvinyl jacket .3 The conductor shall be copper sized 2/0 AWG. .4 The cable shall be suitable for installation in a duct bank. Design and test data shall be supplied. .5 The cable shall be as manufactured by: .1 Canada Wire and Cable Limited, .2 Pirelli Cables, .3 Phillips Cables. 2.2 CABLE TERMINATION .1 High voltage cables shall be terminated using cable terminators with sealed compression connectors. The cable terminators shall be as manufactured by: .1 Raychem Canada Limited - heat shrink type cable terminators - Model - HVT .2 G&W- porcelain terminator with solid dielectric - Model - PATR. .3 Joslyn-Molded terminator if accepted by Public Utility. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV PAGE 3 2 The termination, bending and splicing of high voltage cables must be made in 1 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cable bends must be in accordance with Rule 36-102 and Table 15. 3 The terminators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use as required. i .4 The installation of all cables must comply where applicable with Regulations 12-012, 12-1116, 12-3028, 12-3042, 36-100 (and Appendix B, where applicable to these rules) and Bulletins 12-2-7 and 12-7-7, as well as complying with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation and termination of their cable. .5 Retain an approved independent test company to conduct tests on the high voltage cables. High voltage cables shall be measured and potential tested as recommended by the manufacturer. A record shall be made of all tests conducted and submitted to the Consultant for approval. Copies of the records shall also be installed in the instruction manual. .6 The concentric neutrals of the cable shall be grounded at both ends. 2.3 SURGE ARRESTORS 1 Lightning arrestors on the 13.8 KV system shall be 15 KV Intermediate Class as manufactured by: 1 Ohio Brass, .2 MacGraw-Edison, .3 ASEA, I � .4 GE. .2 Provide suitable brackets for mounting the lightning arrestors on the dead end pole. .3 Surge arresters should be installed as required by Regulation 26-500 in order j to adequately protect the transformer bank and/or high voltage cable from overvoltage surges due to lightning, switching or fault conditions. These must be grounded in accordance with Regulation 36-306. If dry type transformers are installed, then properly co-ordinated surge arresters must be installed as close as possible to the transformer primary to protect the transformer against surges. This is in accordance with the recommendations of CSA Standard i C9-M-1981, Appendix B, Clause B2.2. 1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 4 SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTORS .1 The work related to the installation and termination of the high voltage cables, shall be performed by a contractor specialized and experienced in this type of work. 3.2 GROUNDING .1 Provide a complete grounding system to ensure the safety of equipment and personnel in the event of faults. _ .2 Install ground rods with interconnecting loop at the transformer pad and at the dead-end pole as required. .3 The grounding of the high voltage equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Public Utility and the Electrical Code. .4 Grounding and bonding equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 41-1950 (or 1967). .5 Grounding, in general, must comply with Rules 36-300 to 36-310 of the 1983 Electrical Safety Code, where applicable. .6 If the incoming supply is grounded and a neutral conductor is available at the point of supply, it must be grounded by the copper equivalent of the neutral. .7 Pothead bodies must be grounded directly to the lightning arrester grounding conductor. .8 Ground conductors shall be concentric stranded, soft drawn copper, unless noted otherwise. Insulated conductors, where required by inspection authorities or indicated, shall be type TWU, 600V rated, green coloured insulation with standard soft drawn copper conductors. .9 Grounding of Electrical Room shall be as outlined in Section 16050. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16310 - HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATION 27.6KV PAGE 5 3.3 CO-OPERATION WITH UTILITY .1 Be responsible for and pay out of the cash allowance the cost of supply I authority services associated with the installation of the service. .2 Co-ordinate the work of the Public Utility on behalf of the Owner so as to ensure completion of the project on time. .3 Provide assistance as required by the Public Utility. The Contractor shall bear the cost of this work. 3.4 HIGH VOLTAGE FEEDERS 1 Install a duct bank with ducts encased in concrete and reinforced with steel bars as indicated. The trenching, backfilling and concrete work shall be in accordance with the appropriate sections of this Specification. .2 Provide bell-end fittings at all duct bank terminating locations. 3 Terminate the cables using the appropriate terminators. Retain the services of a specialized technician to terminate the high voltage cables. Install suitable cable support brackets and arrestors on the pole and leave sufficient cable length for Supply Authority to make the final connection to the overhead line. Spare cable shall be energized at one end. Identify spare conductor and provide appropriate warning sign. 4 Before pulling cable into ducts and until such time that the cables are properly terminated, maintain the ends of the cables sealed with moisture tape or compound. 5 After the installation of cables and terminations, seal duct ends with duct sealing compound. .6 The concentric neutrals of the cable shall be grounded at both ends. End of Section DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE ' PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 UTILITY METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.3 GROUND INDICATION RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 2.4 AC INSTRUMENTATION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 CONTROL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.6 REVERSE CURRENT RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.7 GROUND FAULT RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.8 FIXED AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.9 UNFUSED ISOLATION SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.10 MOULDED CASE DISTRIBUTION BREAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.11 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 6 2.12 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.13 METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 9 2.14 COMBINATION FRAME/TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 9 2.15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.1 ELECTRIC SERVICE . 10 3.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . • 12 3.4 METERING CABINETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.5 CALIBRATION AND TESTING . 12 3.6 RE-TORQUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.7 EMPTY CONDUITS AT PANELS &TERMINAL CABINET 12 3.8 CO-ORDINATION STUDY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 EQUIPMENT SPRINKLER PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. ' 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete and adequate service and distribution system as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing i submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Service Entrance Board. .2 Main Switchboard. .3 Power Panels. .4 Lighting Panels. .5 Transformers. .6 Circuit breakers. .7 Unfused Isolation Switches. 1.4 ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE WORK .1 Include in tender a cash allowance of $12,000.00 exclusive of overhead and profit, to cover the cost of work to be done and charged for by the local P.U.C. in bringing in the electric service as shown on the Drawings. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION .2 Before the expenditure from the allowance can be made, the P.U.C.invoice for this work must be forwarded to the Consultant If the value of the invoice is less than the cash allowance, the remaining balance shall be deducted from the contract price. If the invoice exceeds the money included in the cash allowance, the contract price will be increased by an amount by which the invoice exceeds the cash allowance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARD .1 The service entrance board shall consist of a completely metal enclosed free-standing structure consisting of a main switch compartment, a current transformer compartment and a number of distribution panel sections as shown. .2 Buswork shall be braced to withstand available short circuit on the system and breakers and fuses shall have adequate interrupting capacity and shall be fully co-ordinated with other equipment on the load and line side. .3 The main switch compartment shall contain breaker of type, frame and size as indicated. The main switch compartment shall have door with hinge and the switch handle shall protrude through an opening in the door. The door shall have provisions for padlocking. .4 Buswork shall be 98% conductive pure copper, silver plated at the joints. All buswork joints and connections shall be equipped with anti-corrosive hardware. .5 Main switch or breaker shall be equipped with ground fault relay and all associated equipment. Ground fault relay shall be set at 1000 amps and 12 cycles unless otherwise indicated or required for coordination. .6 The current transformer compartment shall have a removable steel mounting plate and shall be equipped with all hardware and bus work to receive the local P.U.C.'s current and potential transformers. The current transformer compartment shall meet all requirements of the local P.U.C. The door over the current transformer compartment shall have a concealed hinge with sealing and padlocking provisions. Current transformers shall be obtained from the utility and installed in the compartment by the service entrance board manufacturer. .7 The distribution panel sections shall conform to all requirements of the "Power Panel" article of this specification with modifications and additional requirements as herein described. I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 3 .8 The distribution sections shall be breaker type as shown and as described in the "Power Panel' article of this section. I 9 Provide a number of spare breakers of quantity equal to 20% of the breaker units used. .10 The service entrance board shall be manufactured by FPE, Westinghouse, Siemens or Square D. .11 Service entrance board shall be provided with overhangs, drip pans and 7 barriers as required to protect against fire protection sprinkler water flow. 12 All access panels shall be hinged. .13 Face-to-face separation between phase and round shall be a minimum of J 205mm. The neutral-to-ground clearances may be 150mm. .14 No portion of the switchboard ground bus may extend into the CT compartment. .15 Customer's CTs and connections for customer's auxiliary equipment shall not be installed on the line side of O.H. metering CTs. .16 Approval of the CTs shall be obtained from the O.H. metering department. .17 Switchboard shall conform to all applicable CSA and CEMA standards and shall be suitable for use on a 600 Volt grounded wye system with a short circuit capacity of 50,000 Amperes R.M.S.symmetrical. 18 Switchboard shall be totally steel enclosed, with required overhangs, ventilation louvres, drip pans and barriers to protect the entire switchboard against damage from fire protection sprinkler head water flow. The switchboard shall be dead front,freestanding, mounted on 100mm x 40mm high full length channels at front and rear. Switchboard shall be mounted on a 1 00m concrete base. .19 Each section shall contain a full length ground bus linking and bonding together all sections and provision for connecting each end to the electrical room ground. .20 The ground bus shall have a momentary rating equal to or greater than that of the apparatus in the assembly and in no case shall the cross section area of the ground bus be less than 6 x 50mm. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 4 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION .21 All welded joints shall be ground flush with the surface of the base metals. Each section to have full height and depth metal barriers and insulated bus through each section. Special tools required for the operation and maintenance of equipment shall be supplied and handed over to Owner. .22 The interior and exterior of cubicles to be finished with rust resistant ground coat and two coats of light grey ASA 61 semi-gloss enamel. One extra quart of paint shall be supplied. .23 Lamacoid nameplates of 50mm x 75mm shall be provided on all doors of each section for identification purposes, showing section number, name, rating and size of feeders. All secondary breakers shall be provided with similar nameplates mounted above operating handles showing load supplied and breaker trip rating.All moulded case breakers shall have 25mm x 1 00m lamacoid nameplates identifying each unit and breaker as to connected load. .24 The switchboard shall be constructed to prevent twisting and moving during shipping and installation. .25 Complete switchboard shall be rodent-proof with maximum screen openings of 6mm. .26 Switchboard shall be manufactured in sections of suitable size as required to permit passage through corridors, door openings, etc.All sections of switchboard shall be approximately 2.25m high. All sections shall be interconnected with buswork and bolted together to form a self supporting structure. .27 Switchboard or specific cubicles of switchboard shall be made front accessible. Access to air circuit breaker and current transformers, etc. shall be by means of separate formed hinged doors at front where required. Provide doors over the secondary breaker unit sections. 2.2 UTILITY METERING .1 The switchboard shall be constructed to include provision for current transformers supplied by the Hydro which shall be built into the board by the switchboard manufacturer. The switchboard drawings must be approved by the and Consultant before fabrication.Door over C.T. compartment shall be hinged with provision for sealing and padlocking. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 5 2.3 GROUND INDICATION RELAY .1 Ground indication relay for the 600 Volt system shall be Federal Pacific type GADD ground alarm relay for use at 600 Volts.Relay shall be protected with HRC Forth I fuses and shall have a required transformer 600-120 volts for operation of the GADD and Alarm buzzer mounted on the face of the instrument panel. I 2.4 AC INSTRUMENTATION UNIT .1 AC instrumentation unit for owners' monitoring of total power shall be provided and shall record and display: Voltage, current frequency, power factor, KVA, KW, KW demand and KWHR. Provide all required potential and current j transformers as necessary to interface with the unit. Unit shall be flush j mounted into the switchboard and shall be identified as to which feeder it monitors. AC instrumentation unit shall be "CD Power Measurement Ltd." Cat. # 3600 ACM or approved equal. Unit shall be connected to energy management computer supplied by Division 15. Provide RS232C connection output. Provide interconnecting wiring to the energy management computer. Wiring to be in EMT conduits. 2.5 CONTROL WIRING I � .1 Switchboard shall be complete with all necessary control wiring and devices. Control circuits shall be protected by HRC fuses suitably located in an accessible space at the supply bus. 2.6 REVERSE CURRENT RELAY 1 Main circuit breaker shall be equipped with a reverse current relay. The reverse current relay shall operate on current reversal through the breaker and shall trip that breaker. I ! 2.7 GROUND FAULT RELAYS .1 Ground fault relays shall control main breaker. Ground fault relays shall be solid state flush mounted draw out,indicating type with required sensors and transformers and may be integral with the switchgear controller. Relays shall be field adjustable for both current and time. Breakers activated by ground fault relays shall be equipped with required shunt trips and HRC fused control circuits and transformers. I � j � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 6 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION .2 Indicated feeder breaker shall be equipped with Federal Pacific type TLR-1-500 ground fault relays, zero sequence transfonners,control transformers and fuses. Main breaker shall be equipped with a Federal Pacific type TLR-2-1000 ground fault relay, ground strap current transformer installed between the switchboard neutral bus and the ground bus, control transformers and fuses. .3 Ground fault relay current characteristics shall be coordinated with breakers affected. Coordination curves shall be prepared and submitted to the Consultant for approval immediately after award of contract. .4 Main breaker and secondary breakers indicated shall be equipped with single phasing and low voltage protection relays. .5 Ground fault equipment shall be Federal Pioneer, Square D, Siemens or Westinghouse. 2.8 FIXED AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS .1 Fixed air circuit breaker shall be complete with direct acting dual-magnetic trips for each pole. Frame size and trip settings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Breaker shall be manually operated with stored energy closing shall have an interrupting capacity rating of amps 35,000 RMS symmetrical. .2 Breaker shall have long delay and instantaneous or short delay trip units of j rating stated hereinafter. Long delay trip units shall be adjustable with calibrated marks at 80, 100, 120, 140 and 160% of trip unit rating. 2.9 UNFUSED ISOLATION SWITCHES .1 Bolt-lock type unfused disconnect switches shall be capable of making and breaking the full load current. Boft-lock type switches shall be as manufactured by "Barkelew" or approved equal. 2.10 MOULDED CASE DISTRIBUTION BREAKERS .1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall have number of poles, frame size and trip setting indicated and unless otherwise shown shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 35,000 amps. RMS symmetrical. Breakers indicated as "Spare" shall be complete with breaker of frame and with trip setting indicated. Breakers indicated as "Space" shall have all required bus work ad mounting brackets installed in this time except for hardware which normally is supplied with the breaker. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 7 I 2.11 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS I .1 Dry type distribution transformers shall be indoor air cooled type rated three j phase 60 cycle, of KVA rating shown on the drawings,600-208Y/120 volts, 1.2 KV Gass, and capable of withstanding a IOKV lighting impulse level (LIL). They shall have standard primary taps. The transformer shall be designed with a Class H insulation system. .2 The sound level in decibels shall be in accordance with NEMA TRI current standards. The transformer shall be equipped with terminal boards, tap changing links, suitable solderless connectors and shall have a ventilated code gauge steel enclosure complete with hinged removable expanded metal side panels and mounting brackets for floor or wall mounting as shown. .3 The completed assembly shall be painted with a primer coat and a finish coat of ASA #61 grey. The transformer shall conform to CSA-C9, NEMA TRI and EEMAC L2 current standards except where noted and shall be approved to CSA code part 2 specification C22.2 No. 47 where applicable. .4 Floor mounted transformers shall have Vibro-Acoustic vibration isolators installed between case and floor. 5 Wall mounted transformers shall have wall mounting angle iron platforms with appropriate vibration isolating hangers and/or brackets. 6 Dry type transformers shall have metal drip pans, overhangs,louvres, etc. as required to protect them against fire protection sprinkler water flow. 7 Transformers shall be CSA type ANN and shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Federal Pioneer, Polygon or Marcus. .8 Transformers shall be wired with 3 ft. flex on secondary and primary side for sound isolation. 2.12 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELS .1 Lighting panels shall be breaker type and shall contain number of branch r circuit breakers shown on the drawings. IF .2 Panels shall be flush mounted except in electrical rooms and closets where they shall be surface mounted. .3 Panels shall have lugs suitable for the number, type and size of conductors feeding the panel. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 8 ,4 Minimum size of mains shall be governed by size of breaker protecting the panel. 5 Panels shall be constructed of code gauge steel with hinged door and combination latch and key lock. Locks shall be common to one key and each panel shall be equipped ,6 Panel trim shall be fully adjustable, and shall be attached to the panel with concealed screws. 7 Panels shall have plain door trim with no advertising or impression of any type. Surface mounting p anel trim shall be finished baked grey enamel paint. Flush mounting panel trim shall have exterior surface prime coated for painting and interior surface shall have baked grey enamel paint finish. ,8 Panel tubs for both flush and surface mounted panels shall have the interior and exterior surfaces finished in baked grey enamel. .g Each panel in addition to required number of breakers shall have a minimum of 20% of spare breakers. .10 Panel bus bars shall be copper. .11 All breakers shall be MIAL 10,000 A.I.C. quick-make, quick-break, toggle type, with definite trip position and with line terminals bolted to the panel bus. Breakers shall be complete with thernal-magnetic trips sized as shown, and shall have ambient temperature compensation. 12 Two pole and three pole breakers shall have common trip; tie handles will not be accepted. .13 "Duplex, 13mm or Twin„ breakers will not be accepted. 14 Filler plates over unused breaker spaces shall fit tightly into the panel interior face plate. 15 Unless otherwise noted, panels shall be for 208Y/120V, 3 phase, 4wire operation and 600Y/347V, 3 phase, 4 wire operation. breakers 16 Handle outlets, mechanical equipment, conitrols,panel ercommun cation and t signal circuits, exit and stair lights, time switches, signs, etc. ,17 Circuit loads shall be balanced across phases as closely as possible. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 9 18 Complete typewritten legend shall be provided on the inside of the door of each panel mounted in a metal frame and covered with transparent plastic. i 19 Circuit breakers feeding weatherproof receptacles shall be ground fault interrupter type. .20 Circuit breakers feeding unswitched lighting circuits shall be"switching duty" type i .21 Double and triple tub panel boards and panel boards containing auxiliary equipment shall be constructed in accordance with latest CSA requirements for Custom Built Panelboard Assemblies. .22 Ughting panels and breakers shall be as manufactured by Federal Pioneer, Westinghouse, Siemens, Commander or Square D. i 2.13 METERING .1 Utility metering cabinet to be a weatherproof cabinet to Ontario Hydro requirements. .2 Check meters to be 7 jaw type reading kW and kWHR for 3 phase, 4 wire service for voltage indicated as manufactured by Sangamo. 2.14 COMBINATION FRAME/TRIM 1 Combination frame shall be used where two or more recessed panels are shown on the drawings side by side. 1 2 Combination frame shall be of one piece construction into which the panels shall be recessed and each panel shall have a separate hinged door with separate tub. .3 Minimum material gauge for all combination frames up to 7742 sq cm in area shall be #12 gauge, and over 7740 sq cm shall be#10 gauge. .4 Combination frame for 3 or more sections and with doors longer than 1.2m shall have angle iron reinforcing between each section and top and bottom. .5 Opening the panel door, other than a telephone panel, shall not give direct access to the wiring gutters or live terminals but only to dead front circuit breakers and fusible units. Access to the wiring gutters, live terminals, bus connections, etc., shall be obtained by removing the door or trim. i I � PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 10 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 2.15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION .1 Power factor correction shall consist of an automatic system which maintains the power factor at .90 to .95 lagging. .2 System shall be minimum 4 stage, 90 KVAR total capacity with door mounted P.F. meter and wired glass windows to view fuse condition. .3 Capacitors to be 1 K insulation class, 600V, 3PH, 60 Hertz, 3W Delta connected complete with internal discharge resistors discharging the capacitors to 50V on one minute as a safety feature. When de-energized threaded stud terminals bus connectors, enclosing plates, screes, discharge resistors and connections shall be accessible by removing the terminal circuit capacity capacitors to have 30000 amp short circuit capacity capacitors to be complete with fuses with blown fuse indicators visible from in front of enclosure without opening of any door or interrupting the operation of motor system impregnating fluid to be bio-degradable, dielectric fluid. .4 Ensure that adequate natural ventilation is maintained for capacitors. .5 Capacitors to be complete with indoor dustproof and sprinklerproof wall mounted enclosure. .6 Manufacturer to be Schneider (Freeborn) or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRIC SERVICE .1 The Main service switch, current transformer box, meter box and other service equipment shall be sized as shown on the Drawings but the final arrangement shall be satisfactory to the local P.U.C.AII clearances and height of equipment shall conform to the local P.U.C. and Electrical Code regulations. .2 Service conduits and cables entering building below grade shall be provided with a water tight seal to prevent the entrance of moisture into building. Underground conduits or ducts shall be drained in accordance with regulations and as directed by the local Inspector. .3 All grounding of service, equipment, feeders, etc., is to be done in accordance with electrical code regulations and the local P.U.C.requirements. ,{ DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 11 .4 The neutral conductor of the wiring system together with the conduits system and service equipment shall be bonded to the water service as near as practical to the service entrance. .5 Before proceeding with the installation of the main service equipment, submit the required number of Drawings to the P.U.C. for their approval and record. .6 Supply and install ducts with concrete envelope for the cables as shown on the i Drawings. .7 Ducts and concrete envelope shall be installed in accordance with the P.U.C. requirements and ducts and trench shall be inspected by the Electrical Inspector prior to pouring of concrete. I .8 The ducts shall be 100mm inside diameter, PVC type. Where ducts run over excavated areas, they shall be steel reinforced with 15mm rods in the comers of the duct bank. .9 Drive 4 ground rods in the transformer vault and electrical roomand connect the ground rods with #3/0 bare copper ground wire. Run a #3/0 copper ground conductor from the main service to the transformer vault and leave 6m for connection by the P.U.C. .10 Run secondary feeder cables from the Service Entrance Board to the transformer vault and leave the cables for connection by the P.U.C. .11 Co-ordinate work with trades of other Divisions of this contract and obtain necessary approvals so that electrical transformer vault will be built in accordance with P.U.C. and Electrical Code requirement. Vault size, structural requirements, type and size of door, ventilation, drainage and grounding shall be provided to meet their requirements. 3.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE AND WIRING .1 Supply and install a temporary service on the job site. Temporary service shall be located as directed by the Owner's representative on the site. Make all it arrangements with the respective utility for connecting this service. All Hydro energy and connection charges will be paid by the Owner directly to the Hydro. .2 Service shall be 208Y/120V, 200 amp and shall consist of standpipe, main switch, meter and splitter. From the splitter, run a 100 amp line to hoist 1 connection point. Supply and install required disconnect switches. Altematively, contractor may provide the required power through a dry type transformer connected to the 600 V service. i i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 12 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION .3 Provide standpipe support and service enclosure. Services shall be installed at time required to meet the construction schedule. .4 Supply and install temporary lighting and power distribution system throughout the project for use by all trades. Supply all required outlets, lamp sockets, 150W lamps, auxiliary panels, and temporary feeders as required to provide: Temporary lighting in all corridors at 10m centres and stairways at each landing. .5 20A, 3 wire, 120/208V power outlets on each floor including garage located in corridors or aisles on approximately 30m centres. .6 Extension cords will be supplied by each trade for their own use. .7 Provide replacement lamps when required. .8 Relocate all temporary wiring and outlets as required and as directed by the Owner. .9 "Used" wiring and equipment may be utilized for temporary wiring.All temporary wiring and equipment shall remain property of this contractor and shall be removed from site at the time directed by the Owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT .1 Final approval of the equipment and its installation will be subject to an on-site inspection by Ontario Hydro. Finalized proposed switchgear and electrical room layout drawings showing all necessary clearances shall be submitted by Division 16 for approval prior to switchgear manufacture. 3.4 METERING CABINETS .1 The Cabinet shall be mounted on the wall as shown on the drawings and to the satisfaction of the local P.U.C. 3.5 CALIBRATION AND TESTING .1 After installation is complete, the switchboard manufacturer shall carry out field calibration and testing to ensure that breaker settings and ground fault settings are correct and that all devices are functioning properly. Standard testing equipment shall be used for this purpose. .2 Manufacturer shall provide a written report describing the test results. All costs of this work shall be included in this Division. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PAGE 13 I 3.6 RE-TORQUING .1 After installation is complete, for service entrance switchboards, re torque all bolted connections. f3.7 EMPTY CONDUITS AT PANELS & TERMINAL CABINET .1 All flush mounted lighting and power panels shall be provided with two 38mm empty conduits from the panel to the ceiling space above terminated in a suitable pull box in the nearest accessible space for future branch circuit conductors. _ 3.8 CO-ORDINATION STUDY .1 Provide a co-ordination study for the distribution system. Include time-current graphs showing opening curves of all appropriate breakers and fuses and inrush current and damage curves of transformers. .2 Ground fault protection curves shall be included. .3 Indicate clearly curves for any downstream devices which do not co-ordinate with the appropriate upstream devices. .4 Co-ordination study shall be carried out by equipment manufacturer or independent electrical power system engineering analysis and field testing group, such as G.T. Wood. i 3.9 EQUIPMENT SPRINKLER PROTECTION .1 Electrical equipment located in area with fire protection sprinklers shall be provided with suitable protection against waterflow from sprinkler heads. This protection shall be of a type acceptable to the local Hydro Inspection Department. I End of Section I I 1 � I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16410 - POOL MOTOR CONTROL PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 1 2.2 MONITOR PANEL • 2 PART3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.2 WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 '4 i i ii r , r ' r I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16410 - POOL MOTOR CONTROL PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL j 1.1 REFERENCE 1 .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forts an integral part of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES I 1 Division 16 shall supply and install motor control centres where shown on the drawings. .2 Centres shall consist of standardized vertical sections of 2300mm height, width { and depth as required to house the equipment contained, all joined together to form a rigid, free standing, completely dead front EEMAC Type 1A enclosed assembly. Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous three phase horizontal bus. All units shall be arranged for front access only. Centres to be complete with sprinkler hoods. .3 All control units shall be wired for Class II, Type 'B" construction. .4 Each vertical section shall be fabricated of 2.5mm steel shaped and reinforced to form a rigid, free standing structure. .5 The top and bottom of each section shall be provided with horizontal wiring compartments which shall line up with adjacent sections to form a wiring trough the continuous length of the control centre. A 100mm (4") wide full height wiring trough shall be provided per section for unit wiring complete with cable supports. Horizontal cross channels shall be removable with or without starter unit in place. .6 Motor control centres shall be arranged for 600 volt, three phase, 3 wire operation. Each vertical section shall contain three phase main horizontal bus and vertical bus rated as to carry the full load of all motors plus 25% in each section. .7 All joints in the horizontal bus shall be silver plated. All vertical bus shall be silver plated for its complete length to ensure a good contact surface for the plug-in stabs. Bus work shall be suitably supported to withstand short circuit current as shown on the electrical drawings. For the number and rating of starters and breakers refer to electrical drawings. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16410 - POOL MOTOR CONTROL .8 Each section shall be provided with flanged formed doors with concealed hinges for all starter units. .9 Starter units shall be of the combination type containing motor starter and circuit breaker, with 14 kA interrupting capacity. Each starter shall include: .1 3 phase overload protection with integral heaters, differential phase failure protection, ambient temperature compensated. .2 two normally closed and two normally open auxiliary contacts .3 control transformer in each unit .4 fixed mounted terminal blocks .5 wire markers .6 standard nameplate. .10 Branch feeder units are of circuit breaker moulded case type with 14 kA interrupting capacity. .11 Control centres shall include built-in step-down transsfbrner and power panel as indicated on drawings. .12 Motor control centres shall be of Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Allen Bradley, C.G.E., or Westinghouse manufacture. 2.2 MONITOR PANEL .1 Monitor panel to be flush mounted sheet steel cabinet with clear Lexan window in hinged door with lock. .2 Panel shall be complete wtih control devices and indicating lights as indicated on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES .1 This Division will provide power and control wiring to the motor control centress and to the motor. .2 Shop drawings shall be complete with all control circuit schematics. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16410 - POOL MOTOR CONTROL PAGE 3 3.2 WIRING .1 Wiring shall be in conformity with Ontario Electric Code and local regulations and motor manufacturer's recommendations and Sections 16050 and 16100. i .2 The following are minimum requirements and are not intended to override any minimum requirements or those shown in the electrical specifications: Power Wiring #12 Gauge Control Wiring #14 Gauge I End of Section I � I� I� I� _i DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 BALLAST AND LAMP WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 BALLASTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 FLOOD LIGHTING POLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 I� I� 1 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE li .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Supply and install all electrical interior and exterior lighting fixtures, luminaires, lighting standards, bases and all required accessories as indicated on the { drawings by letter type or number and as hereinafter specified. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing submission. 2 Submit Shop Drawings for each lighting fixture type. 1.4 BALLAST AND LAMP WARRANTY .1 Replace and install without extra cost to the Owner, all defective or noisy ballasts for a period of one year and any incandescent lamp which fails within 30 days of takeover, and any fluorescent or H.I.D. lamps which fail within 90 days of takeover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMPS .1 Unless otherwise noted, all incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt standard service Type 2500 hrs., inside frosted, C.G.E., Westinghouse, or Sylvania. All halogen par lamps shall be diode-free, 130 volt as manufactured by the 1 G.E. Canada. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING .2 T8 Fluorescent Lamps .1 Fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start T8 (2900 lumens) Bipin, 3500 degree K with a CRI of 85 or better. Lamps shall be lengths specified in the luminaire schedule. Lamps shall be manufactured by G.E. Canada, Osram Canada Ltd., Philips Electronics Ltd. ad Sylvania Canada Ltd. .3 Compact Fluorescent Lamps .1 Miniature single ended fluorescent lamp with built-in starter and rapid interference capacitor. The lamp shall have a high colour rendering index of 82 with a Kelvin temperature of 3500°K. .2 Luminaires for these lamps shall come complete with high power factor ballasts. .3 Lamps shall be manufactured by G.E. Canada, Osram Canada Ltd., Philips Electronics Ind. Ltd. and Sylvania Canada Ltd. .4 H.I.D. Lamps , .1 HID lamps shall be of wattage rating indicated, unless otherwise indicated, they shall be of coated type. .2 All lamps shall be of same manufacturer and the same production batch. .3 Lamps shall be manufactured by G.E. Canada, Osram Canada Ltd., Philips Electronics Ind. Ltd., and Sylvania Canada Ltd. .5 Spare Lamps Provide spare lamps as follows: .1 Incandescent- 30%. .2 Fluorescent, compact fluorescent and H.I.D. - 20%. , 2.2 BALLASTS .1 Each fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) fixture shall be equipped with ballasts as herein specified. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 I SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE 3 .2 Each fluorescent ballast shall be fully electronic and shall be supplied with rated voltage matching the supply voltage indicated. Ballasts shall be rapid i start, high power factor, thermal auto-resetting protection and protected non- PCB capacitor. .3 Ballasts shall have a Group "A" sound rating. .4 Total harmonic distortion of ballasts shall not exceed 15%. .5 The 3rd harmonic shall not exceed 11% crest factor shall be less than 1.4. .6 Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in IEFE Publication 587. Category A. .7 Ballasts shall meet requirements of FCC rules and regulations, Part 18 and meet the FCC regulations for radio frequency interference (RFI) or electro- magnetic interference (EMI). ' .8 Ballasts shall be manufactured by: .1 Electronic Ballast Technology Inc. (EBT) - Rapid Start Series. .2 Philips - Mark V. j 3 Magnetek - HP Series .4 Motorolla .5 Flotronic .6 Kingtee .7 Ballasts and lamp combination must be acceptable by local utility for rebate programs. .9 Ballasts for metal halide and High Pressure Sodium (HID) lamps shall be constant wattage regulator type, high power factor, manufactured to Certified Ballast Manufacturers Standards and as manufactured by Sola, CGE, Westinghouse, Philips or Universal. .10 Fixtures installed outdoors, in unheated indoor areas shall have ballast suitable for minus 30 degrees C starting. 2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 The flame spread and smoke development rate of fixture lenses shall not exceed those permitted by the Ontario Building Code. .2 Unless otherwise specified, all fluorescent fixtures shall have baked white enamel finish. i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING .3 Unless otherwise indicated steel poles shall have epoxy powder finish of colour designated by Consultant. .4 Metal halide fixtures shall be equipped with tempered glass lenses or polycarbonate Kamax Coated lenses, catalogue numbers listed and fixture description may or may not specifically state this requirement, but all metal halide fixtures supplied shall be equipped with protective lenses, regardless of lamp size and lamp manufacturer. 2.4 FLOOD LIGHTING POLES .1 Floodlighting poles shall have grounding lug, cable entrance opening, handhole opening with cover and tamperproof screws, and anchor bolt cover. Cables in pole shall be properly anchored at top of pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 Fixtures shall have C.S.A. labels and shall be complete with lamps, ballasts, and all necessary accessories for their hanging and mounting. Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. .2 Unless otherwise indicated support all lighting fixtures, including those mounted in suspended ceilings, directly from the building structure. .3 Fluorescent and HID fixtures installed in inverted T bar ceilings may be supported by the ceiling provided the ceiling support system is designed to cant' the weight of the fixtures, however each fixture shall be equipped with secondary security supports. .4 Provide and install all necessary supports and hangers prior to the installation of the ceilings. All supports or hangers shall be of a non-combustible nature. ' Provide metal channels or similar supports as required. .5 Recessed fixtures shall have trim designed to fit into ceiling types used. Before ordering fixtures check ceiling types used in various areas on the latest Architectural Drawings. Assume full responsibility to supply fixtures with appropriate trims. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE 5 .6 Fixtures delivered to site shall be stored in clean, dry and protected areas until required for installation. .7 Supply plaster frames and rings for all fixtures recessed in non-removable ceilings (i.e. plaster, drywall, wood, sheet metal, etc.). Hand these to the appropriate trade for installation. Supervise the installation to ensure correct mounting and spacing. .8 Co-ordinate the installation of lighting fixtures with all Trades to provide spacing intended. .9 Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the reflected ceiling layouts with due consideration for mechanical diffusers, bulkheads, sprinkler heads, and other obstructions. Check Mechanical and Architectural drawings before roughing in to avoid any possible conflict 10 All fixtures shall be installed accurately, in line and level. Fixtures shown in continuous rows or broken lines shall be fully aligned so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines or misplaced fixtures will not be accepted and such poor workmanship shall be corrected. .11 Fixtures installed in continuous rows shall be suitable for such mounting with required joiners and clips as may be necessary for a proper installation and alignment and shall have dimensions required to fit into ceiling modules designated. 12 Fixture studs or other equally secure methods of attachment shall be used throughout. 13 Where fixtures are hung on chain hangers, the chain shall be of closed link type capable of supporting ten times the fixture weight 14 Unless otherwise specified suspended industrial fluorescent fixtures shall be mounted on chain at height indicated. 15 Recessed, surface mounted, or suspended lighting fixtures of weights in excess of standard units shall be suitably supported from the structure independent of the ceiling suspension system. N DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE 6 .16 Suspended industrial incandescent and H.I.D. fixtures unless otherwise noted shall have 13mm rigid conduit stem hangers with ball aligners, length of hangers shall be as required to provide fixture mounting height specified. Hangers and ball aligners shall be painted aluminum colour. .17 Recessed or semi-recessed incandescent and H.I.D. fixtures shall be wired with 1.2m of wire in flexible steel conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above the finished ceiling, within reach of the fixture hole. .18 Fixtures connected to ground fault intenuptor circuits shall have separate neutrals (common neutrals for 2 or 3 circuits are not acceptable). .19 Exterior wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted on recessed boxes except recessed outlet o�s not required. Outlet boxes shallll be firmly anchored to he the wall. .20 Outdoor floodlights shall be positioned and aimed after dark as directed by the Consultant. 21 Unless otherwise indicated supply and install concrete bases for lighting standards. Concrete bases shall be trowel finished with all exposed comers to bevelled sure flush fit of junction degrees. ubox cover. Concrete as s carefully hall be constructed dof 20MPa concrete air entrained and steel reinforced as shown on Drawings. .22 Where suspended commercial type fixtures are mounted on surface-mounted outlet boxes, deep fixture canopies shall be used. .23 Provide two loose chain supports for each recessed and surface mounted H.I.D. and fluorescent fixture and attach to the structural members of the building as secondary security support. .24 Fixtures shall be properly cleaned and left dean and dust fee. Any fixture showing marks or scratches due to handling or toolmarks shall be replaced. i I DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PAGE 7 .25 Where luminaires are surface mounted on inverted Teebar ceilings, they shall be supported directly from the building structure. Where this is not possible due to presence of mechanical ducts or other obstruction, supply and install galvanized steel channel, Unistrut or equal, above the ceiling, securely attached to the structure and not from the suspension system for the ceiling, and fasten the luminaires to the channel with clamping nut, bolt, flat washers and lock washer, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Provide bolts at least every 1.2m length of fixture (i.e. 3 bolts for 2.4m fixture). .26 During wane weather when air conditioning equipment is not functioning, or when for any other reason any area in the building has a temperature over 26 deg.C., ensure absolutely minimal use of the permanent fluorescent or HID lighting, in order to prevent shortening of ballast life. This is especially important where fixtures have little ventilation, such as in coves or where enclosed by fire-rated boxes, but pertains to all fluorescent and HID fixtures. If in any doubt regarding this item, contact the Consultant or Engineer. End of Section �1 1 1 1 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND EQUIVALENT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 AUDIBLE SIGNAL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.5 COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.6 MASTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.7 STANDBY POWER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.8 AUXILIARY RELAY PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.9 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS (EXTERNAL TO F.A. PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.10 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.11 AUTOMATIC THERMAL DETECTORS 7 2.12 SMOKE DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 8 2.13 AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.14 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS . . . . . . . 8 2.15 REMOTE TROUBLE INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.1 WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.2 VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.3 INSPECTION CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 i a 3.4 INSPECTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 i i i I! � DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 and Raceways, Electrical Devices and Controls Section 16100 form an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Supply and install all equipment and accessories for a complete fire alarm system as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the complete fire alarm system. 1.4 CODES .1 Complete installation shall comply with the requirements of the CAN ULC Standard S537 "Standard for the Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems" and CAN/ULC Standard S524 - "Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems". 2 Where the requirements of this Section exceed the minimum requirements of the ULC standard these specifications shall govern. i, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND EQUIVALENT SYSTEMS .1 Equipment and accessories shall be the standard products of a single manufacturer, Edwards of Canada. Catalogue numbers and model are shown and are intended to designate design, quality and type of material, as well as required operating characteristics. Equivalent systems by Pyrotronics, Simplex, Mirtone, and Chubb shall be acceptable. 1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATION .1 The fire alarm system shall be Edwards of Canada, 6632 single stage as described herein. .2 Actuation of any manual station, thermal detector, smoke detector or sprinkler water flow switch shall cause all audible alarm devices to sound until silenced manually at the control panel. .3 Alarm initiating devices shall be grouped in zones. The zone of the fire shall be indicated by the electrically supervised lamp annunciator on the control unit and on the remote annunciators. .4 The audible signals shall sound continuously at the rate of at the rate of 120 pulses or strokes per minute. .5 On any alarm, the auxiliary relay panel shall cause the following to happen: .1 All designated fans to shut down. .2 Magnetic door holders to release. ' .3 Special smoke exhaust fans to start. .4 Signal central station. .5 Background music system to silence. i DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 I SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 3 2.3 CONTROL UNIT .1 The system controls shall be housed in a surface wall mounted cabinet with door and window. All annunciator indications and operating instructions shall be clearly visible through the viewing window. The door shall be complete with a lock and two keys. Opening the cabinet door shall provide access to all operating controls, but shall not expose live electrical connections. .2 All electrical connections shall be front accessible through the hinged door removable dead front panel. .3 The control panels shall be of modular construction for ease of expansion and servicing. Each individual function shall be on a replaceable plug-in panel or i module to accommodate functional changes when required. All plug-in modules and panel connectors shall be supervised so as to give a trouble signal if removed or disconnected. All circuits extending from the fire alarm control unit shall be current limited and protected in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Class 2, wiring requirements. .4 All A.0 circuits extending from the fire alarm control unit shall be current limited and protected in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Class 1 wiring requirements, and shall be wired in separate conduits. 1 i .5 The control unit shall contain functions and modules specified hereinafter. .6 The alarm receiver shall have number of alarm receiving zones required plus 25% spares. .7 The wiring for the alarm initiating devices up to and including the alarm relay coil shall be supervised against an open circuit fault condition. Operation of an initiating device shall cause an individual red supervised alarm zone lamp to lock on and shall provide an alarm output to other sections of the control unit. Circuitry and terminals shall be provided to connect additional supervised remote annunciation and additional unsupervised remote annunciation. Any fault condition in the wiring to any remote annunciator shall not prevent all iother annunciators from functioning properly on all zones. .8 An individual amber trouble lamp shall be provided for each alarm receiving zone to indicate the location of any faults in the wiring to initiating devices. Terminals shall be provided for connection of remote zone trouble indicators. j .9 The alarm receiving circuits shall have Class B operation. A single break or ground fault in the wiring to initiating devices shall provide a trouble signal. i _i PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 4 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .10 It shall allow an alarm to be received from any initiating device while this fault exists. .11 Provide smoke detection receiving module for use with ionization type duct and space smoke detectors. Smoke detection module shall be fully supervised and integrated into the system. .12 Each duct smoke detector shall be annunciated separately. .13 Sprinkler and standpipe system supervision shall be provided and shall function as follows: Loss of water pressure in wet sprinkler systems, loss of air pressure in dry system and low temperature in any dry pipe valve, enclosure, closing of a valve, shall cause the trouble signal to sound and cause individual lamp indication on all annunciators. Standpipe and sprinkler flow switches shall be connected to separate alarm receiving circuits and its operation shall cause all alarm signals to sound and corresponding lamp indication on all annunciators. ' .14 Sprinkler flow switch alarm receiving circuits shall be annunciated separately from the automatic heat detection and manual zones. The flow switches in , each zone shall be connected to a separate supervised zone circuit. 2.4 AUDIBLE SIGNAL CONTROL .1 The audible signal control shall have number of audible signal circuits required plus space provisions for 25% of future audible signal circuits. The wiring for the audible signals, up to and including the individual circuit breakers, shall be supervised both against an open circuit and a short circuit fault condition. Either fault condition shall immediately cause all trouble signals to sound without causing the signal breaker to open, while the panel is in the normal supervisory state. .2 An individual zoned amber trouble lamp shall be provided for each signal circuit to indicate the location of any faults in the wiring to the audible signals or signal circuit breaker open condition. Terminals shall be provided for connection of remote zone trouble indicators. MDIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 5 2.5 COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT .1 Common control circuit shall provide the following: ' .1 Lamp Supervision - The current used to supervise lamps shall be low enough not to cause the lamp filaments to glow or decrease the rated on-life of the lamp. Failure of an alarm lamp on the control unit or the remote supervised annunciator lamps shall cause the trouble signal to sound. The amber "remote lamp failure" lamp on the panel shall indicate which remote annunciator has a lamp failure. .2 Reset- When the alarm initiating devices have been restored the system control shall be reset by depressing a single reset pushbutton. .3 Trouble Indication - An amber trouble lamp and distinctive audible signal which shall operate when any of the specified supervised trouble conditions exist. The audible portion of the trouble signal may be silenced with a "trouble silence" pushbutton, but the trouble light shall remain on until the system is reset. The trouble signal and indication shall automatically reset to normal when a trouble condition is corrected. To eliminate any confusion all visual and audible trouble signals shall remain off during the progress of a true alarm. Terminals shall be provided for connection of remote trouble lamps and audible signals. .4 Subsequent Alamo - An alarm from any receiving circuit shall cause the audible signals to sound for a full period, whether or not a previous alarm has partially or fully timed out by means of an automatic time limit cutout or has been silenced manually. Silencing by any means shall cause a red 'signal silenced' lamp on the panel to illuminate and the trouble signal to sound. .5 Manual Signal Silencing - pushbutton shall be provided to silence all audible alarm signals. .6 Signal Silence Inhibit- circuitry shall be provided to prevent the silencing of the fire alarm signals by any switch (reset, signal silence, etc.) until one minute after the alert initial alarm. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 6 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM , .7 Ground Detection - A ground fault on any external conductor which would adversely affect the system operation, if a second ground of zero ohms appeared, shall sound a trouble signal and illuminate an amber "ground fault' indication on the panel. 2.6 MASTER POWER SUPPLY .1 The master power supply shall provide the following: .1 24 Volt DC power for all system supervisory and control functions shall be obtained through a transformer and rectifier from 120 Volt AC input ' line. .2 A green 'power-on' indication on the panel for 120 volt AC input power. ' .3 Lamp test - pushbutton for testing the control unit alarm and trouble lamps and to locate a lamp failure. ' .2 Fire Department connection contacts shall be provided to transmit an alarm to a remote station. Actual connection, if made, is not in this contract. .3 A red 'fire department lamp shall indicate this alamt function. A 'fire department disconnect' lamp and switch shall be provided. 2.7 STANDBY POWER UNIT .1 The standby power unit shall have nickel cadmium gelled electrolyte cell batteries with sufficient amp hour capacity to operate the system under supervisory conditions with AC power disconnected for 24 hours and at the ' end of this period operate the alarm devices for 30 consecutive minutes. The batteries shall be the sealed-maintenance-free type. .2 The batteries shall be enclosed in a steel housing. A fully automatic battery , charger shall be provided which shall be capable of providing rated load cycle within 12 hours after a complete discharge. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 7 I Ij 2.8 AUXILIARY RELAY PANEL 1 .1 Auxiliary Relay Panel shall be provided with required auxiliary relays to perform functions described in this section. An alarm from any alarm receiving circuit shall energize the auxiliary relays to perform the auxiliary functions. Each relay shall be plug-in and supervised against unauthorized removal by the common trouble circuit. Each relay shall have a dust cover and provide two D.P.D.T. (2C) contacts rated at 5.0 amps 120 volt AC. All contacts shall be brought out to terminals capable of accepting from #22 to #12 AWG wire. These relays shall be connected via the Fire Department disconnect switch to ' by-pass the auxiliary functions, as well as the Fire Department connection when testing the system. .2 The auxiliary relays shall be programmed to the alarm receiving circuits individually or in groups in accordance with the zoning schedule. 2.9 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS (EXTERNAL TO F.A. PANEL) 1 Supply and install required fan shutdown relays. Power for operation of the relays shall be taken from a separate single pole circuit breaker in the fire alarm control panel and identified as "Fan shutdown". Relays shall be multipole C.G.E. "Unit - pole" Cat. #CR-120L with captive mylar covers Cat. #120LXMC. Contacts shall be 15A SPDT 208 volts. Coil shall have 120 volt a.c. rating. Relays shall have general purpose CEMA Type I enclosure. See drawing SE-500 for circuit diagram. Interconnect designated fan control circuits into these relays. Fans shall automatically stop during a fire alarm condition. 2.10 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS 1 Manual fire alarm stations shall be pull-lever type, with clearly visible break glass and shall have red enamel finish with aluminum markings. .2 For surface mounted wiring provide surface mounting back boxes PP27193. .3 Single stage station shall be Edwards Cat. No. 270-SPO bilingual. 2.11 AUTOMATIC THERMAL DETECTORS 1 Detector shall have twist lock mounting for ease of maintenance, testing and replacement. Activation of the fixed temperature element in the detector shall be indicated by a visible means. Detectors shall be Edwards Cat. No. 281-A - rated at 58 deg C fixed temperature and 8 deg C per minute rate-of-rise. r PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 8 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.12 SMOKE DETECTORS .1 Smoke detectors shall be Edwards Cat. #6250-C with 6251-C-001 base, plug-in, ionization type. .2 Duct detectors shall be Edwards Cat. #6265C-002 24volt DC with auxiliary contacts for local shutdown of fans; and Cat. #6260C without auxiliary contacts. Division 16 shall supply and wire the duct smoke detectors. Division 15 shall install and mount the unit and sampling tubes in the duct work. .3 Fans starting circuit shall be wired into auxiliary fan stopping circuit in fire ' alarm panel to stop on fire alarm activation except for supply air system which shall not be stopped by panel but shall be stopped by activation of (integral) local smoke detector. , .4 Remote alarm lamp mounted in a single gang stainless steel face plate shall be Cat. No. 6441-1. ' 2.13 AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICES .1 Each signal shall be furnished with an adaptaplate with plug-in receptacle. The , adaptaplate shall be mounted and wired on a standard box, while construction is in process. The fire alarm signals shall be plugged into place after , decorating is completed. .2 Fire alarm audible signals shall be Edwards Cat. No. 439 150mm and 250mm ' vibrating polarized DC bell. .3 For surface mounted wiring, provide surface mounted back boxes Cat. No 349. ' 2.14 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS .1 Annunciators shall be Edwards Cat. No. 6616-801/6816-820. The unit shall be flush wall mounted complete with anodized trim, smoke flexiglas. Annunciator shall have number of alarm zone indications and trouble zone indications required, and a common trouble indicator with a distinctive trouble signal rated at 75 db at 3m. .2 Annunciator shall be fully wired including wiring for all spares and spaces. .3 A pushbutton shall be provided to test all lamps on the annunciator. l � DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 9 i 2.15 REMOTE TROUBLE INDICATOR .1 Remote trouble indicator shall be Edwards Cat No. 6551 with amber trouble j ' lamp and distinctive audible signal rated at 75 db at 3m. Unit shall have a I( two-gang stainless steel faceplate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING .1 Separation of wiring shall adhere to suggested wiring and installation guide of CAN/ULC-S524-M91 or later. .2 The normal power supply to the fire alarm system shall be 120/240 volts, 60 Hz with 2 separate neutrals, taken from the building service as close as practical to the main entrance disconnect. This shall be through an approved i, overcurrent device to which no other circuits are connected. The overcurrent j device shall be painted red and identified in a permanent manner by the words 'Fire Alarm System'. .3 Wiring shall be sized in accordance with Class 2 requirements, but shall be protected from mechanical injury or other injurious conditions such as { moisture, excessive heat or corrosive action in accordance with Class I i requirements. Conductors shall be solid copper. The minimum size of any conductor shall be: - for alarm receiving circuit and remote annunciators #22 AWG, five or more conductors in a cable; #18 AWG, 3 or 4 conductor in a cable; and #14 AWG for 1 to 2 conductors in a cable. In no case shall the wire resistance in these circuits exceed 50 ohms. for audible signal circuits #14 AWG for 1 or 2 conductors in a cable, #18 AWG for 3 or 4 conductors in a cable. In no case shall the voltage drop to any signal exceed 10%. .4 Rating of cable shall be 90 degrees C and 300 volt minimum. .5 Wiring shall be installed in conduit and in any case shall conform to the system manufacturer's recommendations. All conduits shall be grounded per Class 1 wiring. 6 Where the control panel and/or associated equipment is located in a sprinklered room, enclosure shall provide protection against flow from sprinkler heads to the satisfaction of the Hydro Inspection Department. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 10 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 3.2 VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT ' .1 An inspection of the fire alarm equipment, including those components necessary to the direct operation of the system such as manual stations, ' thermal detectors and controls, shall be carried out by an independent third party. The inspection shall comprise an examination of such equipment for the following: a) That the type of equipment installed is that designated in the specifications; b) That the wiring connections to all equipment components show that the ' installer undertook to have observed ULC and CSA requirements. c) That equipment of the manufacturer's manufacture has been installed in t accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and that all signalling devices of whatever manufacture have been operated or , tested to verify their operation; and d) That the supervisory wiring of those items of equipment connected to a supervised circuit is operating and that the governmental regulations, if any, concerning such supervisory wiring, have been met to the satisfaction of inspecting officials. .2 The manufacturer shall supply reasonable amounts of technical assistance with respect to any changes necessary to conform to the above. During the period ' of inspection by the manufacturer, make available to the manufacturer electricians as designated by the manufacturer. .3 The verification must meet CAN Standard S537 and open flame and smoke ' are not to be used for testing. 3.3 INSPECTION CERTIFICATION .1 On completion of the inspection and when all of the above conditions have been complied with, the manufacturer shall issue to the Architect: ' .1 A copy of the inspecting technician's report showing location of each device and certifying the test results of each device. .2 A certificate of verification confirming that the inspection has been complete and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been rendered. i1 DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 11 i .3 Proof of liability insurance for the inspection. 3.4 INSPECTION COSTS .1 All costs involved in this inspection shall be included in the tender price. End of Section M I , DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16750 - P. A. SYSTEM PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE i ' PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ' 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 DATA BOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Ir 1.4 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 SPEAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I� 2.2 POWER AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 MICROPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.4 SPEAKER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1, r r r r r r � f DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16750 - P. A. SYSTEM PAGE 1 I , PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Section 16050 and 16100 forth an integral part of this Section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 16050 for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the complete system and all individual components including illustrations, technical data sheets and system operating block I. diagrams and complete schematic circuit diagrams. 1.3 DATA BOOKS .1 Data book in addition to the shop drawings shall contain all circuit diagrams, spare parts lists and maintenance manuals. 1.4 INTENT 1 Provide a complete self-contained P.A. system including all required equipment and components as may be required to produce a fully functioning public address system. The main components of this system shall include but not be limited to the following list. Amplifier, microphone, speakers, wiring and conduits. 2 The system shall be capable of receiving voice paging and music program at suitable audio level. Voice paging shall be from a local microphone. When the paging microphone is activated, music, if present, shall be muted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPEAKERS .1 Speakers shall have 8 ohm impedance, 25 watt handling capacity. Soundolier Cat. #C10-T47 complete with voltage matching transformer. .2 The speaker shall be mounted in a cylindrical baffle complete with hanger for suspension. Soundolier Cat. #X8414 with #435 or length specified on drawings. Finish shall be specified at time of shop drawing submission. PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16750 - P.A. SYSTEM 2.2 POWER AMPLIFIER , .1 Power amplifiers shall be TOA #A-906A, 60 watt complete with mixer with frequency response of 20 - 20000 Hz +/- 1 dB with low distortion and noise , levels. Amplifier shall be in a desk mounting enclosure. 2.3 MICROPHONE , .1 Microphone shall be Universal Sound #US622L noise cancelling type complete with press-to-talk switch, desk stand and connecting cable. 2.4 SPEAKER CABLES .1 Speaker cables shall be Belden 2 conductor#14 twisted shielded. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM .1 All wiring shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations. ' .2 All wiring shall be in EMT conduit, and shall be grounded to the electrical building ground system. , .3 Complete installation, connection and testing of music system equipment and devices shall be done by factory trained personnel. ' End of Section DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16850 - ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING PAGE i ARTICLE NAME PAGE ' PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 i ' PART 2 - MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 THERMOSTATS AND RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 ELECTRIC SPACE HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ■ DIVISION 16 PROJECT NO. 94258 SECTION 16850 - ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING PAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete and adequate installation of electric resistance heating system as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Baseboards. .2 Cabinet and Unit Heaters. .3 Thermostats. .4 Relays. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 THERMOSTATS AND RELAYS .1 Wall mounted line voltage thermostat, unless otherwise shown, shall be 250 volts, 1 pole, Honeywell Cat. # T498A. r .2 Low voltage thermostats shall be Honeywell, Cat. # T86A. 3 For each low voltage thermostat, supply a two pole Honeywell, Cat# R841 C relay. Where one thermostat controls more than one relay but not more than five relays supply one Honeywell, Cat. #AT72-D140 VA transformer and one Honeywell, Cat. # R841D relay for each 4500 W of heaters. 1 PROJECT NO. 94258 DIVISION 16 PAGE 2 SECTION 16850 - ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING .4 Relays and transformers shall be housed in the special baseboard sections, or ' in the unit heater enclosure. .5 Where remote relays and transformers are indicated provide a suitable double ' voltage enclosure. .6 Thermostats controlling unit heaters shall be 120 volt, Honeywell,Cat. #T498A and shall be wall mounted on a recessed single gang outlet box 2.2 ELECTRIC SPACE HEATERS .1 Supply and install all electric heating units as per heater schedule including ' thermostats, controls and incidentals required for a complete installation. .2 Wattage of heating units shown are minimum requirements and shall not be , reduced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING ' .1 Wiring sizes shown on Drawings are minimum and shall not be reduced. .2 Complete heating installation shall conform to Electrical Code regulations and ' the Electric Heating Association Standards. .3 Heating units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's ' recommendations. .4 Heating units shall not be used for temporary heating of building during ' construction, unless specifically instructed in writing by Consultant. .5 Circuits in panels feeding heating units shall be so arranged that minimum unbalance occurs across the phases. .6 Each unit shall be controlled by a thermostat , End of Section M C:0IU.aRT� r - E QO CENTRE COMPLEX OrrrAtuo I� VOLUME 4 JF 4 .i SOILS REPORTS i PHASE H TENDER NO. CL96-4 n-TENDED i i PROJECT NO: 914027-24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION: JULY 22, 1996 THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 1 JAN 23 '96 12:05PM 60LDER WHITBY 905 723 2182 P.1/2 GOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD. loo BOW,CNft WW*.0ukrjNCwdr LIN sYd - Tr9•MS172M727 ' FACSMMZ TRANSMOSION TO: Wong Gralign n Architects Adtsademet Mr,Ivan Morgan,Pr*d Architect f, PAX; (416)5954923 FROM Mr.Doug COMA P.Eug. Date 1Ygasmlfted: Jamiary 23, 1996 OurRameoee: 9S14038 RE: Comoro Community Couple Combos,Oatarie Taal number of pagan ineluditig cover 1w: 1 hlf FuMw to our recent telephone canve=WD, this memorandum provides geatechnical engineering faormation mguding the daelp of ibendation drainage at the abaft site. This information should be reed in coaJunction with our Geoteeludcai Report pepuod for the project(Golder Associates Ltd Report No. 951-8038, dated October 24, 1995). • For Wminen4i with floor levels more than 1.5 m below the existing grade(i.e. below the local water table),the Walls and floor slabs should to properly wmeaproaPod In additiou,an underfloor drainage system should be provided. The drains, typically at 6 m spacings, should consist of 100 mm diameter Vxte;dile wrapped perforated pipe wrrronoded On 811 aides with a minimum thielmtess of 100 mm of oleso 8rco draining geed such as comcrobe sand. A typical schematic underfloor drainage detail is shown on Figure 1-1(attached). • For the pool at the site, it is understood that the floor slab at the deep end will bear at about Elevation 132,5 m. Siam this is near the meaatred water loyal in Ibis are of the site, it would be prudent to provide underfloor drainage over the deep and of the pool as well. We trust that this memorandum is sufficient ft your requirements. Yo�urs�tndy, pD tD.G. OmM P.Enginxr., Gootcoh!"Engineer �j Attached:Figure 1-1 DGGJlvII.JWWd ■ Golder Associates JAN 23 '% 12:05PM GOLDER WHITBY 905 723 218 .2/ • TYPICAL UNDERFLOOR DRAINAGE DETAIL. FIGURE I^I SLAB : ! 'i • � •� : "! i '. a : , • � 410Q APPROVED GEOTBXTILE GRANLnARA PREPARED FREE DRAINING SAND SUBGRADE � • SUCH AS CONCRETE SAND mm 01A. SLOTTED DRAIN PIPE ALTERNATIVE I . APPROVED GEOTEXTILE SLAB / ., • � ♦ ' / ' •'�• : l •. '► ,'►.• . IODm m DIA. ORANUI111Z!► "TTED DRAIN PIPE PREPARED IDOmM MIR SUBGRADE L , y°• _1. •o CLEAR STONE $U ROUNDING DRAIN PIPE ALTERNATIVE 2. SPECIAL NOTE THIS DRAWING IS A SCHEMATIC ONLY AND IS TO SE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ACCOMPANYING REPORT Golder Associates Golder Associates Ltd. (V=ld 900 sco';o Court es WhIlm. Ontario. Condo VN gV" Fcm (905j 729 2182 3 2727 October 4, 1995 The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6 Attention: Mr. Fred Horvath Facilities Manager RE: ADDITIONAL GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS PROPOSED COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD, COURTICE, ONTARIO Dear Sirs: Further to recent discussions with Mr. Jamie Lanes of Hannigan Engineering Limited, we understand that the finished floor elevation of the proposed Community Complex has been set I at 135,30 the To avoid engineeredrfill are required, This letter recommendations re iin f supporting report No. 951-8038, entitled, "Geoteclwical Investigation, wnjuncdon with our geotechsucal cep Proposed Caribou Community Complex, Courtice Road, Courtice, Ontazio"> dated August, 1 1995, Engineered P111 Prior to placing any engineered fill at the site, all topsoil and organic root taat should be stripped from the entire building footprint plus a surrounding zone as described below, The area should be proofrollod in conjunction with an inspection by the g��� engineer to confirm that theca exposed d $0116darectedlby the engineer. Based on and �results ofborehole$ I to work should be 6, the exposed subgrade will comprise silty sand till. This material will be prone disturbance by extended exposure to wet weather and freezing temperature, thus Placing of - engineered fill should commence as soon as practical after site stripping. The material for use as engineered fill l shoal OPSS Granular mm loos Blifts and uniformly of 19 mm crusher run limestone, p The placement of the compacted to 9S per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density. p engineered fill must be monitored by the geotechnical engineer on a full-time basis. Footings bearing on engineered fill as described above o£4be mm. In audit ono allowable bearing pressure of 150 kPa and a minimum footing O=FIG N ALST'AUA. CANADA. GSRNANV. Ha .i �? �E.J.31IHf1^d3Q�J �IJ;�S b 5 °C 1J0 ^ — -------- ------------ ------------------------------ ---- - --- -- The Coporation of the Municipality fo Claringtoa October 6, 1995 W.Fred Horvath 2 951.9038 steel, such as two IOM bars, should be installed in the top and bottom of the foundation walls in all areas where footings are bearing in engineered fill. Fill Umits Outside the building perimeter, the engineered fill should extend horizontally a minimum of I m beyond the outer edge of the footing. The fill should then be sloped down and away from the edge no steeper than 1 horizontal to 1 vertical, as illustrated schematically in Figure 1. d The engineered fill should be placed to at least 0,6 m above the design founding elevation, To provide at least 1.2 m of cover for frost protection, the fill should be extended horizontally for 5 m out from the exterior wall and then be sloped down and away from the wall at a slope of 2.5 horizontal to 1 vertical, as illustrated in Figure 1. This slope will permit landscaping with grass or shrubs. This outer fill zone can comprise site excavated material which is free of organics and which can be placed and compacted to a nominal 90 per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (assuming it will not have to support settlement sensitive structures, such as sidewalks, paved parking, atc.), The interior fill above the engineered fill and to within 150 mm of the underside of the floor slabs, can comprise OPSS Granular B as for the engineered fill, or OPSS Select Subgrade Material, It is unlikely that the surficial silty fine sand encountered in borehoies 7 to 10 and in borehole 12, will be suitable for this purpose due to the high silt contents. Therefore, Select Subgrade Material would have to be Imported from off site. All interior fill should be uniformly compacted to 98 per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density. Construction Monitoring and Cold Weather Construction As noted above, full time monitoring of all engineered fill placement is essential to minimize the potential for post-construction differential settlement, This requirement is considered even more critical in view of the fact that site preparation works are due to be carried out this fall and winter. Acoeptabla placement of engineered fill is possible during occasional subzero temperatures, however vigilant monitoring will be needed to avoid the Inclusion of frozen lumps into the fill. The contractor will also have to be prepared to remove any surface fill material which freezes overnight, prior to placement of the next lift of fill. We trust this letter is adequate for your immediate requirements. If any additional Information is needed, please contact this office. j Yours truly, GOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD. Michael L.I. $r, P. Eng, Principal Mr.Jamie Jong, flarwSan Jlnsinee,ins Limittd d Gold _ -�!FE E� 5dr ..'3iIHf1 rJ3!71 - 4Jd9F_:btu fir., a�1 1=tCt L_ ----------- _ _ _ RECOMMENDED FILL LIMITS FIGURE 1 NOMINAL REINFORCEMENT i OPBS SELECT SUSORADE IRafer to text} + MATERIAL COMPACTED TO SS%OF STANDARD PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY OENSITy, FLOOR SLAB 6m MIN, GRANULAR A E . . . tmMN, . . . . . . . E►,48o mm •MIN, SITE EXCAVATED PILL COMPACTED TO SD%STANDARD • PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY . . . . . . . . COMPETENT STRATUM OF UNDISTURBED SILTY BAND TILL MINIMUM EXTENT OF IMPORTED GRANULAR B MATERIAL UNIPCRMLy COMPACTED TO SS%OF STANDARD PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY. THIS DRAWING Ii TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITN ACCOMPANYING LETTER NOT TO SCALE Date Oet�, 81.995 � Drawn PreJeet_ G •-•° Q -.— older Associates ��kd �-' Golder Associates Ltd. . 100 by, O aria, Golder Whitby, Ontario, Canada L1N BY6 Telephone (905) 723-2727 - A . so * Fax (905) 723-2182 l�a� REVISED REPORT ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX ,1 COURTICE ROAD COURTICE, ONTARIO Submitted to: J 1� Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington I� 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6 Distribution: 1 copy - Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 1 copy - Hannigan Engineering 1 copy - Wong Gregerson Architects 1 copy - D.G. Biddle & Associates I copy - Barry Bryan Associates 2 copies - Golder Associates Ltd. October, 1995 951-8038 OFFICES IN AUSTRALIA, CANADA, GERMANY HUNGARY ITALY, SWEDEN, UNITED KINGDOM, UNITED STATES Golder Associates Ltd. 100 Scotia Court Own_ Golder Whitby, Ontario, Canada L1N 8V6 ssoc `A Telephone (905) 723-2727 !mil (.,jam ec o Fax (905) 723-2182 October 24, 1995 951-8038 Ito Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6 Attention: Shirley E. Stewart Buyer I RE: GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD, COURTICE, ONTARIO Dear Sirs: This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation carried out at the above referenced site as shown on the Key Plan, Figure 1. The purpose of the investigation was to determine the subsurface soil and shallow groundwater conditions at the site by means of a limited number of shallow boreholes and, based on our interpretation of the borehole data, to provide geotechnical engineering information for the design of the community complex foundations, paved parking areas and access roads. Verbal authorization to proceed with this investigation was given by Shirley E. Stewart of the Municipality of Clarington on July 26, 1995. The factual data, interpretations and recommendations contained in this report pertain to a specific project as described in the report and are not applicable to any other project or site location. If the project is modified in concept, location or elevation, or if the project is not initiated within twelve months of the date of the report, Golder Associates Ltd. should be given an opportunity to confirm that the recommendations are still valid. 'ibis report replaces our previous report dated August 23, 1995. OFFICES IN AUSTRALIA, CANADA, GERMANY, HUNGARY ITALY, SWEDEN, UNITED KINGDOM, UNITED STATES i Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —2— 951-8038 R SrfE DESCRIPTION The site for the proposed Courtice Community Complex is located on the west side of Courtice Road, immediately south of the existing Courtice High School. The site is gently sloping to the south and is covered by grass and weeds with occasional trees. _ GEOLOGY The site is located within the physiographic region of Southern Ontario known as the Iroquois Plain. Physiographic mapping in the vicinity of the site indicates sand and till plains(Map 2226, Chapman and Putnam, 1984), which is generally consistent with the results of this investigation. INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE The field work for this investigation was carried out on August 8 and 9, 1995 during which time twelve boreholes (BHs I to 12) were drilled at the locations shown on the Location Plan, Figure 2,using a bombardier mounted drillrig supplied and operated by Eastern Soil Investigation Limited. Standard penetration testing and samp ling was carried out at regular intervals of depth in each of the boreholes using oonventional 35 mm internal diameter split spoon sampling equipment. One in situ vane shear test was carried out in the relatively soft silty clay soil encountered in Borehole 7. The shallow groundwater conditions were noted in the open boreholes during drilling and the boreholes were loosely backfilled upon completion. Standpipes were installed in selected boreholes to permit further monitoring of the shallow groundwater levels. All of the samples obtained were j brought to our Whitby laboratory for further examination,natural water content testing and selected I} classification testing. In addition, a groundwater sample was obtained and tested for sulphate content to determine the aggressiveness of the groundwater at the site with respect to buried concrete The field work for this investigation was directed by a member of our engineering staff who also determined the borehole locations in the field, logged the boreholes and cared for the samples obtained. The ground surface elevations at the borehole locations were surveyed by our staff and referenced to Geodetic Bench Mark No. 67-U-M7, which is described as a tablet in the west face Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —3— 951-8038 of the concrete abutment of the Courtice Road bridge over Black Creek, 46 in north of Highway No. 2. The elevation of this point is understood to be 131.95 m, geodetic datum. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The subsurface soil and shallow groundwater conditions encountered in the boreholes as well as the results of the field and laboratory testing are shown in detail on the Record of Borehole sheets and on Figures 3 and 4 following the text of this report. List of abbreviations and symbols are provided to assist in the interpretation of the borehole logs. It should be noted that the boundaries between the strata have been inferred from drilling observations and non-continuous samples. They generally represent a transition from one soil type to another and should not be inferred to represent an exact plane of geological change. Further, conditions will vary between and beyond the borehole locations. The following is a summarized account of subsurface conditions encountered in the boreholes followed by more detailed descriptions of the major soil strata and shallow groundwater conditions. Underlying 150 to 200 mm of topsoil,the subsurface soil conditions encountered generally consist of extensive strata of silty sand till, overlain by shallow layers of silty fine sand at some locations. In addition, layers of fine sand and silty clay were encountered within or underlying the till at %) several locations. The shallow groundwater levels measured in the standpipe were between Elevations 132.1 and 133.9 in or at depths ranging from 1.2 to 1.6 in below the existing ground surface during the time of this investigation in August, 1995. Surfraial Silty Fine Sand A surficial layer of silty fine sand was encountered directly underlying the topsoil in Boreholes 7 to 10 and 12. The surficial silty fine sand extended to depths ranging from 0.7 to 1.4 in below the existing ground surface. One standard penetration test carried out within the surficial silty fate sand gave an N value of 17 blows per 0.3 in indicating a compact relative density. The natural water content of the surficial silty fine sand samples ranged from 13 to 21 per cent with an average natural water content of about 17 per cent. ' Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —4— 951-8038 Silty Sand -nu Extensive strata of silty sand till were encountered in all of the boreboles at the site except Borehole 10. The silty sand till contained cobbles and boulders throughout. Standard penetration tests carried out within the silty sand till gave N values ranging widely from 19 to greater than 100 blows per 0.3 in indicating a compact to very dense relative density. The natural water content of the silty }_ sand till samples ranged from 4 to 17 per teat with an average ash"water content of 10 per cent. one grain size distribution curve for a sample of the silty sand till recovered from the 35 mm internal diameter split spoon sampler is shown on Figure 3. Fine Sand and Silty Fine Sand Layers of fine sand and silty fine sand were encountered within or underlying the till in Boreholes 8 to 10 in the western portion of the site. Standard penetration tests carried out within the fine sand and silty fine sand gave N values ranging from 24 to greater than 100 blows per 0.3 in indicating a compact to very dense relative density. The natural water content of the fine sand and silty fine sand samples ranged from 9 to 16 per cent with an average natural water content of about 13 per cent. One grain size distribution curve for a sample of the fine sand is shown on Figure 4. Clayey Silt Till Layers of clayey silt till were encountered in Boreholes 7, 9 and 10 underlying the surficial silty fine sand. Standard penetration tests carried out within the clayey silt till gave N values ranging from 13 to 34 blows per 0.3 in indicating a stiff to hard consistency. The natural water content of the clayey silt till samples ranged from 12 to 18 per cent with an average natural water content of about 15 per cent. Silty Clay A layer of silty clay was encountered within the till in Borehole 7; and Borehole 10 was terminated in silty clay. Standard penetration tests carried out within the silty day gave N values ranging from 4 to 13 blows per 0.3 in and one in situ vane shear test gave an undrainod shear strength of 68 lips. Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —5— 951-8038 These data indicate that the consistency of the silty clay ranges from soft to stiff. The natural water content of the silty clay samples ranged from 22 to 28 per cent with an average natural water content of about 25 per cent. Shallow Groundwater Shallow groundwater was encountered in all of the boreholes, except Borehole 12, during drilling on August 8 and 9, 1995 between Elevations 127.4 and 134.1 m or at depths ranging from 1.0 to 6.5 m below the existing ground surface. Borehole 12 was dry upon completion of drilling. The shallow groundwater levels subsequently measured in the standpipes are as follows: Shaaow juocndwater iew .August 78 1898 Borehele Depth Batoer Ground Surface c Matron imi „ 1 1.5 132.1 2 1.8 132.2 7 1.2 1 133.9 8 1.2 133.7 11 1.5 133.8 It should be noted that these observations reflect the shallow groundwater conditions encountered in the boreholes and measured in the standpipes during the time of this investigation in August, 1995 and some seasonal fluctuations should be anticipated. Aggressiveness Testing A groundwater sample was obtained from Borehole 4 and tested for sulphate content in our Whitby laboratory in order to evaluate the aggressiveness of the groundwater with respect to buried concrete. The results of this testing indicated a sulphate content of 100 ppm. According to Table Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —6— 951-8038 9 of CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90, this sulphate content indicates that the groundwater at the site is not overly aggressive to concrete. As such,normal Type 10 Portland Cement may be used for concrete in contact with soils at the site. Gasterhtor Readings _ Downhole readings of combustible vapours in the subsurface native soils were carried out in the open boreholes during drilling using a Gastech Inc. Model 1314 "gastechtor". No fill materials were encountered during the investigation at the site. The gastechtor testing indicated concentrations of combustible vapours in the range of 0 to 175 ppm in the subsurface soils, which in our opinion are representative of background readings, attributable to naturally occurring soil gases. Such soil gas concentrations pose no safety concerns. f DISCUSSION Ibis section of the report provides engineering information for the geotechnical design aspects of the project based on our interpretation of the borehole information and on our understanding of the project requirements. The information in this portion of the report is provided for the guidance of the design engineers. Where comments are made on construction, they are provided only in order to highlight aspects of construction which could affect the design of the project. Contractors bidding on or undertaking any work at the site should examine the factual results of the investigation, satisfy themselves as to the adequacy of the information for construction and make their own interpretation of the factual data as it affects their proposed construction techniques, schedule, equipment capabilities, costs, sequencing and the like. Our professional services for this assignment address only the geotechnical (physical)aspects of the subsurface conditions at the site. The geo-environmental (chemical) aspects, including the consequences of possible surface and/or subsurface contamination resulting from previous activities or uses of the site and/or resulting from the introduction onto the site of materials from off-site sources are outside the terms of reference for this report and have not been investigated or addressed. As noted above, since no fill materials were encountered during the investigation, no chemical testing was undertaken. Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —7— 951-8038 Project Description It is understood that the Courtice Community Complex will be constructed at the site. The development will include a community centre, a future arena, paved parking areas and access roads. The community centre building will be a single storey, slab-on-grade structure, with a limited basement area near the pool. Foundations Based on the results of the boreholes, the proposed community centre building may be founded on conventional shallow spread and/or continuous strip footings bearing within the native,undisturbed silty sand till using a minimum footing width of 400 mm and an allowable bearing pressure of 300 kPa at the depths indicated below: Heconunended ouneinp level Vicinity aTinimom Depth Highest Anficipeted ei BoreFale 9ebuv Existirp IIrotmd : Bevation Eoundirg Soil surface!Imi Gni .: - 1 1-1.L 1 1.0 132.6 Silty Sand Till 2 1.0 132.8 Silty Sand Till 3 1.0 132.7 Silty Sand Till 4 1.0 133.2 Silty Sand Till 6 1.0 133.7 Silty Sand Till 6 1.0 133.0 1 Silty Sand rdl Where stepped spread footings are constructed,or for footings adjaceet to the pool excavation,the difference in elevation between individual footings should not be greater than one half the clew distance between the footings. In addition, the lower footings should be constructed first so that if it is necessary to construct the lower footings at a greats depth than contemplated,the elevations of the upper footings can be adjusted accordingly. Stepped strip footings should be constructed in accordance with the Ontario Regulation 419186 section 9.15.3.12. It is likely that stepped footings will be required at the transition between the portions of the building with either partial or full basement and those with ""a-grade. Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —g— 951-8038 In order to minimize the potential for damage due to frost action, all exterior footings aid footings in unheated areas should be provided with at least 1.2 m of soil cover after final grading. The founding material is susceptible to disturbance by construction activity especially during wet weather and care should be taken to preserve the integrity of the material as a bearing stratum. Prior to pouring concrete for the footings, the foundation excavations should be inspected by the geotechnical engineer to confirm that the footings are located in a native,undisturbed and competent �. bearing stratum which has been cleaned of all ponded water and loosened/softened material. Concrete for the footings should be placed as soon as practical, but not more than 24 hours after excavation and should be backfilled as soon as practical thereafter. The bearing soil must be kept from freezing during cold weather construction. For foundations designed,constructed and inspected as noted above,the anticipated maximum total sod differential settlements are expected to be less than 25 and 20 mm, respectively. It is anticipated that excavation for the footings will be less than about 1.5 m in depth below the existing ground surface, and up to about 3 m in depth for the pool. The excavations can be carried out in conventional temporary open cuts, in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects. Some difficulty may be encountered excavating the very dense till at the site. In addition, cobbles and boulders will be encountered throughout the till. Based on the groundwater conditions encountered in the boreholes and depending upon weather conditions at the time of construction, some groundwater seepage into the foundation excavations may be encountered, especially within the deeper pool excavation, and can be handled where required by pumping from properly constructed and filtered sumps located within the excavation but outside of the areas required to support footings. For shallow excavations less than about 1.5 m in depth below the existing ground surfam groundwater seepage is expected to be minimal. Care should be taken to direct surface water away from the open excavations. In addition, care must be taken during excavation to ensure that adequate support is provided for any existing structures or underground services adjacent to the excavations. Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —9— 951-8038 11" Slabs Prior to constructing the floor slabs at the site, the topsoil and any organic material must first be stripped. The areas should then be sub-excavated where necessary to at least 150 mm below the underside of the floor slabs. The exposed soil subgrade should be proofrolled with a heavy roller in conjunction with an inspection by the geotechnical engineer. Remedial work should be carried out on any disturbed, softened or deleterious zones as directed by the geotechnical engineer. The site should then be brought to within 150 mm of the underside of the floor slabs, where necessary, using OPSS Granular B, Type I material placed in maximum 300 mm loose lifts and uniformly compacted to at least 98 per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density. The final lift sbould consist of 150 mm of OPSS Granular A material compacted to at least 100 per cent of standard !. Proctor maximum dry density. Special care should be taken to provide compaction around columns and adjacent to foundation and basement walls. The floor slabs should be structurally separate from the foundation walls and columns. Sawcut control joints should be provided at regular intervals and along column lines to minimise random cracking from shrinkage and to allow for any differential settlement of the floor slabs. In addition, in order to help damp-proof the floor slabs and to prevent moisture and paste migration during concrete placement, consideration should be given to providing a polyethylene vapour barrier immediately beneath the floor slabs. A thin bed of sand can be placed above the vapour barrier to facilitate uniform curing of the slabs. Adequate curing of the concrete slabs must be provided for at least 3 days after concrete placement to avoid differential drying and slab curling. Retaining Walls 1� It is understood that a limited basement may be constructed in the area of the pool. The following information is provided concerning the design of basement retaining walls at the site. I Select free-draining granular fill, meeting the OPSS Granular B, Type I gradation specification, should be used as back ill immediately against the basement wall. In this regard, the native silty soils are considered to be unsuitable for this use. As a minimum requirement, the granular backfill should be placed in the wedge-shaped zone defined by a 60 degree line extending up and back from Golder Associates r Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —10— 951-9039 the bottom of the rear We of the wall footing. Alternatively, the native excavated soils could be used as backfill where an approved geocomposite drain system is installed against the exterior of the basement walls. All backfill should be placed in maximum 300 mm loose lifts and uniformly compacted to at least ' 95 per cent of the standard Proctor maximum dry density. However, heavy compaction equipment should not be used closer to the wall than the distance equal to the current height of the fill above 6 the base of the structure. Assuming that the retaining wall is part of the building's structural support, it would not be free to yield sufficiently for "active" earth pressure conditions to occur. 'therefore, the basement walls should be designed using an "at rest' lateral earth pressure coefficient of 0.5 and a unit weight of backfill of 21 kNlm3. An allowable coefficient of friction equal to 0.5 may be assumed between concrete footings and the compact to dense native till. 'the upper 300 mm of backfill for exterior basement walls should be a low permeability material to provide a relatively impermeable cap and should be sloped away from the building. Properly filtered perforated perimeter drains leading to a permanent outlet, continuously pumped sump or sewer line should be provided at the footing level in the basement area and around any other llportions of the building where the lowest floor slab is below the exterior final grade. f� Where the basement floor level is more than about 1.5 m below existing grade, i.e. at or below the measured local water table,complete water-proofing of the basement rather than damp-proofing will be needed. In addition, any such walls should be designed to withstand full hydrostatic pressure. Where the lowest floor slab is at or above the exterior final grade, no perimeter drainage at the footing level is required and the exterior foundation walls may be backflled with any excavated native material free of topsoil, organics and other deleterious material, placed in lifts and compacted. However, where this backfill is to support settlement sensitive structures, such as Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —11— 9514038 concrete slabs, pavements or sidewalks,care should be taken to ensure that the material is uniformly icompacted to at least 95 per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density. ■ Future Arena It is also understood that an arena may be constructed along the north side of the community centre at some time in the future. 'Me exact details of the arena development are not known at this time. However, for preliminary planning purposes,the arena-structure could be founded on conventional shallow continuous strip and/or spread footings bearing in the native, undisturbed clayey silt till or silty sand till using an allowable bearing pressure in the order of 250 kPa, at depths ranging from about 0.8 to 1.5 m (Elevation 132.4 to 134.1 m) below the existing ground surface. The subsurface soils at the site are frost susceptible and in conjunction with a relatively high water table, will require the design of an insulation and possibly a sub-floor heating system to avoid detrimental footing and arena slab heaving. Once the details of the arena development are established, this information should be reviewed by the geotechnical engineer and additional work carried out,as required,compatible with the proposed arena development. Pavement Design Based on the results of this investigation,the recommended pavement designs for the parking areas and access toads at the site are as follows T#+icicrware of Pavarrrerrtl�atrtettts{rnmi 3 a rc. `i ¢ MORIM �t1rr > ►ctxta end ibrt Arent _ ' ttGada ::� Aoums Asphaltic HL 3 Surface 30 40 40 Material tons 1150) HL 8 Binder 40 50 50 Granular Granular A Base 100 150 150 Material IOPSS 10101 Granular B,Type I Subbase 300 300 1 350 ! ' Prepared and Approved Subgrade Golder Associates Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —12— 951-8038 The heavier pavement design recommended for truck and bus routes is considered suitable for a maximum traffic volume in the range of 10 to 35 heavy vehicles (i.e. trucks and buses) per day, assuming a nominal 20 year design period and a timely maintenance program. Ito granular subbase and base materials should be uniformly compacted to at least 100 per cent of standard Proctor maximum dry density. The asphaltic materials should be compacted to 97 per cent of their Marshall densities, as measured in the field using a nuclear density gauge. Prior to placing any granular material, the exposed soil subgrade should be proofrolled and inspected by the geotechnical engineer as previously outlined for floor slabs. In addition, in order to preserve the integrity of the completed access roads and parking areas, a permanent drainage system will be required. It is anticipated that the drainage system would consist of a series of catchbasins draining to storm sewers. In this regard, the subgrade should be positively sloped towards the catchbasins to prevent ponding or entrapment of water in the subbase which could lead to frost heave, weakened sections, potholing and the like. Short stub drains, approximately 3 to 6 m in length, should be installed at each of the interior catchbasins and should radiate outward from the catchbasin in four directions. In addition, continuous subdrains should be placed along both sides of the access roads leading to the catchbasins. The drains should consist of 100 mm diameter geotextile wrapped perforated pipe surrounded on all sides with a minimum thickness of 100 mm of clean free draining sand such as concrete sand. The drains should be installed at a minimum depth of 300 nun below the bottom of the granular subbase and should be graded to drain freely into the catchbasins. 111' Golder Associates :1— Municipality of Clarington October 24, 1995 Shirley E. Stewart —13— 951-8038 :. Inspection and Testing Prior to construction,the geotechnical aspects of the final design drawings and specifications should be reviewed by this office to confirm that the intent of this report has been met. During construction, foundation inspection and sufficient in situ density tests aW materials testing should be carried out to confirm that the conditions exposed are consistent with those encountered in the boreholes and to monitor conformance to the pertinent project specifications. We trust that this report provides sufficient geotechnical information in order to proceed with the design of this project. If there are any questions regarding the contents of this report,please do not hesitate to contact this office. Yours truly, CVpf`-SSlOn9 O F `' Zc GOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD. (/1 m D. G. GORRILL m Doug G. Gorrill, Geotechnical Engineer �''cE of 'Michael L. J. , P.Fng. Principal DGG:TAM:MIJM:sd Attachments: Abbreviations and Symbols Record of Boreholes 1 to 12 Figures 1 to 4 i� Golder Associates ii LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS E The abbreviation commonly employed on each"Record of Borehole,"on the figures and in the text '[! of the report, are as follows: 1. SAMPLE TYPES Ill. SOIL DESCRIPTION AS auger sample (a) Cohesionless Soils 'N' CS chunk sample Blows/0.30m DO drive open Relative Densiit or Blows/ft. DS Denison type sample Very loose 0 to 4 FS foil sample Loose 4 to 10 RC rock core Compact 10 to 30 ST slotted tube Dense 30 to 50 TO thin-walled, open Very dense over 50 TP thin-walled, piston WS wash sample (b) Cohesive Soils 'Cu' 11. PENETRATION RESISTANCES Conslstenci, kPa psi. 0 to 12 0 to 250 Dynamic Penetration Resistance: Very soft Soft 12 to 25 250 to 500 The number of blows by a 63.5 kg (140 lb) Firm 25 to 50 500 to 1000 hammer dropped 760 mm (30 in.) to drive Stiff 50 to 100 1000 to 2000 uncased a 50 mm (2 in.) diameter, 600 cone Very stiff 100 to 200 2000 to 4000 attached to "A" size drill rods for a distance Hard over 200 over 4000 of 0.3 m (12 in.). Standard Penetration Resistance, N: The number of blows by a 63.5 kg (140 lb) IV. SOIL TESTS hammer dropped 760 mm (30 in.) required to drive a 50 mm (2 in.) drive open sampler C consolidation test for a distance of 0.3 in (12 in.). H hydrometer analysis M sieve analysis WH sampler advanced by static weight— MH combined analysis, sieve and hydrometer' weight, hammer Q undrained triaxial2 PH sampler advanced by pressure—pressure, R consolidated undrained triaxialz hydraulic S drained triaxial PM sampler advanced by pressure—pressure, U unconfined compression manual V field vane test NOTES 'Combined analyses when 5 to 95 per cent of the material passes the No. 200 sieve. zUndrained triaxial tests in which pore pressures are measured are shown as Q or R. Golder Associates LIST OF SYMBOLS r 1. GENERAL (b) Consistency r - 3.1416 wt liquid limit e = base of natural logarithms 2.7183 we plastic limit F log,a or In a, natural logarithm of a Iy plasticity index logic a or log a, logarithm of a to base 10 wy shrinkage limit I time 1, liquidity index = (w — w,)/Ir g acceleration due to gravity Ic consistency index = (wt — w)/Ip V volume ee.s void ratio in loosest state W weight em,. void ratio in densest state M moment D, relative density = (ems. —e)/(ems, — emm) F factor of safety (c) Permeability II. STRESS AND STRAIN h hydraulic head or potential q rate of discharge u pore pressure v velocity of flow o normal stress t hydraulic gradient e' normal effective stress (d is also used) k coefficient of permeability r shear stress j seepage force per unit volume e linear strain e.r shear strain (d) Consolidation (one-dimensional) V Poisson's ratio (µ is also used) ne, coefficient E modulus of linear deformation (Young's cient of volume change modulus) ls G modulus of shear deformation C, compression index = —Hel log,u o' C. coefficient of consolidation K modulus of compressibility T. time factor = c,t/d' (d, drainage path) 11 coefficient of viscosity U degree of consolidation 1II. SOIL PROPERTIES (e) Shear strength (a) Unit weight r, shear strength y unit weight of soil (bulk density) c' effective cohesion T. unit weight of solid particles intercept m terms of effective m' effective angle of stress y, unit weight of water shearing resist- r, = i + o, tan m' y, unit dry weight of soil (dry density) ance,or friction y' unit weight of submerged sat L. apparent cohesion' G, specific gravity of solid particles G,=y,/y. 0. apparent angle of in terms of total stress e ' void ratio shearing resist- r, = c. + o tan 0. X porosity ance,orfriction w water content Y coefficient of friction S. degree of saturation S, sensitivity 'For the case of a saturated cohesive soil, 0. = 0 and the undrained shear strength r, = C. is taken as half the undrained compressive strength. N V Golder Associates i . . . i ■■ ■�1, �� GROUNDWATER LEVEL 04 OPEN i BOREHOLE AT OR AT A OEM OF ILI(Mn UPON COMPLETION OF DRILLM AM S.ISOL WATER LEM IN STANDPPE AT DEFrH WALE LOGGED: JLT I ID 50 Golder Associates CHECKED: .� ?. PIN� LEVEL IN OPEN OR AT A DEPTH OF 5,47m UPON COWWFION OF DFKLML WAnR LEVEL IN grANDPIPE AT ELEV.132MM OR AT A DEPTH OF i o � llf� LOGGED: JLT I bD 50 Golder Associates KE mi r o ..I fill ail , I�11 l�fl LOGGED., Ito 50 Golder Associates CHECKED: ✓� MEN DEPTH SCALE I to 50 Golder Associates CHECKED: o .. !'f1 M phi 4 i o �B DEFTH SCALE LOGGED: JLT Ito 50 Golder Assoclates CHEMD. . i .. . � MEN■■■■■■■ mo ■ 0 ■ 10,0 110, ii s.% s ' ii 0 .. oar �i COWLEnONOF WATER LEVEL N 9TANDPIPE AT ELEV.MINIM OR AT A DEPTH OF 121m AUCL 11M LOCATION: SEE FIGURE 2 110FING DATE. AU06 SM DATUM: GEODETIC SAMPLER HAMMER,6&5kg;DROP,700mm PENETRATION TEST HAMMER.63 DROP.700nwn tool Pool t IN END OF 8e.,1W.VJL� Hi GACUNMATER 90RENOLE AT ELEV. usam OR A4 OEPTH OF WATER LEVEL IN IFTANDPIPE AT ELEV.13&70M OR AT A DEPM OF DEPTH SCALE LOGGED,. JLT I to 50 Golder Associates CHECKED,.-4i 11 II '1 11 II PROJECT:- 0514OJS RECORD OF BOREHOLE 9 SHEET 1 oF1 LOCATION: SEE MORE 2 BORING DATE: ALV.SM DATUM: GEODETIC SAMPLER HAMMER S5.fi1tS:DROP,700mm PENETRATION TEST MMMER,63.6kp:DROP.700mn. 0 BOIL PPIDFLE SAWpLM OYIIAAYC PENEWTION FMWANCE i ; k 001101J1'fM1Y, _� g DMSMI, R `Fi g PRIER SrANDPIPE D gplgry ` = atRENO 0•0 WATR iTAL1AT0N 3 C%w. 0 u•o PuI b i i tl TOPSOIL EIIFACE 1 .M ° TOOPSOIL 0.ao aao Reddbh-br SILTY bw SAND, t A• lnis ogpnib. t t at0 1 . 00 u o SIEFIc MOL blown mW �.LA SILT,toss mW4 7� = 131.75 2U Comp"WW SILTY SAND,Iotti dry,trsa wa%*.(TILL) • Do °A 35.90 ° e 290 s N O • Camped b darts,ww fw SAND. sotro pravN..oms sk oio i s D. ass dtws,Sref SILTY SAN etN1i a WY,same psusl.(TILL) P 127M 7M O END OF BOREHOLS: ale GROUNDWATER SOiE�1101E AT ELEV.12L43 n OR ATA DEFrH OF UMUMPON OF T DfILyIIG. ALKL a toa 5 a if DEPTH SCJLLE LOGGED: JLT 1 to 30 Golder Associates CHECICED:,<Y16L ACT, $514MM RECORD OF BOREHOLE 10 GHW I OFI �Q LOCATION: SEE FIGURE 2 DORM DATE: AW.4Na DATUM: NEOOETIC SAMPLER HAMMER S&S Q;DROP.TaOtnm PENETMTION TEST KAMMFA G&ft:DROP,711mm am PROFILE tMMRFf OYNMIIC PENETRATION . NYOWYAIC NR jgCUCiY. T Cm RE9BTANCE,.awa,a.2. \ laM 1 e PIEDXWTER F3 aTANDPI E t rnN ElEV. AHEAATRENGTH r v- + 0.0 INATBt OOM BR.PERCENT � INSTALLATION s DFYIN W.II° wwW.0 U•O III, mw to bL` M N m °° • AROUND SURFACE 1 .a ° TOPSOIL Q°0 au SILTY t Am Nr SAND.Yaw cYY.haoa vperlks N upper tow. 2 00 n t32,00 1.OT Vssryry Maf.pgM bravo and WwJ < < CIAVEV SILT.saw ssrd,trsw • oo m O Srewl.(TILL) Im 2 a 102.13 W Q Z,3 e Y y dsrw,IpM down.fins snND.some eat . DO N O 7zoo +I • 113 1.10 v I s • O San b firm.SreV SILTY CLAY. bane Bend,earw Arts Bend eeenr • DO t 128.79 027 GROUNDWATER BORE N EAT B .101E AT FV. DtPP OR COMM A A COMP UPON OF • OO.UNG.ON Of OFA AI.O.a NOa is 11 t • f I � Y i E DEPTH SCALE LOGam.. JLT '. T b so Golder Associates CHECKED: 8 - r DEFTH SCALE LO 10050 Golder Associates CHE ?!� PROJECT: 951.8030 RECORD OF BOREHOLE 12 OHM OF{ 'LOCUTION: SEE FIGURE 2 BORING DATE: Aug,NO DATUM -GEODETIC f SAMPLER HAMMER 61%g:DROP,780mm PENETRATION TEST HAMMER,639y;DROP.760BSR 6OILPRDFILE DYNAMIC PENETRATION % NYDRAUI ;OONOUCTMIY. T jMf RESISTANCE.ROWS&3m I L awY 1 15 A I OR ` g ` PF1OMElER DEacRwrloN DFY SLEV. q anEAn 6TI1EnDTN Ilav• + g-• WATER CONTENT.PERfJ94i fWALLATION NDPFE oErm = bb� C%W* v.6 Y.O ..r pTL�IM 3 ►.I e a r • ONOUNO SURFACE I 17 TOPSOIL 0.60 SILTY6ra��SAND. Q76 I AS O 1 Al 0 7S 1 = p•0 a i !r < 71 00 a D W o < e CoRIP•a b arise.lgti m a i brown to grey SILTY SAND.arm dey,trace b—gnw1L cob6lsa vId booldsls,Dora•acrd Pooks4.(TILL) m w0 O r3 r17123 6 0"0 1.1• O ND BOREHOLE 188 BOREHOLE ORYUPON COMPLETION OF AALIG DRILLING.6i8. s r 1 7 i .a a DEPTH SCALE LOGGED: JLT , T e 30 Golder Associates CHECKED: FIGURE KEY PLAN 1 >, a lax v r as Fmrfig Q w.. 1 SITE COUMIR eL J' l � a NOT TO SCALE Date AUG. 1s. 1Y96 Drawn DV Z Chkd._ 'g Project es,-8038_ Golder Associates GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ■II III16qo11111 III■IIIIIIII■II'III11■illlllll■IIIIIIII■ ■II IIIII�Iilli ii:�llllllll■II;IIIII■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ . ■II IIIII■IIIII III■I��u�ll■II;IIIII■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ ■II IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII\III IIIII■IIIIIIII■Iillllll■ , ■II' IIIII■IIIII III■Illlllll�if 111111■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ . ■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■I��lIIII■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ . ■11. 11111■IIIII III■IIIIIIII■II;II��1�11111111■IIIIIIII■ . ■II IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■III IIIII�!!I_IIII�■IIIIIIII■ . ■II IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■II'IIIII■IIIII��.■IIIIIIII■ ■II IIIII■IIIII III■IIIIIIII■II IIIII■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ se�ee l• �, ■IIIIIIII■IIIII����iliii�ll■11;11111■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ ■II! IIIII■11111111■11111111■II 11111■11111111■11111111■ ■II IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIIII■II!IIIII■IIIIIIII■11111111■ :, ■II' IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■II IIIII■11111111■illlllll■ ■II, 11111■11111111■IIIIIIIII�II 11111■11111111■11111111■ ■11. 11111■11111 III■IIIIIIIIIIII 11111■1111111■11111111■ , ■II, 11111■11111111■111111111111 IIIII■11111111■11111111■ ■II�IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■!I��III■IIIIIIII■IIIIIIII■ GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ■il'IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■II �,111�11111111■IIIIIIII■ ■II IIIII■11111111■IIIIIIII■II IIII��■i�ui���711111111■ s©tee© E r • • a ` • i k i i a, i ri n �jl 'fff ,I \ \�� ' 'f"' � .VIII IIII II IIII� 60 9 ily nI�iinli IT �� -Z� r I� 4 '��'lllllllllllll IIIIQ i \� El 4, IT IN nj I - �`OOURTIpffIGAD _ -'f 'DI fAy H »v S ,- 01 o aomo r p IM :30 m e m m � 0 I7 a Z w yo9 i c a <0 m m °a 000 00 T E 44 v o 0> 0 c 3 t 0 OOi m 0 i yDO L t O 9 1 t Z APPENDIX W SPECIFICATION INDEX NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 00100 - Instructions to Tenderers 7 Section 00300 - Tender Form 3 Section 00310 - Unit Prices 4 Section 00320 - Alternate Prices 2 Section 00330 - Itemized Prices 7 Section 00430 - List of Subcontractors 6 Section 00800 - Supplementary General Conditions 7 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01005 - General Instructions 5 Section 01020 - Cash Allowances 1 Section 01027 - Application for Payments 1 Section 01040 - Coordination 3 Section 01050 - Field Engineering 1 Section 01060 - Regulatory Requirements 1 Section 01150 - Valuation of Changes 3 Section 01200 - Project Meetings 1 Section 01301 - Submittals 3 Section 01311 - Construction Schedule 1 Section 01340 - Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples 4 Section 01400 - Quality Control 1 Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 2 Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities 3 Section 01550 - Safety Requirements 1 Section 01575 - Environmental Protection 1 Section 01700 - Project Close Out 2 Section 01710 - Cleaning 2 Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Data 2 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Section 02212 - Topsoil and Finish Grading 3 Section 02222 - Excavation 2 Section 02223 - Back,' ill 3 SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK (cont'd. ) Section 02490 - Trees, Shrubs & Groundeover 18 Section 02500 - Paving, Curbs and Sidewalk 5 Section 02580 - Pavement Marking 2 Section 02515 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving 7 Section 02617 - Precast Concrete Wall 3 Section 02700 - Drainage 2 Section 02934 - Hydraulic Seeding 3 Section 02938 - Sodding 7 Section 02940 - Landscape Maintenance 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork 3 Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 4 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 6 Section 03345 - Concrete Finishing 3 Section 03410 - Precast Concrete Stair 4 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 9 Section 04205 - Glass Block 2 Section 04210 - Brick Masonry 4 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05120 - Structural Steel 6 Section 05210 - Steel Joists 4 Section 05310 - Steel Deck 5 Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 4 Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 3 Section 06110 - Carpentry and Millwork 9 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07132 - Membrane Waterproofing 3 Section 07196 - Air Barrier and Insulation 7 Secs- i_on 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System 6 Section 07270 - Firestopping and Smoke Seal 4 Section 07350 - Single Ply Roofing System 6 Section 07460 - Preformed Metal Roofing 4 Section 07511 - 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System 5 Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal 4 Section 07820 - Aluminum Skylights 5 Se<,tion 07830 - Roof Hatches 2 Section 07900 - Sealants 6 SPECIFICATION CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08100 - Hollow Metalwork 5 Section 08200 - Wood Doors 2 Section 08364 - Rolling Shutters 2 Section 08400 - Aluminum Entrances 5 Section 08425 - Automatic Entrance Door Operator 3 Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows and Window Wall 10 Section 08710 - Finish Hardware 2 Section 08800 - Glazing 2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System 6 Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile 7 Section 09505 Acoustic Ceilings 5 Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring 3 Section 09680 - Carpet 4 Section 09760 - Seamless Flooring 3 Section 09800 - Plastic Wall Paint 3 Section 09900 - Painting 11 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10161 - Metal Toilet Partitions 3 Section 10200 - Louvres 3 Section 10500 - Lockers 3 Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories 3 Section 10950 - Manufactured Specialties 2 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - Not Used This Specification DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - Not Used This Specification DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13000 - Swimming Pools 19 Section 13052 - Saunas 2 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING DEVICES - Not Used This Specification 0 - BIDDING AN D*hbN R CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SEL"TION00300 - TENDER FORM Appendix "B" Page:00300-1 -�raaaa a a a--------------------------------------------------------------- PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX t �� COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 From: Name of Bidder: A ou ►CON o D(y S i R y ozz U.,L) clD. .Li1, Address of Bidder: /31 O Lt-A PARK B L V Telephone No. 1/0-`) �5S - 1313 rAX (9,)5 ) ' 59-1 00LO Dear Sir: Having carefully examined the: Instructions to Bidders The Form of Agreement Drawings and Specifications Addenda No. / to �_ inclusive for Phase 2 - Courtice Community Complex, Courtice, Ontario, and having visited and investigated the Site and examined all conditions affecting the work, the undersigned offers, if notified in writing of the acceptance of this Tender within sixty (60) days of the time for the opening of Tenders, to furnish all plant, equipment, labour and material and perform all duties and services called for the Work, as described above, including all applicable Provincial Sales Tax and Excise Taxes, custom duties, freight and exchange and all other charges, including Goods and Service Tax for the total Tender price of: Dollars (S 739 eA in lawful money of Canada. * -g- ON--00300 TENDER, Rl Page:00300 2 -----------------------t ------ - -- ------------- Amount included in Total Tender Price for Goods and Service Tax: (s 375-. e'zo• ) Am ount included in Total Tender Price for 100% Performance Bond and 100% Materials Payment Bond for the General Contractor. (s 9500, coo ) — 1 Amount included in Total Tender Price for 50% Performance Bond and 50% Materials Payment Bond for the Mechanical Prime Contractor. 00 . 0 y ) Amount included in Total Tender Price for 50% Performance Bond and 50% Materials Payment Bond for the Electrical Prime Contractor. (s_ x,500. o o ) In submitting this Tender we recognize your right not to accept the lowest or any Tender. .1 AGREEMENT TO BOND ENCLOSED .1 An Agreement to Bond issued by Lnk)zo k ,-->U A-t, i LZ is enclosed. .2 EXECUTE CONTRACT .1 The undersigned agrees that his Tender is valid and subject to acceptance by the Owner for a period of sixty (60) days from the date set for the receipt of Tenders and that if notified of award of Contract he will: .1 Execute a Contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms and conditions noted in the Tender Documents. .2 Furnish to the Owner within 48 hours of date of notification of award of Contract a detailed schedule of work. .3 Schedule of values to be jointly agreed with the Owner for billing purposes. .2 The undersigned being a company duly incorporated under the laws of do hereby declare as follows: N 00300 - TENDER IMM gyp Page:00300-3 ��- ---------------- - -------------------------- -------------------- .2 EXECUTE CONTRACT .1 That the Shareholders or Partners of the Company submitting this Tender are the only persons interested in this Tender and no other person has any interest in this Tender. .2 That the Tender is made without any connection, knowledge, comparison of figures or arrangements with any other person or persons or firms making a Tender for the same work and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. .3 If notified of the acceptance of this Tender, we undertake to commence work on Site on date stipulated by the Owner and substantial performance no later than Nay 1, 1997. .4 Estimated number of man days of employment .3 SIGNATURES Signed and submitted for and on behalf of: Company: eO . L (Name) 13'1 �Q-L-i A (Street Address or Postal Box Number) (City, rovince and stal Code) Signature• Name and Title: !'�/��yK ADyIio D ic=til,, PqGs I T (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at rn-1'0 rJ this c>1 day of j��w� 1996. Seal: END OF SECTION D:#ON ON 0 - CONTRACT AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS S 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Page:00430-1 Appendix "C" PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON Iwo COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 1. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS . 1 We, _ �Qy , o 0A-) C 0 Tlk VeT�07il eC,) L i-YJ (Name of Company) .2 Submit with our Tender the following list of Subcontractors and Suppliers of materials which are included in our Tender. .3 We agree that changes to this list will not be allowed without the expressed written permission of the Consultant. .4 We submit that in proposing the undermentioned subcontractors and suppliers, we have consulted each and has ascertained to our complete satisfaction that those named are fully acquainted with the extent and nature of the Work and that they will execute their Work to conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Excavation and Backfill �,� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . go . . . . .Va��.�ra 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sodding and Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover�y{/()1�{r,.���[, I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 I/. \N�:s • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paving, Curbs and Sidewalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . �. �?.�!��. .E?�"�Curb �. milks . SE ON 00430 - LIST OF UBCONTRACTORS Page:00430-2 -- ------------------ ---- ,--------------------- LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS i S � .1 UPLLIERS (cont d.) Cast-In-Place Concrete ��µ,I/�l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (/• `.rel. . .�C.�• • . . . . . . . . . . Concrete Floor Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kn. ��i .■. . `• . • • •�T• . . . . . . . Precast Concrete Stairs Masonry !Y . . mason . . . . . . . . Glass Block �,vR maser►-, Brick Masonry /�JlJy//(}/�� r /� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i • i • i . . .l�: Y•�•i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Joists S+re� . Metal Deck -Reer/ess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Fabrications ,� �Quhun Jial ,(forks Handrails and Railings Finish Carpentry Colcc,i Cb�nP.�S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane Waterproofing tca. . . .nor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S$ bN 00430 - LIST OF,.-SUBCONTRACTORS ,, Page:00430-3 -- -----------------• ------------------------ .1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS i SUMMERS (contd.) Air Barrier System and Insulation P, /4009/7 r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Insulation _PeerkosS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firestop and Smokeseal . . 6600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j. . n. . T(f . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Insulation and Finish System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Ply Roof System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t'! n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefinished Metal Roofing peerless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Ply Built-Up Roofing System n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashing and Sheet Metal Aluminum Skylights Roof Hatches M42 'nmG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6666 . . . . . . . . . . Sealants Ana Hollow Metalwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .! . .fir. . . . . . . . . . . . . ' Wood Doors �m d � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S$ ON 00430 - LIST OF AUBCONTRACTORS --- Page:00430-4 -_ '----------------- ---------------------- --------------------- .1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS is SUPLLIERS (cont'd.) Rolling Shutters ./(My'_, C Q/N/P /}��•��N�/J //��/�{//�/ Aluminum Entrance Doors and Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � S.y. . . A luir.�.! !�: . . . . . . . . Automatic Entrance Doors F-anksy lurnr Aluminum Windows and Window Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Y • . . . . . . . • • �u�'11�t1.um: . . . . . . . . . Glass and Glazing n I Sv 0 0 f�(u rnr a. .". Gypsum Board System Lorcch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceramic Tile 1-ab Ocor/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rAcoustic Ceilings l�orcoh Acoustic Wall Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resilient Flooring Y Q 0 . 0 000000 Seamless Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tea n4!:` !.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painting f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .T. . . . . . !�. n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M Metal Toilet Partitions r� 0 0 . 0 0 . . . . . 0 0 0 . . . 0 0 0 . Cao;_.ci2.�a. .l . hc. 1 • SECTION 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Page:00430-5 -- ---------------- `--------------------------4 --------------------- ,1 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 4 SUPLLIERS (cont'd. Louvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. . Lockers Washroom Accessories Yxh yUQShru�m PM d u� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flagpole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Jam. . . �!A 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot Grilles Orowdey,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tackboards Change Room Tables � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .{Co. . . . . . a/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swimming Pool . . . . . .6ca jau lc d Saunas Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprinklers ,$ran ki r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical CQ Flo s �leGfri � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g (3N 00430 - LIST OFUBCONTRACTORS -------Paga_00430_6 -- ------------------ -------------------------- -- 2. SIGNATURES Signed and submitted for and on behalf of: Company: A�o I C 0 O fJS 1 P-QQ`T-)n40 (Name) 13 i D -Z..- ,4 (Street Address or Postal Box Number) (City, Province and Posta Code) Signature: Name and 0 Title: 1- -Q V (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at P,4H PZ/Uthis day of 7 O fy 1996. END OF SECTION p N DIV ON 0 - CONTRACT A= BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 SECTION 00310 - UNIT PRICES Page:00310-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendiy "D" COO PROJECT: PHASE 2 O COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 1. UNIT PRICES .1 We, .r1 Q J 1 On&-) C O&_-�S—, 9_uC 1 1()0 Co. )-T�3 . .2 Submit our Unit Prices in accordance with the following 'Units of Work' which will be used in cases where such unit: of work are applicable. .3 Unit Prices are indicated as either "DEDUCT" or "ADD" and include our expenses and profit, all removal costs as required, all Provincial Sales Tax and Good and Service Tax and represent the actual installed cost to the owner. .4 Adjustment to the contract price is based on the net quantity difference from the original quantity. .5 Our Unit Prices for the Units of Work are: .6 The amount between "Deduct" and "Add" shall be no greater than twenty (20) percent. .7 No Contractor or Sub-Contractor mark-up on deleted or credit items. Unit of Work DEDUCT l .1 Earth excavation by machine calculated in its natural bed, including disposal, per cu.m. b 12- .2 Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, a including disposal, per cu.a. •� gg ON-00310---UNIT-PCES-----_--..-------------"A-- -Page:00310-2 - ----- -------- .1 UNIT PRICES (cont'd.) 1 Unit of Work Dim= ARR .3 Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cu.m. lb- b7 2 O ' .4 Trenching up to 1200 mm deep / per cu.m. 16 f .5 Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cu.m. �3 • f / (o .6 Supply, placing and compacting of granular material Class "A" as specified in section 02222, ��pp calculated in place, per cu.m. o-1 .60 o2p- 0 0 .7 Supply, placing and compacting of granular material Class "B" as specified in Section 02222, y calculated in place, per cu.m. o`Z� Op 251 .8 Supply, placing and compacting of granular material Class "C" as specified in section 02222, calculated in place, per cu.m. O .9 Supply, placing and compacting of granular material Class "D" as specified in Section 02222, 1/ !_ / calculated in place, per cu.m. 110 .10 Fill, excavated material from site, compacted, calculated in place, Class "E", per cu.m. .11 Reinforcing steel for concrete floor beams and slabs, supply and setting, including detailing bending and cleaning, per ton 1500 / 900 j .12 Formwork, contact area, for concrete floor beams and slabs in place, including materials, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built-in items, release agent agent, stripping and removing,,inq per sq.m. f I ON 00310 - UNIT PC B3 . Page:00310-3 -- ------------------ •----------------------------------------------- .1 UNIT PRICES (cont'd. ) Unit of Work DZDUCT .13 Formwork, contact area for smooth finish walls, and piers in place including erection, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built- in items, release agent, stripping �� g Mand removing, per sq.m. . 14 Formwork, contact area for smooth finish columns in place including erection, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built-in items, release agent, stripping and removing per sq.m. qo /D . 15 Concrete Below Grade: r .1 Concrete backfill for skim slabs, 15 MPa, placed, rI� per cu.m. .2 Concrete foundations reinforced, 25 MPa, excluding reinforcement and formwork, per cu.m. .1! .3 Reinforcing steel, supply and setting per ton. ISO /80 O .4 Formwork, contact area per sq.m. 7�•?-6 �D• 69 . 16 Concrete Block: .1 Hollow Concrete Block work, laid including reinforcement per sq.m. of surface area - 100 mm wall 6(0.26 6,0 150 mm wall .6-0 7 ' 200 mm wall 250 mm wall F4 3b 10112-15 300 mm wall 2, M 480 mm wall /(z. 56 i I dd* ggON 00310 - UNIT PRCES Pa e:00310-4 _. - 9 ,1 UNIT PRICES (cont'd.) Unit of Work DEDUCT MR .2 Solid Concrete Block work, laid including reinforcement per sq.m. of surface area - 100 mm wall 50 / 150 mm wall 200 mm wall a2.5.0 Cf 91 250 mm wall 300 mm wall p 480 mm wall j .2 SIGNATURES Signed and Submitted for and on behalf of: Company: OU IC D 0 1900 t P ue-D 10 �D . LT . (Name) l3 i DL:-7-c-, A P,49y- 16Ly0 (Street Address or Postal Box Number) zA+I �-,-0 U &Y-11�-g 1 L(�T Sri (City, Province and Postal Code) Signature: Name and � Title: Pj o P9L5-SL)t::AJi- (Please print or type) Witness: Dated at C +Fl PLO this day of Uwe 1996. END OF SECTION r DIV SION 0 - CONTRACT AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS - PROJECT NO. S8 ION 00320 - ALTERNATIVE PRICES Page:00320-1 --------------------------------------------- 11 ---------------------- Appendix E" PROJECT: PHASE 2 COURTICE COMMUNITY COMPLEX COURTICE ROAD COURTICE , ONTARIO PROJECT NO. : 94027-24 TO: OFFICE OF THE CLERK THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT 40 TEMPERANCE STREET BOWMANVILLE , ONTARIO L1C 3A6 1. ALTERNATIVE PRICES . 1 We, A0ViC OA-) BOAS—r2Ua -,--)d2) (Name of Company) .2 Submit the following Alternative Prices, excluding G.S.T. DEDUCT AM.1 The net difference in cost of providing all labour and materials required to provide and install Solid Core Phoenolic Toilet Partitions Type 130-TS by ' Watrous Sales Inc. , or approved alternate, in lieu of Metal Toilet Partitions as specified in Section 10160. $ $ 3 dC7 .2 The net difference in cost of providing all labour and materials required to provide and install Coin Operated Lockers compression to later instructions, in lieu of Lockers as specified in Section 10500. $ $ ( ©� SION-00320------_ ALTERNATIVE-PRICES--------- __------- ------ Page_00320-2-------A--%------2. SIGNATURES Signed and submitted for and on behalf of: Company: A Q V 10 O 0 o U 'L 17 0A) • [,1� (Name) ,j 9 1 DLL A ?A-9-►c C-U (Street Address or Postal Number) P ;-Z3�iy 0 &3-7" . I b-r 6 (City, Province and Postal Code) Signature: Name and Title: (Please Print or Type) Witness: Dated at D(U this day of 7:S-U Ili L 1996. END OF SECTION X179 • F S ONTARIO ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTS � s,sro 6(y(f o �' cro(s r,ssos� ONTARIO GENERAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES CONCERNING SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS AND COMPLETION TAKE-OVER OF PROJECTS Copyright —must not he copied in whole or in part without i+-rhten permission from OAA/OGCA Document No. 100 both the OA and the OGC_A November 1983 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION AND EXPLANATORY NOTES Page 1 Stage 1 Documentation Procedures Page 2 Stage 2 Contractor's Inspection for Substantial Performance Page 2 Stage 3 Contractor's Application for Certificate of Substantial Performance Page 2 &3 Stage 4 Architect's Certificate of Substantial Performance Page 3 Stage 5 Architect's Certificate for Payment of Basic Holdback Monies Page 3 Stage 6 Inspection and Statement of Completion Page 3& 4 Stage 7 Architect's Certificate for Payment of Monies for Holdback for Finishing Work Page 4 Stage 8 Architect's Final Certificate for Payment Page 4 Stage 9 Guarantee Period(s) Page 4 Appendix A Certificate of Substantial Performance Page 5 Appendix B Time Chart for Certificate of Substantial Performance Page 6 Appendix C Time Chart for Date of Completion Page 7 Enquiries should be directed to: Ontario Association of Architects Ontario General Contractors Association 111 Moatfield Drive 6299 Airport Road,Suite 703 Don Mills, Ontario M313 K6 Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1N3 (416)449-6898 (416) 671-3969 RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES CONCERNING SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS AND COMPLETION TAKE-OVER OF PROJECTS Short This Document may be referred to as "OAA/OGCA TAKE-OVER PROCEDURES" Title: INTRODUCTION (d) The definition of the term "substantial per- The purpose of this document is to recommend formance" appears in subsection (1) of Section standard procedures to facilitate the closing stages 2 of C.L.A., 1983*, which reads as follows: of a construction contract and the take-over of the 11(1) For the purposes of this Act, a contract is project by the owner from the contractor. substantially performed, These procedures have been prepared jointly by the (a) when the improvement to be made Ontario Association of Architects and the Ontario under that contract or a substantial General Contractors Association and have been part thereof is ready for use or is approved by their governing bodies. These Associa- being used for the purposes intended; tions recommend the use of these procedures by and their respective members and owner/clients. (b) when the improvement to be made The Associations also recommend that these pro- under that contract is capable of cedures form a part of the contract documents from completion or, where there is a the outset by reference to Document No. 100. known defect, correction, at a cost Where a contract is in progress which does not pro- of not more than, vide such procedures, the Associations recommend (i) 3 per cent of the first $500,000 that the contract be amended by agreement between of the contract price, the contracting parties to include these procedures (ii) 2 per cent of the next $500,000 to facilitate the orderly take-over of the project in of the contract price, and the interests of the owner, the architect and the contractor. (iii) 1 per cent of the balance of the contract price." EXPLANATORY NOTES (e) Attention is drawn to subsection (2) of Section (a) The procedures outlined herein have been 2 of C.L.A., 1983* which reads as follows: . prepared in relations to The Construction Lien "(2) For the purposes of this Act, where the Act , 1983, hereinafter referred to as C.L.A., 1983*, and apply to all contracts entered into improvement or a substantial part thereof is ready for use or is being used for the on or after April 2, 1983, and to the sub- purposes intended and the remainder of contracts arising under these contracts. Docu- the improvement cannot be completed ment 100, dated August 1981, still applies to expeditiously for reasons beyond the those contracts entered into prior to April 2, control of the contractor or, where the 1983. These procedures are therefore primarily owner and the contractor agree not to applicable to lienable projects but they may be readily adapted for use in relation to non- complete the improvement expeditiously, lienable projects. the price of the services or materials remaining to be supplied and required to (b) The meaning of the term "substantial perfor- complete the improvement shall he mance" and "completed" as used in these deducted from the contract price in procedures is as defined in C.L.A., 1983*—see determining substantial performance." extracts in Notes (d), (e) and (f) below. (f) The definition of the term "completed" ap- (c) By reference to C.L.A., 1983*,Article A-4 of the pears in subsection (3) of Section 2 of C.L.A., Agreement in The Stipulated Price Contract 1983*, which reads as follows: between Owner and Contractor (Standard (3) For the purposes of this Act, a contract Construction Document CCDC 2 Dated 1982) shall be deemed to be completed and is amended in accordance with the provisions of C.L.A.. 1983'. This would require the owner services or materials shall he deemed tc be last supplied to the improvement when to release the basic holdback after expiry of the the price of completion, correction of a 45 day period which commences on the day known defect or last supply is not more following the date of publication of the certi- than the lesser of, ficate of substantial performance, and to re- (a) 1 per cent of the contract price, and lease the holdback for finishing work after the expiry of the 45 day period which commences (b) $1,000." on the day following the date of completion. '(All references are to the Consrrucrron Lien Act, 7583, Chain%'r 6- Statutes of Ontario 7983, rhi� Act wds proc(aitw,d as cf G'ause(c)!ev,sed Octohei 1 1997 April 2, 1983) 1 STAG cation to the architect for a Certificate of Sub- DOC ENTATION PROCEDURES stantial Performance. 1.1 The contractor, as soon as possible after award of the contract, shall itemize in the form of 3.2 This application shall include: two (2) lists, all documentation as required by (a) A statement to the owner through the • the contract. architect to the effect that: (a) The first list shall itemize all operating (1) the contract is substantially per- instructions, maintenance manuals, spare formed, and parts and similar data which are required at the time of substantial performance in (2) the performance of the balance of the contract is in process and com- order to allow the owner to properly operate the premises. pletion is scheduled for the day of . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . Where (b) The second list shall itemize all data, the balance of the contract, or a part operating instructions, maintenance or parts thereof, cannot be perform- manuals, record drawings, spare parts, ed forthwith, but must be deferred warranties and the balance of the docu- for reasons beyond the control of mentation as applicable to the project and the contractor, the contractor's as required by the contract which will statement shall contain a completion later be required to be submitted and date for each phase of the balance approved by the architect before lie will of the contract. issue his final certificate for payment. (b) An invoice showing the amount of basic 1.2 The contractor shall transmit copies of the holdback monies due for release and above-mentioned two lists to the architect for payment following the issue of the review and approval. Certificate of Substantial Performance. NOTE: A Statutory Declaration and 1.3 Within 14 days of their receipt, the architect Workers' Compensation Board Letter of shall review the said lists and notify the con- Good Standing are required before the tractor of his approval of them, with or with- architect will issue his certificate for out changes; assembly by the contractor of the payment covering the release of lien items on the lists shall then commence. holdback. (c) The submission of operating instructions, STAGE 2 maintenance manuals, spare parts, and CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION FOR similar data which are required by the SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE owner in order to be able to properly 2.1 The contractor shall determine when the pro- operate the premises. (Refer to 1.1 (a)) ject meets the requirements of substantial (d) A statement of completion with the cost performance, as defined above, and shall values of: undertake an inspection at the earliest oppor (i) Work to be completed including tunity giving written notice of this to the unsatisfactory work; architect for information only. (ii) Outstanding items referred to in 2.2 The inspection team shall consist of: 3.2_ (c), (a) the contractor or his representative(s) (iii) Work which cannot be performed for reasons beyond the control of (b) such subcontractors or their representa- the contractor;and where applicable tives as may be required by the contractor_ (iv) Work which the owner and the 2.3 Upon completion of this inspection a list of all contractor agree not to complete it�ous!y. uncompleted and unsatisfactory work shall be ex;;ed prepared by the contractor and issued to those concerned, including the architect. 3.3 (a) Within 1L calendar days of the receipt of the contractor's application, the architect shall make his inspection and assessment STAGE 3 of the ,tvork, to establish the validity of CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR the application. The owner may and the CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL contractor shall take part in this inspection. PERFORMANCE 3.1 When the contractor has carved out the steps in Stage 2, lie shall then make a written applt- 2 (b) Within 7 calendar days of his inspection, STAGE 5 the architect shall notify the contractor of ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT his approval of the contractor's applica- OF BASIC HOLDBACK MONIES tion. In the event that the architect does 5.1 The architect shall prepare the certificate for ® not deem the contract to be substantially payment of the basic holdback monies and performed, he shall so notify the con- promptly upon receipt of the documentation, tractor in writing within 7 calendar days as listed above, required for release of these of his inspection and his reasons for the monies, issue the certificate to the owner, with non-acceptance. a copy to the contractor. This certificate shall (c) The contractor shall complete the work be dated one day after the termination of the necessary to comply with the require- 45 day period, ments of substantial performance as here- inbefore defined, and resubmit his 5.2 Upon issuing the certificate for payment of the application, basic holdback monies, the architect shall advise the owner to satisfy himself no liens are 3.4 The contractor's application for a Certificate of registered and no notice of liens has been Substantial Performance and the release of received at the end of the 45 day period. basic holdback monies shall be separate from his applications for regular monthly payments; 5.3 The architect shall simultaneously notify the the latter shall continue to be made throughout owner that, provided no liens exist, payment the duration of the contract, of basic holdback monies is due and shall be payable ONE DAY after the termination of the STAGE 4 45 day period. ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE OF 5.4 The architect's certificate for payment of the SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE basic holdback monies shall be in the amount 4.1 When the architect approves the contractor's shown in the approved contractor's application application, the architect shall issue his Certi- for a Certificate of Substantial Performance. ficate of Substantial Performance to the owner and to the contractor on the prescribed form. 5.5 Before expiry of the 45 day period, all forms The Certificate shall establish the date of of insurances shall be reviewed jointly by the substantial performance of the contract as the owner and contractor to ensure adequate date when the architect satisfied himself as a coverage for all parties. result of the inspection and review of the documentation that substantial performance STAGE 6 was achieved. INSPECTION AND STATEMENT 4.2 The contractor shall publish a copy of the OF COMPLETION Certificate of Substantial Performance in a con- 6.1 When the contractor is satisfied that the work struction trade newspaper and shall provide is completed as defined in subsection (3) of the architect with proof of the date of publica- Section 2 of C.L.A., 1983*, and after making tion.The day following the date of publication his own inspection, he shall make a written shall be the date of commencement of the 45 request for an inspection by the architect, who day period prior to release of the basic hold- in turn shall notify the owner, This request back monies. shall include a statement showing the amount of monies for the holdback for finishing work 4.3 The contractor's and his subcontractors' due for release and payment upon expiry of forces shall continue to work towards com- the 45 day period from the date the contract pletion during the 45 day period mentioned is deemed to be completed. This inspection in Stage 4.2. shall be carried out within 10 calendar days of (NOTE: See Appendix A hereto for sample of the request and shall constitute the inspection the prescribed form of the Certificate of precedent to the issuance of a statement of Substantial Performance.) completion and issuance of a certificate for payment for work completed to the date of completion. (� *(All retereoces .ire io The Construction Lien Act, 7983, Chaprer 6 \� Statutes of Ontario, 1983.- this Act was Ar0cla-4r0 iii iorew as of April 2, 7963/ Clause 42 revised October 1. 1987 3 6.2 Of inal inspection team shall include: 7.4 The architect's certificate for payment of the (a) the architect and such consultants as he monies for the holdback for finishing work may require shall be in the amount shown in the approved (b) the contractor, and any subcontractors contractor's application for a statement of deemed necessary by the contractor completion. • (c) the owner, at his option STAGE 8 6.3 Within 7 calendar days of his inspection, the ARCHITECT'S FINAL PAYMENT CERTIFICATE architect shall notify the contractor of his 8.1 At the completion of Stage 6, when the archi- approval of the contractor's application. In the e tect is satisfied that all deficiencies, as vent that the architect does not deem the contract to be completed, he shall so notify established under Stage 6.3, have been cor- rected, the architect upon receipt of the the contractor in writing within 7 calendar contractor's invoice for final payment shall days of his inspection and his reasons for the issue to the owner, with a copy to the con- non-acceptance. tractor, a final certificate for payment for the remaining monies due to the contractor under 6.4 If there are any deficiencies determined by this the contract. inspection, they shall be listed by the architect and provided to the contractor. This list shall g,2 Final payment shall be made to the contractor be recognized as a final deficiency list for pur- as stipulated in the certificate, no later than poses of acceptance of the work under the five days after its issuance or as provided in the contract. contract. 6.5 Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon between the architect STAGE 9 and the contractor, unless a specific date is GUARANTEE PERIOD(S) required by the contract, and a reinspection by the architect shall be called for by the 9.1 The guarantee period(s) for the project shall contractor following his own inspection to take commence at the date of substantial perfor- place within 7 calendar days from the date of mance of the total contract. the request. 9.2 The owner shall give prompt notice in writing to the contractor and architect of any defects STAGE 7 (as defined by the contract) noted during the ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR guarantee period(s). PAYMENT OF MONIES FOR HOLDBACK FOR FINISHING WORK 9.3 Prior to the completion of the warranty period, 7.1 The architect shall prepare the certificate for the architect will review any defects or de- ficiencies which have been observed by the payment of the monies for the holdback for owner during that period and will notify the finishing work. This certificate shall be dated contractor of those items requiring attention one day after termination of the 45 day period commencing on the day following the date the by the contractor to complete the terms of contract is deemed to be completed. the contract. 7.2 Upon issuing the certificate for payment of monies for the holdback for finishing work, the architect shall advise the owner to satisfy himself no liens are registered and no notice of liens has been received at the end of the 45 day period. 7.3 The architect shall simultaneously notify the owner that, provided no liens exist, payment of the monies for the holdback for finishing work is due and shall be payable one day after ter- mination of the 45 day period. Clause ?_i revised 00Ober t 7987 4 6.2 final inspection team shall include: 7.4 The architect's certificate for payment of the (a) the architect and such consultants as he monies for the holdback for finishing work may require shall be in the amount shown in the approved (b) the contractor, and any subcontractors contractor's application for a statement of deemed necessary by the contractor completion. • (c) the owner, at his option STAGE 8 6.3 Within 7 calendar days of his inspection, the ARCHITECT'S FINAL PAYMENT CERTIFICATE architect shall notify the contractor of his 8.1 At the completion of Stage 6, when the archi- approval of the contractor's application. In the e test is satisfied that all deficiencies, as vent that the architect does not deem the contract to be completed, he shall so notify established under Stage 6.3, have been cor- rected, the architect upon receipt of the the contractor in writing within 7 calendar days of his inspection and his reasons for the contractors invoice for final payment shall non-acceptance. issue to the owner, with a copy to the con- tractor, a final certificate for payment for the 6.4 If there are any deficiencies determined by this remaining monies due to the contractor under the contract. inspection, they shall be listed by the architect and provided to the contractor. This list shall 8,2 Final payment shall be made to the contractor be recognized as a final deficiency list for pur- as stipulated in the certificate, no later than poses of acceptance of the work under the five days after its issuance or as provided in the contract. contract. 6.5 Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon between the architect STAGE 9 and the contractor, unless a specific date is GUARANTEE PERIOD(S) required by the contract, and a reinspection by the architect shall be called for by the 9.1 The guarantee period(s) for the project shall contractor following his own inspection to take commence at the date of substantial perfor- place within 7 calendar days from the date of mance of the total contract. the request. 9.2 The owner shall give prompt notice in writing to the contractor and architect of any defects STAGE 7 (as defined by the contract) noted during the ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR guarantee period(s). PAYMENT OF MONIES FOR HOLDBACK FOR FINISHING WORK 9.3 Prior to the completion of the warranty period, 7.1 The architect shall prepare the certificate for the architect will review any defects or de- ficiencies which have been observed by the payment of the monies for the holdback for owner during that period and will notify the finishing work. This certificate shall be dated contractor of those items requiring attention one day after termination of the 45 day period commencing on the day following the date the by the contractor to complete the terms of contract is deemed to be completed. the contract. 7.2 Upon issuing the certificate for payment of monies for the holdback for finishing work, the architect shall advise the owner to satisfy himself no liens are registered and no notice of liens has been received at the end of the 45 day period. 7.3 The architect shall simultaneously notify the owner that, provided no liens exist, payment of the monies for the holdback for finishing work is due and shall be payable one day after ter- mination of the 45 day period. Clause 7; revised�A oi,c, 4 APPENDIX A Form 6 Construction Lien Act, 1983 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT UNDER SECTION 32 OF.THE ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Country;District or Regional Municipality;City or Borough of Municiplaity of met roplitan Toronto in which premises are situated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Street address and city,town,etc.,or,if there is no street address,the location of the premises) This is to certify that the contract for the following improvement: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (short description of the improvement) to the above premises was substantially performed on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (date substantially performed) Date certificate signed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (payment certifier where there is one) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . �i (owner and contractor,where there is no payment certifier) Nameof Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressof service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name of contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name of payment certifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (where applicable) Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Use A or B whichever is appropriate) A. Identification of premises for preservation of liens: (where liens a'tta'ch to premises, reference to/o*t and plan o-r instrument registration number/ B. Office to which claim for lien and affidavit must be given to preserve lien: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (where liens do not attach to premises) (This is a sample of the Certificate of Substantial Performance,referred to as Appendix "A"in Stage 4 of the"OAA/OGCA Take-Over Pro- cedures,Document No. 100) 5 t portion of work for which portion of work for which lien may be preserved under lien may be preserved under basic holdback holdback for finishing work • N CLA CLA CLA reasonable : 3 max.7 max.7 45 day lien period time ; o days days for basic holdback • • N if no publication, lien period • CCDC : 'c c CCDC expires 45 days from date max.10 �; ;� ao�,max. 7 c contract is abandoned or da s • o days • deemed to be completed • • Y a after ------------------:------ c o inspec• 0 3 tion • TIME W: ; LINE • • Q0 o • M• -Z • We M V • • _ ; (D LL• O. • W• 0. C • UJ• O O a• O O U; V Q • 3 . L° a; 3 c 0 C F-• a .. _ m •� W ° 0 Q0 0 ; -V d 0 M 0 OO v O •. LL cn • a M d > 0 O •� M � ; W ai c N: N = � V y 0 • Y C +•' ` c .O LL • V `• 0 M .= j O W • Q V N O W • L = O v O aiG E CL .0 y E' • � ~' v 3 7 O `er° W ;O O CL 7 Q • c0 .. v M .� to .c • M O a 0 ,.r J • 2 • APPENDIX B TIME CHART FOR CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE pul LiUA1 VI VYVI n ivj ■rj„v66 lien may be preserved under maximum $1,000 or 1% of holdback for finishing work contract amount to be completed N : 3 CCDC CCDC max.10 max.7 : 45 day lien period for U) days days ; holdback for finishing work • W • � � after • +, O inspection i O" • • • V� i i • E • 00 3 ; TIME w • . LINE Z • • Q . • Q . • • LL • 00 i "' ► �C i ` + LL 9 0 go�• "' y 0 M m Q•tn a� +. Q• �c0, G> �O, _ - a U O a.i O i C 0 p i CC O >, Zi Q i C - '0 J Q • V O•X O O M V �O Zi O E w 0 *0 �U a d v v v 0 a�. v 0 � Q vaw .n o*.' : m• O O • � 0 p • O V Ni c 3 0 U + i0 ILL O O Z ci= C p �O Oi V Q• O W m o O d 0 .= O O.0 . V V .. ` W i - E E C> w 0.4 Z i +% a Q i .a M o U) Q i R N w:Z CL.0 0 X TIME CHART FOR DATE OF COMPLETION APPENDIX C s � � MIA11 a eI. ■ I ... COURTICE COMMUNITY CENTRE - PRELIMINARY Task Name Start End Jul 28 104 Au J11 iAu 18 Au --- - 1996 -_ ----- -- c'CGNSTRUCTION RE4UIRE0: �3S 90 C Ju X198 " . 9--i �O Aug/25 Sep Sep108,SepJ15 Sep122 Sep293rtM�1 0 27 NovJ03 Nov 110 Nov/t7 Nov/24 DeU01 Dec S Ma 164-47 — ----- 2 Mobi6zatlon 17.04 d Jul I30198' Au 18!98 j ! 3 Hardware Schedule 6.03 d Au /11196 Au 18!98 4 Mason Foundadone 6.03d Au lSWo: 5196 r i -Founds or Work -- —_ 12.134d AugJ18198 Sep101J98 a Masonry-Load Bearing 7 Mechan cal 219.48 d Au 118196 Ma 104197 - - -. - -- 8 lectrcal 219 48 d Au M8196 Ma 104/67 5 Hollow Metal Frames 12.04 d Sep-M/96 Se 15198 - 10 Sheet Membrane Waterproofin4 r 12.04 d Se 1188 S 15P98 11 .SvAmmin Pool Structure 86,15 d Se 01!98 Nov/17198 12 _Candace i2 n9 201.44 d So 196 Ma !04/97 I 13 Structuraf Steel I 36.09 d Se 5198 Oct127/98 74 Masonry-Exterior Mort _ _ 38.09 d Se 29!98 Nov110196 I 15 Curbs&S Wo klewalks 24.06 d OcM08J98 Ncv103198 16 Concrete Slab on Grade i 12.04 d QW93J98 Oct/27M 17 Roadways,Parking,Grading 38.09 d QclEPA198 Ded01r96 16 Metal Deck 12-04 d 8Q27J96 Nov/10196 19 Exterior insulation System 30.08 d Nov103198 DecJ08198 20 Metal Stud Systems- _- 42.10 d Ncv103196 Decf22198 _ 21 Roofing 24.06 d NoW10 8 DecCW6 I i '+ 22 Masonry-Non-Bearing 24.06 d NoWOM Dac+DM I 23 Sheet Metal Roofing&Siding 12.04 d NovM7l98 Decl01J� i 24 Hollow Metal Doors --- 12.04 d NovM7196 Dec101196 i 25 Exterior Hardware ---- ---12.04 d NoWI7196 0ed01198 j 28 Aluminum Doors&Windows 24.08 d Nov24198 Ded22l98 i 37 Drywall 33.09 dl Dsc22198 FeINO?197 28 Misc.Fabrications&Metal Stairs 41111 di JarU12197 Mar/e9197 29 Ceramic The 80.14 di JanM9197 Mar/W/97 30 SMmming Pool-Finishes&Commisslord 90.20 d: JorY19197 /04197 ! 31 Painting&Special Coaft 84.19 d 'ant28f97 7 32 Miso.Spedoltles 72.18 d Feh109187 N4197. 33 Millwork 38.09 di Marf1SS7 402 7197: 34 Resilient&Carpet Floothp 42.10 di Marf1SQ7 MayM"7 I i 35,CASH ALLOWANCES: 236.50 d; JuU30196 WOW i Printed:Juu25[96 Milestone Summary o>wM agge1 THIS SC�ULE IS BASED ON OUR BEST POSSIBLE ESTI2tM WITH!DDT SURrUDE/SUPPLIES DIPUT Fined AQUICON CONSTRUCTION CO.LTD ay--- i i EEDECanadian construction documents committee The Canadian Construction Documents Committee is a joint committee composed of representatives appointed by: The Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada The Canadian Construction Association The Canadian Council of Professional Engineers The Committee of Canadian Architectural Councils Construction Specifications Canada Committee policy and procedures are directed and approved by the constituent organizations. This document has been endorsed by each of the above organizations. Enquiries should be directed to: The Secretary, Canadian Construction Documents Committee, 85 Albert Street Ottawa, Ontario, Canada KIP 6A4